COULTER® EPICS® XL™ Flow Cytometer

COULTER® EPICS® XL-MCL™ Flow Cytometer

Service Manual

. .

Coulter
Epics XL • MCL

PN 4237029G (July 2005)

Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Fullerton, CA 92835
 WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS

Beckman Coulter, Inc. makes no representation that, upon furnishing this service manual, the holder of the manual will have
the necessary technical capabilities and know-how to properly troubleshoot and repair any of the equipment specified in the
manual. Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability whatsoever, including consequential and incidental damages, resulting
from improper operation of Beckman Coulter instruments after maintenance of Beckman Coulter instruments has been
performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc. Furthermore, Beckman Coulter, Inc. assumes no liability
whatsoever for any personal injury or property damage resulting from maintenance and/or repair of Beckman Coulter
instruments performed by persons not employed by Beckman Coulter, Inc.

READ ALL PRODUCT MANUALS AND CONSULT WITH BECKMAN COULTER-TRAINED PERSONNEL BEFORE ATTEMPTING
TO OPERATE INSTRUMENT.

HAZARDS AND OPERATIONAL PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and IMPORTANTS alert you as follows:
WARNING - Can cause injury.
CAUTION - Can cause damage to the instrument.
IMPORTANT - Can cause misleading results.

Beckman Coulter, Inc. urges its customers to comply with all national health and safety standards such as the use of barrier
protection. This may include, but it is not limited to, protective eyewear, gloves, and suitable laboratory attire when
operating or maintaining this or any other automated laboratory analyzer.

"This Service Manual contains confidential information of Beckman Coulter, Inc. and its receipt or possession does not
convey any rights to reproduce, disclose its contents, or to manufacture, use, or sell anything it may describe.
Reproduction, disclosure, or use without specific written authorization of Beckman Coulter, Inc. is strictly forbidden."

Copyright © Beckman Coulter, Inc. 1993 - 2005

All rights reserved.
 REVISION STATUS

Initial Issue, 7/93

Software Version 1.0.

Revision B, 6/94
Software Version 1.5.
Added fluidic schematics, electronic block diagrams, and procedures, and updated parts for MCL. Pages
changed or added: i, iii to vii, 1-1, 2-6 to 2-19, 4-14 to 4-35, 5-1, 5,7, 5-8, 8-1 to 8-6, 8-11 to 8-16.

Revision C, 10/94
Software Version 1.5.
Corrected text on pages 4-15, 4-21 and 4.22. Updated the PMI procedure on pages 5-7 and 5-8. Added to
and corrected the parts list, pages 8-1 to 8-24. Updated Figures 2.9 and 2.10.

Revision D, 3/98
Released by CN 306660-0561
Software Version 2.1.
Complete revision to update manual to software version 2.1 and reformat manual to new numbering
system and style.

Revision E, 9/00
Released by CN 312810-0012
Software Versions: System II version 3.0
EXPO32 version 1.0
EXPO32ADC version 1.1
Revision of Parts List and IPL based on new logos, bezels, covers, and panels. Check digits for all part
numbers were deleted. Updated illustrations for title page and cytometer in Figure 8.2-6.

Revision F, 10/2002
Released by CN 306660-0797
Software Versions:
SYSTEM II™ version 3.0
Prefinal version F
EXPO32™ ADC version 1.1
Complete revision that includes information released by Service Memos 1664, 1722, 1776, 1982, 3045,
3061, 3066, 3067, 3095, 3131 and Technical Updates TU2000M027 and TU2000M084.

Revision G, 07/2005
Released by CN 306660-0895
Software Versions:
SYSTEM II™ version 3.0
Prefinal version F
EXPO32™ ADC Cytometer version 1.1

Complete revision that includes information released by Mod 6091, 6245, and 6345; Service Memo
3175; Technical Updates TU2003M033 and TU2003M171; and FYI2004M038.

This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent software version affects the
information in this document, the changes will be included on minor revision change pages or summarized on a Notice of
Information Update form and will be released by service memo.

PN 4237029G iii
REVISION STATUS

This revision also includes information and procedures for the Universal Power Supply (UPS) that
prompted the addition of several new sections and changes to many others, such as the instrument
installation procedures.
r Information concerning a specific Power Supply module is presented under its own heading. For
example:
t In Chapter 2, Instrument Description, there are two sections - Heading 2.3,
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY and Heading 2.4, UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY.
t Chapter 3 contains installation instructions for a system with a Universal Power Supply;
Appendix G, installation instructions for a system with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Each
instrument installation procedure contains ten sections in the following sequence:
1) Pre-Site Inspection
2) Preinstallation Checks
3) Cytometer Installation
4) Power Supply Installation
5) Workstation Installation
6) Cable Connections
7) Tubing Connections
8) Software Installation
9) Operational Checks
10) Installation Summary
Note: The installation summary for each set of procedures is available for use by an
experienced installer. Use Heading 3.10, INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL
with Universal Power Supply) or Heading G.10, INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or
XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) only if you are thoroughly familiar with the
detailed installation instructions.
t In Appendix A, Quick Reference Information, there are also two sections - Heading A.6,
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS and
Heading A.7, UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.
r Chapter 8, PARTS LISTS is restructured. See the Instructions for Use heading for details.

Changes that are part of the most recent revision are indicated in the printed copy by a bar in the margin
of the amended page.

This document applies to the latest software listed and higher versions. When a subsequent software version affects the
information in this document, the changes will be included on minor revision change pages or summarized on a Notice of
Information Update form and will be released by service memo.

iv PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS

REVISION STATUS, iii

1 INTRODUCTION, 1.1-1

1.1 MANUAL DESCRIPTION, 1.1-1

Scope, 1.1-1
Customer Manuals, 1.1-1
Notification of Updates, 1.1-1
Intended Audience, 1.1-1
Organization, 1.1-2
Numbering Format, 1.1-4
Special Headings, 1.1-4
WARNING, 1.1-4
CAUTION, 1.1-4
IMPORTANT, 1.1-4
ATTENTION, 1.1-4
Note, 1.1-5
Conventions, 1.1-5
Power Supply Module Terminology, 1.1-5
Reagent Terminology, 1.1-5
Cytometer Configurations, 1.1-5
Workstation Configurations, 1.1-5
Screens, Screen Messages, and Menu Options, 1.1-6
About the HTML Version of this Manual, 1.1-7

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, 1.2-1

Special, 1.2-1
Electronic, 1.2-1
Biological, 1.2-2
Laser, 1.2-2
Laser Beam Hazards, 1.2-2
Radiation Hazards, 1.2-3
Laser Warning Labels and Locations on Argon Laser System and Bar-Code
Scanner, 1.2-4
Laser Warning Labels and Locations on the Cytometer, 1.2-4
Laser Warning Labels and Locations on Argon Laser System and Bar-Code
Scanner, 1.2-5
Laser Warning Labels and Locations on the Cytometer, 1.2-7
Troubleshooting, 1.2-9

2 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, 2.1-1

2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW, 2.1-1

Function, 2.1-1
Standard XL System, 2.1-1
Options, 2.1-2
MCL Sample Handling Option, 2.1-2
Four Fluorescence Sensor Configuration Option, 2.1-2
Networking Option, 2.1-3
Other Options, 2.1-3

PN 4237029G v
CONTENTS

Main Components, 2.1-3

Cytometer, 2.1-3
Power Supply Module, 2.1-3
Interchangeability, 2.1-5
Workstation, 2.1-5
Diagnostic Products, 2.1-5
Physical Specifications, 2.1-5
Performance Specifications and Characteristics, 2.1-5
Leakage Current Specifications, 2.1-6

2.2 CYTOMETER, 2.2-1

Optics, 2.2-2
Laser, 2.2-2
Flow Cell, 2.2-2
Pinhole Assembly, 2.2-4
Forward Scatter (FS) Detector, 2.2-4
Laser Intersection, 2.2-4
Optical Filters, 2.2-4
Standard Three Fluorescence Sensor Configuration, 2.2-4
Optional Four Fluorescence Sensor Configuration, 2.2-6
Nomenclature, 2.2-7
Signal Processing, 2.2-7
Data Acquisition Card Cage, 2.2-8
Analyzer Backplane Functions, 2.2-9
Amplifier / Signal Conditioner Card, 2.2-9
Trans Data Acquisition Card, 2.2-11
System Interface Card, 2.2-12
Cyto Transputer Card, 2.2-13
MCL Interface Card, 2.2-14
Optical Transprocessor Extended Memory Cards, 2.2-15
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card, 2.2-15
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card, 2.2-15
Transputers, 2.2-15
Other Circuit Cards Located inside the Cytometer, 2.2-16
PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card, 2.2-16
Fiber Optic Interface Card, 2.2-16
Sensor Card, 2.2-16
Solenoid Power Distribution Card, 2.2-16
MCL Option - Theory of Operation, 2.2-17

2.3 VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY, 2.3-1

Overview, 2.3-1
Main Components, 2.3-2
Front of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 2.3-2
Additional Information, 2.3-2
Back of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 2.3-3
Additional Information, 2.3-3
Interior Compartments, 2.3-3

vi PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Right-Side Compartment, 2.3-4

Interlock Bypass Switch, 2.3-4
Linear Power Supply, 2.3-5
Cooling Fans, 2.3-5
Additional Information, 2.3-5
Left-Side Compartment, 2.3-6
Additional Information, 2.3-7
Power Distribution, 2.3-7
Power Module Control II Card, 2.3-8
Interface Cable, 2.3-8
Changes Required for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), 2.3-10
Modifications, 2.3-10
How to Determine if an Instrument is an EMC Version or a Non-EMC
Version, 2.3-13
Voltage-Specific Power Supply - EMC Version Identifiers, 2.3-13
AUX POWER ON Indicator, 2.3-14
Compressor Indicator, 2.3-14
CYT12 Indicator, 2.3-14
MCL - EMC Version Identifiers, 2.3-15
Front Door - EMC Version Identifier, 2.3-16

2.4 UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY, 2.4-1

Overview, 2.4-1
New Features, 2.4-1
Main Components, 2.4-1
Front of the Universal Power Supply, 2.4-2
Modifications to the Upper Front Panel, 2.4-3
Main Circuit Breaker, 2.4-3
Breaker Card, 2.4-3
Label Placement, 2.4-4
Modifications to the Lower Front Panel, 2.4-4
Additional Information, 2.4-5
Back of the Universal Power Supply, 2.4-5
Rear Panel, 2.4-6
Modifications, 2.4-7
Additional Information, 2.4-8
Back Cover and Cable Cover, 2.4-8
Ventilation, 2.4-9
Additional Information, 2.4-10
Interior Compartments, 2.4-10
Top Compartment, 2.4-10
Modifications, 2.4-11
Voltage Selection, 2.4-11
Low Voltage Configurations - 100 Vac or 120 Vac Source Voltage, 2.4-15
High Voltage Configurations - 220 Vac or 230/240 Vac Source Voltage, 2.4-16
Circuit Breaker Usage, 2.4-16
Monitoring Supply Voltages, 2.4-18

PN 4237029G vii
CONTENTS

Right-Side Compartment, 2.4-20

Interlock Bypass Switch, 2.4-20
Linear Power Supply, 2.4-21
Cooling Fans, 2.4-21
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor Card, 2.4-21
Additional Information, 2.4-21
Left-Side Compartment, 2.4-22
Additional Information, 2.4-22
UPS Pneumatics Drawer, 2.4-23
Additional Information, 2.4-25
Power Control 3 Card, 2.4-25
Interface Cable, 2.4-25
Sound Reduction, 2.4-27
Universal Power Supply, 2.4-27
Cytometer, 2.4-28
Operational Temperatures, 2.4-29
Cooling the Argon Laser Power Supply, 2.4-29
Air Flow Inside the Universal Power Supply, 2.4-30
Pressure and Vacuum Distribution, 2.4-30
30-psi Pressure Distribution, 2.4-30
Sheath Pressure Distribution, 2.4-31
Sample Pressure Distribution, 2.4-31
Vacuum Distribution, 2.4-32
Power Distribution, 2.4-32
System Power, 2.4-32
Laser Power, 2.4-32
System Power Distribution - Standby Circuit, 2.4-32
Standby Circuit, 2.4-32
System Power Distribution - Power Usage, 2.4-36
Laser Power Distribution - Laser Start Up, 2.4-37

2.5 WORKSTATION, 2.5-1

Components, 2.5-1
Standard Configuration, 2.5-1
Component Layout on Tower Computers, 2.5-2
Options, 2.5-2

3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, 3.1-1

PART A: INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION (with Universal Power Supply)

3.1 PRE-SITE INSPECTION, 3.1-1

Space and Accessibility, 3.1-1
Power Requirements, 3.1-2
Optional Computer Peripherals, 3.1-3
Environment, 3.1-3
Unloading and Moving the Instrument, 3.1-3
Installation Assistance, 3.1-4
Inspection Report, 3.1-4

viii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

3.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECKS, 3.2-1

Pre-Site Inspection Compliance, 3.2-1
Education Center Training, 3.2-1
Condition of Cartons Received, 3.2-1
Supplies, 3.2-1
Optional Computer Peripherals, 3.2-1

3.3 CYTOMETER INSTALLATION, 3.3-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.3-1
Unpacking, 3.3-1
Installation, 3.3-2
Remove Covers to Provide Needed Access, 3.3-2
Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front, 3.3-7
Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Back (Behind the
Laser), 3.3-7
Prepare Components inside the Lower Pneumatics Drawer for
Operation, 3.3-10
Reinstall the MCL CPU Card (if removed earlier), 3.3-10
Prepare the Data Acquisition Card Cage for Operation, 3.3-10
Prepare Components inside the Upper Pneumatic Drawer for
Operation, 3.3-11
Prepare the Segmenting Valve for Operation, 3.3-12
Fill the Reagent Containers, 3.3-14
Fill the Sheath Container, 3.3-14
Fill the Cleaning Agent Container, 3.3-15

3.4 UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION, 3.4-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.4-1
Unpacking, 3.4-1
Installation, 3.4-1
Select Input Voltages, 3.4-3

3.5 WORKSTATION INSTALLATION, 3.5-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.5-1
Unpacking, 3.5-1
Mouse Connection, 3.5-2
Keyboard Connection, 3.5-2
Monitor Connections - Overview, 3.5-2
Monitor Connections: 17-inch Flat Panel Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
Monitor, 3.5-2
Connecting the Monitor Cables, 3.5-2
Connection to ac Power Source, 3.5-3
Printer Option, 3.5-3

3.6 CABLE CONNECTIONS, 3.6-1

Reference Illustration, 3.6-1
Laser Umbilical Cable, 3.6-2
Make Appropriate MCL Connections, 3.6-3
If this is an XL Flow Cytometer, 3.6-3
If this is an XL-MCL Flow Cytometer, 3.6-3

PN 4237029G ix
CONTENTS

Logic Cable, 3.6-3

Analog Cable, 3.6-4
Power Module Control Cable, 3.6-4
Fiber Optic Interface Cables, 3.6-4
CYT12 Cable, 3.6-5
Power Cords, 3.6-6

3.7 TUBING CONNECTIONS, 3.7-1

Connect the Waste Container, 3.7-1
Preparation, 3.7-1
Connect Tubings, 3.7-1

3.8 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION, 3.8-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.8-1
Instrument Startup, 3.8-1
Install SYSTEM II Software, 3.8-1

3.9 OPERATIONAL CHECKS, 3.9-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.9-1
Preliminary Checks, 3.9-1
Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter, 3.9-1
Power Supply Verification, 3.9-2
Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification, 3.9-2
Functional Verification, 3.9-3
Reinstall Cytometer Covers and Panels, 3.9-4
Reinstall Universal Power Supply Covers, 3.9-5
Wrap Up, 3.9-6
System Verification, 3.9-6

3.10 INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply), 3.10-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.10-1
Cytometer, 3.10-1
Unpacking, 3.10-1
Installation, 3.10-1
Universal Power Supply, 3.10-4
Unpacking, 3.10-4
Installation, 3.10-4
Select Input Voltages, 3.10-4
Workstation, 3.10-5
Unpacking, 3.10-5
Installation, 3.10-5
Cable Connections, 3.10-6
Tubing Connections, 3.10-7
Install SYSTEM II Software, 3.10-8
Operational Checks, 3.10-8
Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter, 3.10-9
Power Supply Verification, 3.10-9
Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification, 3.10-9
Functional Verification, 3.10-9
Wrap Up, 3.10-10

x PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

PART B: UPGRADES AND OPTIONS INSTALLATION

3.11 MCL UPGRADE, 3.11-1

Purpose, 3.11-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.11-1
Preparation, 3.11-1
Cytometer Upgrade, 3.11-1
Power Supply Module Upgrade, 3.11-3
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 3.11-3
Universal Power Supply, 3.11-3
Power Supply Voltage Verification and Adjustment, 3.11-3
MCL Alignment, 3.11-4
Operational Verification, 3.11-4
Reinstall Covers, 3.11-4
System Verification, 3.11-4

3.12 FOUR-COLOR PMT UPGRADE, 3.12-1

Purpose, 3.12-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.12-1
Preparation, 3.12-1
Hardware Installation, 3.12-1
Amp/Signal Conditioner Card Calibration, 3.12-3
PMT Operational Alignment, 3.12-3
Reinstall Covers, 3.12-3
System Verification, 3.12-3

3.13 FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE, 3.13-1

Purpose, 3.13-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.13-1
Preparation, 3.13-1
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or EXMEM II Card Retrieval and Installation, 3.13-1
Mouse Connection, 3.13-2
Keyboard Connection, 3.13-2
Monitor Connection (New or Existing), 3.13-2
Cable Connections, 3.13-3
Fiber Optic Interface Cables, 3.13-3
CYT12 Cable, 3.13-4
Power Cord, 3.13-5
Install SYSTEM II Software, 3.13-5
Install EXPO32™ Software Option, if applicable, 3.13-5
System Verification, 3.13-5

3.14 BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION, 3.14-1

Purpose, 3.14-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.14-1
Printer Setup, 3.14-1
Media Calibration, 3.14-3
XL-MCL Flow Cytometer Connection, 3.14-4
Printer Testing (through SYSTEM II Software), 3.14-4
Label Tear-Off Position Adjustment, 3.14-4

PN 4237029G xi
CONTENTS

Printer Thermal Head Adjustment, 3.14-5

Top-of-Label Position Adjustment, 3.14-5
Ribbon Replacement, 3.14-5

3.15 BAR-CODE HAND-HELD SCANNER OPTION, 3.15-1

Purpose, 3.15-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.15-1
Installation, 3.15-1
Verification, 3.15-2

3.16 SERIAL/PARALLEL ADAPTER INTERFACE CARD OPTION, 3.16-1

Purpose, 3.16-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.16-1
Preparation, 3.16-1
Installation, 3.16-1
Verification, 3.16-2

3.17 NETWORK SETUP USING MICROSOFT WINDOWS 95 OR 98, 3.17-1

Purpose, 3.17-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.17-1
Software Installation, 3.17-1
Cable Connections, 3.17-2
Set Up Hard Drives and Printers, 3.17-2
Define the Computer Name and Workgroup, 3.17-3
Establish Control, 3.17-3
Map a Network Shared Drive, if desired, 3.17-3

3.18 LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0, 3.18-1

Purpose, 3.18-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.18-1
Preparation, 3.18-1
Hardware Installation, 3.18-1
CD-ROM Usage in DOS, 3.18-1
Software Installation, Client Setup, 3.18-1
Software Installation, Server Setup, 3.18-5
Software and Hardware Validation, 3.18-5

3.19 LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 7.0, 3.19-1

Purpose, 3.19-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.19-1
LANtastic Client/Server Version for Windows™ 95 Installation, 3.19-1
LANtastic Client Version for MS-DOS Installation, 3.19-2
Sybase Client/Server SQL Software Option, 3.19-3

3.20 LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 6.0, 3.20-1

Purpose, 3.20-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.20-1
Installation, 3.20-1
Config.sys and startnet.bat File Editing, 3.20-2
LANtastic File Server Software Connection, 3.20-2
Sybase Client/Server SQL Software Option, 3.20-3

xii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

3.21 Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL SOFTWARE OPTION, 3.21-1

Purpose, 3.21-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.21-1
Preparation, 3.21-1
Software Installation, Client Setup, 3.21-1
Software Installation, Server Setup, 3.21-2
Software and Hardware Validation, 3.21-3

3.22 EXPO32™ SOFTWARE OPTIONS, 3.22-1

Purpose, 3.22-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 3.22-1
Preparation, 3.22-1
For EXPO32 ADC Installation Option, 3.22-1
For Printer Installation, 3.22-1
Software Installation, 3.22-1
Verification, 3.22-1

4 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, 4.1-1

4.1 GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT, 4.1-1

General Guidelines, 4.1-1
Safety Precautions, 4.1-1
Accessibility, 4.1-1
Laser Precautions, 4.1-1
Electronic Precautions, 4.1-1
Procedures, 4.1-3
Tools and Supplies, 4.1-3
Instrument Performance Verification, 4.1-3
Power Down / Power Up Using SYSTEM II™ Software, 4.1-4
Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software, 4.1-4
Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software), 4.1-4
Stage 2: Power Off the Workstation (system using SYSTEM II software), 4.1-4
Stage 3: System Power Down (system using SYSTEM II software), 4.1-4
Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software, 4.1-5
Stage 1: Restoring Power to the System (system using SYSTEM II
software), 4.1-5
Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using SYSTEM II
software), 4.1-5
Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using SYSTEM II
software), 4.1-6
Power Down / Power Up Using EXPO32™ ADC Software, 4.1-7
Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software, 4.1-7
Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC
software), 4.1-7
Stage 2: Power Off the Workstation (system using EXPO32 ADC
software), 4.1-7
Stage 3: System Power Down (system using EXPO32 ADC software), 4.1-7

PN 4237029G xiii
CONTENTS

Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software, 4.1-8

Stage 1: Restoring Power to the System (system using EXPO32 ADC
software), 4.1-8
Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using EXPO32 ADC
software), 4.1-8
Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using EXPO32 ADC
software), 4.1-8

4.2 PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION, 4.2-1

Purpose, 4.2-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.2-1
Preparation, 4.2-1
If Using SYSTEM II™ Software, 4.2-1
If Using EXPO32™ ADC Software, 4.2-2
Installation, 4.2-2
Operation, 4.2-3
Wrap Up, 4.2-3
If SYSTEM II is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System, 4.2-3
If EXPO32 ADC is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System, 4.2-4

4.3 ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System
with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply), 4.3-1
Purpose, 4.3-1
Tools/Supplied Needed, 4.3-1
Preparation, 4.3-1
Laser Power Supply, 4.3-2
Removal, 4.3-2
Installation, 4.3-2
Wrap Up, 4.3-3
Argon Laser Head, 4.3-4
Removal, 4.3-4
Installation in the Cytometer, 4.3-4
Installation at the Voltage-Specific power Supply, 4.3-4
Wrap Up, 4.3-5

4.4 ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System
with a Universal Power Supply), 4.4-1
Purpose, 4.4-1
Tools/Supplied Needed, 4.4-1
Preparation, 4.4-1
Laser Power Supply, 4.4-2
Removal, 4.4-2
Installation, 4.4-3
Wrap Up, 4.4-4
Argon Laser Head, 4.4-4
Removal, 4.4-4
Installation in the Cytometer, 4.4-5
Installation at the Universal Power Supply, 4.4-5
Wrap Up, 4.4-6

xiv PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

4.5 FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT, 4.5-1

Purpose, 4.5-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.5-1
Preparation, 4.5-1
Flow Cell Replacement, 4.5-2
Beamshaper Assembly Removal, Replacement, and Alignment, 4.5-3
Install Alignment Tools, 4.5-4
Alignment, 4.5-4
Reinstall Covers, 4.5-6
System Verification, 4.5-6

4.6 OPTICAL ALIGNMENT, 4.6-1

Purpose, 4.6-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.6-1
Preparation, 4.6-1
Laser Beam Steering, 4.6-1
Forward Scatter (FS) Mask Alignment, 4.6-2
How to Proceed, 4.6-4

4.7 SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION, 4.7-1

Purpose, 4.7-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.7-1
Preparation, 4.7-1
Preliminary Voltage Checks, 4.7-1
Calibration, 4.7-2
Operational Verification, 4.7-4
Establish Low Flow Rate Setting, 4.7-4
Verify All Flow Rates, 4.7-5
How to Proceed, 4.7-6
Reinstall Assemblies and Covers, 4.7-6
System Verification, 4.7-6

4.8 CARRYOVER TEST, 4.8-1

Purpose, 4.8-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.8-1
Preparation, 4.8-1
Procedure, 4.8-2
Using the Manual Sample Station, 4.8-2
Using the MCL Sample Station, 4.8-2

4.9 PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT, 4.9-1

Purpose, 4.9-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.9-1
Preparation, 4.9-1
Removal, 4.9-1
Installation, 4.9-3
Reinstall Covers, 4.9-5
System Verification, 4.9-5

PN 4237029G xv
CONTENTS

4.10 SHEATH PRESSURE/SAMPLE STATION VACUUM CALIBRATION, 4.10-1

Purpose, 4.10-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.10-1
Preparation, 4.10-1
Calibration, 4.10-1
Verification, 4.10-1
Reinstall Covers, 4.10-1
System Verification, 4.10-1

4.11 SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING, 4.11-1

Purpose, 4.11-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.11-1
Preparation, 4.11-1
Removal, 4.11-1
Front Segmenting Pad, 4.11-1
Middle Segmenting Pad, 4.11-3
Rear Segmenting Pad, 4.11-3
Clean the Shaft, 4.11-3
Installation, 4.11-4
Rear Segmenting Pad, 4.11-4
Middle Segmenting Pad, 4.11-4
Front Segmenting Pad, 4.11-4
Complete the Installation, 4.11-5
Reinstall Covers, 4.11-5
Verification, 4.11-5

4.12 MCL OPTION FIELD ADJUSTMENT, 4.12-1

Purpose, 4.12-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.12-1
Preparation, 4.12-1
MCL TERMINAL Program Setup, 4.12-1
Carousel Tube-Position Sensor Adjustment, 4.12-2
Finger Adjustment, 4.12-3
MCL Sample Probe Adjustment, 4.12-4
How to Proceed, 4.12-4

4.13 VORTEXER FOOT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT, 4.13-1

Purpose, 4.13-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.13-1
Preparation, 4.13-1
Removal, 4.13-1
Installation, 4.13-2
Reinstall Covers, 4.13-3
Verification, 4.13-3

4.14 TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR

CALIBRATION, 4.14-1
Purpose, 4.14-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.14-1

xvi PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Preparation, 4.14-1
If Replacing the Trans Data Acquisition Card, 4.14-1
If Calibrating Without Replacing the Trans Data Acquisition Card, 4.14-2
Access the Prefinal Menu, 4.14-2
Calibration, 4.14-2
Reinstall Cover, 4.14-4
Load the Customer’s Preferred Operating System, 4.14-4
System Verification, 4.14-4

4.15 AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR

CALIBRATION, 4.15-1
Purpose, 4.15-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.15-1
If Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner Card, 4.15-1
If Calibrating Without Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner Card, 4.15-2
Calibration, 4.15-2
Verify Acceptable Histograms, 4.15-4
Reinstall Cover, 4.15-6
System Verification, 4.15-6

4.16 PREPARING INSTRUMENT FOR SHIPMENT, 4.16-1

Purpose, 4.16-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.16-1
Procedure, 4.16-1

4.17 INSTRUMENT SHUTDOWN, 4.17-1

Purpose, 4.17-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.17-1
Procedure, 4.17-1

4.18 THREE-WIRE CIRCUIT ANALYZER TEST, 4.18-1

Purpose, 4.18-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.18-1
Procedure, 4.18-1
Reverse/Shorted Ground/Neutral Test, 4.18-2
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.18-2
Procedure, 4.18-2

4.19 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply), 4.19-1

Purpose, 4.19-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.19-1
Preparation, 4.19-1
Removal, 4.19-2
Replacement, 4.19-2

4.20 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Universal Power Supply), 4.20-1

Purpose, 4.20-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.20-1
Preparation, 4.20-1
Removal, 4.20-2
Replacement, 4.20-2

PN 4237029G xvii
CONTENTS

4.21 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT, 4.21-1

Purpose, 4.21-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.21-1
+24 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment, 4.21-1
Preparation, 4.21-1
+24 Vdc Verification, 4.21-2
+24 Vdc Adjustment, 4.21-3
+5 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment, 4.21-4
Preparation, 4.21-4
+5 Vdc Verification, 4.21-4
+5 Vdc Adjustment, 4.21-5
±15 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment, 4.21-5
Preparation, 4.21-5
+15 Vdc Verification, 4.21-5
-15 Vdc Verification, 4.21-6
+15 Vdc or -15 Vdc Adjustment, 4.21-6
MCL Voltage Verification and Adjustment, if applicable, 4.21-7
Preparation, 4.21-7
MCL Voltage Verification, 4.21-7
MCL Voltage Adjustment, 4.21-8

4.22 RE-IMAGING FlowCentre™ COMPUTERS, 4.22-1

Purpose, 4.22-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.22-1
Preparation, 4.22-1
Re-imaging a FlowCentre II Tower Computer, 4.22-1
Re-imaging a FlowCentre Desktop Computer without a Cache Controller
Card, 4.22-1
Re-imaging a FlowCentre Desktop Computer with a Cache Controller Card, 4.22-2

4.23 UNIVERSAL CD-ROM DRIVER SETUP, 4.23-1

Purpose, 4.23-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.23-1
Preparation, 4.23-1
Driver Installation, 4.23-1

4.24 BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING, 4.24-1

Purpose, 4.24-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.24-1
Preparation, 4.24-1
Computer Setup, 4.24-2
Custom Programming Sequence, 4.24-3
If You Want to Store this Custom Configuration (Optional), 4.24-4
If You Do Not Want to Store this Custom Configuration, 4.24-4
Reinstall Covers, 4.24-5
Verification, 4.24-5

xviii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

4.25 COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION, 4.25-1

Instructions for Use, 4.25-1
Exterior Cytometer Covers, Anchor Illustration for Locating Procedures, 4.25-2
Access Inside the Cytometer, Anchor Illustration for Locating Procedures, 4.25-4
Voltage-Specific Power Supply Covers, Anchor Illustration for Locating
Procedures, 4.25-5
Universal Power Supply Covers, Anchor Illustration for Locating
Procedures, 4.25-6

Procedure 1, 4.25-7
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Top Cover, 4.25-7
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-7
Removing the Cytometer Top Cover, 4.25-7
Cytometer Interlock Switch, 4.25-8
Reinstalling the Cytometer Top Cover, 4.25-8

Procedure 2, 4.25-9
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Right-Side Cover, 4.25-9
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-9
Removing the Cytometer Right-Side Cover, 4.25-9
Reinstalling the Cytometer Right-Side Cover, 4.25-10

Procedure 3, 4.25-11
How to Remove and Reinstall the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover), 4.25-11
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-11
Removing the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover), 4.25-11
Reinstalling the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover), 4.25-11

Procedure 4, 4.25-12
How to Properly Open and Close the Cytometer Reagent Drawer, 4.25-12
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-12
Opening the Reagent Drawer, 4.25-12
Closing the Reagent Drawer, 4.25-14

Procedure 5, 4.25-15
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Upper Rear Cover, 4.25-15
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-15
Removing the Cytometer Upper Rear Cover, 4.25-15
Reinstalling the Cytometer Upper Rear Cover, 4.25-16

Procedure 6, 4.25-17
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Lower Rear Cover, 4.25-17
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-17
Removing the Cytometer Lower Rear Cover, 4.25-17
Reinstalling the Cytometer Lower Rear Cover, 4.25-18

Procedure 7, 4.25-19
How to Remove and Reinstall the Manual Sample Station, Cytometer with MCL
Option, 4.25-19
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-19

PN 4237029G xix
CONTENTS

Removing the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer with the MCL Option
Installed, 4.25-19
Reinstalling the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer with the MCL Option
Installed, 4.25-21

Procedure 8, 4.25-22
How to Remove and Reinstall the Manual Sample Station, Cytometer without MCL
Option, 4.25-22
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-22
Removing the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer without the MCL
Option, 4.25-22
Reinstalling the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer without the MCL
Option, 4.25-24

Procedure 9, 4.25-25
How to Open and Close the MCL Door, 4.25-25
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-25
Opening the MCL Door, 4.25-25
MCL Interlock Switch, 4.25-25
Closing the MCL Door, 4.25-26

Procedure 10, 4.25-27

How to Unlatch and Relatch the MCL Covers, 4.25-27
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-27
Unlatching the MCL Covers, 4.25-27
Relatching the MCL Covers, 4.25-28

Procedure 11, 4.25-29

How to Remove and Reinstall MCL Covers, 4.25-29
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-29
Removing the MCL Covers, 4.25-29
Reinstalling the MCL Covers, 4.25-31

Procedure 12, 4.25-32

How to Remove and Reinstall the MCL Probe Housing, 4.25-32
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-32
Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover, 4.25-33
Reinstalling the MCL Probe Housing Cover, 4.25-35

Procedure 13, 4.25-36

How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Left-Side Cover
(Cytometer with MCL Option Installed), 4.25-36
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-36
Removing the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer with MCL Option
Installed), 4.25-36
Reinstalling the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer with MCL Option
Installed), 4.25-37

xx PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Procedure 14, 4.25-38

How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer without
MCL Option), 4.25-38
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-38
Removing the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer without MCL
Option), 4.25-38
Reinstalling the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer without MCL
Option), 4.25-39

Procedure 15, 4.25-40

How to Remove and Reinstall the Filter Shield, 4.25-40
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-40
Removing the Filter Shield, 4.25-40
Reinstalling the Filter Shield, 4.25-43

Procedure 16, 4.25-45

How to Remove and Reinstall the Data Acquisition Card Cage, 4.25-45
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-45
Removing the Data Acquisition Card Cage from the Cytometer Center
Cavity, 4.25-45
Reinstalling the Data Acquisition Card Cage Back in the Cytometer Center
Cavity, 4.25-47

Procedure 17, 4.25-48

How to Remove and Reinstall the Lower Pneumatics Drawer, 4.25-48
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-48
Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer on a Cytometer with the MCL
Option Installed, 4.25-48
Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer on a Cytometer without the MCL
Option, 4.25-51
Reinstalling the Lower Pneumatics Drawer, 4.25-52

Procedure 18, 4.25-54

How to Remove and Reinstall the Upper Pneumatics Drawer EMC Shield, 4.25-54
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-54
Removing the Upper Pneumatics Drawer EMC Shield, 4.25-54
Reinstalling the Upper Pneumatics Drawer EMC Shield, 4.25-55

Procedure 19, 4.25-56

How to Remove and Reinstall the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Three-Side
Cover, 4.25-56
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-56
Removing the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Three-Sided Cover, 4.25-56
Interlock Switch for the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.25-56
Reinstalling the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Three-Sided Cover, 4.25-57

Procedure 20, 4.25-58

How to Open and Close the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Front Door, 4.25-58
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-58
Open the Front Door, 4.25-58
Close the Front Door, 4.25-58

PN 4237029G xxi
CONTENTS

Procedure 21, 4.25-59

How to Remove and Reinstall the Universal Power Supply Main Cover, 4.25-59
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-59
Removing the UPS Main Cover, 4.25-59
Reinstalling the Main Cover, 4.25-63

Procedure 22, 4.25-67

How to Open and Close the Universal Power Supply Front Door, 4.25-67
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-67
Open the Front Door, 4.25-67
Close the Front Door, 4.25-67

Procedure 23, 4.25-68

How to Remove and Reinstall the Universal Power Supply Cable Cover
Only, 4.25-68
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-68
Removing the UPS Cable Cover, 4.25-68
Reinstalling the UPS Cable Cover, 4.25-69

Procedure 24, 4.25-72

How to Remove and Reinstall the Universal Power Supply Back Cover, 4.25-72
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-72
Removing the UPS Back Cover, 4.25-72
Reinstalling the UPS Back Cover, 4.25-73

Procedure 25, 4.25-75

How to Remove and Reinstall the UPS Pneumatics Drawer, 4.25-75
Tools/Supplies Needed, 4.25-75
Removing the UPS Pneumatics Drawer, 4.25-75
Reinstalling the UPS Pneumatics Drawer, 4.25-79

5 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, 5.1-1

5.1 SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP), 5.1-1

Purpose, 5.1-1
Required Service Form, 5.1-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 5.1-1
Preparation, 5.1-1
Static Tests, 5.1-1
Power Up Tests, 5.1-2
Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification, 5.1-3
Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis and Carryover Check, 5.1-3
Using the Manual Sample Station, 5.1-3
Using the MCL Sample Station, 5.1-4
Cytometer Interlock Checks, 5.1-5
Power Supply Module Interlock Checks, 5.1-6
Workstation Computer Test, 5.1-6
On-Site Close Out, 5.1-6

xxii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

5.2 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION (PMI), 5.2-1

Purpose, 5.2-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 5.2-1
Procedure, 5.2-1
System Verification, 5.2-2

6 SCHEMATICS, 6.1-1

6.1 ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS, 6.1-1

Cytometer, 6.1-1
MCL Option, 6.1-2
Universal Power Supply, 6.1-2
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 6.1-2
Workstation, 6.1-3

7 TROUBLESHOOTING, 7.1-1

7.1 LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES, 7.1-1

Level Sense Indicators, 7.1-1
Cleanse Low, 7.1-1
Sheath Low and Waste Full, 7.1-1
Error Messages, 7.1-1
About the Error Messages Table, 7.1-2

7.2 PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL, 7.2-1

Purpose, 7.2-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 7.2-1
Preparation, 7.2-1
ADC Zero Adjust, 7.2-1
Purpose, 7.2-1
Circuit Card Checked in this Test, 7.2-2
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-2
Amp Gain Control, 7.2-2
Purpose, 7.2-2
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-2
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-2
Amp Saturation Test, 7.2-2
Purpose, 7.2-2
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-2
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-2
Attenuator Control, 7.2-3
Purpose, 7.2-3
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-3
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-3
Beeper Test, 7.2-3
Purpose, 7.2-3
Circuit Card Checked in this Test, 7.2-3
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-3

PN 4237029G xxiii
CONTENTS

Canyon Jumper Test, 7.2-4

Purpose, 7.2-4
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-4
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-4
Count Rate Test, 7.2-4
Purpose, 7.2-4
Circuit Card Checked in this Test, 7.2-4
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-4
DMA Acquisition - Not Used, 7.2-4
Front Panel Test, 7.2-4
Purpose, 7.2-4
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-5
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-5
General Information, 7.2-5
Grand Canyon Adjust, 7.2-6
Purpose, 7.2-6
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-6
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-6
Grand Canyon Test, 7.2-6
Purpose, 7.2-6
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-6
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-6
Histogram Test, 7.2-7
Purpose, 7.2-7
Initialize System, 7.2-7
Purpose, 7.2-7
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-7
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-7
Laser Control, 7.2-8
Purpose, 7.2-8
Options, 7.2-8
Components Checked in this Test, 7.2-8
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-8
Laser Warm Up, 7.2-9
Purpose, 7.2-9
Lock Up Test - Not Used, 7.2-9
MCL Bar Code Head Test, 7.2-9
Purpose, 7.2-9
MCL Bar Code Test, 7.2-9
Purpose, 7.2-9
MCL Burn In, 7.2-10
Purpose, 7.2-10
Error Index Numbers, 7.2-10
MCL Carousel Label, 7.2-10
Purpose, 7.2-10
MCL Carousel Status, 7.2-11
Purpose, 7.2-11
Test Sequence, 7.2-11
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-11

xxiv PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

MCL Door Switch Test, 7.2-11

Purpose, 7.2-11
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-11
MCL Finger Test, 7.2-11
Purpose, 7.2-11
MCL Home Align, 7.2-11
Purpose, 7.2-11
Summary of Test Sequence, 7.2-11
MCL Manual Control, 7.2-12
Purpose, 7.2-12
Sensor Status, 7.2-12
Controls, 7.2-12
MCL Mix Test, 7.2-12
Purpose, 7.2-12
MCL Pneumatic Status, 7.2-12
Purpose, 7.2-12
Sensor Status, 7.2-12
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-12
MCL POWER UP Status, 7.2-13
Purpose, 7.2-13
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-13
MCL Probe Align, 7.2-13
Purpose, 7.2-13
MCL ROM Test, 7.2-13
Purpose, 7.2-13
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-13
MCL Scan Reliability, 7.2-13
Purpose, 7.2-13
MCL Stepper Noise Test, 7.2-13
Purpose, 7.2-13
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-13
MCL Terminal, 7.2-14
Purpose, 7.2-14
Commands, 7.2-14
Memory Test, 7.2-17
Purpose, 7.2-17
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-17
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-17
Mike’s Test -Not Used, 7.2-18
New Board, 7.2-18
Purpose, 7.2-18
Noise Test and Offset, 7.2-18
Purpose, 7.2-18
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-18
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-18
OPTO DMA Test, 7.2-19
Purpose, 7.2-19
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-19
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-19

PN 4237029G xxv
CONTENTS

OPTO Interrupt Test, 7.2-19

Purpose, 7.2-19
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-19
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-19
OPTO Link Test, 7.2-20
Purpose, 7.2-20
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-20
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-20
PMT Voltage Control, 7.2-21
Purpose, 7.2-21
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-21
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-21
Pneumatic Sensor Test, 7.2-21
Purpose, 7.2-21
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-21
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-22
Pulse RAMP Test, 7.2-22
Purpose, 7.2-22
Components Checked in this Test, 7.2-22
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-22
ROM Test, 7.2-22
Purpose, 7.2-22
Circuit Card Checked in this Test, 7.2-22
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-22
Run Beads, 7.2-22
Purpose, 7.2-22
Sample Leak Test, 7.2-23
Purpose, 7.2-23
Components Checked in this Test, 7.2-23
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-23
Scope Test - Not Used, 7.2-23
Segment Valve Test, 7.2-23
Purpose, 7.2-23
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-23
Set N Transputers, 7.2-23
Purpose, 7.2-23
System Parameter Test, 7.2-23
Purpose, 7.2-23
T805 Test, 7.2-24
Purpose, 7.2-24
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-24
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-24
Temperature Test, 7.2-24
Purpose, 7.2-24
Valve Burn In, 7.2-24
Purpose, 7.2-24
Valve Control, 7.2-25
Purpose, 7.2-25
Options, 7.2-25

xxvi PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Circuit Card Checked in this Test, 7.2-25

Response if Test Fails, 7.2-25
Valve Sequence, 7.2-26
Purpose, 7.2-26
VME Addr Bus Test, 7.2-26
Purpose, 7.2-26
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-26
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-26
VME Data Bus Test, 7.2-26
Purpose, 7.2-26
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test, 7.2-27
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-27
Waste Chamber Full Test, 7.2-27
Purpose, 7.2-27
Components Checked in this Test, 7.2-27
Response if Test Fails, 7.2-27
XY Display - Not Used, 7.2-27

7.3 ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA, 7.3-1

Purpose, 7.3-1
Initial Checks, 7.3-1
General Troubleshooting, 7.3-2

7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING THE ACQUISITION SYSTEM, 7.4-1

Purpose, 7.4-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 7.4-1
Flowchart, 7.4-1

7.5 TROUBLESHOOTING FLUIDIC PROBLEMS, 7.5-1

Purpose, 7.5-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, 7.5-2
No Sample Flow Problems, 7.5-2
Pneumatic Tips, 7.5-3

8 PARTS LISTS, 8.1-1

8.1 PART LOCATOR TOOLS, 8.1-1

Instructions for Use, 8.1-1
Anchor Illustration for Locating Parts, 8.1-2
Illustrations Not Referenced from the Anchor Illustration, 8.1-4
Parts Not Illustrated, 8.1-5
How to Locate a Part Number, 8.1-14

8.2 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer, 8.2-1

List of Illustrations, 8.2-1

8.3 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables, 8.3-1

List of Illustrations, 8.3-1

8.4 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers, 8.4-1

List of Illustrations, 8.4-1

PN 4237029G xxvii
CONTENTS

8.5 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL), 8.5-1
List of Illustrations, 8.5-1

8.6 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation, 8.6-1

List of Illustrations, 8.6-1

8.7 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and

Covers, 8.7-1
List of Illustrations, 8.7-1

8.8 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers, 8.8-1
List of Illustrations, 8.8-1

8.9 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Small Miscellaneous Hardware, 8.9-1

List of Illustrations, 8.9-1

A QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, A.1-1

A.1 TOLERANCES AND LIMITS, A.1-1

Cytometer Voltages, A.1-1
MCL CPU Card, A.1-1

A.2 CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS, A.2-1

Circuit Cards Located in the Cytometer, A.2-1
Circuit Cards Located in the Universal Power Supply, A.2-2
Circuit Cards Located in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.2-2
Circuit Cards Located in the Workstation Computer, A.2-2
Amp / Signal Conditioner Card, A.2-3
Circuit Card Locations in the Cytometer, A.2-3
Component Locations, A.2-3
Jumpers, A.2-3
Switches, A.2-3
Analyzer Backplane - Front View, A.2-4
Backplane Location in the Cytometer, A.2-4
Component Locations, A.2-4
Jumpers, A.2-4
Switches, A.2-4
Analyzer Backplane - Rear View, A.2-5
Backplane Location in the Cytometer, A.2-5
Component Locations, A.2-5
Jumpers, A.2-5
Switches, A.2-5
Bar-Code Decoder Card, A.2-6
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-6
Component Locations, A.2-6
Jumpers, A.2-6
Switches, A.2-6
Breaker Card, A.2-7
Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply, A.2-7
Component Locations on the Front of the Breaker Card, A.2-7
Component Locations on the Back of the Breaker Card, A.2-8

xxviii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Jumpers, A.2-8
Switches, A.2-8
CYT12 Receiver EMC Card, A.2-9
Circuit Card Location in the Power Supply Module, A.2-9
Component Locations, A.2-9
Jumpers, A.2-9
Switches, A.2-9
Cyto Transputer Card, A.2-10
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-10
Component Locations, A.2-10
Jumpers, A.2-10
Switches, A.2-10
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor Card, A.2-11
Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply, A.2-11
Component Locations, A.2-11
Jumpers, A.2-11
Switches, A.2-11
Fiber Optic Interface Card, A.2-12
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-12
Component Locations, A.2-12
Jumpers, A.2-12
Switches, A.2-12
Front Panel LED and Switch Input Card, A.2-13
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-13
Component Locations, A.2-13
Jumpers, A.2-13
Switches, A.2-13
Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 Card, A.2-14
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-14
Component Locations, A.2-14
Jumpers, A.2-14
Switches, A.2-14
MCL CPU Card, A.2-15
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-15
Component Locations, A.2-15
Jumpers, A.2-15
Switches, A.2-15
MCL Interface Card, A.2-16
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-16
Component Locations, A.2-16
Jumpers, A.2-16
Switches, A.2-16
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card (Non-EMC Version), A.2-17
Circuit Card Location in the Workstation, A.2-17
Component Locations, A.2-17
Jumpers, A.2-17
Switches, A.2-17

PN 4237029G xxix
CONTENTS

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card (EMC Version), A.2-18

Circuit Card Location in the Workstation, A.2-18
Component Locations, A.2-18
Jumpers, A.2-18
Switches, A.2-18
PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card, A.2-19
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-19
Component Locations, A.2-19
Jumpers, A.2-19
Switches, A.2-19
Power Control 3 Card, A.2-20
Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply, A.2-20
Component Locations, A.2-20
Jumpers and Switches, A.2-20
Power Module Control Card (Non-EMC Version), A.2-21
Circuit Card Location in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.2-21
Component Locations, A.2-21
Jumpers, A.2-21
Switches, A.2-21
Power Module Control II Card (EMC Version), A.2-22
Circuit Card Location in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.2-22
Component Locations, A.2-22
Jumpers, A.2-22
Switches, A.2-22
Sensor Card, A.2-23
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-23
Component Locations, A.2-23
Jumpers, A.2-23
Switches, A.2-23
Solenoid Power Distribution Card, A.2-24
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-24
Component Locations, A.2-24
Jumpers, A.2-24
Switches, A.2-24
System Interface Card, A.2-25
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-25
Component Locations, A.2-25
Jumpers, A.2-25
Switches, A.2-25
Top Panel Display 2 Card, A.2-26
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-26
Component Locations, A.2-26
Jumpers, A.2-26
Switches, A.2-26
Trans Data Acquisition Card, A.2-27
Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer, A.2-27
Component Locations, A.2-27
Jumpers, A.2-27
Switches, A.2-27

xxx PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Voltage Selector Card, A.2-28

Circuit Card Location in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.2-28
Component Locations, A.2-29
Jumpers, A.2-29
Switches, A.2-29
Voltage Selector 2 Card, A.2-30
Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply, A.2-30
Voltage Selection, A.2-30
Component Locations, A.2-31
Jumpers, A.2-31
Switches, A.2-31
Voltage Supply Monitor Card, A.2-32
Circuit Card Location in the Power Supply Module, A.2-32
Front Panel Label, A.2-32
Component Locations, A.2-33
Jumpers, A.2-33
Switches, A.2-33

A.3 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS, A.3-1

CHANNEL_500 Protocol, A.3-1
Switch Point 1 Test, A.3-1
Acquiring Fluorospheres, A.3-2

A.4 PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE, A.4-1

Available Tests, A.4-1
MCL Option Commands, A.4-4

A.5 CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS, A.5-1

Instructions for Use, A.5-1
Cytometer Anchor Illustration, A.5-2
Components Accessed with the Cytometer Top Cover Removed, A.5-5
Data Acquisition Card Cage, A.5-7
Data Acquisition Card Cage, Component Locations, A.5-7
Optical Collection Area, A.5-13
Optical Collection Area, Component Locations (Rear View), A.5-13
Components Accessed with the Right Side Cover Removed, A.5-16
Components Accessed with the Center Front Cover Removed, A.5-21
Components Accessed with the Filter Shield Removed, A.5-24
Components Inside the Reagent Drawer, A.5-27
Rear Panel Components, A.5-29
Manual Sample Station Components, Cytometer with MCL Option, A.5-32
Manual Sample Station Components, Cytometer without MCL Option, A.5-36
Segmenting Valve Components, A.5-39
Components on the MCL Option, A.5-42
Carousel Components, A.5-42
MCL Components Accessible with Covers Removed, A.5-44
Components in the Left Side of the Cytometer, A.5-47
Front Panel Display Components, A.5-55

PN 4237029G xxxi
CONTENTS

A.6 VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND

FUNCTIONS, A.6-1
Instructions for Use, A.6-1
Voltage-Specific Power Supply Anchor Illustration, A.6-2
Components Located Behind the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply, A.6-4
Components in the Left Side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.6-9
Components in the Right Side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.6-12
Components on the Rear Panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.6-15

A.7 UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND

FUNCTIONS, A.7-1
Instructions for Use, A.7-1
Anchor Illustration, A.7-2
Components Located Behind the Front Door of the Universal Power Supply, A.7-4
Components in the UPS Pneumatics Drawer, A.7-8
Components in the Left Side of the Universal Power Supply, A.7-12
Components in the Right Side of the Universal Power Supply, A.7-16
Components on the Rear Panel of the Universal Power Supply, A.7-19

A.8 HOT KEYS AVAILABLE WITH SYSTEM II™ SOFTWARE, A.8-1

Acquisition Screen, A.8-1
Listmode Screen, A.8-1

B HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS, B.1-1

B.1 FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER

CONFIGURATION, B.1-1
Installed Peripherals, B.1-1
Installed Drives, B.1-1
Preloaded Software, B.1-1
BIOS SETUP Defaults, B.1-1
DEFAULT Settings for the System BIOS, B.1-2
Standard CMOS Setup, B.1-2
Advanced CMOS Setup, B.1-2
Advanced Chipset Setup, B.1-3
Power Management Setup, B.1-3
PCI / Plug and Play Setup, B.1-4
Peripheral Setup, B.1-5
WINDOWS 98 Configuration from Device Manager, B.1-6
Control Panel Setup, Device Manager, Computer, B.1-6
CONFIG.SYS Configuration, B.1-7
AUTOEXEC.BAT Configuration, B.1-8

B.2 FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER

CONFIGURATION, B.2-1
Installed Peripherals, B.2-1
Installed Drives, B.2-2
Preloaded Software, B.2-2
Circuit Card Locations, B.2-2
BIOS Password, B.2-2

xxxii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

AMI WIN BIOS Configuration, B.2-3

Standard Setup, B.2-3
Advanced Setup, B.2-3
Chipset Setup, B.2-4
Power Mgmt (Power Management) Setup, B.2-4
PCI / PnP Setup, B.2-5
Peripheral Setup, B.2-6
Supervisor, B.2-6
WINDOWS 95 Configuration from Device Manager, B.2-7
Control Panel Setup, Device Manager, Computer, B.2-7
CONFIG.SYS Configuration, B.2-8
AUTOEXEC.BAT Configuration, B.2-9

B.3 INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION, B.3-1

Installed Peripherals, B.3-1
Installed Drives, B.3-1
Preloaded Software, B.3-1
BIOS Password, B.3-1
AMI WIN BIOS Configuration, B.3-2
Standard Setup, B.3-2
Advanced Setup, B.3-2
Chipset Setup, B.3-3
Power Mgmt (Power Management) Setup, B.3-3
PCI / PnP Setup, B.3-4
Peripheral Setup, B.3-5
Supervisor, B.3-5

B.4 LANtastic® NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM MINIMUM

REQUIREMENTS, B.4-1
DOS Requirements, B.4-1
Windows Requirements, B.4-1

B.5 Sybase® SQL ANYWHERE™ MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS, B.5-1

Client Requirements, B.5-1
Database Server Requirements, B.5-1
Network Requirements, B.5-1

C FIELD WORKSHEETS, C.1-1

C.1 WORKSHEETS, C.1-1

Field Engineer Worksheet, C.1-1
Network Configuration Worksheet, C.1-2

D EXAMPLES OF SETUP FILES, D.1-1

D.1 CLIENT FLOW CYTOMETER, D.1-1

Config.sys, D.1-1
Autoexec.bat, D.1-1
Startnet.bat, D.1-1
Xl_graph.cng, D.1-2

PN 4237029G xxxiii
CONTENTS

D.2 FILE SERVER, D.2-1

Config.sys, D.2-1
Autoexec.bat, D.2-1
Startnet.bat, D.2-1

E NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS, E.1-1

E.1 NETWORKING, E.1-1

Purpose, E.1-1
Introduction, E.1-1
Topologies, E.1-2
Mesh, E.1-2
Star, E.1-2
Linear Bus, E.1-3
Ring, E.1-4
Bridges, Repeaters, Routers, E.1-4
Specifications, E.1-5
Dedicated vs. Non-Dedicated Server, E.1-5
LANtastic™ Network Operating System, E.1-5

E.2 802.3, E.2-1

F BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS, F.1-1

F.1 BAR-CODE LABELS, F.1-1

Acceptable Bar Codes, F.1-1
Optical Characteristics of Bar-Code Labels, F.1-1
NE (Narrow Elements) Width, F.1-2
WE/NE (Wide Elements/Narrow Elements) Ratio, F.1-2
Printing Methods, F.1-2
Check Sum Algorithm, F.1-2

F.2 MCL BAR-CODE SCANNER, F.2-1

Types of Scanners, F.2-1
Decoding, F.2-1
Communication Protocol, F.2-1
For an Instrument with the ALL CODES EEPROM Installed, F.2-1
For an Instrument with an Original EEPROM Installed, F.2-2
MCL Bar-Code Scanner Setup, F.2-2
Default Configurations for the EEPROM, F.2-2
Symbologies, F.2-3
Special Considerations, F.2-3

F.3 HAND-HELD BAR-CODE SCANNER OPTION, F.3-1

Types of Scanners, F.3-1
Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner Setup Parameters, F.3-1
Default Configurations, F.3-1
General Parameters, F.3-2
Serial Communication Parameters, F.3-2
Symbologies, F.3-2
Wand Emulation Parameters, F.3-3

xxxiv PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Keyboard Wedge Parameters, F.3-3

Memory Module Set Up, F.3-3
Supplemental Programming Symbols, F.3-3

F.4 BAR-CODE PRINTER, F.4-1

G INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply), G.1-1

G.1 PRE-SITE INSPECTION, G.1-1

Space and Accessibility, G.1-1
Power Requirements, G.1-2
Optional Computer Peripherals, G.1-3
Environment, G.1-3
Unloading and Moving the Instrument, G.1-3
Installation Assistance, G.1-4
Inspection Report, G.1-4

G.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECKS, G.2-1

Pre-Site Inspection Compliance, G.2-1
Education Center Training, G.2-1
Condition of Cartons Received, G.2-1
Supplies, G.2-1
Optional Computer Peripherals, G.2-1

G.3 CYTOMETER INSTALLATION, G.3-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, G.3-1
Unpacking, G.3-1
Installation, G.3-2
Remove Covers to Provide Needed Access, G.3-2
Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front, G.3-7
Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Back (Behind the
Laser), G.3-7
Prepare Components inside the Lower Pneumatics Drawer for
Operation, G.3-10
Reinstall the MCL CPU Card (if removed earlier), G.3-10
Prepare the Data Acquisition Card Cage for Operation, G.3-10
Prepare the Segmenting Valve for Operation, G.3-11
Prepare Components inside the Upper Pneumatic Drawer for
Operation, G.3-12
Fill the Reagent Containers, G.3-13
Fill the Sheath Container, G.3-13
Fill the Cleaning Agent Container, G.3-14

G.4 VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION, G.4-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, G.4-1
Unpacking, G.4-1
Installation, G.4-1

G.5 WORKSTATION INSTALLATION, G.5-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, G.5-1
Unpacking, G.5-1

PN 4237029G xxxv
CONTENTS

Mouse Connection, G.5-2

Keyboard Connection, G.5-2
Monitor Connections - Overview, G.5-2
Monitor Connections: 17-inch Flat Panel Thin Film Transistor (TFT)
Monitor, G.5-2
Connecting the Monitor Cables, G.5-2
Connection to ac Power Source, G.5-3
Printer Option, G.5-3

G.6 CABLE CONNECTIONS, G.6-1

Reference Illustration, G.6-1
Laser Umbilical Cable, G.6-1
Logic Cable, G.6-3
Analog Cable, G.6-3
Power Module Control Cable, G.6-3
Make Appropriate MCL Connections, G.6-4
If this is an XL Flow Cytometer without the MCL Option, G.6-4
If this is an XL Flow Cytometer with the MCL Option, G.6-4
Fiber Optic Interface Cables, G.6-4
CYT12 Cable, G.6-5
Power Cords, G.6-5

G.7 TUBING CONNECTIONS, G.7-1

Connect the Waste Container, G.7-1
Preparation, G.7-1
Connect Tubings, G.7-1

G.8 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION, G.8-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, G.8-1
Instrument Startup, G.8-1
SYSTEM II Software Installation, G.8-1

G.9 OPERATIONAL CHECKS, G.9-1

Tools/Supplies Needed, G.9-1
Preliminary Checks, G.9-1
Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter, G.9-1
Power Supply Verification, G.9-2
Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification, G.9-2
Functional Verification, G.9-3
Reinstall Covers and Panels, G.9-4
Wrap Up, G.9-5
System Verification, G.9-5

G.10 INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power

Supply), G.10-1
Tools/Supplies Needed, G.10-1
Cytometer, G.10-1
Unpacking, G.10-1
Installation, G.10-1

xxxvi PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.10-4

Unpacking, G.10-4
Installation, G.10-4
Workstation, G.10-5
Unpacking, G.10-5
Installation, G.10-5
Cable Connections, G.10-6
Tubing Connections, G.10-7
Install SYSTEM II Software, G.10-8
Operational Checks, G.10-8
Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter, G.10-9
Power Supply Verification, G.10-9
Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification, G.10-9
Functional Verification, G.10-9
Wrap Up, G.10-10

ABBREVIATIONS, ABBREVIATIONS-1

GLOSSARY, GLOSSARY-1

INDEX, INDEX-1

TRADEMARKS

PN 4237029G xxxvii
CONTENTS

ILLUSTRATIONS
1.1-1 Figure Title, 1.1-6
1.2-1 Laser Warning Labels - Argon Laser System by JDS Uniphase, 1.2-5
1.2-2 Laser Warning Labels - MCL Bar-Code Scanner, 1.2-6
1.2-3 Laser Warning Labels on Sensing Compartment Cover, 1.2-7
1.2-4 Laser Warning Labels in Optical Area, Front View, 1.2-7
1.2-5 Laser Warning Labels in Optical Area, Side View, 1.2-8
1.2-6 Laser Certification Label on Rear Cover, 1.2-8
1.2-7 Laser Warning Labels on the MCL Base and Probe Housing, 1.2-9
2.1-1 Standard XL Flow Cytometer System, 2.1-1
2.1-2 XL-MCL Flow Cytometer System, 2.1-2
2.2-1 Cytometer Overview, 2.2-1
2.2-2 Beam-Shaping Optics, 2.2-2
2.2-3 Flow Cell, 2.2-3
2.2-4 Standard Three Fluorescence Sensor Configuration, 2.2-5
2.2-5 Optional Four Fluorescence Sensor Configuration, 2.2-6
2.2-6 Cytometer System Block Diagram, 2.2-8
2.2-7 Amplifier Block Diagram, 2.2-10
2.2-8 Amplifier Analog Bus Interface, 2.2-10
2.2-9 Trans Data Acquisition Card Block Diagram, 2.2-11
2.2-10 System Interface Card Block Diagram, 2.2-12
2.2-11 Cyto Transputer Card Block Diagram, 2.2-13
2.2-12 MCL Interface Card Block Diagram of Operation, 2.2-14
2.2-13 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card Block Diagram, 2.2-15
2.3-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - View with Front Door Open, 2.3-2
2.3-2 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - Rear, 2.3-3
2.3-3 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - Right-Side View with Three-Sided Cover
Removed, 2.3-4
2.3-4 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - Left-Side View with Cover Removed, 2.3-6
2.3-5 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Block Diagram, 2.3-7
2.3-6 Power Module Control II Card Flow Diagram (Voltage-Specific Power
Supply), 2.3-8
2.3-7 Interface Cable for Power Module Control II Card - 25-Pin Connectors, P20 and
P70, 2.3-9
2.3-8 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - EMC Version Identifiers (Rear View), 2.3-13
2.3-9 Location of EMI/EMC Contact Strip - Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 2.3-16
2.4-1 Universal Power Supply, View with Front Door Closed, 2.4-2
2.4-2 Universal Power Supply, View with Front Door Open - Component
Locations, 2.4-2
2.4-3 Front of the Breaker Card, 2.4-3
2.4-4 New UPS Name Plate, 2.4-4
2.4-5 UPS Pneumatics Drawer, Removed from Universal Power Supply, 2.4-5
2.4-6 Universal Power Supply - Rear View with Back Cover Removed, 2.4-6
2.4-7 Universal Power Supply, Rear View with Back Cover Removed - Component
Locations, 2.4-7
2.4-8 Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions, As Viewed from the Rear, 2.4-8
2.4-9 Universal Power Supply - Filter Locations, 2.4-9
2.4-10 Universal Power Supply, Top View with Covers Removed - Component
Locations, 2.4-10

xxxviii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

2.4-11 Voltage Selector 2 Card - Location and Layout, 2.4-12

2.4-12 Front of the Breaker Card - Component Locations, 2.4-12
2.4-13 Back of the Breaker Card - Component Locations, 2.4-13
2.4-14 Voltage Selector 2 Card Mounted to the Back of Breaker Card (As Viewed from the
Rear), 2.4-13
2.4-15 Example of a Low Voltage Configuration - 120 Vac Source Voltage, 2.4-15
2.4-16 Example of a High Voltage Configuration - 230/240 Vac Source Voltage, 2.4-16
2.4-17 Circuit Breakers Used With Low Voltage Configurations (Front of Breaker
Card), 2.4-17
2.4-18 Circuit Breakers Used With High Voltage Configurations (Front of Breaker
Card), 2.4-17
2.4-19 Voltage Supply Indicator Locations, 2.4-18
2.4-20 Universal Power Supply, Right-Side View with Covers Removed - Component
Locations, 2.4-20
2.4-21 Universal Power Supply, Left-Side View with Covers Removed - Component
Locations, 2.4-22
2.4-22 UPS Pneumatics Drawer - Component Locations, 2.4-23
2.4-23 Interface Cable for Power Control 3 Card - 25-Pin Cable Connectors, P20 and
P70, 2.4-26
2.4-24 Universal Power Supply - Rear View with Back Cover Removed, 2.4-28
2.4-25 Air Flow Through the Argon Laser Power Supply, 2.4-29
2.4-26 Air Flow Inside the Universal Power Supply, 2.4-30
2.4-27 System Power, Block Diagram - Universal Power Supply, 2.4-33
2.4-28 Voltage Selection, 2.4-35
2.5-1 Workstation - Components, 2.5-1
3.3-1 Location of Small Shipping Screws Used to Secure the Side Covers, 3.3-2
3.3-2 Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover, 3.3-3
3.3-3 Unlatching the MCL Covers, 3.3-4
3.3-4 Remove the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover), 3.3-4
3.3-5 Manual Sample Station Screw Locations, 3.3-5
3.3-6 Bracing the Upper Cover Open, 3.3-6
3.3-7 Filter Shield Screw Locations, 3.3-6
3.3-8 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front, 3.3-7
3.3-9 MCL CPU Card Cable Locations, 3.3-8
3.3-10 MCL CPU Card Screw Locations, 3.3-8
3.3-11 Location of the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser (Top
View), 3.3-8
3.3-12 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser, 3.3-9
3.3-13 Data Acquisition Card Cage - Shipping Brace and Screw Locations, 3.3-10
3.3-14 Upper Pneumatics Drawer Red Shipping Clips, Viewed from Rear of
Cytometer, 3.3-11
3.3-15 Remove the Plastic Shipping Inserts from the Segmenting Valve, 3.3-12
3.3-16 Sheath Filter Location and Associated Components, 3.3-14
3.4-1 Location of Foam Shipping Blocks Used to Protect the Compressor
Assembly, 3.4-2
3.4-2 Voltage Select Cable Tethered Inside the Top Compartment, 3.4-3
3.4-3 Voltage Selector 2 and Breaker Cards (As Viewed from the Rear), 3.4-4
3.5-1 Typical Workstation Setup, 3.5-1
3.5-2 Electronic Cable Connections - Mouse and Keyboard, 3.5-2
3.5-3 Connecting the 17-inch Flat Panel TFT Monitor Cables, 3.5-3

PN 4237029G xxxix
CONTENTS

3.6-1 Instrument Connections, 3.6-1

3.6-2 Connect the Laser Umbilical Cable to the Argon Laser Power Supply, 3.6-2
3.6-3 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card Edge Locations, 3.6-5
3.6-4 Power Cords for 100-120 Vac and 220-240 Vac Voltage Configurations, 3.6-6
3.7-1 Waste Level Sensor Assembly, 3.7-1
3.7-2 Tubing Connections, 3.7-2
3.9-1 Purge (Vent) Button Location, 3.9-2
3.9-2 Purging Bubbles from the Sheath Filter, 3.9-2
3.9-3 Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions, As Viewed from the Rear, 3.9-5
3.12-1 PMT Filter Locations, 3.12-2
3.13-1 Electronic Cable Connections - Mouse and Keyboard, 3.13-2
3.13-2 Connecting Monitor Cables, 3.13-3
3.13-3 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM and EXMEM II Card Edge Locations, 3.13-4
3.14-1 Bar-Code Printer - DIP Switches, 3.14-2
3.14-2 Bar-Code Printer - Media Threading and Adjustment Components, 3.14-3
3.16-1 Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface Card - Default Jumper Settings, 3.16-1
4.4-1 Preparing the Argon Laser Power Supply for Installation, 4.4-3
4.5-1 Flow Cell and Beamshaper Replacement Components, 4.5-2
4.5-2 Correct Laser Reflection Positioning, 4.5-3
4.5-3 Beamshaper Components, 4.5-4
4.5-4 Flow Cell and Beamshaper Alignment, 4.5-5
4.5-5 Correct/Incorrect Laser Image, 4.5-5
4.6-1 Beam-Shaping Stage Components, 4.6-2
4.6-2 Forward Scatter (FS) Movable Mask Adjustment, 4.6-3
4.6-3 Correct/Incorrect Scattered Light Positioning, 4.6-4
4.9-1 PEEK Tubing Connections, 4.9-2
4.9-2 PEEK Tubing with Ferrule and Ferrule Nut, 4.9-2
4.11-1 PEEK Tubing with Ferrule and Ferrule Nut, 4.11-2
4.11-2 Segmenting Valve Pad Connections, 4.11-2
4.12-1 Carousel IN/OUT Adjustment, 4.12-2
4.12-2 Carousel Tube-Position Screw Adjustment, 4.12-3
4.12-3 Finger Adjustment Screw, 4.12-3
4.12-4 MCL Sample Probe Adjustment, 4.12-4
4.13-1 Vortex Foot Assembly, Location and Components, 4.13-2
4.15-1 Unacceptable Histograms, 4.15-5
4.18-1 Meter Lead Connection - 1, 4.18-2
4.18-2 Meter Lead Connection - 2, 4.18-2
4.21-1 Bracing the Front Panel Display Cover Open, 4.21-2
4.21-2 J66 and Pin Locations for +24 Vdc Voltage Verification, 4.21-2
4.24-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card with Component Locations, 4.24-2
4.25-1 Exterior Cytometer Cover Procedures, Anchor Illustration, 4.25-3
4.25-2 Interior Cytometer Access Procedures, Anchor Illustration, 4.25-4
4.25-3 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Procedures, Anchor Illustration, 4.25-5
4.25-4 Universal Power Supply Procedures, Anchor Illustration, 4.25-6
4.25-5 Cytometer Top Cover Removal or Installation, 4.25-7
4.25-6 Interlock Switch Location, Cytometer, 4.25-8
4.25-7 Cytometer Right-Side Cover Removal or Installation, 4.25-9
4.25-8 Removing the Center Front Cover, 4.25-11
4.25-9 Reinstalling the Center Front Cover, 4.25-11

xl PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

4.25-10Placing the Cytometer in the Idle Mode, 4.25-12

4.25-11Removing the Center Front Cover (Optional), 4.25-12
4.25-12Opening the Reagent Drawer, 4.25-13
4.25-13Closing the Reagent Drawer, 4.25-14
4.25-14Reinstalling Center Front Cover, if applicable, 4.25-14
4.25-15Cytometer Upper Rear Cover Screw Locations, 4.25-15
4.25-16Cytometer Lower Rear Cover Screw Locations, 4.25-17
4.25-17Manual Sample Station Screw Locations, 4.25-20
4.25-18Manual Sample Station Screw Locations, 4.25-23
4.25-19Opening the MCL Door, 4.25-25
4.25-20Closing the MCL Door, 4.25-26
4.25-21Unlatching the MCL Covers, 4.25-27
4.25-22Relatching the MCL Covers, Latch Catch and Latch Keeper Locations, 4.25-28
4.25-23Removing the MCL Covers, 4.25-29
4.25-24Removing the MCL Covers Continued, 4.25-30
4.25-25Laser Warning Labels - MCL Option and Probe Housing, 4.25-32
4.25-26Opening the MCL Door, 4.25-33
4.25-27Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover, 4.25-34
4.25-28Reinstalling the MCL Probe Housing Cover, 4.25-35
4.25-29Left-Side Cover Removal or Installation (Cytometer with MCL Option
Installed), 4.25-36
4.25-30Left-Side Cover Removal or Installation (Cytometer without MCL
Option), 4.25-38
4.25-31Bracing the Upper Cover Open, 4.25-42
4.25-32Filter Shield Screw Locations, 4.25-42
4.25-33Data Acquisition Card Cage Locked in its Vertical Position, 4.25-46
4.25-34Removing the MCL from the Cytometer Frame, 4.25-50
4.25-35Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer (Cytometer with the MCL Option
Installed), 4.25-50
4.25-36Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer (Cytometer without MCL
Option), 4.25-51
4.25-37Removing the EMC Shield from the Upper Pneumatics Drawer, 4.25-54
4.25-38Interlock Switch Location, Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.25-57
4.25-39Opening the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.25-58
4.25-40Removing the UPS Cable Cover, 4.25-59
4.25-41Removing the UPS Back Cover, 4.25-60
4.25-42Front Screw Locations, 4.25-61
4.25-43Side Screw Locations, 4.25-61
4.25-44Removing the Main Cover, 4.25-62
4.25-45Reinstalling the Main Cover, 4.25-63
4.25-46Reinstalling the UPS Back Cover, 4.25-64
4.25-47Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions, 4.25-65
4.25-48Reinstalling the UPS Cable Cover, 4.25-65
4.25-49Seal Around Tubings and Cables, Left-Side View, 4.25-66
4.25-50Opening the Universal Power Supply Front Door, 4.25-67
4.25-51Removing the UPS Cable Cover, 4.25-68
4.25-52Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions, 4.25-69
4.25-53Reinstalling the UPS Cable Cover, 4.25-70
4.25-54Screw Locations for Securing UPS Cable Cover, 4.25-70
4.25-55Seal Around Tubings and Cables, Left-Side View, 4.25-71

PN 4237029G xli
CONTENTS

4.25-56Removing the Back Cover of the Universal Power Supply, 4.25-72

4.25-57Reinstalling the Back Cover of the Universal Power Supply, 4.25-73
4.25-58Securing the UPS Back Cover, 4.25-74
4.25-59UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Disconnecting Rear Components, 4.25-76
4.25-60UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Disconnecting the Compressor, 4.25-77
4.25-61UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Disconnecting P135, 4.25-77
4.25-62UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Final Steps for Removal, 4.25-78
7.4-1 Acquisition Troubleshooting Flowchart, 7.4-1
7.5-1 Troubleshooting Fluidics for No Sample Flow, 7.5-2
8.1-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Anchor Illustration for Locating Parts, 8.1-2
8.2-1 Front Display Panel (See Table 8.2-1), 8.2-2
8.2-2 Data Acquisition Card Cage (See Table 8.2-2), 8.2-4
8.2-3 Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-3), 8.2-6
8.2-4 Sensor Card and Attached Cables (See Table 8.2-4), 8.2-8
8.2-5 VL22 - Exploded View of Upper Valve (See Table 8.2-5), 8.2-10
8.2-6 Bracket and Fittings - Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-6), 8.2-11
8.2-7 VL21 - Exploded View of Lower Valve (See Table 8.2-7), 8.2-12
8.2-8 Quick Disconnects Below Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-8), 8.2-13
8.2-9 Optical Collection Area, Rear View (See Table 8.2-9), 8.2-14
8.2-10 Optical Collection Area, Front View (See Table 8.2-10), 8.2-16
8.2-11 Optical Collection Area with Filter Shield Removed (See Table 8.2-11), 8.2-18
8.2-12 Beam-Shaping Stage Components (See Table 8.2-12), 8.2-19
8.2-13 Flow Cell and Fluorescence Pickup Lens with Related Hardware (See
Table 8.2-13), 8.2-20
8.2-14 Argon Laser, Power Supply, and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-14), 8.2-22
8.2-15 Reagent Drawer (See Table 8.2-15), 8.2-24
8.2-16 Sheath Liquid Filter (See Table 8.2-16), 8.2-26
8.2-17 Sheath Liquid Filter Purge (Vent) Connections (See Table 8.2-17), 8.2-28
8.2-18 Sheath Container (See Table 8.2-18), 8.2-30
8.2-19 Cleaning Agent Container (See Table 8.2-19), 8.2-31
8.2-20 Segmenting Valve Assembly (See Table 8.2-20), 8.2-32
8.2-21 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Segmenting Valve Middle Pad (See
Table 8.2-21), 8.2-34
8.2-22 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Front and Rear Segmenting Valve Pads
(See Table 8.2-22), 8.2-35
8.2-23 Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-23), 8.2-36
8.2-24 Pinch Valve and Associated Components, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See
Table 8.2-24), 8.2-38
8.2-25 Solenoid Manifold, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-25), 8.2-40
8.2-26 QD10 and QD11 (Coupling and Fittings), Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See
Table 8.2-26), 8.2-41
8.2-27 Quick Disconnect Fittings and Brackets, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See
Table 8.2-27), 8.2-42
8.2-28 Cytometer Rear Panel, Lower (See Table 8.2-28), 8.2-44
8.2-29 Fan Assembly, Cytometer Rear Panel (See Table 8.2-29), 8.2-46
8.2-30 Cytometer Right-Side Compartment (See Table 8.2-30), 8.2-48
8.2-31 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card and Attached Cables (See
Table 8.2-31), 8.2-50
8.2-32 Flexible Duct Components and Assembly Instructions (See Table 8.2-32), 8.2-52

xlii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

8.3-1 XL-MCL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Table 8.3-1), 8.3-2
8.3-2 XL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Table 8.3-2), 8.3-4
8.3-3 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Table 8.3-3), 8.3-6
8.3-4 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.3-4), 8.3-8
8.4-1 MCL Option Assembly (See Table 8.4-1), 8.4-2
8.4-2 MCL Vertical Plate Components (See Table 8.4-2), 8.4-4
8.4-3 Lifter Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Table 8.4-3), 8.4-6
8.4-4 Probe Up/Down Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Table 8.4-4), 8.4-7
8.4-5 Cables Attached to the MCL CPU Card (See Table 8.4-5), 8.4-8
8.4-6 Cables Attached to the Bar-Code Decoder Card (See Table 8.4-6), 8.4-10
8.4-7 MCL Covers and Associated Hardware (See Table 8.4-7), 8.4-12
8.4-8 Carousel and Related Accessories (See Table 8.4-8), 8.4-14
8.5-1 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Front View (See
Table 8.5-1), 8.5-2
8.5-2 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Rear View (See
Table 8.5-2), 8.5-4
8.5-3 Manual Sample Station for XL Cytometer (See Table 8.5-3), 8.5-6
8.5-4 Mechanical Assembly for Manual Sample Station, XL-MCL or XL (See
Table 8.5-4), 8.5-8
8.6-1 FlowCentre II Workstation (See Table 8.6-1), 8.6-2
8.6-2 FlowCentre Workstation (See Table 8.6-2), 8.6-4
8.7-1 Front Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.7-1), 8.7-2
8.7-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Table 8.7-2), 8.7-4
8.7-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See
Table 8.7-3), 8.7-5
8.7-4 Front Panel including Voltage Supply Monitor Card and Hardware (See
Table 8.7-4), 8.7-6
8.7-5 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.7-5), 8.7-7
8.7-6 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See
Table 8.7-6), 8.7-8
8.7-7 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Table 8.7-7), 8.7-9
8.7-8 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.7-8), 8.7-10
8.7-9 Right Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Table 8.7-9), 8.7-11
8.7-10 Left Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Table 8.7-10), 8.7-12
8.7-11 VL32, VL30, and VL31 - Exploded View (See Table 8.7-11), 8.7-14
8.7-12 Rear Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Table 8.7-12), 8.7-16
8.7-13 Box Fan with Related Hardware - Exploded View (See Table 8.7-13), 8.7-18
8.7-14 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Cover, Door, Latches, and Casters (See
Table 8.7-14), 8.7-20
8.7-15 Waste Container, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.7-15), 8.7-22
8.8-1 Front Panel Components, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-1), 8.8-2
8.8-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Table 8.8-2), 8.8-4
8.8-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See
Table 8.8-3), 8.8-5
8.8-4 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.8-4), 8.8-6

PN 4237029G xliii
CONTENTS

8.8-5 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See

Table 8.8-5), 8.8-7
8.8-6 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Table 8.8-6), 8.8-8
8.8-7 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.8-7), 8.8-9
8.8-8 Upper Front Panel, Inside Components, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-8), 8.8-10
8.8-9 Left Side View with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-9), 8.8-12
8.8-10 Argon Laser Power Supply and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.8-10), 8.8-14
8.8-11 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Left-Side View (See Table 8.8-11), 8.8-16
8.8-12 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Right-Side View (See Table 8.8-12), 8.8-18
8.8-13 Right Side with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-13), 8.8-20
8.8-14 Rear Panels with Back Cover Removed, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-14), 8.8-22
8.8-15 Cable Harness for dc Power Supplies, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-15), 8.8-24
8.8-16 Cables in the Top Compartment Front Area, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-16), 8.8-26
8.8-17 Cables Attached to the Voltage Selector 2 Card and Breaker Card (See
Table 8.8-17), 8.8-28
8.8-18 Cables Attached to the Power Control 3 Card, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-18), 8.8-30
8.8-19 Exterior Covers, Door, Filters, and Casters for Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-19), 8.8-32
8.8-20 Interior Covers and Related Components, Universal Power Supply (See
Table 8.8-20), 8.8-34
8.8-21 Waste Container (4 L) for Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-21), 8.8-36
8.9-1 Check Valves and Chokes with Related Components (See Table 8.9-1), 8.9-2
8.9-2 Fittings (See Table 8.9-2), 8.9-3
8.9-3 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.9-3), 8.9-4
A.2-1 Amp / Signal Conditioner Card - Component Locations, A.2-3
A.2-2 Analyzer Backplane, Front View - Component Locations, A.2-4
A.2-3 Analyzer Backplane, Rear View - Component Locations, A.2-5
A.2-4 Bar-Code Decoder Card - Component Locations, A.2-6
A.2-5 Front of the Breaker Card - Component Locations, A.2-7
A.2-6 Back of the Breaker Card - Component Locations, A.2-8
A.2-7 CYT12 Receiver EMC Card - Component Locations, A.2-9
A.2-8 Cyto Transputer Card - Component Locations, A.2-10
A.2-9 FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor Card - Component Locations, A.2-11
A.2-10 Fiber Optic Interface Card - Component Locations, A.2-12
A.2-11 Front Panel LED and Switch Input Card - Component Locations, A.2-13
A.2-12 Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 Card - Component Locations, A.2-14
A.2-13 MCL CPU Card - Component Locations, A.2-15
A.2-14 MCL Interface Card - Component Locations, A.2-16
A.2-15 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card (Non-EMC Version) - Component
Locations, A.2-17
A.2-16 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card (EMC Version) - Component
Locations, A.2-18

xliv PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

A.2-17 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card - Component Locations, A.2-19
A.2-18 Power Control 3 Card - Component Locations, A.2-20
A.2-19 Power Module Control Card (Non-EMC Version) - Component Locations, A.2-21
A.2-20 Power Module Control II Card (EMC Version) - Component Locations, A.2-22
A.2-21 Sensor Card - Component Locations, A.2-23
A.2-22 Solenoid Power Distribution Card - Component Locations, A.2-24
A.2-23 System Interface Card - Component Locations, A.2-25
A.2-24 Top Panel Display 2 Card - Component Locations, A.2-26
A.2-25 Trans Data Acquisition Card - Component Locations, A.2-27
A.2-26 Voltage Selector Card for 120 Vac System - Component Locations, A.2-29
A.2-27 Voltage Selector 2 Card - Component Locations, A.2-31
A.2-28 Voltage Supply Monitor Card - Component Locations, A.2-33
A.5-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Anchor Illustration for Locating
Components, A.5-2
A.5-2 Components Accessed with the Cytometer Top Cover Removed (See
Table A.5-2), A.5-5
A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage (See Table A.5-3), A.5-7
A.5-4 Optical Collection Area, Rear View (See Table A.5-4), A.5-13
A.5-5 Right Side View of the Cytometer with the Cover Removed (See
Table A.5-5), A.5-16
A.5-6 Inside View of the Cytometer with the Center Front Cover Removed (See
Table A.5-6), A.5-21
A.5-7 Inside View of the Cytometer with the Filter Shield Removed (See
Table A.5-7), A.5-24
A.5-8 View of an Open Reagent Drawer (See Table A.5-8), A.5-27
A.5-9 Rear Panel Components, Exterior View (See Table A.5-9), A.5-29
A.5-10 XL-MCL Manual Sample Station Components (See Table A.5-10), A.5-32
A.5-11 XL Manual Sample Station Components (See Table A.5-11), A.5-36
A.5-12 Segmenting Valve Components (See Table A.5-12), A.5-39
A.5-13 Carousel Components (See Table A.5-13), A.5-42
A.5-14 MCL Components Accessible with Covers Removed (See Table A.5-14), A.5-44
A.5-15 Lower Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Table A.5-15), A.5-48
A.5-16 Front Panel Display Components (See Table A.5-16), A.5-55
A.6-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Anchor Illustration for Locating
Components, A.6-2
A.6-2 View of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply with the Front Door Open (See
Table A.6-2), A.6-4
A.6-3 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Left Side View with Cover Removed (See
Table A.6-3), A.6-9
A.6-4 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Right Side View with Cover Removed (See
Table A.6-4), A.6-12
A.6-5 Rear View of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table A.6-5), A.6-15
A.7-1 Universal Power Supply, Anchor Illustration for Locating Components, A.7-2
A.7-2 View of the Universal Power Supply with the Front Door Open (See
Table A.7-2), A.7-4
A.7-3 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Table A.7-3), A.7-8
A.7-4 Left Side View of the Universal Power Supply with Cover Removed (See
Table A.7-4), A.7-12
A.7-5 Right Side View of the Universal Power Supply with Cover Removed (See
Table A.7-5), A.7-16

PN 4237029G xlv
CONTENTS

A.7-6 Rear View of the Universal Power Supply (See Table A.7-6), A.7-19
E.1-1 Mesh Topology, E.1-2
E.1-2 Star Topology, E.1-3
E.1-3 Linear Bus Topology, E.1-3
E.1-4 Ring Topology, E.1-4
G.3-1 Location of Small Shipping Screws Used to Secure the Side Covers, G.3-2
G.3-2 Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover, G.3-3
G.3-3 Unlatching the MCL Covers, G.3-4
G.3-4 Remove the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover), G.3-4
G.3-5 Manual Sample Station Screw Locations, G.3-5
G.3-6 Bracing the Upper Cover Open, G.3-6
G.3-7 Filter Shield Screw Locations, G.3-6
G.3-8 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front, G.3-7
G.3-9 MCL CPU Card Cable Locations, G.3-8
G.3-10 MCL CPU Card Screw Locations, G.3-8
G.3-11 Location of the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser (Top
View), G.3-8
G.3-12 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser, G.3-9
G.3-13 Data Acquisition Card Cage - Shipping Brace and Screw Locations, G.3-10
G.3-14 Remove the Plastic Shipping Inserts from the Segmenting Valve, G.3-11
G.3-15 Sheath Filter Location and Associated Components, G.3-13
G.4-1 Location of Foam Shipping Blocks Used to Protect the Compressor
Assembly, G.4-2
G.5-1 Typical Workstation Setup, G.5-1
G.5-2 Electronic Cable Connections - Mouse and Keyboard, G.5-2
G.5-3 Connecting the 17-inch Flat Panel TFT Monitor Cables, G.5-3
G.6-1 Instrument Connections, G.6-1
G.6-2 Connect the Laser Umbilical Cable to the Laser Power Supply, G.6-2
G.6-3 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card Edge Locations, G.6-5
G.7-1 Waste Level Sensor Assembly, G.7-1
G.7-2 Tubing Connections, G.7-2
G.9-1 Purge (Vent) Button Location, G.9-2
G.9-2 Purging Bubbles from the Sheath Filter, G.9-2

xlvi PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

TABLES
2.2-1 Analyzer Backplane’s Function, 2.2-9
2.3-1 Part Numbers for Non-EMC versus EMC Instruments, 2.3-12
2.4-1 Circuit Breaker Usage in the Universal Power Supply, 2.4-19
3.1-1 Required Operating Clearance, 3.1-1
3.1-2 Power Requirements, 3.1-2
3.1-3 Environmental Requirements, 3.1-3
3.11-1 MCL CPU Card - S1 Settings, 3.11-2
3.14-1 Bar-Code Printer DIP Switch Settings, 3.14-2
3.15-1 Default Configuration - Bar-Code Hand-Held Scanner, 3.15-1
3.16-1 CMOS Settings, 3.16-2
4.6-1 Oscilloscope Settings, 4.6-1
4.8-1 Carryover Protocol, 4.8-1
4.15-1 LIN/LOG SWITCH POINT 1 TEST Protocol, 4.15-5
4.18-1 Indicator Troubleshooting, 4.18-1
4.21-1 MCL CPU Card, 4.21-7
4.21-2 MCL Power Supply Voltage Adjustments, 4.21-8
7.1-1 Level Sense Indicators - Sheath Low and Waste Full, 7.1-1
7.1-2 Error Messages, 7.1-2
7.3-1 Isolating Problem Areas, 7.3-1
7.3-2 General Troubleshooting Information, 7.3-2
7.3-3 Electronics, General Troubleshooting Information, 7.3-3
7.3-4 Lasers, General Troubleshooting Information, 7.3-3
7.3-5 Optics*, General Troubleshooting Information, 7.3-4
7.3-6 Pneumatics, General Troubleshooting Information, 7.3-5
7.3-7 Power Supplies, General Troubleshooting Information, 7.3-5
7.3-8 Software, General Troubleshooting Information, 7.3-6
7.5-1 Fluidic Components, 7.5-1
7.5-2 Pneumatic Troubleshooting Tips, 7.5-3
8.1-1 Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1-1, 8.1-4
8.1-2 Cables, 8.1-5
8.1-3 Consumables, 8.1-6
8.1-4 FRUs, 8.1-7
8.1-5 Kits, 8.1-9
8.1-6 Miscellaneous Parts, 8.1-10
8.1-7 Software, 8.1-11
8.1-8 Tools, 8.1-11
8.1-9 Tubing, 8.1-11
8.1-10 Workstation, 8.1-12
8.2-1 Front Display Panel (See Figure 8.2-1), 8.2-3
8.2-2 Data Acquisition Card Cage (See Figure 8.2-2), 8.2-5
8.2-3 Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-3), 8.2-7
8.2-4 Sensor Card and Attached Cables (See Figure 8.2-4), 8.2-9
8.2-5 VL22 - Exploded View of Upper Valve (See Figure 8.2-5), 8.2-10
8.2-6 Bracket and Fittings - Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-6), 8.2-11
8.2-7 VL21 - Exploded View of Lower Valve (See Figure 8.2-7), 8.2-12
8.2-8 Quick Disconnects Below Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-8), 8.2-13
8.2-9 Optical Collection Area, Rear View (See Figure 8.2-9), 8.2-15
8.2-10 Optical Collection Area, Front View (See Figure 8.2-10), 8.2-17

PN 4237029G xlvii
CONTENTS

8.2-11 Optical Collection Area with Filter Shield Removed (See Figure 8.2-11), 8.2-18
8.2-12 Beam-Shaping Stage Components (See Figure 8.2-12), 8.2-19
8.2-13 Flow Cell and Fluorescence Pickup Lens with Associated Hardware (See
Figure 8.2-13), 8.2-21
8.2-14 Argon Laser, Power Supply, and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-14), 8.2-23
8.2-15 Reagent Drawer (See Figure 8.2-15), 8.2-25
8.2-16 Sheath Liquid Filter (See Figure 8.2-16), 8.2-27
8.2-17 Sheath Liquid Filter Purge (Vent) Connections (See Figure 8.2-17), 8.2-29
8.2-18 Sheath Container (See Figure 8.2-18), 8.2-30
8.2-19 Cleaning Agent Container (See Figure 8.2-19), 8.2-31
8.2-20 Segmenting Valve Assembly (See Figure 8.2-20), 8.2-33
8.2-21 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Segmenting Valve Middle Pad (See
Figure 8.2-21), 8.2-34
8.2-22 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Front and Rear Segmenting Valve Pads
(See Figure 8.2-22), 8.2-35
8.2-23 Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-23), 8.2-37
8.2-24 Pinch Valve and Associated Components, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See
Figure 8.2-24), 8.2-39
8.2-25 Solenoid Manifold, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-25), 8.2-40
8.2-26 QD10 and QD11 (Coupling and Fittings), Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See
Figure 8.2-26), 8.2-41
8.2-27 Quick Disconnect Fittings and Brackets, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See
Figure 8.2-27), 8.2-43
8.2-28 Cytometer Rear Panel, Lower (See Figure 8.2-28), 8.2-45
8.2-29 Fan Assembly, Cytometer Rear Panel (See Figure 8.2-29), 8.2-47
8.2-30 Cytometer Right-Side Compartment (See Figure 8.2-30), 8.2-49
8.2-31 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card and Attached Cables (See
Figure 8.2-31), 8.2-50
8.2-32 Flexible Duct Components and Assembly Instructions (See
Figure 8.2-32), 8.2-52
8.3-1 XL-MCL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Figure 8.3-1), 8.3-3
8.3-2 XL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Figure 8.3-2), 8.3-5
8.3-3 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Figure 8.3-3), 8.3-6
8.3-4 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.3-4), 8.3-8
8.4-1 MCL Option Assembly (See Figure 8.4-1), 8.4-3
8.4-2 MCL Vertical Plate Components (See Figure 8.4-2), 8.4-5
8.4-3 Lifter Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Figure 8.4-3), 8.4-6
8.4-4 Probe Up/Down Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Figure 8.4-4), 8.4-7
8.4-5 Cables Attached to the MCL CPU Card (See Figure 8.4-5), 8.4-9
8.4-6 Cables Attached to the Bar-Code Decoder Card (See Figure 8.4-6), 8.4-11
8.4-7 MCL Covers and Associated Hardware (See Figure 8.4-7), 8.4-13
8.4-8 Carousel and Related Accessories (See Figure 8.4-8), 8.4-14
8.5-1 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Front View (See
Figure 8.5-1), 8.5-3
8.5-2 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Rear View (See
Figure 8.5-2), 8.5-5
8.5-3 Manual Sample Station for XL Cytometer (See Figure 8.5-3), 8.5-7

xlviii PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

8.5-4 Mechanical Assembly for Manual Sample Station, XL-MCL or XL (See

Figure 8.5-4), 8.5-9
8.6-1 FlowCentre II Workstation (See Figure 8.6-1), 8.6-3
8.6-2 FlowCentre Workstation (See Figure 8.6-2), 8.6-5
8.7-1 Front Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Figure 8.7-1), 8.7-3
8.7-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-2), 8.7-4
8.7-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See
Figure 8.7-3), 8.7-5
8.7-4 Front Panel including Voltage Supply Monitor Card and Hardware (See
Figure 8.7-4), 8.7-6
8.7-5 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-5), 8.7-7
8.7-6 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See
Figure 8.7-6), 8.7-8
8.7-7 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Figure 8.7-7), 8.7-9
8.7-8 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-8), 8.7-10
8.7-9 Right Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Figure 8.7-9), 8.7-11
8.7-10 Left Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Figure 8.7-10), 8.7-13
8.7-11 VL32, VL30, and VL31 - Exploded View (See Figure 8.7-11), 8.7-15
8.7-12 Rear Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See
Figure 8.7-12), 8.7-17
8.7-13 Box Fan with Related Hardware - Exploded View (See Figure 8.7-13), 8.7-19
8.7-14 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Cover, Door, Latches, and Casters (See
Figure 8.7-14), 8.7-21
8.7-15 Waste Container, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.7-15), 8.7-22
8.8-1 Front Panel Components, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-1), 8.8-3
8.8-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-2), 8.8-4
8.8-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See
Figure 8.8-3), 8.8-5
8.8-4 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-4), 8.8-6
8.8-5 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See
Figure 8.8-5), 8.8-7
8.8-6 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Figure 8.8-6), 8.8-8
8.8-7 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-7), 8.8-9
8.8-8 Upper Front Panel, Inside Components, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-8), 8.8-11
8.8-9 Left Side with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-9), 8.8-13
8.8-10 Argon Laser Power Supply and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.8-10), 8.8-15
8.8-11 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Left-Side View (See Figure 8.8-11), 8.8-17
8.8-12 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Right-Side View (See Figure 8.8-12), 8.8-19
8.8-13 Right Side with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-13), 8.8-21
8.8-14 Rear Panels with Back Cover Removed, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-14), 8.8-23
8.8-15 Cable Harness for dc Power Supplies, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-15), 8.8-25

PN 4237029G xlix
CONTENTS

8.8-16 Cables in the Top Compartment Front Area, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-16), 8.8-27
8.8-17 Cables Use to Connect the Voltage Selector 2 Card and Breaker Card (See
Figure 8.8-17), 8.8-29
8.8-18 Cables Attached to the Power Control 3 Card, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-18), 8.8-30
8.8-19 Exterior Covers, Door, Filters, and Casters for Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-19), 8.8-33
8.8-20 Interior Covers and Related Components, Universal Power Supply (See
Figure 8.8-20), 8.8-35
8.8-21 Waste Container (4 L) for Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-21), 8.8-36
8.9-1 Check Valves and Chokes with Related Components (See Figure 8.9-1), 8.9-2
8.9-2 Fittings (See Figure 8.9-2), 8.9-3
8.9-3 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.9-3), 8.9-4
A.1-1 Voltage Verification Test Points and Corresponding Adjustment
Potentiometers, A.1-1
A.1-2 MCL Power Supply Voltage Adjustments (Measured at the MCL CPU
Card), A.1-1
A.3-1 CHANNEL_500 Protocol, A.3-1
A.3-2 LIN/LOG SWITCH POINT 1 TEST Protocol, A.3-1
A.3-3 Protocol to Acquire Fluorospheres, A.3-2
A.4-1 Tests on Prefinal Software Diskette, A.4-1
A.4-2 MCL Option Commands, A.4-4
A.5-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Component and Assembly Accessibility, A.5-3
A.5-2 Components Accessed with the Cytometer Top Cover Removed and Their
Functions, A.5-6
A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage, Components and Functions, A.5-8
A.5-4 Optical Collection Area, Components and Functions, A.5-14
A.5-5 Components in the Right Side of the Cytometer and their Functions, A.5-17
A.5-6 Components Behind the Center Front Cover and their Functions, A.5-22
A.5-7 Components Behind the Filter Shield and their Functions, A.5-25
A.5-8 Components Inside the Reagent Drawer and their Functions, A.5-28
A.5-9 Components Attached to the Rear Panel and their Functions, Exterior
View, A.5-30
A.5-10 XL-MCL Manual Sample Station Components and their Functions, A.5-33
A.5-11 XL Manual Sample Station Components and their Functions, A.5-37
A.5-12 Segmenting Valve Components and Their Functions, A.5-40
A.5-13 Carousel Components and Their Functions, A.5-43
A.5-14 MCL Components Accessible with Covers Removed and Their Functions, A.5-45
A.5-15 Components in the Lower Pneumatics Drawer and Their Functions, A.5-49
A.5-16 Front Panel Display Components and Their Functions, A.5-56
A.6-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Component and Assembly Accessibility, A.6-3
A.6-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.6-5
A.6-3 Components in the Left Side Compartment of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply, A.6-10
A.6-4 Components in the Right Side Compartment of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply, A.6-13
A.6-5 Components on the Rear Panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.6-16
A.7-1 Universal Power Supply, Component and Assembly Accessibility, A.7-3

l PN 4237029G
 CONTENTS

A.7-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Universal Power Supply (See
Figure A.7-2), A.7-5
A.7-3 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Figure A.7-3), A.7-9
A.7-4 Components in the Left Side of the Universal Power Supply (See
Figure A.7-4), A.7-13
A.7-5 Components in the Right Side of the Universal Power Supply (See
Figure A.7-5), A.7-17
A.7-6 Components on the Rear Panel of the Universal Power Supply (See
Figure A.7-6), A.7-20
A.8-1 Hot Keys Available When the Acquisition Screen is Displayed, A.8-1
A.8-2 Hot Keys Available When the Listmode Screen is Displayed, A.8-1
E.2-1 802.3 Specifications, E.2-1
F.1-1 Acceptable Bar Codes, F.1-1
F.1-2 Code-Related Specifications, F.1-2
F.2-1 MCL Bar-Code Scanner - Default Configuration, F.2-2
F.3-1 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - Default Configuration, F.3-1
F.3-2 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - General Parameters, F.3-2
F.3-3 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - Symbologies, F.3-2
F.3-4 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - Keyboard Wedge Parameters, F.3-3
F.4-1 Bar-Code Printer - DIP Switch Settings, F.4-1
G.1-1 Required Operating Clearance, G.1-1
G.1-2 Power Requirements, G.1-2
G.1-3 Environmental Requirements, G.1-3

PN 4237029G li
CONTENTS

lii PN 4237029G
 1INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 MANUAL DESCRIPTION
Scope
This manual provides the reference information and procedures needed for servicing and
maintaining the COULTER® EPICS® XL™ Flow Cytometer and the COULTER® EPICS®
XL-MCL™ Flow Cytometer, hereafter referred to as the XL flow cytometer and XL-MCL flow
cytometer. It is available in two electronic versions:
r HTML - recommended for viewing because it is quicker to open and easier to navigate.
r PDF - recommended for printing because it has normal page layout and page numbering.
Both electronic versions are included in the Service Resource Kit CD-ROM, PN 6417471,
provided for Beckman Coulter Representatives.

Customer Manuals
This manual does not contain information or procedures already covered in the customer
manuals. Use this manual in conjunction with the following materials:

r COULTER® EPICS® XL and COULTER® EPICS® XL-MCL SYSTEM II™ manuals and
documents:
t Getting Started (clear binding), PN 4237238
t Operator’s Guide (red binding), PN 4237297
t Operating Summary, PN 4237299
t Reference (black binding), PN 4237298
t Data Management (white binding), PN 4237237
t Special Procedures and Troubleshooting (blue binding), PN 4237296
t Master Index, PN 4237295
t Addendum, PN 623532
r COULTER® FlowCentre™ Multimedia Workstation, PN 4237415.
With the exception of the Operating Summary and the Master Index, the Service Resource Kit
CD-ROM, PN 6417471, contains the PDF version of each customer manual as well as the
HTML and PDF versions of this service manual.

Notification of Updates
Any service memo that affects the information in this manual will include either minor
revision change pages or a Notice of Information Update form for this manual. A Notice of
Information Update form will summarize the changes and will list the specific headings,
figures, and tables affected.

Intended Audience
To use this manual effectively, you need the following:

r Beckman Coulter authorized service training on the XL flow cytometer and the XL-MCL
flow cytometer.

PN 4237029G 1.1-1
INTRODUCTION
MANUAL DESCRIPTION

r A thorough understanding of:

t Basic electronic and pneumatic principles and devices.
t Cytometry terms and concepts.
t Reagent systems.
t Quality control.
t Troubleshooting concepts.
r The ability to:
t Use basic mechanical tools and understand related terminology.
t Use a digital voltmeter (DVM) and an oscilloscope.
t Read pneumatic/hydraulic schematics and understand related terminology.
t Read electronic schematics and understand related terminology.

Organization
The material in this manual is organized into eight chapters, seven appendices, a list of
abbreviations, and a glossary. To make it easier to access the information:

r In the HTML version, each screen has -

t A Contents button linked to a master table of contents
t An Illustrations button linked to a master list of illustrations
t A Tables button linked to a master list of tables
t An Index button linked to an alphabetic index.
r In the PDF version -
t Bookmarks linked to the main headings are listed on the left side of the screen.
t A master table of contents (including master lists of the illustrations and the tables)
is included at the beginning of the manual and an alphabetic index at the end.

This manual contains:

CHAPTER 1, INTRODUCTION, includes a brief description of this manual, a list of
supporting documents, and essential safety information.

CHAPTER 2, INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION, includes an introduction to the instrument, a

description of how it functions, its major components, and various options.

CHAPTER 3, INSTALLATION PROCEDURES, consists of two sections:

r PART A contains a list of preinstallation requirements and all necessary procedures for
installing an XL flow cytometer or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a Universal Power
Supply. An installation summary is provided for those who are thoroughly familiar with
the detailed installation instructions.
r PART B contains installation procedures for all available upgrades and options.

1.1-2 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
MANUAL DESCRIPTION 1
CHAPTER 4, SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to
service and repair the instrument as well as various instructions, such as custom
programming of the bar-code scanner EEPROM. When it is applicable, the reason for doing a
procedure and any special tools or equipment needed are listed before the instructions.

CHAPTER 5, MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES, contains the procedures used to maintain

the instrument and to verify the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer is operating correctly.

CHAPTER 6, SCHEMATICS, contains document part numbers for the engineering

schematics, diagrams, and layouts needed for troubleshooting the XL or XL-MCL flow
cytometer, Universal Power Supply, or Voltage-Specific Power Supply. If you print this manual
and want to include the schematics, it provides a place to insert printouts of these documents.

CHAPTER 7, TROUBLESHOOTING, contains problem descriptions, including level-sense

indicator information and a complete list of error messages, with causes and symptoms as
well as troubleshooting actions. This chapter also details the tools available in the Prefinal
Service Software. The various tests available within this software can provide valuable
information for locating a problem.

CHAPTER 8, PARTS LISTS, provides three tools to help you locate the desired part
number(s) including an anchor illustration, a list of illustrations not referenced from the
anchor illustration, and tables of parts that are not illustrated. The majority of parts are
illustrated and can be easily found using the anchor illustration or the list of illustrations at
the beginning of the section where the part is located.

Appendices provide additional reference material:

r APPENDIX A, QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION, contains instrument tolerances
and limits, circuit board layouts for component location, applicable jumper and switch
settings for each circuit card, protocol parameters, Prefinal Service Software tests, a list of
MCL option commands, component locations and functions for the Cytometer, the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply and the Universal Power Supply, as well as the hot keys
available with SYSTEM II™ software.
r APPENDIX B, HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS,
contains the configuration for a FlowCentre™ II Workstation with a INTEL® Pentium®
III processor, a FlowCentre Workstation with an INTEL® Pentium® 199 Processor, and
the INTEL® Pentium® 166 processor, as well as the minimum requirements for the
Artisoft® LANtastic® network operating system and Sybase® SQL Anywhere™ PC
database server software.
r APPENDIX C, FIELD WORKSHEETS, contains a copy of the Field Engineer Worksheet
and the Network Configuration Worksheet for duplication.
r APPENDIX D, EXAMPLES OF SETUP FILES, contains examples of setup files for the
client flow cytometer and file server using the FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation.
r APPENDIX E, NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS,
contains general information about networking as well as specifications for the 802.3
standard.
r APPENDIX F, BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS, contains specifications for bar-code
labels, bar-code scanners, and the bar-code printer.

PN 4237029G 1.1-3
INTRODUCTION
MANUAL DESCRIPTION

r APPENDIX G, INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply),

contains the installation procedures for installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with
a Voltage-Specific Power Supply. An installation summary is provided for those who are
thoroughly familiar with the detailed installation instructions.
Abbreviations and glossary define terminology:
r ABBREVIATIONS contains a list of abbreviations, acronyms, and reference designators
either used in this manual or related to the information in this manual.
r GLOSSARY contains a collection of specialized terms, with their meanings, either used
in this manual or related to the information in this manual.

Numbering Format
Each chapter of this manual is further divided into topics that are numbered sequentially,
beginning at one. The numbering format for the topic heading, which is called the primary
heading, is chapter number, decimal point, topic number. For example, the primary heading
number for the second topic covered in Chapter 2 is 2.2.

The page (PDF version only), figure and table numbers are tied directly to the primary
heading number. For example, Heading 2.2 begins on page 2.2-1, the first figure under
Heading 2.2 is Figure 2.2-1 and the first table under Heading 2.2 is Table 2.2-1.

Note: Primary headings always begin on the top of a right-hand page.

Special Headings
Throughout this manual WARNING, CAUTION, IMPORTANT, ATTENTION, and Note
headings are used to indicate potentially hazardous situations and important or helpful
information.

WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored, can cause serious personal
injury. The word WARNING is red in the electronic manuals and is bold-faced text if the
manual is printed.

CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored, can cause damage to the
instrument. The word CAUTION is red in the electronic manuals and is bold-faced text if the
manual is printed.

IMPORTANT
An IMPORTANT indicates a situation or procedure that, if ignored, can result in erroneous
test results. The word IMPORTANT is red in the electronic manuals and is bold-faced text if
the manual is printed.

ATTENTION
An ATTENTION contains information that is critical for the successful completion of a
procedure and/or operation of the instrument. The word ATTENTION is red in the electronic
manuals and is bold-faced text if the manual is printed.

1.1-4 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
MANUAL DESCRIPTION 1
Note
A Note contains information that is important to remember or helpful in performing a
procedure. The word Note is in bold-faced text.

Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions to make the material more clear and concise. An
example is given below each explanation.

Power Supply Module Terminology

r Voltage-Specific Power Supply refers to the original Power Supply module.
r Universal Power Supply refers to the new Power Supply module with sound reduction
features.
r When referring to general information concerning the Power Supply module attached to
the instrument being serviced (either the Voltage-Specific Power Supply or the Universal
Power Supply), the more generic term Power Supply module is used.
r Within a section devoted to either the Voltage-Specific Power Supply or the Universal
Power Supply, the more generic term Power Supply module only applies to the specific
power supply being covered in that section.

Reagent Terminology
r IsoFlow™ sheath fluid is sometimes referred to as sheath, sheath fluid, or diluent.
r Flow-Check™ fluorospheres are sometimes referred to as beads.
r COULTER CLENZ® cleaning agent is sometimes referred to as cleaning agent or cleaner.

Cytometer Configurations
r XL flow cytometer refers to the standard flow cytometer.
r XL-MCL flow cytometer refers to a Cytometer with the MCL option installed either by
manufacturing or as a field upgrade.
r When referring to either an XL flow cytometer or an XL-MCL flow cytometer or both,
the more generic term “instrument” may be used.
r When referring specifically to the MCL sample handler, the term “MCL option” is used.

Workstation Configurations
The FlowCentre II Workstation has a tower computer. The layout of basic components on an
individual computer varies with the brand of computer purchased for stock and distribution.
If the tower computer you are servicing has a blanking plate where a card edge is illustrated,
the functions performed by that circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or
may not be required by that customer. In illustrations referencing the tower computer, an
ATTENTION message is positioned between the figure title and the illustration to remind you
the illustration may not exactly depict the tower computer you are servicing, but
operationally they are the same.

PN 4237029G 1.1-5
INTRODUCTION
MANUAL DESCRIPTION

Example of layout:
Figure 1.1-1 Figure Title
ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on the tower computer you are servicing may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.
Illustration that references components on the rear of the Workstation tower computer.

Screens, Screen Messages, and Menu Options

r Messages that appear on the Workstation screen are in italics font. For example:
At the monitor, verify the message STARTUP IN PROCESS appears (lower right display
area).
r The software path to a specific function or screen appears with the double solid-right
triangle ( tt ) symbol between succeeding screen options. For example:
Select File tt Save to save the changes.
t Bold, initial capped, Helvetica-condensed font indicates a screen option.
t The word “select,” when used in conjunction with a screen and its associated keys is
a short-hand way to indicate the software options you need to select, as well as the
order in which you need to select them, to display the desired screen or initiate the
desired function.
r Keys on the Workstation or laptop computer keyboard appear inside a box.
t Û means you need to press and release the key labelled Enter.
t ë ë means the keys are to be pressed in succession. For example:
Ñ Û means you must first press and release the key labelled F9 then press and
release the key labelled Enter.
t ë+ë+ë indicates that the keys shown (such as Ý+Þ+á) are linked (by the
+ symbols) for a specific function and must be pressed (and held) simultaneously or
in this sequence. For example:
Ý+Þ+á means you need to press down and hold the first key listed (in this
case, Ctrl) then press down and hold the second key listed (in this case, Alt) then
press down and hold the third key listed (in this case, Delete) so that all the keys are
being held down at the same time. Release all three keys simultaneously.
r Courier font either indicates text you have to type using the keyboard or lines of
program text that appear on the monitor screen. For example:
The statement “Type A:\INSTALL.” means you manually type the individual characters
A : \ I N S T A L L using the Workstation or laptop computer keyboard, as applicable.

1.1-6 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
MANUAL DESCRIPTION 1
About the HTML Version of this Manual
r Links to additional information are in blue and are underlined. To access the linked
information, select the blue underlined text.
r The material is divided into many small sections (electronic files) to enhance the loading
and accessibility features.
t Every primary heading is a separate file and whenever possible the amount of
material contained within one primary heading is limited to four to ten pages.
t If a primary heading must be large, such as the illustrated parts list, breaks are added
to the electronic file to further divide it.
Note: Unless you are scrolling, these divisions are invisible. If you choose to scroll
through the illustrated parts list, however, you will encounter stop points. When
you encounter a stop point, use the navigation bar to access the next section.
r To move from one section (electronic file) to the next in the HTML version of the
manual, use the right and left arrows on the navigation bar.

PN 4237029G 1.1-7
INTRODUCTION
MANUAL DESCRIPTION

1.1-8 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section covers safety precautions that you must take whenever you work on an XL or
XL-MCL flow cytometer. Additionally, when performing a procedure, always follow any safety
precautions included in that procedure, as they supplement the precautions listed in this
section.

Special
This group of warnings concerns conditions that can affect both your immediate personal
safety and the future safety of the instrument’s operators.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Covers and interlocks are installed on Beckman Coulter
instruments to prevent injury from operating components. If you must remove covers or disable interlocks
to service an instrument:
1. Be alert and use extreme care when working around exposed components to avoid personal injury.
2. At the end of the service call, always reinstall all instrument covers and ensure interlocks are enabled to
prevent operator injury.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Broken or cut components with sharp edges could puncture
your gloves and skin, causing possible injury or biohazardous contamination. Handle fragile components
carefully to avoid breakage. Replace any broken or cut components with sharp edges, even if they are still
functioning. Use mechanical means, such as hemostats, to handle a broken component, whenever feasible.
Dispose of broken components in accordance with the local regulations and acceptable laboratory practice.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Instrument doors, covers, and panels that are mishandled
can fail, leading to personal injury. Handle the doors, covers, and panels with care and always follow the
written instructions for opening and closing or removing and reinstalling them.

WARNING Risk of personal injury, operator injury, or damage to instrument components. When
performing a service call, always follow all applicable service manual or service memo instructions. When
questions arise, consult with Technical Support for guidance.

Electronic

WARNING Risk of electric shock. Be very careful when operating the instrument with a safety interlock
bypassed, as you may be exposed to electric shock. After servicing the instrument, make sure all safety
interlock switches are reactivated when covers are reinstalled.

WARNING Risk of personal injury or damage to electronic components. While performing maintenance or
service on the instrument, rings and other metal jewelry could contact exposed electronic components,
causing personal injury from electric shock, or become caught in the instrument, damaging the
components. Remove rings and other metal jewelry before doing maintenance or service on the instrument.

CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. If the power is ON while removing or replacing printed
circuit cards and electronic components, the component could be damaged. To prevent damage to
electronic components, always be sure power is OFF before removing or replacing printed circuit cards and
components.

PN 4237029G 1.2-1
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives,
add-in circuit cards, and other electronic components. If there is a possibility of ESD damage with a
procedure, then do that procedure at an ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to a
metal part of the chassis connected to an earth ground.

Biological

WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself while servicing
the instrument with the doors open, you may become injured or contaminated. To prevent possible injury or
biological contamination, you must wear appropriate safety glasses, a lab coat, and gloves when servicing
the instrument with the doors open and/or when working with pathogenic materials.

WARNING Risk of contamination. Biohazardous contamination can occur from contact with the waste
container and its associated tubing if not handled with care. Wear personal protective equipment. Avoid
skin contact. Clean up spills immediately. Dispose of the contents of the waste container in accordance with
the local regulations and acceptable laboratory practice.

Use universal precautions when working with pathogenic materials. Means must be available
to decontaminate the instrument and to dispose of biohazardous waste.

Laser

Laser Beam Hazards

WARNING Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. The laser beam can cause eye damage if viewed either directly or
indirectly from reflective surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metal surface such as a screwdriver). To
prevent eye damage, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam. Do not view directly or with optical
instruments except for special service tools as directed in the manual.

The laser is a unique light source that shows characteristics different from conventional light
sources. The safe use of the laser depends upon familiarity with the instrument and with the
properties of coherent, intense beams of light.

Because the XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers contain a laser, the customer should keep the
instrument isolated from non-laser instruments. The customer should also keep a copy of
ANSI (American National Standards Institute) Standard 136.1, SAFE USE OF LASERS, near
the instrument for ready reference. Copies are available from:

American National Standards Institute

1430 Broadway
New York, N.Y. 10018
The laser beam can cause eye or skin damage, as well as instrument damage. The laser has
enough power to ignite substances placed in the beam path, even at a distance. Indirect
contact with the laser beam by reflective surfaces (such as jewelry), called specular reflection,
might also cause damage.

1.2-2 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
For these reasons, always follow these precautions when working near an exposed laser:

r Never look directly into the laser light source or at scattered laser light from any
reflective surface. Never look down the beam into the source.
r As a precaution against accidental exposure to the output beam or its reflection, those
performing service or maintenance procedures on the system should wear proper laser
safety glasses as required by the wavelength being used.
r Do not use lasers in the presence of flammables or explosives; these include volatile
substances such as alcohol, solvents, and ether.
r Avoid direct exposure and indirect reflection of the laser beam to your skin. The
intensity of the beam can cause flesh burns.
r Assure that any spectators are not potentially exposed to a hazardous condition.
r Do not leave the laser unattended if there is a chance an unauthorized person may
attempt to use it.
r Make the following recommendations to the laboratory:
t Limit access to the instrument. Keep the instrument out of the hands of
inexperienced and untrained personnel.
t Post warning signs at the site to alert personnel that lasers are being used.
t Never remove a warning label from the instrument.
t Advise all those using the laser of these precautions.

Radiation Hazards

WARNING Risk of radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to radiation, do not use controls or
adjustments or perform any procedures other than those specified in this manual.

In the design and manufacture of the XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers, Beckman Coulter has
complied with requirements governing the use and application of a laser as stipulated in the
regulatory documents issued by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services and by
the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH).

In compliance with these regulatory documents, every measure has been taken to ensure the
health and safety of users, laboratory personnel, and service personnel from the possible
dangers of laser use. The laser is classified as Class I when it is inside the system with the
protective housing in place. In Figure 1.2-1, the laser warning label that refers to the laser as a
CLASS IIIb LASER PRODUCT applies when the laser is outside the instrument.

CDRH-approved warning labels are placed near or on those covers that when removed might
expose laser radiation. Only remove those covers when performing service and maintenance
on the system as instructed in this service manual or in the Special Procedure manual for
operators.

PN 4237029G 1.2-3
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Laser Warning Labels and Locations on Argon Laser System and Bar-Code Scanner
r Figure 1.2-1, Laser Warning Labels - Argon Laser System by JDS Uniphase
r Figure 1.2-2, Laser Warning Labels - MCL Bar-Code Scanner

Laser Warning Labels and Locations on the Cytometer

r Figure 1.2-3, Laser Warning Labels on Sensing Compartment Cover
r Figure 1.2-4, Laser Warning Labels in Optical Area, Front View
r Figure 1.2-5, Laser Warning Labels in Optical Area, Side View
r Figure 1.2-6, Laser Certification Label on Rear Cover
r Figure 1.2-7, Laser Warning Labels on the MCL Base and Probe Housing

When performing service or maintenance on the system with the covers open and the
interlock defeated, observe the following:

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Reflections of the laser beam from a shiny object, such as a screwdriver,
or direct viewing of the laser beam can severely damage your eyes. Pay attention to the warning labels on
the laser and Cytometer. Do not wear any jewelry that might reflect the laser beam. Do not observe the
intersection of the laser beam and the flow chamber directly. Wear laser safety glasses that protect against
the wavelengths in use.

Replace the covers before resuming normal operation. Make sure all interlocks and covers are
in place before leaving an account.

1.2-4 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
Laser Warning Labels and Locations on Argon Laser System and Bar-Code Scanner
Figure 1.2-1 Laser Warning Labels - Argon Laser System by JDS Uniphase

LASER RADIATION
IS EMITTED FROM LASER RADIATION-AVOID
DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
THIS APERTURE
ARGON/.50 WATT C.W.
AVOID EXPOSURE CLASS IIIb LASER PRODUCT

LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN

AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM

Laser head in Cytometer

E
AC
RF
TE
IN
ER
US

K
TL
IN
R
WE
PO O
1

R
SE
LA

R
SE
LA

Laser power supply in Universal Power Supply 7029278G

PN 4237029G 1.2-5
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Figure 1.2-2 Laser Warning Labels - MCL Bar-Code Scanner

Note: Only on a flow cytometer with the MCL option installed (XL-MCL flow cytometer).

AVOID EXPOSURE DANGER

LASER LIGHT IS EMITTED FROM LASER LIGHT WHEN OPEN.
THIS APERTURE. AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE.

MICROSCAN
939 INDUSTRY DR. TUKWILLA WA 98188

CLASS

PRODUCT CONFORMS TO DHHS

21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J
MADE IN THE USA

M S 5 1 0
MODEL

SERIAL NUMBER MANUFACTURED

LABEL F IS -0 5 1 0 -0 1 0 9
PART NO.
ON BOTTOM OF
BAR-CODE READER

CAUTION
LASER LIGHT . DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

670 nm DIODE LASER

1.0 MILLIWATT MAXIMUM CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
5968027B

1.2-6 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
Laser Warning Labels and Locations on the Cytometer
Figure 1.2-3 Laser Warning Labels on Sensing Compartment Cover

LASER RADIATION VISIBLE AND/OR INVISIBLE

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT AVOID EYE OR SKIN
EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR
SCATTERED RADIATION

CYTOMETER READY FS
SS
LASER ON AUX

FL1
SAMPLE FLOW
FL2

LOW MED HIGH FL3

FL4

Coulter Epics XL / MCL

7029085F

Figure 1.2-4 Laser Warning Labels in Optical Area, Front View

CYTOMETER READY FS

SS
LASER ON AUX

FL1
SAMPLE FLOW
FL2
LOW MED HIGH FL3
FL4

Coulter Epics XL • MCL

AVOID EXPOSURE

VISIBLE AND/OR INVISIBLE

AVOID EXPOSURE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
VISIBLE AND/OR
INVISIBLE LASER
AVOID EYE OR SKIN
RADIATION IS
EMITTED FROM EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR
THIS APERTURE. SCATTERED RADIATION

7029086G

PN 4237029G 1.2-7
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Figure 1.2-5 Laser Warning Labels in Optical Area, Side View

VISIBLE AND / OR INVISIBLE

LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED
FROM THIS APERTURE.

VISIBLE AND/OR INVISIBLE

LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN

LASER RADIATION AVOID EYE OR SKIN

IS EMITTED FROM EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR
THIS APERTURE SCATTERED RADIATION

AVOID EXPOSURE
7029087F

Figure 1.2-6 Laser Certification Label on Rear Cover

THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS
TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR,
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTIONS 1040.10
AND 1040.11.

Manufactured:
DATE 19 by:

OF COULTER CORPORATION Hialeah Fl,

2413944

If MCL option
installed, label
is here also.

T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

7029089F

1.2-8 PN 4237029G
 INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
Figure 1.2-7 Laser Warning Labels on the MCL Base and Probe Housing
Note: Only on a flow cytometer with the MCL option installed (XL-MCL flow cytometer).

AVOID EXPOSURE
VISIBLE AND/OR INVISIBLE CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED
FROM THIS APERTURE.

CAUTION
Laser radiation when open
and interlock defeated.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

CAUTION
Laser radiation when open
CAUTION and interlock defeated.
L A S E R L IG H T D O N O T S T A R E IN T O B E A M DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
670nm DIODE LASER
1.0 MILLIWATT MAXIMUM CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
7029259F

Troubleshooting
Bring the following warning to the customer’s attention before advising that customer to do
any service, maintenance, or troubleshooting procedures on the instrument.

WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself while doing
service, maintenance, and troubleshooting procedures, residual fluids in the instrument could injure or
contaminate you. Beckman Coulter recommends that you wear barrier protection, such as appropriate
safety glasses, a lab coat, and gloves throughout the performance of service, maintenance, and
troubleshooting procedures to avoid contact with cleaners and/or residual fluids in the instrument.

Also, make sure customers are aware of the warning and information labels shown in
Figures 1.2-1 through 1.2-2.

PN 4237029G 1.2-9
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.2-10 PN 4237029G
 2INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION 2
2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Function
The COULTER® EPICS® XL™ flow cytometer and the COULTER® EPICS® XL-MCL™ are
systems for the qualitative and quantitative measurement of biological and physical properties
of cells and other particles. These properties are measured when the cells pass through an
Argon laser beam in single-file. These flow cytometers can perform three- and four-color
surface marker analysis and one-color DNA analysis.

For more information on the intended use and function of these flow cytometers, refer to the
customer manuals. For document part numbers, go to Customer Manuals under Heading 1.1.

Standard XL System
The basic XL flow cytometer (Figure 2.1-1) is an individual sampling system. During sample
analysis, the Argon laser system (488 nm) can simultaneously measure forward scatter, side
scatter, and up to four fluorescent dyes. When ordering an XL flow cytometer, a Multi-tube
Carousel Loader (MCL) sample handling option is available. To streamline the initial
installation, the MCL option should be specified when the customer places the initial order.

Figure 2.1-1 Standard XL Flow Cytometer System

ATTENTION: An individual Workstation and its basic component layout may vary from that shown.

Cytometer

Workstation

. .

Coulter EPICS XL MCL

Universal
Power
Supply SYSTEM POPWER

MCL POPWER

7029266G

PN 4237029G 2.1-1
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Options

MCL Sample Handling Option

The Multi-tube Carousel Loader (MCL) is a sample loader that can automatically process up
to 32 sample tubes (Figure 2.1-2).

Figure 2.1-2 XL-MCL Flow Cytometer System

ATTENTION: An individual Workstation and its basic component layout may vary from that shown.

Cytometer

Workstation

MCL
Option
. .

Coulter EPICS XL MCL

Universal
Power
Supply SYSTEM POPWER

MCL POPWER

7029115G

If a customer requests the MCL option as part of the initial order, the MCL sample handler is
installed by manufacturing. However, when an XL is already installed and the customer
purchases the MCL option, the MCL sample handler is installed at the instrument site. Once
the MCL is installed on a Cytometer, that system is referred to as an XL-MCL flow cytometer.

See the information under Heading 2.2 for a more complete description of the MCL option
and the theory behind its operation.

Four Fluorescence Sensor Configuration Option

The XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers use optical filtering to select bandwidths corresponding
to specific fluorochromes. The instruments have two fluorescence collection configurations.
The three fluorescence sensor system is the standard configuration. The fourth fluorescence
sensor is optional. This optional PMT can be a standard PMT (300 nm to 800 nm) or a red
sensitive PMT that has a wider spectral response (300 nm to 850 nm).

For a more complete description of these configurations, see the corresponding heading
Heading 2.2:
r Standard Three Fluorescence Sensor Configuration
r Optional Four Fluorescence Sensor Configuration.

2.1-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2
Networking Option
A Beckman Coulter FlowCentre™ Multimedia Workstation can be used as an offline analysis
workstation and network server for data and worklist transfer. Refer to Heading E.1,
NETWORKING for additional information.

Other Options
Many options are available for the XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers. For a complete list of the
hardware and software options, refer to Chapter 1 of the Reference manual, PN 4237298.

Main Components
The instrument consists of the following main components (Figure 2.1-1 and Figure 2.1-2):
r Cytometer
Note: Figure 2.1-2 includes the MCL sample handling option.
r Power Supply module
r Workstation

Cytometer
The Cytometer contains the:
r Fluids and pneumatic components for processing samples
r Argon laser, flow cell, and optics to analyze cells
r All signal processing electronics
r Optional MCL for processing single or multiple samples

See the information under Heading 2.2 for a more complete description of the Cytometer and
its main components.

Power Supply Module

The XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer receives power from either a Universal Power Supply or a
Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Both Power Supply modules are designed to supply dc
voltages to the Cytometer. All the power supplies and the pneumatic compressor are housed
inside these Power Supply modules.

New XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers are now being shipped with the Universal Power
Supply, referred to as UPS, instead of the original Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
r Shipment of XL flow cytometers with a Universal Power Supply began with Cytometer
serial number AH42001.
r Shipment of XL-MCL flow cytometers with a Universal Power Supply began with
Cytometer serial number AH40001.

PN 4237029G 2.1-3
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Universal Power Supply Voltage-Specific Power Supply

SYSTEM POPWER

MCL POPWER

7029265G
7318335B

The original Power Supply module, now called the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, is referred
to as voltage-specific because four power configurations are required to suit the different
world standard power requirements:

r 100 Vac system

r 120 Vac system
r 220 Vac system
r 230/240 Vac system

The Power Supply module is not only used with the COULTER® EPICS® XL™ and
COULTER® EPICS® XL-MCL™ flow cytometers but also with the Cytomics FC 500 Series
cytometers. As a result, manufacturing built twelve different Power Supply modules (four
power configurations for XL flow cytometer, another four configurations for the XL-MCL
flow cytometer, and four power configurations for the FC 500 Series cytometers,).

The Universal Power Supply is designed to streamline the manufacturing process. Instead of
building twelve different Power Supply modules, manufacturing now produces a single
Power Supply module that, during installation, can be configured to match the standard
power requirements for the country in which the XL, XL-MCL flow cytometer or FC 500
system is being installed.

Since the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is already installed on many XL and XL-MCL flow
cytometers and since it is a reliable Power Supply module with a long expected life, you will
continue to encounter the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Consequently, procedures for the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply remain in the customer and service manuals.

For a more complete description of these Power Supply modules, refer to:
r Heading 2.3, VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY
r Heading 2.4, UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY.

2.1-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2
Interchangeability
During troubleshooting, Power Supply modules are interchangeable under the following
conditions:
r A Universal Power Supply can replace a Voltage-Specific Power Supply only if the
Universal Power Supply is first configured to match the voltage configuration of the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply being replaced.
r A Voltage-Specific Power Supply can replace a Universal Power Supply only if the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply:
t Is the model designated to supply dc voltages to that particular Cytometer. In other
words, an XL-MCL flow cytometer requires a Voltage-Specific Power Supply
designed for an XL-MCL flow cytometer, not one designed for an XL or FC 500
series instrument.
t Is the power configuration that meets the standard power requirements for the
country where the Power Supply modules are located.

Workstation
The Workstation for an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer is composed of a:
r Tower computer that contains -
t An INTEL Pentium processor (including the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card)
t A 3.5 in. floppy diskette drive
t A CD-ROM drive
r Mouse (including a mouse pad)
r Keyboard (small or large)
r Color monitor

See the information under Heading 2.5 for a more complete description of the Workstation
and its components.

Diagnostic Products
Refer to Chapter 1 of the Reference manual, PN 4237298, for the diagnostic products used on
the instrument.

Physical Specifications
The physical specifications for installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer are defined under
Heading 3.1, PRE-SITE INSPECTION. Refer to Table 3.1-1 for required operating clearances.
For any other physical specifications, refer to Chapter 4 of the Reference manual,
PN 4237298.

Performance Specifications and Characteristics

See Heading A.1, TOLERANCES AND LIMITS, for the performance specifications needed to
service the instrument. For any other performance specifications or performance
characteristics, refer to Chapter 4 of the Reference manual, PN 4237298.

PN 4237029G 2.1-5
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Leakage Current Specifications

Beckman Coulter instruments are evaluated and approved to the following safety standards:
r Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), UL 61010A-1 Electrical Equipment for Laboratory
Use; Part 1; General Requirements
r Canadian Safety Standard (CSA), C22.2 No. 1010-1, Safety Standard for Laboratory
Equipment
r International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), IEC 61010-1, Safety Requirements for
Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Equipment

As defined in these standards, instruments may have a maximum leakage current at accessible
parts of no more than 0.5 mA under normal mode conditions, and no more than 3.5 mA
under single fault conditions.

2.1-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
2.2 CYTOMETER
The Cytometer contains all the necessary optics, fluidics, and electronics required to analyze
samples: the laser head, optical housing assembly, flow cell, sheath container, and cleaning
agent container. All the pinch valves, fixed regulators, plumbing, ductwork, and the Data
Acquisition card cage are housed in the Cytometer to control sample input, sense, amplify,
discriminate, and digitize signals.

r All covers can be removed without affecting unit operation, as long as the corresponding
interlock is disabled (bypassed). At the end of the service call, all instrument covers must
be reinstalled to ensure proper operation of the interlocks.
r A parallel interface cable is used to connect the Cytometer to the Power Supply module.
r A fiber optic cable is used to connect the Cytometer to the Workstation.
r Linear power supplies housed in the Power Supply module convert ac voltages to dc
voltages for use by the Cytometer.
r Power is supplied by the interconnect power harness from the Power Supply module.

To eliminate internal signal cables, the instrument has a multi-layered system backplane,
referred to as the Analyzer backplane. The only signals that travel through BNC signal cables
are those from the Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT), Forward Scatter (FS), and Side Scatter (SS)
sensors. All other signals pass through one of the Analyzer backplane's eight layers (planes).
Refer to Figure 2.2-1.

Figure 2.2-1 Cytometer Overview

Fan Upper Fan
Fiber optic
pneumatics drawer
interface
L S C
Card cage
a h l
s Sensor e e
e card a a
r t n
h s
B
Laser e
l t
head
o a t
w n a
e k n
r k
s

PMT and Fan

CTRL card

Switch and
PMTs
LED card SS Amp
FS
Switch
membrane
Lower Manual Front panel display
pneumatics drawer sample station 7029263F

PN 4237029G 2.2-1
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

Optics
The instrument’s optics system requires no customer alignment. The system produces DNA
quality Coefficient of Variation (CV) and detects <1000 molecules of fluorescein. Minimal
alignment is performed by Field Engineers at installation.

The beam-shaping optics (Figure 2.2-2) are made up of two lenses, an 80-mm cylindrical lens
that controls the X-axis dimension of the laser beam and a 10-mm cylindrical lens that
controls the Y-axis dimension. The lenses are mounted on stages for alignment purposes.

Figure 2.2-2 Beam-Shaping Optics

CROSS SECTION
BEFORE LENSES

CROSS SECTION
AFTER VERTICAL LENS

CROSS SECTION
LASER
AFTER HORIZONTAL LENS
BEAM

VERTICAL
LENS FLOW
CELL
LASER BEAM
DIRECTION

HORIZONTAL
LENS

7029041C

Laser
The instrument incorporates a JDS Uniphase Argon Ion Gas Laser. The system idles the laser
to prolong the life of the laser. The laser is cooled by forced air from two 24 Vdc fans in a
blower assembly mounted on the Cytometer frame. Cool air from this blower assembly is
forced into the left side of the laser and the hot exhaust air is released out the back of the
Cytometer through an insulated duct mounted on the top of the laser head.

Flow Cell
The flow cell is mounted directly between the beam-shaping assembly and the FS detector in
the path used by the 488 nm Argon laser beam.

If the cells were to move through the laser beam in different ways during sample flow, sample
analysis could be distorted. A process called hydrodynamic focusing occurs inside the flow
cell to ensure that cells move through the laser beam one at a time, along the same path.

2.2-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
The flow cell (Figure 2.2-3) sensing area consists of a 250-µ square quartz channel with an
integral lens mounted with a vertical (upward) flow path. A stream of sheath fluid,
pressurized at a constant 4 psi, enters the channel at the lower end and flows upward
(Figure 2.2-3). While the sheath stream is flowing through the channel, sample pressure is
applied to push a stream of sample from the bottom of the flow cell upward, injecting the
sample into the middle of the sheath stream (Figure 2.2-3). Because the pressure being
applied to the sheath differs from the pressure being applied to the sample stream, the two
streams are traveling at different rates so that the sheath stream surrounds, but does not mix,
with the sample stream. The pressure of the sheath stream focuses the sample stream so that
cells flow through the sensing area (the center of the 250-µ square quartz channel) single file
(one at a time).

Figure 2.2-3 Flow Cell

TO
NORMAL SAMPLE FLOW WASTE
SENSING AREA
(HAS SQUARE CHANNEL)
SAMPLE SHEATH
STREAM STREAM

CELLS
DIRECTION OF
LASER BEAM

SHEATH STREAM
ENTERS HERE

SAMPLE STREAM
TO WASTE
ENTERS HERE

PRIME FLOW AND CLEANSE FLOW

DIRECTION OF DIRECTION OF
LASER BEAM (OSCILLATES) LASER BEAM
TO WASTE

SHEATH STREAM SHEATH STREAM

DURING PRIME, DURING PRIME,
CLEANING AGENT CLEANING AGENT
DURING CLEANSE DURING CLEANSE 7029042C

Pushing the sample from the bottom of the flow cell upward through the sensing area aids in
the removal of air bubbles that can get trapped in the flow cell. Air bubbles and particles
passing through the sensing area are sent to the waste port located at the top of the flow cell
(Figure 2.2-3). An additional waste port is located lower on the side (Figure 2.2-3).

The flow cell senses in a 250-µ square quartz channel (Figure 2.2-3) and uses a lens to
enhance the collection efficiency.

PN 4237029G 2.2-3
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

Pinhole Assembly
The collection lenses used in the pinhole assembly are a set of anti-reflection coated,
multi-element lenses. The collection lenses, PMTs, filter holders, and side-scatter diode (also
referred to as the SS detector or SS sensor) are located in the optical-housing assembly.

Forward Scatter (FS) Detector

The forward-scatter detector (also referred to as the FS detector or FS sensor) is a solid-state
diode and is equipped with a slide-into-place scatter angle reducer (ND 1 filter).

Laser Intersection
The Cytometer uses an air-cooled 488 nm Argon laser (set to 20 mW) to excite the sample in
the core stream in the flow cell area. This 488 nm Argon laser is mounted in a pre-targeted
position that sits directly in front of an 80 mm beam-shaping lens and a 10 mm lens. As these
lenses correctly shape and steer the Argon laser beam through the flow cell chamber, sample
particles inside the aperture are excited and scattered light is emitted. As the laser beam exits
the flow cell, its path ends at the forward scatter mask assembly beam dump.

Optical Filters
The XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers use optical filtering to select bandwidths corresponding
to specific fluorochromes. The instruments have two fluorescence collection configurations.
The three fluorescence sensor system is the standard configuration. The fourth fluorescence
sensor is optional.

Standard Three Fluorescence Sensor Configuration

Figure 2.2-4 shows the filter configuration for the three fluorescence sensor configuration.
The light from the 488 DL filter transmits to a 488 BK filter (a 488 nm laser-light blocking
filter). The 488 BK filter blocks any remaining laser light, transmitting only fluorescent light.
The remaining optical filters separate the light for the three fluorescence sensors.

A 550 DL filter is at a 45-degree angle to the light path. It reflects light less than 550 nm to a
525 nm band pass (525 BP) filter that transmits light between 505 nm and 545 nm to the FL1
sensor. The light the 550 DL filter transmits is between 555 nm and 725 nm.

The next dichroic long pass filter, also positioned at a 45-degree angle to the light path, is a
600 DL filter that provides light to two places:

r It reflects light between 555 nm and 600 nm to a 575 BP filter in front of the FL2 sensor.
The 575 BP transmits light between 560 nm and 590 nm to the FL2 sensor.
r It transmits light between 605 nm and 725 nm to a 620 BP filter in front of the FL3
sensor. The 620 BP filter transmits light between 605 nm and 635 nm to the FL3 sensor.

2.2-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
Figure 2.2-4 Standard Three Fluorescence Sensor Configuration
FL2
SENSOR FL3
FL1 SENSOR
SENSOR

575 BP
620 BP
SS
SENSOR 525 BP

600 DL
PICKUP LENS/
SPATIAL FILTER 550 DL
ASSEMBLY
488 BK

488 DL
NEUTRAL DENSITY
LASER
FILTER (IF DESIRED)
BEAM
DIRECTION
FS
SENSOR
FLOW
CELL

5968017C

PN 4237029G 2.2-5
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

Optional Four Fluorescence Sensor Configuration

Figure 2.2-5 shows the filter configuration for the four fluorescence sensor configuration. It
uses the same filters as the three fluorescence sensor configuration, up to and including the
600 DL filter.

A different dichroic long pass filter, a 645 DL, provides light to two places:
r It reflects the light between 605 nm and 645 nm to a 620 BP filter in front of the FL3
sensor. The 620 BP filter transmits light between 605 nm and 635 nm to the FL3 sensor.
r It transmits light between 650 nm and 725 nm to a 675 BP filter in front of the FL4
sensor. The 675 BP filter transmits light between 660 nm and 700 nm to the FL4 sensor.

The optional FL4 sensor (PMT) can be either a standard PMT (300 nm to 800 nm) or a red
sensitive PMT that has a wider spectral response (300 nm to 850 nm).

Figure 2.2-5 Optional Four Fluorescence Sensor Configuration

FL4
SENSOR
FL3 (OPTIONAL )
SENSOR
FL2
SENSOR
FL1 620 BP
SENSOR
575 BP
675 BP
525 BP
SS
SENSOR

645 DL

PICKUP
LENS/ 600 DL
SPATIAL FILTER
ASSEMBLY
550 DL

488 BK

488 DL
LASER
BEAM
DIRECTION
FS
SENSOR
FLOW
CELL

NEUTRAL DENSITY 5968024C

FILTER ( IF DESIRED )

2.2-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
Nomenclature
Each filter holder is clearly labeled to identify the filter and can be read when the holder is
installed. The types of optical filters used in the XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers include:

r Band Pass (BP) filters

BP filters pass a narrow band of wavelengths and block all others. These filters are used
to pass fluorescence light from a single dye, while blocking light from other dyes.
r Blocking (BK) filters
BK filters pass light at all wavelengths except for a narrow band of blocked wavelengths.
The filters are identified by the lase line they most effectively block; they typically pass
about 0.01 to 1.0% of those wavelengths. These filters are used to block intense laser
light scatter.
r Dichroic Long Pass (DLP or DL) filters
DLP filters pass longer wavelengths and reflect shorter ones. These filters are identified
by their 50% transmittance wavelength.
r Neutral Density (ND) filter
ND filters do not discriminate light by wavelength; they block all wavelengths equally.
This filter is in front of the forward scatter detector to prevent detector saturation.

Signal Processing
As cells in the sample stream go through the sensing area of the flow cell, the laser beam
illuminates them. The cells scatter the laser light and emit fluorescent light from fluorescent
dyes attached to them.

The amount of laser light scattered at narrow angles to the axis of the laser beam is called
forward scatter (FS). The amount of FS is proportional to the size of the cell that scattered the
laser light. The amount of laser light scattered at about a 90° angle to the axis of the laser
beam is called side scatter (SS). The amount of SS is proportional to the granularity of the cell
that scattered the laser light.

In addition to the SS, the cells emit fluorescent light (FL) at all angles to the axis of the laser
beam. Because the amount of fluorescent light (FL) emitted is directly proportional to the
amount of fluorescing dye attached to the cell, the FL parameter can be used to indirectly
measure the characteristics of the cells emitting the light, depending on the reagents used. FL
is commonly used to identify molecules such as cell surface antigens.

Fluorescent light (FL) occurs due to the excitation produced by laser light in response to the
reaction of dyes on the sample. This light, combined in the fluorescent pick up lens, consists
of different wavelengths that are passed or bounced off filters to bring the light into the Photo
Multiplier Tubes (PMT). The light entering a PMT is amplified by the PMT and turned into a
voltage pulse. This pulse is then sent to the amplifier signal conditioner where it is further
amplified and converted to an integral signal. The amplified pulses are then digitized and
selected signals are converted to light, and sent across the fiber optic cable to the Workstation
computer for processing.

PN 4237029G 2.2-7
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

Data Acquisition Card Cage

The Data Acquisition card cage is hinge mounted and can be held open (supported) in the
upright position for troubleshooting while the system is running. The Data Acquisition card
cage houses the Analyzer backplane (system backplane) with 12 slots for custom electronic
cards and four slots for the high voltage (HV) power supplies used by the PMTs. All external
devices (front panel display, front panel switch, pressure sensors and regulator controls,
fluidics control valves and level sensors, laser interlocks and power supply, the Workstation,
and power supplies) connect to the Analyzer backplane (Figure 2.2-6).

Figure 2.2-6 Cytometer System Block Diagram

Analog Signal Processing Block
Optical Block Amp/Signal conditioners VME
PMT high voltage supplies Bus
PMT 1 SS Detector
Optional Test PC card
PMT 2 FS Detector
PMT 3 System Interface Block
PMT 4
Solenoid drivers Level detectors CUSTOM
Laser control System Bus
Pressure control Parameter SW

Cytometer Data Processor Block

System Function Block
Cyto Transputer card Pressure sensors
Trans Data Acquisition card Temperature sensor
Argon air-cooled laser
Solenoids
Pressure regulators
Sheath container
Cleanse container
Fiber Waste container
Optics Adaptor Fiber optics link
Transmit link to Workstation
Receive link

Front Panel Display

7029175G

2.2-8 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
Analyzer Backplane Functions
The Analyzer backplane is a multi-layered card with each layer (plane) having a specific
function as shown in Table 2.2-1.

Table 2.2-1 Analyzer Backplane’s Function

Plane Function
1 (bottom) Chassis GND, 24 V GND, 24 Vdc / solenoid signals
2 Signal (VME, low level dc and control) / +5 V copper
3 Digital GND, -15 Vdc
4 Signals (digital, analog, custom bus, digital GND)
5 Analog and digital GND
6 VME bus (handles all instrument status signals) / Digital GND copper
7 +5 Vdc, +15 Vdc
8 (top) VME custom signal bus, Bertan Power / Digital GND copper

The Analyzer backplane uses a modified version of the VME standard. The card connectors
are two-keyed, 96-pin, DIN connectors (to ensure that the cards are not installed backwards)
and provide an airtight seal for improved reliability. All connectors on the Analyzer backplane
are keyed and are of a different size.

Circuit cards connected to the Analyzer backplane include the:

r Amplifier / Signal Conditioner Card, commonly referred to as the Amp or Amplifier card
r Trans Data Acquisition Card
r System Interface Card
r Cyto Transputer Card
r MCL Interface Card (only if MCL option is installed).

Amplifier / Signal Conditioner Card

The instrument contains seven identical Amp/Signal Conditioner cards, six if it is a
three-color system. These cards accept peak signals from the preamplifiers (PMT, FS detector,
and SS diode). After passing through a 5 microseconds delay line, the amplified signals are
peak sensed and held in either a peak or an active integrating mode, and the result is captured
for digitization. To handle the wide dynamic range of signals required for the four-decade log
transformation, the signals pass through two paths that vary in gain by a factor of 32. The
output of the high-gain channel is presented to the system for digitization until the output of
that channel exceeds 9.0 V, then the low gain result is presented. The digitization system is
informed of which result is being presented. Refer to Figures 2.2-7 and 2.2-8.

PN 4237029G 2.2-9
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

Figure 2.2-7 Amplifier Block Diagram

SIGNAL INPUT
AUX INPUT
I TEST INPUT O AUX OUT
N
U
P Amplifier AUX PULSE T
U Gain P DATA BUS 1
T Block U TRIGGER OUT
TRIGGER PULSE
T
B ADC BUS OUT
U Control 5 Microsecond B
F logic Delay U
F Block DATA BUS 2 OUT
F
E
STRETCHED F
R
PULSE E
S Peak / Integral R /LOGRANGE OUT
Sampling LOGRANGE S
Block

7318139A

Figure 2.2-8 Amplifier Analog Bus Interface

Data Bus 2
Diode sensor
optical gain SS Data Bus 1/TRIGGER
To
ADC Bus ADC
Diode sensor FS
AUX AUX Bus

PMT 4
PMT
PMT 3

PMT PMT 2

PMT PMT 1

PMT

Option amplified for Stretched Pulse

Amplified Pulse for System Trigger Analog Bus functions are software selectable
Stretched Pulse for ADC conversion
Only one amplifier slot is allowed on a Bus
AUX slot inputs this Bus
at any given time
All cards output to it 7029176G

Also resident on the Amp/Signal Conditioner card are the control digital-to-analog converters
(DACs) for the PMT HV power supplies. Each of the first four Amp/Signal Conditioner card
slots on the Analyzer backplane is wired to one of the PMT HV power supplies. The card
address for each card is obtained from the Analyzer backplane. No address jumpers are
incorporated on the card.

2.2-10 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
Software addressing through the multi-layer Analyzer backplane determines which signal
each card processes. Troubleshooting is as simple as swapping the card under question with a
card that is known to be good.

Trans Data Acquisition Card

The Trans Data Acquisition card provides event detection through a single-trigger
discriminator driven by any one of the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards. The trigger level is set
by a DAC. When an event is detected, a state machine on the Trans Data Acquisition card
sequences the peak sense and hold circuits on the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards. The desired
signals are captured and stored for digitization. At the end of the event capture sequence a
second state machine is requested to leave its background task of digitizing and transmitting
of the analog operating parameters. The captured signal is digitized with 15 bits of resolution
and then passed on to the Cyto Transputer card and the front panel bar-graph displays. At the
end of the digitization sequence a digital elapsed time stamp is transmitted for each event. A
count rate meter function records the rate of the triggered events processed, on a
second-by-second basis (Figure 2.2-9).

Figure 2.2-9 Trans Data Acquisition Card Block Diagram

ELAPSE
ANALOG
ELAPSE
TIME
BUS
TIME
CONTROL

STATE
LINK
DISCRIMINATOR MACHINE

DISPLAY
SAMPLE ADC DRIVER
AND
HOLD

PULSE
OPEN/ CONTROL
GENERATOR
CLOSE

ASTR VME BUS RATE

ASA0 INTFC METER

ANALOG TRIG ADC TO VME BUS TEST PULSE FRONT PANEL TO CYTO
CONTROL BUS BUS 1 - 7 LEDS TRANSPUTER CARD
BUS
TO BACKPLANE 7029028B

PN 4237029G 2.2-11
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

System Interface Card

The System Interface card provides the system interface required to control all pneumatics,
fluidics, and laser systems using both digital and analog signal control (Figure 2.2-10).

Figure 2.2-10 System Interface Card Block Diagram

FAN AND LASER
BLOWER CONTROL

VME PNEUMATIC
BUS CONTROL

SYSTEM INTERFACE

PNEUMATIC BUS I/O LASER

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
TEMP
SYSTEM
CUSTOM
BUS COMP
ANALOG CONTROL
SOLENOID CONTROL
CONTROL

LEVEL
SENSE
HARNESS
LEVEL SENSE AND
LASER CONTROL
CONTROL SENSORS
SOLENOID
CONTROL

7029034B

The solenoid valves controlling the fluidics are controlled by an active output on the
corresponding control lines loaded by the system's data bus.

The System Interface card monitors the solid-state pressure sensors for precise sample and
sheath pressures. Because the sampling system is pressure driven, it requires precise control
of the pressure differential applied to the sample in reference to the sheath pressure. The
precision of the instrument is directly proportional to the stability of this differential. The
system uses set point and pressure feedback systems to ensure precise digital control of
differential pressure and continuous regulation of the set point.

r Controls sheath flow via a mechanical regulator set to 4.0 psi.

r Controls sample flow via an electronic regulator that is user selectable to the following
approximations when calibrated:
LOW = 3.72 ±0.02 psi
MED = 3.92 ±0.02 psi
HIGH = 4.12 ±0.02 psi.

The laser is controlled by this card using a digital-to-analog converter to set a reference
voltage. This digitally-controlled voltage is applied to the Laser Power supply and provides
output light power. A similar circuit provides tube current.

The System Interface card also monitors Sheath, Cleaner, and Waste Level sensors, laser
interlocks, and fluid sensors provided for areas not intended to contain fluid.

2.2-12 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
Cyto Transputer Card
The Cyto (Cytometer) Transputer card provides the instrument with a dedicated control and
data processing system composed of two programmed 400 series INMOS transputers. The
card receives signals from the Cytometer push-button switches and from the PC
Transprocessor. It performs all control and adjustment operations of the Cytometer, monitors
the operation of the sensor in real time, and reports all error conditions to the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (Figure 2.2-11).

Figure 2.2-11 Cyto Transputer Card Block Diagram

LINK
TRANSPUTER #1 TRANSPUTER #2

32 K EPROM
1 MB RAM
BOOT ROMS

LINK LINK
1 MB RAM

VME INTERFACE

SWITCH LED
INPUTS DRIVER
ADDRESS DATA

TO OPTO TO VME BUS FRONT PANEL FRONT PANEL TO TRANS-

TRANSPUTER SWITCH LEDS DATA ACQUISITION
EXEM CARD CARD 7029029B
TO BACKPLANE

The data processor system performs the following functions:

r Accepts the list data stream from the ADC on the Trans Data Acquisition card via a high
speed serial link.
r Normalizes the results to 32-bit integer data.
r Performs subtractive cross normalization to correct for dye-spectra overlap (if conditions
are set by the operator).
r Performs logarithmic conversions using a look-up table.
r Outputs both linear and logarithmic list mode data at 10-bit resolution in the ELITE
Listmode Data Format.
r Communicates with the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card via a high speed, serial,
optical-fiber link.

PN 4237029G 2.2-13
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

MCL Interface Card

Note: The MCL Interface card is present only when the MCL option is installed.

In an XL-MCL flow cytometer, the MCL Interface card provides parallel interface to the MCL
CPU card (Figure 2.2-12). The MCL Interface card is located in the Data Acquisition card
cage and the MCL CPU card is mounted to the MCL frame.

Figure 2.2-12 MCL Interface Card Block Diagram of Operation

MCL CPU card MCL Interface card

ACK

OBF

Output port

STB

IBF

Input port

7318040A

Data is sent from the MCL Interface card and sent out to the MCL CPU card through a 50-pin
blue-ribbon cable that is connected from the Analyzer backplane to the MCL CPU card on the
MCL frame.

Communication is provided by two unidirectional 8-bit parallel ports, a data input and
output port. Commands are sent to the MCL CPU by presenting eight bits of data to the Input
port and pulsing the Strobe line (indicated by an LED mounted to the card). The IBF (Input
Buffer) activates another LED on the card to indicate the data is latched in. To read the data
sent back from the MCL CPU, the OBF (Output Buffer) is activated to await a message back
from the MCL CPU. The MCL CPU reads the data which clears the IBF. The MCL CPU card
then sends an ACK (ACKNOWLEDGE signal) back to the MCL Interface card to inform MCL
Interface card that it has received and successfully performed the command operation.

If the MCL CPU does not execute the command operation properly, a NACK signal (NOT
ACKNOWLEDGE signal) is sent back to the MCL Interface and an error message is generated
and displayed on the Workstation.

2.2-14 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
Optical Transprocessor Extended Memory Cards
The Optical (Opto) Transprocessor Extended Memory (EXMEM or EXEM) card (located in
the Workstation tower computer) provides the communication interface from the Cytometer
to the Computer Workstation. Two versions of this circuit card exist - the original circuit card
referred to as the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card and the new circuit card referred to as
the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card.

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card

The original circuit card, the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card, incorporates a 12 V relay to
control power to the Cytometer. This card contains two 4 MB memory blocks for each of the
two transputers. The fiber optics bidirectional transmitter and receiver also reside on this card
(Figure 2.2-13).

Figure 2.2-13 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card Block Diagram

Memory 4 MB Memory 4 MB Fiber optic To

Link Link
transmitter and Cytometer
Transputer #1 Transputer #2 * receiver

CYT12 To Power
Link I/O Decoder Relay Supply
module

PC Bus interface

Extended Bus PC Bus * Newer card has

7029020D only one transputer
.

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card

The newer Optical Transprocessor Extended Memory card (referred to as the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card) has only one transputer and the CYT12 is replaced by a fiber
optic receiver.

Transputers
The instrument incorporates the use of transputers located on the Cytometer Transputer
card, the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card, and the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card.
Transputers offer scalable or linear solutions to application problems previously requiring
additional hardware development. The instrument’s transputers perform several functions
previously implemented in hardware including: color compensation, log amplification, ratio,
and Listmode data framing.

Categorized as Multiple Instruction Multiple Data (MIMD) computers, these hardware

devices are single-chip, 32-bit microcomputers that have their own local memory and
communications links. Because a transputer is a parallel microprocessor it is able to perform
different tasks on separate data simultaneously.

PN 4237029G 2.2-15
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

Structurally, a transputer is a monolithic device containing an integer processor, fast memory,

and multiple serial communications links allowing point-to-point connections with
additional transputers. Communication between links runs simultaneously to maximize the
performance of processor computation. Information passes bidirectionally on two wires
between one pair of transputers in a computing network. This is an advantage over
conventional microprocessors requiring 32-parallel lines in each direction for every pair
connection by reducing the need for additional hardware layout.

Other Circuit Cards Located inside the Cytometer

PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card

The PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card is mounted on the optical bench, near the
Argon laser head. This circuit card contains a row of connectors to supply the ±15 Vdc for the
PMTs, side-scatter diode, and the FS detector. This circuit card also controls the laser blower
assembly and the laser interlock switch that is activated when the Cytometer top cover is
removed. The laser blower assembly is comprised of the two cooling fans and associated
hardware mounted on the inside of the Cytometer left-side frame. These fans cool the Argon
laser head.

Fiber Optic Interface Card

The Fiber Optic Interface card is mounted on the back of the Cytometer rear panel. This
circuit card receives digital data from the Cyto Transputer card via the Analyzer backplane
and a ribbon cable. The Fiber Optic Interface card converts the digital data to light data then
transmits the light data to the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor
EXMEM II card (whichever is applicable) inside the Workstation computer. Once the light
data is received, the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card
(whichever is applicable) sends back an acknowledgment in light data to the Cytometer’s
Fiber Optic Interface RECEIVE line which is converted back to digital data before being sent
back to the Cyto Transputer card via the ribbon cable and Analyzer backplane. This process
continues throughout the operation of the Cytometer.

Sensor Card
The Sensor card, located in the upper pneumatics drawer, monitors the sheath and sample
pressure via two transducers that are mounted to the circuit card. Connected to the analyzer
backplane via ribbon cables and discrete wires, this card communicates through these wires
to the System Interface card connected to the analyzer backplane.

Solenoid Power Distribution Card

The Solenoid Power Distribution card (also referred to as the Solenoid Control card) is
positioned above the other lower pneumatics drawer components. This circuit card provides
the wiring interface for control of the solenoid valves from the analyzer backplane’s System
Interface card. For each solenoid located inside the lower pneumatics drawer, a set of discrete
wires with a connector is soldered to the Solenoid Power Distribution card. When a
connector is properly attached to its designated solenoid, a pathway is completed between the
System Interface card and the solenoid via the Solenoid Power Distribution card. During a
cycle, the System Interface card transmits a signal via the Solenoid Power Distribution card to
energize each solenoid needed to complete a required task.

2.2-16 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER 2
MCL Option - Theory of Operation
The MCL option allows the XL-MCL flow cytometer to automatically process up to 32 sample
tubes. The MCL option can be ordered as an upgrade to an existing XL flow cytometer or an
MCL option can initially be ordered and installed on an XL flow cytometer by the
manufacturing department before shipment to the customer.

The major components of the XL-MCL flow cytometer are:

r The MCL option assembly containing the controller, bar-code scanner and controller,
pneumatic valves, and sensor
r A blue, flat-ribbon, parallel interface cable
r A sample station
r A linear power supply (+5, ±12 and +24 Vdc)
r The MCL Interface card.

Upon power up, the COULTER® EPICS® XL/XL-MCL SYSTEM Software (hereafter referred
to as SYSTEM II software) detects the presence of the MCL Interface card to enable the
operational code needed to support the XL-MCL flow cytometer. Commands are then sent
out through the parallel interface cable to the MCL Controller card that is mounted to the
XL-MCL flow cytometer’s frame.

The carousel is rotated by a stepper motor operated by a 24 Vdc power supply. The stepper
motor is geared through the use of a belt to ensure that extremely accurate angular
positioning is achieved. A 32-position encoded disk is used with optical sensors to verify that
the carousel is rotated to the desired position. An additional gear and belt assembly are used
on the vortex assembly to gently mix the sample in the test tubes to resuspend the sample.

The carousel in/out movement, the lifting and lowering of the vortex motor and the lowering
and raising of the sample pickup probe are all achieved by air cylinders controlled by solenoid
valves. The solenoids distribute 30 psi.

A bar-code scanner is used to ensure positive sample identification. An air cylinder is used to
push a mechanical finger that rotates the test tubes for bar-code reading when the test tube
has a label placed on it.

After the SYSTEM II software has been loaded on power up, the software sends out a value to
the MCL Interface card to determine if the card is installed. If the card is detected, another
command is sent out to check if the interface cable from the backplane to the MCL CPU card
is connected. If connected, the MCL option performs a series of self tests to ensure that the
sensors and pneumatic hardware are operational. The system sends a command to lift the
vortexer (LV sensor and LV solenoid), lower the sample probe (PROBE sensor and PROBE
solenoid), move the carousel base out (CAR sensor and CAROUSEL solenoid), and rotate the
carousel to find the home position (checks the tube position sensor, TB, and home sensor,
HM). Any failure encountered is displayed on the monitor in the form of an error message.
An interlock sensor is used to ensure that the cover to the carousel area is closed. If this
sensor is not satisfied, the MCL option will not operate. Refer to the MCL Interconnect
schematic and the MCL CPU card schematic for sensor locations. For the part numbers and
location of these schematic files, see Heading 6.1, ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS.

PN 4237029G 2.2-17
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
CYTOMETER

The MCL option can be started two ways; selecting AUTO on the sample station keypad, or
using the mouse, selecting RUN on the monitor. When enabled, the software checks the
status of the door interlock (SW1). If satisfied, the carousel rotates to the load position via the
stepper motor. The CAROUSEL solenoid valve fires, moving the carousel in and placing it
under the sample head. The bar-code scanner fires to read the carousel label, then the stepper
motor rotates a step to the test tube position one label.

The bar-code scanner reads test tube position one and compares it with the encoder wheel
position to ensure that the proper position and test tube is in place. The valve ROTATOR is
enabled to move the finger out and back in to rotate the test tube. The bar-code scanner fires
to read the bar-code label installed on the test tube. The finger is activated three times to
rotate the test tube and the bar-code scanner fires three times to try and read the label on the
test tube.

If no label is read, a NO READ appears on the histogram report alerting the user that no label
was present or that it was not read correctly. Next the test tube lifter solenoid (LV) fires to
raise the test tube. An additional sensor (HEAD SENSOR) is then checked to see if a test tube
has been lifted. If a test tube is detected, the vortex motor is enabled for two seconds to mix
the sample. The sample probe is lowered into the test tube and sample pressure to the test
tube is turned on. The sample pressure sensor (SN7), located in the upper electronics drawer,
is checked to ensure that there is no pressure leak.

If the pressure drops because of a bad seal in the sample head, the test tube is lowered and
raised an additional two times before the unit fails the test tube and the monitor displays MCL
Tube Load Error. If the pressure does not leak out, the segmenting valve rotates aligning the
MCL option’s port to the flow cell, sample flows and analyses of the sample takes place.

After the sample has reached a stop or the user induces a stop, the test tube is lowered and the
carousel rotates to the next sample tube. If two consecutive empty test tube positions are
detected, the carousel is aborted - the carousel rotates home and the XL-MCL flow cytometer
displays the Carousel report.

2.2-18 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
2.3 VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY
Overview
The Voltage-Specific Power Supply is the original Power Supply module used to supply dc
voltages to the Cytometer. This Power Supply module is referred to as voltage-specific
because four power configurations are required to suit the different world standard power
requirements:
r 100 Vac system
r 120 Vac system
r 220 Vac system
r 230/240 Vac system

Two versions of this Power Supply module were manufactured - one for the XL flow
cytometer and another for the XL-MCL flow cytometer. The Voltage-Specific Power Supply
for the XL-MCL flow cytometer contains additional linear power supplies for operating the
MCL assembly.

In the field, two versions of each Power Supply module exist - an original non-EMC version
and a newer EMC version. The EMC version of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply contains
circuit cards that protect the internal system from high voltage transients that may occur on
the ac voltage input provided by the laboratory’s power source.
r An XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a serial number Z09062 or lower has a
non-EMC Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
r An XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a serial number Z09063 or higher has an
EMC Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
r For more information concerning this requirement and the differences between a
non-EMC and EMC Voltage-Specific Power Supply, see the Changes Required for
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and How to Determine if an Instrument is an
EMC Version or a Non-EMC Version headings at the end of this section.

Although the Power Supply modules used to supply power to the XL flow cytometer,
XL-MCL flow cytometer, and the FC 500 cytometer are all referred to as Voltage-Specific
Power Supplies, these Power Supply modules are not considered interchangeable. The
Voltage-Specific Power Supply used to supply power to an XL flow cytometer cannot be used
on an XL-MCL flow cytometer (unless it is modified). Neither can be used to power an
FC 500 or FC 500 MPL system.

A Universal Power Supply, referred to as UPS, has replaced the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
New XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers are now being shipped with the Universal Power
Supply. For information concerning the Universal Power Supply, see Heading 2.4.

The Voltage-Specific Power Supply is already installed on many XL and XL-MCL flow
cytometers; therefore, you will continue to encounter the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
Since the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is a reliable Power Supply module with a long
expected life, you must be skilled in servicing this Power Supply module as well as the
Universal Power Supply.

PN 4237029G 2.3-1
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

Main Components
The Voltage-Specific Power Supply can be installed under the Cytometer or next to it on a
bench. This Power Supply module supplies dc voltages to the Cytometer. Power from the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply is distributed to the Cytometer via the interface harness.

The main components comprising the Voltage-Specific Power Supply are described in this
section under the following headings:
r Front of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
r Back of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
r Interior Compartments
t Right-Side Compartment
t Left-Side Compartment

Front of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

The front panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is covered by a door that contains a
smokey translucent panel that protects components when the door is closed.

Opening the front door exposes components that need to be monitored to ensure proper
operation such as the system vacuum gauge, system pressure gauge, and the voltage supply
indicators. See Figure 2.3-1.

Figure 2.3-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - View with Front Door Open
Argon laser
power supply

Vacuum trap

Vacuum filter
Water trap
VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POPWER System pressure gauge
AIR
FILTER
Vacuum gauge 30
PSI

SYS SYS
PRESS
MCL POPWER
System pressure
VAC
adjustment knob
PRESS
ADJ

Air filter

Voltage supply indicators

7029220F

Additional Information
For details concerning component function, see Heading A.6, VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER
SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.

r Figure A.6-2 identifies each component by name.

r Table A.6-2 describes the function of each named component.

2.3-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
Back of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
Various electronic cables are required to route dc voltages from the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply to the Cytometer. Additionally, four tubings are needed to route pneumatic signals
from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply to the Cytometer. Additionally, waste from the
Cytometer is routed to the waste container via the Power Supply module. These various
cables and tubings are connected to fittings on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
See Figure 2.3-2.

Figure 2.3-2 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - Rear

Circuit breakers

Power Cables:
Logic, Analog and
MCL option
Laser
umbilical cable

Connector on
Power Module Control card
or Power Module Control II card
Cooling fans AUX POWER ON Waste level
PRESSURE
SYSTEM
ON/OFF tubing connector
Quick-connects VACUUM WASTE LEVEL
ON

(fludics) OFF
Power ON/OFF
WASTE
LASER POWER
MAX 1800 WATTS
SYSTEM POWER
MAX 1500 WATTS
switch
WASTE VENT

ac power 7029018G

Additional Information
For details concerning component function, see Heading A.6, VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER
SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.

r Figure A.6-5 identifies each component by name.

r Table A.6-5 describes the function of each named component.

Interior Compartments
Interior compartments are accessed by removing the three-sided cover that encloses the
right-side compartment, top compartment, and left-side compartment. For detailed
instructions concerning removal and reinstallation of the three-sided cover, see Procedure 19
under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION.

All the linear power supplies and the pneumatic compressor are housed inside the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.

Note: Refer to Figures 2.3-3 and 2.3-4 for the locations of all required power supplies.

PN 4237029G 2.3-3
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

Right-Side Compartment

Interlock Bypass Switch

To protect the operator from personal injury, a safety interlock switch is attached to the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply frame (Figure 2.3-3). Removing the three-sided cover triggers
this interlock which interrupts unit operation by turning off power to the Cytometer and
Power Supply module. You can defeat (or bypass) this interlock switch by pulling the switch
up. Always be very careful if you bypass a safety interlock and operate the instrument with
the covers off. The interlock switch is reset when the three-sided cover is reinstalled.

Figure 2.3-3 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - Right-Side View with Three-Sided Cover Removed
Interlock bypass switch

+24 Vdc
(Only on XL-MCL
flow cytometers)

Voltage Supply
Monitor card
Cooling fans
+5 and ±12 Vdc
(Only on XL-MCL
flow cytometers)

±15 Vdc system +5 Vdc system +24 Vdc system

power supply power supply power supply 7029023G

2.3-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
Linear Power Supply

CAUTION Risk of damage to internal power supply connector. Internal power supplies for the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply are not interchangeable with the internal power supplies for the Universal
Power Supply. The plug-in connectors differ. Forcing a connector into an incompatible socket may damage
the connector.

The Linear Power Supply consists of five separate power supplies (Figure 2.3-3). Three of
these power supplies are for both the XL and XL-MCL flow cytometer and two supply power
only to the MCL module on the XL-MCL flow cytometer:
r +5 Vdc system power supply
r ±15 Vdc system power supply
r +24 Vdc system power supply
r +24 Vdc MCL power supply*
r +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply*
* Only installed in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply connected to an XL-MCL flow cytometer.
These power supplies provide power to the MCL assembly.

These supply voltages are monitored by the Voltage Supply Monitor card that is attached to
the back of the front panel. This circuit card consists of eight LEDs - one for each dc voltage
supplied by the five power supplies. These LEDs, called voltage supply indicators, are easily
seen on the front of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Figure 2.3-1). When a voltage is
available for use, the LED designated for that voltage is lighted. If power is turned on and an
LED is not lighted, either the corresponding power supply has a problem or the LED on the
Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.

The circuit breakers for these power supplies are located on the back of the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply (Figure 2.3-2).

Cooling Fans
Two box fans (Figure 2.3-3) are mounted inside the rear panel to facilitate proper air
circulation inside the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Both fans are installed as intake fans to
maintain a steady stream of cooling air over the linear power supplies and compressor. See
Figures 2.3-2 and 2.3-3.

Additional Information
For details concerning component function, see Heading A.6, VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER
SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.

r Figure A.6-4 identifies each component by name.

r Table A.6-4 describes the function of each named component.

PN 4237029G 2.3-5
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

Left-Side Compartment
Most pneumatic components such as the dual-head compressor and solenoid valves are best
accessed through the left-side of the Power Supply module.

Components inside this compartment will differ based on the instrument’s serial number:

r If an XL or XL-MCL instrument has a Cytometer serial number Z09062 or lower, it is

using the original non-EMC Voltage-Specific Power Supply with a Power Module
Control card. The easiest way to access the Power Module Control card is through this
left-side compartment. See Figure 2.3-4 for component locations.
r If an XL or XL-MCL instrument has a Cytometer serial number Z09063 or higher, it has
the newer EMC Voltage-Specific Power Supply with a Power Module Control II card.
This newer Power Module Control II card is used in conjunction with the Transient
Voltage Suppressor 2 card (also referred to as the Transient Absorber EMC card) which is
a small circuit card mounted to the ac line filter bracket. These circuit cards protect the
internal system from high voltage transients that may occur on the ac voltage input
provided by the laboratory’s power source. The easiest way to access the Power Module
Control II card or the Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card is through the left-side
compartment. See Figure 2.3-4 for component locations.

The Argon laser power supply and Voltage Selector module (mounted in the top
compartment) are also accessible from the left side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
(Figure 2.3-4). The Argon laser power supply is positioned behind a grille-covered opening
on the upper front panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Figure 2.3-1). This prevents
the warm air exhausted at the rear of the Argon laser power supply from re-entering the
power supply by directing the exhaust to atmosphere through the grille-covered opening in
the upper front panel.

Figure 2.3-4 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - Left-Side View with Cover Removed
Voltage
Argon laser
Selector
power supply
card

Compressor

Power Module Control card or

Power Module Control II card

Transient Voltage VL32 VL30 VL31

Suppressor 2 card 7029022G

2.3-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
Additional Information
For details concerning component function, see Heading A.6, VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER
SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.

r Figure A.6-3 identifies each component by name.

r Table A.6-3 describes the function of each named component.

Power Distribution
The Voltage-Specific Power Supply provides system and laser power to the Cytometer. The
system power generated in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is distributed to the Cytometer
using long cables with D-connectors on each end. These cable are attached to connectors on
the rear of the Power Supply module and to connectors on the lower rear panel of the
Cytometer. The laser power is distributed using a thick cable called the laser umbilical cable.
See Figures 2.3-5 and Figure 2.3-6.

Figure 2.3-5 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Block Diagram

Compressor module + 5 Vdc ± 12 Vdc + 24 V MCL*
2A 0.4 A 2.4 A

ac power for supplies Power supply

connected to Voltage
Selector card ± 15 Vdc dc system power
5A

Voltage
Selector card Power supply
Logic power
+ 5 Vdc
18 A
Power Module
Control II card
Power supply
Laser remote cable
+ 24 Vdc
Control cable 7.2 A
CYT12 V Signal
from Cytometer
Switched ac system
Power supply
CYT12
Interlock
Switched ac Argon laser
switch
to Argon laser power supply
power supply

Umbilical cable
connected to Argon laser
head in Cytometer
* To MCL, if the MCL option is installed.
7029269G

PN 4237029G 2.3-7
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

Power Module Control II Card

Note: Two versions of the Power Module Control card exist:
r Power Module Control card - original non-EMC circuit card used in XL and
XL-MCL instruments with a Cytometer serial number of Z09062 or lower.
r Power Module Control II card - newer EMC circuit card used in XL and XL-MCL
instruments with a Cytometer serial number Z09063 or higher. The Power Module
Control II card is used in conjunction with the Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card
(also referred to as the Transient Absorber EMC card) which is a small circuit card
mounted to the ac line filter bracket. These circuit cards protect the internal system
from high voltage transients that may occur on the ac voltage input provided by the
laboratory’s power source.

The Power Module Control II card interfaces the power supplies and compressor located in
the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (generally setting on the floor) with the Cytometer (setting
on a workbench or counter). It also has the function of allowing the Cytometer to be powered
off or on without powering down the Power Supply module. Additionally, providing power to
cooling fans and indicator lights associated with the Power Supply module are also controlled
from this circuit card. Refer to Figure 2.3-6 for details

Figure 2.3-6 Power Module Control II Card Flow Diagram (Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
POWER
MODULE LASER REMOTE CONTROL
TO LASER
CONTROL POWER CONTROL INPUT POWER
CABLE SUPPLY
FROM
CYTOMETER

LASER INTERLOCK
CONTROL

LINE AC
LASER TO LASER
POWER SUPPLY POWER
AC CONTROL SUPPLY

CYT12
INTERLOCK MAIN POWER
SIGNAL CONTROL
FROM PC
COMPRESSOR CONTROL

COMPRESSOR TO
AC FROM
MODULE COMPRESSOR
VOLTAGE
MODULE
SELECTOR
AC CONTROL

SYSTEM POWER TO
LINE AC VOLTAGE
AC CONTROL
SELECTOR
7029027B

Interface Cable
The interface cable that connects the Power Module Control II card to the Cytometer has a
25 pin D-connector on each end, P70 and P20. On the rear of the Power Supply module, P20
is attached to the connector labeled Power Module Control and on the lower rear panel of the
Cytometer, P70 is attached to the connector labeled Power Module Control. The pin-outs for
these connectors are shown in Figure 2.3-7.

2.3-8 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
Figure 2.3-7 Interface Cable for Power Module Control II Card - 25-Pin Connectors, P20 and P70

K4 6
4
8 /LASER CONTACTOR
13 11
1
9
16
CR4 RELAY DPDT
P70
13 INTLKL INTERLOCK-1 1
25 1N4935 +24V 14
12 LASER DCHG 2
24 15
11 INTERLOCK-2 3
23 16
10 IDLE ON/OFF 4
22 /WASTE 17
9 LIGHT /CURRENT 5
21 /WASTEPRESS 18
8 CURRENT OUT 6
20 19
7 PWROUT 7
19 RETURN 20
6 LASERPWRIN 8
18 21
5 LASERCURRIN 9
17 22
4 10
16 USER REMOTE 23
3 11
15 24
2 /COMP1 ON 12
14 25
1 13

P20 7318243B

The laser control signals are (pin numbers taken from P70, the laser connection):

> indicates the signal is from the Cytometer

< indicates the signal is from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Pin Signal Direction Description

1 INTERLOCK-1 <> 1 and 3 shorted together to satisfy the laser interlock
3 INTERLOCK-2 <> 1 and 3 shorted together to satisfy the laser interlock
2 LASER DCHG > A positive voltage on this pin starts the laser beam output
4 IDLE ON/OFF > +15 Vdc for run (on)
5 LIGHT/CURRENT > +15 Vdc for light regulation
6 CURRENTOUT > Sets requested current regulation
7 PWROUT > Sets requested light regulation
20 RETURN < Signal Return
8 LASERPWRIN < Laser light level reported from laser
9 LASERCURRIN < Laser current level reported from laser
13 LASER START < +15 Vdc supply output from laser power supply

PN 4237029G 2.3-9
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

The Power Module Control II signals are (pin numbers taken from P20):

> indicates the signal is from the Cytometer

< indicates the signal is from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Pin Signal Direction Description

22 /Waste < A low indicates the vacuum switch connected to the waste
pressure sensor has tripped and the waste container has
overflowed.
3 /Comp1 ON > A low (0V) activates the compressor relay, K3.

In addition, the Power Module Control II card has a housekeeping supply that provides
+12 Vdc to the fiber optic interface on the Power Supply module. If the main circuit breaker
on the rear of the Power Supply module is left in the ON position and the Cytometer is
powered off, the system Workstation, when requested, can restore power to the Cytometer.

Changes Required for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

In 1992, the European Community enacted a set of laws defining performance requirements
for sensitivity to external stimuli as well as the unintentional generation of external
electromagnetic fields for instrumentation in industrial, scientific and medical (ISM)
environments. The XL and XL-MCL instruments fall within this requirement.

To comply with these directives, several changes were made in the instruments. Although the
impact of these changes on a singular instrument is not significant, it becomes significant if
replacement parts are needed because some of the modified assemblies (EMC parts) are not
usable on the older non-EMC instrumentation.

Modifications
r New fiber optics cable and three new circuit cards - CYT12 Receiver,
Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM II, and Power Module Control II
The system, as originally designed, utilized a two wire cable from the XL Workstation to
the Cytometer. This cable carried 12 volts from the Workstation to the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply where this voltage provided power for a main system relay that energized
the XL system. This cable, acting as a small antenna, drew radiation from inside the
computer to the outside world. Additionally, because of its small size, the cable
connector at the Workstation frequently became intermittent causing the instrument to
randomly turn off which resulted in sample data being lost. This was especially
disastrous when the MCL system was running. A fiber optic cable replacing the small
cable corrected these problems.
The fiber optic cable transfers an infrared signal from the Workstation computer to the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply. A small 12 Volt power supply inside the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply provides the voltage needed to power the main system power relay as well
as some additional circuitry to handle to fiber optic signal. This modification required
changes to the Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM card in the Workstation computer (now
the Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM II card), to the Power Module Control card in the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Power Module Control II card), and the addition of a
small fiber optic receiver card in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (referred to as the
CYT12 Receiver card).

2.3-10 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
The Power Module Control and Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM circuit cards, used in a
non-EMC system, are not interchangeable with the Power Module Control II and
Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM II circuit cards used in an EMC system. The CYT12
Receiver is only used on an EMC system. Caution must be taken to obtain the proper
circuit cards for the proper instrument. The only acceptable combinations are Power
Module Control card with Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM card and Power Module
Control II card with Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM II card and CYT12 Receiver card.
r Cable modifications
Because the cables and original CPC (round) connectors could not be adequately
shielded to prevent radiated interference at the levels required by the European
Directives, external cable and internal harness changes for both the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply and the Cytometer were required. These changes involved adapting the
POWER D series of connectors which could be securely mounted and adequately
shielded. The ability to better size the wire gauge of the cables to minimize the cable
power drops and to provide more remote sense head room in the +5 V and ±15 V linear
power supplies was another benefit. An added bonus was a reduction in harness costs.
Due to requirements for the instrument to operate properly while imbedded in an
externally generated field of interference and some earlier crosstalk issues, most of the
internal interconnects were changed to shielded cables. Since the full scale output of the
sheath and sample pressure sensors is less than 100 millivolts, they are very susceptible
to these externally generated fields of interference. This change greatly improved their
noise immunity.
The Argon laser head umbilical cable was also a source of radiation. To resolve this issue,
a shield was employed on the inside (on the outside of some lasers) to maintain
shielding integrity. A 6-inch braid, extending out of the cable on both ends, connected to
chassis ground provides the necessary shielding. The circuit breaker box was moved to
allow a slightly larger area for movement when attaching the laser umbilical cable to the
rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
r New Transient Voltage Suppressor II card
Also referred to as the Transient Absorber II or Transient Absorber EMC card, this small
circuit card is mounted to the ac line filter bracket in the left-side compartment of the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply. This card protects the internal system from high voltage
transients that may occur on the ac voltage input provided by the laboratory’s power
source.
r New Motor Filter card
On MCL equipped instruments, a small circuit card was added to reduce EMC emissions
from the carbon brush vortex mixer motor. This circuit card is located on the inside cross
piece of the MCL frame.

PN 4237029G 2.3-11
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

Table 2.3-1 Part Numbers for Non-EMC versus EMC Instruments

Non-EMC Instrument EMC Instrument

Component Description Part Number Component Description Part Number

Cable, logic power, external 6027105 Cable, logic power, external 6028694
Cable, analog power, external 6027106 Cable, analog power, external 6028696
Cable, MCL power, external 6027108 Cable, MCL power, external 6028695
Cable, dc internal harness 6028307 Cable, dc internal harness 6028693
(Logic and Analog) (Logic, MCL, and Analog)
+5 Vdc (linear power supply cable) 6028305 +5 Vdc EMC (linear power supply cable) 6028687
±15 Vdc (linear power supply cable) 6028306 ±15 Vdc EMC (linear power supply cable) 6028688
+24 Vdc (linear power supply cable) 6028311 +24 Vdc EMC (linear power supply cable) 6028689
Cable, CYT12, external 6028304 Not used
Cable, laser control, internal 6028292 Cable. laser control, internal 6028651
(flat ribbon cable used in Cytometer) (shielded cable used in Cytometer)
Cable, fiber optic interface, internal 6028294 Cable, fiber optic interface, internal 6028650
(flat ribbon cable used in Cytometer) (shielded cable used in Cytometer)
Cable, laser supply control, internal 6028299 Cable, laser supply control, shielded 6028652
Cable, Cyto CYT12 6028314 Not used
Cable, Cyto dc power harness 6028319 Cable, Cyto dc power harness, EMC 6028700
Cable, front panel power 6028430 same part number, new revision 6028430
CYT12 Jumper CYT12 Jumper, EMC, MCL dummy plug 7000466
Cable, MCL dc Cyto 6028431 Cable, MCL dc Cyto, EMC 6028699
Cable, sensor/regulator control 6028289 Cable, sensor/regulator control 6028702
(flat ribbon cable used in Cytometer) (shielded cable used in Cytometer)
Cable, control B, internal 6028308 same part number, new revision 6028308
Not used Cable, CYT12 (fiber optic) 6028716
Card, Power Module Control 6705231 Card, Power Module Control II 6706390
Card, Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM 6705355 Card, Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM II 6706394
Not used Card, CYT12 Receiver 6706391
Not used Card, Transient Voltage Suppressor II 6706401
Not used Card, Motor Filter 6706409
(used only on MCL assembly)

2.3-12 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
How to Determine if an Instrument is an EMC Version or a Non-EMC Version
One of the quickest ways to determine if an instrument is an EMC or non-EMC version is to
check the serial number.
r An XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a serial number Z09062 or lower is a non-EMC
instrument; therefore, the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is also non-EMC.
r An XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a serial number Z09063 or higher is an EMC
instrument; therefore, the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is also EMC.

Voltage-Specific Power Supply - EMC Version Identifiers

The external look of the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer is virtually the same. If you check the
rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, three things clearly identify an EMC instrument
(Figure 2.3-8):

r The connectors on the external cables (logic, analog, and MCL, if applicable) are the
D-shaped POWER D connectors not the round CPC connectors found on non-EMC
instruments. For locations, see Figure 2.3-8.
r There is a new connector for attaching the new fiber optics cable to the new CYT12
Receiver card (located inside the top compartment of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply). For location, see Figure 2.3-8.
r Three green LEDs (labeled CYT12, Compressor, AUX POWER ON) are visible next to the
upper box fan. For locations, see Figure 2.3-8.
These LEDs are components on the Power Module Control II card. When the circuit card
is installed on the rear wall of the left-side compartment, these LEDs are visible to
indicate certain internal operations. These LEDs are also helpful when troubleshooting
related malfunctions.

Figure 2.3-8 Voltage-Specific Power Supply - EMC Version Identifiers (Rear View)
Connector to new
CYT12 Receiver card

Power Cables:
Logic, Analog and
MCL option

CYT12 LED Connector on

Power Module Control II card
Compressor LED
AUX POWER ON
AUX POWER ON LED PRESSURE
SYSTEM
ON/OFF

(Auxiliary power supply) WASTE LEVEL

VACUUM ON

OFF

WASTE
LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER
MAX 1800 WATTS MAX 1500 WATTS
WASTE VENT

7029295G

PN 4237029G 2.3-13
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

AUX POWER ON Indicator

WARNING Risk of electric shock. Make sure that the Main Circuit Breaker is OFF before troubleshooting the
Power Module Control II card, especially if the action involves the auxiliary power supply. This power
supply runs off the main ac source at all times; therefore, a significant shock hazard exists in this area.

The bottom of the three LEDs is used to monitor operation of an auxiliary power supply. The
new Power Module Control II card contains a small 12 Volt Auxiliary power supply for
powering the system power relay. (This replaces the one from the computer.) Any time the
power cord is plugged into an active main circuit and the main circuit breaker is in the ON
position this LED should be glowing green to indicate the AUX supply is active.

If this LED is not glowing green and the main circuit breaker in the ON position, one of the
following malfunctions has most likely occurred:
r The main ac supply source is not active.
r The power supply is defective.
r One or both of the internal 5 Amp PC mount fuses are blown.

Compressor Indicator
The middle LED indicates when the compressor is activated. This indicator identifies that a
drive signal is available from the System Interface card in the Cytometer. If this indicator is
glowing and the compressor is not operating, either the solid state relay or the compressor is
defective, or the compressor circuit breaker has been tripped either manually or due to a fault.

CYT12 Indicator
The top LED is the CYT12 Active indicator. If this indicator is glowing green and the
instrument is not powered up then the power relay or one or more of the power supply circuit
breakers is tripped. If this indicator is not glowing, the fiber optic cable may be defective. If
the Workstation computer is active and the LED on Opto-Transprocessor EXMEM II is
glowing, the system should be powered up.

One method of troubleshooting is to shine a small penlight or similar flashlight on the CYT12
Receiver card. This source of infrared energy should turn on the green LED on the CYT12
Receiver card. If this LED illuminates then most likely the fiber cable is defective. If this
action turns on the instrument, then the fault may be in the fiber optic cable or the
Workstation computer.

If the three-sided cover is removed from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply and the CYT12
override switch (interlock) is in the override position (bypassed), this indicator should be
glowing.

2.3-14 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY 2
WARNING Risk of electric shock. Make sure that the Main Circuit Breaker is OFF before troubleshooting the
Power Module Control II card, especially if the action involves the Auxiliary power supply. This power
supply runs off the main ac source at all times; therefore, a significant shock hazard exists in this area.

If the CYT12 indicator is glowing but the instrument does not power up, either the CYT12
link (through the cables) is broken or the Power Module Control II card is defective. The
malfunction can be located by removing P71 from the Power Module Control II card
and measuring between pins 2 and 7 to check the integrity of the circuit. Resistance
should be less than 2 ohms.
r If more than 2 ohms, the CYT12 link is open through one of the cables.
r If less than 2 ohms, the Power Module Control II card is definitely defective.

MCL - EMC Version Identifiers

The MCL has minimal changes. The first and most noticeable is the power cable and
connector. The cable on a non-EMC instrument has round CPC connector and an
EMC instrument has Power D connector. Under the Modifications heading, see Cable
modifications for more information.
The Mixer Motor assembly was another issue. The mixer motor in this assembly produced
high levels of emitted radiation due to the arcing of the brushes and the plastic commutator
housing. The problem was resolved by wrapping the commutator housing in copper tape and
attaching a ground braid to shield the motor. This braid was then attached to the frame for
the return. The motor mount assembly was also masked with a motor case to provide a motor
case to mount ground. The mount and the brush shield are grounded in the same place. A
new circuit card, the Motor Filter card, was also added behind the vertical plate to reduce the
conducted noise from the motor brushes. The Motor Filter card is soldered in place to reduce
any connection impedance and inductive losses.

The MCL upgrade kit contains all necessary hardware to install the MCL assembly on any XL
flow cytometer - EMC or non-EMC. This upgrade kit includes a Power D harness and a CPC
harness as well as the appropriate brackets. The MCL assembly in the upgrade kit is shipped
with Power D bracket and harness already installed; however, it can be easily changed to the
CPC system needed for non-EMC XL instruments. To make this conversion, simply remove
the four screws holding the Power D connector bracket to the MCL assembly frame and
replace the connector bracket and harness with the round CPC connector bracket and
harness in the upgrade kit. The MCL upgrade kit also contains a new bracket (PN 6805649)
that provides a 0.250 inch extension for the new Motor Filter card (located behind the
vertical plate). This new bracket is required for proper alignment of covers. A new XL-MCL
flow cytometer has this bracket installed. Other changes do not impact non-EMC instrument
performance.

PN 4237029G 2.3-15
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY

Front Door - EMC Version Identifier

One of the easiest ways to identify an EMC instrument is to open the front door of the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply and look for a strip of copper attached to the inner edge of the
door (Figure 2.3-9). This contact strip is made of a beryllium copper alloy. When the front
door is closed, this contact strip provides an EMI/RFI shield that minimizes sensitivity to
external stimuli.

Figure 2.3-9 Location of EMI/EMC Contact Strip - Voltage-Specific Power Supply

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER EMI/EMC contact strip

TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
AIR
FILTER 30
PSI

SYS SYS
MCL POWER
VAC PRESS

PRESS
ADJ

7029296G

2.3-16 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
2.4 UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY
Overview
The Universal Power Supply, commonly referred to as UPS, is not only designed for use with
the COULTER® EPICS® XL™ and COULTER® EPICS® XL-MCL™ flow cytometers but also
with the Cytomics FC 500 and FC 500 MPL systems.

Prior to the development of the Universal Power Supply, manufacturing produced three
different Power Supply modules (each with four different power configurations to suit the
different world standard power requirements). Since the Universal Power Supply is capable of
being configured (during installation) to match the standard power requirements for the
country in which the flow cytometer system is being installed, development of the Universal
Power Supply streamlines the manufacturing and sales entry process.

New Features
If you have experience with the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, you will have a sense of
familiarity with the Universal Power Supply. But when examined closer, you will find several
changes with some very distinct design changes and features. The new features covered in
this section include:

r Full-range power configuration 100 to 240 Vac, 48 to 62 Hz

r Sound reduction
r Improved cooling
r Easier access to air filters
r Easier access to the new Power Control 3 card (replaces Power Module Control II card)
r Easier access to pneumatic components (via removable UPS pneumatics drawer)

Main Components
The main components comprising the Universal Power Supply and physical modifications are
described in this section under the following headings:

r Front of the Universal Power Supply

r Back of the Universal Power Supply
r Interior Compartments
t Top Compartment
t Right-Side Compartment
t Left-Side Compartment

If your experience includes the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, many components on the
Universal Power Supply will look somewhat familiar. Although a component may look like a
component on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, it may have a new part number due to an
enhancement. To ensure receiving the correct replacement component, use the information
under Heading 8, PARTS LISTS to verify each part number before placing a part order.

PN 4237029G 2.4-1
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Front of the Universal Power Supply

The front door for the Universal Power Supply is now solid with only one transparent area for
viewing the voltage supply indicators.

Figure 2.4-1 Universal Power Supply, View with Front Door Closed

SYSTEM POPWER

Voltage
supply
MCL POPWER

indicators

7318358B

Once the front door is opened, the lower front panel appears the same but the upper front
panel is quite different (Figure 2.4-2).

Figure 2.4-2 Universal Power Supply, View with Front Door Open - Component Locations
Main circuit breaker
Vacuum trap (power switch)

Name plate
Circuit breakers for
linear power supplies

Water trap
Vacuum
filter
VAC
FILTER

System pressure gauge

VAC WATER
Vacuum TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER

gauge AIR
FILTER
30
PSI

MCL POWER
System pressure
SYS SYS
VAC PRESS adjustment knob
PRESS
Air filter ADJ

Voltage supply indicators

7318284B

2.4-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Modifications to the Upper Front Panel

Main Circuit Breaker

The main circuit breaker is now on the upper front panel (Figure 2.4-2). This ON/OFF rocker
switch is a double pole 250 Vac 15 Amp trip magnetic circuit breaker used for powering the
Power Supply module off or on when a procedure requires a complete power down that
includes disconnection of the ac power cords.

Breaker Card
The bank of six circuit breakers (on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply) is now a bank of 26
thermal circuit breakers positioned on a new circuit card referred to as the Breaker card
(Figure 2.4-3).

Figure 2.4-3 Front of the Breaker Card

CB12 CB11 CB10 CB9 CB8 CB7 CB6 CB5 CB4 CB3 CB2 CB1

CB25

CB26
CB24 CB23 CB22 CB21 CB20 CB19 CB18 CB17 CB16 CB15 CB14 CB13

7318351B

The Breaker card operates in conjunction with the Voltage Selector 2 card, which is another
new circuit card on the Universal Power Supply. The Voltage Selector 2 card and its
components are only visible if the main cover for the Universal Power Supply is removed.

Note: For additional information concerning the relationship of the two circuit cards, refer to
the Heading Voltage Selection in this section.

Although the reset tab for each circuit breaker is visible (Figure 2.4-2), the voltage that circuit
breaker is protecting is not notated on the front panel. If a customer suspects that one or more
of these circuit breakers are tripped, they are instructed to press (one at a time) each of the 26
reset tabs until all the circuit breakers are reset. If the problem reoccurs then more specific
troubleshooting is required.

Note: For additional information, refer to the Heading Monitoring Supply Voltages in this
section.

PN 4237029G 2.4-3
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Label Placement
Labels that were located on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply are located on the
upper front panel of the Universal Power Supply (Figure 2.4-2). Labels include (top to
bottom, left to right):

r Explanation symbols (international warning symbol)

r EU conformance mark
r UL 3101-1 conformance (ETL testing laboratory approval)
r ETL/CETL certification (ETL testing laboratory approval)
r New name plate

The new name plate lists all possible configurations with a check box to the left of each
possible configuration (Figure 2.4-4). Marking the specific configuration of the Universal
Power Supply being installed is now part of the installation process.

Figure 2.4-4 New UPS Name Plate

Assembly No. Serial No.

178242 XXXXXXX
Model Beckman Coulter, Inc.
11800 S.W. 147th Avenue
CYTOMETRY UPS Miami, FL 33196-2500 USA
Patents Issued and/or Pending

100 Volts 30 Amps 48-62 HZ 3000 Watts

120 Volts 30 Amps 48-62 HZ 3600 Watts

220 Volts 15 Amps 48-62 HZ 3300 Watts

230/240 Volts 15 Amps 48-62 HZ 3600 Watts

7318293B

Modifications to the Lower Front Panel

The components on the lower front panel have not changed; however, the platform on which
the components are mounted has changed. The vertical lower front panel is now attached to
an internal horizontal platform where the dual-head compressor and other pneumatic
components are mounted. This new platform and components are referred to as the UPS
pneumatics drawer. When troubleshooting a malfunction that requires replacing a defective
pneumatic component, the UPS pneumatics drawer can be easily removed and set on a work
bench to facilitate the replacement. See Figure 2.4-5.

2.4-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Figure 2.4-5 UPS Pneumatics Drawer, Removed from Universal Power Supply

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER

AIR
FILTER
30
PSI

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS

P
R
E
PRESS

S
S
U
ADJ

R
E
VA
C
U
U
M

7318295D

Additional Information
r For more information concerning components mounted to the UPS pneumatics drawer,
refer to the Heading Left-Side Compartment in this section.
r For detailed instructions concerning removal and reinstallation of the UPS pneumatics
drawer, refer to Procedure 25 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND
REINSTALLATION.
r For details concerning component function, see Heading A.7, UNIVERSAL POWER
SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.
t Figure A.7-2 identifies each component by name.
t Table A.7-2 describes the function of each named component.

Back of the Universal Power Supply

The Universal Power Supply is enclosed with a back cover mounted to an extended platform
(Figure 2.4-6). The rear of the Power Supply module was redesigned primarily to reduce
noise emission but also makes it easier to access the air filters for cleaning. The new design,
along with other modifications, also enhances air flow throughout the Universal Power
Supply.

The back of the Universal Power Supply consists of three main areas (Figure 2.4-6):
r Rear Panel
r Back Cover and Cable Cover

PN 4237029G 2.4-5
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Figure 2.4-6 Universal Power Supply - Rear View with Back Cover Removed

Cable cover

Opening
for cables

ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

Rear panel
1 1

1 2

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

Back cover

Extended platform
7318369D

Rear Panel
Note: Any reference to MPL does not apply to the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometers. MPL is a
sample handling option for the Cytomics FC 500 Series instruments.

If your experience includes the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, some of the components on
the rear of the Universal Power Supply will look familiar; however, the addition of the
extended platform, fan duct, Power Control 3 card, and sound-guard foam make a definite
change in its appearance (Figure 2.4-7).

Although a component may look like a component found on the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply, those components may have different part numbers due to an enhancement made on
the Universal Power Supply. To ensure you receive the desired component, use either the
master or illustrated part lists under Heading 8 to verify part numbers before placing an order.

2.4-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Figure 2.4-7 Universal Power Supply, Rear View with Back Cover Removed - Component Locations

Argon laser power supply

Power cables: ANALOG

Analog, Logic, LOGIC

and MCL/MPL
MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

ac power inlet
Power Control 3 card
connectors

PWB NO. 179493D

Pneumatics
PRESS WASTE VAC
WASTE
VENT
control cable

7318368B
Fan duct

Modifications
r New ac input receptacles (Figure 2.4-7):
t SYSTEM POWER (on the left) - provides ac input to all Universal Power Supply
components requiring ac input with the exception of those components related to
the Argon laser power supply.
t LASER POWER (on the right) - provides ac input to the Argon laser power supply.
t A separate 10 ft. power cord (18 A / 100-120 Vac / 50 to 60 Hz or 16 A /
220-240 Vac / 50 to 60 Hz with a connector on one end and plug on the other) must
be installed in each receptacle.
r Analog, logic, and MCL/MPL power cables (Figure 2.4-7):
t External power cables are Cytometer cables that have not changed.
t Internal cable harness (to the dc voltage power supplies) is redesigned and;
therefore, has a new part number.
r Argon laser power supply (Figure 2.4-7) is the same power supply but the two cables
used to connect the Argon laser power supply to the new Power Control 3 card are
redesigned and; therefore, have new part numbers.
r New Power Control 3 card (Figure 2.4-7) is a redesign of the Power Module Control II
card and; therefore, has a new part number. This is still the main circuit card for power
distribution within the Universal Power Supply and to the Cytometer. For more
information, see the Heading Power Control 3 Card in this section.
r New pneumatics control cable (Figure 2.4-7) connects the Power Control 3 card to
components inside the UPS pneumatics drawer.

PN 4237029G 2.4-7
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

r New fan duct (Figure 2.4-7) covers the two cooling fans that exhaust circulated air to
atmosphere. This fan duct provides a housing that directs the exhaust through an
opening cut in the extended platform.
r The rear panel and its components are covered with two covers.
t Back cover - a large, metal cover that protects the operator from contact with the
electronic components on the rear panel, especially those components on the Power
Control 3 card.
t Cable cover - a smaller plastic cover that when properly installed muffles noise
emissions.

Additional Information
For details concerning component function, see Heading A.7, UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY
COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.

r Figure A.7-6 identifies each component by name.

r Table A.7-6 describes the function of each named component.

Back Cover and Cable Cover

The new back cover not only protects the operator from contact with the electronic
components on the rear panel but also protects the electronic components from damage,
especially those components on the Power Control 3 card. This large metal cover rests on two
screws installed on the edge of the extended platform and two screws at the top of the cover
secure the cover to the Power Supply frame.

During installation, electronic cables connecting the Universal Power Supply with the
Cytometer and Workstation are routed through a large opening in the back cover
(Figure 2.4-6). Pneumatic and waste tubings are also routed through this opening. Black PVC
trim protects the cables and tubings from abrasions.

All cables and tubings routed through the opening in the back cover must be positioned to
accommodate the Cytometer setup. Once positioned, the cables and tubings exiting this
opening are covered with a translucent plastic shield referred to as a cable cover. Figure 2.4-8
shows the recommended arrangement.

Figure 2.4-8 Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions, As Viewed from the Rear

7318352D

2.4-8 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
In Figure 2.4-8:
r The power cables [two ac power, Logic, Analog, and MCL (if applicable)] and shielded
tubings going to the waste container are routed to the left.
r The laser umbilical cable, laser control cable, and the shielded tubings going to the
Cytometer are routed to the right.
r Refer to Procedure 23 under Heading 4.25 if you want detailed instructions.

The label (international warning symbol) attached to the back cover is positioned near
the cable cover to remind the customer that removing the cable cover and/or back cover
exposes them to electronic components. A customer should not remove these covers unless
instructed to do so by a Beckman Coulter Representative. When you remove the back cover
and/or cable cover, heed the safety precautions under Heading 1.2.

Ventilation
The air filter and the grille securing the air filter are no longer mounted on the cooling fans.
Ventilation for the Power Supply module now occurs through two openings cut in the right
side of the back cover (as viewed from the rear). Each opening is covered with a removable
filter grille for easy removal and replacement when cleaning the air filter. See Figure 2.4-9.

Figure 2.4-9 Universal Power Supply - Filter Locations

Grille

Air filter

7318373B

PN 4237029G 2.4-9
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Additional Information
r For more information, refer to the Operational Temperatures heading in this section.
r For detailed instructions concerning removing and reinstalling only the cable cover, refer
to Procedure 23 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION.
r For detailed instructions concerning removing and reinstalling the back cover (which
includes the cable cover), refer to Procedure 24 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL
AND REINSTALLATION.

Interior Compartments
Interior compartments are accessed by removing the main cover. The main cover on the
Universal Power Supply consists of the three-sided cover that encloses the Top Compartment,
Right-Side Compartment, and Left-Side Compartment. The front door is also part of the main
cover. To remove the main cover, the back cover must first be removed.

Note: For detailed instructions concerning removal and reinstallation of the main cover, see
Procedure 21 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION.

Top Compartment
The top compartment (Figure 2.4-10) contains many components that may be serviced from
either the left or right side compartment. This is especially true of those components housed
in the right-side compartment.

Figure 2.4-10 Universal Power Supply, Top View with Covers Removed - Component Locations
ac line filter Exhaust fan Argon laser power supply

Voltage
Selector 2
card

Breaker card

Air dam
Front

Main circuit
breaker

FC 500
Transient Voltage Interlock
Suppressor card bypass switch

MCL power supplies ±15 Vdc +5 Vdc +24 Vdc

System power supplies 7318296B

2.4-10 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Modifications
r The new ac line filter operates in conjunction with the FC 500 Transient Voltage
Suppressor card (which is also referred to as the Transient Absorber EMC card or the
Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card) which is in a new location. The FC 500 Transient
Voltage Suppressor card is the same circuit card used in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply
and, therefore, has the same part number.
r The Argon laser power supply (Figure 2.4-10) is an air-cooled switching power supply
that automatically adjusts to input voltages in the range of 90 Vac to 265 Vac. The power
supply is the same with a new duct configuration. The air dam (Figure 2.4-10) attached
to the left side of the Argon laser power supply prevents warm air exhausted at the rear
of the Argon laser power supply from re-entering the power supply. For information
about the cooling effect of this change, see Cooling the Argon Laser Power Supply under
Heading Operational Temperatures in this section.

CAUTION Risk of damage to internal power supply connector. Internal power supplies for the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply are not interchangeable with the internal power supplies for the Universal
Power Supply. The plug-in connectors differ. Forcing a connector into an incompatible socket may damage
the connector.

r Linear power supplies have new connectors. Although the system and MCL power
supplies may appear familiar, the associated cable harness is redesigned and, therefore,
each individual power supply has a new part number. The internal cable harness for the
Analog, Logic, and MCL power cables also has new part numbers because it needed new
connectors to complete the required connections.
r New main circuit breaker is a double pole 15 Amp series trip magnetic circuit breaker
with a higher voltage rating (250 Vac, 50/60 Hz) to accommodate usage in any country
where our instruments may be installed.
r Two new circuit cards (Breaker card and Voltage Selector 2 card) allow for easy
configuration of the Universal Power Supply to all worldwide voltages and frequencies.

Voltage Selection
CAUTION Risk of damage to the electronic components in the Universal Power Supply. During installation,
the ac source voltage being supplied to the system must be manually selected. An incorrect selection may
cause irrevocable damage to electronic components and circuits when power to the UPS is switched ON.

The Universal Power Supply is not auto-sensing. During installation, the ac source voltage
being supplied to the system must be manually selected on the Voltage Selector 2 card
(Figure 2.4-11).

PN 4237029G 2.4-11
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Figure 2.4-11 Voltage Selector 2 Card - Location and Layout

MCL, 5&12V, +24V +\- 15V SPLY 5V SPLY 24V SPLY
5 J129 1 4 J4 1 J3 3 2 1 3 J5 1

10 6 8 5 6 4
6 4
100 15 11 120 12 9 9 8 7 220 240
VAC VAC VAC VAC
SYSTEM RELAY J153 J154
J151 J152
15 30 15 30 16 1 16 1

J155

7 9

WARNING
1 16 1 16 *HIGH VOLTAGE* 30 15 30 15
1 3
PWB 177821B

7318283B

As shown in Figure 2.4-11, the Voltage Selector 2 card contains several female connectors.
Four of these connectors (100 VAC, 120 VAC, 220 VAC, and 240 VAC) are used to select the power
required for proper system operation.

The Voltage Selector 2 card operates in conjunction with another new circuit card, the
Breaker card. The front of the Breaker card (Figure 2.4-12) consists of 26 thermal circuit
breakers. The reset tabs for these circuit breakers are visible when the front door of the
Universal Power Supply is open. See Figure 2.4-2.

Figure 2.4-12 Front of the Breaker Card - Component Locations

CB12 CB11 CB10 CB9 CB8 CB7 CB6 CB5 CB4 CB3 CB2 CB1

CB25

CB26
CB24 CB23 CB22 CB21 CB20 CB19 CB18 CB17 CB16 CB15 CB14 CB13

7318351B

2.4-12 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
The back of the Breaker card (Figure 2.4-13) consists of five connectors - one for ac input and
four for distribution purposes.

Figure 2.4-13 Back of the Breaker Card - Component Locations

BREAKER BOARD PWB 626415A SCHEM 626259 ASSY 626182 S/N

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 CB6 CB7 CB8 CB9 CB10 CB11 CB12
15

16
30

1
J5 J3 J4
3 4 CB25 4 6

1
J1

CB26

J2
1 2 1 3

CB13 CB14 CB15 CB16 CB17 CB18 CB19 CB20 CB21 CB22 CB23 CB24

30

15
16
1

7318350B

The Voltage Selector 2 card is mounted on the back of this Breaker card (Figure 2.4-14).
Together these two circuit cards allow the Universal Power Supply to be easily configured to
operate using the voltage and frequency required by the installation.

Figure 2.4-14 Voltage Selector 2 Card Mounted to the Back of Breaker Card (As Viewed from the Rear)
Breaker 120 Vac Voltage Selector 2 230/240 Vac
card system card system

MCL, 5&12V, +24V +\- 15V SPLY 5V SPLY 24V SPLY

5 J129 1 4 J4 1 J3 3 2 1 3 J5 1

10 6 8 5 6 4
6 4
100 15 11 120 12 9 9 8 7 220 240
VAC VAC VAC VAC
SYSTEM RELAY J153 J154
J151 J152
15 30 15 30 16 1 16 1

J155

7 9

WARNING
1 16 1 16 *HIGH VOLTAGE* 30 15 30 15
1 3
PWB 177821B PWB 626415A

Low ac voltage 100 Vac 220 Vac High ac voltage

connector (J1) system system connector (J2)
7318354C

PN 4237029G 2.4-13
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

As the Service Representative, during installation, you will use a special cable with two male
connectors to set up the appropriate voltage (100 Vac, 120 Vac, 220 Vac, or 230/240 Vac)
using these two circuit cards (Breaker and Voltage Selector 2 cards). When a Universal Power
Supply is shipped, this special cable (the voltage select cable) is tethered inside the Universal
Power Supply. The voltage select cable is left disconnected to ensure the Power Supply
module is not powered up without considering the proper power configuration.

During installation, the voltage select cable must be properly attached to the two 30-pin
connectors (one connector on the Breaker card and the second on the Voltage Selector 2 card)
designated to handle that specific ac input voltage.
r On the Breaker card, one end of the voltage select cable is attached according to the
range of the source ac voltage (low or high):
t If the voltage is a low ac voltage (100 Vac or 120 Vac), the connector must be
attached to the 30-pin connector on the outer left (if viewed from the rear as in
Figure 2.4-14). If you are standing in front of the Universal Power Supply, this
connector is on the far right.
t If the voltage is a high ac voltage (220 Vac or 230/240 Vac), the connector must be
attached to the 30-pin connector on the outer right (if viewed from the rear as in
Figure 2.4-14). If you are standing in front of the Universal Power Supply, this
connector is on the far left.
r On the Voltage Selector 2 card, the other end of the voltage select cable is attached
according to the specific ac voltage (100 Vac, 120 Vac, 220 Vac, or 230/240 Vac)
required.
t Connector J151 if the desired voltage is 100 Vac 60 Hz system (Figure 2.4-14).
t Connector J152 if the desired voltage is 120 Vac 60 Hz system (Figure 2.4-14).
t Connector J153 if the desired voltage is 220 Vac 50 Hz system (Figure 2.4-14).
t Connector J154 if the desired voltage is 230/240 Vac 50 Hz system (Figure 2.4-14).

Installation of the voltage select cable on the Breaker card and the Voltage Selector 2 card
completes the circuit; therefore, an incorrect voltage selection during installation may cause
irreparable damage to electronic components and circuits when power to the UPS is switched
ON.

2.4-14 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Low Voltage Configurations - 100 Vac or 120 Vac Source Voltage
Figure 2.4-15 illustrates the proper voltage configuration for a 120 Vac system. 120 Vac is
considered a low voltage; therefore, one side of the voltage select cable is attached to the low
ac voltage connector (J1) on the Breaker card and the other end is attached to the connector
labeled 120 VAC (J152) on the Voltage Selector 2 card.

Figure 2.4-15 Example of a Low Voltage Configuration - 120 Vac Source Voltage
Voltage Selector 2
card
Breaker
card
120 Vac connector
(120 VAC J152)

Low ac voltage
connector

Voltage select cable

Front upper panel

(inside UPS)
7318353C

To make this a 100 Vac system instead of a 120 Vac system, the voltage select cable would still
be attached to the low ac voltage connector (J1) on the Breaker card but the other end of the
voltage select cable would be attached to the connector labeled 100 VAC (J151) on the Voltage
Selector 2 card.

PN 4237029G 2.4-15
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

High Voltage Configurations - 220 Vac or 230/240 Vac Source Voltage

Figure 2.4-16 illustrates the proper voltage configuration for a 230/240 Vac system.
230/240 Vac is considered a high voltage; therefore, one side of the voltage select cable is
attached to the high ac voltage connector (J2) on the Breaker card and the other end is
attached to the connector labeled 240 VAC (J154) on the Voltage Selector 2 card.

Figure 2.4-16 Example of a High Voltage Configuration - 230/240 Vac Source Voltage
230/240 Vac connector
High ac voltage
(240 VAC J154)
connector

Voltage Selector 2
card

Breaker
card

Voltage select cable

Front upper panel

(inside UPS)
7318355C

To make this a 220 Vac system instead of a 230/240 Vac system, the voltage select cable would
still be attached to the high ac voltage connector (J2) on the Breaker card but the other end of
the voltage select cable would be attached to the connector labeled 220 VAC (J153) on the
Voltage Selector 2 card.

Circuit Breaker Usage

With the exception of CB 25 and CB26, the thermal circuit breakers on the Breaker card are
divided into two groups - one group for the low voltages (100 Vac or 120 Vac) and one group
for the high voltages (220 Vac or 230/240 Vac). During operation, the bank of circuit breakers
(low or high) used is directly related to the voltage selected during installation. If during
installation, the voltage select cable is installed on J1 (the low voltage connector on the
Breaker card) and the other end is connected to J151 (100 Vac connector) or J152 (120 Vac
connector) on the Voltage Selector 2 card, the low voltage group of circuit breakers are used.

r For thermal circuit breakers used with low voltage configurations, see Figure 2.4-17.
r For thermal circuit breakers used with high voltage configurations, see Figure 2.4-18.

2.4-16 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Figure 2.4-17 Circuit Breakers Used With Low Voltage Configurations (Front of Breaker Card)

CB12 CB11 CB10 CB9 CB8 CB7 CB6 CB5 CB4 CB3 CB2 CB1

CB25
J1
CB26
CB24 CB23 CB22 CB21 CB20 CB19 CB18 CB17 CB16 CB15 CB14 CB13

to standby Compressor to +24 Vdc power supply

circuit
to MCL +24 Vdc power supply to ±15 Vdc power supply
to MCL +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc power supply to +5 Vdc power supply
7318381B

Figure 2.4-18 Circuit Breakers Used With High Voltage Configurations (Front of Breaker Card)

CB12 CB11 CB10 CB9 CB8 CB7 CB6 CB5 CB4 CB3 CB2 CB1
J2
CB25

CB26
CB24 CB23 CB22 CB21 CB20 CB19 CB18 CB17 CB16 CB15 CB14 CB13

to +24 Vdc power supply Compressor to standby

circuit
to ±15 Vdc power supply to MCL +24 Vdc power supply
to +5 Vdc power supply to MCL +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc power supply
7318382B

PN 4237029G 2.4-17
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Monitoring Supply Voltages

When the circuit for a particular voltage is complete, the corresponding voltage supply
indicator on the front of the Universal Power Supply lights to show that voltage is available
for the designated use. The status of the voltage supply indicators can be checked through the
clear panel in the front door. (Figure 2.4-19).

Figure 2.4-19 Voltage Supply Indicator Locations

SYSTEM POWER +5 V SYSTEM POWER

+5V
SYSTEM POWER +15 V
+15V
SYSTEM POWER -15 V -15V
+24V
SYSTEM POWER +24 V
MCL POWER
+5V
MCL POWER +5 V*
+12V
MCL POWER +12 V* -12V SYSTEM POPWER

MCL POWER -12 V* +24V

MCL POWER +24 V* MCL POPWER

*If the MCL option is installed.

7029271G

Thermal circuit breakers utilize a bimetallic strip electrically in series with the circuit. When
the heat generated by the current during an overload deforms the bimetallic strip and trips
the breaker, the corresponding voltage supply indicator lamp darkens. If this occurs, the
circuit breakers must be reset.

To reset the thermal circuit breakers:

1. Open the front door to access the upper front panel.
2. Put the main circuit breaker in the OFF position (O position).
3. Reset the circuit breakers by pressing all 26 buttons.
4. Put the main circuit breaker back in the ON position (l position).
5. Power the computer and Cytometer ON.

Since the individual breakers are not identified on the upper front panel, pressing all 26
buttons is the easiest way to reset the tripped breaker(s). Each voltage utilizes two breakers -
one hot and one neutral. See Table 2.4-1.

2.4-18 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Table 2.4-1 Circuit Breaker Usage in the Universal Power Supply

Indicator Low Voltage Configuration High Voltage Configuration

(Refer to Figure 2.4-17) (Refer to Figure 2.4-18)
r Location
r Function Hot Neutral Hot Neutral
SYSTEM POWER +5 V CB3 CB15 CB10 CB22
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to +5 Vdc power supply in the
right-side compartment
SYSTEM POWER +15 V CB2 CB14 CB11 CB23
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to ±15 Vdc power supply in the
right-side compartment
SYSTEM POWER -15 V CB2 CB14 CB11 CB23
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to ±15 Vdc power supply in the
right-side compartment
SYSTEM POWER +24 V CB1 CB13 CB12 CB24
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to +24 Vdc power supply in the
right-side compartment
MCL POWER +5 V CB4 CB16 CB9 CB21
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to MCL +5 Vdc power supply in the
right-side compartment
MCL POWER +12 V CB4 CB16 CB9 CB21
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to MCL ±12 Vdc power supply in
the right-side compartment
MCL POWER -12 V CB4 CB16 CB9 CB21
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to MCL ±12 Vdc power supply in
the right-side compartment
MCL POWER +24 V CB5 CB17 CB8 CB20
r Located on the UPS front panel
r Monitors ac input to MCL +24 Vdc power supply in
the right-side compartment
COMP ON CB6 CB18 CB7 CB19
r Located on the Power Control 3 card
r Indicates signal was sent to start the dual-head
compressor
CYT12 CB25 CB26 CB25 CB26
r Located on the Power Control 3 card
r Indicates 12 Vdc standby signal is present

PN 4237029G 2.4-19
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Right-Side Compartment

Interlock Bypass Switch

To protect the operator from personal injury, a safety interlock switch is attached to the
Universal Power Supply frame (Figure 2.4-20). Removing the main cover triggers this
interlock which interrupts unit operation by turning off power to the Cytometer and Power
Supply module. You can defeat (or bypass) this interlock switch by pulling the switch up.
Always be very careful if you bypass a safety interlock and operate the instrument with the
covers off. The interlock switch is reset when the main cover is reinstalled.

Figure 2.4-20 Universal Power Supply, Right-Side View with Covers Removed - Component Locations
Interlock bypass switch

FC 500 Transient
Voltage Suppressor card

+24 Vdc
MCL power supply

Fan duct
Voltage Supply
Monitor card

+5 and ±12 Vdc

MCL power supply

±15 Vdc system power supply +24 Vdc system power supply Cooling fans

7029270G +5 Vdc system power supply

2.4-20 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Linear Power Supply
The Linear Power supply consists of five separate power supplies (Figure 2.4-20). Three of
these power supplies are for the system and two supply power to the MCL module:
r +5 Vdc system power supply
r ±15 Vdc system power supply
r +24 Vdc system power supply
r +24 Vdc MCL power supply*
r +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply*
* These dc voltages are available but are used only when the Universal Power Supply is
providing power to operate the MCL assembly on an XL-MCL flow cytometer.

CAUTION Risk of damage to internal power supply connector. Internal power supplies for the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply are not interchangeable with the internal power supplies for the Universal
Power Supply. The plug-in connectors differ. Forcing a connector into an incompatible socket may damage
the connector.

Although these components may appear familiar, the power supplies and associated cable
harness are redesigned and, therefore, have new part numbers.

Cooling Fans
Three fans cool the Universal Power Supply. One fan is located in the lower compartment
between the UPS pneumatics drawer and the linear power supplies (Figure 2.4-20). This fan
pulls atmospheric air through the two air filters on the UPS back cover to circulate around the
components mounted in the UPS pneumatics drawer and the linear power supplies. Two
exhaust fans, mounted inside the rear panel (Figure 2.4-20), bolster proper air circulation
inside the Universal Power Supply by pulling the air inside the Universal Power Supply into a
fan duct covering these two exhaust fans. The air entering the fan duct is considered exhaust
and is directed through an opening cut in the extended platform to atmosphere.

FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor Card

Although the FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card (which is also referred to as the
Transient Absorber EMC card or the Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card) is in a new
location, it is the same circuit card used in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply and, therefore, has
the same part number.

Note: This circuit card is labeled as the Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card and, as such, is
used inside the XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers. When a special adhesive is applied to the
components on this circuit card, the circuit card is referred to as FC 500 Transient Voltage
Suppressor card and has a unique part number. The FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor
card is used in both the Universal Power Supply and the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
attached to an FC 500 cytometer.

Additional Information
For details concerning component function, see Heading A.7, UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY
COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.
r Figure A.7-5 identifies each component by name.
r Table A.7-5 describes the function of each named component.

PN 4237029G 2.4-21
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Left-Side Compartment
Although the Argon laser power supply, Breaker card, and Voltage Selector 2 card are
mounted in the top compartment, they are also accessible from the left side of the Universal
Power Supply. Even so, components positioned in the lower left-side compartment are more
easily accessible from the left side than those components inside the top compartment. See
Figure 2.4-21.

Figure 2.4-21 Universal Power Supply, Left-Side View with Covers Removed - Component Locations
Power Control 3 card Argon laser power supply Fan

Breaker card

Voltage Selector 2
card

Dryer assembly

Pressure relief / water trap

dump valve

Vacuum
relief valve

SN 13 Dual-head compressor 7318285D

Components in the lower left-side compartment are now considered part of an assembly
referred to as the UPS pneumatics drawer. The UPS pneumatics drawer is a removable
platform consisting of the lower front panel seen when the front door is opened and an
internal horizontal platform where the dual-head compressor and other pneumatic
components seen in this left side compartment are mounted. For information about the UPS
pneumatics drawer, see the Heading UPS Pneumatics Drawer that follows.

Additional Information
For details concerning component function, see Heading A.7, UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY
COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.

r Figure A.7-4 identifies each component by name.

r Table A.7-4 describes the function of each named component.

2.4-22 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
UPS Pneumatics Drawer
The UPS pneumatics drawer is a removable platform consisting of the lower front panel seen
when the front door is opened (Figure 2.4-2) and an internal horizontal platform where the
dual-head compressor and other pneumatic components are mounted. When the main cover
is removed, components on this horizontal platform are accessible via the left-side
compartment (Figure 2.4-21). When troubleshooting a malfunction that requires replacing a
defective pneumatic component, the UPS pneumatics drawer can easily be removed and set
on a work bench to facilitate the replacement (Figure 2.4-5). Removing the UPS pneumatics
drawer also allows easy access to the cooling fan mounted between the left and right
compartments (Figure 2.4-21).

Figure 2.4-22 UPS Pneumatics Drawer - Component Locations

Dryer assembly

Dual-head
compressor
P

Compressor
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

start relay
VA
C
U
U
M

Capacitor

Pneumatics
control cable 7318375D

New components include (see Figures 2.4-21 or 2.4-22 for component locations):

r New dual-head compressor

If you are familiar with the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, this dual-head compressor
looks familiar, but is different. It is the same in that it is a reciprocating rocking piston
compressor and vacuum pump is powered from a doubled-ended, close coupled
centrally located electric motor. It is different in that it is a full-range unit that has
built-in dual windings so that it can be powered from any single phase electric power
source in the range of 100 to 120 Vac or 220 to 230/240 Vac at frequencies between 48 to
62 Hz. The purpose has not changed. This dual-head compressor produces one
adjustable level of air pressure, 30 psi, and one nonadjustable level of vacuum, >17 in. of
Hg. (The exact level of vacuum varies with altitude.) The 30-psi air pressure and the
vacuum are supplied to the Cytometer for operation of the pneumatic and hydraulic
components. The capacitor and boot come with the dual-head compressor and cannot be
ordered separately.

PN 4237029G 2.4-23
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

r New pneumatics control cable connects the Power Control 3 card to components inside
the UPS pneumatics drawer. This cable provides a pathway for signals from the Power
Control 3 card to components inside the UPS pneumatics drawer.
t When a start compressor signal (/Comp1 ON) from the Power Control 3 card is sent
to the new compressor start relay inside the UPS pneumatics drawer, the relay
activates and provides the ac voltage needed to start the dual-head compressor.
t Signal from the Power Control 3 card activates two new dump valves:

Pressure relief / water trap dump valve

This solenoid valve has the functionality of two of the three ac solenoids in the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, VL 30 and VL 31. When power to the Cytometer is
turned off - like VL 30, this two-way, normally-open dc solenoid valve serves as a
dump valve to empty the water trap and like VL 31, it also serves to quickly release
pressure from the system to the atmosphere. Because the new solenoid valve is dc
rather than ac operated, this solenoid valve can be used with the full range of input
voltages.
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, +24 Vdc energizes this solenoid to
block pressure from escaping from the system to the waste container so that proper
system pressure can be maintained. The drain pathway from the water trap to the
waste container is also blocked.
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off, the +24 Vdc being
applied to the solenoid is removed and the solenoid is opened. Air pressure inside
the system is allowed to quickly escape to the waste container through the now
open solenoid valve and the drain pathway from the water trap to the waste
container is also open to allow the moisture collected inside the water trap to drain
through the open dump valve into the waste container. In a high volume laboratory
where the Cytometer operates practically non-stop, the customer must power off
the Cytometer once every 24 hours for 1 minute. The 1 minute time requirement is
sufficient for the moisture collected inside the water trap to drain through the open
dump valve into the waste container.

Vacuum relief valve

This solenoid valve has the functionality of VL 32, one of the three ac solenoids in
the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Like VL 32, this two-way, normally-open
solenoid valve allows air to enter the system and equalize residual vacuum to the
current atmospheric pressure when the power to the Cytometer is turned off.
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, +24 Vdc energizes this solenoid to
block air from entering the system so that proper system vacuum can be
maintained.
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off, +24 Vdc being applied to
the solenoid is removed and the solenoid is opened. Atmospheric air can now enter
the system through the now open solenoid to quickly equalize residual vacuum to
the current atmospheric pressure.

2.4-24 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
t Power Control 3 card monitors the waste pressure switch attached to the left side of
the UPS pneumatics drawer. When the compressor is activated, vacuum is applied
to waste container via this normally open switch and the hydrophobic air filter on
the front of the Universal Power Supply. This hydrophobic filter removes
contaminants in the air being displaced as waste from the Cytometer enters the
waste container.
If the waste container fills past the automatic shut off in the float sensor and enters
the hydrophobic air filter, the filter clogs, the vacuum flow is cut off, and the waste
pressure switch closes. The activation of this switch triggers the Waste Backpressure
Error message.
r New dryer assembly functions similar to a cooling coil to allow compressed air from the
compressor side of the dual-head air compressor/vacuum pump to dehumidify.

Additional Information
r For detailed instructions concerning removal and reinstallation of the UPS pneumatics
drawer, see Procedure 25 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND
REINSTALLATION.
r For details concerning component function, see Heading A.7, UNIVERSAL POWER
SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS.
t Figure A.7-4 identifies each component by name.
t Table A.7-4 describes the function of each named component.

Power Control 3 Card

The Power Control 3 card is a redesign of the Power Module Control II card used in the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Although redesigned, the basic purpose of this circuit card - to
interface the power supplies and compressor located in the Universal Power Supply
(generally setting on the floor) with the Cytometer (setting on a workbench or counter) - is
the same. Functions include:

r Allowing the compressor to be powered off or on without powering down the Power
Supply module.
r Providing the power required to operate the cooling fans and indicator lights associated
with the Power Supply module.
r Supplying ac voltage (via a relay) to the Argon laser power supply.
r Monitoring the level of waste accumulating inside the waste container.

Interface Cable
The interface cable that connects the Power Control 3 to the Cytometer has a 25 pin
D-connector on each end, P70 and P20.

r P20 is attached to the connector labeled PWR MOD CONT SIG INPUT in the center of the
Power Control 3 card.
r P70 is attached to the connector labeled POWER MODULE CONTROL on the lower rear panel
of the Cytometer.
r Pin-outs for these connectors are shown in Figure 2.4-23.

PN 4237029G 2.4-25
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Figure 2.4-23 Interface Cable for Power Control 3 Card - 25-Pin Cable Connectors, P20 and P70
CYT 12V

K4 6
4
8 /LASER CONTACTOR
13 11
1
9
16
CR9 RELAY DPDT
P70
1 INTLK L INTERLOCK-1 1
14 1N4935 +24V 14
2 LASER DCHG 2
15 15
3 INTERLOCK-2 3
16 16
4 IDLE ON/OFF 4
17 /WASTE J74 Pin 1 17
5 LIGHT /CURRENT 5
18 /WASTEPRESS J77 Pin 1 18
6 CURRENT OUT 6
19 19
7 PWROUT 7
20 RETURN 20
8 LASERPWRIN 8
21 21
9 LASERCURRIN 9
22 22
10 10
23 USER REMOTE 23
11 11
24 24
12 /COMP1 ON J77 Pin 4 12
25 SYSTEM RELAY CONTROL 25
13 LASER START 13

P20 7318376B

The laser control signals are (pin numbers taken from P70, the laser connection):
> indicates the signal is from the Cytometer
< indicates the signal is from the Universal Power Supply

Pin Signal Direction Description

1 INTERLOCK-1 <> 1 and 3 shorted together to satisfy the laser interlock
3 INTERLOCK-2 <> 1 and 3 shorted together to satisfy the laser interlock
2 LASER DCHG > A positive voltage on this pin starts the laser beam output
4 IDLE ON/OFF > +15V for run (on)
5 LIGHT/CURRENT > +15V for light regulation
6 CURRENTOUT > Sets requested current regulation
7 PWROUT > Sets requested light regulation
20 RETURN < Signal Return
8 LASERPWRIN < Laser light level reported from laser
9 LASERCURRIN < Laser current level reported from laser
13 LASER START < +15V supply output from laser power supply

2.4-26 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
The Universal Power Supply control signals are (pin numbers taken from P20):
> indicates the signal is from the Cytometer
< indicates the signal is from the Universal Power Supply

Pin Signal Direction Description

17 /Waste < A low indicates the vacuum switch connected to the waste
pressure sensor has tripped and the waste container has
overflowed.
12 /Comp1 ON > A low (0V) activates the compressor relay, K3.

In addition, the Power Control 3 has a housekeeping supply that provides +12 Vdc to the
fiber optic interface on the Power Supply module. If the main circuit breaker on the front of
the Power Supply module is left in the ON position and the Cytometer is powered off, the
system Workstation, when requested, can restore power to the Cytometer. For more
information about this circuit, see the Heading System Power Distribution - Standby Circuit
in this section.

Sound Reduction
As the use of automated instruments has increased in clinical and research laboratories,
background noise levels have escalated, especially when several instruments are operating in
close proximity. Our customers are concerned about these escalating noise levels. To address
these concerns, any exterior cover on the Universal Power Supply that encloses an
operational component that generates noise has an acoustic-dampening foam attached to that
cover. This foam, referred to as sound guard, serves to reduce noise being emitted to the
environment.

Universal Power Supply

Sound reduction is achieved by lining the inside walls of the Universal Power Supply with
sound-guard foam (Figure 2.4-24). This special acoustic-dampening foam is attached to the
inner walls of the three-sided main cover (on the left, top, and right sides) and to the inner
walls of the back cover. Two large strips of sound-guard foam are also attached to the
underside of the translucent cable cover. When the cable cover and back cover are removed
(lifted off the UPS), sound-guard foam is also visible on the fan duct that vents the two
cooling fans and the extended platform. See Figure 2.4-24.

PN 4237029G 2.4-27
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Figure 2.4-24 Universal Power Supply - Rear View with Back Cover Removed

Sound-guard
foam

Sound-guard foam

ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1

1 2

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

Back cover
Fan duct Extended platform
7318289D

As discussed earlier, when the back cover is installed, power cords, cables, and tubings are
routed through an opening cut in the back cover (Figure 2.4-8). Once the back cover is
mounted, sound emission from the Universal Power Supply is reduced; however, optimum
sound reduction is achieved only when the cable cover is also installed.

When the cable cover is properly installed, the strips of sound-guard foam on the cable side of
the cover mold themselves around the contours of the cables and tubing to further muffle
noise emission. As a result, when the back cover and cable cover are properly mounted,
sound emission from the Universal Power Supply is significantly reduced.

Cytometer
Sound guard foam is not used on the external covers of the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometers.

2.4-28 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Operational Temperatures
Enclosing the Universal Power Supply cavities with sound-guard foam on the covers and then
enclosing the rear of these assemblies with back covers generated concerns that temperatures
might rise in the UPS compressor area and the laser exhaust section. With these concerns in
mind, the design engineers redirected the flow of cooling air to reduce internal component
temperatures (when compared with the original Voltage-Specific Power Supply).

In the Universal Power Supply, the goal is to maintain the coolest possible operating
temperature. The two fans mounted on the lower rear panel are exhaust fans (Figure 2.4-20).
A third fan, located between the compressor and linear power supplies (Figure 2.4-21),
boosts air circulation in the lower compartment, especially over the compressor and into the
right-side compartment to cool the linear power supplies. All three fans working together
pull a steady stream of air through the two filters on the back cover. This steady stream of
filtered air cools components throughout the Universal Power Supply including the Argon
laser power supply.

Cooling the Argon Laser Power Supply

To maintain proper operating temperature inside the Argon laser power supply, an internal
fan pulls filtered air through a grid of openings on the front and on the left side of the Argon
laser power supply. Warm air (exhaust) exits through a grid of openings on the rear of the
Argon laser power supply. To ensure only cool air enters the Argon laser power supply, an air
dam is mounted over the grid of openings on the left side of the Argon laser power supply.
When mounted, this air dam prevents recirculation of the warm exhaust air. See
Figure 2.4-25.

Figure 2.4-25 Air Flow Through the Argon Laser Power Supply

Air dam Argon laser power supply

Air dam

ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

Exhaust
PWB NO. 179493D

WASTE
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT
CE
RFA
TE
IN
ER
US

K
TL
IN
R
WE
PO O
1

R
SE
LA

R
SE
LA

Exhaust
Intake*

*Room air being pulled through

Back cover removed two air filters located on the Intake* through
7318377D
side of the UPS back cover the air dam

PN 4237029G 2.4-29
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Air Flow Inside the Universal Power Supply

To ensure ultimate stability, the goal is to maintain the coolest possible operating
temperature. Although all three cooling fans work together to achieve this goal, tracing the
pathway of the filtered air will enhance your understanding of how this goal is attained.

The filtered air being pulled through the rear panel cable openings and cutouts cools the
components (including the dual-head compressor) inside the left-side compartment. The box
fan between the left and right side compartments directs the air from the left compartment
over to the right compartment to cool the linear power supplies. The two fans on the rear
panel exhaust the warm air into a fan duct that directs the exhaust to atmosphere through an
opening cut in the extended platform. See Figure 2.4-26.

Figure 2.4-26 Air Flow Inside the Universal Power Supply

Argon laser
power supply
Intake through two
air filters on the
UPS back cover

Fan duct

Cooling fans

7029287G Exhaust

Pressure and Vacuum Distribution

30-psi Pressure Distribution

Unregulated pressure from the pressure side of the dual-head compressor is routed to a
pressure-relief valve on the lower front panel of the Universal Power Supply. This
pressure-relief valve has an adjustable regulator that allows the operator to adjust the
approximately 75 psi of pressure output by the compressor down to the 30 psi needed by the
Cytometer. A system pressure gauge (0 to 60 psi gauge) registers the pressure being directed
to the Cytometer.

2.4-30 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
The compressed air generated by the dual-head compressor is hot. As the hot compressed air
leaves the compressor, the compressed air begins to cool and any moisture in that air begins
to condense. In an effort to clean the air, the regulated pressure is routed through a water trap
(also referred to as an air/water filter separator) to filter particles out of the air and allow the
heavier moisture to separate from the air and collect in the bowl of the water trap assembly.
This partially dry compressed air then passes through a dryer assembly that functions similar
to a cooling coil to further dehumidify the compressed air.

The dried 30 psi is then routed though QD27, the blue quick-connect on the rear of the
Universal Power Supply into QD23, the blue quick-connect on the lower rear panel of the
Cytometer. Once inside the Cytometer, the 30 psi passes through a copper coil to further cool
the supply and is then routed through a second water trap (air/water filter separator) to
further dry the air and prevent internal rusting of components.

The dried 30 psi supply is distributed to solenoids and various pneumatic components to
activate pinch valves, move cylinders, and drain waste from the Cytometer. This 30 psi
supply is further regulated to produce the sample pressure and sheath pressure needed for
accurate sample analysis. To perform these functions, the 30 psi supply is routed to the:
r Upper pneumatics drawer
t Sample pressure regulator, RG1, for regulation of the sample pressure.
t Sheath pressure regulator, RG2, for regulation of the sheath pressure.
t A normally-closed vacuum/pressure switch, SN8, monitors the system pressure
available to the Cytometer. If the system pressure falls below 25 psi, a System
Pressure Error message appears on the Workstation screen to alert the operator.
r Lower pneumatics drawer
r MCL assembly (if installed)
r Waste manifold (MF1) that provides a single point for routing waste from various areas
of the Cytometer to the external waste container.

Sheath Pressure Distribution

The sheath pressure is distributed to:
r The Sensor card (in the upper pneumatics drawer) for monitoring and reporting values
to the System Interface card.
r The sheath container (inside the reagent drawer) to push sheath fluid from the sheath
container through the flow cell, creating an IsoFlow sheath in the flow cell.
r The cleanse container (inside the reagent drawer) for cleaning the flow cell when the
operator is cleaning the Cytometer sampling system.

Sample Pressure Distribution

The sample pressure is distributed to:
r The Sensor card (in the upper pneumatics drawer) for monitoring and reporting values
to the System Interface card.
r The MCL sample head to push sample from the specimen tube through the flow cell,
creating the sample stream in the flow cell.

PN 4237029G 2.4-31
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

Vacuum Distribution
Unregulated vacuum created by the vacuum side of the dual-head compressor is routed
through the vacuum trap (FL3) and vacuum filter (FL2) to a vacuum chamber (VC1) to
control the flow of waste from the flow cell and sample head to the vacuum chamber.
Therefore, VC1 is commonly referred to as the waste chamber.

Vacuum is also routed to the upper pneumatics drawer where a normally-closed

vacuum/pressure switch, SN9, monitors the system vacuum available to the Cytometer. If the
system vacuum falls below 10 in. Hg., a System Vacuum Error message appears on the
Workstation screen to alert the operator.

Power Distribution
The Universal Power Supply provides both System and Laser power to the Cytometer.

System Power
System power generated in the Universal Power Supply is distributed to the Cytometer using
four long cables with D-connectors on each end. Two of these cables (logic and analog) are
attached to connectors on the rear of the Universal Power Supply and connectors on the
lower rear panel of the Cytometer. The MCL cable (the third cable) is attached to the
MCL/MPL connector on the rear of the Universal Power Supply and the MCL connector on
the rear of the MCL assembly.

The power module control cable, the fourth cable, also has two connectors. One connector is
attached to connector P20 on the Power Control 3 card and the other is attached to the rear
panel of the Cytometer via a connector labeled POWER MODULE CONTROL.

Laser Power
Laser power generated by the Argon laser power supply is provided to the Argon laser head
inside the Cytometer via a thick cable called the laser umbilical cable.

System Power Distribution - Standby Circuit

Note: If you are familiar with the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, operation of this standby
circuit is similar to that of the CYT12 circuit. The standby circuit is now incorporated into the
Power Control 3 card; therefore, a separate CYT12 Receiver EMC circuit card is no longer
needed. The terminal of the orange fiber optic cable that is installed in the CYT12 connector
on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is installed, on the Universal Power Supply, in a
connector labeled U2 in the upper left corner of the Power Control 3 card.

Standby Circuit
The standby circuit is a type of control device between the Universal Power Supply and the
Workstation computer that allows the Cytometer to be easily powered on or off as needed.
This control circuit operates as follows (refer to Figure 2.4-27 as needed):

Voltage from the external ac power source enters the Universal Power Supply through the line
cord labeled SYSTEM POWER (on the rear panel) to the main circuit breaker (on the upper
front panel). Regardless of the ac input voltage (100 Vac, 120 Vac, 220 Vac, or 230/240 Vac),
when that main circuit breaker is switched to the ON position (l position), the ac voltage
completes a circuit commonly referred to as the “standby circuit.”

2.4-32 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Figure 2.4-27 System Power, Block Diagram - Universal Power Supply
FC 500 Transient
Voltage
Suppressor card

ac input Main circuit breaker ac line

ac (On front of UPS) filter
socket

+ 5 Vdc + 24 Vdc MCL/MPL*

±12 Vdc

Power supply
± 15 Vdc Analog power
System
relay
Power supply
Logic power
Breaker card + 5 Vdc

Power supply
Voltage Selector 2 card
+ 24 Vdc

Power supply

* MPL is an option available for

Standby UPS the Cytomics FC 500 only.
power pneumatics
PWB 179493D

supply drawer
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
VA

Power Compressor
C
U
U
M

Control 3 start relay

card

Interlock
switch
12 Vdc Signal 7029268G

The route for setting up this circuit is from the main circuit breaker → to the input side of the
ac line filter that is connected with the FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card that
protects the internal system from high voltage transients from the input power source → from
the output side of the ac line filter → through the ac input connector (J3) on the back of the
Breaker card where the ac voltage is routed two places:
1. Through thermal circuit breakers CB25 and CB26 → through connector J5 (on the back
of the Breaker card) → to the Power Control 3 card to power the standby power supply.
2. To the input of the system relay mounted on the Voltage Selector 2 card.

PN 4237029G 2.4-33
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

On the Power Control 3 card, the standby power supply produces 12 Vdc and 5 Vdc via a
regulator in the standby circuit. These voltages keep the circuit on the Power Control 3 card
active so that a startup command can be received and processed. When the standby circuit is
operational, the CYT 12 indicator lamp on the Power Control 3 card glows green to signal the
ac voltage needed to power on the Cytometer is available.

To start the sequence for turning on the Cytometer, four conditions must be satisfied. If any
one of these conditions is not met, the standby power supply will not activate SYSTEM RELAY
K5 on the Power Control 3 card. The four conditions that must be satisfied are:

1. Connection with a viable ac voltage source must be made.

Voltage from an external ac power source (100 Vac, 120 Vac, 220 Vac, or 230/240 Vac)
must enter the Universal Power Supply through the line cord labeled SYSTEM POWER (on
the rear panel) to the main circuit breaker (on the upper front panel).
2. The main circuit breaker must be switched to the ON position (l position).
3. The safety interlock circuit must be satisfied.
The interlock switch for the Universal Power Supply is located on the upper part of the
frame (Figure 2.4-20). Basically the interlock circuit is a path from the Power Control 3
card to the interlock switch and then back to the Power Control 3 card that carries the
12 Vdc generated by the standby power supply. If this circuit is interrupted, the system
cannot start. To close the interlock circuit, the main cover must be on or the interlock
must be defeated. To override (bypass) this interlock, pull the post of the switch up until
it locks into place. Because it is possible to defeat the safety interlock, this switch is often
referred to as the interlock bypass switch.
4. The Workstation computer must command the system to start.
The Workstation is connected to the Universal Power Supply via an orange fiber optic
cable. This is a one-way communication cable with a transmitter on the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card inside the Workstation
computer and a receiver on the Power Control 3 card in the Universal Power Supply.
When, at the Workstation, an operator requests the Cytometer be powered on, the
Workstation computer sends an optical signal to power on the Cytometer (via the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card) through the orange
fiber optic cable to communicate with the standby circuit (via the connector labeled U2
on the Power Control 3 card in the Universal Power Supply).

When all four conditions are satisfied, a set of switch contacts inside the SYSTEM RELAY K5 on
the Power Control 3 card is activated and 12 Vdc is sent to the Breaker card as a SYSTEM
RELAY CONTROL signal via the same cable that brought the ac to the standby power supply.
Since power is no longer available to the standby circuit, the CYT12 indicator lamp on the
Power Control 3 card no longer glows.

The Breaker card routes the 12 Vdc (SYSTEM RELAY CONTROL signal) to the system relay
mounted on the Voltage Selector 2 card. The 12 Vdc activates the system relay and the input
ac voltage at the system relay is routed to the input side of all the thermal circuit breakers on
the Breaker card (with the exception of CB25 and CB26).

2.4-34 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
The output side of each thermal circuit breaker is connected to one of two 30 pin connectors
located on either side of the Breaker card - connector J1 for low voltages (100 Vac or 120 Vac)
or connector J2 for high voltages (220 Vac or 230/240 Vac). It is the installation of the voltage
select cable on the Breaker card and the Voltage Selector 2 card that completes the circuit and
determines the route the ac voltage will use as it flows from the Breaker card to other parts of
the Universal Power Supply.

r As viewed from the rear of the Universal Power Supply, if the voltage select cable is
attached to the connector on the left side of the Breaker card and the loose end of the
voltage select cable to the connector labeled J151 100 VAC or J152 120 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card, the ac voltage is routed through the upper and lower bank of circuit
breakers on the left side of the Breaker card. See Figure 2.4-28 for connector locations.
Keep in mind this is a rear, not a front view. If viewed from the front, these circuit
breakers are on the right. For the specific circuit breakers used by the low voltages, refer
to the Heading Voltage Selection earlier in this section.
r As viewed from the rear of the Universal Power Supply, if the voltage select cable is
attached to the connector on the right side of the Breaker card and the loose end of the
voltage select cable to the connector labeled J153 220 VAC or J154 240 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card, the ac voltage is routed through the upper and lower bank of circuit
breakers on the right side of the Breaker card. See Figure 2.4-28 for connector locations.
Keep in mind this is a rear, not a front view. If viewed from the front, these circuit
breakers are on the left. For the specific circuit breakers used by the high voltages, refer
to the Heading Voltage Selection earlier in this section.

Figure 2.4-28 Voltage Selection

Breaker 120 Vac Voltage Selector 2 230/240 Vac
card system card system

MCL, 5&12V, +24V +\- 15V SPLY 5V SPLY 24V SPLY

5 J129 1 4 J4 1 J3 3 2 1 3 J5 1

10 6 8 5 6 4
6 4
100 15 11 120 12 9 9 8 7 220 240
VAC VAC VAC VAC
SYSTEM RELAY J153 J154
J151 J152
15 30 15 30 16 1 16 1

J155

7 9

WARNING
1 16 1 16 *HIGH VOLTAGE* 30 15 30 15
1 3
PWB 177821B PWB 626415A

Low ac voltage 100 Vac 220 Vac High ac voltage

connector (J1) system system connector (J2)
7318354C

PN 4237029G 2.4-35
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

System Power Distribution - Power Usage

The Voltage Selector 2 card supplies the ac voltage needed to activate the dual-head
compressor (via the compressor start relay) to provide pneumatics to the Cytometer and to
activate the five linear power supplies to provide dc voltages to the Cytometer.

Note: When Prefinal Software is used to power the Cytometer off or on, a COMP ON signal
from the System Interface card (in the Data Acquisition card cage) activates the compressor
start relay to supply the ac needed to turn on the compressor.

The dual-head compressor and each of the linear power supplies have multiple windings. The
connections made on the Breaker and Voltage Selector 2 cards determine if the low voltage or
high voltage windings will be used. If the voltage select cable is installed so that the wrong ac
voltage is selected, the compressor and the linear power supplies will be irreparably damaged.

The five linear power supplies provide the following voltages (see Figure 2.4-20 for power
supply locations):

r The +24 Vdc system power supply converts the ac input voltage to +24 Vdc. This analog
voltage is needed for operating solenoids and fans in the Cytometer.
r The +5 Vdc system power supply converts the ac input voltage to +5 Vdc. This digital
voltage is needed for the logic circuits in the Cytometer and for the safety interlock in the
Power Supply module.
r The ±15 Vdc system power supply converts the ac input voltage to +15 Vdc and -15 Vdc.
These analog voltages are needed for optical operations within the Cytometer.
r Two linear power supplies provide dc voltages to the MCL assembly. The upper supply
provides +24 Vdc and the lower supply, +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc.
Note: +12 Vdc and -12 Vdc are required to operate the barcode reader on the XL-MCL
flow cytometer.

Cables attached to connectors on the rear of the Universal Power Supply provide these
voltages to the Cytometer via connectors at the rear of the Cytometer:

r The connector labeled ANALOG provides the Cytometer with analog system power,
±15 Vdc, +24 Vdc, ground, and the power supply sense lines.
r The connector labeled LOGIC provides the Cytometer with +5 Vdc digital voltage and
ground, as well as the connection for the Power Supply module safety interlock.
r The connector labeled MCL/MPL provides the MCL assembly with +5 Vdc, ±15 Vdc,
+24 Vdc, and ±12 Vdc.

A cable attached to the connector labeled POWER CONTROL MODULE (on the rear of the
Cytometer) and to J70 on the Power Control 3 card (on the rear of the Universal Power
Supply) provides an external in-line connection not only with the Cytometer but also with
the Argon laser power supply. For the specific pin-outs for this cable, see Figure 2.4-23 and
the information under Heading Power Control 3 Card earlier in this section.

2.4-36 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY 2
Laser Power Distribution - Laser Start Up
With the Cytometer running, voltage from the external ac power source enters the Universal
Power Supply through the line cord labeled LASER POWER (on the rear panel).

Regardless of the ac input voltage (100 Vac, 120 Vac, 220 Vac, or 230/240 Vac), the ac source
voltage is routed to the input side of the LASER CONTACTOR (K2 relay) mounted on the back
side of the Power Control 3 card. The output of the LASER CONTACTOR is routed to two
connectors (ARGON LASER and AUX LASER) on the Power Control 3 card. The cable installed in
the connector labeled ARGON LASER will provide power to the Argon laser power supply in the
top compartment of the Universal Power Supply. The connector labeled AUX LASER is not used
when the Universal Power Supply is connected to an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer.

The positive side of the winding on the LASER CONTACTOR is supplied with +24 Vdc from the
+24 Vdc linear system power supply that is routed first through a second set of switch
contacts inside the SYSTEM RELAY K5 on the Power Control 3 card. The SYSTEM RELAY K5 is
closed only if the +24 Vdc system power supply is on.

The laser interlock (inside the Cytometer sensing area) for the Argon laser power supply and
the negative side of the winding on the LASER CONTACTOR are controlled as follows:

An interlock signal from the Argon laser power supply is routed from connector P70 to the
SYSTEM POWER RELAY K4 on the front side of the Power Control 3 card and then back to the
Argon laser power supply. If the SYSTEM POWER RELAY K4 is not closed, the Argon laser power
supply will not function.

One side of the winding inside the SYSTEM POWER RELAY K4 is supplied with +24 Vdc from the
linear +24 Vdc system power supply which is only active if the unit is on.

The other side of the winding inside the SYSTEM POWER RELAY K4 is pulled down by the
System Interface card, via connector P20, if the interlock for the Cytometer sensing cover is
satisfied indicating the top cover is properly installed.

If the SYSTEM POWER RELAY K4 is closed, the System Interface card pulls the negative side of
the LASER CONTACTOR down to activated it. This signal is routed through the SYSTEM POWER
RELAY K4 which triggers the LASER START signal to be sent from the System Interface card to
connector P20, through the Power Control 3 card, and out connector P70 to the Argon laser
power supply to start the laser.

PN 4237029G 2.4-37
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY

2.4-38 PN 4237029G
 INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
WORKSTATION 2
2.5 WORKSTATION
The Workstation analyzes and reports the status of the Cytometer. The Workstation computer
contains a Beckman Coulter-manufactured Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card or Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card. The Fiber Optics Interface card attached to the rear panel of
the Cytometer converts the digital data received from the Cyto Transputer card to optical data
then sends that optical data to the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor
EXMEM II card inside the Workstation computer where the optical data is converted back to
digital data. Based on the protocol selected by operator, this raw data input is gated and
histograms are produced for analysis. These histograms are displayed on the Workstation
screen and may be stored and retrieved as the operator desires.

Components

Standard Configuration
The standard Workstation on an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer consists of a (Figure 2.5-1):

r Tower computer that contains -

t An INTEL Pentium processor (including the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card or
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card)
t A CD-ROM drive
t A 3.5 in. floppy diskette drive
r Mouse (including a mouse pad)
r Keyboard (small or large)
r Color monitor

Figure 2.5-1 Workstation - Components

ATTENTION: An individual Workstation and its basic component layout may vary from that shown.

INTEL Pentium Color monitor

CD-ROM drive
processor

3.5" Floppy
diskette drive

7029128F Keyboard Mouse Mousepad

PN 4237029G 2.5-1
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
WORKSTATION

Component Layout on Tower Computers

One of the main components in this Workstation is its tower computer. The layout of basic
components on an individual tower computer varies with the brand of computer purchased
for stock and distribution. If the tower computer you are servicing has a blanking plate where
a card edge is illustrated, the functions performed by that circuit card may be incorporated
into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer. In illustrations referencing the
tower computer (such as Figure 2.5-1), an ATTENTION message is positioned between the
figure title and the illustration to remind you the illustration may not exactly depict the tower
computer you are servicing, but operationally they are the same.

Options
Options currently available:
r MCL option
r Media storage:
t Iomega™ ZIP™ drive
t CD-RW drive
r Four fluorescence sensor configuration
Note: The optional FL4 sensor (PMT) can be either a standard PMT (300 nm to 800 nm)
or a red sensitive PMT that has a wider spectral response (300 nm to 850 nm).
r Multimedia Workstation
r Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card
r Artisoft LANtastic® Client/Server Software V8.0
r Sybase® SQL Anywhere™ PC database server software
r EXPO32™ ADC software
r EXPO32™ Analysis software
r Bar-code EEPROM
r Printers:
t Hewlett Packard® HP® LaserJet® 2200D printer (black print only)
t Hewlett Packard® HP® InkJet 2280 Color Printer
r Bar-code hand-held scanner

2.5-2 PN 4237029G
 3INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 3
PART A: INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION (with Universal Power Supply)
ATTENTION: This service manual contains two instrument installation procedures:
r Use the installation procedures in this section (PART A) only if you are installing an XL
or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a Universal Power Supply.
r If you are installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a Voltage-Specific Power
Supply, use the installation procedures in Appendix G.

3.1 PRE-SITE INSPECTION

Prior to installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, a pre-site inspection is required to verify
the following conditions:

r Space and Accessibility

r Power Requirements
r Environment
r Unloading and Moving the Instrument
r Installation Assistance
r Inspection Report

Space and Accessibility

A bench or table must be available for installation.

The XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers use a 15 mW Argon air-cooled laser system
manufactured by JDS Uniphase. Evaluate the installation site to ensure sufficient air flow for
cooling. All intake fans must be at least 30.5 cm (12 in.) from any wall or other obstruction
that could interfere with air flow. Additionally, the instrument must be positioned with
sufficient space for servicing. Table 3.1-1 contains specifications for determining the flow
cytometer’s footprint and the necessary operating clearances.

Table 3.1-1 Required Operating Clearance

Specifications XL Flow Cytometer XL-MCL Flow Cytometer

Height 54.6 cm (21.5 in.) 54.6 cm (21.5 in.)
Additional clearance above for servicing 45.7 cm (18 in.) minimum 45.7 cm (18 in.) minimum
and lifting the Data Acquisition card cage
above the sensor
Total clearance needed 100.3 cm (39.5 in.) 100.3 cm (39.5 in.)
Width 61.0 cm (24 in.) 86.6 cm (34.1 in.)
Additional clearance on right for servicing 30.5 cm (12 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.)
Additional clearance on left for servicing 30.5 cm (12 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.)
Total clearance needed 122.0 cm (48 in.) 147.6 cm (58.1 in.)
Depth 61.0 cm (24 in.) 61.0 cm (24 in.)
Additional clearance behind instrument for 30.5 cm (12 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.)
sufficient cooling and room for servicing
Total clearance needed 91.5 cm (36 in.) 91.5 cm (36 in.)

PN 4237029G 3.1-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
PRE-SITE INSPECTION

Power Requirements
ATTENTION: If the facility tends to experience power fluctuations, contact a local line
monitoring company and request a line monitor be installed one week before the instrument
is scheduled to be installed.
The XL or XL-MCL Cytometer and Power Supply module are contained in two separate
enclosures with two separate power cables - one for system power and the other for the laser.
Each power cord is intended to be plugged into a different 20 ampere supply from the other.

The electrical ratings of the XL or XL-MCL system are:

r 100 Vac system: 30 Amps, 48 to 62 Hz, 3000 Watts
r 120 Vac system: 30 Amps, 48 to 62 Hz, 3600 Watts
r 220 Vac system: 15 Amps, 48 to 62 Hz, 3300 Watts
r 230/240 Vac system: 15 Amps, 48 to 62 Hz, 3600 Watts

Power requirements vary for each country. It is important that the correct electrical input is
available prior to installation.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Ensure that there is a main power disconnect switch in the same room
as the lasers to avoid personal injury.

Verify sufficient power outlets are available. See Table 3.1-2.

r Two dedicated lines (with isolated grounds) are needed:
t One for the Power Supply module
t One for the air-cooled Argon laser.
r Three non-dedicated lines are needed for the Workstation components:
t One for the tower computer
t One for the monitor
t One for the printer.

Table 3.1-2 Power Requirements

Country Dedicated Lines with Isolated Grounds Non-Dedicated Lines

USA Two dedicated lines at 115 Vac, 50/60 Hz Three non-dedicated lines at 115 Vac,
at 20 A 50/60 Hz at 20 A
Note: All 115 V receptacles must be tested
for electrical wiring faults using the
procedure under Heading 4.18,
THREE-WIRE CIRCUIT ANALYZER TEST.
Europe and Two dedicated lines at 220 Vac, 50/60 Hz Three non-dedicated lines at 220 Vac,
other applicable at 20 A 50/60 Hz at 20 A
countries or
Two dedicated lines at 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
at 20 A
Japan Two dedicated lines at 100 Vac, 50/60 Hz Three non-dedicated lines at 100 Vac,
at 20 A 50/60 Hz at 20 A

3.1-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
PRE-SITE INSPECTION 3
Optional Computer Peripherals
Additional power connections may be needed for any optional purchased computer
peripherals, such as monitors and printers. The type of connection is dependent on the local
power available. The user may need to use a separate printer stand to free up the work space.

Environment
The room where the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer is to be installed must meet the
specifications in Table 3.1-3
.

Table 3.1-3 Environmental Requirements

Description Specification

Humidity 30 - 85%, non-condensing

Heat dissipation into room 1,920 W (6,553 BTU per hour) generated by the Cytometer
300 W (1,024 BTU per hour) generated by the tower computer
60 W (205 BTU per hour) generated by the 17-inch flat screen monitor
Ambient temperature 18° - 29°C (64° - 85°F)
Stability/rate of change Temperature fluctuations within the ambient temperature range can affect
performance. For optimal performance, Beckman Coulter recommends
the room temperature not fluctuate more than 2.8°C (5°F) per hour.
Noise ≤65 dBa

Unloading and Moving the Instrument

The instrument arrives at the customer site with the Universal Power Supply and Cytometer
packed on individual palletized cartons. The remainder of the instrument arrives in cartons
that are not palletized.
.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not attempt to unload the Universal Power Supply or the Cytometer
without using a pallet jack. Failure to use a pallet jack can result in serious personal injury.

Make sure the shipping department is aware that a pallet jack is required to unload the XL or
XL-MCL flow cytometer and associated cartons from the delivery truck. Find out where these
cartons will be stored prior to installation.

If the cartons are to be stored somewhere other than the installation site,
r Inspect this area to make sure the conditions are acceptable.
r Establish who will be responsible for ensuring these cartons are at the installation site at
the appropriate time.
Locate the person who will most likely accept the shipment. Clearly explain what you need
done prior to your arrival. Ask this person to inspect all cartons for damage. Explain that a
claim must be filed with the carrier if damage is detected.

PN 4237029G 3.1-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
PRE-SITE INSPECTION

Installation Assistance
Inform the customer that during the installation you will need an able-bodied assistant to
help you lift and position the Cytometer on the bench or table top. Ask them to make sure
someone is available to help as needed.

Inspection Report
Review the findings with your contact person. If deficiencies are present, make sure the
customer understands what actions are necessary to meet the specifications for the system
their laboratory has ordered. Establish a time frame for completion. Notify your manager if
the installation must be rescheduled.

3.1-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
PREINSTALLATION CHECKS 3
3.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECKS
Before installing the instrument, verify the following conditions:
r Pre-Site Inspection Compliance
r Education Center Training
r Condition of Cartons Received
r Optional Computer Peripherals
r Supplies

Pre-Site Inspection Compliance

Prior to installing the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, verify the site complies with the space,
accessibility, power, and environmental requirements detailed in the pre-site inspection.
Verify any deficiency noted during the pre-site inspection is resolved before starting the
installation.

Education Center Training

Verify that at least one person from the customer laboratory is already trained or is assigned
to a class date within two weeks of installation.

Condition of Cartons Received

If the instrument and its associated cartons were stored somewhere other than the installation
site, verify that all cartons are now at the installation site. If not, notify the appropriate person
(established during the pre-site inspection) and make arrangements for the cartons to be
moved to the installation site.
At the installation site:
1. Compare the cartons received against the customer’s order, and notify shipping if there is
a discrepancy.
2. Inspect the cartons for damage. If any damage exists, confirm that a claim was filed with
the carrier.

Supplies
Verify the necessary supplies are available, including:
r IsoFlow™ sheath fluid, PN 8547008
r Flow-Check™ fluorospheres, PN 6805359
r COULTER® CYTO-TROL™ control cells, PN 6604248
r COULTER CLENZ® cleaning agent, PN 8546929

Optional Computer Peripherals

If the customer orders the optional Printer or a second monitor, verify space is available. The
customer may wish to use a separate Printer stand to free up the work space.

PN 4237029G 3.2-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
PREINSTALLATION CHECKS

3.2-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
3.3 CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Installation of an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer by anyone who has not
successfully completed a Beckman Coulter authorized training course is prohibited. Avoid personal injury
by obtaining the necessary training to complete these installation procedures.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit), PN 5415097
B Box suitable for storing shipping parts removed during installation

Unpacking
1. Locate the carton containing the Cytometer.
2. Position the carton close to the bench or table where the Cytometer is to be installed.

WARNING Risk of personal injury as the steel strapping is cut. To prevent injury, hold the cutter with one
hand and take hold of the steel strap with the other hand to ensure the steel strap does not spring back.

3. Stand to one side of the strapping surrounding the shipping carton.

4. Holding the steel strapping firmly with one hand, cut and remove each strap
surrounding cardboard carton. Discard the straps.
5. Remove the cardboard carton, foam blocks, and plastic covering.
6. Visually inspect the Cytometer for any physical damage caused in shipping and correct
as needed.
7. Record the serial number on the WW: Installation Database and report any loose or
damaged parts/assemblies.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not attempt to unload the Cytometer without assistance. Lifting
handles are not provided. The Cytometer weighs over 40 lbs and can be difficult to lift and maneuver into
position. Lifting the Cytometer should only be done by a minimum of two persons following the requisite
safety precautions. Failure to obtain assistance can result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION Risk of instrument damage. The MCL option on the XL-MCL flow cytometer may be damaged if
the left side of the Cytometer is grasped to move the Cytometer from the pallet to the bench or table top.
Position one person in the front and the other in the back of the Cytometer to move the instrument from the
pallet to the bench or table top.

8. Request assistance to place the Cytometer on the bench top or table.

a. Position one person in front and another in the back.
b. Do not lift the instrument from its sides, especially if the MCL option is attached.
9. Orient the Cytometer to the far right of the designated area to allow space for installing
the Workstation later.
10. Carefully remove the protective film from the:
r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.

PN 4237029G 3.3-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

Installation
ATTENTION: Since it may be necessary to access an area of the Cytometer several times, do not
reinstall a cover or panel until you are specifically instructed to do so.

Remove Covers to Provide Needed Access

1. Remove the top cover and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 1 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions with illustrations.
2. Remove three small shipping screws at the top of each side cover (Figure 3.3-1). Place all
six screws in the box designated for storing shipping parts.

Figure 3.3-1 Location of Small Shipping Screws Used to Secure the Side Covers
Remove shipping
screws

7029103F Left side Right side

3. Remove the right-side cover. Refer to Procedure 2 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions with illustrations.
4. To remove the manual sample station assembly, use instrument specific instructions:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to step 5.
r If this is an XL-MCL cytometer, go to step 10.
5. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.
Refer to Procedure 14 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions with
illustrations.
6. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 3 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions with illustrations.
7. Pull open the reagent drawer.
8. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Remove the four flat-head Phillips screws securing the manual sample station to the
Cytometer frame.
Note: Two screws are located on the left side of the sample station and two more are
located on the front to the right.
b. Pull the cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the assembly on the reagent
bottles.
9. Go to step 15 to continue this installation.

3.3-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
10. Unlatch the MCL covers from the Cytometer:

CAUTION Risk of damage to the MCL option. The following steps are meant to unlatch, not remove, the
MCL covers. If you attempt to remove the MCL covers without completing all the steps detailed in the
Removing the MCL Covers procedure under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION, you
may damage MCL components. The following steps are required to remove the manual sample station
assembly. To remove the left-side cover, it is not necessary to remove the MCL covers from the Cytometer.

a. Push the button to unlock the upper cover. The cover pops open as the air cylinder
attached to the cover extends.
b. Push the cover up to ensure it is fully open.
c. Remove the two screws securing the MCL probe housing (Figure 3.3-2) then
carefully pull the probe housing cover off the Cytometer and set it aside.

Figure 3.3-2 Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover

Remove
screws

7029238F

PN 4237029G 3.3-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

d. Close the MCL door (upper cover) and unlatch the MCL lower cover by grasping
the base and gently pulling the base away from the Cytometer (Figure 3.3-3). Do
not attempt to remove the MCL option from the Cytometer.

Figure 3.3-3 Unlatching the MCL Covers

7029092F

11. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside. See Figure 3.3-4.

Figure 3.3-4 Remove the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover)

7029230F

12. Pull open the reagent drawer.

3.3-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
13. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Carefully move the unlatched MCL cover away from the Cytometer frame.
b. Locate and remove the two pan-head screws that secure the manual sample station
to the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.3-5).

Figure 3.3-5 Manual Sample Station Screw Locations

7029123F Remove screws (4)

c. Remove the two flat-head Phillips screws securing the right side of the manual
sample station to the front of the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.3-5).
d. Pull the cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the assembly on the reagent
bottles.
14. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.

PN 4237029G 3.3-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

CAUTION Risk of damage to electrical components on the front panel display circuit card. Do not use a
T-handled hex key to hold the upper cover open. If the metal in the T-handle comes in contact with the
electrical components on the circuit card, the components may short out and the card becomes defective.

15. Lift the upper cover and place a long screwdriver (with a plastic handle) in the channel
of the upper frame to it open (Figure 3.3-6).

Figure 3.3-6 Bracing the Upper Cover Open

Cytometer
upper cover (open)

Long screwdriver
(with plastic handle)

Channel
(upper right)
7029129G

16. Remove the four screws (two on each side) securing the filter shield to the Cytometer
frame (Figure 3.3-7). Set the filter shield aside.

Figure 3.3-7 Filter Shield Screw Locations

Remove screws (4)

C o u lte r E p ic s X L M C L

Filter shield 7029116F

3.3-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front
Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw and hex nut) located at the front right
corner of the optical bench:

1. Slide the reagent drawer open as needed.

2. Use your Chapman’s ratchet set to remove the shipping tie-down (screw and hex nut)
located at the front right corner. Refer to Figure 3.3-8 as needed.
a. Use the 3/8-inch ratchet to hold the hex nut in place (Figure 3.3-8).
b. Use the 3/8-inch Phillips-head bit in the ratchet screwdriver to remove the shipping
screw (Figure 3.3-8).

Figure 3.3-8 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front
Chapman ratchet

3/8 inch
Phillips-head bit

Spacer

3/8 inch
ratchet
7029107G

3. Remove the spacer (Figure 3.3-8).

4. Place the shipping tie-down (screw, hex nut, and spacer) in the box designated for
storing shipping parts.

Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Back (Behind the Laser)
1. If this is an XL with the MCL option, remove the MCL CPU card; if this is not an XL with
the MCL option, go to step 2.
Note: The MCL CPU card is the larger of the two circuit cards located on the left side of
the Cytometer. It is the card near the rear of the Cytometer. Refer to Figure 3.3-9 or
Figure 3.3-10 as needed.

PN 4237029G 3.3-7
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

Figure 3.3-9 MCL CPU Card Cable Locations Figure 3.3-10 MCL CPU Card Screw Locations
MCL CPU card MCL CPU card

Disconnect Remove
cable screws
(5) (7)

7029093F 7029100F

a. Set up your static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit).

b. Disconnect the five cable connectors attached to the card (Figure 3.3-9).
c. Remove the seven Phillips-head screws and washers that attach the card to the
Cytometer frame (Figure 3.3-10).
d. Remove the card and set it aside on the static-dissipative work mat.
2. Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw and hex nut) located in the left rear
corner behind the laser head.
a. Locate the shipping tie-down on the rear of the optical bench (Figure 3.3-11). It is
the larger of the two screws.

Figure 3.3-11 Location of the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser (Top View)
Top view
looking inside
Rear view Cytometer rear of Cytometer

Shipping
tie-down
screwhead

7029143F

3.3-8 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
ATTENTION: Before beginning this task, make sure you have a long Phillips-head screwdriver
(or a Phillips-head screwdriver with an extension), a 3/8-inch wrench, and a piece of
electrical tape. If either the hex nut or spacer falls to the Cytometer floor, it must be retrieved.
b. Use a 3/8-inch wrench and a long Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the shipping
tie-down (screw and hex nut). Refer to Figure 3.3-12 as needed.
r Place a piece of electrical tape over the opening of the 3/8-inch wrench.
r Route the 3/8-inch wrench through the opening on the left side of the
Cytometer and position the wrench to hold the hex nut in place
(Figure 3.3-12).
r Use a long Phillips-head screwdriver (or a Phillips-head screwdriver with an
extension) to remove the shipping screw (Figure 3.3-12). The electrical tape
should capture the hex nut inside the wrench.

Figure 3.3-12 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser

Long Phillips-head
screwdriver

Screw
3/8 inch
hex nut Spacer

3/8 inch Electrical

wrench tape T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

Rear view 7029112F

c. Use large hemostats to carefully remove the spacer (Figure 3.3-12).

d. Retrieve the hex nut or spacer if either falls to the Cytometer floor.
3. Place the shipping tie-down (screw, hex nut, and spacer) in the box designated for
storing shipping parts.

PN 4237029G 3.3-9
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

Prepare Components inside the Lower Pneumatics Drawer for Operation

1. On the left side of the Cytometer, locate the two rows of pinch-valves inside the lower
pneumatics drawer.
2. Use a hemostat to remove the red shipping clip from each pinch valve. Make sure you
remove all 14 shipping clips!
3. Count the removed shipping clips to confirm that all 14 red clips were removed.
4. Place the red shipping clips in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
5. Visually inspect for any loose or damaged parts.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.

Reinstall the MCL CPU Card (if removed earlier)

1. Position the MCL CPU card back on the Cytometer frame.
2. Loosely install the seven Phillips-head screws and washers then tighten the screws to the
Cytometer frame.
3. Reconnect all five cable connectors to their respective plugs on the circuit card.

Prepare the Data Acquisition Card Cage for Operation

At the Data Acquisition card cage:
1. Remove the two shipping screws, one from each side of the card cage. Place these screws
in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
2. With one hand, pull the Data Acquisition card cage forward and hold it in an upright
position. With your free hand, lock the hinge on each side of the card cage to secure it in
a vertical position. Make sure both hinges are locked before releasing your grip.
3. Remove the four screws securing the shipping brace (Figure 3.3-13).

Figure 3.3-13 Data Acquisition Card Cage - Shipping Brace and Screw Locations

Card cage

Remove
screws (4)

7029113F

3.3-10 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
4. Remove the shipping brace (Figure 3.3-13).
5. Inspect for any loose cards or cables. Correct as needed.
6. Reinstall the shipping brace (Figure 3.3-13).
7. Disassemble the static-dissipative field kit.
8. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the center cavity of the Cytometer. Refer
to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

Prepare Components inside the Upper Pneumatic Drawer for Operation

Note: For easy access to the red shipping clips on the two pinch valves inside the upper
pneumatics drawer, the compartment housing near the pinch valves is cut away. See
Figure 3.3-14. Remanufactured instruments may not have this convenient opening.

Figure 3.3-14 Upper Pneumatics Drawer Red Shipping Clips, Viewed from Rear of Cytometer

Red shipping
clips Upper pneumatics
drawer

TRANS

REC.

FLOWCELL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE WASTE

7029297G
Rear view

1. Obtain the curved-tip hemostats from the service kit.

2. At the rear of the upper pneumatics drawer (viewed inside the rear of the Cytometer),
locate the red shipping clips on the two pinch valves. See Figure 3.3-14.
Note: If this is a remanufactured instrument that does not have an opening in its upper
pneumatic drawer housing, go to step 6 to continue.
3. Remove the shipping clips from the pinch valves using the curved hemostats
(Figure 3.3-14).
4. Place the shipping clips in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
5. Go to Prepare the Segmenting Valve for Operation (the next heading) to continue this
installation.

PN 4237029G 3.3-11
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

6. Since this remanufactured instrument does not have an opening in its upper pneumatic
drawer housing, to access and remove the red shipping clips:
a. Remove the right-side cover. Refer to Procedure 2 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
b. Remove the EMC shield and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 18 under Heading 4.25
if you need detailed instructions.
c. Remove the two red shipping clips (one from each pinch valve).
d. Place the shipping clips in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
e. Visually inspect the upper pneumatics assembly for loose connectors or tubing.
1) Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation
Database.
2) Correct as needed.

Prepare the Segmenting Valve for Operation

1. Locate the segmenting valve (behind the manual sample station removed earlier).
2. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it can be removed from its shaft (Figure 3.3-15).
Set the knob aside.

Figure 3.3-15 Remove the Plastic Shipping Inserts from the Segmenting Valve

Shipping
inserts

HPLC locking nut

Rear segmenting pad

Middle segmenting pad

7029095G Front segmenting pad Knob

3. Gently separate the white, ceramic segmenting pads (Figure 3.3-15).

4. Remove the two plastic shipping inserts from between the segmenting pads
(Figure 3.3-15).

3.3-12 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
5. Carefully remove the segmenting pads from the shaft (Figure 3.3-15):
a. At the front segmenting pad:
1) Unscrew the HPLC locking nut from the front segmenting pad. Make sure you
do not lose the ferrule at the end of the PEEK tubing.
2) Disconnect the air cylinder from the ball stud (on the segmenting pad).
Note: To separate the air cylinder from the segmenting pad, slide the ball-stud
clamp towards the air cylinder. While holding the clamp, lift the air cylinder
piston off the ball stud in the segmenting pad.
3) Slide the front segmenting pad off the shaft.
b. Disconnect the air cylinder from the middle segmenting pad and carefully slide the
pad off the shaft.
c. Disconnect the air cylinder from the rear segmenting pad and carefully slide the pad
off the shaft.
6. Rinse each segmenting pad with distilled water then reinstall the pad on the shaft:
a. Rinse the rear segmenting pad with distilled water and reinstall the pad on the shaft.
b. Rinse the middle segmenting pad with distilled water and reinstall the pad on the
shaft.
c. Rinse the front segmenting pad with distilled water and reinstall the pad on the
shaft.
7. Reconnect the PEEK-tubing ferrule to the front segmenting valve.
a. Make sure the ferrule is still on the end of the PEEK tubing.
b. Screw the HPLC locking nut back into the front segmenting pad.
ATTENTION: Applying a light coat of Lubriplate grease to the air cylinder clamp before
attaching it to the ball stud on the segmenting pad helps prevent corrosion.
8. Reattach each air cylinder clamp back on its respective ball stud.
9. Reinstall the knob in the shaft then turn the knob clockwise until it is snug. Do not
overtighten the knob.
10. Wipe the outside of the segmenting valve with a lint-free tissue.
11. Ensure the work area is wiped dry.

PN 4237029G 3.3-13
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

Fill the Reagent Containers

IMPORTANT Risk of misleading results if you contaminate either reagent. Be careful not to contaminate the
sheath fluid or cleaning reagent. Do not let your fingers, paper towels, or other objects touch the inside of
the container or the inside of the cap.

CAUTION Risk of damage to the instrument if you overfill either reagent, especially the cleaning reagent.
Avoid spills. Do not tilt the container or remove it from the drawer to fill it.

Fill the Sheath Container

1. Pull open the reagent drawer.
2. Unscrew the cap on the sheath container (larger container on your right).
3. Lay the cap upside down on the container to avoid contamination.
4. Insert the funnel to help avoid spills.
5. Carefully pour sheath fluid into the container.
Note: Fill the container just to the bottom of its neck.
6. Carefully wipe up any spills.
7. Screw the cap clockwise until the bottle is sealed.
8. Locate the sheath filter positioned to the right of the sheath container.
a. Make sure the vent port is above the connector and pointing toward you
(Figure 3.3-16).
b. Make sure the tubing is not kinked or twisted.

Figure 3.3-16 Sheath Filter Location and Associated Components

Connector Vent port

CL
XLM
lter pics
Cou E
CL
XLM
lter pics
Cou E

7029084G

3.3-14 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION 3
Fill the Cleaning Agent Container
1. Unscrew the cap on the cleaning agent container (smaller container on your left).
2. Lay the cap upside down on the container to avoid contamination.
3. Insert a funnel to help avoid spills.
4. Carefully pour two 500 mL bottles of cleaning agent into the container. Do not overfill
this container.
Note: Fill the container just to the crease below the neck of the container.
5. Carefully wipe up any spills.
6. Screw the cap clockwise until the container is sealed.
7. Thoroughly rinse the funnel with water then dry it with paper towels before sitting it
aside.
8. Push the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer. Do not reinstall the center front
cover (filter cover).

PN 4237029G 3.3-15
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

3.3-16 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION 3
3.4 UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Installation of a Universal Power Supply by anyone who has not
successfully completed a Beckman Coulter authorized training course is prohibited. Avoid personal injury
by obtaining the necessary training to complete these installation procedures.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Box suitable for storing shipping parts removed during installation

Unpacking
1. Locate the carton containing the Universal Power Supply.

WARNING Risk of personal injury as the steel strapping is cut. To prevent injury, hold the cutter with one
hand and take hold of the steel strap with the other hand to ensure the steel strap does not spring back.

2. Stand to one side of the strapping surrounding the shipping carton.

3. Cut and remove each strap surrounding the cardboard carton. Make sure you hold the
steel strap firmly to ensure the steel strap does not spring back and injure you. Discard
the straps.
4. Lift the cardboard carton off the Universal Power Supply.
5. Remove the plastic covering.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not attempt to unload the Universal Power Supply without
assistance. Lifting handles are not provided and the Universal Power Supply weighs over 40 lbs. Lifting the
Universal Power Supply should only be done by a minimum of two persons following the requisite safety
precautions. Failure to obtain assistance can result in serious personal injury.

6. Request assistance to lift the Universal Power Supply off the shipping pallet.
7. Visually inspect the Universal Power Supply for any physical damage caused in shipping.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.
8. Carefully peel the protective film from the front door of the Universal Power Supply.

Installation
Note: To remove the following covers, refer to Procedure 21 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you want detailed instructions with illustrations.

1. Remove the cable cover.

a. Remove the two top screws that secure the plastic cable cover to the Universal
Power Supply frame.
b. Loosen, but do not remove, the two lower screws securing the plastic cable cover to
the back cover.
c. Lift the cable cover off the back cover.
d. Set the cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cover will not be damaged.

PN 4237029G 3.4-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION

2. Remove the back cover.

a. Loosen, but do not remove, the two Phillips-head screws located at the bottom of
the back cover.
b. Remove the two Phillips-head screws located at the top of the back cover. (The two
screws that secure the back cover to the Universal Power Supply frame.)
c. Carefully lift the back cover off the Universal Power Supply.
d. Set the cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cover will not be damaged.
3. Remove the main cover and set it aside.
a. Open the front door and remove the three Phillips-head screws on the frame side of
the hinge (not the door side of the hinge). Set these screws aside.
b. Close the front door.
c. Remove the two Phillips-head screws on the left side of the cover (at the bottom)
and the two Phillips-head screws on the right side of the cover (at the bottom).
d. Standing at the front (or rear) of the Power Supply module, firmly grasp the left and
right sides of the main cover.
e. Lift the main cover straight up and off the frame.
f. Set the cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cover will not be damaged.
4. Remove the three foam blocks used to secure the compressor assembly during shipping
(Figure 3.4-1). Don’t forget the block wedged under the rear of the compressor.

Figure 3.4-1 Location of Foam Shipping Blocks Used to Protect the Compressor Assembly
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E
VA
C
U
U
M

Remove
shipping blocks

7318326D

5. Place the foam blocks inside the box designated for storing shipping parts.

3.4-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION 3
6. Visually inspect for any loose or damaged parts.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.

Select Input Voltages

CAUTION Risk of damage to the electronic components in the Universal Power Supply. The Universal
Power Supply is not auto-sensing. The ac source voltage being supplied to the system must be manually
selected using the Breaker and Voltage Selector 2 cards. Since an incorrect ac voltage selection may cause
irrevocable damage to electronic components and circuits when power to the Universal Power Supply is
switched ON, make sure the required voltage is properly selected.

ATTENTION: Refer to Voltage Selection under Heading 2.4, UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY if
you desire a more detailed explanation.
1. Locate the voltage select cable tethered inside the top compartment (Figure 3.4-2). This
special cable with two male connectors is needed to set up the appropriate voltage.

Figure 3.4-2 Voltage Select Cable Tethered Inside the Top Compartment

Tie wrap

Voltage select cable

7318470C

2. Carefully cut the tie wrap and remove the voltage select cable.
3. Locate the Voltage Selector 2 and Breaker cards attached to the front upper panel
(Figure 3.4-3). These circuit cards are used to select the ac source voltage for the system.

PN 4237029G 3.4-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION

Figure 3.4-3 Voltage Selector 2 and Breaker Cards (As Viewed from the Rear)
Breaker 120 Vac Voltage Selector 2 230/240 Vac
card system card system

MCL, 5&12V, +24V +\- 15V SPLY 5V SPLY 24V SPLY

5 J129 1 4 J4 1 J3 3 2 1 3 J5 1

10 6 8 5 6 4
6 4
100 15 11 120 12 9 9 8 7 220 240
VAC VAC VAC VAC
SYSTEM RELAY J153 J154
J151 J152
15 30 15 30 16 1 16 1

J155

7 9

WARNING
1 16 1 16 *HIGH VOLTAGE* 30 15 30 15
1 3
PWB 177821B PWB 626415A

Low ac voltage 100 Vac 220 Vac High ac voltage

connector (J1) system system connector (J2)
7318354C

4. At the Voltage Selector 2 and Breaker cards, connect the voltage select cable to select the
ac voltage source that is appropriate for this installation:
r If the ac source voltage is 100 Vac, attach one end of the voltage select cable to the
connector on the low ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J1) and the loose end of
the voltage select cable to the connector labeled J151 100 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card. In Figure 3.4-3, these connectors are to the left. If you are standing
in front of the Universal Power Supply, these connectors are to your right.
r If the ac source voltage is 120 Vac, attach one end of the voltage select cable to the
connector on the low ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J1) and the loose end of
the voltage select cable to the connector labeled J152 120 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card. In Figure 3.4-3, these connectors are to the left. If you are standing
in front of the Universal Power Supply, these connectors are to your right.
r If the ac source voltage is 220 Vac, attach one end of the voltage select cable to the
connector on the high ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J2) and the loose end of
the voltage select cable to the connector labeled J153 220 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card. In Figure 3.4-3, these connectors are to the right. If you are standing
in front of the Universal Power Supply, these connectors are to your left.
r If the ac source voltage is 230/240 Vac, attach one end of the voltage select cable to
the connector on the high ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J2) and the loose end
of the voltage select cable to the connector labeled J154 240 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card. In Figure 3.4-3, these connectors are to the right. If you are standing
in front of the Universal Power Supply, these connectors are to your left.
5. Reinstall the main cover on the Universal Power Supply frame, but do not reinstall the
screws, back cover, and cable cover at this time.

3.4-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION 3
3.5 WORKSTATION INSTALLATION
“Workstation” or “Computer Workstation” is commonly used to refer to the FlowCentre
Multimedia Workstation. This system consists of a tower computer, monitor, keyboard,
mouse, and any optional equipment such as a Printer. The tower computer, monitor, and
Printer each have their own ac power cord and power on/off switch. When a procedure calls
for you to do something to the Workstation such as “turn on the Workstation,” it refers to all
the hardware items. When a procedure calls for you to do something to a specific part of the
Workstation, it refers to that item only, such as “remove the tower computer cover.”

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Unpacking
1. Unpack the FlowCentre II tower computer.
2. Consult with the customer to determine where they want to place the computer. If they
have no preference, position the computer on the bench or table (Figure 3.5-1).

Figure 3.5-1 Typical Workstation Setup

ATTENTION: Layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that shown.
Cytometer
Monitor
Computer

MCL Option

Mouse
Coulter EPICS XL MCL

Keyboard

Universal
Power
Supply SYSTEM POPWER

MCL POPWER

7029088G

3. Unpack the monitor and place it on the bench or table (Figure 3.5-1).
Note: The Workstation computer can accept up to two monitors. If the system has two
monitors, find out where the customer wants the second monitor placed. If the monitors
are different, also find out which monitor will be the primary monitor.
4. Unpack the keyboard and mouse.
5. Place the keyboard in front of the monitor then place the mouse beside it (Figure 3.5-1).

PN 4237029G 3.5-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION

Mouse Connection
Connect the mouse cable to the mouse port on the rear of the tower computer (Figure 3.5-2).

Figure 3.5-2 Electronic Cable Connections - Mouse and Keyboard

ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

MulitSync LCD1700 M+
CAUTIO N
AV IS
ACHTUN G
FC

ADVARS EL
WA RNI NG

MODEL LC D170 0M+

SERIAL NO.
REV. 1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

TRAN

REC.

PRESSURE VACUUM WAST

FLOWCELL
WAST
Keyboard

7029114F
Mouse

Keyboard Connection
Connect the keyboard cable to the keyboard port on the rear of the computer tower
(Figure 3.5-2).

Monitor Connections - Overview

ATTENTION: The dual-head video display adapter allows the FlowCentre Workstation to accept
up to two monitors. Since this card is already installed and enabled, do not enable the
acceleration option DEVICE BITMAPS CACHING under the display properties of Windows™ 98. If
this option is enabled and the system is rebooted, the video display appears garbled and is no
longer usable.
The FlowCentre Multimedia Tower Workstation being used with the XL or XL-MCL flow
cytometer is designed to accept up to two monitors. Follow the connection instructions for
the monitor(s) being installed in this laboratory.

Monitor Connections: 17-inch Flat Panel Thin Film Transistor (TFT) Monitor
This LCD monitor has two cables and an ac power cord. Inspect these cables and the power
cord to ensure the pins are straight and seated properly.

Connecting the Monitor Cables

1. Inspect the cables and the power cord to ensure the pins are straight and seated properly.
2. Locate the cable with the terminal post (usually color-coded green).
3. Insert the terminal post in the green jack on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure 3.5-3).

3.5-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION 3
4. Attach the monitor plug to the right jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of the
tower computer - Figure 3.5-3).

Figure 3.5-3 Connecting the 17-inch Flat Panel TFT Monitor Cables
ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

Monitor 1

MulitSync LCD1700 M+
CAUTIO N
AV IS
ACHTUN G
FC

ADVARS EL
WA RNI NG

MODEL LC D170 0M+

SERIAL NO.
REV. 1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

Monitor 2

7029182F
Green
ac to terminal jack
wall outlet

5. If a second monitor is being installed:

a. Follow the connection instructions supplied with the monitor.
b. Attach the monitor plug to the left jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of the
tower computer - Figure 3.5-3).
6. Connect the ac power cord to an appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure 3.5-3).

Connection to ac Power Source

1. Locate the ac power cord for the tower computer.
2. Plug the female end of the power cord into the socket on the rear of the tower computer.

Printer Option
Connect the Printer to the PRINTER port on back of the tower computer.

Note: For additional information, refer to the documentation supplied with the Printer.

PN 4237029G 3.5-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION

3.5-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CABLE CONNECTIONS 3
3.6 CABLE CONNECTIONS
Reference Illustration
While making these cable connections, refer to Figure 3.6-1 as needed.

Figure 3.6-1 Instrument Connections

ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

Cytometer
FIBER OPTIC TRANS TO REC Workstation

MulitSync LCD1700M+
CAUTION
AVIS
ACHTUNG FC

ADVARSEL
WARNING

MCL Option MODEL

SERIAL NO.
REV.
LCD1700M+

1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

TRANS

REC.

FLOWCELL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE WASTE

LASER LOGIC ANALOG FIBER OPTIC REC TO XMIT

UMBILICAL MCL

ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

CYT12
1 1

1 2
Universal
13 1
Power Supply
WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

ac power POWER
line cords MODULE
7029272G
CONTROL

PN 4237029G 3.6-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CABLE CONNECTIONS

Laser Umbilical Cable

1. Cut all tie wraps binding the laser umbilical cable (attached to the rear of the Cytometer
- Figure 3.6-1).
2. Locate the two large connectors and metal ground strap on the end of the laser umbilical
cable and cut the tie wrap that secures the metal ground strap to the cable.
3. Attach the ring on the end of the braided ground cable to the metal shell on the white
connector. Refer to Figure 3.6-2 for the final configuration.
a. Remove the screw securing the metal shell to the white connector. Hold the metal
shell against the white plastic part of the connector to keep it from separating.
b. Align the ring on the braided ground cable over the opening for the screw.
c. Reinstall the screw to achieve the configuration shown in Figure 3.6-2.

Figure 3.6-2 Connect the Laser Umbilical Cable to the Argon Laser Power Supply

ac power socket

E
AC
RF
TE
IN
ER
US

K
TL
IN
R
WE
PO O
1

R
SE
LA

R
SE
LA

7318068B

3.6-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CABLE CONNECTIONS 3
4. Connect the two large connectors on the end of the laser umbilical cable to the Argon
laser power supply at the rear of the Universal Power Supply (Figure 3.6-1).
a. For easier and quicker connections, at the laser power supply:
1) Remove the laser power supply key and set it aside.
Note: If the key is in the ON position (l position), the key must be rotated
counterclockwise to the OFF position (O position) before it can be removed
from the power supply.
2) Remove the ac power plug from the laser power supply (Figure 3.6-2).
b. Insert the black connector into the circular socket (Figure 3.6-2) and lock it in
place.
Note: The black connector is keyed to fit the circular socket. Make sure the
connector is properly inserted in the socket before attempting to lock it in place.
c. Insert the white connector into the rectangular socket (Figure 3.6-2) then tighten
the two screws to lock it in place.
d. The strain relief collar over the cables is not used with the Universal Power Supply.
5. If removed earlier, reconnect the ac power plug and reinstall the laser power supply key
then rotate the key clockwise to the I position. (The power supply will not be activated
until ac is applied later.)

Make Appropriate MCL Connections

If this is an XL Flow Cytometer

1. Locate the MCL dummy plug.
2. At the Universal Power Supply, attach the dummy plug to the connector labeled MCL/MPL
(Figure 3.6-1).
Note: MPL is a sample handling option available on an FC 500 only.
3. Go to the Logic Cable heading that follows.

If this is an XL-MCL Flow Cytometer

1. Locate the MCL cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the female connector to the plug labeled MCL and tighten the
two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.6-1).
3. At the Universal Power Supply, attach the male connector to the to the plug labeled
MCL/MPL and tighten the two screws to secure it (Figure 3.6-1).
Note: MPL is a sample handling option available on an FC 500 only.

Logic Cable
1. Locate the logic cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the male connector to the plug labeled LOGIC and tighten the
two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.6-1).
3. At the Universal Power Supply, connect the female connector to the plug labeled LOGIC
and tighten the two screws to secure it (Figure 3.6-1).

PN 4237029G 3.6-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CABLE CONNECTIONS

Analog Cable
1. Locate the analog cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other
female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the female connector to the plug labeled ANALOG and tighten
the two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.6-1).
3. At the Universal Power Supply, connect the male connector to the plug labeled ANALOG
and tighten the two screws to secure it (Figure 3.6-1).

Power Module Control Cable

1. Locate the power module control cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and
the other female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the female D-connector to the plug labeled POWER MODULE
CONTROL and alternately tighten the two thumbscrews until the connector is secured to
the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.6-1).
3. At the Power Control 3 card (on rear of Universal Power Supply), connect the male
D-connector to the receptacle labeled P20 (above connector) PWR MOD CONT SIG INPUT
(below connector) alternately tighten the two thumbscrews until the connector is secure
to the frame (Figure 3.6-1). To locate this connector, refer to Figure A.7-6 as needed.

Fiber Optic Interface Cables

1. Locate the orange fiber optic interface cable.
r This cable is actually two cables joined together so it has two terminal posts (with a
locking nut) at each end.
r One cable is labeled RX and the other is labeled TX.
r The terminal posts on one end of the cable will be inserted into jacks on the
Cytometer and the terminal posts on the other end of the cable will be inserted into
jacks on the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the tower computer.
2. Remove the red plastic caps protecting the four terminal posts. Place these caps with the
other parts used for shipping.
3. At the rear of the Cytometer (Figure 3.6-1):
a. Unscrew and remove the black caps protecting the FIBER OPTIC REC and FIBER
OPTICS TRANS jacks. Place these caps with the other parts used for shipping.
b. Insert the terminal post labeled RX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC REC and tighten
the locking nut.
c. Insert the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC TRANS and
tighten the locking nut.

3.6-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CABLE CONNECTIONS 3
4. At the rear of the tower computer (Figure 3.6-1):
a. Locate the edge of the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the bottom slot.
b. Unscrew and remove the black caps protecting the three jacks. Place these caps with
the other parts used for shipping.
c. Insert the terminal post labeled TX into the outer left jack labeled XMIT
(Figure 3.6-3) and tighten the locking nut.

Figure 3.6-3 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card Edge Locations

XMIT

CYT
REC

12

7029132F

d. Insert the terminal post labeled RX into the inner (middle) jack labeled REC
(Figure 3.6-3) and tighten the locking nut.

CYT12 Cable
1. Locate the orange fiber optic interface cable with a single terminal post (with a locking
nut) at each end.
2. Remove the red plastic cap protecting each terminal post. Place these caps with the other
parts used for shipping.
3. At the Power Control 3 card on the rear of the Power Supply:
a. Locate CYT12 jack (labeled U2) in the upper left corner of the Power Control 3 card.
b. Unscrew and remove the black cap protecting the CYT12 jack. Place the cap with
the other parts used for shipping.
c. Insert the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled U2 and tighten the locking
nut. Refer to Figure 3.6-1 as needed.
4. At the rear of the tower computer (Figure 3.6-1):
a. Locate edge of the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card inside the bottom slot.
b. Insert the terminal post labeled RX into the right jack labeled CYT 12 (Figure 3.6-3)
and tighten the locking nut.

PN 4237029G 3.6-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
CABLE CONNECTIONS

Power Cords
1. Verify the main circuit breaker (upper front panel) is switched to the OFF position
(O position).
2. If you have not already done so, locate the two ac power cords for the voltage
configuration (100-120 Vac or 220-240 Vac) being installed (Figure 3.6-4). Cut the tie
wraps.

Figure 3.6-4 Power Cords for 100-120 Vac and 220-240 Vac Voltage Configurations

100-120 Vac 220-240 Vac

Horizontal prong
to the right
Horizontal prong
7318466C
to the left

3. If the installation is being done in a country other than the United States, replace the
plug on both power cords with plugs that are appropriate for that site.
4. Plug one ac power cord into the socket labeled SYSTEM POWER and the second power
cord, into the socket labeled LASER POWER.
5. Insert the SYSTEM POWER plug and LASER POWER plug into an appropriate wall
outlet (dedicated line with isolated ground).
6. If you have not already done so, plug Workstation components into non-dedicated lines
- one for the tower computer, another for the monitor, and a third for the printer, if
installed.

3.6-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
TUBING CONNECTIONS 3
3.7 TUBING CONNECTIONS
Connect the Waste Container

Preparation
1. Locate the 4 L waste container and the bracket that holds the waste container on the
right side of the Universal Power Supply.
2. Attach the bracket to the right side of the Universal Power Supply’s main cover using the
four screws inserted in the bracket.
3. Put about 400 mL of high-quality, fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of
sodium hypochlorite - available chlorine) in the waste container to cover the bottom of
the container.
4. Place the waste container in the bracket attached to the cover of the Universal Power
Supply.

Connect Tubings
1. Locate the bundle of shielded pneumatic/hydraulic tubings referred to as the waste level
sensor assembly (Figure 3.7-1).

Figure 3.7-1 Waste Level Sensor Assembly

For waste container

Connect to
Cytometer rear panel

Connect at rear
of Universal
7318334D
Power Supply

r The waste level sensor assembly consists of three groups of tubings:

t The float liquid level sensor and cap are for connection at the waste container.
t The group with four quick-connects and sensor cable is for connection at the
rear of the Universal Power Supply.
t The other group with only four quick-connects is for connection at the rear of
the Cytometer.
r Quick-connects are color-coded. Color of the male quick-connect on each tubing
matches and the color of the female quick-connect on the instrument.
r Each tubing is identified by a tie-wrapped label.

PN 4237029G 3.7-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
TUBING CONNECTIONS

2. Insert the float liquid level sensor into the waste container and screw on the cap. Refer to
Figures 3.7-1 and 3.7-2 as needed.

Figure 3.7-2 Tubing Connections

Cytometer

TRANS

REC.

FLOWCELL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE WASTE

FLOW CELL
WASTE PRESSURE

WASTE VACUUM
ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

WASTE
LEVEL Universal
1 1
Power Supply
1 2

WASTE 13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

WASTE VENT

7029273G

3. Connect tubings to the rear of the Universal Power Supply. Refer to Figures 3.7-1 and
3.7-2 as needed.
a. Connect the blue female quick-connect to the blue male quick-connect (labeled
PRESSURE on the rear of the Universal Power Supply).
b. Connect the orange female quick-connect to the orange male quick-connect
(labeled WASTE on the rear of the Universal Power Supply).
c. Connect the yellow female quick-connect to the yellow male quick-connect (labeled
VACUUM on the rear of the Universal Power Supply).
d. Connect the off-white female quick-connect to the off-white male quick-connect
(labeled WASTE VENT on the rear of the Universal Power Supply).
4. Insert the waste level sense cable connector into the connector labeled WASTE LEVEL
(J74) on the rear of the Universal Power Supply. Refer to Figures 3.7-1 and 3.7-2 as
needed.

3.7-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
TUBING CONNECTIONS 3
5. Connect tubings to the rear of the Cytometer. Refer to Figures 3.7-1 and 3.7-2 as needed.
a. Connect the blue female quick-connect to the blue male quick-connect (labeled
PRESSURE on the rear of the Cytometer).
b. Connect the yellow female quick-connect to the yellow male quick-connect (labeled
VACUUM on the rear of the Cytometer).

ATTENTION: Because there are two orange connectors in this tubing bundle, you must use the
tubing labels to ensure proper connection.
c. Connect the orange female quick-connect on the tubing labeled WASTE to the
orange male quick-connect labeled WASTE on the rear of the Cytometer.
d. Connect the orange female quick-connect on the tubing labeled FLCell Waste to the
orange male quick-connect labeled FLOWCELL WASTE on the rear of the Cytometer.

PN 4237029G 3.7-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
TUBING CONNECTIONS

3.7-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 3
3.8 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Tools/Supplies Needed
B COULTER EPICS XL / XL-MCL SYSTEM II software, Version 3.0, PN 6706441

Instrument Startup

CAUTION Risk of damage to the instrument. The process of installing the SYSTEM II software activates the
Cytometer. The flow cytometer will be damaged if it is operated without removing all 16 red shipping clips
(14 in the lower pneumatic drawer and 2 in the upper pneumatic drawer) and the two plastic shipping insert
from the segmenting valve. Two red tags are attached to the manual sample station door to remind you that
these items must be removed before operating the instrument:
r NOTICE! REMOVE RED CLIPS FROM PNEUMATIC DRAWER BEFORE OPERATING UNIT
r NOTICE! REMOVE PAD SEPARATORS FROM SEGMENTING VALVE BEFORE OPERATING UNIT.

CAUTION Risk of damage to the electronic components in the Universal Power Supply. The Universal
Power Supply is not auto-sensing. An incorrect ac voltage selection may cause irreparable damage to
electronic components and circuits when power to the Universal Power Supply is switched ON. Do not
power up this instrument unless you are certain the proper required voltage is selected! If you are not
certain, go back to Heading 3.4 and follow the instructions under the Heading Select Input Voltages.

1. Connect the two ac power line cords from the Universal Power Supply into an
appropriate wall outlet (separate dedicated lines with isolated grounds).
2. If you have not already done so, plug Workstation components into non-dedicated lines
- one for the tower computer, another for the monitor, and a third for the printer, if
present.
3. Open the front door of the Universal Power Supply.
4. Switch the main circuit breaker (upper front panel) to the ON position (l position).
5. At the tower computer, press the power ON/OFF switch until the computer turns on.
The operating system automatically boots.
6. Turn on the monitor.
7. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS.

Install SYSTEM II Software

1. At the MS-DOS prompt (C:\>), type XL_INST then press Û to configure the
computer for an XL flow cytometer.
2. Reboot the computer system by simultaneously pressing the Ý, Þ, and á keys.
3. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS which should select SYSTEM II software as the operating system.
4. Verify the computer boots to the XL SYSTEM II software.

PN 4237029G 3.8-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

5. Approximately 10 seconds after the XL logo appears on the monitor, the following
messages are displayed:
a. Resetting cytometer
b. Loading Cyto. Hardware
Note: Once the software is loaded, it turns on the Cytometer. This process should
take less than 30 seconds.
6. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.
Note: If the Cytometer turns on and then turns off immediately, check the alarm. (At the
Menu bar, select Applications tt Utilities. At the Utilities Configuration screen, inside the
START UP box, make sure the Cytometer is set up for current operation.)
7. At the Acquisition Run screen, verify the message STARTUP IN PROCESS appears (lower
right display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (STARTUP IN PROCESS →
SYSTEM VERIFICATION → RUN INITIALIZATION → PLEASE WAIT. . PROCESSING →
INSERT SAMPLE TUBE appear as the instrument goes through various checks. INSERT
SAMPLE TUBE only appears if a startup protocol or panel is either selected or previously
specified on the Utilities Configuration screen. Error messages appear in red below this
message line.
8. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
Note: The Cytometer can take up to 30 minutes to warm up before the READY indicator
turns green.

3.8-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
OPERATIONAL CHECKS 3
3.9 OPERATIONAL CHECKS
Tools/Supplies Needed
B Three, empty, 12 x 75 mm test tube, PN 2523749
Note: If this is an XL flow cytometer, only one tube is needed.
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359

Preliminary Checks
1. Verify all cooling fans are operating. Refer to Heading A.5 for component locations in the
Cytometer and refer to Heading A.7 for component locations in the Universal Power
Supply, as needed.
Exterior Fan Locations
r Two on the Cytometer (lower rear panel)
r One on the Workstation computer (back)
Interior Fan Locations
r Two in the laser blower assembly (mounted on the Cytometer frame, left side)
r Three in the Universal Power Supply
t Two on lower right side
t One in the middle of the lower compartment (between the UPS pneumatics
drawer and the linear power supplies)
2. At the Universal Power Supply:
a. Verify the system pressure gauge (SYS PRESS) reads 30 psi. Adjust the regulator if
necessary.
b. Verify the system vacuum gauge (SYS VAC) registers a minimum of 17 in. Hg.
3. At the Cytometer:
a. Verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
Note: The Cytometer may take up to 30 minutes to warm up before the READY
indicator turns green.
b. Verify vacuum is present at the manual sample station head.

Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter

1. Make sure the reagent drawer is closed.
2. At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.

PN 4237029G 3.9-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
OPERATIONAL CHECKS

3. Press and hold the purge (vent) button (Figure 3.9-1) until the bubbles in the vent
tubing are gone (Figure 3.9-2).

Figure 3.9-1 Purge (Vent) Button Location

Coulter
Epics XL MCL

Purge (vent)
7029117G button

Figure 3.9-2 Purging Bubbles from the Sheath Filter

Bubbles in Air here

vent tubing? is okay.

CL
X LM
lter pics
Cou E

7029274G

4. Press the PRIME button three more times.

Power Supply Verification

Go to Heading 4.21, POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT to
verify all power supply voltages (including MCL, if applicable) and make needed
adjustments.

Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification

Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the offset of
each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.

3.9-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
OPERATIONAL CHECKS 3
Functional Verification
1. Create a CHANNEL_500 protocol. For parameter and setting information, refer to
Table A.3-1 as needed.
2. Fill a test tube with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
3. Insert the test tube into the sample station and press Ñ.
4. At the Cytometer, wait until the indicator turns green and the bar graphs are illuminated.
5. Adjust all parameter HVs to place the acquisition population in channel 500.
Note: After approximately 10 seconds, confirm acquisition signals are present. If there
are no signals, check tubing for clogs or pinches and correct as needed. If no obstruction
is present, go to Heading 4.6 and perform an optical alignment as written.
6. After adjusting all parameter HVs, restart the acquisition.
7. After approximately 10 seconds, verify the events per second average between 135 events
per second (minimum rate) and 200 events per second (maximum rate).
r If the average is between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go to
step 8 to continue.
r If the average is not between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go
to Heading 4.7, SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION and complete the
procedure as written.
8. At the Workstation, verify the events per second as follows:
a. With the Flow Rate set to LOW:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Record the events per second.
b. Set the Flow Rate to MEDIUM then:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres again.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Verify the events per second is approximately three times higher than it was at
the Low flow rate setting.
c. Set the Flow Rate to HIGH then:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres again.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Verify the events per second is approximately six times higher than it was at the
Low flow rate setting.
9. How to proceed:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and
complete the procedure as written to obtain the best CVs.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 10 to verify the MCL is functioning
properly.

PN 4237029G 3.9-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
OPERATIONAL CHECKS

10. Verify MCL operation as follows:

a. Fill two test tubes with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
b. Insert the test tubes in the MCL carousel.
c. At the Cytometer, press the AUTO button.
d. Confirm signals are present to ensure tubing is not clogged or pinched. If such an
obstruction is present, correct as needed.
11. Go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and complete the procedure as written to
obtain the best CVs.

Reinstall Cytometer Covers and Panels

1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.) Refer to the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading (under
Heading 4.1) as needed.
2. If you have not already done so, lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the
center cavity of the Cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
3. If removed earlier, reinstall the EMC shield over the pneumatic components then
reinstall the upper pneumatic drawer back inside the Cytometer frame. Refer to
Procedure 18 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
4. Reinstall the black filter shield back on the Cytometer. Refer to Procedure 15 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
5. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly.
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back in place.
b. Loosely install the two pan-head, Phillips screws on the left.
Note: If this is an XL flow cytometer, these are flat-head, Phillips screws.
c. Loosely install the two flat-head, Phillips screws on the right.
d. Tighten all four screws to secure the cover assembly to the Cytometer frame.
6. Close the reagent drawer.
7. Remove the tool bracing the upper cover open and gently lower the cover.
8. Reinstall the center front cover (covering the filters). Refer to Procedure 3 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
9. Reinstall the right-side cover. Refer to Procedure 2 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
10. Reinstall the left-side cover (using applicable instructions).
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, position the left-side cover over the left side of the
Cytometer frame and push the cover into place. Refer to Procedure 14 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 11.

3.9-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
OPERATIONAL CHECKS 3
11. Reinstall the left-side cover before latching the MCL option back on the Cytometer
frame. Refer to Procedure 13 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
a. Position the side cover over the left side of the Cytometer and manually push the
side-cover down and in place.
b. Push the button to unlock the MCL covers then lift the top cover to fully open it.
c. Remove the MCL carousel from the indexing base, if present.
d. Position the MCL probe housing back on the Cytometer and reinstall the two
Phillips-head screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame.
e. Gently push the lower base back on the Cytometer until it latches into place.
f. Lower the cover then open and close it several times to ensure proper operation.
g. Position the MCL carousel back on the indexing base and close the top cover.
12. Carefully position the top cover back on the Cytometer. Do not reinstall the four
Phillips-head screws (and washers) that secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame.
The top cover must be removed later.

Reinstall Universal Power Supply Covers

1. If you have not already done so, reinstall the main cover and the seven Phillips-head
screws that secure the main cover to the UPS frame. Refer to Procedure 21 under
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you want detailed
instructions with illustrations.
2. Reinstall the back cover. Refer to Procedure 24 under Heading 4.25 if you want detailed
instructions with illustrations.
3. Reinstall the cable cover. Refer to Procedure 23 under Heading 4.25 if you want detailed
instructions.
Note: Before installing the cable cover, consider the location of the Cytometer in
relationship to the Universal Power Supply then arrange the cables and tubings exiting
the back cover to accommodate the setup. See Figure 3.9-3 for the recommended
arrangement. When installed properly, the long slots at the base of the cable cover are
positioned behind the large washers (on the lower two Phillips-head screws).
Figure 3.9-3 Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions, As Viewed from the Rear

·
ANALOG

· Waste level sensor assembly -

float liquid level sensor and
LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER
1500 WATTS
MAX
LASER POWER
1800 WATTS
MAX
Waste level sensor assembly -
tubing connections to
cap for waste container Cytometer rear panel

· Power cables
ac line cords (2) 1 2
1 1 Cables
Argon laser umbilical
Logic 13 1
Power module control
Analog PRESS WASTE VAC
WASTE
VENT
PNEUMATICS
CONTROL

MCL, if applicable

7029290G

PN 4237029G 3.9-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
OPERATIONAL CHECKS

Wrap Up
1. If you have not already done so, remove the two red tags attached to the manual sample
station door. Place the tags in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
2. If you have not already done so, carefully peel the protective films from the:
r Universal Power Supply front door,
r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.
3. Ask the customer to store the box containing the various shipping parts removed from
the instrument.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP). Begin at the Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis and Carryover Check heading and
complete the procedure as written.

3.9-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply) 3
3.10 INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply)
ATTENTION: This service manual contains two instrument installation procedures, use this
summary only if you are installing an XL or XL-MCL with a Universal Power Supply.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not use this summary unless you are thoroughly familiar with the
installation procedure as detailed under headings 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, and 3.9.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit), PN 5415097
B IsoFlow™ sheath fluid, PN 8547008
B Flow-Check™ fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B COULTER® CYTO-TROL™ control cells, PN 6604248
B COULTER CLENZ® cleaning agent, PN 8546929
B Three (only one if XL flow cytometer), empty, 12 x 75 mm test tube, PN 2523749
B COULTER EPICS XL / XL-MCL SYSTEM II software, Version 3.0, PN 6706441
B Box suitable for storing shipping parts removed during installation

Cytometer

Unpacking
1. Cut and remove the strapping surrounding the shipping carton. Discard the straps.
2. Remove the cardboard carton, foam blocks, and plastic covering.
3. Record the Cytometer serial number on the WW: Installation Database and report any
loose or damaged parts/assemblies.
4. Request assistance to place the Cytometer on the bench top or table. Do not lift the
instrument from its sides, especially if the MCL option is attached.
5. Carefully remove the protective film from the:
r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.

Installation
ATTENTION: Since it may be necessary to access an area of the Cytometer several times, do not
reinstall a cover or panel until you are specifically instructed to do so.
1. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set it aside.
2. Remove three small shipping screws at the top of each side cover (Figure 3.3-1) and
place screws in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
3. Remove the right-side cover.

PN 4237029G 3.10-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply)

4. To remove the manual sample station assembly, use instrument specific instructions:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to step 5.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 10.
5. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.
6. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside.
7. Pull open the reagent drawer.
8. Remove the four flat-head Phillips screws securing the manual sample station to the
Cytometer frame. When removed, lay the sample station cover assembly on top of the
reagent containers.
9. Go to step 15 to continue this installation.
10. Unlatch, but do not remove, the MCL covers from the Cytometer. Don’t forget to remove
the cover for the MCL probe housing (Figures 3.3-2 and 3.3-3). Set the MCL probe
housing cover aside.
11. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside (Figure 3.3-4).
12. Pull open the reagent drawer.
13. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Carefully move the unlatched MCL cover away from the Cytometer frame.
b. Locate and remove the two pan-head screws that secure the manual sample station
to the left side of the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.3-5).
c. Remove the two flat-head Phillips screws securing the right side of the manual
sample station to the front of the Cytometer frame (Figure 3.3-5).
d. When removed, lay the manual sample station cover assembly on top of the reagent
containers.
14. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.
15. Lift the upper cover and place a long screwdriver (with a plastic handle) in the channel
of the upper frame to it open (Figure 3.3-6).
16. Remove the four screws (two on each side) securing the filter shield to the Cytometer
frame (Figure 3.3-7). Set the filter shield aside.
17. Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw, spacer, and hex nut) located at the
front right corner of the optical bench (Figure 3.3-8) and place the hardware in the
storage box.
18. Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw, spacer, and hex nut) located in the
left rear corner behind the laser head (Figure 3.3-11) and place the hardware in the
storage box.
a. If this is an XL with the MCL option, remove the MCL CPU card; if this is not an XL
with the MCL option, go to step b.
1) Set up your static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit).
2) Remove the MCL CPU card to gain access to the area (Figures 3.3-9 and
3.3-10) then set the card aside on the static-dissipative work mat.

3.10-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply) 3
b. Use a 3/8-inch wrench and a long Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the shipping
tie-down (screw and hex nut) (Figure 3.3-12).
1) With a piece of electrical tape over the opening of the 3/8-inch wrench, route
the 3/8-inch wrench through the opening on the left side of the Cytometer and
position the wrench to hold the hex nut in place (Figure 3.3-12).
2) Use a long Phillips-head screwdriver (or a Phillips-head screwdriver with an
extension) to remove the shipping screw (Figure 3.3-12). The electrical tape
should capture the hex nut inside the wrench.
3) Use large hemostats to carefully remove the spacer (Figure 3.3-12).
4) Retrieve the hex nut or spacer if either falls to the Cytometer floor.
c. Place the hardware (screw, hex nut, and spacer) in the storage box.
19. At the lower pneumatics drawer:
a. Use a hemostat to remove all 14 red shipping clips from the pinch valves. Count the
removed shipping clips to confirm that all 14 are removed then place the red
shipping clips in the storage box.
b. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
20. Reinstall the MCL CPU card, if removed earlier.
21. At the Data Acquisition card cage:
a. Remove the two shipping screws, one from each side of the card cage. Place these
screws in the storage box.
b. Lock the Data Acquisition card cage in its vertical position.
c. Remove the shipping brace (Figure 3.3-13).
d. Inspect for any loose cards or cables. Correct as needed.
e. Reinstall the shipping brace (Figure 3.3-13).
f. Disassemble the static-dissipative field kit.
g. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the center cavity of the Cytometer.
22. At the upper pneumatics drawer, remove the red shipping clips from the two pinch
valves and place in storage box (Figure 3.3-14).
23. At the segmenting valve (Figure 3.3-15):
a. Remove the knob and set it aside.
b. Gently separate the white, ceramic segmenting pads.
c. Remove the two plastic shipping inserts from between the segmenting pads.
d. Carefully remove the segmenting pads from the shaft:
1) At the front segmenting pad, unscrew the HPLC locking nut from the front
segmenting pad. (Don’t lose the ferrule at the end of the PEEK tubing.)
Disconnect the air cylinder from the ball stud and slide the front segmenting
pad off the shaft.
2) Disconnect the air cylinder from the middle segmenting pad and carefully slide
the pad off the shaft.
3) Disconnect the air cylinder from the rear segmenting pad and carefully slide
the pad off the shaft.

PN 4237029G 3.10-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply)

e. Rinse each segmenting pad with distilled water then reinstall the pad on the shaft.
f. Reconnect the PEEK-tubing ferrule to the front segmenting valve.
ATTENTION: Applying a light coat of Lubriplate grease to the air cylinder clamp before
attaching it to the ball stud on the segmenting pad helps prevent corrosion.
g. Reattach each air cylinder clamp back on its respective ball stud.
h. Reinstall the knob in the shaft then turn the knob clockwise until it is snug. Do not
overtighten the knob.
i. Wipe the outside of the segmenting valve with a lint-free tissue.
j. Ensure the work area is wiped dry.
24. Fill the sheath container just to the bottom of its neck. Do not overfill this container!
25. Fill the cleaning agent container just to the crease below the neck of the container. Do
not overfill this container!
26. Carefully wipe up any spills.
27. Make sure the sheath filter vent port is above the connector and that it is pointing up and
towards you (Figure 3.3-16). Make sure the tubing is not kinked or twisted.
28. Push the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer.

Universal Power Supply

Unpacking
1. Cut and remove the strapping surrounding the shipping carton.
2. Lift the cardboard carton off the Universal Power Supply.
3. Remove plastic covering.
4. Request assistance to lift the Universal Power Supply off the shipping pallet.
5. Report any damage on the WW: Installation Database.
6. Carefully peel the protective film from the front door.

Installation
1. Remove the main cover and set it aside.
2. Remove the three foam blocks from the compressor assembly (Figure 3.4-1) and place in
storage box.
3. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.

Select Input Voltages

CAUTION Risk of damage to the electronic components in the Universal Power Supply. The Universal
Power Supply is not auto-sensing. An incorrect ac voltage selection may cause irrevocable damage to
electronic components and circuits when power to the Universal Power Supply is switched ON, make sure
the required voltage is properly selected.

1. Select the appropriate ac voltage source (Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3).

2. Reinstall the main cover on the frame, but do not reinstall the screws at this time.

3.10-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply) 3
Workstation

Unpacking
1. Unpack the FlowCentre II tower computer.
2. Consult with the customer to determine where they want to place the computer. If they
have no preference, position the computer on the bench or table (Figure 3.5-1).
3. Unpack the monitor and place it on the bench or table (Figure 3.5-1). If the system has
two monitors, find out where the customer wants the second monitor placed. If the
monitors are different, also find out which monitor will be the primary monitor.
4. Unpack the keyboard and mouse.
5. Place the keyboard in front of the monitor then place the mouse beside it (Figure 3.5-1).

Installation
1. Connect the mouse cable to the mouse port on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure 3.5-2).
2. Connect the keyboard cable to the keyboard port on the rear of the computer tower
(Figure 3.5-2).
ATTENTION: The dual-head video display adapter is already installed and enabled. Do not
enable the acceleration option DEVICE BITMAPS CACHING under the display properties of
Windows™ 98.
3. Install the 17-inch NEC flat panel thin film transistor (TFT) monitor.
a. Make sure the cable and the power cord pins are straight and seated properly.
b. Locate the cable with the terminal post (may be color-coded green).
c. Insert the terminal post in the green jack on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure 3.5-3).
d. Attach the monitor plug to the right jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of
the tower computer - Figure 3.5-3).
e. Connect the ac power cord to an appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure 3.5-3).
4. If a second monitor is being installed:
a. Follow the connection instructions supplied with the monitor.
b. Attach the monitor plug to the left jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of the
tower computer - Figure 3.5-3).
c. Connect the ac power cord to an appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure 3.5-3).
5. At the rear of the tower computer:
a. Plug the female end of the power cord into the socket then connect the other end to
an appropriate ac wall outlet.
b. Connect the Printer to the PRINTER port and connect it to an appropriate ac wall
outlet. For additional information, refer to the documentation supplied with the
Printer.

PN 4237029G 3.10-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply)

Cable Connections
1. Install the laser umbilical cable.
a. Cut all tie wraps binding the laser umbilical cable (attached to the rear of the
Cytometer - Figure 3.6-1).
b. Attach the ring on the end of the braided ground cable to the metal shell on the
white connector (Figure 3.6-2).
c. Connect the two large connectors on the end of the laser umbilical cable to the
Argon laser power supply at the rear of the Universal Power Supply (Figure 3.6-2).
d. If removed, reconnect the ac power plug and reinstall the laser power supply key
then rotate the key clockwise to the I position.
2. As applicable, do one of the following:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, install the MCL dummy plug on the MCL/MPL
connector on the rear of the Universal Power Supply.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, install the MCL cable (Figure 3.6-1).
3. Install the logic cable (Figure 3.6-1).
4. Install the analog cable (Figure 3.6-1).
5. Install the power module control cable (Figure 3.6-1).
a. At the Cytometer, install on the plug labeled POWER MODULE CONTROL.
b. At the Power Control 3 card, install on the plug labeled P20 (above connector) PWR
MOD CONT SIG INPUT (below connector).
6. Install the orange fiber optic interface cables (two cables joined together).
a. At the rear of the Cytometer (Figure 3.6-1):
1) Remove the black caps protecting the FIBER OPTIC REC and FIBER OPTICS
TRANS jacks and place them with the other parts used for shipping.
2) Install the terminal post labeled RX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC REC.
3) Install the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC TRANS.
b. At the rear of the tower computer (Figure 3.6-3):
1) Unscrew and remove the black caps protecting the three jacks on the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card (in the bottom slot) and place these caps with
the other parts used for shipping.
2) Install the terminal post labeled TX into the outer left jack labeled XMIT
(Figure 3.6-3).
3) Install the terminal post labeled RX into the inner (middle) jack labeled REC
(Figure 3.6-3).
7. Install the CYT12 cable for the 12 Vdc standby signal (single orange cable, not joined).
a. Remove the red plastic cap protecting the terminal posts and place these caps with
the other parts used for shipping.
b. At the Power Control 3 card, remove the black cap protecting the jack labeled U2
and place these caps with the other parts used for shipping.

3.10-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply) 3
c. Install the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled U2.
d. At the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (bottom slot in the tower computer),
install the terminal post labeled RX into the right jack labeled CYT 12 (Figure 3.6-3).
8. Install the ac power cords for the Universal Power Supply.
a. Verify the main circuit breaker is switched to the OFF position (O position).
b. Make sure you have the proper ac power cords (100-120 Vac or 220-240 Vac) for
the voltage configuration you are installing (Figure 3.6-4).
c. If the installation is being done in a country other than the United States, replace
the plug with one that is appropriate for that site.
d. Plug one ac power cord into the socket labeled SYSTEM POWER and the second
power cord, into the socket labeled LASER POWER.
e. Insert the SYSTEM POWER plug and the LASER POWER plug into appropriate wall
outlets (separate dedicated lines with isolated grounds).
9. If you have not already done so, plug Workstation components into non-dedicated lines
- one for the tower computer, another for the monitor, and a third for the printer, if
present.

Tubing Connections
1. Attach the bracket for the waste container to the right side of the Universal Power
Supply’s main cover.
2. Pour about 400 mL of high-quality, fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of
sodium hypochlorite - available chlorine) into the waste container.
3. Place the waste container in the bracket.
4. Install the float liquid level sensor in the waste container (Figures 3.7-1 and 3.7-2).
5. Connect the pneumatic tubings at the rear of the Universal Power Supply (Figure 3.7-2).
a. Connect the blue quick-connects (labeled PRESSURE on rear of UPS).
b. Connect the orange quick-connects (labeled WASTE on rear of UPS).
c. Connect the yellow quick-connects (labeled VACUUM on rear of UPS).
d. Connect the off-white quick-connects (labeled WASTE VENT on rear of UPS).
6. Install the waste level sense cable into the connector labeled WASTE LEVEL (J74) on the
left side of the Power Control 3 card (Figure 3.7-2).
7. Connect tubings to the rear of the Cytometer (Figure 3.7-2).
a. Connect the blue quick-connects (labeled PRESSURE on rear of Cytometer).
b. Connect the yellow quick-connects (labeled VACUUM on rear of Cytometer).
ATTENTION: Because there are two orange connectors in this tubing bundle, you must use
the tubing labels to ensure proper connection.
c. Connect the orange quick-connects (labeled WASTE).
d. Connect the orange quick-connects (labeled FLCell Waste).

PN 4237029G 3.10-7
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply)

Install SYSTEM II Software

1. Connect the two ac power line cords from the Universal Power Supply into an
appropriate wall outlet (separate dedicated lines with isolated grounds).
2. If you have not already done so, plug Workstation components (tower computer,
monitor, and printer, if present) into non-dedicated lines.
3. Open the front door of the Universal Power Supply.
4. Switch the main circuit breaker (upper front panel) to the ON position (l position).
5. Turn on the tower computer and monitor.
6. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS.
7. At the MS-DOS prompt (C:\>), type XL_INST then press Û to configure the
computer for an XL flow cytometer.
8. Reboot the computer system by simultaneously pressing the Ý, Þ, and á keys.
9. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS which should select SYSTEM II software as the operating system.
10. Verify the computer boots to the XL SYSTEM II software.
11. Approximately 10 seconds after the XL logo appears on the monitor, the following
messages are displayed:
a. Resetting cytometer
b. Loading Cyto. Hardware
12. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green. (If the Cytometer turns
on and then turns off immediately, check the alarm.)
13. At the Acquisition Run screen, verify the STARTUP IN PROCESS → SYSTEM
VERIFICATION → RUN INITIALIZATION → PLEASE WAIT. . PROCESSING → INSERT
SAMPLE TUBE messages appear. (INSERT SAMPLE TUBE only appears if a startup
protocol or panel is either selected or previously specified on the Utilities Configuration
screen.)
14. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green within
30 minutes.

Operational Checks
1. Verify all cooling fans are operating.
Exterior Fan Locations
r Two on the Cytometer (lower rear panel)
r One on the Workstation computer (back)
Interior Fan Locations
r Two in the laser blower assembly (mounted on the Cytometer frame, left side)
r Three in the Universal Power Supply
t Two on lower right side
t One in the middle of the lower compartment (between the UPS pneumatics
drawer and the linear power supplies)

3.10-8 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply) 3
2. At the Universal Power Supply:
a. Verify the system pressure gauge (SYS PRESS) reads 30 psi.
b. Verify the system vacuum gauge (SYS VAC) registers a minimum of 17 in. Hg.
3. At the Cytometer:
a. Verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
b. Verify vacuum is present at the manual sample station head.

Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter

1. Make sure the reagent drawer is closed.
2. At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.
3. Press and hold the purge (vent) button until the bubbles in the vent tubing are gone
(Figures 3.9-1 and 3.9-2).
4. Press the PRIME button three more times.

Power Supply Verification

Go to Heading 4.21, POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT to
verify all power supply voltages (including MCL, if applicable) and make needed
adjustments.

Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification

Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the offset of
each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.

Functional Verification
1. Create a CHANNEL_500 protocol. Refer to Table A.3-1 as needed.
2. Fill a test tube with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
3. Insert the test tube into the sample station and press Ñ.
4. At the Cytometer, wait until the indicator turns green and the bar graphs are illuminated.
5. Adjust all parameter HVs to place the acquisition population in channel 500.
Note: After approximately 10 seconds, confirm acquisition signals are present. If there
are no signals, check tubing for clogs or pinches and correct as needed. If no obstruction
is present, go to Heading 4.6 and perform an optical alignment as written.
6. After adjusting all parameter HVs, restart the acquisition.
7. After approximately 10 seconds, verify the events per second average between 135 events
per second (minimum rate) and 200 events per second (maximum rate).
r If the average is between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go to
step 8 to continue.
r If the average is not between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go
to Heading 4.7, SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION and complete the
procedure as written.

PN 4237029G 3.10-9
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply)

8. At the Workstation, verify the events per second as follows:

a. With the Flow Rate set to LOW, run Flow-Check fluorospheres. After approximately
10 seconds, stop the run. Record the events per second.
b. Set the Flow Rate to MEDIUM and run Flow-Check fluorospheres again. After
approximately 10 seconds, stop the run. Verify the events per second is
approximately three times higher than it was at the Low flow rate setting.
c. Set the Flow Rate to HIGH and run Flow-Check fluorospheres again. After
approximately 10 seconds, stop the run. Verify the events per second is
approximately six times higher than it was at the Low flow rate setting.
9. How to proceed:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and
complete the procedure as written to obtain the best CVs.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 10 to verify the MCL is functioning
properly.
10. Verify MCL operation as follows:
a. Fill two test tubes with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
b. Insert the test tubes in the MCL carousel.
c. At the Cytometer, press the AUTO button.
d. Confirm signals are present to ensure tubing is not clogged or pinched. If such an
obstruction is present, correct as needed.
11. Go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and complete the procedure as written to
obtain the best CVs.

Wrap Up
1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
2. If you have not already done so, lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the
center cavity of the Cytometer.
3. If removed earlier, reinstall the EMC shield over the upper pneumatics drawer
components and reinstall the drawer back inside the Cytometer frame.
4. Reinstall the black filter shield back on the Cytometer.
5. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly.
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back in place.
b. Loosely install the two pan-head, Phillips screws on the left.
Note: If this is an XL flow cytometer, these are flat-head, Phillips screws.
c. Loosely install the two flat-head, Phillips screws on the right.
d. Tighten all four screws to secure the cover assembly to the Cytometer frame.
6. Close the reagent drawer.
7. Reinstall all covers (including Universal Power Supply covers) removed during the
installation. Position cables and tubings exiting the back cover of the Universal Power
Supply to accommodate the Cytometer setup (Figure 3.9-3).

3.10-10 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply) 3
8. If you have not already done so, remove the two red tags attached to the manual sample
station door. Place the tags in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
9. If you have not already done so, carefully peel the protective films from the:
r Universal Power Supply front door,
r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.
10. Ask the customer to store the box containing the various shipping parts removed from
the instrument.
11. Power up the entire system. (This includes plugging both ac power line cords back in
their appropriate wall outlets.)
12. Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP). Begin at the Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis and Carryover Check heading
and complete the procedure as written.

PN 4237029G 3.10-11
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply)

3.10-12 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MCL UPGRADE 3
PART B: UPGRADES AND OPTIONS INSTALLATION

3.11 MCL UPGRADE

Purpose
Use these procedures to install an MCL option. After completing these procedures, the
XL-MCL flow cytometer’s model code must be changed from 2714 to 2988.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B MCL Upgrade kit in black, PN 6912669
B MCL Upgrade kit in grey, PN 6915506
B Sample/MCL Intro Line kit, PN 6912941
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B Three, empty, 12 x 75-mL test tubes, PN 2523749
B Permanent marker
B Hard copy of Figure A.2-13, MCL CPU Card - Component Locations, optional

Preparation
1. Check the contents of the MCL Upgrade Kit against the packing list to ensure that all
parts are present before continuing with this upgrade.
2. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
3. Remove all covers required to access and remove the filter shield. Refer to Procedure 15
under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
4. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

Cytometer Upgrade
1. Install the new manual sample station assembly for the MCL option.
a. Unplug the old manual sample station cover assembly. Set it aside for return and
reuse.
b. Connect the new manual sample station assembly and lay the assembly on top of
the reagent containers. Make sure the flat ribbon cable is positioned so that it does
not become damaged.
2. Remove the lower pneumatics drawer. Refer to Procedure 17 under Heading 4.25 if you
need detailed instructions.

PN 4237029G 3.11-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MCL UPGRADE

3. Install the MCL tubing harness to the bulk head connector of the lower
pneumatic-assembly.
Note: The MCL tubing-harness is keyed to go in only one way.
4. Carefully dress the new tubing harness to the existing tubing so that it does not get
pinched when the lower pneumatics drawer is reinstalled.
5. Unpack the MCL main frame assembly and inspect it for damaged or missing parts.
6. Set S1 on the MCL CPU card as shown on Table 3.11-1. For the location of this switch,
refer to Figure A.2-13 as needed.

Table 3.11-1 MCL CPU Card - S1 Settings

S1 Position Setting
1 ON
2 ON
3 ON
4 OFF

7. Connect the tubing from the MCL harness as follows:

a. The system pressure line to the large fitting on the MCL solenoid manifold.
b. The orange-striped tubing to the left-side fitting on the MCL sample head.
c. The purple-striped tubing to the right-side fitting on the MCL sample head.
8. Adjust the mounting clips on the back of the MCL main frame assembly to properly fit
over the lower Cytometer frame and install the MCL option.
9. Install the MCL Interface card into the proper location in the Data Acquisition card cage.
For the MCL Interface card location, refer to Figure A.5-3 as needed.
10. Install the MCL interface cable:
a. Connect the MCL interface cable to the MCL INTERFACE connector on the left-side
edge of the Analyzer backplane. For the location of this connector, refer to
Figure A.2-2 as needed.
b. Carefully route the MCL interface cable down the Data Acquisition card cage,
around the laser-blower assembly, and connect it to the PARALLEL CONTROL PORT
connector at the top of the MCL CPU card. For the location of this connector, refer
to Figure A.2-13 as needed.
11. Under Heading 4.9, start at the Removal heading and follow the instructions for
removing the old PEEK tubing (all sample lines), replacing the old tubing and installing
the new MCL sample line.

3.11-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MCL UPGRADE 3
Power Supply Module Upgrade
ATTENTION: Follow the instructions for the Power Supply module being used on the system.

Voltage-Specific Power Supply

1. Remove the three-sided cover from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply and set it aside.
Refer to Procedure 19 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. When operating the instrument with the safety interlock switch defeated,
be very careful as you may be exposed to electric shock. After servicing the instrument, make sure the
three-sided cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock switch.

2. Defeat the Power Supply interlock by pulling up on the plunger.

3. Install the MCL power supply and secure it with four screws.
4. Connect the ac interconnect cable (internal in the Power Supply module) to the MCL
power supply.
5. Remove the MCL loop plug from the rear of the Power Supply module.
6. Locate the MCL cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other female.
7. At the Cytometer, attach the female connector to the plug labeled MCL and tighten the
two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame.
8. At the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, attach the male connector to the to the plug
labeled MCL and tighten the two screws to secure it.
9. Go to the Power Supply Voltage Verification and Adjustment heading to continue this
upgrade.

Universal Power Supply

Note: The Universal Power Supply is already equipped with the power supplies needed to
operate the MCL option.

1. Remove the MCL loop plug from the rear of the Universal Power Supply.
2. Locate the MCL cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other female.
3. At the Cytometer, attach the female connector to the plug labeled MCL and tighten the
two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame.
4. At the Universal Power Supply, attach the male connector to the to the plug labeled
MCL/MPL and tighten the two screws to secure it.
Note: MPL is a sample handling option available on an FC 500 only.

Power Supply Voltage Verification and Adjustment

1. Power up the entire system. (This includes plugging the two ac power line cords back
into the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.

PN 4237029G 3.11-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MCL UPGRADE

2. Go to Heading 4.21, POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

to adjust the MCL power supply voltages as needed and verify all other power supply
voltage readings match the voltage recorded on the sticker attached to the side of the
Data Acquisition card cage.

MCL Alignment
Go to Heading 4.12, MCL OPTION FIELD ADJUSTMENT and complete the procedure as
written.

Operational Verification
1. Press the PRIME button and observe the segmenting valve. Make sure the segmenting
valve pads are rotating smoothly and there is no leakage at the segmenting valve, flow
cell, or sample probe(s).
2. Add fluorospheres to three empty test tubes.
3. Insert the three test tubes in the first three positions in the carousel and start the run.
4. Ensure proper sample flow.

Reinstall Covers
1. With the exception of the left-side cover and Cytometer top cover, reinstall all covers
removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND
REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
Note: When installing the new manual sample station cover assembly, the two flat
Phillips-head screws must be installed on the right so the reagent drawer can close
properly.
2. Install the new left-side cover. Refer to Procedure 13 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
3. Install the new MCL probe housing cover using two Phillips-head screws. Refer to
Procedure 12 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
4. Install the new MCL covers. Refer to Procedure 11 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
5. Open and close the MCL door several times. Listen for an audible snap as it closes. The
MCL door must be closed with the interlock switch depressed for proper operation.
6. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover. Refer to Procedure 1 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.

System Verification
1. Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).
2. With the permanent marker, write the XL-MCL flow cytometer's serial number in the
blank box on the new serial name plate and install the name plate on the back of the
Cytometer.
Note: The model code changes from XL flow cytometer (2714) to XL-MCL flow
cytometer (2988).

3.11-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MCL UPGRADE 3
3. Return the following XL flow cytometer parts for reuse as spares:
r Cytometer left-side cover, PN 6856727 (black) or PN 6807085 (grey)
r Manual sample station cover assembly, PN 7000360 (black) or PN 7000679 (grey).

PN 4237029G 3.11-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
MCL UPGRADE

3.11-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FOUR-COLOR PMT UPGRADE 3
3.12 FOUR-COLOR PMT UPGRADE
Purpose
Use this procedure to upgrade an instrument from three colors to four colors. The optional
FL4 sensor (PMT) can be either a standard PMT (300 nm to 800 nm) or a red sensitive PMT
that has a wider spectral response (300 nm to 850 nm).

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Four-Color PMT Upgrade kit, PN 6912932
Note: Kit contains PMT with a 300 nm to 800 nm spectral response
B Optional red sensitive PMT with 300 nm to 850 nm spectral response, PN 176402
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mL test tube, PN 2523749

Preparation
1. Check the contents of the 4-Color PMT Upgrade kit against the packing list to ensure
that all of the parts are present.
2. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
3. Remove all covers required to access and remove the filter shield. Refer to Procedure 15
under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
4. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

Hardware Installation
ATTENTION: When this procedure is complete, the FL3 PMT currently in the instrument
becomes PMT 4 and the new PMT becomes the PMT 3. The filters are then moved to obtain
the filter configuration shown in Figure 3.12-1.

PN 4237029G 3.12-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FOUR-COLOR PMT UPGRADE

Figure 3.12-1 PMT Filter Locations

620
Band Pass
575
Band Pass
525
Band Pass

675
Band Pass

645
Dichroic
600
550 Dichroic
Dichroic

488
Laser Blocker

488
Dichroic 7029217F

1. Remove the blank cover from the optical-housing block between PMT 2 and PMT 3.
2. Remove the tape that is covering the PMT 3 filter slot.
3. Install the new PMT holder between PMT 2 and PMT 3 and secure it with screws.
4. Place the new PMT into the PMT holder installed in the previous step and tighten the
thumbscrew.
5. At the Data Acquisition card cage:
a. Install the new Bertran high voltage (HV) supply into the HV PMT 4 slot. For HV
PMT 4 slot location, refer to Figure A.5-3 as needed.
b. Insert the new Amp/Signal Conditioner card into the PMT 4 card slot. For PMT 4
card slot location, refer to Figure A.5-3 as needed.
6. Remove the HV and signal cables from the old PMT 3 and install them on the new PMT.
7. If you are installing the optional red sensitive PMT:
a. Remove the standard PMT from the PMT 4 holder.
b. Install the red sensitive PMT in the PMT 4 holder.
8. Route the PMT 4 Bertran HV cable so that it connects to the PMT in the PMT 4 holder.
Note: A right-angle HV connector is supplied with the kit in case it is needed.
9. Connect one end of the signal cable to the Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT 4 and
connect the other end to PMT 4.
10. Connect the ±15 Vdc connector for PMT 3 to the spare connector located on the PMT
Distribution and Laser Fan Control card.

3.12-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FOUR-COLOR PMT UPGRADE 3
11. Assemble the new filter assemblies.
Note: The filter holders must be assembled; use the ball plunger and setscrew.
12. Place the correct filter identification labels on the filters.
13. Insert the filters into their correct position (Figure 3.12-1).
14. Install the filter lock-down clips and secure the filter assembly to the optical-housing
assembly using screws.
15. Attach the new four-color front cover to the optical-housing assembly using screws.
16. Power up the entire system. (This includes plugging the two ac power line cords back
into the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.

Amp/Signal Conditioner Card Calibration

Go to Heading 4.14 locate the If Calibrating Without Replacing the Trans Data Acquisition
Card heading. Complete the procedure as written. After verifying calibration of the Trans
Data Acquisition card, the procedure will direct you to the instructions for calibrating the
new Amp/Signal Conditioner card under Heading 4.15.

PMT Operational Alignment

1. Reboot the Cytometer.
2. Dispense approximately 1-mL of the fluorospheres into a test tube.
3. Select the CHANNEL_500 protocol. If necessary, create a CHANNEL_500 protocol using the
parameter and setting information in Table A.3-1.
4. Adjust FL3 PMT for maximum pulse amplitude.
5. Adjust FL4 PMT for maximum pulse amplitude.

Reinstall Covers
1. Position the new four-color filter shield over the sensing area and secure it to the
Cytometer frame using four Phillips-head screws. Refer to Procedure 15 under
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
2. Reinstall all other covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

PN 4237029G 3.12-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FOUR-COLOR PMT UPGRADE

3.12-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE 3
3.13 FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE
Purpose
The purpose of this section is to provide you with procedures to install the FlowCentre II
Multimedia Workstation. After completing the hardware installation, you must install the
SYSTEM II software and any optional software before verifying operation.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation, PN 2016874
Note: PS/2 scroll point mouse pointing device, PN 2016876, and a Windows 98
compatible keyboard, PN 2016881, are included with this tower computer.

Preparation
1. Unpack the FlowCentre II tower computer, keyboard, and mouse.
2. Visually inspect for any physical damage caused in shipping.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.
3. Power off the Cytometer and FlowCentre desktop computer. Refer to Stage 2: Power Off
the Workstation (system using SYSTEM II software) under Heading 4.1, as needed.

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or EXMEM II Card Retrieval and Installation

1. Remove the cover from the customer’s current desktop computer and remove the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card.
2. Remove the cover from the new FlowCentre II tower computer.
3. Insert the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card removed from the desktop computer into
the available ISA slot in the new tower computer.
4. Place the cover on the new FlowCentre II tower computer.

PN 4237029G 3.13-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE

Mouse Connection
Connect the mouse cable to the mouse port on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure 3.13-1).

Figure 3.13-1 Electronic Cable Connections - Mouse and Keyboard

ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

MulitSync LCD1700 M+
CAUTIO N
AV IS
ACHTUN G
FC

ADVARS EL
WA RNI NG

MODEL LC D170 0M+

SERIAL NO.
REV. 1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

TRAN

REC.

PRESSURE VACUUM WAST

FLOWCELL
WAST
Keyboard

7029114F
Mouse

Keyboard Connection
Connect the keyboard cable to the keyboard port on the rear of the computer tower
(Figure 3.13-1).

Monitor Connection (New or Existing)

1. Inspect the cables and the power cord to ensure the pins are straight and seated properly.
2. Locate the cable with the terminal post (usually color-coded green).
3. Insert the terminal post in the sound jack (green jack) on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure 3.13-2).
4. Attach the monitor plug to the right jack on the Dual Monitor Video card
(Figure 3.13-2).

3.13-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE 3
Figure 3.13-2 Connecting Monitor Cables
ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from
that shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed
by that circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

Monitor 1

MulitSync LCD1700 M+
CAUTIO N
AV IS
ACHTUN G
FC

ADVARS EL
WA RNI NG

MODEL LC D170 0M+

SERIAL NO.
REV. 1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

Monitor 2

7029182F
Green
ac to terminal jack
wall outlet

5. If there is a second monitor, repeat steps 1 through 4 but this time attach the monitor
plug to the left jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (Figure 3.13-2).
6. Connect the ac power cord to an appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure 3.13-2).

Cable Connections

Fiber Optic Interface Cables

ATTENTION: The orange fiber optic interface cable is actually two cables joined together so it
has two terminal posts (with a locking nut) at each end. One terminal post is labeled RX and
the other terminal post is labeled TX. The terminal posts on one end of the cable are already
inserted into jacks on the Cytometer and the terminal posts (labeled RX and TX) on the other
end of the cable will be inserted into the jacks on the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or
EXMEM II card in the tower computer. Proper connection of this cable is important for
operation.
r A transmit terminal post (TX) must be inserted into a transmit port; a receive
terminal post (RX) must be inserted into a receive port so one end of each cable is
labeled TX and the other end is labeled RX.
r Information being transmitted by the Cytometer via the FIBER OPTICS TRANS port
(light grey jack with a TX terminal post attached) must enter the receive port of the
computer (either a dark grey jack or jack labeled REC with the RX terminal post
attached) and the information being transmitted from the computer (either a light
grey jack or jack labeled XMIT with the TX terminal post attached) must enter the
Cytometer via the FIBER OPTIC REC port (dark grey jack with the RX terminal post
attached). If these connections are not correct, signals are not transmitted and
received as required for proper operation.
r If the RX and/or TX labels are missing, you can distinguish the one cable from the
other by the presence or absence of score marks on the outside covering.

PN 4237029G 3.13-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE

1. At the rear of the Cytometer, locate the orange fiber optic interface cable attached to the
FIBER OPTIC REC (dark grey jack) and FIBER OPTICS TRANS (light grey jack).
2. At the rear of the tower computer, locate the edge of the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the bottom slot.
r The card edge of the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card is labeled. Go to step 3.
r The card edge of the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card is not labeled but the jacks
are color coded. The jack for transmitting signals is light grey and the jack for
receiving signals is dark grey. Use Figure 3.13-3 as a reference. Go to step 4.
3. Connect the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card:
a. Insert the terminal post labeled TX into the outer left jack labeled XMIT
(Figure 3.13-3) and tighten the locking nut.

Figure 3.13-3 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM and EXMEM II Card Edge Locations
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM ll card edge

CYT
XMIT

REC

12

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card edge

TX RX CYT12 7029225F

b. Insert the terminal post labeled RX into the inner (middle) jack labeled REC
(Figure 3.13-3) and tighten the locking nut.
4. Connect the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card:
a. Connect the terminal labeled TX to the light grey jack (Figure 3.13-3) and tighten
the locking nut. This is the outer left jack.
b. Connect the terminal labeled RX to the dark grey jack (Figure 3.13-3) and tighten
the locking nut. This the inner (middle) jack.

CYT12 Cable
1. At the rear of the Power Supply module, insert the terminal post labeled TX into the
CYT12 jack and tighten the locking nut.
r If this is a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, the CYT12 jack is located in the upper left
corner. For location, refer to Figure A.6-5 as needed.
r If this is a Universal Power Supply, the CYT12 jack (labeled U2) is located in the
upper left corner of the Power Control 3 card. For location, refer to Figure A.7-6 as
needed.

3.13-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE 3
2. At the rear of the tower computer:
r If this is an Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card, insert the terminal post labeled RX
into the right jack labeled CYT 12 (Figure 3.13-3) and tighten the locking nut.
r If this is an Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card, insert the small black connector
(P109) into the CYT12 socket. See Figure 3.13-3.

Power Cord
1. Connect the female end of the ac power cord to the rear of the tower computer.
2. Connect the plug to an appropriate ac wall outlet.

Install SYSTEM II Software

1. Power on the Workstation computer and monitor.
2. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS.
3. At the MS-DOS prompt (C:\>), type XL_INST then press Û to configure the
computer for an XL flow cytometer.
4. Reboot the computer system by simultaneously pressing the Ý, Þ, and á keys.
5. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS which should select SYSTEM II software as the operating system.
6. Verify the computer boots to the XL SYSTEM II software.
7. Approximately 10 seconds after the XL logo appears on the monitor, the following
messages are displayed:
a. Resetting cytometer
b. Loading Cyto. Hardware
Note: Once the software is loaded, it turns on the Cytometer. This process should
take less than 30 seconds.
8. At the Cytometer, verify that the LASER indicator reads ON.
9. At the monitor, verify the message STARTUP IN PROCESS appears (lower right display
area).
10. At the Cytometer, verify the READY indicator turns green.
Note: The Cytometer can take up to 30 minutes to warm up before the READY indicator
turns green.

Install EXPO32™ Software Option, if applicable

If the customer has purchased one or more EXPO32 software options, go to Heading 3.22,
EXPO32™ SOFTWARE OPTIONS and complete the instructions as written.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

PN 4237029G 3.13-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION UPGRADE

3.13-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION 3
3.14 BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to guide you in successfully installing and connecting the
bar-code Printer to the CPU. If you encounter any problems, please refer to the
OEM-supplied manual for additional help.

This options allows the XL-MCL flow cytometer to print CODE 128 Bar-code labels through
the System II software. Beckman Coulter has chosen Zebra Technologies Corporation
STRIPE® S-500 Bar Code Printer for the XL-MCL flow cytometer. The bar-code Printer is
connected to the CPU by a l-null modem cable. Bar-code data is serially transmitted at 9600
baud.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Bar-code Printer kit, PN 6913342
B Bar-code label media replacement kit for STRIPE bar-code Printer, PN 6914992
B Scissors
B Cotton swabs
B Alcohol

Printer Setup
Note: For additional information not found in this procedure, refer to the STRIPE® Zebra
Operators Guide located under the media cover in a plastic sleeve.

1. Inspect the Bar-code Printer kit for damage and verify that all parts are included before
attempting installation.
2. Unpack and remove all shipping hold downs from the bar-code Printer. Refer to the
installation notes sent with the Printer for location and removal.
3. Locate the DIP switches on the back, right side of the Printer (Figure 3.14-1).
4. Connect the serial interface cable (25-pin, D-pin connector) to the connector below the
DIP switches (Figure 3.14-1).
5. Set the eight DIP switches as shown in Figure 3.14-1 and Table 3.14-1.
6. Carefully lift the side cover of the bar-code Printer and gain access to the label and
ribbon area.
7. Locate the label roll (media supply) and insert the roll on the media supply hanger with
the label media facing up (Figure 3.14-2).

PN 4237029G 3.14-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION

Figure 3.14-1 Bar-Code Printer - DIP Switches

(L) (R)
ON OFF

1
2
3
4
SERIAL
INTERFACE

5
CABLE

6
7
8
POWER
ON/OFF
SWITCH

AC POWER
7029051D LINE CORD

Table 3.14-1 Bar-Code Printer DIP Switch Settings

Switch Setting Position Function

1 OFF Right Not used
2 OFF Right Sets BAUD rate to 9600
3 OFF Right Not used
4 ON Left Sets Data Bit length to 8
5 ON Left Sets Parity to Disabled
6 ON Left Not used
7 OFF Right Sets X ON/OFF Flow Control
8 OFF Right Sets no error detection

8. Ensure the label roll (media supply) is pushed all the way in and adjust the media supply
guide to hold the label roll (media supply) in place (Figure 3.14-2).
9. To mark where the separation (space) between labels is located, adjust the media sensor
(Figure 3.14-2) by sliding the sensor to the center of the label.
10. Locate the printer ribbon and install it on the ribbon supply spool (Figure 3.14-2).
11. Connect the ac power line cord to the bar-code Printer and push the power on/off switch
to the on (I) position.
12. The Printer goes through an internal self check and when the self check is complete, a
few bar-code labels are spooled out of the bar-code Printer. When the Printer is ready the
POWER and PAUSE LEDs light and the PRINTHEAD LED flashes.

3.14-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION 3
Figure 3.14-2 Bar-Code Printer - Media Threading and Adjustment Components
RIBBON RIBBON
RIBBON RELEASE SUPPLY SPOOL SUPPLY
BUTTON

HEAD OPEN
LEVER MEDIA
SUPPLY
OPEN
PRINT HEAD
ASSEMBLY MEDIA
SUPPLY
LABELS GUIDE

PLATEN

PLATEN MEDIA
GUIDE ROD DRAG
ROLLER
BACKING
ONLY
MEDIA
MEDIA SUPPLY
SENSOR HANGER
ASSEMBLY

REWIND MEDIA UPPER GUIDE

POWER ROLLER GUIDE LOWER GUIDE REWIND HOLD DOWN ROD
ROD SPINDLE HOOK 7029052D

Media Calibration
Calibrate the media after completing the Printer Setup procedure and anytime a different
label roll (media supply) or ribbon is installed.

1. Push the head open lever to the Open position (Figure 3.14-2).
2. Push the Printer’s power on/off switch to the on (I) position (Figure 3.14-1). The Printer
goes through an internal self check and when the self check is complete, a few bar-code
labels are spooled out of the bar-code Printer. When the Printer is ready the POWER and
PAUSE LEDs light and the PRINTHEAD LED flashes.
3. Push the head open lever to the Closed position (Figure 3.14-2).
4. Press the MODE button three times.
5. Ensure that the CALIBRATE LED lights.
6. Press the FEED button. The calibration process begins.
Note: Approximately 16 blank labels feed out of the Printer. The Printer is aligning the
spaces between the labels to ensure correct printing position.
7. When the calibration process is completed, all three MODE LEDs flash to indicate the
new configuration settings.
8. Press the PAUSE button to place the Printer in normal operating mode.
9. Push the Printer’s power on/off switch to the off (O) position (Figure 3.14-1).

PN 4237029G 3.14-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION

XL-MCL Flow Cytometer Connection

1. Connect the null modem cable to the COM3 port on the back of the CPU.
2. If the Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card is not installed, install it now as directed
under Heading 3.16, SERIAL/PARALLEL ADAPTER INTERFACE CARD OPTION.
3. Connect the other end of the null modem cable to the bar-code Printer’s serial port.
4. Push the Printer’s power on/off switch to the on (I) position (Figure 3.14-1). The Printer
goes through an internal self check and when the self check is complete, a few bar-code
labels are spooled out of the bar-code Printer. When the Printer is ready the POWER and
PAUSE LEDs light and the PRINTHEAD LED flashes.

Printer Testing (through SYSTEM II Software)

1. Exit to MS-DOS.
2. Edit the XL_GRAPH.CNG file to include the following statement:
C=3,H,128
where C is the bar-code Printer, 3 is the communications port, H is for horizontal
printing and 128 is the code type.
3. Reboot the Computer Workstation.
4. At the Cytometer, on the Acquisition Run screen, select SETUP SCREEN.
5. Select WORKLIST.
6. Select TUBE ID, enter any eight digits in the ID information box and press Û.
7. From the bottom of the screen, select PRINT BAR CODE ensuring that it turns green.
8. Select TUBE ID and ensure that a label is printed and fed out of the Printer.
Note: If the label is correctly centered and the tear-off position and print quality are
correct, this ends the procedure. If not, proceed to the next heading, Label Tear-Off
Position Adjustment.

Label Tear-Off Position Adjustment

The label tear-off position adjustment procedure has to be performed only at installation as
long as the customer uses bar-code labels and ribbons purchased from Beckman Coulter. If
the customer purchases bar-code labels and ribbons from someone other than Beckman
Coulter, the following procedure must be performed.

1. Press the MODE button twice and ensure that the POSITION LED lights.
Note: The PAUSE LED lights and remains lit.
2. Taking note of the position of the label, use the FEED button to move the label away
from the Printer or the CANCEL button to move the label in towards the Printer.
3. When the desired label tear-off position is reached, press the MODE button twice. The
MODE LEDs turn off then all three MODE LEDs light to indicate that the new position
settings are saved.
Note: Adjustment settings are automatically saved in the Printer when the power is
turned off (O).
4. Press the FEED button and ensure that the label stops at the correct tear-off position. If
positioning is not correct, repeat steps1 through 3 under this heading.

3.14-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION 3
Printer Thermal Head Adjustment
Adjusting the Printer’s thermal head is an internal control. There is no observable action
when adjusting. While this procedure generates bar-code labels, you adjust the
lightness/darkness of the print quality pressing the PAUSE button to halt printing and then
making an adjustment and repeating this sequence until the desired print quality is reached.

1. From the title bar, select SPECIMEN ID, enter any 16 digits in the ID information box and
press Û.
2. Select PATIENT NAME, enter JOHN DOE, and press Û.
3. From the bottom of the screen, select ASSIGN BAR CODE ensuring that it turns green.
4. Select TUBE ID and ensure that characters are entered into the Tube ID field.
5. From the bottom of the screen, select PRINT BAR CODE ensuring that it turns green.
6. Print a bar-code label by selecting TUBE ID.
7. Press the MODE button once ensuring that the DARKEN LED lights.
8. Press the FEED button to increase the print darkness or the CANCEL button to decrease
the print darkness.
9. Press the PAUSE button to pause the printing.
10. Check the print quality. If necessary, repeat steps 5 through 9 until the desired print
quality is reached.

Top-of-Label Position Adjustment

Adjusting the position of the top-of-label is an internal control. There is no observable action
when adjusting and label printing is the only way to verify adjustment.

1. Press the MODE button twice and ensure that the POSITION LED lights.
Note: The PAUSE LED lights and remains lit.
2. Press and hold the MODE button for several seconds until the POSITION LED turns off
and both the DARKEN and CALIBRATE LEDs light.
3. Press the FEED button to move the label format away from the top edge of the label or
press the CANCEL button to move the label format closer to the top edge of the label.
4. Print a label and verify the adjustment.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the desired positioning is reached.
6. Press the MODE button twice to save the new settings.
Note: Adjustment settings are automatically saved in the Printer when the power is
turned off (O).

Ribbon Replacement
Beckman Coulter recommends that the customer order the same type of label roll (media
supply) previously used. The bar-code label media replacement kit contains labels and
enough ribbon to print the labels.

1. With scissors, cut the used ribbon and remove the empty ribbon tube from the ribbon
supply holder (Figure 3.14-2).

PN 4237029G 3.14-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION

2. Push in the ribbon release button (Figure 3.14-2) allowing the bars on the used ribbon
holder to be unlocked.
3. Remove the used ribbon from the ribbon supply spool (Figure 3.14-2) and discard the
used ribbon.
4. With a cotton swab and alcohol, clean the printer head (Figure 3.14-2).
Note: The Printer head should be cleaned each time a new ribbon is installed.

3.14-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE HAND-HELD SCANNER OPTION 3
3.15 BAR-CODE HAND-HELD SCANNER OPTION
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to guide you in successfully installing and connecting the
bar-code hand-held scanner. The hand-held scanner allows XL-MCL flow cytometers to
bar-code scan patient samples. The hand-held scanner is pre-programmed to Beckman
Coulter’s specifications by the OEM.

The default configuration is shown in Table 3.15-1 and the programmable symbologies are
provided in Table F.3-3. If you encounter any problems, please refer to the OEM-supplied
manual for additional help.
-

Table 3.15-1 Default Configuration - Bar-Code Hand-Held Scanner

Bar-Code Symbology

INTERLEAVED 2
Item CODE 39® CODABAR OF 5 CODE 93 CODE 128
Code type Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Fixed length Disabled Disabled N/A N/A Disabled
Code length #1 7 10 14 12 16
Code length #2 N/A N/A 0 N/A N/A
Check digit Enabled Enabled Enabled N/A N/A
C/D output Disabled Disabled Disabled N/A N/A
C/D aim N/A Enabled N/A N/A N/A
Intercharacter gap Disabled Disabled N/A N/A N/A
S/S match N/A Disabled N/A N/A N/A
S/S output N/A Disabled N/A N/A N/A
EAN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Narrow margins Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Bar-code scanner kit, PN 6913337
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mL test tube, PN 2523749

Installation
1. Inspect the Bar-code scanner kit for damage and verify that all parts are included before
attempting installation.
2. Turn off the power to the Cytometer.
3. Remove the keyboard connector from the back of the Computer Workstation.
4. Connect the keyboard connector to the keyboard port on the hand-held scanner cable.
5. Connect the hand-held scanner connector to the keyboard connector on the back of the
Computer Workstation.

PN 4237029G 3.15-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE HAND-HELD SCANNER OPTION

Verification
1. Turn on the power to the Cytometer.
2. After the Computer Workstation boots up into the SYSTEM II software, point the
hand-held scanner at a specific area of the XL-MCL flow cytometer and pull the trigger.
Ensure that a laser beam image is displayed at the same area of the XL-MCL flow
cytometer.
3. Place a bar-code label on a test tube and insert some fluorospheres into the test tube.
4. Run the fluorospheres and after ten seconds select Stop.
5. When the XL-MCL flow cytometer prompts you to Enter Sample ID, aim the hand-held
scanner at the bar-code label and pull the trigger. Ensure that the label is read.

3.15-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
SERIAL/PARALLEL ADAPTER INTERFACE CARD OPTION 3
3.16 SERIAL/PARALLEL ADAPTER INTERFACE CARD OPTION
Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to successfully guide you in installing the Serial/Parallel
Adapter Interface card.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card, PN 2016678

Preparation
Note: Because of OEM-vendor changes, differences in Computer Workstations and
customer-purchased peripheral upgrades, additional installation information may be
required. This information can be obtained from the OEM-supplied manuals. Also, please
refer to the OEM-supplied instruction manuals if you encounter difficulties.

1. Turn off the Computer Workstation and unplug the ac power line cords from the wall
outlets.
2. Remove the CPU cover.
3. Remove the two, card-connector cover plates from the back of the CPU.

Installation
1. On the Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card, ensure that the jumpers are set according to
Figure 3.16-1. These settings are the default jumper settings from the OEM
manufacturer.

Figure 3.16-1 Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface Card - Default Jumper Settings

LPTINT
0378

0278
IRQ7

IRQ5
LPT

J4

J5
SER B SERIAL B

SER A SERIAL A
IRQ7
IRQ5

IRQ4
IRQ3
COM1
COM2

COM3
COM4

7029069D

2. Insert and secure the Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card and additional serial port into
the CPU.
3. Replace the two, card-connector cover plates and the CPU cover.

PN 4237029G 3.16-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
SERIAL/PARALLEL ADAPTER INTERFACE CARD OPTION

4. Plug the ac power line cords into appropriate wall outlets and turn the Computer
Workstation on.
5. Check to see if any system card conflict messages display on the monitor:
r If no system card conflict messages display on the monitor go to the next step (6).
r If system card conflict messages display on the monitor:
t Repeat steps 1 through 5.
t Refer to the OEM manual.
t Check the CMOS settings and ensure that they match Table 3.16-1.

Table 3.16-1 CMOS Settings

Item Setting
LPT1 378
LPT2 278
COM1 3F8
COM2 2F8
COM3 3E8
COM4 2E8

6. At the MS-DOS prompt, type MSD and press Û.

Verification
Verify that the COM port status shows 4 COM ports and that there are 2 LPT ports.

3.16-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
NETWORK SETUP USING MICROSOFT WINDOWS 95 OR 98 3
3.17 NETWORK SETUP USING MICROSOFT WINDOWS 95 OR 98
ATTENTION: This procedure is used to connect two or more computers together in Windows 95
or 98 and is designed for customers who are using only EXPO 32 software and do not intend
to use the MS-DOS 6.22 and/or MS-DOS mode with their Workstations.

Purpose
The purpose of this procedure is to provide you with the information that will allow you to
successfully install and communicate over a Windows 95 or 98 Network Neighborhood using
the FlowCentre I or FlowCentre II.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Network Interconnect Cable kit, PN 6912485
B Two BNC male terminators, PN 2906841
B Two coaxial BNC T-connectors (jack-plug-jack), PN 2121537
Note: These supplies connect only two computers. If more than two computers are to be
in this network, you must order an additional cable kit (PN 6912485) and coaxial BNC
T-connector (PN 2121537) for each additional computer. For example, if four computers
are to be in this network, you need to order three cable kits (PN 6912485) and two BNC
male terminators (PN 2906841), and four coaxial BNC T-connectors (PN 2121537).

Software Installation
Configure each adapter to use the 10-BASE-2 connector. The configuration program
(3c90xcfg.exe) is located in the C:\ETHERNET subdirectory. To access the program:

1. Boot to MSDOS 6.22 or MSDOS, whichever is applicable.

a. Press Ý+Þ+á simultaneously.
b. When the highlighted 8. Previous version of MS-DOS menu item appears, press Û.
c. When the Main screen appears, press Ê.
d. Press the Y key when the EXIT TO DOS? y/n message appears.
2. At the C:\XL prompt, type cd C:\ethernet to access the ethernet subdirectory.
3. Type 3c90xcfg then press Û. The Install Configure NIC option automatically appears.
4. Press Ì or Û to display the NIC Configuration box.
5. Press Ù as many times as necessary to access the NIC Configuration box.
6. Press ç as many times as necessary to highlight the Media Type option then press Û.
7. Press ç as many times as necessary to highlight On-board Coax (BNC) then press Û.
8. Select OK to return to the NIC Configuration box.
9. Select OK tt Quit tt Exit to exit the program and save the changes.
10. Boot to Windows 95 or 98, whichever is applicable.
a. Press Ý+Þ+á simultaneously.
b. When the menu appears, select 1. Normal then press Û and wait for the Windows
Desktop to appear.
11. Select Start tt Settings tt Control Panel tt Network icon.

PN 4237029G 3.17-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
NETWORK SETUP USING MICROSOFT WINDOWS 95 OR 98

12. Verify the TCP/IP Protocol is present.

r If present, go to step 14.
r If not present, go to step 13 to add the protocol.
13. At the Configuration tab, select the Add button tt Protocol tt Add button tt Microsoft tt
TCP/IP tt OK.
14. Highlight TCP/IP Protocol then select the Properties button.
ATTENTION: Each computer on the network must have a unique IP Address. The nomenclature
of the address always starts with 192.168. The first Workstation will be 0.01; the second
Workstation is 0.02 and so on. Therefore, a third Workstation on the network would be
192.168.0.03
15. On the IP Address tab, select Specify an IP address.
Note: Periods are displayed by the software. The ß must be used to move from the
field that contains the single digit to the last field. For example, to enter the IP Address,
type 1921680ß01

The address for the first computer is:

IP Address: 192.168.0.01
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
16. When the entries are completed, select OK to exit the IP Address box.
17. Select OK again. The message Restart your computer before the new settings will take effect.
Do you want to restart your computer now? appears.
18. Select Yes.
19. Repeat steps 1 through 18 for each computer designated to be on the network.

Cable Connections
1. Install a T-connector on the Network Interface card on the rear of each computer.
2. Connect the 50 ft network interconnect cable to each T-connector.
Note: If more than two Workstations are in the network, connect each Workstation in
series, from one T-connector to another until all Workstations are connected.
3. Place a terminator on the T-connector on the first and last Workstation on the Bus.

Set Up Hard Drives and Printers

The next step is to decide which computers will share their printers and hard drives. A Server
always shares its hard drive and printers, where a Client does not. Once the decision is made
as to which computer will share its hard drive and/or printers, the File and Printer Sharing
Service for Microsoft Networks located under the Services tab must be added.

1. Select Start tt Settings tt Control Panel tt Network icon tt Services tab tt Add button tt File and
Printer Sharing Service for Microsoft Networks tt OK.
2. Reboot the computer when prompted. At least one computer on the network must have
this option.
3. Select Start tt Settings tt Control Panel tt Network icon tt Services tab tt File and Printer
Sharing.

3.17-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
NETWORK SETUP USING MICROSOFT WINDOWS 95 OR 98 3
4. Verify both options on this screen are checked. Repeat this for each Workstation on the
network.

Define the Computer Name and Workgroup

1. At the Network window, select the Identification tab.
2. Define the Computer Name and Workgroup.
r The Computer Name must be a unique name and cannot be duplicated. In other
words, each computer on the network should have its own unique name.
r The Workgroup should be the same for all computers on the network.
3. Repeat this process for each Workstation on the network.

Establish Control
1. At the Network window, select the Access Control tab tt Share Level Access Control. This
option allows the customer to password protect the Shared Device to the network.
2. Select the Config tab.
3. Verify the Primary Network Logon is Microsoft Networks.
4. Select OK to exit the network properties.
ATTENTION: Reboot computers sharing hard drives and/or printers first, then reboot each
client.
5. Reboot each computer on the network by rebooting the computers sharing hard drives
and/or printers first, then rebooting each client.
Note: When logging into the network, it is necessary to supply a User Name and
Password when going into Windows 95 or 98. It is recommended that the Computer
Name be used as the User Name when logging in.
6. Attempt to locate drives on the network by selecting Network Neighborhood icon. The
Workgroup should appear. Under the Workgroup, each computer which is sharing its
hard drives and/or printers should be visible.
7. Click on it and locate the computer on the network that was set up to share its hard
drives and/or printers. Click on the computer and the hard drive that was shared should
be visible at this time.
Note: If the customer chose to password protect the drive letter, enter the password if
prompted. Click on the drive letter to verify the drive can be read.

Map a Network Shared Drive, if desired

1. If the customer wants to map a Network Shared drive, select Network Neighborhood.
2. Locate the drive letter on the computer desired.
3. Highlight the drive letter and right click with the mouse.
4. Select Map Network Drive.
Note: If the option Reconnect at Logon is also selected, the computer will automatically
connect at Logon to the Shared Network Drive. The drive letter can be any letter higher
than the last available drive letter used.

PN 4237029G 3.17-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
NETWORK SETUP USING MICROSOFT WINDOWS 95 OR 98

3.17-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0 3
3.18 LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0
Purpose
This procedure provides instructions for installing LANtastic Client/Server software,
version 8.0. These instructions install the current version of LANtastic Client/Server software
for either a single-user or a 2 to 10-user license.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B LANtastic® Client/Server software V8.0, single-user license, PN 6417324
B LANtastic® Client/Server software V8.0, 2 to 10 user license, PN 6417325

Preparation
1. Verify compliance with the system requirements stated under Heading B.4, LANtastic®
NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS.
2. Back up all important customer information as designated by the customer.
3. Ensure that all software is present to re-install if re-imaging is required.
4. Read this procedure completely before starting to prevent failures to the process.

Hardware Installation
1. Locate the hardware that came with the software networking kit.
2. Install the T-connectors on the network card.
3. Install the BNC cable on the Client Computer Network card T-connector and the other
end to the cable on the Server Network card T-connector.
4. Install a Terminator on the other end of the T-connect on both the Client and Server
Network card T-connector. If more then one Client computer is to be installed, skip the
Terminator on the Client computer/computers between the Server and the last Client
computer.

CD-ROM Usage in DOS

r If the computer allows you to use a CD-ROM in DOS, go to the Software Installation,
Client Setup heading.
r If the computer does not allow you to use the CD-ROM in DOS, you have two choices.
t Convert the software from CD to 3.5-inch floppy diskettes. To do this, follow the
procedure in the OEM Vender manual then go to the Software Installation, Client
Setup heading.
t Use the CD-ROM in DOS. To do this, go to Heading 4.23, UNIVERSAL CD-ROM
DRIVER SETUP and install a driver that works with all types of CD-ROM drives
then return to this procedure and starting at Heading Software Installation, Client
Setup complete the LANtastic installation as written.

Software Installation, Client Setup

ATTENTION: These instructions are written to be used in conjunction with the OEM vender’s
installation process. At times, you are instructed to reference the OEM vender’s procedure but
not step by step.

PN 4237029G 3.18-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0

1. Select File tt Save to save the changes.

2. Select File tt Save As and rename the file from autoexec.bat to autoexec.XXX where the
XXX is your initials. This is being done to have a backup of this file in case a problem
occurs later.
3. At the DOS prompt (C:\), type editßconfig.sys.
4. Select File tt Save As and rename the file from config.sys to config.XXX where XXX is you
initials. This is done to have a backup of this file in case a problem occurs later.
5. At the DOS prompt (C:\), type memmaker.
6. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen. When ask about expanded memory,
choose no. Remember, you must choose the option for DOS when running this. You
must pay attention so the computer does not go into Windows when re-booting while
running memmaker.
Note: Running memmaker creates enough memory to install the LANtastic software.
The driver statement added later can and should be REM’d out of the config.sys file.
(REM in programming language is short for remarks or comments. When applicable,
REM is typed at the beginning of a line and anything after it is considered a comment, a
note, or a non-executable code.)
7. After memmaker has finished, at the C:\ prompt, type mem.
8. Verify the memory is at least 496.
If the memory is less than 496:
a. Review the config.sys and autoexec.bat files for add ons. There must be something
added because our computers should be above 495.
b. As you locate the add on, type REM in front of the add on.
c. When the review is complete, re-boot the computer.
d. Recheck the memory to ensure the memory is at least 496.
Note: Contact Technical Support for advice if memory values are not meet.
Some Tower Computers may not allow enough memory to load the software. You
will have to REM out the MOUSE statement if this occurs. Place a (REM) in front of
the mouse line in the autoexec.bat file.
9. If the memory is at least 496, re-boot the computer into Windows.
Note: If Norton Anti-Virus is installed, you need to disable the software for loading new
software. You may enable this when you are done.
10. Insert the LANtastic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. It will self-start the Install
process.

3.18-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0 3
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to install the Client version of the
software. Use the following information to answer the software installation questions
when they appear.
r When the software requests a selection, select the defaults.
r Do not share drive and printers. When the Share Drives and Printers option appears,
select No (delete the check mark from the box).
r When the software requests the Client’s computer name, type either the serial
number of the instrument or type computer1. This is up to you and the customer.
You must remember this name. You may select to write the name on the computer
somewhere so everyone can see the name.
r Select drive C: and accept the default name of Lantasti for the directory.
r When the software states the computer needs to re-boot, allow this to happen then
go back into Windows to complete the installation.
12. When the installation in Windows is complete, re-boot the computer again and go into
DOS.
13. Insert the LANtastic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
14. At the (C:\) prompt:
a. Type D:\ then press Û. (Drive D: is not seen in DOS on the tower computer.)
Note: If this is a FlowCentre desktop computer, E should be the CD-ROM drive in
DOS. Type E:\ then press Û.
b. Type install. The software automatically begins the installation. Follow the
instructions displayed on the screen. Use the following information to answer the
software installation questions when they appear.
r Select the C: as the default drive and leave all the default directories for install
alone.
r When appropriate, use the ç key to highlight the DO NOT SHARE DRIVERS AND
PRINTERS option to install the DOS version of LANtastic Client software.
r When the software requests the Client’s computer name, type what you did in
the step above for the Windows installation. You may select to write the name
on the computer somewhere so everyone can see the name.
r When requested, select OK for 3com Ethernet xl and fast etherlink.
r When shown, leave ALL Client to Novell Network at NO.
r Do not select any options like: TCP/IP Protocols, Modem Sharing, or Client for
Novell.
r For the network adaptor, select NDIS SUPPORT for NON-ARTISOFT ADAPTER and
change the path as C:\ETHERNET for the Network Interface card driver. When
requested, select NO to set up for permanent connection.
15. Re-boot the computer and return to the DOS prompt C:\. You will receive errors
messages but this is okay for now.
16. At the C:\ prompt, type editßautoexec.bat and press Û.
17. REM out all XL software statements referring to the networking SQL for the XL software
under the statement, ***Database Environment***. Leave Set_DOS16M=3m alone.

PN 4237029G 3.18-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0

18. Make sure the following lines appear below the REM’d out lines with a blank line
between.
PATH_C:\SQLANY50\DOS;%PATH%
SET_SQLPATH=C:\SQLANY50\DOS
SET_SQLANY50=C:\SQLANY50
SET_SQLSTART=C:\SQLANY50\DOS\DBCLIENT_ – x_ netDG_ / q_ / d_
XL2.DB
SET_SQLCONNECT=DBA,SQL,,
19. Type any missing lines below the REM’d out lines. Make sure there is a blank line
between the lines.
Note: The underscore (_) indicates a space. If you are typing the line, press ß
when you come to the underscore (_) in the line.
20. If you are working with a FlowCentre II tower computer, place a REM statement in front
of the Call C:\Lantasti\Startnet.bat line so that it looks like this:
REM Call C:\Lantasti\Startnet.bat
21. Save the changes to the autoexec.bat file.
22. Make sure the following lines appear in the config.sys file:
ENSURE THAT FILES ARE SET TO 60 AND THE BUFFERS ARE SET TO 63
DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\PROTMAN.DOS_ /I:C:\LANTASTI
DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\EL90X.DOS
LASTDRIVE=Z
23. Type any missing lines.
Note: The underscore (_) indicates a space. If you are typing the line, press ß
when you come to the underscore (_) in the line.
24. Save the changes made to the config.sys file.
25. At the C:\ prompt, type CD:\Lantasti and press Û.
26. At C:\Lantasti, type editßstartnet.batßfile
27. Make sure the following lines appear under the line, LOADHIGH_
[email protected] with a blank line in between:
[email protected]
NET_USE_W:_\\SERVER1\C-DRIVE
Note: SERVER1 is a generic name for the server. Replace SERVER1 with the name you
are using for the server.
28. Type any missing lines below the LOADHIGH_ [email protected] line.
Make sure there is a blank line between the lines.
Note: The underscore (_) indicates a space. If you are typing the line, press ß
when you come to the underscore (_) in the line.
29. Save the changes made to the startnet.bat file.
30. Re-boot the computer.
This concludes the LANtastic installation process for the Client. You will receive a REDIR
ERROR at boot up until you REM out the CD-ROM driver in the config.sys file.

3.18-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0 3
Software Installation, Server Setup
ATTENTION: During this installation, no DOS version of the software is installed. Because you
set the client computers to not share drivers and printers, you will not be able to see the
Client computer from the Server.
1. Boot the Server computer into Windows.
2. Insert the LANtastic CD into the CD-ROM drive. It will auto start into the install
process.
3. Click on the LANtastic icon on the upper right hand side to start the installation.
4. Follow the steps requested by the software and when required, type the Server Name
(SERVER1) you choose when setting the Client computers software.
Note: SERVER1 is a generic name for the server. Replace SERVER1 with the name you
are using for the server.
5. When prompted, ensure the check box is checked for sharing drives and printers since
this is the server you are setting up. Also, accept all the default directories shown.
6. Once complete, re-boot the computer but pay attention because you need to ensure that
you go back into Windows to allow the software to finish the installation.
7. Once in Windows again, double click on the LANtastic icon to start LANtastic. When the
Share Drives and Printers options appears, select Yes to start making the proper
boxes/sections.
8. Click on the Manage Server tab and select Share Drives. If needed, select the server as main
server.
9. Select the Use Network tab and select Assign Drives. You should see the server’s drives.
10. If the customer purchased Sybase Client/Server SQL software, go to Heading 3.21,
Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL SOFTWARE OPTION to complete this installation.

Software and Hardware Validation

1. Boot the Server computer into Windows. Allow it to finish booting up.
a. Simultaneously press Ý Þ á to reboot the Server computer.
b. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, highlight 1. Normal and press
Û.
c. Wait for the Windows desktop to appear.
2. Double click on the LANtastic icon to engage the Lantastic software.
3. Boot up the Client computer and select the SYSTEM II operating system.
a. Simultaneously press Ý Þ á to reboot the computer.
b. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, 8. Previous version of MS-DOS is
already highlighted. Wait or press Û to accelerate the process.
4. Access the Protocol select screen and verify that the W: drive is present.
5. Select the W: drive (this is the Server’s XL software).
6. Select a Protocol.
Note: You will have to re-build the directory to see any files there.

PN 4237029G 3.18-5
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0

7. Select a Listmode file by changing directories and select W: drive (this is the Server).
Again, you may have to re-build the directory.
8. Select any Listmode file or files and then batch play. Ensure that the output option is set
to save Listmode and that the patient report and database is enabled.

3.18-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 7.0 3
3.19 LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 7.0
Purpose
These procedures allow you to reinstall LANtastic Client/Server software V7.0.

Tools/Supplies Needed
ATTENTION: Needed software must be obtained from the customer. If it is not available, the
current version (Version 8.0) must be ordered and installed. See Heading 8.1, PART
LOCATOR TOOLS for the appropriate part number and Heading B.4 for the operating system
minimum requirements for version 8.0.

B Obtain from the customer LANtastic® Client/Server software V6.0 and 7.0, single-user
license or LANtastic® Client/Server software V6.0 and 7.0, 2 to 10 user license, as
applicable

LANtastic Client/Server Version for Windows™ 95 Installation

1. Boot the FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation.
2. At the Microsoft Windows 95 Startup Menu, select 1. Normal.
3. Make note of the CD-ROM drive letter (usually e:) and have the FlowCentre Multimedia
Workstation Windows 95 Backup Disk (supplied by customer) available.
4. Insert LANtastic Client/Server software floppy diskette 1 of 7 into floppy diskette
drive a:.
5. From the Windows 95 desktop, select Start tt Settings tt Control Panel tt Add/Remove
Programs tt Install tt Next.
6. When the a:\setup program is displayed, select Finish.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions and enter the following information for each
question/option:
a. For the computer’s name, either type the Cytometer’s serial number or other name
(check with the customer).
b. Enter the Serial Number and Verification Key of the software (located on the
registration card in the software kit).
c. Accept the default directory for software installation (c:\lantasti).
d. If installing a client version, select DO NOT SHARE MY COMPUTER’S DRIVES/PRINTERS.
e. If installing a server version, select SHARE MY COMPUTER’S DRIVES/PRINTERS.
f. Do not select the option TCP/IP PROTOCOL to install the Internet gateway.
g. Select DO NOT SHARE MODEM (box unchecked).
h. If installing a client version, select INSTALL SERVICES.
8. The Installation Utility asks for the Windows 95 Backup Disk (FlowCentre Multimedia
Workstation Windows 95 Backup Disk) during installation. Place the Windows 95
Backup Disk into the CD-ROM drive, entering the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive and
WIN95 (e.g., e:\win95).
9. Reboot the Workstation.
10. At the Microsoft Windows 95 Startup Menu, select 3. Safe Mode.

PN 4237029G 3.19-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 7.0

11. From the Windows 95 desktop, select Start tt Settings tt Control Panel tt System tt Device
Manager.
12. From the Device Manager box, select Ports (COM & LPT).
13. Remove each communications port labeled Modemshare (COM3-COM9).
14. Select Start tt Shut Down tt Restart the computer.
15. At the Microsoft Windows 95 Startup Menu, select 1. Normal.
Note: The reboot process is normally considerably longer when installing the LANtastic
server version.
16. Verify that the LANtastic icon is on the Windows 95 desktop.
17. If the LANtastic client version of the software was installed and there is another
FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation, perform steps 1 through 16 on the other
Workstation, configuring the Workstation as a server.
18. If the LANtastic server version of the software was installed and there is another
FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation, perform steps 1 through 16 on other the other
Workstation, configuring the Workstation as a client.
19. Install the MS-DOS client version of the LANtastic software as directed under the next
heading, LANtastic Client Version for MS-DOS Installation.

LANtastic Client Version for MS-DOS Installation

1. Ensure that the previous procedure, LANtastic Client/Server Version for Windows™ 95
Installation has been performed before proceeding.
2. Reboot the Workstation.
3. At the Microsoft Windows 95 Startup Menu, select 8. Previous version of MS-DOS.
4. Exit the SYSTEM II software by pressing Ê and y.
5. Type cd:\lantasti\install and press Û.
6. To begin the installation process, type install and press Û.
7. Accept the Serial Number and Verification Key displayed on the screen.
8. Installation selections:
a. Select DO NOT SHARE MY COMPUTER’S DRIVES/PRINTERS.
b. Do not select the option TCP/IP PROTOCOL to install the Internet gateway.
c. Select NO for:
r Modem Sharing
r Client for Novell 3.11
r Client for Novell 4.0
r Client for Microsoft Networks.
d. At Network Adapter, select NDIS SUPPORT for NON-ARTISOFT ADAPTER.
e. At Network Interface Card drivers, type c:\ethernet.
f. At Set Up Permanent Connections, select NO.
9. Allow the installation program to edit the config.sys and autoexec.bat files.
10. Exit to MS-DOS.

3.19-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 7.0 3
11. Change to the c:\lantasti directory, type edit startnet.bat
12. After the line [email protected], enter the server computer name (name
entered in step 7a under heading LANtastic Client/Server Version for Windows™ 95
Installation). The new line should read:
net use w:\\lantastic_server_name_goes_here\c-drive
13. Exit saving changes to the startnet.bat file.
14. Edit the config.sys file from the c:\ prompt using the MS-DOS Edit program:
a. Ensure that in the files=xx statement, xx ≥ 50.
b. Ensure that the statement lastdrive=z is present.
15. Install both client and server versions of the Sybase® SQL Anywhere™ PC database
server software as directed under Heading 3.21, Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL
SOFTWARE OPTION.
16. Connect the BNC T-connectors from the kits onto the NIC on each Workstation.
17. Connect the BNCs from each T-connector, serially connecting as many Workstations as
will be on the network.
18. Place a terminator on the BNC T-connector at each end of the network (2 terminators
must be installed).
19. Reboot the Workstation to allow the LANtastic drivers to take effect.
20. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, highlight 1. Normal and press Û.
21. Wait for the Windows desktop to appear.

Sybase Client/Server SQL Software Option

If the customer has the Sybase Client/Server SQL software, go to Heading 3.21 and complete
this installation as written.

PN 4237029G 3.19-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 7.0

3.19-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 6.0 3
3.20 LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 6.0
Purpose
These procedures allow you to reinstall LANtastic Client/Server software V6.0.

Tools/Supplies Needed
ATTENTION: Needed software must be obtained from the customer. If it is not available, the
current version (Version 8.0) must be ordered and installed. See Heading 8.1, PART
LOCATOR TOOLS for the appropriate part number and Heading B.4 for the operating system
minimum requirements for version 8.0.

B Obtain from the customer LANtastic® Client/Server software V6.0 and 7.0, single-user
license or LANtastic® Client/Server software V6.0 and 7.0, 2 to 10 user license, as
applicable

Installation
1. Insert the LANtastic Client/Server software diskette 1 of 4 in the floppy diskette drive.
2. At the b: prompt, type INSTALL and press Û.
3. The LANtastic software installation program checks the Computer Workstation to
ensure that Windows is present. If Windows is not present it loads the MS-DOS version.
Carefully read each screen as it comes up before pressing Û.
Note: When setting up the instrument, use only Client/Server software floppy diskettes 1
and 2.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions and enter the following information for each
question/option:
a. For the computer’s name, either type the Cytometer’s serial number or other name
(check with the customer).
b. Accept the default directory for software installation (c:\lantasti).
c. If installing a client version, select DO NOT SHARE MY COMPUTER’S DRIVES/PRINTERS.
d. If installing a server version, select SHARE MY COMPUTER’S DRIVES/PRINTERS.
e. Do not select any resources when prompted to select additional resources.
5. Ensure that all information is correct before selecting OK to continue with the
installation. If information is incorrect, select GO back (to step 4) and re-enter the
information,
6. Select NDIS SUPPORT FOR NETWORK ADAPTERS and press Û.
7. Insert the 3COM device driver floppy diskette that came with the NIC and press Û.
8. Remove the 3COM floppy diskette and reinsert the LANtastic Client/Server software
floppy diskette 1 of 4 back into the floppy diskette drive when prompted to do so.
9. Select DO NOT set up any drive or Printer connections at this time and press Û.

PN 4237029G 3.20-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 6.0

10. Ensure all network information is correct before continuing. Press Û.

Note: This is the last time you can go back and change information without having to
reload the LANtastic Client/Server software.
11. The LANtastic Client/Server software makes the required changes to the config.sys and
autoexec.bat files. The old config.sys and autoexec.bat files are renamed and saved if
you encounter problems.
12. Follow the instructions on the screen for installing the remainder of the LANtastic
Client/Server software.
Note: The software takes about 10 minutes to install.
13. The LANtastic software reboots the computer but does not place the LANtastic call in
the correct place in the autoexec.bat file. After the SYSTEM II software boots, press Ê
and exit to MS-DOS.

Config.sys and startnet.bat File Editing

If you are familiar with the MS-DOS line editor, you can use it to edit these files. If not, use
the LED editor provided with the LANtastic software and follow the steps below. LED is a line
editor written by Artisoft to allow for quick editing of frequently used files. Examples of all
the setup files are shown in Appendix D, EXAMPLES OF SETUP FILES.

1. At the MS-DOS prompt, type LED and press Û. At the Technical Support message
press Û. The program defaults to the c: drive and displays the default files in the files
box menu.
2. Using æ and ç, highlight config.sys and press Û.
3. View the contents of the config.sys file and look for a FILES statement. This should be set
to a minimum of 50. If lower, place the cursor on the FILES line and press Û.
4. Change FILES to equal 50, and press Û, then press Ê to save.
5. Add a new line to the config.sys file that states Lastdrive=z, press Ê to save.
6. Press È to exit out of the LED editor.

LANtastic File Server Software Connection

1. Connect the BNC coaxial cable to the T-connector.
2. A terminating resistor is required to be connected to the ends of the last node on the
network. Example: If only one Cytometer is to be connected to the Workstation file
server, the Cytometer and the Workstation file server must be terminated.
3. At the Workstation file server, exit to MS-DOS.
4. Change directory to be in the LANTASTI directory.
5. At the MS-DOS prompt, type LED.
6. Press Û at the Technical Support message.
7. Highlight the STARTNET.BAT file and press Û.
8. Scroll down to place the cursor under the REDIR statement.

3.20-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 6.0 3
9. Press Û and note that the line has changed colors and type:
NET USE <drive>:\\<server name>\DRIVE LETTER, and press Û.
EXAMPLE: NET USE F: \\NETWORK\D-DRIVE
This command tells the Computer Workstation to connect to the file server network’s
D-drive as the Computer Workstation’s F-drive.
10. Press Ê to save, then press È to exit.
11. At the MS-DOS prompt, type LANCHECK and press Û. A LANtastic program runs that
tests the cable and the NIC and checks who else is on the network also running
LANCHECK.
12. At the Computer Workstation file server, type LANCHECK and press Û. The same
screen that appeared in the previous step should appear and two nodes should appear.
The Computer Workstation should also show the addition of a file server. If not, refer to
the Troubleshooting section of the OEM-supplied manual.
13. If LANCHECK sees both or all nodes on the network that are running LANCHECK,
press È to get back to MS-DOS.
Note: LANCHECK only sees other nodes on the wire that are also running LANCHECK
simultaneously.
14. Edit the autoexec.bat file and move:
CALL C:\LANTASTI\STARTNET.BAT
insert it after the C: and before CD\XL call.
15. Save the file.
16. Reboot the instrument into SYSTEM II software.
17. Configure the SYSTEM II software for network support:
a. Select the Acquisition tool bar and select Utilities.
b. Locate the Network Node ID box and set the Node ID to assign a unique node for the
instrument. The node ID can be between 1 and 9 or A through Z. This node ID will
be added to the first digit in the run number. If multiple instruments are installed,
ensure that no node ID is duplicated to avoid file over-writing on the network file
server.
c. Exit to MS-DOS and at the XL prompt, type EDIT XL_GRAPH.CNG and press
Û.
d. Move to the last line (rem n=NETSHOW) and remove the rem statement.
Note: When this command is active, the monitor displays all the network drives the
instrument has access to when in the Change Directory area of the SYSTEM II
software.
18. Save the file and exit.
19. Type XL2 and press Û.

Sybase Client/Server SQL Software Option

If the customer has the Sybase Client/Server SQL software, go to Heading 3.21 and complete
this installation as written.

PN 4237029G 3.20-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 6.0

3.20-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL SOFTWARE OPTION 3
3.21 Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL SOFTWARE OPTION
Purpose
This procedure provides instructions for installing Sybase Client/Server SQL software for use
in conjunction with LANtastic Client/Server software. Install LANtastic software before
preforming this procedure.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Sybase® SQL Anywhere™ PC database server software, 4-user license, PN 6417323

Preparation
1. Make sure the LANtastic Client/Server software is installed before installing the Sybase
Client/Server SQL software. If you have not already done so, install the LANtastic
Client/Server software that correlates with the version needed:
r Heading 3.18, LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 8.0
r Heading 3.19, LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 7.0
r Heading 3.20, LANtastic® CLIENT/SERVER SOFTWARE OPTION, VERSION 6.0
2. Verify compliance with the system requirements stated under Heading B.5, Sybase® SQL
ANYWHERE™ MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS.

Software Installation, Client Setup

ATTENTION: If you used the CD-ROM drive for installing the LANtastic software, you must use
the CD-ROM drive to install the Sybase Client/Server SQL software.
1. Insert the Sybase CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
2. At the C:\ prompt, type D:\ and press Û. If this is a FlowCentre desktop computer,
type E:\
3. At the D:\ (or E:\) prompt, type setup.
4. Enter the registration number when requested. The registration number is the 12-digit
code printed on the registration card.
5. Select install client version of the software but do not select to install any options.
6. Select the default directory.
7. When prompted to modify the autoexec.bat file and the config.sys file, select No.
8. Select Let you make the modifications later. We have already modified both files for our
needs. The software will default back to the install section. Select cancel at that time.
9. Re-boot the computer and return to DOS.
10. At the C:\ prompt, type CD\XL and then XL2.
11. Access the Utilities screen and select Show Database Errors to engage the XL database
engine.
12. Save the changes.
13. Exit the XL software.
14. Type C:\ and press Û to display the C:\ prompt.

PN 4237029G 3.21-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL SOFTWARE OPTION

15. Type editßconfig.sys

16. Type REM in front of the CD-ROM drive statement line.
17. Save the changes.
18. Type editßautoexec.batßfile
19. Remove the REM statement you placed in the CD\XL and XL2 lines.
20. Remove the REM statement in front of the Call Lantasti statement.
21. If you added the REM statement in front of the mouse line, remove that REM too.
22. Re-boot the computer and select DOS at the menu to go into XL software. You will still
receive errors from the database and server not found errors until the server installation
procedure is complete.
ATTENTION: This concludes the Sybase installation process for the Client. You will receive
errors at boot up until this procedure is completed.

Software Installation, Server Setup

1. Install the Sybase CD into the CD-ROM drive. It should start automatically.
2. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Use the following information to answer
the software installation questions when they appear.
r Ensure that Install Server for Windows and Share Drives and Printers are selected.
r Accept the default directories for installing the software.
r Click on Install Anywhere Options and un-check all except for the help files.
3. When requested, allow the software to make the changes to the autoexec.bat and the
config.sys files.
4. When the software ID disk is requested, insert the 3.5 in. floppy diskette into the A:
drive.
5. When the software install is complete, it will default back to the install section. Click on
cancel at this time.
6. Re-boot the computer to allow the software to finish the install.
7. At the Windows desktop,
a. Right click the mouse in a blank section of the screen.
b. Click on New tt Shortcut tt Browse.
c. Locate the icon dbsrv50 in the C:\sqlany50\win32 directory and double click.
8. Find the new icon on the desktop and right click on the new icon.
a. Click on Properties tt Shortcut tt find Target.
b. Add the following after the statement C:\sqlany50\win32\dbsrv50.exe:
-c_500k_-x_netDG_-n_XL2.DB_c:\sqlany50\XL2.DB
c. Click Apply and then Close.
9. Open Windows Explorer and go to the XL directory.
10. At the XL directory:
a. Go to the sub directory DBF.
b. Right mouse click on the XL2.DB and copy it to the directory C:\SQLANY50.

3.21-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL SOFTWARE OPTION 3
11. Close Windows Explorer.
12. Double click on the Sybase icon to start the database.
13. Ensure the database starts and is in the Ready state.
14. Re-boot the Client computer and ensure no errors appear when booting up.

Software and Hardware Validation

1. Boot the Server computer into Windows. Allow it to finish booting up.
2. Double click on the LANtastic icon to engage the Lantastic software.
3. Double click on the Sybase icon to engage the database. You will see that the database
opens a box that states the database is NOW ACCEPTING REQUESTS.
4. Boot up the Client computer and select SYSTEM II as the operating system. Make sure
the Starting Database dialog box appears during the SYSTEM II boot-up.
a. Simultaneously press Ý Þ á to reboot the computer.
b. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, 8. Previous version of MS-DOS is
already highlighted. Wait or press Û to accelerate the process.
c. Verify the Starting Database dialog box appears during the SYSTEM II boot-up.

PN 4237029G 3.21-3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
Sybase® CLIENT/SERVER SQL SOFTWARE OPTION

3.21-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
EXPO32™ SOFTWARE OPTIONS 3
3.22 EXPO32™ SOFTWARE OPTIONS
Purpose
EXPO32 is a Windows based software package that contains enhancements that make
acquisition and data management easier. This software is distributed via CD-ROM and
requires Windows 98 Second Edition. The appropriate service ROMLock is also required.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B EXPO32™ ADC Cytometer software (including ROMLock), PN 6418337
Note: This software allows the analysis of acquired Listmode data in FCS format
including Advanced Digital Compensation (ADC). The hardware included in this
package allows for identification of the Cytometer upgraded to the ADC capability.

Preparation

For EXPO32 ADC Installation Option

If the EXPO32 ADC software option was purchased by the customer, place the ROMLock on
the parallel port on the rear of the computer tower.

Note: If a ZIP drive is being installed, install the ZIP drive first then connect the ZIP drive
cable to the parallel port and install the ROMLock on the parallel pass-through connector on
the ZIP drive.

For Printer Installation

If the customer purchased a printer, connect the parallel printer cable to the parallel port on
the rear of the computer tower.

Note: If a ZIP drive is being installed, install the ZIP drive first then connect the printer cable
to the pass-through connector on the ZIP drive.

Software Installation
1. Simultaneously press Ý Þ á to reboot the computer.
2. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, highlight 1. Normal and press Û.
3. Wait for the Windows Desktop to appear.
4. Place the software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive. The program automatically starts.
5. Follow the instructions on the Workstation screen.
6. When the installation is complete, drag the appropriate EXPO software icon to the
Windows desktop screen.

Verification
1. Double click on the EXPO software icon to verify that the EXPO software initializes
within Windows 98.
2. When the Startup box appears, select Admin tt Next>.
3. Select a protocol or click on the Finish button.
4. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.

PN 4237029G 3.22-1
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
EXPO32™ SOFTWARE OPTIONS

5. At the Workstation, verify the message Startup in process appears on the status line
(lower display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (Startup in process → Verification →
Run Initialization → Awaiting Sample appear as the instrument goes through various
checks. Error messages appear to the right, if applicable.
6. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
Note: The Cytometer can take up to 30 minutes to warm up before the READY indicator
turns green.

3.22-2 PN 4237029G
 4SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES 4
4.1 GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT
General Guidelines

Safety Precautions
r Review and heed the general safety warnings and cautions listed under Heading 1.2,
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
r Make sure all covers are reinstalled to ensure proper operation of interlocks when you
leave the account.

Accessibility
Ensure there is adequate space to work and to access the instrument components safely.

Laser Precautions

WARNING Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING The laser beam can cause eye damage if viewed either directly or indirectly from reflective
surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metal surface). Avoid direct exposure to beam. Do not view directly or
with optical instruments except for special service instruments as directed in service manual.

Before servicing the Cytometer with the filter shield removed, make sure you are thoroughly
familiar with all the laser safety information provided under Heading 1.2, SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS.

Electronic Precautions

WARNING Risk of personal injury or damage to electronic components. While performing service or
maintenance on the instrument, rings and other metal jewelry could contact exposed electronic
components, causing personal injury from electric shock, or become caught in the instrument, damaging
the components. Remove rings and other metal jewelry before doing service or maintenance on the
instrument.

CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components.

r If you remove or replace a printed circuit card or electronic component while the power is ON, the
component may be damaged. To prevent damage to delicate electronic components, turn OFF the
power before removing or replacing printed circuit cards and/or components.
r Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in circuit cards, and other electronic
components. If there is a possibility of ESD damage with a procedure, then perform that procedure at
an ESD workstation, or wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to a metal part of the chassis connected
to an earth ground.

Before disconnecting or reconnecting any electronic component, turn the instrument off and
disconnect the power cord. Based on the customer’s software preference, refer to the Power
Down / Power Up Using SYSTEM II™ Software heading or the Power Down / Power Up
Using EXPO32™ ADC Software heading in this section.

PN 4237029G 4.1-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when a safety interlock
switch is defeated, as you may be exposed to electric shock. After servicing the instrument, make sure
covers are properly reinstalled to reactivate any safety interlock switch that was bypassed while servicing
the instrument.

r Safety Interlocks in the Cytometer

To protect the operator from personal injury, all flow cytometers are equipped with at
least one safety interlock switch. If the flow cytometer has the MCL option installed,
there are two safety interlock switches. Be very careful if you bypass any safety interlock
and operate the Cytometer with the associated cover off. After servicing the instrument,
always make sure all covers are properly reinstalled to reactivate any safety interlock
switches that were bypassed during the service call.
t Laser interlock switch
Located inside the Cytometer, this safety interlock ensures the Cytometer top cover
is in place when the Argon laser is on. If the laser is on and the top cover is
removed, this interlock turns off the power to the Argon laser head. To override
(bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch up and power is restored to the Argon
laser head even though the cover is removed. To see the physical location of this
interlock, refer to Figure A.5-2.
t MCL interlock switch
Located in the MCL base of an XL-MCL flow cytometer, this safety interlock ensures
the MCL door is closed during operation. If the door is open, an MCL Door Open
error or MCL Door Open Warning message appears on the Workstation screen.
Operation is halted until the door is closed. To override (bypass) this safety
interlock, pull the switch up and operation resumes even though the door is open.
To see the physical location of this interlock, refer to Figure A.5-13.
r Safety Interlock in the Power Supply Module
To protect the operator from personal injury, the Power Supply module is equipped with
an interlock bypass switch. Attached to the upper right frame of the Power Supply
module, this safety interlock ensures the main cover is in place during operation. If the
Power Supply module is ON (meaning the two ac power cords are installed in a wall
outlet and the SYSTEM ON/OFF rocker switch is in the ON position) and the main cover
is removed, this interlock turns off the power to the Power Supply module and the
Cytometer.
To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch up and power is restored to the
Power Supply module and the Cytometer even though the main cover is removed. Be
very careful if you bypass this safety interlock. After servicing the instrument, always
make sure the main cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock switch.
To see the physical location of this interlock:
t In the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, refer to Figure A.6-4.
t In the Universal Power Supply, refer to Figure A.7-5.

4.1-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT 4
Procedures

WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself before servicing
the instrument with the doors open, you may be injured or contaminated. To prevent possible injury or
biological contamination, you must wear gloves, a lab coat, and eye protection when servicing the
instrument with the doors open and/or when working with pathogenic materials.

Adjustment, alignment, replacement, and calibration procedures that need to be done on the
XL or XL-MCL are in this section. Read each procedure entirely before beginning the service
or repair.

The following service considerations apply to all XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers:
r All covers can be removed without affecting unit operation, as long as the interlock is
disabled.
r A fiber optic cable is used to interface the Cytometer to the Workstation.
r Power is supplied to the Cytometer via an interconnect power harness from the Power
Supply module.
r In addition to the above considerations, the following service considerations apply only
to XL-MCL flow cytometers:
t The MCL door switch must be defeated before you run the MCL TERMINAL
program.
t When removing covers, the MCL option must be unlatched before the left-side
cover can be removed.

Tools and Supplies

You can do most procedures using the standard Beckman Coulter Service Tool Kit and test
equipment (oscilloscope, DVM, and an external digital pressure gauge). Any special tools,
supplies, or equipment required are identified under the Tools/Supplies Needed heading at
the beginning of the procedure.

Instrument Performance Verification

r When a service or repair procedure requires some type of instrument performance
verification upon completion, a Verification heading is provided with the necessary steps
that must be completed.
r When you have finished servicing the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, always verify total
instrument performance by doing the System Verification Procedure (SVP) as directed
under Heading 5.1.

PN 4237029G 4.1-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT

Power Down / Power Up Using SYSTEM II™ Software

ATTENTION: If the preferred operating system for the instrument you are servicing is EXPO 32
ADC, see the Power Down / Power Up Using EXPO32™ ADC Software heading that follows.
Powering down an XL or XL-MCL system occurs in three stages. In this process, power to the
Cytometer is always turned off first, before turning off power to the Workstation. For most
procedures, turning off the Cytometer or turning off the Cytometer and Workstation is
sufficient. Performing procedures where personal contact with electronic components is
probable requires a complete power down.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the instrument is
attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down completely before removing
covers to access electronic components.

Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software

r To power off only the Cytometer, do Stage 1 only.
r To power off the Cytometer and Workstation, do Stage 1 then 2 only.
r To perform a system power down, do all three stages in order. Doing all three stages of
the Power Down procedure ensures all power is removed from the instrument,
preventing personal injury from electronic shock.

Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)

At the Workstation:
1. Press Ê. The message EXIT TO DOS? y/n should appear.
Note: If the message does not appear, access the Menu bar. At the Menu bar, select
Applications tt Exit and the EXIT TO DOS? y/n message should appear.
2. Type Y.
3. When the C:\XL> prompt, type XLOFF and press Û to turn off only the Cytometer.

Stage 2: Power Off the Workstation (system using SYSTEM II software)

At the Workstation computer, press and hold the power ON/OFF switch until the computer
shuts off.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. When servicing components located inside the Power Supply module, a
Stage 3: System Power Down must always be performed before removing any cover.

Stage 3: System Power Down (system using SYSTEM II software)

Unplug both ac power line cords from the wall outlet. To locate the SYSTEM POWER cables,
refer to Figure A.6-5 as needed.

4.1-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT 4
Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software
r To restore power to only the Cytometer, go to the Restoring Power to the Cytometer
Only (system using SYSTEM II software) heading.
r To restore power to the Workstation (which also turns on the Cytometer automatically),
go to Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using SYSTEM II software)
and complete as instructed.
r To restore system power, go to Stage 1: Restoring Power to the System (system using
SYSTEM II software) and complete as instructed then go to Stage 2.

Stage 1: Restoring Power to the System (system using SYSTEM II software)

If unplugged earlier, plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.

Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using SYSTEM II software)

Note: Once the software is loaded, it automatically turns on the Cytometer.
If the Workstation computer was powered off earlier:
1. Firmly press the power ON/OFF switch until the computer turns on. The operating
system automatically boots.
2. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, 8. Previous version of MS-DOS is
already highlighted. Wait or press Û to accelerate the process.
3. After the SYSTEM II™ software screen appears, the following messages are displayed:
a. Rebuilding protocol directory
b. Resetting cytometer
c. Loading cytom. hardware
Note: Once the software is loaded, it turns on the Cytometer. This process should take
less than 30 seconds.
4. If the Operator ID box appears, type in an operator number and press Û. The
Acquisition Run screen appears.
Note: If the Listmode Analysis screen appears and the Cytometer does not turn on,
check for a communication problem.
5. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.
Note: If the Cytometer turns on and then turns off immediately, check the alarm. (At the
Menu bar, select Applications tt Utilities. At the Utilities Configuration screen, inside the
START UP box, make sure the Cytometer is set up for current operation.)
6. At the Acquisition Run screen, verify the message STARTUP IN PROCESS appears (lower
right display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (STARTUP IN PROCESS →
SYSTEM VERIFICATION → RUN INITIALIZATION → PLEASE WAIT. . PROCESSING →
INSERT SAMPLE TUBE appear as the instrument goes through various checks. INSERT
SAMPLE TUBE only appears if a startup protocol or panel is either selected or previously
specified on the Utilities Configuration screen. Error messages appear in red below this
message line.
7. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green within
30 minutes (maximum warm up time before the READY indicator turns green).

PN 4237029G 4.1-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT

Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using SYSTEM II software)

1. At the C:\XL> prompt, type XL2 and press Û.
If another prompt, such as C:\PREFINAL>, is displayed:
1) Type CD\XL then press Û.
2) At the C:\XL> prompt, type XL2 and press Û.
2. After the SYSTEM II™ software screen appears, the following messages are displayed:
a. Rebuilding protocol directory
b. Resetting cytometer
c. Loading cytom. hardware
Note: Once the software is loaded, it turns on the Cytometer. This process should take
less than 30 seconds.
3. If the Operator ID box appears, type in an operator number and press Û. The
Acquisition Run screen appears.
Note: If the Listmode Analysis screen appears and the Cytometer does not turn on,
check for a communication problem.
4. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.
Note: If the Cytometer turns on and then turns off immediately, check the alarm. (At the
Menu bar, select Applications tt Utilities. At the Utilities Configuration screen, inside the
START UP box, make sure the Cytometer is set up for current operation.)
5. At the Acquisition Run screen, verify the message STARTUP IN PROCESS appears (lower
right display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (STARTUP IN PROCESS →
SYSTEM VERIFICATION → RUN INITIALIZATION → PLEASE WAIT. . PROCESSING →
INSERT SAMPLE TUBE appear as the instrument goes through various checks. INSERT
SAMPLE TUBE only appears if a startup protocol or panel is either selected or previously
specified on the Utilities Configuration screen. Error messages appear in red below this
message line.
6. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green within
30 minutes (maximum warm up time before the READY indicator turns green).

4.1-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT 4
Power Down / Power Up Using EXPO32™ ADC Software
ATTENTION: If the preferred operating system for the instrument you are servicing is
SYSTEM II, see the Power Down / Power Up Using SYSTEM II™ Software heading.
Powering down an XL or XL-MCL system occurs in three stages. In this process, power to the
Cytometer is always turned off first, before turning off power to the Workstation. For most
procedures, turning off the Cytometer or turning off the Cytometer and Workstation is
sufficient. Performing procedures where personal contact with electronic components is
probable requires a complete power down.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Contacting exposed electronic components while the instrument is
attached to power can cause personal injury from electric shock. Power down completely before removing
covers to access electronic components.

Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software

r To power off only the Cytometer, do Stage 1 only.
r To power off the Cytometer and Workstation, do Stage 1 then 2 only.
r To perform a system power down, do all three stages in order. Doing all three stages of
the Power Down procedure ensures all power is removed from the instrument,
preventing personal injury from electronic shock.

Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
At the Workstation:
1. Close the EXPO32 ADC software to return to the Windows Desktop.
2. When the message Before continuing, do you want to save the current protocol? appears,
select Yes or No, as applicable.
3. Double click on the XL Off icon to power off the Cytometer.

Stage 2: Power Off the Workstation (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
1. In the lower left corner, click on the Start button then select Shut Down...
2. At the Shut Down Windows box, select Shutdown tt OK.
3. Wait for the It’s now safe to turn off your computer message to appear.
4. At the Workstation computer, press and hold the power ON/OFF switch until the
computer shuts off.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. When servicing components located inside the Power Supply module, a
Stage 3: System Power Down must always be performed before removing any cover.

Stage 3: System Power Down (system using EXPO32 ADC software)

Unplug both ac power line cords from the wall outlet. To locate the SYSTEM POWER cables,
refer to Figure A.6-5 as needed.

PN 4237029G 4.1-7
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
GUIDELINES FOR SERVICING THE INSTRUMENT

Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software

r To restore power to only the Cytometer, go to the Restoring Power to the Cytometer
Only (system using EXPO32 ADC software) heading.
r To restore power to the Workstation (which also turns on the Cytometer automatically),
go to Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using EXPO32 ADC
software) and complete as instructed.
r To restore system power, go to Stage 1: Restoring Power to the System (system using
EXPO32 ADC software) and complete as instructed then go to Stage 2.

Stage 1: Restoring Power to the System (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
If unplugged earlier, plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.

Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
If the Workstation computer was powered off earlier:
1. Firmly press the power ON/OFF switch until the computer turns on. The operating
system automatically boots.
2. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, highlight 1. Normal and press Û.
3. When the Windows Desktop appears, double click on the EXPO32ADC XL 4 Color icon
(EXPO32ADC XL 3 Color icon if this is a 3 color system).
4. When the Startup box appears, select Admin tt Next>.
5. Select a protocol or click on the Finish button.
6. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.
7. At the Workstation, verify the message Startup in process appears on the status line
(lower display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (Startup in process → Verification →
Run Initialization → Awaiting Sample appear as the instrument goes through various
checks. Error messages appear to the right, if applicable.
8. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green within
30 minutes (maximum warm up time before the READY indicator turns green).

Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
1. At the Windows Desktop, double click on the EXPO32ADC XL 4 Color icon (EXPO32ADC
XL 3 Color icon if this is a 3 color system).
2. When the Startup box appears, select Admin tt Next>.
3. Select a protocol or click on the Finish button.
4. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.
5. At the Workstation, verify the message Startup in process appears on the status line
(lower display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (Startup in process → Verification →
Run Initialization → Awaiting Sample appear as the instrument goes through various
checks. Error messages appear to the right, if applicable.
6. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green within
30 minutes (maximum warm up time before the READY indicator turns green).

4.1-8 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION 4
4.2 PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
Purpose
Use this procedure to install and operate the Prefinal Service software. This software is not
intended to be a Pass/Fail for system performance. The SVP must be run after using the
Prefinal Service software.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B COULTER® EPICS® XL/XL-MCL Prefinal Software diskette, PN 7231244

Preparation
Instructions are provided for SYSTEM II and EXPO32 ADC software. Go to the If Using
SYSTEM II™ Software heading or the If Using EXPO32™ ADC Software heading, as
applicable.

If Using SYSTEM II™ Software

1. Make sure the Workstation computer is turned on.
If the Workstation computer is off, power on the Workstation computer and Cytometer,
refer to Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Press Ê. The message EXIT TO DOS? y/n should appear.
Note: If the message does not appear, access the Menu bar. At the Menu bar, select
Applications tt Exit and the EXIT TO DOS? y/n message should appear.
3. Type Y.
4. At the C:\XL> prompt, type XLOFF and press Û to turn off only the Cytometer.
5. At the C:\XL> prompt, type CD ß\ then press Û.
6. At the C:\> prompt, type DIR and press Û.
7. Look for the Prefinal directory.
r If the Prefinal directory is not listed, go to the Installation heading.
r If the Prefinal directory is already installed,
1) At the C:\> prompt, type CD ßPREFINAL then press Û.
2) When the C:\PREFINAL> prompt appears, type PREFINAL then press Û.
Note: A warning box with the message This software can NOT be used for final
system verification. This software to be used for system diagnostics ONLY. Final
Test Procedure or Service V.I.P. must be used to verify final system performance.
overlays the Prefinal Test screen. This warning box disappears automatically in
15 seconds. If you do not wish to wait, press È, Ø, or Û to close the
box.
3) Go to the Operation heading.

PN 4237029G 4.2-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

If Using EXPO32™ ADC Software

1. Make sure the Workstation computer is turned on.
If the Workstation computer is off, power on the Workstation computer and Cytometer,
refer to Stage 2: Restoring Power to the Workstation (system using EXPO32 ADC
software) under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Close the EXPO32 ADC software (click on the X in the upper right corner).
3. When the message Before continuing, do you want to save the current protocol? appears,
select Yes or No, as applicable.
4. At the Windows Desktop, double click on the XL Off icon to power off the Cytometer.
5. Select Windows Start button tt Programs tt MS-DOS Prompt.
6. At the C:\Windows> prompt, type CD ß\ then press Û.
7. At the C:\> prompt, type DIR and press Û.
8. Look for the Prefinal directory.
r If the Prefinal directory is not listed, go to the Installation heading.
r If the Prefinal directory is already installed,
1) At the C:\> prompt, type CD ßPREFINAL then press Û.
2) When the C:\PREFINAL> prompt appears, type PREFINAL then press Û.
Note: A warning box with the message This software can NOT be used for final
system verification. This software to be used for system diagnostics ONLY. Final
Test Procedure or Service V.I.P. must be used to verify final system performance.
overlays the Prefinal Test screen. This warning box disappears automatically in
15 seconds. If you do not wish to wait, press È, Ø, or Û to close the
box.
3) Go to the Operation heading.

Installation
1. At the C:\> prompt, type MD ßPREFINAL then press Û.
2. At the C:\> prompt, type CD ßPREFINAL then press Û.
3. When the C:\PREFINAL> prompt appears, insert the Prefinal Software diskette into the
3.5 in. floppy diskette drive on the Workstation computer.
4. At the C:\PREFINAL> prompt, type COPY ßA:*.* then press Û.
5. Wait while all the files are copied into the PREFINAL subdirectory.
6. When the C:\PREFINAL> prompt reappears, type PREFINAL then press Û.
Note: A warning box with the message This software can NOT be used for final system
verification. This software to be used for system diagnostics ONLY. Final Test Procedure or
Service V.I.P. must be used to verify final system performance. overlays the Prefinal Test
screen. This warning box disappears automatically in 15 seconds. If you do not wish to
wait, press È, Ø, or Û to close the box.
7. Remove the Prefinal Software diskette from the drive.

4.2-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION 4
Operation
1. At the Prefinal Test menu, use æ and ç to scroll through the menu to the desired
option or test. Press Û to access the desired option or test.
r Table A.4-1 briefly describes the tests available from the Prefinal Test menu.
r See Heading 7.2 for a detailed description of each test.
r A Help screen is provided for each test. To access the Help screen for a specific test,
select the test then press Ì.
r On an XL-MCL flow cytometer, the MCL door switch must be defeated before you
run the MCL TERMINAL program. Place a wire jumper between pins 3 and 4 on the
door interlock connector to defeat the door switch.
r Keyboard command codes are shown in Table A.4-2 for all tests requiring manual
control of the MCL option.
2. When all testing is complete, see the bottom of the screen for appropriate exit
instructions.

Wrap Up
Instructions are provided for SYSTEM II and EXPO32 ADC software. Go to the If SYSTEM II
is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System heading or the If EXPO32 ADC is the
Customer’s Preferred Operating System heading, as applicable.

If SYSTEM II is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System

1. If you have not already done so, remove the Prefinal Software diskette from the drive.
2. At the C:\PREFINAL> prompt, type CD ß\XL then press Û.
3. At the C:\XL> prompt, type XL2 then press Û.
4. After the SYSTEM II™ software screen appears, the following messages are displayed:
a. Rebuilding protocol directory
b. Resetting cytometer
c. Loading cytom. hardware
Note: Once the software is loaded, it turns on the Cytometer. This process should
take less than 30 seconds.
5. If the Operator ID box appears, type in an operator number and press Û. The
Acquisition Run screen appears.
Note: If the Listmode Analysis screen appears and the Cytometer does not turn on,
check for a communication problem.
6. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.
7. At the Acquisition Run screen, verify the message STARTUP IN PROCESS appears (lower
right display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (STARTUP IN PROCESS →
SYSTEM VERIFICATION → RUN INITIALIZATION → PLEASE WAIT. . PROCESSING →
INSERT SAMPLE TUBE appear as the instrument goes through various checks. INSERT
SAMPLE TUBE only appears if a startup protocol or panel is either selected or previously
specified on the Utilities Configuration screen. Error messages appear in red below this
message line.

PN 4237029G 4.2-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION

8. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.

9. Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP)

If EXPO32 ADC is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System

1. If you have not already done so, remove the Prefinal Software diskette from the drive.
2. At the keyboard, type Exit then press Û to close the MS-DOS Prompt box.
3. When the Windows Desktop appears, double click on the EXPO32ADC XL 4 Color icon
(EXPO32ADC XL 3 Color icon if this is a 3 color system).
4. When the Startup box appears, select Admin tt Next>.
5. Select a protocol or click on the Finish button.
6. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.
7. At the Workstation, verify the message Startup in process appears on the status line
(lower display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (Startup in process → Verification →
Run Initialization → Awaiting Sample appear as the instrument goes through various
checks. Error messages appear to the right, if applicable.
8. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
9. Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

4.2-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply) 4
4.3 ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
(on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
Purpose
Replace the Argon laser head and/or Argon laser power supply if the instrument generates:
r High CVs
r Laser Current Error or Laser Current Warning message
r Laser Power Error or Laser Power Warning message

Tools/Supplied Needed
B 5/32 in., T-handle, Allen wrench
B Argon air-cooled laser head, PN 7000358
B Argon air-cooled laser switching power supply, as applicable
r for 100 Vac Voltage-Specific Power Supply, PN 7000431
r for 120 Vac Voltage-Specific Power Supply, PN 7000721
r for 220 or 240 Vac Voltage-Specific Power Supply, PN 7000432

Preparation
1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. Remove the three-sided cover from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply and set it aside.
Refer to Procedure 19 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3. At the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply:
a. Remove the three Phillips-head screws securing the upper rear cover (vent plate) to
the Power Supply module frame. One screw is located at the top (in the middle) and
the other two screws are at the bottom of the cover.
b. Remove the upper rear cover (vent plate) and set it aside.
c. Locate the small cover in the center (left of the circuit breaker labeled MCL 24 VOLTS.
This cover anchors the laser umbilical cord to the back of the Power Supply module.
d. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the small cover. One screw has a hex
nut to ground the cable.
e. Remove the small cover and set it aside.
4. At the Argon laser power supply:
a. Loosen the two screws that secure the white connector in the rectangular socket
then disconnect the white connector.
b. Unscrew the black circular connector from the laser power supply.

PN 4237029G 4.3-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

5. How to proceed:
r If you are replacing the Argon laser power supply only, go to the Laser Power Supply
heading.
r If you are replacing the Argon laser head only, go to the Argon Laser Head heading.
r If you are replacing both the laser head and the laser power supply, go to the Laser
Power Supply heading first.

Laser Power Supply

Removal
1. At the Argon laser power supply, disconnect the ac power plug.
2. Remove the four Phillips-head mounting screws securing the Argon laser power supply
to the top compartment floor.
3. Remove the mounting plate with the defective Argon laser power supply from the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
4. Move the assembly (laser power supply and mounting plate) to a work bench or tabletop
and invert the assembly so top of the laser power supply is resting on the work bench or
tabletop and the screwheads on the bottom of the mounting plate are accessible.
5. Remove the four screws securing the laser power supply to the mounting plate. Set the
screws aside.
6. Separate the mounting plate from the laser power supply. This mounting plate is needed
for the new Argon laser power supply.

Installation
1. Orient the replacement Argon laser power supply upside down on the work bench or
tabletop.
2. Install the mounting plate on the new Argon laser power supply using the four screws
removed earlier.
3. Reinstall the mounting plate with the replacement Argon laser power supply in the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
4. Secure the mounting plate to the Power Supply frame using the four Phillips-head
mounting screws removed earlier.
5. How to proceed:
r If you are also replacing the laser head, go to Argon Laser Head to continue.
r If you are only replacing the laser power supply, go to step 6 to complete the
installation.
6. At the Argon laser power supply, connect cables as follows:
a. For easier and quicker connections, at the laser power supply, remove the laser
power supply key and set it aside.
Note: If the key is in the ON position, it must be rotated counterclockwise to the
OFF position before it can be removed from the power supply.

4.3-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply) 4
b. Insert the black connector into the circular socket and lock it in place.
Note: The black connector is keyed to fit the circular socket. Make sure the
connector is properly inserted in the socket before attempting to lock it in place.
c. Insert the white connector into the rectangular socket then tighten the two screws
to lock it in place.
d. Reconnect the laser logic cable.
e. Reconnect the ac input cable.
f. If removed earlier, reinstall the laser power supply key then rotate the key clockwise
to the I position. (The power supply will not be activated until ac is applied later.)
7. Thread the locking nut through the opening.
8. Position the small cover (removed earlier) back in position and secure it using the two
Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
9. Route the strain relief collar over the cables and attach it to the locking nut. The laser
umbilical cable connectors inside the power supply should remain secure when the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply is moved.
10. Use the hex nut to secure the ground wire from the laser umbilical cable to one of the
screws securing the small cover to the rear cover.
11. Reinstall the upper rear cover (vent plate) to the back of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply and secure it using the three Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
12. Reinstall the three-sided cover on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply and secure it with
two Phillips-head screws on the bottom of each side. Refer to Procedure 19 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
13. Plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.

Wrap Up
1. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. Align the optics as directed under Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

PN 4237029G 4.3-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

Argon Laser Head

Removal
1. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 1 under
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
2. At the back of the Cytometer, remove the upper rear cover and set it aside. Refer to
Procedure 5 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3. Remove the two flat-head screws and plate securing the laser umbilical cord to the rear of
the Cytometer.
4. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
5. Lift the plenum off the laser head and move it to the right side of the Cytometer.
6. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the laser beam shield and set the laser
beam shield aside.
7. Remove the four countersunk Allen-head screws securing the laser head to the optical
bench. The long 5/32 in. Allen wrench with a T-handle is the best tool for this task.
8. Carefully remove the laser head through the top of the Cytometer while feeding the laser
umbilical cord with the laser head.

Installation in the Cytometer

1. Carefully route the replacement laser head (and attached laser umbilical cord) through
the top of the Cytometer and position the laser head on the optical bench.
2. Secure the laser head to the optical bench using four countersunk Allen-head screws.
3. Secure the laser beam shield using two Phillips-head screws.
4. Place the plenum over the laser head and put it into position.
5. Secure the laser umbilical cord to the rear of the Cytometer using two flat-head screws
and a plate.
6. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage back in the center cavity of the Cytometer. Refer to
Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
7. At the back of the Cytometer, reinstall the upper rear cover. Refer to Procedure 5 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
8. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover. Refer to Procedure 1 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.

Installation at the Voltage-Specific power Supply

At the Argon laser power supply:

1. For easier and quicker connections, at the laser power supply, remove the laser power
supply key and set it aside.
Note: If the key is in the ON position (l position), the key must be rotated
counterclockwise to the OFF position (O position) before it can be removed from the
power supply.

4.3-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply) 4
2. Make sure the locking nut is over the laser umbilical cable. If not, thread the old locking
nut over the laser umbilical cable.
3. Reconnect the large white connector and tighten the two screws that secure the white
connector in the rectangular socket.
4. Insert the black connector into the circular socket and lock it in place.
Note: The black connector is keyed to fit the circular socket. Make sure the connector is
properly inserted in the socket before attempting to lock it in place.
5. If you also replaced the laser power supply:
a. Reconnect the laser logic cable.
b. Reconnect the ac input cable.
6. If removed earlier, reinstall the laser power supply key then rotate the key clockwise to
the I position. (The power supply will not be activated until ac is applied later.)
7. Thread the locking nut through the opening.
8. Position the small cover (removed earlier) back in position and secure it using the two
Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
9. Route the strain relief collar over the cables and attach it to the locking nut. The laser
umbilical cable connectors inside the power supply should remain secure when the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply is moved.
10. Use the hex nut to secure the ground wire from the laser umbilical cable to one of the
screws securing the small cover to the rear cover.
11. Reinstall the upper rear cover (vent plate) to the back of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply and secure it using the three Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
12. Reinstall the three-sided cover on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply and secure it with
two Phillips-head screws on the bottom of each side. Refer to Procedure 19 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
13. Plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.

Wrap Up
1. Power up the system. (This includes plugging both ac power line cords back into the
wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading
2. Align the optics as directed under Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

PN 4237029G 4.3-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

4.3-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Universal Power Supply) 4
4.4 ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
(on a System with a Universal Power Supply)
Purpose
Replace the Argon laser head and/or Argon laser power supply if the instrument generates:
r High CVs
r Laser Current Error or Laser Current Warning message
r Laser Power Error or Laser Power Warning message

Tools/Supplied Needed
B 5/32 in., T-handle, Allen wrench
B Argon air-cooled laser head, PN 7000358
B Argon air-cooled laser switching power supply, PN 4004115

Preparation
1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. How to proceed:
r If you are replacing the Argon laser power supply only, go to the Laser Power Supply
heading.
r If you are replacing the Argon laser head only, go to Argon Laser Head.
r If you are replacing both the laser head and the laser power supply, go to the Laser
Power Supply heading first.

PN 4237029G 4.4-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Universal Power Supply)

Laser Power Supply

Removal
1. Remove the main cover from the Universal Power Supply. Set the main cover and
associated screws aside. Refer to Procedure 21 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
2. At the Argon laser power supply:
Note: For cable locations, refer to Figure A.7-6 as needed.
a. Disconnect the ac input cable.
b. Disconnect the laser logic cable.
c. Loosen the two screws that secure the white connector in the rectangular socket
then disconnect the white connector.
d. Unscrew the black circular connector.
3. Note how the Argon laser power supply is flush with the edge of the top compartment
frame. When replaced, the new Argon laser power supply must also be flush with the
edge of the frame.
4. Remove the two screws attaching the air dam (located on the left side of the laser power
supply) to the upper rear cover.
5. Remove the four Phillips-head mounting screws securing the Argon laser power supply
mounting plate to the top compartment floor.
6. Remove the mounting plate with the defective Argon laser power supply from the
Universal Power Supply.
7. Move the assembly (laser power supply, air dam, and mounting plate) to a work bench or
tabletop and invert the assembly so top of the laser power supply is resting on the work
bench or tabletop and the screwheads on the bottom of the mounting plate are
accessible.
8. Remove the two screws securing the air dam to the mounting plate. Set the screws aside.
9. Remove the air dam and set it aside.
10. Remove the four screws securing the laser power supply to the mounting plate. Set the
screws aside.
11. Separate the mounting plate from the laser power supply. This mounting plate is needed
for the new Argon laser power supply.

4.4-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Universal Power Supply) 4
Installation
1. Orient the replacement Argon laser power supply upside down on the work bench or
tabletop as shown in Figure 4.4-1, item 1.
2. Remove and discard the rubber feet on the new Argon laser power supply.

Figure 4.4-1 Preparing the Argon Laser Power Supply for Installation
3
Attach
air dam

Attach
2 mounting
plate

With Argon laser

power supply
upside down

7029275G

3. Position the mounting plate on the replacement laser power supply as shown in
Figure 4.4-1, item 2. Make sure the notches are oriented properly and enlarged openings
are oriented properly.
4. Install the four screws removed earlier to secure the laser power supply to the mounting
plate (Figure 4.4-1, item 2).
5. Install the air dam on the laser power supply and mounting plate as shown in
Figure 4.4-1, item 3. Use the two screws removed earlier.
6. Reinstall the mounting plate with the replacement Argon laser power supply in the
Universal Power Supply. Make sure the front of the laser power supply is flush with the
edge of the top compartment frame.
7. Secure the mounting plate using the four Phillips-head mounting screws removed earlier.
8. Reattach the air dam to the upper rear cover of the Universal Power Supply using the two
screws removed earlier.
9. How to proceed:
r If you are also replacing the laser head, go to Argon Laser Head and begin at step 4.
r If you are replacing the laser power supply only, go to step 10 to complete the
installation.

PN 4237029G 4.4-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Universal Power Supply)

10. At the Argon laser power supply:

Note: For cable locations, refer to Figure A.7-6 as needed.
a. For easier and quicker connections, at the laser power supply, remove the laser
power supply key and set it aside.
Note: If the key is in the ON position (l position), the key must be rotated
counterclockwise to the OFF position (O position) before it can be removed from
the power supply.
b. Reconnect the large white connector and tighten the two screws that secure the
white connector in the rectangular socket.
c. Insert the black connector into the circular socket and lock it in place.
Note: The black connector is keyed to fit the circular socket. Make sure the
connector is properly inserted in the socket before attempting to lock it in place.
d. Reconnect the laser logic cable.
e. Reconnect the ac input cable.
f. If removed earlier, reinstall the laser power supply key then rotate the key clockwise
to the I position. (The power supply will not be activated until ac is applied later.)
11. Reinstall the main cover, back cover, and cable cover on the Universal Power Supply.
Refer to Procedure 21 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
12. Plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.

Wrap Up
1. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. Align the optics as directed under Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

Argon Laser Head

Removal
Note: If you are also replacing the Argon laser power supply, begin at step 4.
1. Remove the cable cover and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 23 under Heading 4.25,
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. Remove the back cover and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 24 under Heading 4.25 if you
need detailed instructions.
3. At the Argon laser power supply:
Note: For cable locations, refer to Figure A.7-6 as needed.
a. Loosen the two screws that secure the white connector in the rectangular socket
then disconnect the white connector.
b. Unscrew the black circular connector.

4.4-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Universal Power Supply) 4
4. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 1 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
5. At the back of the Cytometer, remove the upper rear cover and set it aside. Refer to
Procedure 5 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
6. Remove the two flat-head screws and plate securing the laser umbilical cord to the rear of
the Cytometer.
7. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
8. Lift the plenum off the laser head and move it to the right side of the Cytometer.
9. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the laser beam shield and set the laser
beam shield aside.
10. Remove the four countersunk Allen-head screws securing the laser head to the optical
bench. The long 5/32 in. Allen wrench with a T-handle is the best tool for this task.
11. Carefully remove the laser head through the top of the Cytometer while feeding the laser
umbilical cord with the laser head.

Installation in the Cytometer

1. Carefully route the replacement laser head (and attached laser umbilical cord) through
the top of the Cytometer and position the laser head on the optical bench.
2. Secure the laser head to the optical bench using four countersunk Allen-head screws.
3. Secure the laser beam shield using two Phillips-head screws.
4. Place the plenum over the laser head and put it into position.
5. Secure the laser umbilical cord to the rear of the Cytometer using two flat-head screws
and a plate.
6. At the back of the Cytometer, reinstall the upper rear cover. Refer to Procedure 5 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
7. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage back in the center cavity of the Cytometer. Refer to
Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
8. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover. Refer to Procedure 1 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.

Installation at the Universal Power Supply

At the Argon laser power supply:
Note: For cable locations, refer to Figure A.7-6 as needed.
1. For easier and quicker connections, at the laser power supply, remove the laser power
supply key and set it aside.
Note: If the key is in the ON position (l position), the key must be rotated
counterclockwise to the OFF position (O position) before it can be removed from the
power supply.
2. Reconnect the large white connector and tighten the two screws that secure the white
connector in the rectangular socket.

PN 4237029G 4.4-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Universal Power Supply)

3. Insert the black connector into the circular socket and lock it in place.
Note: The black connector is keyed to fit the circular socket. Make sure the connector is
properly inserted in the socket before attempting to lock it in place.
4. If you also replaced the laser power supply:
a. Reconnect the laser logic cable.
b. Reconnect the ac input cable.
5. If removed earlier, reinstall the laser power supply key then rotate the key clockwise to
the I position. (The power supply will not be activated until ac is applied later.)

Wrap Up
1. Reinstall all covers removed from the Universal Power Supply. Refer to Procedure 21
under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
2. Plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.
3. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
4. Align the optics as directed under Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

4.4-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT 4
4.5 FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure after replacing the:

r Flow cell
r Beamshaper
r Laser
r Lens holders.

This procedure is performed with the unit on and all covers removed. If replacing the laser,
first follow the procedures as directed under Heading 4.3, ARGON LASER HEAD AND/OR
POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (on a System with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply), then
perform this procedure.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Optical Alignment kit, PN 6914939
B 7/64 in., T-handle, Allen wrench
B 3/32 in., L-handle, Allen wrench
B 1/8 in., L-handle, Allen wrench
B Mylar® flexible film

WARNING Risk of personal injury due to exposure to laser beam. Do not proceed until you review, under-
stand, and adhere to the safety precautions for lasers under Heading 1.2.

WARNING Risk of eye injury. The following procedure requires the removal of the covers protecting you
from laser light. Reflections of the laser beam off a shiny object such as a screwdriver, or direct viewing of
the laser beam, can severely damage your eyes. When performing replacement or adjustment procedures:
r Wear laser safety glasses as required by the wavelength being used.
r Pay attention to the warning labels.
r Do NOT wear jewelry that might reflect the laser beam.

ATTENTION: If the flow cell is being replaced that is the only assembly that needs to be
removed. If the beam shaping assembly is being replaced, you must first remove the flow cell.

Preparation
1. Ensure that the Cytometer is on.
2. Remove all covers required to access the left-side compartment. Refer to Heading 4.25,
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
3. Remove the flow cell (Figure 4.5-1).
a. Remove the four screws securing the flow cell plate to the optical housing.
b. Remove the plate and set it aside.
c. If the beamshaper assembly is being replaced, go to Heading Beamshaper Assembly
Removal, Replacement, and Alignment in this procedure.

PN 4237029G 4.5-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT

d. If the flow cell is being replaced, go to Heading Flow Cell Replacement that follows.

Figure 4.5-1 Flow Cell and Beamshaper Replacement Components

OPTICAL
HOUSING
FOOT
BEAMSHAPER
ASSEMBLY OPTICAL
HOUSING

LASER
BRACKET

FS DETECTOR

FLOW CELL 7029082D

Flow Cell Replacement

1. Remove the tubing attached to the flow cell. Label the tubing for correct reattachment
later.
2. Discard the old flow cell.
3. Install the replacement flow cell.
4. Reattach the tubing.
5. Reinstall the plate using the four screws removed earlier.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the safety interlock
switch in the Cytometer is defeated, as you may be exposed to the laser beam and/or electric shock. After
servicing the instrument, make sure the top cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock
switch if bypassed while servicing the instrument.

6. Defeat the Cytometer interlock switch. For the location of the Cytometer interlock
switch, refer to Figure 4.25-6 as needed.
Note: Pulling up on the Cytometer interlock switch allows the Argon laser to be
energized.

4.5-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT 4
WARNING The laser beam can cause eye damage if the laser beam’s path is viewed directly on the same
viewing plane. Avoid direct exposure to beam. Do not view directly or with optical instruments except for
special service instruments as directed in this service manual.

7. Place the flow cell reflection disk over the laser output bore and carefully move the disk
until the laser light is coming through the hole and a reflection spot is on the disk. The
reflection spot must be within or on the two rings inscribed on the disk (Figure 4.5-2).
Note: If the reflection spot is not within or on the inscribed rings, the quartz is not
within the 2.0 degree rotation specifications for the flow cell and you must replace the
flow cell.

Figure 4.5-2 Correct Laser Reflection Positioning

LASER
OUTPUT
BORE

FLOW CELL
REFLECTION Reflection spot
DISK must be between or
on these rings.

7029071D

8. Go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and perform the entire procedure as written.
9. Go to Heading 4.7, SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION and perform the
entire procedure as written.

Beamshaper Assembly Removal, Replacement, and Alignment

Note: The flow cell must be removed before starting this replacement.

WARNING The laser beam can cause eye damage if the laser beam’s path is viewed directly on the same
viewing plane. Avoid direct exposure to beam. Do not view directly or with optical instruments except for
special service instruments as directed in this service manual.

1. Remove the laser bracket from the optical housing assembly by removing the two
Phillips-head screws (Figure 4.5-1).
2. Unscrew the beamshaper assembly and remove it from the optical housing assembly
(Figure 4.5-1).
3. If the beamshaper is being replaced set aside the old beamshaper to be sent back for
repair.
4. Reinstall the flow cell.

PN 4237029G 4.5-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT

Install Alignment Tools

1. Install the 10-mm stage clamp to the 10-mm stage and secure it by tightening the 1/8 in.
Allen setscrew (Figure 4.5-3).

Figure 4.5-3 Beamshaper Components

BEAMSHAPER
CLAMP

SETSCREW

BEAMSHAPER
ASSEMBLY LASER SCATTER
FIXTURE

10-mm STAGE
CLAMP

SETSCREW

10-mm STAGE 7029073D

2. Install the beamshaper assembly onto the optical housing foot and secure it to the foot
(Figure 4.5-1).
3. Install the beamshaper clamp over the optical housing assembly and secure it by
tightening the setscrew (Figure 4.5-3).
4. Remove the FS detector (Figure 4.5-1) from the optical housing and install the laser
scatter fixture (Figure 4.5-3).

Alignment
1. Insert the 10-mm lens bending tool into the 10-mm lens and tilt the bending tool
forward so the tool remains in place and the laser beam is not clipped. Slip the bending
tool in-between the 80-mm and 10-mm lens holders (Figure 4.5-4).

4.5-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT 4
Figure 4.5-4 Flow Cell and Beamshaper Alignment

10-mm LENS
BENDING TOOL

ADJUSTMENT

80-mm
LENS
HOLDER

10-mm LENS 10-mm LENS

HOLDER
7029074D

2. Carefully turn the bending tool to get the correct laser image to appear on the Mylar
flexible film (Figure 4.5-5).

Figure 4.5-5 Correct/Incorrect Laser Image

CORRECT LASER IMAGE INCORRECT LASER IMAGE

7029072D

3. Remove both the 10-mm stage and beamshaper clamps from the stage and beamshaper
assembly and the laser scatter fixture from the optical housing (Figure 4.5-3).
4. Reinstall the FS detector.
5. Go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and perform the entire procedure as written.

PN 4237029G 4.5-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
FLOW CELL AND BEAMSHAPER REPLACEMENT AND/OR ALIGNMENT

Reinstall Covers
Reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

4.5-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
OPTICAL ALIGNMENT 4
4.6 OPTICAL ALIGNMENT
Purpose
Perform this procedure whenever a Preventative Maintenance Inspection (PMI) procedure is
performed or any of the following are replaced:

r The laser
r The flow cell
r The FS detector.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mm test tube, PN 2523749
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B 7/64 in., T-handle, Allen wrench
B 7/64 in., L-handle, Allen wrench
B Storage scope or oscilloscope

Preparation
1. Turn the Cytometer on.
2. Remove all covers required to access the left-side compartment. Refer to Heading 4.25,
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

Laser Beam Steering

1. Press RUN when the READY light blinks green.
2. Connect the BNC signal cables from the Scope A and B connectors on the oscilloscope to
the connectors labeled SCOPE A and SCOPE B on the rear panel of the Cytometer.
3. Create a CHANNEL_500 protocol. For parameter and setting information, refer to
Table A.3-1 as needed.
4. Fill a test tube with approximately 1-mL fluorospheres.
5. Insert the test tube into the sample station and press Ñ.
6. With the T-handle Allen wrench, adjust the Z-axis to the center of the flow-cell channel.
7. Set the scope according to Table 4.6-1.

Table 4.6-1 Oscilloscope Settings

Item on Scope Setting

Channel 1 2 Volts per division
Channel 2 2 Volts per division
Time 2 microseconds per division
Trigger Channel 1

8. While viewing the scope, align the Z-axis until the FS pulse is displayed on Channel 1.

PN 4237029G 4.6-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
OPTICAL ALIGNMENT

9. Using the focus adjustment knob (Figure 4.6-1), adjust the beam-shaping assembly until
the narrowest pulse width for FS is observed.

Figure 4.6-1 Beam-Shaping Stage Components

FLUORESCENCE
FLOW CELL LENS ADJUSTMENT

FOCUS
ADJUSTMENT
KNOB

BEAM UP/DOWN
ADJUSTMENT

Loosen these
screws to slide
7029080D
the flow cell

10. Repeat step 6 through 9 until the tightest pulse width for FS is observed.
11. Slide the flow cell slowly back and forth (Figure 4.6-1) until a fluorescent signal is
present on the bar graph.
12. Using the L-handle Allen wrench, adjust the beam up/down until the maximum
fluorescent signal is present.
13. Adjust the fluorescence lens to gain the maximum fluorescent signal (Figure 4.6-1).
14. Repeat steps 6 through 13 until no further adjustments are needed.

Forward Scatter (FS) Mask Alignment

1. Select the CHANNEL_500 protocol.
2. If not already connected, connect the scope to the BNC connector (labeled SCOPE A) on
the back of the Cytometer.
3. Dispense the fluorospheres into a test tube.
4. Insert the test tube into the manual sample stage and run the sample.
5. Looking at FL3, adjust for best FL3 mean channel and CV.

4.6-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
OPTICAL ALIGNMENT 4
6. Remove the FS Detector card mounted to the FS detector assembly (Figure 4.6-2).

Figure 4.6-2 Forward Scatter (FS) Movable Mask Adjustment

FS detector
assembly

FS Detector card

FS movable mask
adjustment arm

Loosen screws to
adjust mask

7029001G

7. Place a sheet of white paper over the optical lens (Figure 4.6-3).
8. Loosen the screws to adjust the mask (Figure 4.6-2).
9. Using the adjustment arm, position the mask crosshairs as shown in CORRECT
ALIGNMENT in Figure 4.6-3.

PN 4237029G 4.6-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
OPTICAL ALIGNMENT

Figure 4.6-3 Correct/Incorrect Scattered Light Positioning

CORRECT INCORRECT
ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT
ADJUSTMENT WHITE
ARM PAPER

Tighten screws when

mask aligned. 7029081D

10. When the mask is properly aligned, tighten the screws (Figure 4.6-3).

How to Proceed
r If you did this procedure as part of installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer using the
detailed installation procedures:
t If the flow cytometer has a Universal Power Supply, go to the Reinstall Cytometer
Covers and Panels heading (under Heading 3.9).
t If the flow cytometer has a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, go to the Reinstall Covers
and Panels heading (under Heading G.9).
r If you did this procedure as part of installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer using the
installation summary:
t If the flow cytometer has a Universal Power Supply, go to the Wrap Up heading
(under Heading 3.10).
t If the flow cytometer has a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, go to the Wrap Up
heading (under Heading G.10).
r If you did this procedure as part of the PMI procedure, perform an SVP as directed under
Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP).
r If you did this procedure as part of replacing the laser, flow cell, or FS detector, perform
an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP).
r If you did this procedure as part of a problem service call and the malfunction is
corrected, reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25,
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

4.6-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION 4
4.7 SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION
Purpose
Perform this procedure if erratic data rates exist or if you replace any of the following:
r System Interface card
r Sensor card
r Sample regulator (electronic regulator)
r Sheath regulator.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mm test tube, PN 2523749
B COULTER® EPICS® Prefinal Software diskette, PN 7231244
B Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
B External digital pressure gauge, 0 to 30 psi range with 0.01 psi accuracy, with vacuum
gauge capabilities or a separate vacuum gauge
B Pneumatic calibration box, PN 2907103
B T-connector and tubing
B Trimmer pot adjustment tool, PN 5402071
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B Hard copy of Figure A.2-23, System Interface Card - Component Locations, optional

Preparation
1. Remove all covers required to access and remove the EMC shield from the upper
pneumatics drawer. Refer to Procedure 18 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND
REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3. Install the Prefinal Service Software as directed under Heading 4.2, PREFINAL SERVICE
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION.
4. At the Prefinal Test Menu:
a. Select VALVE CONTROL.
b. Turn on valves 5, 21, and 22.
c. Turn the compressor off.

Preliminary Voltage Checks

1. At the upper pneumatics drawer, disconnect the tubing attached to the back of
feed-through fitting FF42 (sheath pressure) and the tubing attached to the back of
feed-through fitting FF43 (sample pressure).
2. Wait 10 seconds for the pressure to vent to atmosphere.
3. At the Data Acquisition card cage, connect the negative DVM lead to E27 on the chassis
for ground.

PN 4237029G 4.7-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION

4. At the System Interface card:

a. Connect the positive DVM lead to TP3 and verify the DVM reads 0.000 ±0.001 Vdc.
Adjust the SAMPLE ZERO potentiometer as needed. For test point and potentiometer
locations, refer to Figure A.2-23 as needed.
b. Move the positive DVM lead to TP2 and verify the DVM reads 0.000 ±0.001 Vdc.
Adjust the SHEATH ZERO potentiometer as needed. For test point and potentiometer
locations, refer to Figure A.2-23 as needed.
5. At the upper pneumatics drawer, reconnect the tubing (from the lower pinch valve) to
feed-through fitting FF43.

Calibration
1. Use a T-fitting to make an in-line connection between the external pressure gauge and
the sheath pressure tubing attached to the back of feed-through fitting FF42.
2. Turn the compressor on.
3. Insert an empty test tube into the manual sample station.
4. Make sure the external pressure gauge reads 4.00 psi.
a. If the gauge reads 4.00 psi, go to step 5.
b. If the gauge does not read 4.00 psi:
1) Unlock the sheath pressure regulator. To locate the sheath pressure regulator,
refer to Figure A.5-5 as needed.
2) Rotate the black knob to adjust the regulator to make the external pressure
gauge reads 4.00 psi.
3) When the 4.00 psi readout is stable, lock down the regulator.
5. At the System Interface card:
a. Connect the positive DVM lead to TP2 (negative DVM lead to E27).
b. While monitoring the voltage at TP2, adjust the SHEATH GAIN potentiometer (R14)
as needed to make the DVM readout 2.400 Vdc. For test point and potentiometer
locations, refer to Figure A.2-23 as needed.
6. Disconnect the external pressure gauge and reconnect the sheath pressure tubing to
feed-through fitting FF42.
7. Move the T-fitting to make an in-line connection between the external pressure gauge
and the sample pressure tubing attached to the back of feed-through fitting FF43.
8. Connect the Pneumatic Calibration Box.
a. Locate the sample pressure regulator (electronic regulator to the left). To locate the
sample pressure regulator, refer to Figure A.5-5 as needed.
b. Disconnect the power connector (labeled P105) supplying power to the regulator.
c. Insert the two-pin male connector from the sample pressure regulator into the
two-position female connector attached to the pneumatic calibration box
(labeled J2).
d. Locate the PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card on the optical bench. To
locate this circuit card, refer to Figure A.5-4 as needed.

4.7-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION 4
e. Disconnect one of the PMT ±15 Vdc power connectors and connect the four-pin
power connector from the pneumatic calibration box in its place. To locate these
connectors, refer to Figure A.2-17 as needed.
Note: The four-pin connector only contains two pins.
9. Connect the negative lead of the DVM to the black wire on the electronic regulator’s
power connector. Connect the positive lead to the white wire.
10. Adjust the calibrator pot to a 1.000 Vdc reading on the DVM.
11. Adjust the Zero Adjustment on the electronic regulator for 3.000 psi on the external
pressure gauge.
12. Adjust the calibrator pot to a 1.600 Vdc reading on the DVM.
13. Adjust the RANGE adjustment pot for 4.00 psi on the external pressure gauge.
14. Repeat steps 10 through 13 until no further adjustment is required.
15. With the external pressure gauge reading 4.00 psi, monitor TP3 on the System Interface
card and adjust the SAMPLE GAIN (R35) to 2.400 Vdc.
16. Disconnect the pneumatic calibrator box and reconnect the electronic regulator and
PMT power connectors.
17. On the screen, ensure that the SET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE displayed is zero and
adjust the ZERO adjustment pot on the electronic regulator so that the ACTUAL
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE is zero.
18. Disconnect the tubing going to the SN7 sensor. To locate this sensor, refer to
Figure A.5-5 as needed.
19. Connect a syringe and an external pressure gauge to the SN7 sensor.
20. Connect a DVM and set it to check continuity by connecting the ground lead to E7 and
the positive lead to wire marker 35 on the SN7 sensor.
21. Slowly increase the pressure by pushing the syringe plunger until 2.0 psi is obtained on
the external pressure gauge.
22. Adjust SN7 (access through the opening in the back panel) until continuity is observed
on the DVM.
23. Remove the syringe from the SN7 sensor and reconnect the tubing.
24. Disconnect the tubing from the SN6 sensor. To locate this sensor, refer to Figure A.5-5 as
needed.
25. Connect a syringe and an external pressure gauge to the SN6 sensor.
26. Connect the positive lead to wire marker 33 on the SN6 sensor.
27. Slowly increase the vacuum on the SN6 sensor by pulling the syringe plunger until
-1.00 psi is obtained on the external pressure gauge.
28. Adjust SN6 until continuity is observed on the DVM.
29. Disconnect the syringe and reconnect the tubing going to the SN6 sensor.
30. Connect the external vacuum gauge to the purple tubing on the sample head.
31. Using the Prefinal Test Software Valve Control test option,
a. Turn VL21 and VL22 off.
b. Turn VL5 off.

PN 4237029G 4.7-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION

32. In the upper pneumatics drawer, adjust the vacuum regulator (RG3) to 7.00 inches. To
locate the vacuum regulator, refer to Figure A.5-5 as needed.
33. Remove the external vacuum gauge.
34. If you have not already done so, remove the Prefinal Software diskette from the drive.
35. Press and hold Ý+Þ+á to reboot the instrument.
36. Select the CHANNEL_500 protocol and run some fluorospheres. For parameter and setting
information, refer to Table A.3-1 as needed.
37. Ensure that the external pressure gauge reads the following psi settings:
r LOW = 3.72 psi
r MED = 3.92 psi
r HIGH = 4.12 psi.
38. Disconnect the external pressure gauge.

Operational Verification
Note: Since the fluorospheres are at a concentration of 1.0 to 1.2 million/m, the number of
fluorospheres per second in the low flow rate setting is 135 to 200.

Establish Low Flow Rate Setting

1. Select the CHANNEL_500 protocol at the Workstation.
2. Run Flow-Check fluorospheres.
a. Fill a test tube with 1.0 mL of Flow-Check fluorospheres (meniscus curve at the
1.0 mL mark).
b. Place the test tube into the manual sample station.
c. Run the sample.
3. Adjust all parameter HVs to place the acquisition population in channel 500.
4. After adjusting all parameter HVs, restart the acquisition and monitor the events per
second average between 135 events per second (minimum rate) and 200 events per
second (maximum rate):
a. If the average events for the run are between the 135 and 200 events per second, go
to the Verify All Flow Rates heading to continue.
b. If the average events for the run is below the minimum rate (135 events per second)
for the fluorospheres:
1) Use the sample pressure gain adjust potentiometer (R35) on the System
Interface card and adjust the sample pressure upwards. Do not go above
3.80 psi.
2) Go to the Verify All Flow Rates heading to continue.
c. If the average events for the run is above the maximum rate (200 events per second)
for the fluorospheres,
1) Use the sample pressure gain adjust the potentiometer (R35) on the System
Interface card to adjust the sample pressure down. Do not go below 3.70 psi.
2) Go to the Verify All Flow Rates heading to continue.

4.7-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION 4
Verify All Flow Rates
1. Run five test tubes containing 1.0 mL of Flow-Check fluorospheres.
a. Fill five test tubes to the 1.0 mL mark with Flow-Check fluorospheres.
b. Place a test tube into the manual sample station.
c. Run the sample.
d. Print the histograms from the run.
e. Repeat steps a through d until all five test tubes are processed and the results are
printed.
2. Record the average events for each of the five runs.
3. Find the sum by adding the average events for each of the five runs.
4. Divide the sum by five to determine the average events for the five runs.
5. Verify that the average is between 135 events per second (minimum rate) and 200 events
per second (maximum rate):
r If the average is between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go to
step 6 to continue.
r If the average is not between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go
back to the Establish Low Flow Rate Setting heading and repeat the procedure.
6. Verify the Medium and High flow rates as follows:
a. With the Flow Rate set to LOW:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Record the events per second.
b. Set the Flow Rate to MEDIUM then:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres again.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Verify the events per second is approximately three times higher than it was at
the Low flow rate setting.
c. Set the Flow Rate to HIGH then:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres again.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) The events per second should be approximately six times higher than it was at
the Low flow rate setting.
7. If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, verify the MCL is functioning properly.
a. Fill two test tubes with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
b. Insert the test tubes in the MCL carousel.
c. At the Cytometer, press the AUTO button.
d. Confirm signals are present to ensure tubing is not clogged or pinched. If such an
obstruction is present, correct as needed.

PN 4237029G 4.7-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION

How to Proceed
r If you are in the process of installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to
Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and complete the procedure as written to obtain
the best CVs.
r If you did this calibration as part of a problem service call and the malfunction is
corrected, go to the Reinstall Assemblies and Covers heading to continue.

Reinstall Assemblies and Covers

1. If you have not already done so, lower the Data Acquisition card cage back in the center
cavity of the Cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL
AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. Reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

4.7-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
CARRYOVER TEST 4
4.8 CARRYOVER TEST
Purpose
This test verifies sample carryover in the sample tubing and flow cell area. Perform this test if
the customer complains of sample carryover. If an XL-MCL flow cytometer is being checked,
the carryover test must be performed using the manual sample station then repeated using
the MCL sample station.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B IsoFlow sheath fluid, PN 8547008
B Six, empty, 12 x 75 mm test tubes, PN 2523749
Note: If the carryover test is being performed on an XL flow cytometer without the MCL
option, only three empty 12 x 75 mm test tubes are required.

Preparation
1. Create a test protocol using the parameter and setting information in Table 4.8-1.

Table 4.8-1 Carryover Protocol

Histogram Parameter Signals Gating Analysis Region

1 Dual FS vs. SS RECT GATE A
2 Single FS On region A B
3 Single FL1 On region A C
4 Single FL2 On region A D
5 Single FL3 On region A E
6 Single FL4 On region A F
7 Single SS On region A G

Settings: FLOW RATE HIGH

COMPENSATION All signals = 0%
DISCRIMINATOR FS = 100
Stop On Histogram 1 for 10,000 events
Autoprint ON

2. Save the protocol and name it CARRYOVER.

3. Dispense approximately 1 mL of clean sheath fluid in four test tubes and label each tube
ISO. If you are testing an XL flow cytometer without the MCL option installed, only two
tubes are needed.
4. Dispense approximately 1 mL of Flow-Check fluorospheres into two test tubes and label
each tube BEADS. If you are testing an XL flow cytometer without the MCL option
installed, only one tube is needed.

PN 4237029G 4.8-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
CARRYOVER TEST

Procedure

Using the Manual Sample Station

1. Select the CARRYOVER protocol from the protocol screen.
2. Insert the test tube labeled BEADS in the manual sample station.
3. Run the CARRYOVER protocol.
4. At the end of the run, record the time it took to reach 10,000 events and save the
printout.
5. Remove the test tube containing the fluorospheres (beads).
6. Insert one of the ISO test tubes in the manual sample station.
7. Rerun the CARRYOVER protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in step 4.
8. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR1 and save the printout.
9. Remove the ISO test tube from the manual sample station. Discard the test tube
immediately to ensure it is not accidently rerun.
10. Wait five minutes.
11. After the five minute wait, insert the second ISO test tube in the manual sample station.
12. Rerun the CARRYOVER protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in step 4.
13. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR2 and save the printout.
14. Remove the ISO test tube from the manual sample station. Discard the test tube
immediately to ensure it is not accidently rerun.
15. Ensure that the carryover for CLEAR1 and CLEAR2 are less than 1% (<100 events each).
Note: If the carryover is greater than 1%:
1) Clean the segmenting valve as instructed under Heading 4.11.
2) Using the manual sample station, repeat the Carryover Test. Start at step 1
again.
16. If you are performing this carryover test on an XL-MCL flow cytometer, repeat this check
using the MCL sample station.

Using the MCL Sample Station

1. Select the CARRYOVER protocol.
2. Place the test tube labeled BEADS in the MCL carousel.
3. Run the CARRYOVER protocol.
4. At the end of the run, record the time it took to reach 10,000 events and save the
printout.
5. Remove the test tube containing the fluorospheres (beads).
6. Place one of the ISO test tubes in the MCL carousel.
7. Rerun the CARRYOVER protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in step 4.
8. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR1-MCL and save the printout.
9. Remove the ISO test tube from the MCL carousel. Discard the test tube immediately to
ensure it is not accidently rerun.

4.8-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
CARRYOVER TEST 4
10. Wait five minutes.
11. After the five minute wait, place another ISO test tube in the MCL carousel.
12. Rerun the CARRYOVER protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in step 4.
13. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR2-MCL and save the printout.
14. Remove the ISO test tube from the MCL carousel. Discard the test tube immediately to
ensure it is not accidently rerun.
15. Ensure that the carryover for CLEAR1-MCL and CLEAR2-MCL are less than 1% (<100 events
each).
Note: If the carryover is greater than 1%:
1) Go to Heading 4.11 and clean the segmenting valve as instructed.
2) Repeat the Carryover Test, first using the manual sample station then the MCL
sample station. Begin at step 1 under the Using the Manual Sample Station
heading.

PN 4237029G 4.8-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
CARRYOVER TEST

4.8-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT 4
4.9 PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure when any of the following conditions are present:

r Excessive carryover
r High CVs
r Mean channel drift
r No aspiration.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Sample/MCL Intro Line kit, PN 6912941, consisting of:
r One 14 in. piece of blue PEEK tubing, PN 1021636
r One 15 in. piece of blue PEEK tubing, PN 1021654
r One 3.75 in. piece of tan PEEK tubing, PN 1022073
r Six black ferrule nuts, PN 6232526
r Six tan ferrules PN 6232525
B Lint-free tissue

Preparation
Remove all covers required to access the segmenting valve located behind the manual sample
station cover assembly. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if
you need detailed instructions.

Removal

WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself while performing
service, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, biohazardous material in the instrument could injure
or contaminate you. Beckman Coulter recommends that you wear barrier protection, such as appropriate
safety glasses, a lab coat and latex gloves throughout the performance of service, maintenance and
troubleshooting procedures to avoid contact with biohazardous material in the instrument.

1. Turn the segmenting valve knob counterclockwise to remove the knob from the
segmenting valve. To locate the segmenting valve knob, refer to Figure A.5-12 as needed.
2. At the segmenting valve front pad:
a. Locate the black ferrule nut. Refer to Figures 4.9-1 and 4.9-2 as needed.

PN 4237029G 4.9-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT

Figure 4.9-1 PEEK Tubing Connections

PEEK TUBING
PEEK TUBING PEEK TUBING TO MANUAL
TO FLOW CELL TO MCL PICKUP PROBE

FRONT SEGMENTING PAD REAR SEGMENTING PAD

7029063D

Figure 4.9-2 PEEK Tubing with Ferrule and Ferrule Nut

Ferrule Ferrule Nut PEEK tubing

End used for

attachment

7029226F

b. Unscrew the ferrule nut and remove the nut (and attached PEEK tubing) from the
front pad.
c. Follow the PEEK tubing to the base of the flow cell to locate the ferrule nut attached
to the flow cell.
d. Unscrew the ferrule nut to completely remove the PEEK tubing from the
instrument.
e. Discard the tubing assembly (PEEK tubing, ferrules, and ferrule nuts) into a
biohazardous container.
3. Separate the segmenting valve pads from their individual air cylinders.
a. Separate the front pad from its air cylinder by sliding the clamp at the end of the
cylinder’s piston towards the air cylinder then pushing the piston away from the ball
stud that’s attached to the front pad.
b. Separate the middle pad from its air cylinder by sliding the clamp at the end of the
cylinder’s piston towards the air cylinder then pushing the piston away from the ball
stud that’s attached to the middle pad.
c. Separate the rear pad from its air cylinder by sliding the clamp at the end of the
cylinder’s piston towards the air cylinder then pushing the piston away from the ball
stud that’s attached to the rear pad.

4.9-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT 4
4. Slide the segmenting valve forward on the shaft until the black ferrule nuts are
accessible.
Note: Two ferrule nuts are present.
r If the MCL option is installed, blue PEEK tubing extends from each ferrule nut. The
ferrule nut to your left is associated with the manual sample probe; the ferrule nut
on your right, with the MCL sample probe.
r If the MCL option is not installed, the ferrule nut to your left is associated with the
manual sample probe but the ferrule nut on your right is solid and acts as a plug to
seal the port used for the MCL option.
5. At the segmenting valve rear pad:
a. Unscrew a ferrule nut (with attached PEEK tubing) and remove the nut (and
attached PEEK tubing) from the rear pad.
b. Follow the PEEK tubing to locate the ferrule nut attached to the probe at the
manual sample station (or MCL sample station).
c. Unscrew the ferrule nut to completely remove the PEEK tubing from the
instrument.
d. If the MCL option is installed, repeat steps a through c to remove the second tubing
assembly. If the MCL option is being installed, remove and discard the plug.
e. Before discarding the tubing assemblies you removed from the instrument, examine
one of the assemblies (PEEK tubing, ferrules, and ferrule nuts). For proper
installation, the ferrules and ferrule nuts must be correctly oriented. Use
Figure 4.9-2 as a reference.
f. If you have not done so, discard into a biohazardous container all tubing assemblies
removed from the instrument.

Installation
1. Locate the two pieces of blue PEEK tubing. One is slightly longer than the other.
2. If the Cytometer has the MCL option installed or if you are installing the MCL option:
a. Using the longer piece of blue PEEK tubing, thread a ferrule nut (knurled end first)
followed by a ferrule (tapered end first) onto one end of the tubing. See Figure 4.9-2
for correct orientation of components.
ATTENTION: Install the new PEEK tubing with the ferrule pushed back (Figure 4.9-2) so
the PEEK tubing can be slightly compacted around the port as the ferrule is tightened by
the ferrule nut.
b. Push the ferrule away from the end of the PEEK tubing, as shown in Figure 4.9-2.
c. At the segmenting valve rear pad, screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket on
the right (socket that’s closer to the two metal fittings).
d. At the opposite end of the PEEK tubing, thread a ferrule nut (knurled end first)
followed by a ferrule (tapered end first) onto the end of the tubing.
e. Push the ferrule away from the end of the PEEK tubing, as shown in Figure 4.9-2.
f. At the MCL sample probe, screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket at the top
of the MCL sample probe to provide a path from the MCL sample probe to the
segmenting valve.

PN 4237029G 4.9-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT

3. Using the shorter piece of blue PEEK tubing:

a. Thread a ferrule nut (knurled end first) followed by a ferrule (tapered end first)
onto one end of the tubing. See Figure 4.9-2 for correct orientation of components.
ATTENTION: Install the new PEEK tubing with the ferrule pushed back (Figure 4.9-2) so
the PEEK tubing can be slightly compacted around the port as the ferrule is tightened by
the ferrule nut.
b. Push the ferrule away from the end of the PEEK tubing, as shown in Figure 4.9-2.
c. At the segmenting valve rear pad, screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket on
the left (socket that’s closer to the single metal fitting).
d. At the opposite end of the PEEK tubing, thread a ferrule nut (knurled end first)
followed by a ferrule (tapered end first) onto the end of the tubing.
e. Push the ferrule away from the end of the PEEK tubing, as shown in Figure 4.9-2.
f. At the manual sample probe, screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket at the
top of the manual sample probe to provide a pathway from the manual sample probe
to the segmenting valve.
4. Carefully slide the segmenting valve to it original position on the shaft.
5. Locate the piece of tan PEEK tubing.
6. Thread a ferrule nut (knurled end first) followed by a ferrule (tapered end first) onto one
end of the tubing. See Figure 4.9-2 for correct orientation of components.
ATTENTION: Install the new PEEK tubing with the ferrule pushed back (Figure 4.9-2) so the
PEEK tubing can be slightly compacted around the port as the ferrule is tightened by the
ferrule nut.
7. Push the ferrule away from the end of the PEEK tubing, as shown in Figure 4.9-2.
8. At the segmenting valve front pad, screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket.
9. At the opposite end of the PEEK tubing, thread a ferrule nut (knurled end first) followed
by a ferrule (tapered end first) onto the end of the tubing.
10. Push the ferrule away from the end of the PEEK tubing, as shown in Figure 4.9-2.
11. At the flow cell, screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket at the base of the flow cell
to provide a pathway from the flow cell to the segmenting valve.
12. Reattach the segmenting valve pads to their individual air cylinders. Reattach the rear,
then the middle, and finally the front. In each case, slide the clamp at the end of the
cylinder’s piston towards the air cylinder then push the socket over the ball stud that’s
attached to the pad. Release the sliding clamp to secure the ball stud to the air cylinder
piston.
13. Reinstall the segmenting valve knob. Finger tighten the knob by rotating it clockwise
until it can no longer be turned without force. Do not overtighten the knob!
14. Wipe the outside of the segmenting valve with a lint-free tissue.
ATTENTION: If you did this procedure as part of installing the MCL Option, do not press the
PRIME button at this time. Go back to Heading 3.11 and starting at the Power Supply Module
Upgrade heading, complete the procedure as written.

4.9-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT 4
15. Press the PRIME button and observe the segmenting valve. Make sure the segmenting
valve pads are rotating smoothly and there is no leakage at the segmenting valve, flow
cell, or sample probe(s).

Reinstall Covers
1. Reinstall the sample and waste connect panel using the two Phillips-head screws
removed earlier.
2. Reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

PN 4237029G 4.9-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PEEK TUBING REPLACEMENT

4.9-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SHEATH PRESSURE/SAMPLE STATION VACUUM CALIBRATION 4
4.10 SHEATH PRESSURE/SAMPLE STATION VACUUM CALIBRATION
Purpose
This procedure provides instructions for field calibration of the sheath pressure regulator and
the sample station vacuum regulator. Follow this procedure if either regulator is erratic or
replaced.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B External digital pressure gauge, 0 to 30 psi range with 0.01 psi accuracy, with vacuum
gauge capabilities or a separate vacuum gauge
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mm test tube, PN 2523749
B IsoFlow sheath fluid, PN 8547008

Preparation
1. Turn the instrument OFF.
2. Remove all cover required to access and remove the EMC shield from the upper
pneumatics drawer. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
if you need detailed instructions.

Calibration
1. Place a test tube filled with sheath fluid on the sample station.
2. Connect the external pressure gauge at fitting FF48 (left side of bracket) on upper
pneumatics drawer.
3. Turn ON the instrument.
4. Wait until the screen displays Cytometer in Verification mode.
5. Adjust the sheath pressure regulator (RG2) to read 4.0 psi ±0.1 psi. Lock down the
regulator after adjustment.
6. Remove the external pressure gauge and reconnect the pressure line.
7. Connect the vacuum gauge at fitting FF42.
8. Adjust the sample station vacuum regulator (R3) to 4 in. Hg.
9. Remove the vacuum gauge and reconnect the sample station vacuum line.

Verification
Select a protocol to run to ensure system operation.

Reinstall Covers
Reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

PN 4237029G 4.10-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SHEATH PRESSURE/SAMPLE STATION VACUUM CALIBRATION

4.10-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING 4
4.11 SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING
Purpose
Perform this procedure if performance deteriorates or if symptoms of slow sample start,
carryover, or a defective segmenting pad exists.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Latex gloves
B 500 mL beaker or a glass container of equivalent size
B Approximately 400 mL of fresh1y prepared bleach solution
Note: Beckman Coulter recommends using a fresh solution of one part high-quality,
fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of sodium hypochlorite - available
chlorine) and one part deionized or distilled water.
B Lubriplate™ grease, PN 1604005
B Lint-free tissue

Preparation
1. If you have not already done so, in the 500 mL beaker (or a glass container of equivalent
size) prepare enough bleach solution (approximately 400 mL) that will allow you to
simultaneously submerge all three segmenting pads.
Note: Beckman Coulter recommends using a fresh solution of one part high-quality,
fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of sodium hypochlorite - available
chlorine) and one part deionized or distilled water.
2. Select the RUN button on the sample station. Wait 10 seconds for the sheath draw to
depressurize. (The RUN button should flash green.)
3. Remove all covers required to access the segmenting valve located behind the manual
sample station. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if
you need detailed instructions.

Removal

WARNING Risk of personal injury or contamination. If you do not properly shield yourself while performing
service, maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, biohazardous material in the instrument could injure
or contaminate you. Beckman Coulter recommends that you wear barrier protection, such as appropriate
safety glasses, a lab coat and latex gloves throughout the performance of service, maintenance and
troubleshooting procedures to avoid contact with biohazardous material in the instrument.

Front Segmenting Pad

1. Turn the segmenting valve knob counterclockwise to remove the knob from the
segmenting valve. To locate the segmenting valve knob, refer to Figure A.5-12 as needed.

PN 4237029G 4.11-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING

2. Unscrew the black ferrule nut and remove the nut (with attached PEEK tubing and
ferrule) from the front pad. Make sure the ferrule is not lost. Refer to Figure 4.11-1 as
needed.

Figure 4.11-1 PEEK Tubing with Ferrule and Ferrule Nut

Ferrule Ferrule Nut PEEK tubing

End used for

attachment

7029226F

3. To facilitate installation, label the positions where the tubing is connected to the front
segmenting pad (Figure 4.11-2).

Figure 4.11-2 Segmenting Valve Pad Connections

ORANGE STRIPE FITTING FITTING
TUBING (WASTE) TO MCL TO MANUAL
FITTING TO PICKUP PROBE PICKUP PROBE
FLOW CELL
WHITE WHITE STRIPE
ORANGE STRIPE TUBING
STRIPE TUBING TO (SHEATH)
TUBING TO Y FITTING
Y FITTING

ORANGE
STRIPE
TUBING TO
Y FITTING
WHITE
STRIPE
TUBING TO
Y FITTING

FRONT SEGMENTING PAD REAR SEGMENTING PAD 7029003D

4. Separate the front pad from its air cylinder by sliding the clamp at the end of the
cylinder’s piston towards the air cylinder then pushing the piston away from the ball stud
that’s attached to the front pad.
5. Carefully slide the front segmenting pad off of the shaft.
6. Disconnect the tubing from the front segmenting pad (Figure 4.11-2):
r Orange-striped Y-tubing
r White-striped Y-tubing
r Orange-striped (WASTE) tubing.
7. Submerge the front segmenting pad in the bleach solution for five minutes.

4.11-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING 4
Middle Segmenting Pad
1. Separate the middle segmenting pad from its air cylinder by sliding the clamp at the end
of the cylinder’s piston towards the air cylinder then pushing the piston away from the
ball stud that’s attached to the middle pad.
2. Carefully slide the middle pad off the shaft and place it in the bleach solution for five
minutes.

Rear Segmenting Pad

1. Separate the rear pad from its air cylinder by removing the cylinder clamp from the ball
stud to the rear pad.
2. Carefully slide the rear segmenting pad off the shaft.
3. To facilitate installation, label the positions where the tubing is connected to the rear
segmenting pad (Figure 4.11-2). If the MCL option is installed, label the blue PEEK
tubing to ensure it is reinstalled in the correct location.
4. Unscrew the black ferrule nut and remove the nut (with attached PEEK tubing and
ferrule) from the rear pad. Make sure the ferrule is not lost. Refer to Figure 4.11-1 as
needed.
5. If the MCL option is installed, unscrew the second black ferrule nut and remove the nut
(with attached PEEK tubing and ferrule) from the rear pad. Make sure the ferrule is not
lost.
6. If the MCL option is not installed, unscrew and remove the black knurled plug and set it
aside.
7. Remove the tubing (Figure 4.11-2):
r Orange-striped Y-tubing
r White-striped Y-tubing
r Orange-striped (WASTE) tubing.
8. Submerge the rear segmenting pad in the bleach solution for five minutes.

Clean the Shaft

1. Wipe the shaft with the bleach solution to remove any debris.
2. Wipe the shaft with distilled water to remove the bleach solution and any residue.
3. Dry the shaft with a lint-free tissue.
4. Wipe the shaft with Lubriplate grease.
5. Wipe the shaft with a lint-free tissue to remove excess Lubriplate grease. The shaft
should be only lightly coated.

PN 4237029G 4.11-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING

Installation

Rear Segmenting Pad

1. Remove the rear segmenting pad from the bleach and rinse it thoroughly with distilled
water.
2. Connect the tubing to the rear segmenting pad (Figure 4.11-2):
r Orange-striped Y-tubing
r White-striped Y-tubing
r Orange-striped (WASTE) tubing.
3. Locate the PEEK tubing connected to the manual sample probe.
4. Screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket on the right (socket that’s closer to the two
metal fittings). See Figure 4.11-2.
5. If the MCL option is installed:
a. Locate the PEEK tubing connected to the MCL sample probe.
b. Screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket on the left (socket that’s closer to the
single metal fitting). See Figure 4.11-2.
6. If the MCL option is not installed, reinstall the black knurled plug in the MCL location.
See Figure 4.11-2.
7. Install the front pad on the shaft.

Middle Segmenting Pad

1. Remove the middle segmenting pad from the bleach and rinse it thoroughly with
distilled water.
2. Install the middle pad on the shaft.

Front Segmenting Pad

1. Remove the front segmenting pad from the bleach and rinse it thoroughly with distilled
water.
2. Connect the tubing to the front segmenting pad (Figure 4.11-2):
r Orange-striped Y-tubing
r White-striped Y-tubing
r Orange-striped (WASTE) tubing.
3. Install the front pad on the shaft.
4. Locate the PEEK tubing connected to the flow cell.
5. Screw the ferrule nut into the threaded socket on the front segmenting pad. See
Figure 4.11-2.

4.11-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING 4
Complete the Installation
1. Reattach the segmenting valve pads to their individual air cylinders. Reattach the rear,
then the middle, and finally the front. In each case, slide the clamp at the end of the
cylinder’s piston towards the air cylinder then push the socket over the ball stud that’s
attached to the pad. Release the sliding clamp to secure the ball stud to the air cylinder
piston.
2. Reinstall the segmenting valve knob. Finger tighten the knob by rotating it clockwise
until it can no longer be turned without force. Do not overtighten the knob!
3. Wipe the outside of the segmenting valve with a lint-free tissue.
4. Press the PRIME button and observe the segmenting valve. Make sure the segmenting
valve pads are rotating smoothly and there is no leakage.

Reinstall Covers
1. Reinstall the sample and waste connect panel using the two Phillips-head screws
removed earlier.
2. Reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

Verification
Perform the carryover test as directed under Heading 4.8, CARRYOVER TEST.

PN 4237029G 4.11-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
SEGMENTING VALVE CLEANING

4.11-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
MCL OPTION FIELD ADJUSTMENT 4
4.12 MCL OPTION FIELD ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to properly align and adjust the MCL option:

r After installation
r After field replacement
r Upon detecting erratic MCL option operation.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B COULTER EPICS XL/XL-MCL Prefinal Software diskette, PN 7231244
B Five, empty, 12 x 75-mm test tubes, PN 2523749

Preparation
1. Remove all covers required to access the MCL main frame assembly. Refer to
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
Note: Unlatch the MCL covers from the Cytometer frame. Do not attempt to remove the
MCL from the Cytometer. Refer to Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
2. Place a wire jumper between pins 3 and 4 on the MCL door interlock connector to defeat
the door switch.
3. Ensure that the Computer Workstation is turned on.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the safety interlock
switch in the Cytometer is defeated, as you may be exposed to the laser beam and/or electric shock. After
servicing the instrument, make sure the top cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock
switch if bypassed while servicing the instrument.

4. Defeat the Cytometer interlock switch. Refer to Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
5. Install the Prefinal Software diskette as directed under Heading 4.2, PREFINAL SERVICE
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION.

MCL TERMINAL Program Setup

1. At the Prefinal Menu, select MCL TERMINAL and press Û.
2. Place a carousel on the MCL turntable.
Note: A carousel must be on the MCL option turntable before doing a master reset.
3. Press È, then type MR. This command does a master reset to the MCL option.
4. Wait for a spade symbol to appear on the monitor indicating the master reset is finished.
r The spade symbol (♠) is an acknowledge return symbol that indicates a
programmed command was completed successfully.
r If the spade symbol does not appear, a sensor did not see a change of state.

PN 4237029G 4.12-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
MCL OPTION FIELD ADJUSTMENT

Carousel Tube-Position Sensor Adjustment

1. Insert a carousel with five test tubes installed in the first five carousel positions.
2. Press È, then type CH. The carousel rotates to the home position.
3. Press È, then type CI. The carousel moves in towards the MCL option probe.
4. Press È, then type CR. The carousel advances to position one.
5. Press È, then type LU. The lifter motor rises and stays up.
6. Ensure that the lifter foot comes up without touching the carousel. If the lifter foot clears
the tube position well, go to step 8 (under this heading), otherwise adjust as follows:
a. Press È, then type LD to lower the lifter.
b. Press È, then type CO to move the carousel out.
c. Manually adjust the carousel tube position using the IN/OUT screw as shown in
Figure 4.12-1.

Figure 4.12-1 Carousel IN/OUT Adjustment

CAROUSEL
LIFTER FOOT
(CENTERED)
8 9
10 11 1
ADJUST

7029064D

d. Repeat steps 3 through 6c (under this heading) until no further adjustments are
required.
7. Press È, then type LM. The vortex motor is activated.
8. Ensure that the lifter foot does not hit the carousel. If the lifter foot does hit the carousel,
with a flat-head screwdriver, adjust the tube position using the carousel-tube position
screw so that the lifter foot clears the carousel (is centered) (Figure 4.12-2). Repeat until
no further adjustments are required.

4.12-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
MCL OPTION FIELD ADJUSTMENT 4
Figure 4.12-2 Carousel Tube-Position Screw Adjustment
CAROUSEL LIFTER FOOT
(CENTERED)

8 9
10 11 1
2
ADJUST

7029065D

9. Press È, then type LD. The lifter lowers.

10. Press È, then type CO. The carousel moves out.
11. Press È, then type CL. The carousel moves back to the load position.
12. Repeat steps 7 and 8 (under this heading) until no further adjustments are necessary.

Finger Adjustment
1. Press È, then type XO. The finger moves in.
2. Ensure that the finger clears the tube position bar-code label and makes contact with the
tube and rotates the tube. Using the finger adjustment screw, adjust the finger for proper
clearance (Figure 4.12-3).

Figure 4.12-3 Finger Adjustment Screw

FINGER
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW

7029026D

PN 4237029G 4.12-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
MCL OPTION FIELD ADJUSTMENT

MCL Sample Probe Adjustment

1. Insert a carousel with one test tube in the first carousel position.
2. Press È, then type CH. The carousel rotates to the home position.
3. Press È, then type CI. The carousel moves in towards the MCL option probe.
4. Press È, then type CR. The carousel advances to position one.
5. Press È, then type LU. The lifter motor rises and stays up.
6. Press È, then type PD. The sample probe moves down into the test tube.
7. Verify the sample probe comes just to the bottom of the test tube.
8. Adjust the lock nut on the probe up/down air cylinder to reposition the sample probe if
necessary (Figure 4.12-4).

Figure 4.12-4 MCL Sample Probe Adjustment

PROBE HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT

LOCK NUT

TEST TUBE
(IN PLACE)

PROBE < 0.25"

7029068D

How to Proceed
1. If you did this procedure as part of the MCL Option Upgrade installation, go back to
Heading 3.11 and complete the instructions under the Operational Verification heading.
2. If you this procedure to correct an MCL malfunction:
a. Reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
b. Remove the wire used to defeat the MCL door interlock switch.

4.12-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
VORTEXER FOOT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT 4
4.13 VORTEXER FOOT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
Purpose
Perform this procedure to replace the vortex foot If the bearing is binding. To determine if the
vortex foot and bearing need to be replaced, rotate the foot clockwise/counter clockwise and
ensure that it spins freely without resistance.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Vortexer foot assembly, PN 7000579
B Empty, 12 x 75-mm test tubes, PN 2523749

Preparation
1. Power off the Cytometer.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Remove the MCL covers to access the MCL carousel base assembly. Refer to
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.

Removal
1. Locate the vortex foot assembly directly below the MCL sample probe. See Figure 4.13-1
for the vortex cover and shaft that comprise this assembly.
2. On top of the vortex cover, mark the back end of the cover so that the mark is in the
same position as it was before removal (Figure 4.13-1). The cover, if not installed
correctly, can be hit by the vortexer shaft during operation.

PN 4237029G 4.13-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
VORTEXER FOOT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

Figure 4.13-1 Vortex Foot Assembly, Location and Components

Vortex
shaft

Vortex
7029256F cover

3. Remove the four screws securing the vortex cover (Figure 4.13-1).
4. Remove the two screws securing the vortex shaft to the eccentric slide mechanism.
5. Remove the defective vortexer foot assembly.

Installation
1. Install the replacement vortexer foot assembly.
2. Install the vortex cover to the correct position orientation and secure it with four screws.

4.13-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
VORTEXER FOOT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT 4
Reinstall Covers
Reinstall all covers removed during this procedure. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

Verification
1. Power on the Cytometer.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using EXPO32 ADC
software) under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Place the empty test tubes into the carousel.
3. Press RUN CYCLE and ensure that the vortexer foot spins freely both clockwise and
counter clockwise.

PN 4237029G 4.13-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
VORTEXER FOOT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

4.13-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION 4
4.14 TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION
Purpose
Use this procedure to adjust the ADC offset of the Trans Data Acquisition card whenever you
replace the Trans Data Acquisition card. This procedure is also used to verify the Trans Data
Acquisition card offset when the offset of an Amp/Signal Conditioner card is out of tolerance.
Calibration of a Trans Data Acquisition card may also be referred to as offset adjustment.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B COULTER EPICS XL/XL-MCL Prefinal Software diskette, PN 7231244
B XL card extender, PN 6705582
B Hardcopy of Figure A.2-25, Trans Data Acquisition Card - Component Locations,
optional

Preparation
1. Power off the Cytometer.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set it aside. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the safety interlock
switch in the Cytometer is defeated, as you may be exposed to the laser beam and/or electric shock. After
servicing the instrument, make sure the top cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock
switch if bypassed while servicing the instrument.

3. Defeat the Cytometer interlock switch.

4. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

If Replacing the Trans Data Acquisition Card

1. Remove the defective Trans Data Acquisition card.
2. Install the XL card extender in the Trans Data Acquisition card position in the card cage.
3. On the replacement Trans Data Acquisition card:
a. Verify the jumper settings using Figure A.2-25 as a reference.
b. Remove the jumper from E1 to E2 and install it on E2 to E3. For jumper locations,
refer to Figure A.2-25 as needed.
4. Install the replacement Trans Data Acquisition card on the card extender.

PN 4237029G 4.14-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION

If Calibrating Without Replacing the Trans Data Acquisition Card

1. Remove the Trans Data Acquisition card from the Data Acquisition card cage.
2. Remove the jumper from E1 to E2 and install it on E2 to E3. For jumper locations, refer
to Figure A.2-25 as needed.
3. Install the XL card extender in the Trans Data Acquisition card position in the card cage.
4. Install the Trans Data Acquisition card on the card extender.

Access the Prefinal Menu

1. Power on the Cytometer.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using EXPO32 ADC
software) under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Install the Prefinal Software diskette as directed under Heading 4.2, PREFINAL SERVICE
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION.

Calibration
ATTENTION: Before making any adjustments, the instrument must be allowed to warmed up
to stabilize the amplifiers on the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards.
r If the instrument was powered off more than one hour, make sure the instrument is
warmed up 30 minutes before making any adjustments.
r If the instrument was powered off less than one hour, a 15 minute warmed up is
sufficient before making adjustments.
1. At the Prefinal Menu, select ADC ZERO ADJUST and press Û.
2. Verify the offset reading is between 0.3 mVdc and 0.9 mVdc.
a. If the reading is acceptable, go to step 3.
b. If the reading is out of tolerance, adjust the offset potentiometer, R8, until the
reading is within the acceptable range of 0.3 mVdc and 0.9 mVdc.
Note: Always make sure your adjustment is midrange (0.6 mVdc) or slightly above
midrange rather than on the low end (0.3 mVdc). It is important that this offset be
slightly positive to ensure the offset does not drift less than zero.
3. Press È to exit ADC ZERO ADJUST.
4. Press ß to power off the Cytometer.
5. Verify the Cytometer power is off. (Pneumatics should be off and the front panel display
should be dark.)
6. Remove the Trans Data Acquisition card from the card extender.
7. Remove the card extender from the Data Acquisition card cage.
8. Reinstall the Trans Data Acquisition card in the card cage.
9. From the Prefinal Menu, select ADC ZERO ADJUST and press Û.
10. Verify that the offset reading is between 0.3 mVdc and 0.9 mVdc.
a. If the reading is acceptable, continue the calibration by going to step 11.

4.14-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION 4
b. If the reading is out of tolerance, the calibration must be repeated as follows:
1) Press È to exit ADC ZERO ADJUST.
2) Press ß to power off the Cytometer.
3) Verify the Cytometer power is off. (Pneumatics should be off and the front
panel display should be dark.)
4) Remove the Trans Data Acquisition card from the Data Acquisition card cage.
5) Install the XL card extender in the Trans Data Acquisition card position in the
card cage.
6) Install the Trans Data Acquisition card on the card extender.
7) Go to the Calibration heading and repeat the calibration as written.
11. Press È to exit ADC ZERO ADJUST.
12. Press ß to power off the Cytometer.
13. Verify the Cytometer power is off. (Pneumatics should be off and the front panel display
should be dark.)
14. Remove the Trans Data Acquisition card from the Data Acquisition card cage.
15. On the Trans Data Acquisition card, remove the jumper from E2 to E3 and reinstall it
from E1 to E2. For jumper locations, refer to Figure A.2-25 as needed.
16. Reinstall the Trans Data Acquisition card in the Data Acquisition card cage.
17. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the Cytometer.
a. Stand in front of the Cytometer and grasp the top of the Data Acquisition card cage.
b. With a secure hold on the card cage, unlock the card cage hinges with your other
hand.
c. Gently lower the card cage into the center cavity of the Cytometer.
18. How to proceed:
a. If you did this procedure as part of the Service Verification Procedure (SVP), go to
step 19 to verify the offset for each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.
b. If you did this procedure as part of an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer installation, go
to step 19 to verify the offset for each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.
c. If you did this procedure as part of a Trans Data Acquisition card replacement or
calibration, go to step 19 to verify the offset for each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.
d. If you did this procedure as part of replacing an Amp/Signal Conditioner card, go
back to Heading 4.15. Start at the Calibration heading and complete the Amp/Signal
Conditioner card calibration as written.
e. If you did this procedure as part of calibrating (without replacing) an Amp/Signal
Conditioner card, go back to Heading 4.15. Under the If Calibrating Without
Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner Card heading, start at step 2 and complete
the Amp/Signal Conditioner card calibration as written.
19. At the Prefinal Menu, select the GRAND CANYON ADJUST and press Û.
a. Make sure the instrument has warmed up at least 15 minutes before proceeding.

PN 4237029G 4.14-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION

b. For each parameter, verify the offset voltage reading is displayed in green.
r Select the desired parameter using the cursor keys, æ or ç.
r All the offset voltages must be displayed in green. If you are testing a 3-color
system, the PMT4 parameter fails because there is no circuit card in the card
cage. Ignore this failure
r If an offset voltage reading is red, the corresponding Amp/Signal Conditioner
card is defective. Replace the Amp/Signal Conditioner card and calibrate the
replacement circuit card as instructed under Heading 4.15.
20. Press È to exit the GRAND CANYON ADJUST.
21. Press Ò to exit the Prefinal software. The Cytometer should power off automatically.
22. If you have not already done so, remove the Prefinal Software diskette from the drive.
23. How to proceed:
a. If you did this procedure as part of an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer installation, go
back to Heading 3.9 and continue the installation by going to the Functional
Verification heading. Complete the installation as written.
b. If you did this procedure for any other purpose than installation, go to the Reinstall
Cover heading that follows and continue this procedure as written.

Reinstall Cover
Reinstall the Cytometer top cover and any other covers removed during this procedure. Refer
to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.

Load the Customer’s Preferred Operating System

r If SYSTEM II is the customer’s preferred operating system, under Heading 4.2, refer to
the If SYSTEM II is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System heading, as needed.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the customer’s preferred operating system, under Heading 4.2, refer to
the If EXPO32 ADC is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System heading, as needed.

System Verification
ATTENTION: If you did this procedure as part of the System Verification Procedure (SVP), go
back to Heading 5.1 and continue the SVP at Heading Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis
and Carryover Check.
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

4.14-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION 4
4.15 AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION
Purpose
Perform this procedure when you replace any of the Linear Power supplies or an Amp/Signal
Conditioner card, or when the amplifier performance is erratic. This ensures that an
instrument-calibrated replacement Amp/Signal Conditioner card is properly installed in the
Cytometer. Calibration of an Amp/Signal Conditioner card may also be referred to as offset
adjustment.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B COULTER EPICS XL/XL-MCL Prefinal Software diskette, PN 7231244
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mm test tube, PN 2523749
B Isoflow sheath fluid, PN 8547008
B Trimmer pot adjustment tool, PN 5402071
B Hardcopy of Figure A.2-1, Amp / Signal Conditioner Card - Component Locations,
optional
ATTENTION: The ADC offset for the Trans Data Acquisition card must be confirmed acceptable
before starting the calibration procedure for an Amp/Signal Conditioner card.
r If you are replacing an Amp/Signal Conditioner card, the Trans Data Acquisition card
offset is checked after you replace the Amp/Signal Conditioner card. Go to Heading If
Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner Card and complete the procedure as written.
r If you are calibrating without replacing an Amp/Signal Conditioner card, the Trans Data
Acquisition card offset is checked before you actually begin the calibration process. Go
to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written.

If Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner Card

1. Power off the Cytometer.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set it aside. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the safety interlock
switch in the Cytometer is defeated, as you may be exposed to the laser beam and/or electric shock. After
servicing the instrument, make sure the top cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock
switch if bypassed while servicing the instrument.

3. Defeat the Cytometer interlock switch.

4. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
5. Remove the defective Amp/Signal Conditioner card.

PN 4237029G 4.15-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION

6. On the replacement Amp/Signal Conditioner card:

a. Verify the jumper settings using Figure A.2-1 as a reference.
b. Remove the jumper from E4 to E5. Save the jumper. For jumper locations, refer to
Figure A.2-1 as needed.
c. Install the replacement Amp/Signal Conditioner card in the card cage.
7. Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION. Start at the If Calibrating Without Replacing the Trans Data Acquisition
Card heading and complete the procedure as written.

If Calibrating Without Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner Card

ATTENTION: The ADC offset for the Trans Data Acquisition card must be confirmed acceptable
before starting this procedure. Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD
REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written.
1. Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written.
2. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Refer to
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
3. Remove the Amp/Signal Conditioner card from the Data Acquisition card cage.
4. Remove the jumper from E4 to E5. Save the jumper. For jumper locations, refer to
Figure A.2-1 as needed.
5. Reinstall the Amp/Signal Conditioner card in the card cage.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each Amp/Signal Conditioner card requiring calibration.
7. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the Cytometer. Refer to
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

Calibration
ATTENTION: Before making any adjustments, the instrument must be allowed to warmed up
to stabilize the amplifiers.
r If the instrument was powered off more than one hour, make sure the instrument is
warmed up 30 minutes before making any adjustments.
r If the instrument was powered off less than one hour, a 15 minute warmed up is
sufficient before making adjustments.
1. At the Prefinal Menu, select ADC ZERO ADJUST and press Û.
2. Verify the offset reading is between 0.3 mVdc and 0.9 mVdc.
a. If the reading is acceptable:
1) Press È to exit ADC ZERO ADJUST.
2) Go to step 3 to continue this calibration.

4.15-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION 4
b. If the reading is out of tolerance:
1) Press È to exit ADC ZERO ADJUST.
2) Press ß to power off the Cytometer.
3) Verify the Cytometer power is off. (Pneumatics should be off and the front
panel display should be dark.)
4) Replace the circuit card as instructed under Heading If Replacing the
Amp/Signal Conditioner Card then calibrate the replacement card as written.
3. At the Prefinal Menu, select the GRAND CANYON ADJUST and press Û.
4. Make sure the instrument has warmed up at least 15 minutes before proceeding.
5. Select the desired parameter using the cursor keys, æ or ç, as needed.
6. Verify the offset voltage reading is displayed in green. If the voltage reading is red, the
circuit card is defective. Replace the Amp/Signal Conditioner card before proceeding.

IMPORTANT Risk of misleading results. If extremely high voltage readings appear or the GRAND CANYON
ADJUST does not seem to be working properly, press ßß. The first time you press the
spacebar switches the test into peak mode and the second time switches the test back into the integral
mode. All voltages must be read in the integral mode. For each amplifier, verify that both the 1X and 32X
voltage readings are less than 9.3 Vdc

7. Verify the offset voltage reading is within the acceptable range of 00.000 to -05.000 mV.
a. If the offset is within the acceptable range, go to step 8.
b. If the offset is not within acceptable range:
1) Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside.
2) Lift up the front panel display.
3) Locate the Amp/Signal Conditioner card being checked.
4) Adjust R34, the offset potentiometer, as close to 00.000 mV as possible. Slightly
negative within the green display range is better than positive due to a possible
positive thermal drift.
8. Check the offset on the remaining Amp/Signal Conditioner cards.
a. Select the desired parameter using the cursor keys, æ or ç.
b. Verify the offset voltage reading is displayed in green.
1) If the offset voltage reading is green, repeat steps a and b until all the offset
voltages are verified. When all the offset voltages are acceptable, go to step 9.
Note: If you are testing a 3-color system, the PMT4 parameter fails because
there is no circuit card in the card cage. Ignore this failure.
2) If the offset voltage reading is red, the circuit card must be readjusted.
a) Press È to exit ADC ZERO ADJUST.
b) Press ß to power off the Cytometer.
c) Verify the Cytometer power is off. (Pneumatics should be off and the front
panel display should be dark.)

PN 4237029G 4.15-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION

d) Go to the If Calibrating Without Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner

Card heading and perform the calibration as written.
Note: If you have already readjusted the circuit card and the offset reading is
still out of tolerance, the Amp/Signal Conditioner card is defective. Replace the
circuit card as instructed under the If Replacing the Amp/Signal Conditioner
Card heading then calibrate the replacement card as written.
9. Press È to exit GRAND CANYON ADJUST.
10. Press ß to power off the Cytometer.
11. Verify the Cytometer power is off. (Pneumatics should be off and the front panel display
should be dark.)
12. For any Amp/Signal Conditioner card that was replaced:
a. Remove the circuit card from the Data Acquisition card cage.
b. Reinstall the jumper from E4 to E5.
c. Reinstall the circuit card in the Data Acquisition card cage.
13. From the Prefinal Menu, select the CANYON JUMPER TEST and press Û. All should pass
unless you are testing a 3-color system, the PMT4 parameter fails because there is no
circuit card in the card cage. Ignore this failure.
If the test FAILS:
a. Press È to exit CANYON JUMPER TEST.
b. Press ß to power off the Cytometer.
c. Verify the Cytometer power is off. (Pneumatics should be off and the front panel
display should be dark.)
d. For each circuit card that fails:
1) Remove each circuit card from the Data Acquisition card cage.
2) Reinstall the jumper from E4 to E5.
3) Reinstall the circuit card in the Data Acquisition card cage.
e. Repeat step 13.
14. Press È to exit the CANYON JUMPER TEST.
15. Press Ò to exit the Prefinal software. The Cytometer should power off automatically.
16. If you have not already done so, remove the Prefinal Software diskette from the drive.

Verify Acceptable Histograms

1. Load the customer’s preferred operating system.
r If SYSTEM II is the customer’s preferred operating system, under Heading 4.2, refer
to the If SYSTEM II is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System heading, as
needed.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the customer’s preferred operating system, under Heading 4.2,
refer to the If EXPO32 ADC is the Customer’s Preferred Operating System heading,
as needed.

4.15-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION 4
2. Create a protocol called LIN/LOG SWITCH POINT 1 TEST according to Table 4.15-1
and the setting information below this table.
Table 4.15-1 LIN/LOG SWITCH POINT 1 TEST Protocol

Histogram Parameter Signals Gain Gating Analysis Region

1 Dual FS vs. SS N/A Rectilinear gate A
2 Single FSLOG 100.0 On region A B
3 Single SSLOG 1.0 On region A C
4 Single FL1LOG 1.0 On region A D
5 Single FL2LOG 1.0 On region A E
6 Single FL3LOG 1.0 On region A F
7 Single FL4LOG 1.0 On region A G

Settings: DISCRIMINATOR FS = 35
COMPENSATION All signals = 0%
STOP On Histogram 1 for 40,000 counts
FLOW RATE LOW

3. Dispense sheath fluid to a clean test tube and run it. Adjust the High Voltage so that the
peak channel for each histogram is at channel 28 ±5 channels.
4. Ensure there are no gaps or spikes at Channel 28 in each histogram (Figure 4.15-1).

Figure 4.15-1 Unacceptable Histograms

Not acceptable Not acceptable

Spike
Gap
Count

Count

Channel 28 Channel 28

.1 Parameter .1 Parameter
7029040B

PN 4237029G 4.15-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION

5. If all histograms are free of gaps or spikes at Channel 28, go to the Reinstall Cover
heading that follows.
6. If one or more histograms exhibit gaps or spikes at Channel 28:
a. Power off the Cytometer.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC
software) under Heading 4.1, as needed.
b. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position.
c. For each histogram displaying a gap or spike at Channel 28:
1) Remove the corresponding Amp/Signal Conditioner card from the Data
Acquisition card cage.
2) Remove the jumper from E4 to E5. Save the jumper.
3) Reinstall the Amp/Signal Conditioner card in the card cage.
d. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the Cytometer.
7. Repeat the Calibration procedure as written until all parameters are free of gaps or spikes
at Channel 28.

Reinstall Cover
Reinstall the Cytometer top cover and any other covers removed during this procedure. Refer
to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

4.15-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PREPARING INSTRUMENT FOR SHIPMENT 4
4.16 PREPARING INSTRUMENT FOR SHIPMENT
Purpose
Use this procedure to prepare the instrument for shipment. This procedure should be
performed only by a Service Engineer.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B High-quality, fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of sodium hypochlorite -
available chlorine)
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mm test tube, PN 2523749
B COULTER EPICS XL/XL-MCL Prefinal Software diskette, PN 7231244
B 1 gal. deionized or distilled water (found in most laboratories)

Procedure
ATTENTION: Blood can clog lines. If fluids are not cleaned from the lines after use, clogging can
occur. If blood was processed in the instrument, the instrument must be cleaned with bleach
before performing the rest of this procedure.
1. If blood was processed in the system:
a. Wipe the outer covers of the instrument with a freshly prepared bleach solution.
Note: Beckman Coulter recommends using a fresh solution of one part high-quality,
fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of sodium hypochlorite - available
chlorine) and one part deionized or distilled water.
b. Run a test tube of bleach through both the manual sample stage and the MCL
option. (Use undiluted bleach.)
2. Ensure that an empty, 12 x 75-mm test tube is on the manual sample stage.
3. Pull out the reagent drawer and empty the sheath and the cleanse agent containers.
4. Thoroughly rinse both containers with tap water.
5. Fill both the containers with deionized water.
6. Push the reagent drawer back into the Cytometer.
7. Install the Prefinal Software diskette as directed under Heading 4.2, PREFINAL SERVICE
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION.
8. At the Prefinal Test Menu, select VALVE SEQUENCE and press Û to drain the system.
9. When the Valve Sequence routine is complete, select PRIME and press Û to flush the
sheath fluid out of the sheath and waste lines.
10. When the Prime routine is complete, select SHUTDOWN AND CLEANUP and press Û to
sequentially activate the solenoid valves through the flushing and purging functions to
push out all the sheath fluid and cleaning agent.
11. Repeat the Shutdown and Cleanup routine three times.
12. Pull out the reagent drawer and empty the deionized water from both tanks.
13. Reinstall the sheath and cleanse containers into the reagent drawer and close the drawer.
14. Run the Shutdown and Cleanup routine four more times to blow the system dry.

PN 4237029G 4.16-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
PREPARING INSTRUMENT FOR SHIPMENT

15. When you have completed the Valve Sequence routine, follow the exit directions at the
bottom of the screen.
16. Empty and rinse out the waste tank.
17. Place a test tube on the sample stage.
18. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
19. Remove all the ac power line cords and prepare the instrument for packaging.

4.16-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
INSTRUMENT SHUTDOWN 4
4.17 INSTRUMENT SHUTDOWN
Purpose
Ensure that you go through this procedure once with the customer before leaving the site.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B One, empty, 12 x 75-mm test tube, PN 2523749
B IsoFlow sheath fluid, PN 8547008

Procedure
1. With the Cytometer in the Run mode and the Computer Workstation in the Acquisition
Halted mode, remove the sample tube from the sample station. The sample station
remains in the down position.
2. Press the CLEANSE button on the sample station and verify that the CLEANSE indicator
reads ON.
3. When the cleanse cycle is complete, verify that the CLEANSE indicator reads OFF.
4. Fill a test tube approximately 1/3 full with sheath fluid and insert it into the sample
station.
5. Turn off the Computer Workstation and the Power Supply module. Ensure that the
Cytometer's sample station rises and that the Cytometer turns off.

PN 4237029G 4.17-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
INSTRUMENT SHUTDOWN

4.17-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
THREE-WIRE CIRCUIT ANALYZER TEST 4
4.18 THREE-WIRE CIRCUIT ANALYZER TEST
Purpose
This test allows you to determine if the standard 115 Vac receptacle (NEMA 5-15R or
NEMA 5-20R) has electrical wiring faults. The 3-wire circuit analyzer is not however, a
comprehensive instrument. The analyzer has the following limitations:

r Will not test for:

t Ground and neutral reversed (see the following procedure, Reverse/Shorted
Ground/Neutral Test)
t Ground and neutral wired together
t Ground fault circuit interrupt (G.F.C.I.) in circuit
r Will not normally trip G.F.C.I.
r Circuit capacitance may indicate continuity in an open circuit.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B 3-wire circuit analyzer, PN 2906883

Procedure
1. Unplug all the equipment on the branch circuit.
2. Insert the 3-wire circuit analyzer into the receptacle and take readings.
3. Compare the readings with Table 4.18-1. If you receive any readings other than Correct,
refer the problem to an electrician.
4. Perform the reverse/shorted ground/neutral test as directed under the following
procedure, Reverse/Shorted Ground/Neutral Test.

Table 4.18-1 Indicator Troubleshooting

Indicator Fault Reason for Wiring Fault

Open ground Ground contact not connected

Open neutral Neutral contact not connected

Open hot Hot contact not connected

Hot/ground reverse Hot and ground contact interchanged

Hot/neutral reverse Hot and neutral contact interchanged

Correct Receptacle is wired correctly

PN 4237029G 4.18-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
THREE-WIRE CIRCUIT ANALYZER TEST

Reverse/Shorted Ground/Neutral Test

ATTENTION: If the receptacle passes the THREE-WIRE CIRCUIT ANALYZER TEST, you must
perform the reverse/shorted ground/neutral test as described in the following procedure.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B 3-wire circuit analyzer, PN 2906883

Procedure
1. Place the 3-wire circuit analyzer’s meter leads as shown in Figure 4.18-1. Record the
reading.

Figure 4.18-1 Meter Lead Connection - 1

2. Place the meter leads as shown in Figure 4.18-2. Record the reading.

Figure 4.18-2 Meter Lead Connection - 2

3. The difference between the two readings should be 0.5 to 1.0 V with the Figure 4.18-1
reading being less than the Figure 4.18-2 reading.
4. If step 3 fails, the neutral and ground may be reversed or shorted together.
5. Refer any problems found to an electrician.

4.18-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply) 4
4.19 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
Purpose
Perform this procedure to replace or verify operation of the following power supplies:

r On XL flow cytometers -
t +5 Vdc
t ±15 Vdc
t +24 Vdc
r On XL-MCL flow cytometers -
t +5 Vdc
t ±15 Vdc
t +24 Vdc
t MCL +24 Vdc
t MCL +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc

These power supplies are located in the right side compartment of the Power Supply module.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B +5 Vdc Power Supply, PN 7000356
B ±15 Vdc Power Supply, PN 7000355
B +24 Vdc Power Supply, PN 7000357
B MCL Power Supply assembly (+5 Vdc, ±12 Vdc, and +24 Vdc), PN 7000362

Preparation
1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. At the Power Supply module:
a. Remove the Power Supply module three-sided cover. Refer to Heading 4.25,
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the safety interlock
switch in the Power Supply module is defeated, as you may be exposed to electric shock. After servicing the
instrument, make sure the three-sided cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock switch
if it was bypassed while servicing the instrument.

b. Defeat the interlock by pulling interlock bypass switch up.

PN 4237029G 4.19-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

Removal
1. Locate the power supply that needs replaced. For power supply locations, refer to
Figure A.6-4, as needed.
2. Remove the defective power supply.

Replacement
1. Install the replacement power supply.
2. Plug the Power Supply module’s ac power line cords into the appropriate wall outlets.
3. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
4. Wait 15 minutes to allow the Power Supply module to warm up.
5. Go to Heading 4.21, POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT
to make the appropriate adjustments.
r +24 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment
r +5 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment
r ±15 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment
r MCL Voltage Verification and Adjustment, if applicable.

4.19-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Universal Power Supply) 4
4.20 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Universal Power Supply)
Purpose
Perform this procedure to replace or verify operation of the following power supplies:

r On XL flow cytometers -
t +5 Vdc
t ±15 Vdc
t +24 Vdc
r On XL flow cytometers -
t +5 Vdc
t ±15 Vdc
t +24 Vdc
t MCL +24 Vdc
t MCL +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc
These power supplies are located in the right side compartment of the Universal Power
Supply.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B One or more of the following power supplies, as needed:
r +5 Vdc Power Supply, PN 627179
r ±15 Vdc Power Supply, PN 627180
r +24 Vdc Power Supply, PN 627181
r MCL Power Supply assembly (+5 Vdc, ±12 Vdc, and +24 Vdc), PN 627182

Preparation
1. Power down the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. Unplug both ac power line cords from the wall outlet. To locate the SYSTEM POWER
cables, refer to Figure A.7-6 as needed.
3. Remove the Universal Power Supply main cover. Refer to Procedure 21 under
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
4. Pull the interlock bypass switch up to defeat the interlock. To locate the interlock bypass
switch, refer to Figure A.7-5 as needed.

PN 4237029G 4.20-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT (in a Universal Power Supply)

Removal
1. Locate the power supply that needs replaced. For power supply locations, refer to
Figure A.7-5 as needed.
2. Remove the defective power supply.

Replacement
1. Install the replacement power supply.
2. Plug the Universal Power Supply ac power line cords into the appropriate wall outlets.
3. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
4. Wait 15 minutes to allow the Power Supply module to warm up.
5. Go to Heading 4.21, POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT
to make the appropriate adjustments:
r +24 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment
r +5 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment
r ±15 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment
r MCL Voltage Verification and Adjustment, if applicable.

4.20-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT 4
4.21 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Purpose
Perform this procedure to verify (and adjust if needed) voltages at the following power
supplies:

r +5 Vdc
r ±15 Vdc
r +24 Vdc
r MCL +24 Vdc*
r MCL +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc*
* Power supplies are standard inside a Universal Power Supply but are in a Voltage-Specific
Power Supply only if the MCL option is installed.
The voltages in this procedure are measured at the Analyzer backplane but adjustments are
made on the corresponding power supply in the right-side compartment of the Power Supply
module. Since these power supplies are purchased from a vendor, the location of an
adjustment potentiometer may differ from instrument to instrument.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
B Trimmer pot adjustment tool, PN 5402071

+24 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment

Preparation
1. Remove the Cytometer center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside. Refer to
Procedure 15 under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you
need detailed instructions.

CAUTION Risk of damage to electrical components on the front panel display circuit card. Do not use a
T-handled hex key to hold the upper cover open. If the metal in the T-handle comes in contact with the
electrical components on the circuit card, the components may short out and the card becomes defective.

2. Lift the front panel display cover and place a long screwdriver (with a plastic handle) in
the upper frame channel to brace the cover open (Figure 4.21-1).

PN 4237029G 4.21-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

Figure 4.21-1 Bracing the Front Panel Display Cover Open

Cytometer
upper cover (open)

Long screwdriver
(with plastic handle)

Channel
(upper right)
7029129G

+24 Vdc Verification

1. Locate J66 attached to the lower edge of the front of the Analyzer backplane
(Figure 4.21-2).

Figure 4.21-2 J66 and Pin Locations for +24 Vdc Voltage Verification

J66

GND 24 Vdc
13 or 12 10 or 9 7029216G

4.21-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT 4
2. Connect the negative DVM test lead to Pin 12 or 13 and the positive DVM test lead to
Pin 9 or 10 (Figure 4.21-2).
3. Record the voltage reading.
4. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set the cover aside. Refer to Procedure 1 under
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
5. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Make sure both
hinges are locked before releasing your grip. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25
if you need detailed instructions.
6. Verify the DVM voltage reading matches the voltage reading recorded on the sticker
attached to the side of the Data Acquisition card cage.
r If the voltage matches and other voltage readings are required:
1) Remove the screwdriver and lower the front panel display cover.
2) Reinstall the Cytometer center front cover (filter cover). Refer to Procedure 15
under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3) Proceed to the appropriate heading.
r If the voltage matches and no other voltage readings are required:
1) Remove the screwdriver and lower the front panel display cover.
2) Reinstall the Cytometer center front cover (filter cover). Refer to Procedure 15
under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3) Gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the flow
cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
4) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
r If the voltage does not match, go to the +24 Vdc Adjustment heading that follows.

+24 Vdc Adjustment

ATTENTION: The +24 Vdc voltage is measured at the Analyzer backplane, but the adjustment is
made on the +24 Vdc linear power supply in the right-side compartment of the Power Supply
module.
r For the +24 Vdc linear power supply location on a Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
refer to Figure A.6-4.
r For the +24 Vdc linear power supply location on a Universal Power Supply, refer to
Figure A.7-5.
1. Adjust R10 on the +24 Vdc linear power supply to obtain the voltage reading recorded
on the sticker attached to the Data Acquisition card cage.

PN 4237029G 4.21-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

2. How to proceed:
r If other voltage readings are required, proceed to the appropriate heading.
r If no other voltage readings are required:
1) Remove the screwdriver and lower the front panel display cover.
2) Reinstall the Cytometer center front cover (filter cover). Refer to Procedure 15
under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3) Gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the flow
cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
4) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
5) Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION
PROCEDURE (SVP).
r If you did this adjustment because the +24 Vdc linear power supply was replaced,
perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION
PROCEDURE (SVP).

+5 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment

Preparation
If you have not already done so:
1. Remove the Cytometer top cover. Refer to Procedure 1 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Make sure both
hinges are locked before releasing your grip. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25
if you need detailed instructions.

+5 Vdc Verification
1. At the Analyzer backplane, connect the negative DVM test lead to TP2 (DGND) and the
positive DVM test lead to TP1 (yellow). For test point and/or ground locations, refer to
Figure A.2-3.
2. Verify the DVM voltage reading matches the voltage reading recorded on the sticker
attached to the side of the Data Acquisition card cage.
r If the voltage matches and other voltage readings are required, proceed to the
appropriate heading.
r If the voltage matches and no other voltage readings are required,
1) Gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the flow
cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
2) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
r If the voltage does not match, go to the +5 Vdc Adjustment heading that follows.

4.21-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT 4
+5 Vdc Adjustment
ATTENTION: The +5 Vdc voltage is measured at the Analyzer backplane, but the adjustment is
made on the +5 Vdc linear power supply in the right-side compartment of the Power Supply
module.
r For the +5 Vdc linear power supply location on a Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
refer to Figure A.6-4.
r For the +5 Vdc linear power supply location on a Universal Power Supply, refer to
Figure A.7-5.
1. Adjust the R11 potentiometer on the +5 Vdc linear power supply to obtain the voltage
reading recorded on the sticker attached to the Data Acquisition card cage.
2. How to proceed:
r If other voltage readings are required, proceed to the appropriate heading.
r If no other voltage readings are required:
1) Gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the flow
cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
2) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3) Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION
PROCEDURE (SVP).
r If you did this adjustment because the +5 Vdc linear power supply was replaced,
perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION
PROCEDURE (SVP).

±15 Vdc Power Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment

Preparation
If you have not already done so:
1. Remove the Cytometer top cover. Refer to Procedure 1 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position. Make sure both
hinges are locked before releasing your grip. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25
if you need detailed instructions.

+15 Vdc Verification

1. At the Analyzer backplane, connect the negative DVM test lead to TP5 (AGND) and the
positive DVM test lead to TP4 (orange). For test point and/or ground locations, refer to
Figure A.2-3.
2. Verify the DVM voltage reading matches the voltage reading recorded on the sticker
attached to the side of the Data Acquisition card cage.
r If the voltage matches, do the -15 Vdc Verification that follows.
r If the voltage does not match, go to the +15 Vdc or -15 Vdc Adjustment heading.

PN 4237029G 4.21-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

-15 Vdc Verification

1. At the Analyzer backplane, connect the negative DVM test lead to TP5 (AGND) and the
positive DVM test lead to TP3 (green). For test point and/or ground locations, refer to
Figure A.2-3.
2. Verify the DVM voltage reading matches the voltage reading recorded on the sticker
attached to the side of the Data Acquisition card cage.
r If the voltage matches and other voltage readings are required, proceed to the
appropriate heading.
r If the voltage matches and no other voltage readings are required:
1) Gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the flow
cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
2) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
r If the voltage does not match, go to the +15 Vdc or -15 Vdc Adjustment heading.

+15 Vdc or -15 Vdc Adjustment

ATTENTION: The +15 Vdc and -15 Vdc voltages are measured at the Analyzer backplane, but
the adjustments are made on the ±15 Vdc linear power supply in the right-side compartment
of the Power Supply module.
r For the ±15 Vdc linear power supply location on a Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
refer to Figure A.6-4.
r For the ±15 Vdc linear power supply location on a Universal Power Supply, refer to
Figure A.7-5.
1. Adjust the V.ADJ. potentiometer on the ±15 Vdc linear power supply to obtain the
voltage reading recorded on the sticker attached to the Data Acquisition card cage.
r Never adjust the potentiometer labeled I.LIM.
r Two potentiometers are labeled V.ADJ. One increases the voltage and the other
decreases the voltage. Since these two potentiometers are labeled identically, locate
one of the potentiometers, make a small adjustment, then check the voltage to
verify you are making the desired change. If not, locate the other potentiometer
labeled V.ADJ. before proceeding.
2. How to proceed:
r If the voltage matches and other voltage readings are required, proceed to the
appropriate heading.
r If the voltage matches and no other voltage readings are required:
1) Gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity of the flow
cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.
2) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
3) Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION
PROCEDURE (SVP).

4.21-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT 4
r If you did this adjustment because the ±15 Vdc linear power supply was replaced,
perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION
PROCEDURE (SVP).

MCL Voltage Verification and Adjustment, if applicable

Preparation
1. Remove the left-side cover. Refer to Procedure 13 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. Locate the MCL CPU card. It is the large card towards the rear of the Cytometer.

MCL Voltage Verification

1. In Table 4.21-1, locate the voltage you wish to check.

Table 4.21-1 MCL CPU Card

Voltage and Acceptable Range Test Point Ground

+5.2 Vdc ±0.05 TP1 TP2 (GND)
-12 Vdc ±0.05 TP3 TP2 (GND)
+12 Vdc ±0.05 TP4 TP2 (GND)
+24 Vdc ±0.05 TP5 TP2 (GND)

2. At the MCL CPU card:

a. Connect the negative DVM test lead to TP2. For the test point location, refer to
Figure A.2-13.
b. Connect the positive DVM test lead to the desired test point. For a test point
location, refer to Figure A.2-13 as needed.
3. Verify the DVM voltage reading is within the voltage range listed in Table 4.21-1.
r If the voltage is acceptable, go back to step 1 to determine the next voltage you wish
to check. Make sure each voltage is within the acceptable limits listed in
Table 4.21-1.
r If a voltage does not match, go to the MCL Voltage Adjustment heading that follows.
4. How to proceed if all MCL voltages are within the acceptable range:
r If other voltage readings are required, proceed to the appropriate heading.
r If these voltages were verified as part of an instrument installation with a Universal
Power Supply and no other voltage readings are required, go to Heading 4.14,
TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION
and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the offset of each
Amp/Signal Conditioner card and is the next step in the instrument installation.
r If these voltages were verified as part of an instrument installation with a
Voltage-Specific Power Supply and no other voltage readings are required, go to
Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the
offset of each Amp/Signal Conditioner card and is the next step in the instrument
installation.

PN 4237029G 4.21-7
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

r If these voltages were verified as part of the MCL Upgrade procedure, go back to the
MCL Alignment heading (under Heading 3.11) to complete the installation.
r If no other voltage readings are required:
1) Reinstall the left-side cover. Refer to Procedure 13 under Heading 4.25,
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2) If applicable, gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity
of the flow cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
3) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

MCL Voltage Adjustment

ATTENTION: The MCL voltages are measured at the MCL CPU card, but adjustments are made
on the corresponding MCL power supply in the right-side compartment of the Power Supply
module.
r For MCL power supply locations on a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, refer to
Figure A.6-4.
r For MCL power supply locations on a Universal Power Supply, refer to
Figure A.7-5.
1. Locate the voltage that requires adjustment on Table 4.21-2.
Table 4.21-2 MCL Power Supply Voltage Adjustments

Voltage and Acceptable Range Adjustment Potentiometer on an MCL Power Supply

+5.2 Vdc ±0.05 Use +5V ADJ on the +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
-12 Vdc ±0.05 Use -12V ADJ on the +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
+12 Vdc ±0.05 Use +12V ADJ on the +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
+24 Vdc ±0.05 Use V ADJ on the +24 Vdc MCL power supply

2. Use the designated adjustment potentiometer to bring the voltage within the acceptable
range.
3. How to proceed if all MCL voltages are within the acceptable range:
r If other voltage readings are required, proceed to the appropriate heading.
r If these voltages were verified as part of an instrument installation with a Universal
Power Supply and no other voltage readings are required, go to Heading 4.14,
TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION
and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the offset of each
Amp/Signal Conditioner card and is the next step in the instrument installation.
r If these voltages were verified as part of an instrument installation with a
Voltage-Specific Power Supply and no other voltage readings are required, go to
Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the
offset of each Amp/Signal Conditioner card and is the next step in the instrument
installation.

4.21-8 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT 4
r If these voltages were verified as part of the MCL Upgrade procedure, go back to the
MCL Alignment heading (under Heading 3.11) to complete the installation.
r If no other voltage readings are required:
1) Reinstall the left-side cover. Refer to Procedure 13 under Heading 4.25,
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2) If applicable, gently lower the Data Acquisition card cage into the center cavity
of the flow cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
3) Reinstall any covers removed. Refer to the appropriate procedure under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
4) Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION
PROCEDURE (SVP).
r If you did this adjustment because the MCL power supply was replaced, perform an
SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP).

PN 4237029G 4.21-9
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT

4.21-10 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
RE-IMAGING FlowCentre™ COMPUTERS 4
4.22 RE-IMAGING FlowCentre™ COMPUTERS
Purpose
This procedure provides the instruction for re-imaging the FlowCentre desktop computer,
PN 2016753, or the FlowCentre II tower computer, PN 2016874.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Re-Imaging CD-ROM. PN 7270464, for FlowCentre II tower computer PN 2016874
B Re-Imaging CD-ROM, PN 7270626, for FlowCentre desktop computer PN 2016753
Note: Imaging Utility Boot Disk, PN 6417654 will also be needed if the computer is
using a Cache Controller card.
A Licensed Norton Anti Virus CD-ROM is inside the box. The Customer can renew their
virus software through Norton as desired.

Preparation
1. Backup any files the customer may need such as protocols, listmode files, and so forth.
All information will be lost during the re-imaging process.
2. Go to the appropriate heading.
r Re-imaging a FlowCentre II Tower Computer, PN 2016874
r Re-imaging a FlowCentre Desktop Computer without a Cache Controller Card,
PN 2016753
r Re-imaging a FlowCentre Desktop Computer with a Cache Controller Card,
PN 2016753

Re-imaging a FlowCentre II Tower Computer

For the FlowCentre II tower computer, there is only one Re-Imaging CD-ROM. It is a
bootable CD-ROM. Remember that before you re-image a computer, all information WILL be
lost. Back up any protocols, listmode files or anything else that the customer may need.

Re-imaging a FlowCentre Desktop Computer without a Cache Controller Card

ATTENTION: The Re-Imaging CD, PN 7270626, works with any hard drive or video card that
we use on this system. The hard drives used on this system have ranged from 3.2 GB to
6.4 GB.
r When re-imaging a 3.2 GB hard drive, you will have a 2 GB partition (Drive C) for
DOS and a 1.2 GB (Drive D) partition for Windows.
r When re-imaging a 6.4 GB hard drive, you will have a 2 GB partition (Drive C) for
DOS and a 2 GB (Drive D) partition for Windows. You will not be able to use the
full 6.4 GB of the drive because it would require that Beckman Coulter purchase a
new license for using Windows 95 version in our computers. This is not going to be
done.
1. Place the CD-ROM in the CD drive.
2. Press the re-boot button.

PN 4237029G 4.22-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
RE-IMAGING FlowCentre™ COMPUTERS

3. When the computer is running the memory test, hit the delete key to get into the C-MOS
setup. You will have to type AUER for the password.
4. In CMOS, select the Advance Setup and change the following:
1st boot = Floppy
2nd boot = CDROM
3rd boot = IDE=0
5. Save changes and allow the computer to re-boot. Type C to re-image the drive
6. After the computer re-images, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and re-boot the
computer. At the menu, select DOS.
7. At the C:\ prompt, choose the proper instrument type, by typing, XL_inst or ALT_inst for
the correct instrument.
8. Re-boot the computer and ensure it functions correctly for which instrument you have.
9. Re-boot into Windows at the menu and allow it to finish booting up.
10. Re-load any customer Windows based software, which they purchased from Beckman
Coulter.
11. Re-boot into DOS and re-load any of the customers files needed.

Re-imaging a FlowCentre Desktop Computer with a Cache Controller Card

ATTENTION: The Re-Imaging CD, PN 7270626, works with any hard drive or video card that
we use on this system.
r The hard drives used on this system have ranged from 3.2 GB to 6.4 GB.
t When re-imaging a 3.2 GB hard drive, you will have a 2 GB partition (Drive C) for
DOS and a 1.2 GB (Drive D) partition for Windows.
t When re-imaging a 6.4 GB hard drive, you will have a 2 GB partition (Drive C) for
DOS and a 2 GB (Drive D) partition for Windows. You will not be able to use the
full 6.4 GB of the drive because it would require that Beckman Coulter purchase a
new license for using Windows 95 version in our computers. This is not going to be
done.
r With a Cashe Controller card present, the CD-ROM drive cannot be used as a bootable
device. This means you need to use the Imaging Utility Boot Disk, the 3.5 in. bootable
diskette.
1. Place the 3.5 in. disk into the floppy drive
2. Place the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive
3. Re-boot the computer and type image when requested to re-image the drive
4. After the computer re-images, remove the CD-ROM and the 3.5” disk from the drives
and re-boot the computer. At the menu, select DOS.
5. At the C:\ prompt, choose the proper instrument type, by typing, XL_inst or ALT_inst for
the correct instrument.
6. Re-boot the computer and ensure it functions correctly for which instrument you have.

4.22-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
RE-IMAGING FlowCentre™ COMPUTERS 4
7. Re-boot into Windows at the menu and allow it to finish booting up.
Note: Also when re-imaging this type, when requested to restart the computer after new
hardware is found, select NO until after it has found the secondary controller card. It will
find the sound card and the primary control card but do not re-start until it finds the
secondary controller.
8. Re-load any Windows based software the customer purchased from Beckman Coulter.
9. Re-boot into DOS and re-load any of the customers files needed.

PN 4237029G 4.22-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
RE-IMAGING FlowCentre™ COMPUTERS

4.22-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
UNIVERSAL CD-ROM DRIVER SETUP 4
4.23 UNIVERSAL CD-ROM DRIVER SETUP
Purpose
This procedure provides the instructions for installing a driver that works with all types of
CD-ROM drives. This driver can be setup on any computer using Windows 95 or higher.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Unused 3.5 in. floppy diskette, PN 2016394

Preparation
1. Obtain a clean 3.5 in. floppy diskette.
2. At the Windows Desktop screen, click on the Windows Start button tt Settings tt Control
Panel.
3. Double click on Add/Remove Programs.
4. Click on the Startup Disk tab.
5. Click on Create Disk.
Note: If you are using an unformatted 3.5 in. floppy diskette, when the message appears
to inquire if you want the diskette formatted, select Yes.
6. When the disk is complete, return to the Windows desktop.

Driver Installation
1. Click on the My Computer icon to open Windows Explorer.
2. Click on 3½ Floppy (A:) to show the files on the 3.5 in. floppy disk.
3. Drag and drop the OAKCDROM.SYS file in the root directory of (C:).
a. Locate the OAKCDROM.SYS file.
b. At the OAKCDROM.SYS file, click and hold the left mouse button.
c. Drag the file to the root directory of (C:).
d. Release the left mouse button.
e. Click on C: and verify the OAKCDROM.SYS file is now located in the root directory.
4. Reboot the computer.
a. Click on the Windows Start button tt Shut Down.
b. Select Restart the computer? and click on Yes.
c. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, highlight 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS and press Û.
5. Press Ê. The message EXIT TO DOS? y/n should appear.
Note: If the message does not appear, access the Menu bar. At the Menu bar, select
Applications tt Exit and the EXIT TO DOS? y/n message should appear.
6. Type Y.
7. When the C:\XL> prompt, type XLOFF and press Û to turn off only the Cytometer.
8. At the C:\XL> prompt, type CD ß\ then press Û.

PN 4237029G 4.23-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
UNIVERSAL CD-ROM DRIVER SETUP

9. At the C:\> prompt (DOS prompt), type editßconfig.sys

a. Add this line:
DEVICE=C:\OAKCDROM.SYS/D:MSCD000
b. Save and close the file.
c. At the DOS prompt (C:\), type editßautoexec.bat.
d. In the autoexec.bat file:
1) Make sure the line C:\DOS\MSCDEX.EXE/D:MSCD000 is displayed. If not,
add the line, then save and close the file.
2) Press ç as many times as necessary to reach the line that displays: CD\XL
3) Type REM in front of the line.
4) Press ç as many times as necessary to reach the line that displays: XL2.
5) Type REM in front of the line.
10. Remove the floppy disk from the A: drive.
11. Reboot the computer.
a. Click on the Windows Start button tt Shut Down.
b. Select Restart the computer? and click on Yes.
c. When the Microsoft Windows Startup Menu appears, highlight 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS and press Û.
12. The CD-ROM should now be seen in DOS. If you did this setup as part of installing the
LANtastic software option, go back to Heading 3.18 and continue the procedure starting
at Heading Software Installation, Client Setup. Complete the procedure as written.

4.23-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING 4
4.24 BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING

IMPORTANT Risk of sample misidentification if the parameters for Code 128 bar-code symbology are
changed to a setting other than default. Code 128 is used to identify sample tube positions in the MCL. If
the default parameter settings are altered, sample tube positions may be misread. Do not reprogram the
Code 128 bar-code symbology.

Purpose
The XL-MCL has the ability to read bar-code symbologies of Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5,
Codabar, and Code 128. These configurations were chosen to optimize the maximum read
rate and fit the maximum number of characters on a label so that the label does not interfere
with MCL operation.

This procedure provides instructions on how to reprogram the bar-code scanner EEPROM so
the MCL can read bar-code labels that do not incorporate a check digit or use bar-code labels
with a different character length than the laboratory is currently using. A customer wishing to
run a XL-MCL without check digits or wishing to change the recommended character lengths
for bar-code labels must sign a letter from Beckman Coulter stating that the laboratory will
take full responsibility for misreads, or mislabeling. Contact Technical Support for proper
documentation to record this agreement.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Bar-code communications cable, PN 6028275
Note: If you service the TQ-Prep, you may already have this cable. This is the cable used
with the TQ-Prep for service diagnostics.
B Laptop computer or instrument Workstation computer running Windows 95 or higher
B Form from Technical Support to document the customer’s acceptance of responsibility

Preparation
1. Power off the Cytometer.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set it aside. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
3. Remove the left-side cover and set it aside.
Note: If the MCL option is installed, remove the MCL probe housing and unlatch the
MCL covers before removing the left-side cover. Refer to Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
4. Locate the Bar-Code Decoder card. This is the smaller of the two circuit cards attached to
the MCL main frame. See Figure 4.24-1.
5. Locate U13 and note the version of EEPROM being used on this system (Figure 4.24-1).
r OEM part number 35-213064-10 indicates an original EEPROM
r OEM part number 35-213064-11 indicates an ALL CODES EEPROM

PN 4237029G 4.24-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING

r This information is important later in this procedure.

Figure 4.24-1 Bar-Code Decoder Card with Component Locations

Bar-Code
Decoder card U13 (EEPROM)

AUX
port

7029171G

6. Connect the female end of the bar-code communications cable to the AUX port on the
Bar-Code Decoder card (Figure 4.24-1).
7. Connect the other end of the bar-code communications cable to the COM port on the
laptop computer or the instrument’s Workstation computer.
8. Power on the laptop or the instrument’s Workstation computer and access the Windows
desktop.
9. Turn on the Cytometer.
r If SYSTEM II™ is your customer’s preferred software, at the C:\XL> prompt, type
XLON and press Û to turn on the Cytometer.
r If EXPO32™ ADC is your customer’s preferred software, at the Windows Desktop,
double click on the XL On icon to power on the Cytometer.

Computer Setup
1. From the Windows desktop, select Start button tt Programs tt Accessories tt
Hyperterminal tt HyperTerminal.
2. At the Connection Description dialog box, type BARCODE and select OK.
Note: If you want to store the customized configuration in your laptop computer, assign
a name that differentiates this configuration from other laboratories.

4.24-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING 4
3. At the Connect To dialog box:
a. Locate Connect using:
b. Click on the down arrow to open the drop-down selection.
c. Select COM 1 tt OK.
4. At the Port Settings tab inside the COM1 Properties dialog box:
a. Select the communication protocol required for the EEPROM version (original or
ALL CODES) installed on the Bar-Code Decoder card.
r For the proper BAUD rate, parity, data bits, stop bits and flow control settings,
refer to Heading Communication Protocol under Heading F.2, MCL
BAR-CODE SCANNER.
r If OEM part number 35-213064-10 appears on U13, use the original EEPROM
information.
r If OEM part number 35-213064-11 appears on U13, use the ALL CODES
EEPROM information.
b. Select OK when finished.
c. The screen should show a large area with a blinking cursor in the upper left corner.
5. Select File tt Properties tt Settings tab.
6. At the Settings tab:
a. Locate Emulation.
b. Click on the down arrow to open the drop-down selection.
c. Select TTY tt OK.
7. At the keyboard, while holding down the Ü key, press < D >.
Note: The characters must be upper case. The MicroScan Systems software is case
sensitive.
8. The MicroScan Configuration Program Main Menu should be scrolling onto the
computer screen which indicates communication with the Bar-Code Decoder card is
established. Wait for the Main Menu to be completely transferred from the Bar-Code
Decoder card to your computer before continuing.

Custom Programming Sequence

1. When the MicroScan Configuration Program Main Menu is completely transferred,
MAIN ----> COMMUNICATIONS appears at the bottom of the display. This is the first of
four topics listed on the Main Menu.

IMPORTANT Risk of sample misidentification if the parameters for Code 128 bar-code symbology are
changed to a setting other than default. Code 128 is used to identify sample tube positions in the MCL. If
the default parameter settings are altered, sample tube positions may be misread. Do not reprogram the
Code 128 bar-code symbology.

2. Press ß as many times as necessary to display CODE TYPES as the topic

(MAIN ----> CODE TYPES) then press Û. The current settings for the various code
types are displayed.

PN 4237029G 4.24-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING

3. Locate Table F.2-1, MCL Bar-Code Scanner - Default Configuration. Use this information
as a reference. Code 128 settings must reflect the Default Configuration.
4. While monitoring the information to the right of the CODE TYPES ----> prompt, press
ß as many times as necessary to display the desired bar-code symbology then press
Û. CODE TYPES ----> the selected code----> STATUS appears.
5. The status appears as either ENABLED or DISABLED.
r To retain the current status, press ß to access the next parameter available for
that the selected bar-code symbology.
r To change the current status, press Û ß. Verify the desired status is
displayed then press Û to save the change. (If the desired status is not displayed,
press ß again then press Û.)
6. Press ß as many times as necessary until the next parameter requiring change is
displayed.
a. Press Û to identify you desire to change this parameter.
b. Either press ß to toggle to the desired setting or if this requires a numerical
entry, type in the numer.
c. When the desired setting is displayed, press Û to save the change.
7. Repeat step 6 until all the parameters for the selected code are set according to the
customer’s requirements.
8. When all codes are correctly set:
a. Press È. EXIT or MAIN ( E, M ) appears.
b. Press E. Do you want to save changes for power on? (Y=yes N=no) appears.
c. Press Y to save all changes for power on.
d. Verify the Bar-Code Decoder card beeps. This audible signal (one beep) indicates
the changes are registered.

If You Want to Store this Custom Configuration (Optional)

If you wish to store this configuration for access at a later time:

1. Close the computer program (click on the X in the upper right corner).
2. When the message You are currently connected. Are you sure you want to disconnect now?
appears, select Yes.
3. When the message Do you want to save session? appears, select Yes. The configuration is
stored under HyperTerminal. The Windows desktop reappears.
Note: To access from the Windows desktop, select Start button tt Programs tt Accessories tt
Hyperterminal tt HyperTerminal then select the desired configuration.

If You Do Not Want to Store this Custom Configuration

If you do not wish to store this configuration for access at a later time:

1. Close the computer program (click on the X in the upper right corner).
2. When the message You are currently connected. Are you sure you want to disconnect now?
appears, select Yes.

4.24-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING 4
3. When the message Do you want to save session? appears, select No. The Windows
desktop reappears.

Reinstall Covers
1. Turn off the Cytometer.
r If SYSTEM II™ is your customer’s preferred software, at the C:\XL> prompt, type
XLOFF and press Û to turn off the Cytometer.
r If EXPO32™ ADC is your customer’s preferred software, at the Windows Desktop,
double click on the XL Off icon to power off the Cytometer.
2. Exit all applications and turn off computer.
3. Disconnect the bar-code communications cable from the AUX port on the Bar-Code
Decoder card and from the COM port on the laptop computer or the instrument’s
Workstation computer. Set the cable aside.
4. Reinstall the left-side cover.
Note: If the MCL option is installed, relatch the MCL covers back on the Cytometer
frame and reinstall the MCL probe housing. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL
AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
5. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover. Refer to Heading 4.25 if you need detailed
instructions.

Verification
1. Turn on the Cytometer.
r If SYSTEM II™ is your customer’s preferred software, at the C:\XL> prompt, type
XLON and press Û to turn on the Cytometer.
r If EXPO32™ ADC is your customer’s preferred software, at the Windows Desktop,
double click on the XL On icon to power on the Cytometer.
2. Verify the customer’s bar-code labels can be read.

PN 4237029G 4.24-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
BAR-CODE SCANNER EEPROM CUSTOM PROGRAMMING

4.24-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
4.25 COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
Instructions for Use
The procedures in this section provide instructions on how to properly remove or reinstall a
cover or how to properly open or close a cover. They are organized in physical sections that
correlate with the area of the instrument you need to access.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Instrument doors, covers, and panels that are mishandled
can fail, leading to personal injury. Handle the doors, covers, and panels with care and always follow the
written instructions for opening and closing or removing and reinstalling them.

The following anchor illustrations serve as a reference point for accessing a specific procedure
that includes illustration(s). To quickly access procedures involving:
r An exterior cover for an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, use Figure 4.25-1.
Note: This is an anchor illustration of an XL-MCL flow cytometer, but may also be used
for an XL flow cytometer.
r A cover inside the Cytometer, use Figure 4.25-2.
r A Voltage-Specific Power Supply cover, use Figure 4.25-3.
r A Universal Power Supply cover, use Figure 4.25-4.

If you have never used an anchor illustration to locate a procedure, you may want to begin by
reading the following instructions:
1. To quickly locate a procedure, always begin at the most appropriate anchor illustration.
r Figure 4.25-1, Exterior Cytometer Cover Procedures, Anchor Illustration
r Figure 4.25-2, Interior Cytometer Access Procedures, Anchor Illustration
r Figure 4.25-3, Voltage-Specific Power Supply Procedures, Anchor Illustration
r Figure 4.25-4, Universal Power Supply Procedures, Anchor Illustration
2. Locate the cover on the anchor illustration and note the letter associated with that cover.
3. Locate the associated letter in the Figure Reference column.
4. Go to the referenced procedure.
Note: In the electronic version, each procedure reference is in hypertext so that when
you select the reference, the procedure quickly appears. Using the hypertext links is the
fastest way to access a procedure.
r A procedure that provides instructions for removing and reinstalling a cover begins
with how to remove the cover which is followed by how to reinstall the cover.
r A procedure that provides instructions for opening and closing a cover begins with
how to open the cover which is followed by how to close the cover.

PN 4237029G 4.25-1
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Exterior Cytometer Covers, Anchor Illustration for Locating Procedures

Use Figure 4.25-1 as a reference for locating the procedure for opening and closing or
removing and reinstalling an external Cytometer cover.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Covers and interlocks are installed on Beckman Coulter instruments to
prevent injury from operating components. If you must remove covers or disable interlocks to service an instrument:
r Be alert and use extreme care when working around exposed components to avoid personal injury.
r At the end of the service call, always reinstall all instrument covers and ensure interlocks are enabled to prevent
operator injury.

Figure 4.25-1 Exterior Cytometer Cover Procedures, Anchor Illustration Figure Reference
A A How to Remove and Reinstall the
J Cytometer Top Cover — Procedure 1
B How to Remove and Reinstall the
Cytometer Right-Side Cover —
Procedure 2
C How to Remove and Reinstall the
Center Front Cover (Filter Cover) —
B Procedure 3
I
D How to Properly Open and Close the
Cytometer Reagent Drawer —
C Procedure 4
E How to Remove and Reinstall the
Cytometer Upper Rear Cover —
Epics XL MCL D
Procedure 5
F How to Remove and Reinstall the
H G
Cytometer Lower Rear Cover —
Procedure 6
E
G How to Remove and Reinstall the
Manual Sample Station, Cytometer
with MCL Option — Procedure 7
How to Remove and Reinstall the
Manual Sample Station, Cytometer
without MCL Option — Procedure 8
H How to Open and Close the MCL Door
— Procedure 9
How to Unlatch and Relatch the MCL
Covers — Procedure 10
POWER MODULE
How to Remove and Reinstall MCL
LOGIC ANALOG

Covers — Procedure 11
CONTROL
FIBER
OPTIC
SCOPE A TRANS

SCOPE B REC.
I How to Remove and Reinstall the MCL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE
FLOWCELL
WASTE Probe Housing — Procedure 12
J How to Remove and Reinstall the
Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer
with MCL Option Installed) —
F 7029229G Procedure 13
How to Remove and Reinstall the
Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer
without MCL Option) — Procedure 14

4.25-2 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Access Inside the Cytometer, Anchor Illustration for Locating Procedures
Use Figure 4.25-2 as a reference for locating the procedure needed to access components
inside the Cytometer.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Covers and interlocks are installed on Beckman Coulter instruments to
prevent injury from operating components. If you must remove covers or disable interlocks to service an instrument:
r Be alert and use extreme care when working around exposed components to avoid personal injury.
r At the end of the service call, always reinstall all instrument covers and ensure interlocks are enabled to prevent
operator injury.

Figure 4.25-2 Interior Cytometer Access Procedures, Anchor Illustration Figure Reference
A How to Remove and Reinstall the
Filter Shield — Procedure 15
A B How to Remove and Reinstall the
Data Acquisition Card Cage —
Procedure 16
C How to Remove and Reinstall the
Lower Pneumatics Drawer —
Procedure 17
Coulter
Epics XL • MCL
D How to Remove and Reinstall the
Upper Pneumatics Drawer EMC
Shield — Procedure 18
B

7029237G

PN 4237029G 4.25-3
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Voltage-Specific Power Supply Covers, Anchor Illustration for Locating Procedures

Use Figure 4.25-3 as a reference for locating a procedure involving a Voltage-Specific Power
Supply cover.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Covers and interlocks are installed on Beckman Coulter instruments to
prevent injury from operating components. If you must remove covers or disable interlocks to service an instrument:
r Be alert and use extreme care when working around exposed components to avoid personal injury.
r At the end of the service call, always reinstall all instrument covers and ensure interlocks are enabled to prevent
operator injury.

Figure 4.25-3 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Procedures, Anchor Illustration Figure Reference
A A How to Remove and Reinstall
B
the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply Three-Side Cover —
Procedure 19
B How to Open and Close the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply
Front Door — Procedure 20

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
AIR
FILTER 30
PSI

SYS SYS MCL POWER

VAC PRESS

PRESS
ADJ

7029250G

4.25-4 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Universal Power Supply Covers, Anchor Illustration for Locating Procedures
Use Figure 4.25-4 as a reference for locating a procedure involving a Universal Power Supply
cover.

WARNING Risk of personal or operator injury. Covers and interlocks are installed on Beckman Coulter instruments to
prevent injury from operating components. If you must remove covers or disable interlocks to service an instrument:
r Be alert and use extreme care when working around exposed components to avoid personal injury.
r At the end of the service call, always reinstall all instrument covers and ensure interlocks are enabled to prevent
operator injury.

Figure 4.25-4 Universal Power Supply Procedures, Anchor Illustration Figure Reference
A A How to Remove and Reinstall
B
the Universal Power Supply
Main Cover — Procedure 21
B How to Open and Close the
Universal Power Supply Front
Door — Procedure 22
C How to Remove and Reinstall
VAC
FILTER the Universal Power Supply
Cable Cover Only —
VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
+5V
Procedure 23
AIR +15V
E FILTER
30
PSI
-15V
+24V D How to Remove and Reinstall
MCL POWER
SYS
VAC
SYS
PRESS +5V
+15V
the Universal Power Supply
PRESS
ADJ
-15V
+24V Back Cover — Procedure 24
E How to Remove and Reinstall
the UPS Pneumatics Drawer —
Procedure 25

7318294D

PN 4237029G 4.25-5
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 1
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Top Cover
The Cytometer interlock switch and Data Acquisition card cage are accessible when the
Cytometer top cover is removed. The rear section of the optical collection area is also
accessible when the Cytometer top cover is removed and the Data Acquisition card cage is
removed from the center cavity. See Figures A.5-3 and A.5-4 for components that are
accessible with the top cover removed and Tables A.5-3 and A.5-4 for a description of
component functions.

The top cover can be removed without affecting instrument operation, as long as the
interlock is disabled (bypassed). The top cover must be removed before either the left-side or
right-side covers can be removed.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Cytometer Top Cover

1. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top cover
to the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-5).

Figure 4.25-5 Cytometer Top Cover Removal or Installation

Top cover Remove screws (4)

THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS

TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR,
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTIONS 1040.10
AND 1040.11.

Manufactured:
DATE 19 by:

OF COULTER CORPORATION Hialeah Fl,

2413944

T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

7029228F

2. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-5).
3. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
Note: If the laser is on when the top cover is removed, an interlock turns off power to the
laser head. To bypass this interlock, see the Cytometer Interlock Switch heading that follows.

4.25-6 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Cytometer Interlock Switch
The Cytometer interlock switch (Figure 4.25-6) is a safety interlock to ensure the Cytometer
top cover is in place when the Argon laser is on. If the laser is on and the top cover is
removed, this interlock turns off the power to the Argon laser head.

Figure 4.25-6 Interlock Switch Location, Cytometer

Pull up to bypass
Cytometer
interlock switch

7029249F

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the safety interlock
switch in the Cytometer is defeated, as you may be exposed to the laser beam and/or electric shock. After
servicing the instrument, make sure the top cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock
switch if bypassed while servicing the instrument.

WARNING Risk of eye injury. If the safety interlock is bypassed, the Argon laser powers on and the
potential for injury exists. Reflections of the laser beam off a shiny object such as a screwdriver, or direct
viewing of the laser beam can severely damage your eyes. When performing replacement or adjustment
procedures:
r Wear laser safety glasses as required by the wavelength being used.
r Pay attention to the warning labels.
r Do NOT wear jewelry that might reflect the laser beam.
r Do NOT directly observe the intersection of the laser beam and the targets.

To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch up and power is restored to the
Argon laser head even though the cover is removed.

Always be very careful if you bypass this safety interlock and operate the instrument with the
covers off. The interlock switch is reset when the cover is reinstalled.

Reinstalling the Cytometer Top Cover

1. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
2. Make sure the top cover is properly seated. The interlock switch is automatically reset.
3. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by tightening
the four Phillips-head screws (Figure 4.25-5).

PN 4237029G 4.25-7
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 2
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Right-Side Cover
Removing the Cytometer right-side cover provides access to the upper pneumatics drawer
and the water trap filter, VL33, manifold, and cooling coil mounted on the back of the rear
panel. See Figure A.5-5 for the components that are accessible with the right-side cover
removed and Table A.5-5 for a description of component functions. The top cover must be
removed before the right-side cover can be removed.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Cytometer Right-Side Cover

1. Remove the Cytometer top cover (Figure 4.25-7, item 1).
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
2. Pull the right-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-7, item 2).

Figure 4.25-7 Cytometer Right-Side Cover Removal or Installation

1 Remove screws (4) Top cover

2 Right-side
cover

THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS

TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR,
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTIONS 1040.10
AND 1040.11.

Manufactured:
DATE 19 by:

OF COULTER CORPORATION Hialeah Fl,

2413944

T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

7029227F

3. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

4.25-8 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Reinstalling the Cytometer Right-Side Cover
1. Position the right-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
2. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-7, item 2).
3. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
4. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover (Figure 4.25-7, item 1).
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.

PN 4237029G 4.25-9
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 3
How to Remove and Reinstall the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover)
Removing the center front cover (as referred to as the filter cover) allows access to the filter
shield, the individual light filters, and the ND1 filter positioning knob. See Figure A.5-6 for
the components that are accessible with the center front cover removed and Table A.5-6 for a
description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Removing the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover)

Figure 4.25-8 Removing the Center Front Cover

1. Grasp the curved outer edges

of the center front cover (filter
cover) and pull the cover
forward (Figure 4.25-8).
2. Set the cover aside in a safe
place where it will not be
damaged.
7029230F

Reinstalling the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover)

Figure 4.25-9 Reinstalling the Center Front Cover

1. Position the latch on each end

of the center front cover (filter
cover) near its corresponding
catch on the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-9).
2. Push the center front cover
back on the instrument. The
latches snap into place to
7029231F secure the cover to the
Cytometer frame.
Note: The center front cover
fits over the lower edge of the
front display panel door.

4.25-10 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 4
How to Properly Open and Close the Cytometer Reagent Drawer
Opening the reagent drawer allows access to reagent containers, sheath liquid filter, and the
purge mechanism. See Figure A.5-8 for the components that are accessible with the reagent
drawer open and Table A.5-8 for a description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Opening the Reagent Drawer

Figure 4.25-10 Placing the Cytometer in the Idle Mode

1. Verify the Cytometer is in the

Idle mode.
Note: The Cytometer is in the
Idle mode when a level sense
indicator is glowing (not
flashing) red or the indicator in
the Cytometer RUN button is
flashing green.
2. If the Cytometer is not in the
7027031C Idle mode, press the RUN
button (Figure 4.25-10).
3. Wait about 10 seconds for the
Cytometer to depressurize.
Figure 4.25-11 Removing the Center Front Cover (Optional)
4. Optional step to enhance
access to components inside
the reagent drawer:
a. Remove the center front
cover (filter cover) by
grasping the curved outer
edges of the cover and
pulling the cover forward
7029230F
(Figure 4.25-11).
b. Set the cover aside in a
safe place where it will not
be damaged.

PN 4237029G 4.25-11
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Figure 4.25-12 Opening the Reagent Drawer

5. Grasp the reagent drawer and
pull the drawer forward until it
stops (Figure 4.25-12). The
reagent drawer sits inside
self-locking tracks and will
stop when it locks.
Note: If you need to pull the
reagent drawer out further,
Coulter Epics XL • MCL
push and hold the locking tabs
under the tracks and pull the
drawer forward.
7029232F

4.25-12 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Closing the Reagent Drawer
Figure 4.25-13 Closing the Reagent Drawer

1. Slide the reagent drawer back

inside the Cytometer
(Figure 4.25-13). Make sure
the reagent tubing does not
become crimped as you push
the drawer closed.

Coulter Epics XL • MCL

7029233F

Figure 4.25-14 Reinstalling Center Front Cover, if applicable

2. If the center front cover was
removed earlier:
a. Position the latch on each
end of the center front
cover (filter cover) near its
corresponding catch on
the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-14).
7029231F
b. Push the center front
cover back on the
instrument. The latches
snap into place to secure
the cover to the Cytometer
frame.
Note: The center front
cover fits over the lower
edge of the front display
panel door.

PN 4237029G 4.25-13
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 5
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Upper Rear Cover
The upper rear cover is only removed when the Argon laser head is replaced. Otherwise,
components inside the Cytometer cavity are accessed with the top cover removed and the
Data Acquisition card cage lifted and locked in its vertical position and/or with the right-side
cover removed.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Cytometer Upper Rear Cover

1. Remove the Cytometer top cover.
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-5).
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
2. Remove the flexible duct from the exhaust vent. Lay the flexible duct on the optical
bench.
3. Remove the 14 Phillips-head screws securing the upper rear cover to the Cytometer
frame. See Figure 4.25-15 for screw locations.

Figure 4.25-15 Cytometer Upper Rear Cover Screw Locations

Remove screws (6)

Remove Remove
screws screws

THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS

TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR,
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTIONS 1040.10
AND 1040.11.

Manufactured:
DATE 19 by:

OF COULTER CORPORATION Hialeah Fl,

2413944

T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

Remove screws (4) 7029235F

4. Remove the rear cover from the Cytometer frame and set it aside in a safe place where it
will not be damaged.

4.25-14 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Reinstalling the Cytometer Upper Rear Cover
1. Position the upper rear cover on the Cytometer frame. Make sure the labels are on the
exterior.
2. Loosely reinstall the 14 Phillips-head screws to secure the cover to the Cytometer frame.
See Figure 4.25-15 for screw locations.
3. Tighten all 14 screws.
4. Reinstall the flexible duct removed earlier back on the exhaust vent.
5. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover.
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.

PN 4237029G 4.25-15
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 6
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Lower Rear Cover
The Cytometer lower rear cover rarely needs to be removed. When access to this lower rear
area is required, it is generally easier to gain that access by removing either the left-side or
right-side cover. If it does become necessary to remove the lower rear cover from the
Cytometer frame, disconnect only those tubings and cables that are required to provide the
needed access. See Figure A.5-9 for components attached to the lower rear cover and
Table A.5-9 for a description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Cytometer Lower Rear Cover

1. Remove the eight Phillips-head screws securing the lower rear cover to the Cytometer
frame (Figure 4.25-16).
Note: The screws to be removed are located near the outer edge of the cover. Four screws
are located across the top and another four screws across the bottom.

Figure 4.25-16 Cytometer Lower Rear Cover Screw Locations

Remove screws (4)

THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS

TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR,
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTIONS 1040.10
AND 1040.11.

Manufactured:
DATE 19 by:

OF COULTER CORPORATION Hialeah Fl,

2413944

T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

7029234F

Remove screws (4)

ATTENTION: Many tubings and cables are attached to the inside of this lower rear cover. To
prevent disconnection or component breaks, you must be careful to pull the cover slowly
away from the Cytometer frame.

4.25-16 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
2. Gently pull the cover away from the Cytometer frame. Any tubings or cables that restrict
access must be removed. Make sure you are certain where to reconnect each tubing or
cable you disconnect. If later, the reconnection location may be unclear, write the
reconnection location on a piece of paper and wrap the label around the disconnected
tubing or cable to ensure proper reconnection.

Reinstalling the Cytometer Lower Rear Cover

1. On the lower rear cover’s inner panel:
a. Reconnect any tubing or cable you disconnected.
b. Check all other tubings and connectors to make sure they are secure.
2. Gently push the cover into position on the Cytometer frame. Make sure that no tubing or
cable gets pinched between the cover and the Cytometer frame.
3. Reinstall the eight Phillips-head screws to secure the lower rear cover to the Cytometer
frame. See Figure 4.25-16, as needed.
4. On the lower rear cover’s outer panel:
a. Reconnect any tubings or cables you disconnected.
b. Check all other tubings and connectors to make sure they are secure.

PN 4237029G 4.25-17
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 7
How to Remove and Reinstall the Manual Sample Station, Cytometer with MCL Option
The manual sample station must be removed to access the segmenting valve. To access the
lower pneumatics drawer, the manual sample station must be removed to access one of the
Phillips-head screws that secure the MCL to the Cytometer main frame. See Figure A.5-10 for
manual sample station components and Table A.5-10 for a description of component
functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer with the MCL Option Installed
1. Remove the center front cover (filter cover).
a. Grasp the curved outer edges of the center front cover (filter cover) and pull the
cover forward (Figure 4.25-8).
b. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
2. Remove the MCL probe housing.
a. Push the button to unlock the MCL door (Figure 4.25-26). The door pops open as
the air cylinder attached to the door extends.
b. Push the door up to ensure it is fully open.
c. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the housing to the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-27).
d. Slide the housing cover forward and remove it from the instrument.
e. Set the housing cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
f. Lower the MCL door. Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
3. Unlatch the MCL by grasping the MCL lower cover and firmly pulling the MCL base
away from the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-21). Do not attempt to remove the MCL
from the Cytometer.
4. Slide the reagent drawer open.
a. Verify the Cytometer is in the Idle mode.
1) If the Cytometer is not in the Idle mode, press the RUN button
(Figure 4.25-10).
2) Wait about 10 seconds for the Cytometer to depressurize.
b. Grasp the reagent drawer and pull the drawer forward until it stops
(Figure 4.25-12). The reagent drawer sits inside self-locking tracks and will stop
when it locks.
c. Push and hold the locking tabs under the tracks and pull the drawer out further.
The top of the reagent containers will provide a place to rest the manual sample
station cover assembly when it is removed.

4.25-18 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
5. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Locate and remove the two pan-head screws that secure the left side of the manual
sample station to the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-17). You may need to move the
MCL further away from the Cytometer frame.

Figure 4.25-17 Manual Sample Station Screw Locations

SHEATH WASTE CLEANSE

LOW FULL LOW FLOW

Remove Remove
pan-head flat-head
screws screws

7029248F

b. Remove the two flat-head Phillips screws securing the right side of the manual
sample station to the front of the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-17).
c. Pull the manual sample station cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the
assembly on top of the reagent containers. Make sure the flat ribbon cable is
positioned so that it does not become damaged.
d. If you need to access the segmenting valve, remove the two Phillips-head screws
that secure the sample and waste connect panel. To locate the sample and waste
connect panel, refer to Figure A.5-10 as needed.

PN 4237029G 4.25-19
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer with the MCL Option Installed
1. If you removed the sample and waste connect panel, reinstall the panel using the two
Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
2. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back on the Cytometer frame.
Make sure the flat ribbon cable is not crimped.
b. On the right side of the manual sample station, loosely reinstall the two flat
Phillips-head screws (Figure 4.25-17).
c. On the left side of the manual sample station, loosely reinstall the two pan
Phillips-head screws (Figure 4.25-17).
d. Tighten the four screws to secure the manual sample station to the Cytometer
frame.
3. Slide the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer. Make sure the reagent tubing does
not become crimped as you push the drawer closed.
4. Relatch the MCL lower cover to the Cytometer frame.
a. Align the MCL lower cover with the latch attached to left-side of the Cytometer
frame.
b. Push the MCL base back on the Cytometer frame. Make sure it is securely attached.
c. Open and close the MCL door several times. Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
The MCL door must be closed with the interlock switch depressed for proper
operation.
5. Reinstall the MCL probe housing using the two screws removed earlier.
a. Open the MCL door then push the door up to ensure it is fully open.
b. Make sure the back edge of the MCL probe housing cover is aligned to slide under
the edge of the left-side cover then slide the beveled edge of the housing cover
under the notched opening at the top of the push-button panel for the MCL door.
c. Slide the housing cover back in position. Make sure that the tubing surrounding the
MCL sample probe does not become crimped between the housing cover and the
Cytometer frame.
d. Reinstall the two Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
e. Lower the MCL door.
6. Reinstall the center front cover (filter cover).
Note: The center front cover fits over the lower edge of the front display panel door.
a. Position the latch on each end of the center front cover (filter cover) near its
corresponding catch on the Cytometer frame.
b. Push the center front cover back on the instrument. The latches snap into place to
secure the cover to the Cytometer frame.

4.25-20 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 8
How to Remove and Reinstall the Manual Sample Station, Cytometer without MCL Option
The manual sample station must be removed to access the segmenting valve. See
Figure A.5-11 for manual sample station components and Table A.5-11 for a description of
component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer without the MCL Option
1. Remove the left-side cover.
a. Remove the Cytometer top cover.
1) At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the
top cover to the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-30, item 1).
2) Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
3) Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
b. Pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-30, item 2).
c. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
2. Remove the center front cover (filter cover).
a. Grasp the curved outer edges of the center front cover (filter cover) and pull the
cover forward (Figure 4.25-8).
b. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
3. Slide the reagent drawer open.
a. Verify the Cytometer is in the Idle mode.
1) If the Cytometer is not in the Idle mode, press the RUN button
(Figure 4.25-10).
2) Wait about 10 seconds for the Cytometer to depressurize.
b. Grasp the reagent drawer and pull the drawer forward until it stops
(Figure 4.25-12). The reagent drawer sits inside self-locking tracks and will stop
when it locks.
c. Push and hold the locking tabs under the tracks and pull the drawer out further.
The top of the reagent containers will provide a place to rest the manual sample
station cover assembly when it is removed.
4. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Locate and remove the four Phillips-head screws that secure the manual sample
station to the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-18).

PN 4237029G 4.25-21
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Figure 4.25-18 Manual Sample Station Screw Locations

L E V E L
S E N S E

S H E A T H
L O W
W A S T E
F IL L
C L E A N S E
L O W

R U N

P R IM E

C o u lte r
C L E A N S E E p ic s X L

Remove
screws

Remove
screws
7029244F

b. Pull the manual sample station cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the
assembly on top of the reagent containers. Make sure the flat ribbon cable is
positioned so that it does not become damaged.
c. If you need to access the segmenting valve, remove the two Phillips-head screws
that secure the sample and waste connect panel. To locate the sample and waste
connect panel, refer to Figure A.5-11 as needed.

4.25-22 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Reinstalling the Manual Sample Station on a Cytometer without the MCL Option
1. If you removed the sample and waste connect panel, reinstall the panel using the two
Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
2. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back on the Cytometer frame.
Make sure the flat ribbon cable is not crimped.
b. Loosely reinstall the four Phillips-head screws that secure the manual sample station
to the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-18).
c. Tighten the four screws.
3. Position the left-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
4. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame.
5. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
6. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover.
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.
7. Slide the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer. Make sure the reagent tubing does
not become crimped as you push the drawer closed.
8. Reinstall the center front cover (filter cover).
Note: The center front cover fits over the lower edge of the front display panel door.
a. Position the latch on each end of the center front cover (filter cover) near its
corresponding catch on the Cytometer frame.
b. Push the center front cover back on the instrument. The latches snap into place to
secure the cover to the Cytometer frame.

PN 4237029G 4.25-23
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 9
How to Open and Close the MCL Door
The MCL door (upper cover) is opened routinely to either place a carousel on the carousel
hub (also referred to as the indexing hub) or remove a carousel. The MCL door must be
closed during operation. If the door is open, operation is halted until the MCL door is closed.
See Figure A.5-13 for MCL carousel components and Table A.5-13 for a description of
component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Opening the MCL Door

1. Push the button to unlock the MCL door (Figure 4.25-19, item 1). The door pops open
as the air cylinder attached to the door extends.

Figure 4.25-19 Opening the MCL Door

2

Interlock Push to
1
switch open cover

7029239F

2. Push the cover up to ensure it is fully open (Figure 4.25-19, item 2).

MCL Interlock Switch

An interlock switch (Figure 4.25-19) is located on the base to ensure the MCL door is closed
during operation. If the door is open, an MCL Door Open Error or MCL Door Open Warning
message appears on the Workstation screen. Operation is halted until the MCL door is closed.

4.25-24 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the MCL interlock
switch is defeated, as you may be exposed to moving components. After servicing the instrument, make
sure the MCL door is properly closed to reactivate the safety interlock switch if it was bypassed while
servicing the instrument.

To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch up and operation resumes even
through the door is open.

Always be very careful if you bypass this safety interlock and operate the instrument with the
door open. The interlock switch is reset when the door is closed.

Closing the MCL Door

1. Close the MCL by lowering the MCL door (Figure 4.25-20). Listen for an audible snap as
it closes. The MCL door must be closed with the interlock switch depressed for proper
operation.
Note: When the MCL door closes, it must close completely to make solid contact with
the interlock switch (Figure 4.25-20). If the door does not depress the interlock switch
completely, an MCL Door Open Error or MCL Door Open Warning message appears on the
Workstation screen. Operation is halted until the MCL door is closed completely.

Figure 4.25-20 Closing the MCL Door

Interlock
switch

7029240F

PN 4237029G 4.25-25
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 10
How to Unlatch and Relatch the MCL Covers
The MCL must be unlatched, but not removed, before removing the left-side cover or manual
sample station. See Figure A.5-13 for MCL carousel components and Table A.5-13 for a
description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Unlatching the MCL Covers

CAUTION Risk of damage to the MCL option. The following instructions are meant to unlatch the MCL
covers, not remove the MCL. If you attempt to remove the MCL without completing all the steps detailed in
the Heading Removing the MCL Covers in Procedure 11, you may damage the MCL components.

Grasp the MCL lower cover and firmly pulling the MCL base away from the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-21). Do not attempt to remove the MCL from the Cytometer.

Figure 4.25-21 Unlatching the MCL Covers

7029092F

4.25-26 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Relatching the MCL Covers
Note: The MCL base may be relatched with the door opened or closed. If the MCL door is
open, the rear latch catch and keeper can be viewed through the opening for the gas cylinder.

1. Align the latch catches on the MCL lower cover with the latch keepers attached to
left-side of the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-22).
Note: If the MCL door is open, the rear latch catch and keeper can be viewed through the
opening for the gas cylinder.

Figure 4.25-22 Relatching the MCL Covers, Latch Catch and Latch Keeper Locations

Latch keeper

Latch catch

7029261F

2. Push the MCL base back on the Cytometer frame. Make sure it is securely attached.
3. Open and close the MCL door several times to ensure proper operation. Listen for an
audible snap as the door closes.
Note: When the MCL door closes, it must close completely to make solid contact with
the interlock switch (Figure 4.25-20). If the door does not depress the interlock switch
completely, an MCL Door Open Error or MCL Door Open Warning message appears on the
Workstation screen. Operation is halted until the MCL door is closed completely.

PN 4237029G 4.25-27
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 11
How to Remove and Reinstall MCL Covers
For most procedures, the MCL can simply be unlatched from the Cytometer frame. The MCL
covers must be removed to access the MCL carousel base assembly or the lower pneumatics
drawer. See Figure A.5-13 for MCL carousel components and Table A.5-13 for a description
of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver
B 2 mm Allen wrench

Removing the MCL Covers

1. Push the button to unlock the MCL door (Figure 4.25-23, item 1). The door pops open
as the air cylinder attached to the door extends.

Figure 4.25-23 Removing the MCL Covers

4 2

1 Push to
open cover

7029045D

2. Push the MCL door up to ensure it is fully open (Figure 4.25-23, item 2).
3. If present, remove the carousel and set it aside.
4. Remove the Phillips-head screw from the center of the carousel hub and lift the hub off
the MCL base (Figure 4.25-23, item 3).
5. Remove the Allen screw from the door hinge (Figure 4.25-23, item 4) using the 2 mm
Allen wrench.

4.25-28 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
6. Push down on the air cylinder and move it out of the way of the cover (Figure 4.25-23,
item 5).
7. Grasp the lower base of the MCL. Place your right hand on the front of the base near the
Cytometer and your left hand at the rear corner.
8. Firmly pull the lower base away from the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-24, item 6).

Figure 4.25-24 Removing the MCL Covers Continued

7029260F

9. Disconnect P17 from J17 (Figure 4.25-24, item 7).

10. Set the MCL covers aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

PN 4237029G 4.25-29
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the MCL Covers

1. Position the MCL covers over the MCL carousel base assembly.
2. Connect P17 to J17 (Figure 4.25-24, item 7).
3. Firmly push the lower base back on latch attached to the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-24, item 6).
4. Put the air cylinder back in place (Figure 4.25-23, item 5).
5. Reinstall the Allen screw in the door hinge and tighten (Figure 4.25-23, item 4).
6. Reinstall the carousel hub on the MCL base and secure it with the Phillips-head screw
removed earlier Figure 4.25-23, item 3).
7. Place the carousel back on the carousel hub, if desired.
8. Lower the MCL door (Figure 4.25-23, item 2). Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
9. Open and close the MCL door several times to ensure proper operation.
Note: When the MCL door closes, it must close completely to make solid contact with
the interlock switch (Figure 4.25-20). If the door does not depress the interlock switch
completely, an MCL Door Open Error or MCL Door Open Warning message appears on the
Workstation screen. Operation is halted until the MCL door is closed completely.

4.25-30 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 12
How to Remove and Reinstall the MCL Probe Housing
The MCL probe housing cover must be removed before the left-side cover or manual sample
station can be removed. See Figure A.5-13 for MCL carousel components (including the MCL
probe housing) and Table A.5-13 for a description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

WARNING Risk of eye injury. The following procedure requires the removal of covers protecting you from
laser light. Reflections of the laser beam off a shiny object such as a screwdriver, or direct viewing of the
laser beam, can severely damage your eyes. When performing replacement or adjustment procedures:
r Wear laser safety glasses as required by the wavelength being used.
r Pay attention to the warning labels.
r Do NOT wear jewelry that might reflect the laser beam.
r Review and heed the laser warning labels shown in Figure 4.25-25.

Figure 4.25-25 Laser Warning Labels - MCL Option and Probe Housing
AVOID EXPOSURE
VISIBLE AND/OR INVISIBLE CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED
FROM THIS APERTURE.

CAUTION
Laser radiation when open
and interlock defeated.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.

CAUTION
Laser radiation when open
CAUTION and interlock defeated.
L A S E R L IG H T D O N O T S T A R E IN T O B E A M DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
670nm DIODE LASER
1.0 MILLIWATT MAXIMUM CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
7029259F

PN 4237029G 4.25-31
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover

1. Push the button to unlock the MCL door (Figure 4.25-26, item 1). The door pops open
as the air cylinder attached to the door extends.

Figure 4.25-26 Opening the MCL Door

2

Interlock Push to
1
switch open cover

7029239F

2. Push the door up to ensure it is fully open (Figure 4.25-26, item 2).

4.25-32 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
3. Remove the two Phillips-head screws that secure the MCL probe housing cover to the
left-side cover (Figure 4.25-27).

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Removing the MCL probe housing cover exposes you to the bar-code
reader laser beam. Review and heed the laser safety information under Heading 1.2, SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS and the laser warning labels shown in Figure 4.25-25.

Figure 4.25-27 Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover

Remove
screws

7029238F

4. Slide the housing cover forward and remove it from the instrument.
5. Set the housing cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
6. Lower the MCL door. Listen for an audible snap as it closes.

PN 4237029G 4.25-33
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the MCL Probe Housing Cover

1. If the MCL door is blocking the area, push the button to unlock the MCL door then push
the door up to ensure it is fully open. Refer to Figure 4.25-26 as needed.
2. Make sure the back edge of the MCL probe housing cover is aligned to slide under the
edge of the left-side cover then slide the beveled edge of the housing cover under the
notched opening at the top of the push-button panel. See Figure 4.25-28.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Replacing the MCL probe housing cover exposes you to the bar-code
reader laser beam. Review and heed the laser safety information under Heading 1.2, SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS and the laser warning labels shown in Figure 4.25-25.

Figure 4.25-28 Reinstalling the MCL Probe Housing Cover

MCL probe
housing cover

7029251F

3. Slide the housing cover back in position. Make sure that the tubing surrounding the
MCL sample probe does not become crimped between the housing cover and the
Cytometer frame.
4. Reinstall the two Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
5. Lower the MCL door.

4.25-34 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 13
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Left-Side Cover
(Cytometer with MCL Option Installed)
Removing the Cytometer left-side cover provides access to the MCL components attached to
the MCL main frame. Removing the MCL main frame provides access to the lower
pneumatics drawer. The top cover must be removed before the left-side cover can be
removed.
r See Figure A.5-14 for MCL components that are accessible with covers removed and
Table A.5-14 for a description of component functions.
r See Figure A.5-15 for lower pneumatics drawer components and Table A.5-15 for a
description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer with MCL Option Installed)
1. Remove the Cytometer top cover (Figure 4.25-29, item 1).
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer.
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

Figure 4.25-29 Left-Side Cover Removal or Installation (Cytometer with MCL Option Installed)
Top cover 1 Remove screws (4)
4 Left-side
cover

Remove
2
screws

THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS

TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR,
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTIONS 1040.10
AND 1040.11.

Manufactured:
DATE 19 by:

OF COULTER CORPORATION Hialeah Fl,

2413944

T R A N S Unlatch
3
MCL
R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

7029243F

PN 4237029G 4.25-35
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

2. Remove the MCL probe housing (Figure 4.25-29, item 2).

a. Push the button to unlock the MCL door. The door pops open as the air cylinder
attached to the door extends.
b. Push the door up to ensure it is fully open.
c. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the housing to the Cytometer frame.
d. Slide the housing cover forward and remove it from the instrument.
e. Set the housing cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
f. Lower the MCL door. Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
3. Unlatch the MCL by grasping the MCL lower cover and firmly pulling the MCL base
away from the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-29, item 3). Do not attempt to remove the
MCL from the Cytometer.
4. Pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-29, item 4).
5. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

Reinstalling the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer with MCL Option Installed)
1. Position the left-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
2. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-29, item 4).
3. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
4. Relatch the MCL lower cover to the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-29, item 3).
a. Align the MCL lower cover with the latches attached to the Cytometer frame.
b. Push the MCL base back on the Cytometer frame. Make sure it is securely attached.
c. Open and close the MCL door several times. Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
The door must be closed with the interlock switch depressed for proper operation.
5. Reinstall the MCL probe housing using the two screws removed earlier (Figure 4.25-29,
item 2).
a. Open the MCL door then push the door up to ensure it is fully open.
b. Make sure the back edge of the MCL probe housing cover is aligned to slide under
the edge of the left-side cover then slide the beveled edge of the housing cover
under the notched opening at the top of the push-button panel for the MCL door.
Refer to Figure 4.25-28 as needed.
c. Slide the housing cover back in position. Make sure that the tubing surrounding the
MCL sample probe does not become crimped between the housing cover and the
Cytometer frame.
d. Reinstall the two Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
e. Lower the MCL door.
6. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover (Figure 4.25-29, item 1).
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.

4.25-36 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 14
How to Remove and Reinstall the Cytometer Left-Side Cover
(Cytometer without MCL Option)
Removing the Cytometer left-side cover provides access to the lower pneumatics drawer. See
Figure A.5-15 for lower pneumatics drawer components and Table A.5-15 for a description of
component functions. The top cover must be removed before the left-side cover can be
removed.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer without MCL Option)

1. Remove the Cytometer top cover (Figure 4.25-30, item 1).
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer.
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

Figure 4.25-30 Left-Side Cover Removal or Installation (Cytometer without MCL Option)
Top cover 1 Remove screws (4)

2 Left-side
cover

THIS LASER PRODUCT CONFORMS

TO THE PROVISIONS OF 21 CFR,
SUBCHAPTER J, SECTIONS 1040.10
AND 1040.11.

Manufactured:
DATE 19 by:

OF COULTER CORPORATION Hialeah Fl,

2413944

T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

7029245F

2. Pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-30, item 2).
3. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

PN 4237029G 4.25-37
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the Cytometer Left-Side Cover (Cytometer without MCL Option)

1. Position the left-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
2. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-30, item 2).
3. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
4. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover (Figure 4.25-30, item 1).
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.

4.25-38 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 15
How to Remove and Reinstall the Filter Shield
The filter shield covers the sensing area that houses the flow cell, beam-shaping hardware, FS
detector, and side scatter diode. The filter shield must be removed to replace these
components or when aligning the optics or laser. See Figure A.5-7 for components accessed
with the filter shield removed and Table A.5-7 for a description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver
B Long screwdriver with a plastic handle

Removing the Filter Shield

1. Remove the center front cover (filter cover).
a. Grasp the curved outer edges of the center front cover (filter cover) and pull the
cover forward (Figure 4.25-8).
b. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
2. Slide the reagent drawer open.
a. Verify the Cytometer is in the Idle mode.
1) If the Cytometer is not in the Idle mode, press the RUN button
(Figure 4.25-10).
2) Wait about 10 seconds for the Cytometer to depressurize.
b. Grasp the reagent drawer and pull the drawer forward until it stops
(Figure 4.25-12).
3. Remove the Cytometer top cover.
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-7, item 1).
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
4. Remove the right-side cover.
a. Pull the right-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-7, item 2).
b. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
5. To gain required access, use instrument specific instructions:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to step 6.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 9.
6. Remove the left-side cover.
a. Pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-30, item 2).
b. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

PN 4237029G 4.25-39
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

7. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly.

a. Pull the reagent drawer out further. The reagent drawer sits inside self-locking
tracks. Push and hold the locking tabs under the tracks and pull the drawer
forward. The top of the reagent containers will provide a place to rest the manual
sample station cover assembly when it is removed.
b. Locate and remove the four Phillips-head screws that secure the manual sample
station to the Cytometer frame. See Figure 4.25-18 as needed.
c. Pull the manual sample station cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the
assembly on top of the reagent containers. Make sure the flat ribbon cable is
positioned so that it does not become damaged.
8. Go to step 11.
9. Remove the left-side cover as follows:
a. Remove the MCL probe housing.
1) Push the button to unlock the MCL door. The door pops open as the air
cylinder attached to the door extends.
2) Push the door up to ensure it is fully open.
3) Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the probe housing cover to the
Cytometer frame. See Figure 4.25-27 as needed.
4) Slide the housing cover forward and remove it from the instrument.
5) Set the housing cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
6) Lower the MCL door. Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
b. Unlatch the MCL by grasping the MCL lower cover and firmly pulling the MCL base
away from the Cytometer frame. See Figure 4.25-21 as needed. Do not attempt to
remove the MCL from the Cytometer.
c. Pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame and set the cover aside.
10. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly.
a. Pull the reagent drawer out further. The reagent drawer sits inside self-locking
tracks. Push and hold the locking tabs under the tracks and pull the drawer
forward. The top of the reagent containers will provide a place to rest the manual
sample station cover assembly when it is removed.
b. Locate and remove the two pan-head screws that secure the left side of the manual
sample station to the Cytometer frame. You may need to move the MCL further
away from the Cytometer frame. See Figure 4.25-17 as needed.
c. Remove the two flat-head Phillips screws securing the right side of the manual
sample station to the front of the Cytometer frame. See Figure 4.25-17 as needed.
d. Pull the manual sample station cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the
assembly on top of the reagent containers. Make sure the flat ribbon cable is
positioned so that it does not become damaged.

CAUTION Risk of damage to electrical components on the front panel display circuit card. Do not use a
T-handled hex key to hold the upper cover open. If the metal in the T-handle comes in contact with the
electrical components on the circuit card, the components may short out and the card becomes defective.

4.25-40 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
11. Lift the front panel display cover and place a long screwdriver (with a plastic handle) in
the upper frame channel to brace the cover open (Figure 4.25-31).

Figure 4.25-31 Bracing the Upper Cover Open

Cytometer
upper cover (open)

Long screwdriver
(with plastic handle)

Channel
(upper right)
7029129G

12. Remove the four Phillips-head screws (two on each side) securing the filter shield to the
Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-32).

Figure 4.25-32 Filter Shield Screw Locations

Remove screws (4)

C o u lte r E p ic s X L M C L

Filter shield 7029116F

13. Set the filter shield aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

PN 4237029G 4.25-41
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the Filter Shield

1. Position the filter shield over the sensing area and secure it to the Cytometer frame using
the four Phillips-head screws removed earlier (Figure 4.25-32).
2. Lift the upper display panel and remove the long screwdriver from the channel
(Figure 4.25-31). Carefully lower the upper display panel.
3. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back on the Cytometer frame.
Make sure the flat ribbon cable is not crimped.
b. Loosely reinstall the four Phillips-head screws that secure the manual sample station
to the Cytometer frame. If this is an XL cytometer with the MCL option installed,
1) On the right side of the manual sample station, loosely reinstall the two flat
Phillips-head screws. See Figure 4.25-17 as needed.
2) On the left side of the manual sample station, loosely reinstall the two pan
Phillips-head screws. See Figure 4.25-17 as needed.
c. Tighten the four screws.
4. Slide the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer. Make sure the reagent tubing does
not become crimped as you push the drawer closed.
5. Position the right-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
6. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame.
7. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
8. Position the left-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
9. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame.
10. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
11. How to proceed:
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 12.
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to step 14.
12. Relatch the MCL lower cover to the Cytometer frame.
a. Align the MCL lower cover with the latch attached to left-side of the Cytometer
frame.
b. Push the MCL base back on the Cytometer frame. Make sure it is securely attached.
c. Open and close the MCL door several times. Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
The MCL door must be closed with the interlock switch depressed for proper
operation.

4.25-42 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
13. Reinstall the MCL probe housing using the two screws removed earlier.
a. Open the MCL door then push the door up to ensure it is fully open.
b. Make sure the back edge of the MCL probe housing cover is aligned to slide under
the edge of the left-side cover then slide the beveled edge of the housing cover
under the notched opening at the top of the push-button panel for the MCL door.
See Figure 4.25-28 as needed.
c. Slide the housing cover back in position. Make sure that the tubing surrounding the
MCL sample probe does not become crimped between the housing cover and the
Cytometer frame.
d. Reinstall the two Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
e. Lower the MCL door.
14. Reinstall the center front cover (filter cover).
Note: The center front cover fits over the lower edge of the front display panel door.
a. Position the latch on each end of the center front cover (filter cover) near its
corresponding catch on the Cytometer frame.
b. Push the center front cover back on the instrument. The latches snap into place to
secure the cover to the Cytometer frame.
15. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover.
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.

PN 4237029G 4.25-43
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 16
How to Remove and Reinstall the Data Acquisition Card Cage
The Data Acquisition card cage is accessible when the Cytometer top cover is removed.
However, most procedures require the card cage be lifted out of the Cytometer and locked in
its vertical position. See Figure A.5-3 for the circuit cards and power supplies in the Data
Acquisition card cage and Table A.5-3 for a description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Data Acquisition Card Cage from the Cytometer Center Cavity
1. Power off the Cytometer.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Remove the Cytometer top cover.
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-5).
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
3. Lift the Data Acquisition card cage and lock it in its vertical position (Figure 4.25-33).
a. With one hand, pull the Data Acquisition card cage forward and hold it in an
upright position.
b. With your free hand, lock the hinge on each side of the card cage to secure the card
cage in this vertical position.
c. Make sure both hinges are locked before releasing your grip.

4.25-44 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Figure 4.25-33 Data Acquisition Card Cage Locked in its Vertical Position

Data Acquisition card cage

(locked in vertical position)

7029255F

Note: Once the card cage is locked in the vertical position, power may be restored to the
Cytometer as needed.

PN 4237029G 4.25-45
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the Data Acquisition Card Cage Back in the Cytometer Center Cavity
1. Power off the Cytometer, if applicable.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Stage 1: Power Off the Cytometer (system using EXPO32 ADC software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
2. Lower the card cage back into the center cavity of the Cytometer:
a. Stand in front of the Cytometer and grasp the top of the Data Acquisition card cage.
b. With a secure hold on the card cage, unlock the card cage hinges with your other
hand.
c. Gently lower the card cage into the center cavity of the Cytometer.
3. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover.
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.
4. Power on the Cytometer.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using EXPO32 ADC
software) under Heading 4.1, as needed.

4.25-46 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 17
How to Remove and Reinstall the Lower Pneumatics Drawer
The lower pneumatics drawer contains the waste chamber, the Solenoid Power Distribution
card as well as most of the solenoids and pinch valves used in the Cytometer. The lower
pneumatics drawer is located in the left-side the Cytometer underneath the optical bench and
can be easily accessed on an XL flow cytometer that does not have the MCL option installed.
However, on an XL flow cytometer that does have the MCL option installed, the manual
sample station and the MCL option must be removed to access these components. See
Figure A.5-15 for components in the lower pneumatics drawer and Table A.5-15 for a
description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver
B Long Phillips-head screwdriver, only if the MCL option is installed

ATTENTION: To remove the lower pneumatics drawer, use instrument specific instructions:

r If the MCL option is installed, go to Heading Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer
on a Cytometer with the MCL Option Installed.
r If the MCL option is not installed, go to Heading Removing the Lower Pneumatics
Drawer on a Cytometer without the MCL Option.

Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer on a Cytometer with the MCL Option Installed
1. Remove the center front cover (filter cover).
a. Grasp the curved outer edges of the center front cover (filter cover) and pull the
cover forward (Figure 4.25-8).
b. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
2. Remove the MCL probe housing and MCL covers from the instrument as follows:
a. Push the button to unlock the MCL door. The door pops open as the air cylinder
attached to the door extends (Figure 4.25-23, item 1).
b. Push the MCL door up to ensure it is fully open (Figure 4.25-23, item 2).
c. If present, remove the carousel and set it aside.
d. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the MCL probe housing to the
Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-27).
e. Slide the probe housing cover forward and remove it from the instrument.
f. Set the probe housing cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
g. Remove the Phillips-head screw from the center of the carousel hub and lift the hub
off the MCL base (Figure 4.25-23, item 3).
h. Remove the Allen screw from the door hinge (Figure 4.25-23, item 4).
i. Push down on the air cylinder and move it out of the way of the cover
(Figure 4.25-23, item 5).
j. Grasp the lower base of the MCL. Place your right hand on the front of the base near
the Cytometer and your left hand at the rear corner.

PN 4237029G 4.25-47
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

k. Firmly pull the lower base away from the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-24, item 6).
l. Disconnect P17 from J17 (Figure 4.25-24, item 7).
m. Set the MCL covers aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
3. Slide the reagent drawer open.
a. Verify the Cytometer is in the Idle mode.
1) If the Cytometer is not in the Idle mode, press the RUN button
(Figure 4.25-10).
2) Wait about 10 seconds for the Cytometer to depressurize.
b. Grasp the reagent drawer and pull the drawer forward until it stops
(Figure 4.25-12). The reagent drawer sits inside self-locking tracks and will stop
when it locks.
c. Push and hold the locking tabs under the tracks and pull the drawer out further.
The top of the reagent containers will provide a place to rest the manual sample
station cover assembly when it is removed.
4. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Locate and remove the two pan-head screws that secure the left side of the manual
sample station to the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-17).
b. Remove the two flat-head Phillips screws securing the right side of the manual
sample station to the front of the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-17).
c. Pull the manual sample station cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the
assembly on top of the reagent containers. Make sure the flat ribbon cable is
positioned so that it does not become damaged.
5. Remove the Cytometer top cover.
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-5).
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
6. Remove the left-side cover by pulling the cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the
cover aside.
7. Remove the five Phillips-head screws that secure the MCL option to the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-34). The lower left screw and the screw to the right of the MCL solenoid
assembly require a long Phillips-head screwdriver.

4.25-48 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Figure 4.25-34 Removing the MCL from the Cytometer Frame
Remove screws

Remove
screws

Long Phillips-head
screwdriver

7029236F

8. Locate the lower pneumatics drawer (Figure 4.25-35).

Figure 4.25-35 Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer (Cytometer with the MCL Option Installed)

Captive
thumbscrews
7029242F

9. Loosen the captive thumbscrews (Figure 4.25-35).

10. Pull the lower pneumatics drawer out of the Cytometer.

PN 4237029G 4.25-49
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer on a Cytometer without the MCL Option
1. Remove the Cytometer top cover.
a. At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer (Figure 4.25-30, item 1).
b. Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
2. Pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-30, item 2). Set the
cover aside.
3. Locate the lower pneumatics drawer (Figure 4.25-36).

Figure 4.25-36 Removing the Lower Pneumatics Drawer (Cytometer without MCL Option)

Captive
thumbscrews
7029247F

4. Loosen the captive thumbscrews.

5. Pull the lower pneumatics drawer out of the Cytometer.

4.25-50 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Reinstalling the Lower Pneumatics Drawer
1. Push the lower pneumatics drawer back inside the Cytometer.
2. Tighten the captive thumbscrews to reattach the lower pneumatics drawer to the
Cytometer frame.
3. To proceed, use instrument specific instructions:
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 4.
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, position the left-side cover on the Cytometer frame
and push the cover down. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of
the cover are properly positioned inside the Cytometer frame. Reinstallation is
complete.
4. Reposition the MCL main frame next the Cytometer main frame.
5. Reinstall the five Phillips-head screws removed earlier (Figure 4.25-34).
6. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back on the Cytometer frame.
Make sure the flat ribbon cable is not crimped.
b. On the right side of the manual sample station, loosely reinstall the two flat
Phillips-head screws (Figure 4.25-17).
c. On the left side of the manual sample station, loosely reinstall the two pan
Phillips-head screws (Figure 4.25-17).
d. Tighten the four screws to secure the manual sample station to the Cytometer
frame.
7. Slide the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer. Make sure the reagent tubing does
not become crimped as you push the drawer closed.
8. Position the left-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
9. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-29, item 4).
10. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
11. Reinstall the MCL probe housing using the two screws removed earlier.
a. Make sure the back edge of the MCL probe housing cover is aligned to slide under
the edge of the left-side cover then slide the beveled edge of the housing cover
under the notched opening at the top of the push-button panel for the MCL door.
b. Slide the housing cover back in position. Make sure that the tubing surrounding the
MCL sample probe does not become crimped between the housing cover and the
Cytometer frame.
c. Reinstall the two Phillips-head screws removed earlier.
12. Position the MCL covers over the MCL carousel base assembly.
13. Connect P17 to J17 (Figure 4.25-24, item 7).
14. Firmly push the lower base back on latch attached to the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-24, item 6).
15. Put the air cylinder back in place (Figure 4.25-23, item 5).
16. Reinstall the Allen screw in the door hinge and tighten (Figure 4.25-23, item 4).

PN 4237029G 4.25-51
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

17. Reinstall the carousel hub on the MCL base and secure it with the Phillips-head screw
removed earlier Figure 4.25-23, item 3).
18. Place the carousel back on the carousel hub, if desired.
19. Lower the MCL door (Figure 4.25-23, item 2). Listen for an audible snap as it closes.
20. Open and close the MCL door several times to ensure proper operation.
Note: When the MCL door closes, it must close completely to make solid contact with
the interlock switch (Figure 4.25-20). If the door does not depress the interlock switch
completely, an MCL Door Open Error or MCL Door Open Warning message appears on the
Workstation screen. Operation is halted until the MCL door is closed completely.
21. Reinstall the center front cover (filter cover).
Note: The center front cover fits over the lower edge of the front display panel door.
a. Position the latch on each end of the center front cover (filter cover) near its
corresponding catch on the Cytometer frame.
b. Push the center front cover back on the instrument. The latches snap into place to
secure the cover to the Cytometer frame.

4.25-52 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 18
How to Remove and Reinstall the Upper Pneumatics Drawer EMC Shield
The upper pneumatics drawer contains many components including the Sensor card, the
sheath pressure regulator, sample pressure regulator, vacuum regulator, sensors, and pinch
valves needed for providing and maintaining proper sheath flow and sample flow. See
Figure A.5-5 for components in the upper pneumatics drawer and Table A.5-5 for a
description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Upper Pneumatics Drawer EMC Shield

1. Remove the right-side cover.
a. Remove the Cytometer top cover (Figure 4.25-7, item 1).
1) At the rear of the Cytometer, remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the
top cover to the Cytometer
2) Lift the top cover up and off the Cytometer and set it aside.
b. Pull the right-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame and set it aside
(Figure 4.25-7, item 2).
2. Remove the two Phillip-head screws that secure the upper pneumatics drawer assembly
to the Cytometer frame (Figure 4.25-37, item 1).

Figure 4.25-37 Removing the EMC Shield from the Upper Pneumatics Drawer

1 Remove screws
2

Remove screws
3

7029246F Remove screws

3. Grasp the right edge of the drawer and pull the drawer away from the Cytometer
(Figure 4.25-37, item 2).

PN 4237029G 4.25-53
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

4. Remove the four Phillips-head screws that secure the EMC shield to the upper
pneumatics drawer cabinet. There are two screws securing the top and two screws
securing the bottom. See Figure 4.25-37, item 3.
5. Pull the EMC shield off the drawer.
6. Set the shield aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

Reinstalling the Upper Pneumatics Drawer EMC Shield

1. Position the EMC shield back on the upper pneumatics drawer.
2. Reinstall the four Phillips-head screws that secure the EMC shield to the upper
pneumatics drawer cabinet (two screws secure the top and two screws secure the
bottom).
3. Push the drawer back inside the Cytometer.
4. Reinstall the two Phillip-head screws that secure the upper pneumatics drawer assembly
to the Cytometer frame.
5. Position the right-side cover on the Cytometer frame.
6. Push the cover down on the Cytometer frame.
7. Make sure the upper and lower fasteners on the inside of the cover are properly
positioned inside the Cytometer frame.
8. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover.
a. Place the top cover on the Cytometer.
b. Make sure the top cover is properly seated.
c. At the rear of the Cytometer, secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame by
tightening the four Phillips-head screws.

4.25-54 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 19
How to Remove and Reinstall the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Three-Side Cover
The Voltage-Specific Power Supply provides and monitors the main electronic and pneumatic
power (vacuum and pressure) to the Cytometer.
r See Figure A.6-3 for the main components located in the left side and Table A.6-3 for
description of component functions
r See Figure A.6-4 for the main components located in the right side and Table A.6-4 for
description of component functions

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Three-Sided Cover

1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. At the left-side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, remove the two Phillips-head
screws located at the bottom of the cover.
3. At the right-side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, remove the two Phillips-head
screws located at the bottom of the cover.
4. Standing at the front (or rear) of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, grasp the left-side
and right-side of the three-sided cover.
5. Lift the cover straight up and off the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
6. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
Note: When the three-sided cover is removed, an interlock turns off power to the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply and the Cytometer. To bypass this interlock, see the Interlock
Switch for the Voltage-Specific Power Supply heading that follows.

Interlock Switch for the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

The Voltage-Specific Power Supply interlock switch (Figure 4.25-38) is a safety interlock to
ensure the three-sided cover is in place when the power is on. If the power is on and the cover
is removed, this interlock turns off the power to the Voltage-Specific Power Supply and the
Cytometer.

PN 4237029G 4.25-55
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Figure 4.25-38 Interlock Switch Location, Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Interlock bypass switch

7029253G

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when operating the instrument when the safety interlock
switch in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply is defeated, as you may be exposed to electric shock. After
servicing the instrument, make sure the three-sided cover is properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety
interlock switch if it was bypassed while servicing the instrument.

To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch up and power is restored to the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply and the Cytometer even though the cover is removed.

Always be very careful if you bypass this safety interlock and operate the instrument with the
covers off. The interlock switch is reset when the cover is reinstalled.

Reinstalling the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Three-Sided Cover

1. Position the three-sided cover over the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
2. Lower the cover onto the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Make sure it is properly seated.
3. Reinstall the four Phillips-head screws, two in the lower left-side panel and two in the
lower right-side panel.
4. Power up the entire system. (This includes plugging the two ac power line cords back
into the wall outlet.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.

4.25-56 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 20
How to Open and Close the Voltage-Specific Power Supply Front Door
The Voltage-Specific Power Supply provides and monitors the main electronic and pneumatic
power (vacuum and pressure) to the Cytometer. See Figure A.6-2 for the components located
behind the front door and Table A.6-2 for description of component functions.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Open the Front Door

Grasp the left edge of the front door and pull it away from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
towards the right (Figure 4.25-39). The front door opens fully for ease of access to front panel
components.

Figure 4.25-39 Opening the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
AIR
FILTER 30
PSI

SYS SYS
MCL POWER
VAC PRESS

PRESS
ADJ

7029252F

Close the Front Door

Grasp the left edge of the front door and push it towards the left-side of the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply. When the door makes contact with the frame, two magnets latch the door to
keep it in its closed position.

PN 4237029G 4.25-57
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 21
How to Remove and Reinstall the Universal Power Supply Main Cover

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the UPS Main Cover

1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet. To locate the SYSTEM POWER and LASER POWER cables, refer to
Figure A.7-6 as needed.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. Remove the cable cover and set it aside.
a. Loosen, but do not remove, the two lower screws securing the plastic cable cover to
the back cover of the Universal Power Supply (Figure 4.25-40, item 1).

Figure 4.25-40 Removing the UPS Cable Cover

3
2 Remove these screws

1 Loosen but do not

remove these screws 7318452D

b. Remove the two top screws securing the plastic cable cover to the Cytometer frame
(Figure 4.25-40, item 2).
c. Lift the cable cover off the back cover (Figure 4.25-40, item 3).
d. Set the cable cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cable cover will not
be damaged.

4.25-58 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. If the power is ON while removing the back cover,
components on the Power Control 3 card could be damaged. To prevent damage to electronic components,
always be sure power is OFF before removing or replacing components.

3. If you have not already done so, unplug both ac power cords from the wall outlet. To
locate the SYSTEM POWER and LASER POWER cables, refer to Figure A.7-6 as needed.
4. Remove the back cover and set it aside.
a. Loosen, but do not remove, the two Phillips-head screws located at the bottom of
the back cover (Figure 4.25-41, item 1).

Figure 4.25-41 Removing the UPS Back Cover

2 Remove these screws

ANALOG ANALOG

LOGIC LOGIC

MCL/MPL MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS 1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX MAX MAX

1 1 1 1

3
1 2 1 2

13 1 13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS WASTE PNEUMATICS

PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

7318453D

1 Loosen but do not

remove these screws

b. Remove the two remaining Phillips-head screws located at the top of the back cover
(Figure 4.25-41, item 2).
c. Carefully lift the back cover off the Universal Power Supply (Figure 4.25-41,
item 3).
d. Set the back cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the back cover will not
be damaged.
5. Open the front door of the Universal Power Supply.
6. Remove the three Phillips-head screws on the frame side of the hinge, not the front door
side of the hinge (Figure 4.25-42). Set these screws aside.

PN 4237029G 4.25-59
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Figure 4.25-42 Front Screw Locations

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
+5V
AIR +15V
FILTER
30 -15V
PSI
+24V

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS +5V
+15V
-15V
PRESS
ADJ +24V

Remove these
screws 7318447C

7. Close the front door of the Universal Power Supply.

8. At the left-side of the Universal Power Supply, remove the two Phillips-head screws
located at the bottom of the cover (Figure 4.25-43).

Figure 4.25-43 Side Screw Locations

Remove these
screws

Remove
7318448C these
screws

9. At the right-side of the Universal Power Supply, remove the two Phillips-head screws
located at the bottom of the cover (Figure 4.25-43).
10. Standing at the front (or rear) of the Universal Power Supply, firmly grasp the left and
right sides of the main cover and lift the cover (and front door) straight up and off the
Universal Power Supply frame (Figure 4.25-44).

4.25-60 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Figure 4.25-44 Removing the Main Cover

7318449C

11. Set the main cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cover will not be
damaged.

PN 4237029G 4.25-61
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the Main Cover

1. Position the main cover (and front door) over the Universal Power Supply and carefully
lower the assembly onto the Universal Power Supply frame (Figure 4.25-45). Make sure
it is properly seated.

Figure 4.25-45 Reinstalling the Main Cover

7318450C

2. Reinstall the seven Phillips-head screws - two in the lower left-side panel, two in the
lower right-side panel, and three on the frame side of the hinge for the front door.

4.25-62 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
3. Reinstall the back cover for the Universal Power Supply.
a. Position the back cover over the platform at the rear of the Universal Power Supply.
Make sure the two slots at the bottom of the back cover are positioned behind the
washer attached to the two screws on the rear of the extended platform then lower
the back cover to rest on the posts of those screws (Figure 4.25-46, item 1).

Figure 4.25-46 Reinstalling the UPS Back Cover

2 Reinstall these screws

ANALOG ANALOG

LOGIC LOGIC

MCL/MPL MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS 1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX MAX MAX

1 1 1 1

1 2 1 2

13 1 13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS WASTE PNEUMATICS

PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

1 Align back cover 3 Tighten these screws

over these screws 7318456D

b. Make sure all tubings and cables are positioned inside the opening of the back cover
(Figure 4.25-46).
c. Reinstall the two outer screws (at the top) that were removed earlier
(Figure 4.25-46, item 2).
d. Secure the back cover by tightening all four screws - two top and two bottom
(Figure 4.25-46, items 2 and 3).
4. Reinstall the cable cover.
a. Before reinstalling the cable cover, consider the location of the Cytometer in
relationship to the Universal Power Supply then arrange the cables and tubings
exiting the back cover to accommodate the setup. See Figure 4.25-47 for the
recommended arrangement.

PN 4237029G 4.25-63
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Figure 4.25-47 Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions

·
ANALOG

· Waste level sensor assembly -

float liquid level sensor and
LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER
1500 WATTS
MAX
LASER POWER
1800 WATTS
MAX
Waste level sensor assembly -
tubing connections to
cap for waste container Cytometer rear panel

·Power cables
ac line cords (2) 1 2
1 1 Cables
Argon laser umbilical
Logic 13 1
Power module control
Analog PRESS WASTE VAC
WASTE
VENT
PNEUMATICS
CONTROL

MCL, if applicable

7029290G

b. Make sure no tubings are crimped and no cables are stressed.

c. In a single layer, position the tubings and cables on the back cover. The laser
umbilical cable will support the tubings and cables exiting on the right. You will
need to hold the tubings and cables exiting on the left with your hand.
d. While holding the cables and tubings exiting the left side with one hand, slide the
long slots at the base of the cable cover behind the large washers (on the lower two
Phillips-head screws). See Figure 4.25-48, item 1.

Figure 4.25-48 Reinstalling the UPS Cable Cover

2 Reinstall these screws

Position the long slots

behind the large washers
3 Tighten these screws
7318455D

4.25-64 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
e. While pressing the cable cover down on the cables (and tubings), align the openings
at the top of the cable cover with the openings across the top of the Universal Power
Supply frame. Once aligned, reinstall the two Phillips-head screws that secure the
cable cover to the UPS frame (Figure 4.25-48, item 2).
f. Tighten the two Phillips-head screws near the bottom of the cable cover
(Figure 4.25-48, item 3).
g. Verify the sound-guard foam has formed a gap-free seal around the exiting tubings
and cables. See Figure 4.25-49.

Figure 4.25-49 Seal Around Tubings and Cables, Left-Side View

Sound-guard foam

Cable cover

Tubings and cables

7029289G

5. Plug the two ac power cords back into the appropriate wall outlets.
6. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.

PN 4237029G 4.25-65
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 22
How to Open and Close the Universal Power Supply Front Door

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Open the Front Door

Grasp the left edge of the front door and pull it to the right (away from the Universal Power
Supply frame). See Figure 4.25-50. The front door opens fully for ease of access to front panel
components.

Figure 4.25-50 Opening the Universal Power Supply Front Door

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER

AIR
FILTER
30
PSI

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS

PRESS
ADJ

3532014A

Close the Front Door

Grasp the left edge of the front door and push it towards the left-side of the Power Supply
module. When the door makes contact with the Universal Power Supply frame, two magnets
latch the door to keep it in its closed position.

4.25-66 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 23
How to Remove and Reinstall the Universal Power Supply Cable Cover Only
ATTENTION: Use this procedure if only the cable cover is being removed.
r If you are removing the cable cover as part of removing the back cover, do not continue.
Go to Procedure 24 and complete the instructions as written.
r If you are removing the cable cover as part of removing the main cover, do not continue.
Go to Procedure 21 and complete the instructions as written.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the UPS Cable Cover

1. Loosen, but do not remove, the two top and two lower screws securing the plastic cable
cover (Figure 4.25-51, item 1).

Figure 4.25-51 Removing the UPS Cable Cover

2
1
Loosen but do not
remove these screws

1
Loosen but do not
remove these screws 7318370D

2. Lift the cable cover slightly and move it forward (away from the two screws at the top).
When the cover is free from the top screws, lift the cover straight up and off the two
lower screws (Figure 4.25-51, item 2).
3. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

PN 4237029G 4.25-67
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the UPS Cable Cover

1. Before reinstalling the cable cover, consider the location of the Cytometer in relationship
to the Universal Power Supply then arrange the cables and tubings exiting the back cover
to accommodate the setup. See Figure 4.25-52 for the recommended arrangement.

Figure 4.25-52 Recommended Cable and Tubing Positions

·
ANALOG

· Waste level sensor assembly -

float liquid level sensor and
LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER
1500 WATTS
MAX
LASER POWER
1800 WATTS
MAX
Waste level sensor assembly -
tubing connections to
cap for waste container Cytometer rear panel

·Power cables
ac line cords (2) 1 2
1 1 Cables
Argon laser umbilical
Logic 13 1
Power module control
Analog PRESS WASTE VAC
WASTE
VENT
PNEUMATICS
CONTROL

MCL, if applicable

7029290G

2. To the right of the opening on the UPS back cover, position the Argon laser umbilical
cable against the right side of the opening (as viewed from the rear). Position the power
module control cable and the waste level sensor assembly with the tubing connections
for the Cytometer rear panel next to the laser umbilical cable. The laser umbilical cable
will support the tubings and cables exiting on the right. See Figure 4.25-52.
3. To the left of the opening on the UPS back cover, in a single layer, position those tubings
and cables exiting on the left. You need to hold these tubings and cables with your left
hand. See Figure 4.25-52.
4. Make sure no tubings are crimped and no cables are stressed.
5. While holding the cables and tubings exiting the left side with one hand, slide the long
slots at the base of the cable cover behind the large washers (on the lower two
Phillips-head screws). See Figure 4.25-53, item 1.

4.25-68 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Figure 4.25-53 Reinstalling the UPS Cable Cover

2
Position the short slots
behind these screw heads

Position the long slots

behind the large washers 7318446D

6. While pressing the cable cover down on the tubings and cables, slip the openings at the
top of the cable cover over the upper two Phillips-head screws. See Figure 4.25-53,
item 2.
7. Secure the cable cover by tightening the four Phillips-head screws. See Figure 4.25-54.

Figure 4.25-54 Screw Locations for Securing UPS Cable Cover

Tighten these screws

Tighten these screws

7318451D

PN 4237029G 4.25-69
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

8. Verify the sound-guard foam has formed a gap-free seal around the exiting tubings and
cables. See Figure 4.25-55.

Figure 4.25-55 Seal Around Tubings and Cables, Left-Side View

Sound-guard foam

Cable cover

Tubings and cables

7029289G

4.25-70 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Procedure 24
How to Remove and Reinstall the Universal Power Supply Back Cover

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the UPS Back Cover

1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet. To locate the SYSTEM POWER and LASER POWER cables, refer to
Figure A.7-6 as needed.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. Remove the cable cover and set it aside. If instructions with illustrations are needed, go
to Procedure 23 and follow the directions under Heading Removing the UPS Cable
Cover.
a. Loosen, but do not remove, the two top and two lower screws securing the plastic
cable cover.
b. Lift the cable cover off the back cover.
c. Set it aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
3. At the rear of the Universal Power Supply:
a. Loosen, but do not remove, the two Phillips-head screws located at the bottom of
the back cover. See Figure 4.25-56, item 1.

Figure 4.25-56 Removing the Back Cover of the Universal Power Supply

1
Loosen but do not
remove these screws

ANALOG ANALOG

LOGIC LOGIC

MCL/MPL MCL/MPL

LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

SYSTEM POWER 1800 WATTS
1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS 1500 WATTS
MAX MAX MAX
MAX

1 1
1
2 1

1 2
1 2

13 1
13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS WASTE PNEUMATICS

VENT CONTROL PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL
PRESS WASTE VAC

1 Loosen but do not

remove these screws 7318444D

PN 4237029G 4.25-71
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

b. Loosen, but do not remove, the two Phillips-head screws located at the top of the
back cover. See Figure 4.25-56, item 1.

CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. If the power is ON while removing the back cover,
components on the Power Control 3 card could be damaged. To prevent damage to electronic components,
always be sure power is OFF before removing or replacing components.

4. Lift the back cover off the Universal Power Supply. See Figure 4.25-56, item 2.
5. Set the cover aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.

Reinstalling the UPS Back Cover

1. Position the back cover over the platform at the rear of the Universal Power Supply.
Make sure all tubings and cables are positioned inside the opening of the back cover.
2. Align the two slots at the bottom of the back cover with two screw heads on the rear of
the extended platform (Figure 4.25-57, item 1).
3. Position the two slots at the top of the back cover over the two outer screws at the top of
the Universal Power Supply frame (Figure 4.25-57, item 2).

Figure 4.25-57 Reinstalling the Back Cover of the Universal Power Supply

2
Position upper slots
behind these screw heads

ANALOG

ANALOG

LOGIC

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER MCL/MPL

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX
SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER
1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1 1

1 1

1 2

1 2

13 1

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL
WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

Align lower slots

behind these screw heads 7318458D

4. Lower the two slots at the bottom of the back cover behind the washers attached to the
screw heads. When you release the back cover, the weight of the cover will be resting on
these four screws.
5. Secure the back cover by tightening the four screws (two top and two bottom). See
Figure 4.25-58.

4.25-72 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
Figure 4.25-58 Securing the UPS Back Cover
Tighten these screws

ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1

1 2

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

Tighten these screws

7318457D

6. Reinstall the cable cover. If instructions with illustrations are needed, go to Procedure 23
and follow the directions under Heading Reinstalling the UPS Cable Cover.
a. Before reinstalling the cable cover, consider the location of the Cytometer in
relationship to the Universal Power Supply then arrange the cables and tubings
exiting the back cover to accommodate the setup.
b. Make sure no tubings are crimped and no cables are stressed.
c. In a single layer, position the tubings and cables on the back cover. The laser
umbilical cable will support the tubings and cables exiting on the right. You will
need to hold the tubings and cables exiting on the left with your hand.
d. While holding the cables and tubings exiting the left side with one hand, slide the
long slots at the base of the cable cover behind the large washers (on the lower two
Phillips-head screws).
e. While pressing the cable cover down on the cables (and tubings), align the openings
at the top of the cable cover with the openings across the top of the Universal Power
Supply frame. Once aligned, reinstall the two Phillips-head screws that secure the
cable cover to the Universal Power Supply frame.
f. Tighten the two Phillips-head screws near the bottom of the cable cover.
g. Verify the sound-guard foam has formed a gap-free seal around the exiting tubings
and cables.
7. Plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.
8. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.

PN 4237029G 4.25-73
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Procedure 25
How to Remove and Reinstall the UPS Pneumatics Drawer

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Phillips-head screwdriver

Removing the UPS Pneumatics Drawer

1. Power down the entire system. (This includes unplugging both ac power line cords from
the wall outlet. To locate the SYSTEM POWER and LASER POWER cables, refer to
Figure A.7-6 as needed.)
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Down Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.
2. Remove the main cover and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 21 and follow the directions
under Heading Removing the UPS Main Cover.
a. Remove the cable cover and set it aside.
1) Loosen, but do not remove, the two lower screws securing the plastic cable
cover to the back cover of the Universal Power Supply.
2) Remove the two top screws securing the plastic cable cover to the Cytometer
frame.
3) Lift the cable cover off the back cover.
4) Set the cable cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cable cover will
not be damaged.

CAUTION Risk of damage to electronic components. If the power is ON while removing the back cover,
components on the Power Control 3 card could be damaged. To prevent damage to electronic components,
always be sure power is OFF before removing or replacing components.

b. Remove the back cover and set it aside.

1) Loosen, but do not remove, the two Phillips-head screws located at the bottom
of the back cover.
2) Remove the two Phillips-head screws located at the top of the back cover.
3) Carefully lift the back cover off the Universal Power Supply.
4) Set the cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cover will not be
damaged.
c. Open the front door.
d. Remove the three Phillips-head screws on the frame side of the hinge, not the front
door side of the hinge. Set these screws aside.
e. Close the front door.
f. At the left-side of the Universal Power Supply, remove the two Phillips-head screws
located at the bottom of the cover.

4.25-74 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
g. At the right-side of the Universal Power Supply, remove the two Phillips-head
screws located at the bottom of the cover.
h. Standing at the front (or rear) of the Universal Power Supply, firmly grasp the left
and right sides of the main cover.
i. Lift the cover straight up and off the Universal Power Supply frame.
j. Set the cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where it will not be damaged.
3. At the rear of the Universal Power Supply:
a. Disconnect the four pneumatic quick-connects (PRESSURE, WASTE, VACUUM, and
WASTE VENT). See Figure 4.25-59, item 1.

Figure 4.25-59 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Disconnecting Rear Components

ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1

1 2

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

3 Remove screws

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

1
Disconnect pneumatic Disconnect pneumatic
2
7029285G quick-connects control cable

4. Disconnect the pneumatics control cable (Figure 4.25-59, item 2).

5. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the UPS pneumatics drawer to the lower
rear panel. Set these screws aside (Figure 4.25-59, item 3).

PN 4237029G 4.25-75
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

6. In the top compartment, disconnect the compressor cable from connector J155 on the
Voltage Selector 2 card (Figure 4.25-60).
Figure 4.25-60 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Disconnecting the Compressor

Disconnect
compressor
cable (J155)

MCL, 5&12V, +24V +\- 15V SPLY 5V SPLY 24V SPLY

5 J129 1 4 J4 1 J3 3 2 1 3 J5 1

10 6 8 5 6 4
6 4
100 15 11 120 12 9 9 8 7 220 240
VAC VAC VAC VAC
SYSTEM RELAY J153 J154
J151 J152
15 30 15 30 16 1 16 1

J155

7 9

WARNING
1 16 1 16 *HIGH VOLTAGE* 30 15 30 15
1 3
PWB 177821B PWB 626415A
7029291G

7. In the right-side compartment, disconnect P135 from J135 located at the top of the
Voltage Supply Monitor card (Figure 4.25-61).
Figure 4.25-61 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Disconnecting P135

Disconnect
P135

Voltage Supply
Monitor card

7029293G

4.25-76 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
8. At the front of the Universal Power Supply:
a. Remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the UPS pneumatics drawer
(Figure 4.25-62, item 1).

Figure 4.25-62 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removal - Final Steps for Removal

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER

AIR
FILTER
30
PSI

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS

1 Remove screws

P
R
E
S
S
U
R
PRESS

E
ADJ

VA
C
U
U
M

2 Remove drawer

7029292G

b. Remove the UPS pneumatics drawer by pulling it away from the Universal Power
Supply frame (Figure 4.25-62, item 2). The UPS drawer is heavy so be careful to lift
it properly as you would any other heavy object.
9. Set the UPS pneumatics drawer on a flat surface such as a work bench.

PN 4237029G 4.25-77
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

Reinstalling the UPS Pneumatics Drawer

1. Reinstall the UPS pneumatics drawer by sliding the drawer back inside the Universal
Power Supply.
r The UPS drawer is heavy so be careful to lift it properly as you would any other
heavy object.
r Before sliding the drawer completely inside, reconnect P135 to J135 at the top of the
Voltage Supply Monitor card (Figure 4.25-61).
2. Reinstall the four Phillips-head screws removed earlier to secure the UPS pneumatics
drawer to the Universal Power Supply frame (Figure 4.25-62).
3. Reconnect the compressor cable to J155 COMPRESSOR on the Voltage Selector 2 card
(Figure 4.25-60).
4. If you have not already done so, reconnect P135 to J135 at the top of the Voltage Supply
Monitor card (Figure 4.25-61).
5. At the rear of the Universal Power Supply:
a. Reinstall the two Phillips-head screws that were removed earlier (Figure 4.25-59).
b. Reconnect the four pneumatic quick-connects (PRESSURE, WASTE, VACUUM, and
WASTE VENT) according to the color coding (Figure 4.25-59).
c. Reconnect the pneumatics control cable (Figure 4.25-59).
6. Reinstall the main cover. Refer to Procedure 21 and follow the directions under
Heading Reinstalling the Main Cover if detailed instructions with illustrations are
needed.
a. Position the main cover over the Universal Power Supply.
b. Lower the cover onto the Universal Power Supply. Make sure it is properly seated.
c. Reinstall the seven Phillips-head screws, two in the lower left-side panel, two in the
lower right-side panel, and three on the frame side of the hinge.
7. Reinstall the back cover.
a. Position the back cover over the platform at the rear of the Universal Power Supply.
Make sure the two U-shaped slots at the bottom of the back cover are positioned
behind the washer attached to the two screws on the rear of the extended platform
then lower the back cover to rest on the posts of those screws.
b. Make sure all tubings and cables are positioned inside the opening at the top of the
back cover.
c. Reinstall the two outer screws (at the top) that were removed earlier.
d. Secure the back cover by tightening all four screws - two top and two bottom.
8. Reinstall the cable cover.
a. Before reinstalling the cable cover, consider the location of the Cytometer in
relationship to the Universal Power Supply then arrange the cables and tubings
exiting the back cover to accommodate the setup. See Figure 4.25-47 for the
recommended arrangement.
b. Make sure no tubings are crimped and no cables are stressed.

4.25-78 PN 4237029G
 SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION 4
c. In a single layer, position the tubings and cables on the back cover. The laser
umbilical cable will support the tubings and cables exiting on the right. You will
need to hold the tubings and cables exiting on the left with your hand.
d. While holding the cables and tubings exiting the left side with one hand, slide the
long slots at the base of the cable cover behind the large washers (on the lower two
Phillips-head screws).
e. While pressing the cable cover down on the cables (and tubings), align the openings
at the top of the cable cover with the openings across the top of the Universal Power
Supply frame. Once aligned, reinstall the two Phillips-head screws that secure the
cable cover to the UPS frame.
f. Tighten the two Phillips-head screws near the bottom of the cable cover.
g. Verify the sound-guard foam has formed a gap-free seal around the exiting tubings
and cables.
9. Plug the two ac power cords back into the wall outlet.
10. Power up the entire system.
r If SYSTEM II is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using SYSTEM II Software heading.
r If EXPO32 ADC is the preferred operating system, under Heading 4.1, complete the
three stages detailed under the Power Up Using EXPO32 ADC Software heading.

PN 4237029G 4.25-79
SERVICE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES
COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION

4.25-80 PN 4237029G
 5MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 5
5.1 SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP)
Purpose
Doing the System Verification Procedure (SVP) at the completion of a service call ensures the
instrument is working correctly before you leave the account. Fill in a copy of the SVP form
and leave it with the customer.

Required Service Form

A copy of the Coulter Cytometry Systems Verification Form, PN 4276437, is included at the
end of this chapter for your convenience. Make copies as needed.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B IsoFlow sheath fluid, PN 8547008
B 24 empty 12 x 75-mm test tubes, PN 2523749
Note: If the SVP is being performed on an XL flow cytometer without the MCL option,
only 12 empty 12 x 75 mm test tubes are required.
B CYTO-TROL control cells, PN 6604248 (or normal blood cells)
B Copy of the Coulter Cytometry Systems Verification Form, PN 4276437
B Copy of the Field Engineer Worksheet under Heading C.1, WORKSHEETS

Preparation
r If you have not already done so, make a copy of the Coulter Cytometry Systems
Verification Form and the Field Engineer Worksheet.
r If you are performing this SVP as part of an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer installation,
start at the Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis and Carryover Check heading. Cover
removal and reinstallation are already validated and the other static tests are not
necessary with a new instrument. The static and power up tests as well as verification of
the Trans Data Acquisition card offsets were completed during installation.

Static Tests
1. Ensure that all covers can be removed and reinstalled without problems as directed
under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION.
r At the Cytometer, do not reinstall the four Phillips-head screws securing the top
cover to the Cytometer frame. The top cover must be removed later.
r If a Voltage-Specific Power Supply is installed, do not reinstall the four
Phillips-head screws securing the three-sided cover to the Power Supply module’s
frame. The three-sided cover must be removed later.
r If a Universal Power Supply is installed, do not reinstall the seven Phillips-head
screws securing the main cover to the Power Supply module’s frame. Do not
reinstall the back cover and cable cover. The main cover must be removed later.
2. Inspect the reagent drawer for leakage and spillage. Clean and repair as needed.
3. Inspect the segmenting valve for leakage and corrosion. Clean and repair as needed.

PN 4237029G 5.1-1
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP)

4. Inspect the flow cell area for leakage and saline deposit build-up. Clean and repair as
needed.
5. Inspect the air/water filter separators (water traps). Clean and repair as needed:
r One in the Cytometer
r One on the front of the Power Supply module.
6. Inspect the vacuum trap in the Power Supply module. Clean and repair as needed.
7. Clean all the fan filters:
r If a Voltage-Specific Power Supply is installed:
t Two on the Cytometer (lower panel)
t Two on the Power Supply module (lower left side)
t One on the Computer Workstation (back).
r If a Universal Power Supply is installed:
t Two on the Cytometer (lower panel)
t Two on the UPS back cover (side panel)
t One on the Computer Workstation (back).

Power Up Tests
1. Verify all cooling fans are operating properly. Repair as needed.
Exterior Fan Locations
r Two on the Cytometer (lower rear panel).
r One on the Workstation computer (back).
r If a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, two on the rear panel (lower left side).
Interior Fan Locations
r If a Universal Power Supply, two inside the right-side compartment and a third fan
located in the middle (between the lower left and right compartments).
r Two in the laser blower assembly (mounted on the Cytometer frame, left side).
2. At the Power Supply module:
a. Verify the system pressure gauge (SYS PRESS) reads 30 psi. Adjust the regulator if
necessary.
r To decrease, turn to the left (counterclockwise).
r To increase, turn to the right (clockwise).
b. Check the vacuum trap (VAC TRAP) and clean as needed.
c. Verify the system vacuum gauge (SYS VAC) registers a minimum of 17 in. Hg.
3. At the Cytometer:
a. Verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
b. Verify vacuum is present at the manual sample station head.

5.1-2 PN 4237029G
 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP) 5
Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification
Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the offset of
each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.

Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis and Carryover Check

Note: If you have not already done so, go to Heading C.1 and print two copies of the Field
Engineer Worksheet if you are verifying operation of an XL-MCL flow cytometer. If you are
verifying operation of an XL flow cytometer, only one copy is needed.

Using the Manual Sample Station

1. At the Workstation, select the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol.
Note: If an Acquire Fluorospheres protocol needs to be set up, see Acquiring
Fluorospheres under Heading A.3.
2. Dispense approximately 1 mL of Flow-Check fluorospheres into 10 test tubes and label
each tube BEADS.
3. Dispense approximately 1 mL of sheath fluid into two test tubes and label each tube ISO.
4. Insert one of the test tubes labeled BEADS in the manual sample station.
5. Run the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol.
6. At the end of the run, record the results on the Field Engineer Worksheet.
7. Remove the test tube from the manual sample station. Discard the test tube.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 until all the test tubes labeled BEADS are processed.
9. At the end of run 10, record the time it took to reach 5,000 events.
10. Insert one of the test tubes labeled ISO in the manual sample station.
11. Rerun the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in
step 9.
12. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR1 and save the printout.
13. Remove the ISO test tube from the manual sample station. Discard the test tube
immediately to ensure it is not accidently rerun.
14. Wait five minutes.
15. After the five minute wait, insert the second ISO test tube in the manual sample station.
16. Rerun the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in
step 9.
17. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR2 and save the printout.
18. Remove the ISO test tube from the manual sample station. Discard the test tube
immediately to ensure it is not accidently rerun.
19. Ensure that the carryover for CLEAR1 and CLEAR2 are less than 1% (<100 events each).
a. If the carryover is greater than 1%:
1) Clean the segmenting valve as instructed under Heading 4.11.
2) Using the manual sample station, repeat the CV analysis. Start at step 1 again.
b. If the carryover is less than 1%, go to step 20 and perform the CV analysis.

PN 4237029G 5.1-3
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP)

20. On the Field Engineer Worksheet, verify that all CVs are acceptable.
a. Add the HP CVs and the Mean Channels.
b. Divide each total by 10 to get the average.
c. Evaluate the results to determine if all CVs are within the assay value on the
package insert.
r If all CVs are acceptable:
a) Leave a copy of the worksheet results and printouts with the customer.
b) Go to step 21 to continue.
r If one or more CVs are unacceptable, go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL
ALIGNMENT and complete the procedure as written.
21. How to proceed:
a. If you are performing this CV analysis and carryover check on an XL-MCL flow
cytometer, repeat this check using the MCL sample station.
b. If you are performing this CV analysis and carryover check on an XL flow cytometer
without the MCL option, go to the Cytometer Interlock Checks heading and
complete the checks as written.

Using the MCL Sample Station

1. At the Workstation, select the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol.
2. Dispense approximately 1 mL of Flow-Check fluorospheres into 10 test tubes and label
each tube BEADS.
3. Dispense approximately 1 mL of sheath fluid into two test tubes and label each tube ISO.
4. Place the test tubes labeled BEADS in the MCL carousel.
5. Run the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol.
6. Watch the Workstation screen and at the end of each run, record the results on the Field
Engineer Worksheet.
7. At the end of run 10, record the time it took to reach 5,000 events.
8. Remove and discard the test tubes containing the fluorospheres (beads).
9. Place one of the test tubes labeled ISO in the MCL carousel.
10. Rerun the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in
step 7.
11. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR1-MCL and save the printout.
12. Remove the ISO test tube from the MCL carousel. Discard the test tube immediately to
ensure it is not accidently rerun.
13. Wait five minutes.
14. After the five minute wait, place the second ISO test tube in the MCL carousel.
15. Rerun the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol with a manual stop at the time recorded in
step 7.
16. At the end of the run, label the sample information as CLEAR2-MCL and save the printout.
17. Remove the ISO test tube from the MCL carousel. Discard the test tube.

5.1-4 PN 4237029G
 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP) 5
18. Ensure carryover for CLEAR1-MCL and CLEAR2-MCL are less than 1% (<100 events each).
a. If the carryover is greater than 1%:
1) Clean the segmenting valve as instructed under Heading 4.11.
2) Using the MCL sample station, repeat the CV analysis. Start at step 1 again.
b. If the carryover is less than 1%, go to step 19 and perform the CV analysis.
19. On the Field Engineer Worksheet, verify that all CVs are acceptable.
a. Add the HP CVs and the Mean Channels.
b. Divide each total by 10 to get the average.
c. Add the HP CVs and the Mean Channels.
d. Divide each total by 10 to get the average.
e. Evaluate the results to determine if all CVs are within the assay value on the
package insert.
r If all CVs are acceptable, go to the Cytometer Interlock Checks heading and
complete the check as written.
r If one or more CVs are unacceptable, go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL
ALIGNMENT and complete the procedure as written.
20. Leave a copy of the worksheet results and printouts with the customer.

Cytometer Interlock Checks

1. If the MCL option is installed, check the MCL door interlock:
a. Place an empty test tube in the MCL carousel but leave the MCL door open.
b. Attempt to run the Acquire Fluorospheres protocol again.
c. If MCL operation halts immediately and an MCL Door Open Error or MCL Door
Open Warning message appears on the Workstation screen, proper operation of the
MCL interlock is confirmed.
2. At the Cytometer front panel display, verify the:
a. LASER ON indicator glows green indicating the Argon laser is powered on.
b. CYTOMETER READY indicator glows green indicating the Cytometer is ready for
operation.
3. Check the Argon laser interlock:
a. Remove the Cytometer top cover. The Argon laser should power off immediately.
b. If the LASER ON indicator darkens, proper operation of the interlock is confirmed.
c. Reinstall the Cytometer top cover.
4. At the Cytometer front panel display, verify the:
a. LASER ON indicator glows green indicating the Argon laser is powered on.
b. CYTOMETER READY indicator glows green indicating the Cytometer is ready for
operation.

PN 4237029G 5.1-5
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE (SVP)

Power Supply Module Interlock Checks

1. On the front of the Power Supply module, verify the SYSTEM POWER indicators (and
MCL POWER indicators if the MCL option is installed) are lighted.
2. Remove the main cover (or three-sided cover, if applicable) from the Power Supply
module. Power supply components and the Cytometer should power off immediately.
3. If the SYSTEM POWER indicators (and MCL POWER indicators if the MCL option is
installed) on the front of the Power Supply module darken and the Cytometer READY
indicator on the Cytometer front panel display darkens, proper operation of the Power
Supply module interlock is confirmed.

Workstation Computer Test

1. Go to the DOS directory.
2. Run SCANDISK C: and verify disk space available is adequate enough for the operator.

On-Site Close Out

1. Reinstall all covers removed during this verification. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. Power on the Cytometer.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using SYSTEM II software)
under Heading 4.1, as needed.
r Refer to Restoring Power to the Cytometer Only (system using EXPO32 ADC
software) under Heading 4.1, as needed.
3. At the Cytometer front panel display, verify the:
a. LASER ON indicator lights green indicating the Argon laser is powered on.
b. CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green indicating the Cytometer is ready for
operation.
4. Run a CYTO-TROL control cell sample if the customer has it available. If unavailable,
run normal blood samples.
5. Have the customer run one or more samples to verify operation.
6. Ensure that all the customer’s concerns have been addressed.
7. Close this call using your country’s service order closeout process.

5.1-6 PN 4237029G
 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION (PMI) 5
5.2 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION (PMI)
Purpose
Use this procedure to perform a PMI on the instrument.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B XL PMI kit, PN 6913241

Procedure
1. Check the contents of the XL PMI kit against the packing list to ensure that all the parts
are present.
2. Turn OFF the instrument.
3. Remove covers as needed to replace, inspect, and clean designated components. Refer to
Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed
instructions.
4. Replace the:
a. Manual sample head and pickup probe.
b. MCL sample head and pickup probe.
c. Discolored tubing (all).
d. Sample introduction tubing (PEEK tubing).
e. Fan filters.
f. Sheath filter.
g. Waste vent filters (both of them) in the Power Supply module.
h. Check valves as needed.
i. Y-fittings as needed.
5. Inspect and clean the:
a. Optical filters (all).
b. Beam-shaping optics.
c. Flow cell.
d. Pinhole lenses.
6. Turn ON the instrument.
7. Align the optics as directed under Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.
8. Reinstall all covers removed during the PMI. Refer to Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL
AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
9. Exit the SYSTEM II software and enter MS-DOS.
ATTENTION: Depending on when the instrument was manufactured, it may be using MS-DOS
Version 5.0, 6.0 or 6.22.

PN 4237029G 5.2-1
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION (PMI)

10. At the MS-DOS prompt:

r If running under MS-DOS 5.0, type CHKDSK/F and press Û.
r If running under MS-DOS 6.0 or 6.22, type SCANDISK and press Û. After this is
completed, type DEFRAG and press Û.
11. If any lost chains are found, mark them.
12. Delete all the lost chains; type DEL*.CHK and press Û.
13. Reboot the Computer Workstation.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP).

5.2-2 PN 4237029G
 COULTER CYTOMETRY SYSTEMS VERIFICATION FORM

Institution Name Date

FSR # Model / Serial # Run #

PROBLEM / SYMPTOM

CORRECTIVE ACTION

SMOs PERFORMED

On all types of maintenance completed, VERIFY:

HPCV Precision for FS & FL Linear Parameters on Flourospheres *

HPCV Stability on Flourospheres *

Peak or Mean Channel Stability for All Linear Parameters*

That All Customer Concerns Have Been Addressed (Verified by customer signature.)

*Reference the appropriate Operator's Manual for the Instrument to obtain Performance Specifications.

Additional Comments

Customer Signature

Print Customer's Last Name

CSS Signature

PN 4276437B R 4-97/ Rev B 7/2001

Checked Box Indicates Function Performed

Elite Analyser

Elite Analyser
ELITE / ESP

ELITE / ESP
XL/MCL

XL/MCL
ALTRA

ALTRA
ELITE

ELITE
PROCEDURE / VERIFICATION

XL

XL
PERFORMANCE - ON ALL CALL COMPLETIONS COMPUTER / WORKSTATION
HPCV Precision on FS & FL Linear Parameters CMOS Setup Verified
HPCV Stability on FS & FL Linear Parameters Verified Config.sys / Autoexec.bat
Peak or Mean Channel Stability Checked for Viruses
Carryover Ran - Defrag [ ] - Chkdsk [ ] - Scandisk [ ]
Operation of Cleaning Adaptors Ran Diagnostic Software
All above performed in Manual and/or Auto Modes Reloaded Software
PERFORMANCE - AS REQUIRED BY TYPE OF PROBLEM Repl. Drive - [ ] Hard - [ ] Floppy
Linearity Of Linear Parameter(s) Repl. Drive - [ ] Optical - [ ] Bernoulli
Linearity Of Log Parameter(s) Repl. Printed Circuit Board
Operation Of Multi-Carousel Loader Repl. - Computer [ ] - Keybd [ ] - Monitor [ ]
Ran Prefinal Service Software Repl. [ ] - Cleaned [ ] - Mouse
Standard Sorting Capability Repl. Bar-Code Hand Held Scanner
High Speed Sorting Capability Other
Operation Of Autoclone PRINTERS
Other Repl. [ ] Verified [ ] Standard Printer
PNEUMATICS / FLUIDICS Repl. [ ] Verified [ ] Color Printer
Repl. Actuator / Pinch Valve / Solenoid Repl. [ ] Verified [ ] Bar Code Printer
Repl. Tubing - [ ] Common - [ ] Sample Repl. [ ] Verified [ ] Thermal Printer
Repl. Sample Introduction Kit (Peek Tubing) Other
Repl. Pressure / Vacuum Switch OPTICAL SUBSYSTEMS
Repl. Sheath / Sample Transducer Cleaned [ ] Repl. [ ] Optical Filter
Repl. [ ] - Cleaned [ ] - Segmenting Valve Cleaned [ ] Repl. [ ] Beam Shaper
Repl. Sheath Filter / Waste Filter Cleaned [ ] Repl. [ ] FL Pickup Assembly
Repl. Reagent / Waste // Sensor / Switch Cleaned [ ] Repl. [ ] Flow Cell / Tip
Repl. Air / Water Sep.- [ ] Assy. - [ ] Filter Cleaned / Lubricated Optical Rail Assembly
Repl. [ ] - Adj. [ ] - Sheath Regulator Aligned Laser Head to Targets
Repl. [ ] - Adj. [ ] - Sample Regulator Adj. Z Axis
Repl. [ ] - Adj. [ ] - Vacuum Regulator Performed Optical Alignment
Repl. Sheath / Waste / Clenz / Rinse Tank Aligned Photo Multiplier Tube(s)
Repl. Compressor / Vacuum Assembly Other
Repl. [ ] - Repair [ ] - Sample Station AUTOMATED SAMPLE HANDLING OPTIONS
Repl. [ ] - Cleaned [ ] - Man. Sample Head Repl. Autocloner Board
Repl. [ ] - Cleaned [ ] - MCL Sample Head Repl. [ ] Repair [ ] AUTO-CLONE
Repl. Sample Tube Cap Adj. [ ] Calibrated [ ] AUTO-CLONE
Repl. [ ] - Cleaned [ ] - Flow Cell [ ] - Tip [ ] Repl. [ ] Repair [ ] MQP
Repl. [ ] - Repair [ ] - Lower Pneu. Drawer Other
Adj. [ ] Align. [ ] MCL
Repl. [ ] Repair [ ] MCL LASERS
Other Check only if laser aligned, repaired, or replaced. LASER POWER
ELECTRONICS CYONICS
Cleaned [ ] - Repl. [ ] - Fan Filters COHERENT - I 60 Series
Repl. - [ ] Fan - [ ] - Blower Assembly COHERENT - I 70 Series
Repl. Power Supply COHERENT - I 90 Series
Checked [ ] - Adj. [ ] - Power Supply COHERENT - I 305 LASER CURRENT
Repl. Printed Circuit Board COHERENT - Spectrum
Calibrated Printed Circuit Board COHERENT - Enterprise
Performed Pneumatic Calibration Procedure COHERENT - DPSS
Repl. Scatter Detector - [ ] FS - [ ] SS MELLES GRIOT - Green HeNe
Repl. Photo Multiplier Tube Assembly UNIPHASE - Red HeNe WAVELENGTH
Repl. Bar-Code Reader Head OMNICHROME - HeCd 74
Cleaned Bar-Code Reader Head OTHER
Other
 6SCHEMATICS 6
6.1 ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS
This section contains the document part numbers for the engineering schematics, diagrams,
and layouts you need for troubleshooting the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer. These
engineering documents are listed in alphabetical order under the applicable heading:
r Cytometer
r MCL Option
r Universal Power Supply
r Voltage-Specific Power Supply
r Workstation.

Electronic (.pdf) files of these schematics are available on a separate CD-ROM in the Service
Resource Kit (SRK) and in a Lotus Notes® database. The schematics in the SRK are the latest
revisions available at the time the SRK is released. For copies of schematics released between
revisions of the SRK, check the Lotus Notes database. It will always have the most current
revisions.

Note: Depending on the configurations of this instrument in the field, more than one revision
of a schematic can be valid.

If you print this manual and want to include the schematics, make printouts of the electronic
files and insert them at the end of this chapter.

Cytometer
Name PN
Amplifier / Signal Conditioner card 6320739
Analyzer Backplane 6320633
Cyto Transputer card 6320738
FALS Hybrid Detector card (or FS Detector card) 6321049
Fiber Optic Interface card 6320755
Front Panel LED and Switch Input (for XL units only) 6320590
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card (non-EMC version) 6320820
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (EMC version) 6322949
Pneumatic / Hydraulic Layout: XL System 6320886
PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card 6320591
Safety Interlock Interconnect 6320912
Sensor card 6320630
SideScatter Amplifier 1 6320530
Solenoid Power Distribution card 6321192
System Interface card 6320782
Top Panel Display 2 card 6320606
Trans Data Acquisition card 6320732

PN 4237029G 6.1-1
SCHEMATICS
ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS

MCL Option
Name PN
Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 (for XL-MCL units only) 6321141
MCL CPU card 6321078
MCL Interconnect 6319791
MCL Interface card 6321034

Universal Power Supply

Name PN
Breaker card 626259
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card 6323009
Note: Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card is the name on
the schematic.
Interconnect Diagram, Universal Power Supply 623362
Power Control 3 card 179339
Safety Interlock Interconnect 175390
Voltage Selector 2 card 177817
Voltage Supply Monitor 6321107

Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Name PN
CYT12 Receiver EMC 6322948
Motor Filter EMC 6322977
Pneumatic / Hydraulic Layout: XL System 6320886
Power Module Control card (non-EMC version) 6320636
Power Module Control II card (EMC version) 6322947
Safety Interlock Interconnect 6320912
Transient Absorber EMC 6323009
Voltage Selector 100 Vac 6320870
Voltage Selector 120 Vac 6320657
Voltage Selector 220 Vac 6320888
Voltage Selector 230/240 Vac 6320889
Voltage Supply Monitor card 6321107

6.1-2 PN 4237029G
 SCHEMATICS
ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS 6
Workstation
Name PN
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card (non-EMC version) 6320820
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (EMC version) 6322949

PN 4237029G 6.1-3
SCHEMATICS
ENGINEERING DOCUMENTS

6.1-4 PN 4237029G
 7TROUBLESHOOTING 7
7.1 LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES
Level Sense Indicators

Cleanse Low
When the CLEANSE LOW indicator is red, fill the cleanse container. You cannot start a
cleanse cycle until this is done.

Sheath Low and Waste Full

Table 7.1-1 documents how to read the SHEATH LOW and WASTE FULL level-sense
indicators.

Note: If a full waste container is detected while the last sample in a carousel is being analyzed,
the carousel report is not printed. To print the report:

1. Select Applications tt Acquisition.

2. Select Alt Save.
3. Select Print Carousel Report.

Table 7.1-1 Level Sense Indicators - Sheath Low and Waste Full

Indicator Elapsed
Turned Red Time
During... (minutes) Indicator Is... Action
Sample 1 Flashing red Five minutes remain to finish analyzing current sample. Either
analysis 2 immediately or after current sample analysis is complete, refill or
empty appropriate container (see Special Procedures and
3 Troubleshooting manual).
4
5 Glowing red,
beeping every 10
seconds
6 Glowing red Refill or empty appropriate container (see Special Procedures and
Troubleshooting manual). Samples cannot be analyzed until this is
done. Cytometer stopped data acquisition, stored data, is in Idle
mode.
Prime or N/A Glowing red Refill or empty appropriate container (see Special Procedures and
cleanse cycle Troubleshooting manual). Samples cannot be analyzed until this is
done.

Error Messages
Error messages appear:

r In the center of the monitor’s screen. To acknowledge:

t Press and release either mouse button, or
t Press Û.
r In the lower right corner of the Acquisition Run screen. To acknowledge, use the mouse
to move the cursor over the message Click here to clear messages and press either mouse
button.

PN 4237029G 7.1-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES

About the Error Messages Table

The table of error messages (Table 7.1-2) lists the error messages in alphabetical order, with
their cause and what to do about them. An additional error message table is printed
automatically when you install SYSTEM II software.

Table 7.1-2 Error Messages

Message Cause / Symptom Action

A region must first be selected A region operation was attempted Select region, repeat operation.
before selecting a region.
All regions are already assigned Creation of >24 regions attempted. Delete some existing regions, create new
ones.
Cannot get Cytometer ready r Laser defective or not ignited Reset circuit breakers (see Special
r No vacuum Procedures and Troubleshooting manual).
r Incorrect pressure
Cannot get sample information r Software error Clean carousel or use new one and/or check
from MCL r Bad bar-code label condition and placement of bar-code label
on sample tube.
Cannot open protocol queue file r File load error Specify correct directories on Utilities
r No file Configuration screen and/or from File
menu, select Rebuild.
r Wrong path specified
Caution: No histograms were Protocol is missing histograms. Create histograms.
noted
Counter not available >3 stop counts specified. Delete an existing stop count, create new
one.
Cleanse level error Low cleaning agent. Fill cleaning agent container.
Cleanse level warning Cleanse sensor failed. Replace level sensor or cleanse tank.
>>>> Cytometer communications Program unable to communicate with r Reset circuit breakers (see Special
failure during file load <<<< Cytometer. Procedures and Troubleshooting
manual).
>>>> Cytometer program file not
found <<<< r At computer workstation, turn
instrument off, then back on.
Cytometer read cyto state timeout Cytometer communication error. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
off, then back on.
Data rate error Data rate too high for Cytometer data Dilute sample and/or change discriminator
handling. setting.
Data rate warning Data rate too high due to high sample
concentration.
Discriminator not set. Set discriminator.
Instrument needs calibration. Reset circuit breakers (see Special
Procedures and Troubleshooting manual).
Data stream error Data acquisition hardware error. Replace Trans Data Acquisition card.
Data stream warning

7.1-2 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES 7
Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

Equation(s) exceed defined Software failure. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
limitations off, then back on.
ERROR: 2 parameter histograms Two-parameter histogram selected as Select one-parameter histogram.
not allowed control or test in Immuno-4 data
analysis.
ERROR: Channel resolution of Control and test histogram selected Select other control and/or test histograms.
histograms are different with different resolutions in
Immuno-4 analysis.
ERROR: Histogram Log decades Control and test histograms selected
are different with different log types in Immuno-4
analysis.
ERROR: in accessing metafile Metafile saved incorrectly. Save again.
Error: Invalid path selected Invalid path entered. Enter another path.
ERROR: Mouse Driver Not Present No mouse detected. r Secure mouse connector.
r At Computer Workstation, turn
instrument off, then back on.
No mouse driver installed. Add mouse driver to config.sys file.
ERROR: No controls or tests have Controls or tests not selected. In Immuno-4 application, build control
been set up for this panel queue.
ERROR: No more entries may be >32 protocols selected in a panel. Delete some protocols, add others.
selected
ERROR: Not enough memory to System needs more memory to At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
calculate amorphous statistics calculate statistics for amorphous off, then back on.
region.
ERROR: Unable to receive Instrument cannot receive Cytometer
cytometer's program version changes.
ERROR! <your file name> does Software cannot find named file in From File menu, select Rebuild.
not exist in this directory! directory.
ERROR! DEFAULT is a reserved "Default" entered as name. Enter another name.
name.
ERROR! Name must not consist Name consisting of all blank spaces
entirely of spaces. entered.
ERROR! Requested file does not Software cannot find file in directory. From File menu, select Rebuild.
exist in this directory
ERROR! Unable to access file Software cannot load named file, or Specify correct directories on Utilities
<your file name>. named file invalid. Configuration screen and/or from File
menu, select Rebuild.
ERROR! Unable to access file. Software cannot load file.
ERROR! Unable to get the Software cannot calculate available At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
available disk space for the disk space. off, then back on.
specified drive

PN 4237029G 7.1-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

ERROR! -- Unable to read non-XL Attempted to create protocols using Use valid protocol.
protocols! non-XL/XL-MCL flow cytometer
software.
>>>> Error loading cytometer Software unable to program Reset SYSTEM II software program.
program file <<<< Cytometer.
Error allocating extended memory Software cannot allocate extended At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
memory. off, then back on.
Error in acquiring Cytometer unable to acquire data.
Error in rename listmode file r File write error Select Alt Save and repeat save.
r Hard disk error
Error in sending all the Computer Workstation/Cytometer At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
compensation values of the communication error. off, then back on.
signals
Error in sending all the gain
settings to Cytometer
Error in sending all the pertinent Computer Workstation/Cytometer r Reset circuit breakers (see Special
time parameters to Cytometer communication error. Procedures and Troubleshooting
manual).
Error in sending all the signals
selected as parameters during r At Computer Workstation, turn
acquisition instrument off, then back on.
Error in sending ratio's numerator Computer Workstation/Cytometer At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
and denominator to Cytometer communication error. off, then back on.
Error in sending sample pressure
Error in sending signal with the
discriminator set
Error in setting Cytometer in the
awaiting sample state
Error in writing file, Current r Wrong path specified Specify correct directories on Utilities
operation aborted r Full disk. Configuration screen and/or use Archive on
Data Management screen and free up disk
space.
ERROR LOADING PROTOCOL Software cannot access protocol file. From File menu, select Rebuild.
ERROR writing to file [filename]! Software cannot write information to Specify correct directories on Utilities
Possible full disk. named file. Configuration screen and/or use Archive on
Data Management screen to free up disk
space.
Error stop Cytometer Computer Workstation/Cytometer At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
communication error. off, then back on.
Fail to close Listmode file r Hard disk error Use Archive on Data Management screen to
r Full disk. free up disk space.

Help is not available at this time No help screens available yet. None.

7.1-4 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES 7
Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

Host command invalid Unknown command. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
off, then back on.
Illegal Cytometer state Cytometer error.
Insufficient memory available System needs more memory.
Insufficient memory for listmode System needs more memory to replay
replay Listmode data.
Insufficient space on <drive More space needed on destination Change file selection and/or get another
designation>: <# bytes> bytes disk to copy/move files. diskette and/or use Archive on Data
free! <# bytes> bytes selected! Management screen to free up disk space.
INTERNAL System ERROR: Invalid Software error. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
application specified off, then back on.
Invalid count value Invalid histogram stop count entered. Enter valid histogram stop count.
Invalid equation string! Invalid histogram equation entered. Enter valid histogram equation.
Invalid Name. Must be other than Name consisting of blank spaces Enter another name.
blank characters. entered.
<your panel name>: Invalid panel Invalid panel selected. From File menu, select Rebuild.
selected
Invalid region index. Call for Software error. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
service. off, then back on.
Laser Current Error Laser current requirements outside Reset circuit breakers (see Special
Laser current warning expected range. Procedures and Troubleshooting manual).

Laser Power Error Laser light power requirements

Laser power warning outside expected range.

MCL Carousel Homing Error Carousel could not go to home Press AUTO. If message reappears, at
position. Computer Workstation, turn instrument off,
then back on.
MCL Carousel In/out Error Carousel could not move when
requested to.
MCL Carousel Label Error Carousel bar-code label missing, dirty Clean bar-code label. If message reappears,
or bad. replace bar-code label or use another
carousel.
MCL Carousel Rotate Error MCL option door open. Close MCL option door.
Sample tube stuck on sample probe Remove sample tube.
guide
MCL CPU Error MCL option/Cytometer At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
communication error. off, then back on.
MCL Door Open error MCL option door open. Close MCL option door.
MCL Door Open Warning
MCL EPROM Error EPROM failed. Replace MCL CPU card.

PN 4237029G 7.1-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

MCL Error MCL option disconnected. r Reset circuit breakers (see Special
Procedures and Troubleshooting
manual).
r Check blue, flat-ribbon cable.
r Check MCL CPU card.
MCL Probe Up/Down Error Probe did not go down or stuck in Press AUTO. If message reappears, at
sample tube. computer workstation, turn instrument off,
then back on.
MCL Receive Timeout MCL option /Cytometer At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
MCL Transmit Timeout communication error. off, then back on.

MCL Tube Displaced Error Sample tube incorrectly positioned. Check for broken sample tube or reposition
tube.
MCL Tube Jam Error Sample tube lodged in MCL option. Remove sample tube from sample probe
guide.
MCL Tube Load Error Bad seal between sample probe Put sample in another sample tube.
guide/sample tube.
MCL Tube Position Error r MCL option could not rotate to Clean bar-code label or use another
correct tube position carousel.
r Read error on bar-code label for
tube position.
MCL Tube Up/down Error Sample tube did not load correctly. Put sample in another sample tube.
Must be greater than previous Smaller scaling value than previous Enter greater scaling value.
level [n] one entered.
Must first select a histogram to Redisplay of unspecified histogram Select histogram first.
redisplay attempted.
Must first select a histogram to Rescale of unspecified histogram
rescale attempted.
No changes allowed while in Attempted to change Cytometer None.
Listmode settings while analyzing a Listmode
file.
No listmode results to display Attempted to display histogram Replay histogram first.
before replaying it.
No >8 signals may be chosen as Attempted to select >8 signals as Deselect some signals, then select others.
parameters. parameters.
No parameter selected Attempted to acquire data before Select parameters first.
selecting parameters.
<your sample name>: not allowed Entered invalid sample name. Enter another name.
for name

7.1-6 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES 7
Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

No valid histogram files were r Specified wrong path Specify correct directories on Utilities
found r No directory files. Configuration screen and/or from File
menu, select Rebuild.
No valid listmode files were found
No valid protocol files were found
Parameters are not present Parameters missing from protocol. Recreate protocol.
Printer busy Printer busy. Check Printer for error message and/or wait
and/or at Computer Workstation, turn
instrument off, then back on.
Printer error Printer out of order. Check Printer for error message and/or at
Computer Workstation, turn instrument off,
then back on.
Printer not ready Printer not on-line. Put Printer on-line, check Printer for error
message and/or at Computer Workstation,
turn instrument off, then back on.
Printer out of paper Printer paper tray empty. Add paper.
Protocol not valid Created invalid protocol. Create another protocol.
Quadstat regions not allowed in Created quadstat region in Create quad-stat region in two-parameter
this equation one-parameter histogram. histogram.
RAM memory is full Listmode file too large. Begin again with a smaller file or upgrade
RAM.
Region already erased Attempted erasing non-existent Check cursor mode.
region.
Region undefined. May only edit Attempted editing unspecified region. Create region before editing.
defined regions.
Replay Not Active You pressed Ò during Listmode None.
data analysis, but were not acquiring
data.
Sample Pressure Error Broken sample tube. Put sample in another sample tube.
Sample probe guide damaged. Replace sample head (see Special
Procedures and Troubleshooting manual).
Sample pressure warning Defective sample tube not Put sample in another sample tube.
pressurizing.
Sample Tube Error Cannot run cleanse cycle with tube on Remove sample tube from sample stage.
sample stage.
Selected Region is not in specified Selected region not part of a Select another histogram or region.
histogram histogram.
Selected signal cannot be a As CALCULATED parameters, RATIO Select other signals.
CALCULATED parameter or TIME cannot be selected as
numerator/denominator for RATIO
parameter.

PN 4237029G 7.1-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

Selected signal must be a Selected signal that is not a parameter First select signal as parameter.
parameter to numerator/denominator for RATIO
parameter.
Selection, edit or erase of ratio not Attempted selecting, editing, or None.
allowed under listmode erasing RATIO parameter during
Listmode data analysis.
Selection or erase of signals not Attempted selecting or erasing
allowed under listmode parameters during Listmode data
analysis.
Sensor data stream error Data acquisition hardware error. Replace System Interface card and reboot.
Sensors stream warning
Set sample pressure fail Cytometer communication error. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
off, then back on.
Sheath Drawer Error Reagent drawer open. Close reagent drawer completely.
Sheath drawer warning
Sheath Level Error Low sheath fluid. Fill sheath container.
Sheath level warning Sheath sensor failed. Replace sheath sensor or sheath tank.
Sheath Pressure Error Connectors on sheath container Tighten connectors.
loose.
Sheath pressure warning
Cap on sheath container loose Tighten cap.
Signal is not used as a parameter Signal not used /already used as Check cursor mode and select another
Signal is already used as a parameter. signal.
parameter
Skipping a queued file due to error File format invalid. From File menu, select Rebuild.
Skipping queued file <your file Named file invalid.
name> due to error
Software failure Cytometer software error. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
off, then back on.
State machine failure Cytometer software failure.
System pressure error Low pressure. Verify:
System pressure warning 1. WATER TRAP on front of Power Supply
module secure.
2. Blue connectors on back of Power
Supply module and Cytometer secure,
attached hose intact.

7.1-8 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES 7
Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

System vacuum error r Vacuum low Verify:
System vacuum warning r VAC TRAP loose or full 1. VAC TRAP (on front of Power Supply
r Bad vacuum hose. module) secure with <0.5 in. fluid. If it
has more, empty it (see Special
Procedures and Troubleshooting
manual).
2. Hose attached to yellow connectors on
back of Power Supply module and
Cytometer intact.
System vacuum error VAC FILTER clogged. Replace the vacuum filter.
System vacuum warning
Temperature error Temperature inside Cytometer too 1. Ensure fan filter at back of instrument is
high. operating properly. If not, replace.
Temperature sensor failure No change in temperature reading. 2. Replace System Interface card.
Temperature warning Temperature inside Cytometer too 3. Ensure laser cooling fans are operating
high. properly. If not, replace.

TERMINAL ERROR IN System! Hardware failure. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument

Press the Enter off, then back on.
key to exit program
There are no saved key strokes to Attempted saving a macro, but there Create macro again.
write to disk is nothing to save.
There are presently no saved files Select item selected from File menu, Specify correct directories on Utilities
to process no files found. Configuration screen and/or from File
menu, select Rebuild.
There is no acquisition data to Attempted printing a histogram before Acquire data first.
print acquiring data.
There is presently no panel file to No panel files available. Specify correct directories on Utilities
process Configuration screen and/or from File
menu, select Rebuild.
Transputer1 error Cytometer software error. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
Transputer2 error off, then back on.

Transputer link error

Unable to autogate r Not enough data points inside Run sample again and/or redraw region.
gate
r Unable to identify distinct
population.
Unable to find/open the protocol File deleted. Recreate protocol and/or specify correct
file directories on Utilities Configuration screen
and/or from File menu, select Rebuild.
Unable to find the listmode file Software cannot access Listmode file. From File menu, select Rebuild.

PN 4237029G 7.1-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES

Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

Unable to find the panel info r You pressed È or Ê during Select panel again and/or specify correct
panel selection directories on Utilities Configuration
r Panel file cannot be found. screen.

Unable to get the specified Cytometer failed. Replace fiber optic cable.
Cytometer state
Unable to load current panel Panel file corrupted, cannot be Select another panel.
opened.
Unable to open file for processing File load error. Specify correct directories on Utilities
Configuration screen and/or from File
menu, select Rebuild.
Unable to open listmode work file Specified wrong path. Specify correct directories on Utilities
Configuration screen.
Disk full. Use Archive on Data Management screen to
free up disk space.
Unable to reset Cytometer--reboot Cytometer not resetting using RESET At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
button. off, then back on.
Unable to save protocol file Specified wrong path. Specify the correct directories on Utilities
Configuration screen.
Disk full. Use Archive on Data Management screen
and free up disk space.
Unable to set Cytometer in the Cytometer failed. Reset circuit breakers (see Special
READY to ACQUIRE state Procedures and Troubleshooting manual).
Unknown data stream error Data acquisition hardware error. Replace Trans Data Acquisition card.
Unknown data stream warning
>>>> Unknown error <<<< System unable to program Cytometer. At Computer Workstation, turn instrument
off, then back on.
Unknown region type. Call for Program error.
service.
Vacuum chamber error Waste in vacuum chamber. Replace level sensor.
Vacuum chamber warning Defective sensor.
VDI display device driver not No GSS/VDI graphics loaded. Put software program diskette in drive a: At
loaded properly. the a:\ prompt, type install.
Warning: Less than 4 megabyte of <4 MB free on hard disk. Use Archive on Data Management screen to
disk space available free up disk space.
Warning: Less than 1 megabyte of <1 MB free on hard disk.
disk space available
Warning: No valid histograms r A protocol without histograms Create another protocol.
were noted created
r Histograms created that do not
match gates created.
Warning: No valid signals were Protocol (in Listmode data analysis) Create or select another protocol and/or
noted does not match signal. select another Listmode file.

7.1-10 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES 7
Table 7.1-2 Error Messages (Continued)

Message Cause / Symptom Action

Waste backpressure err Air filter or its vent tubing clogged Bypass clogged air filter (front of Power
Supply module) or vent tubing (above filter)
by disconnecting connector underneath
FILTER. (Vent tubing vented to air.)
Vent line not connected. On back of Power Supply module, check
that green connector is secure.
Waste level error Waste container full. Empty waste container.
Waste level warning Waste sensor failed. Replace waste tubing harness.
x and y channel count exceeded Count too high when calculating Rerun sample.
65535 projection.
x channel count exceeded 65535
y channel count exceeded 65535
You cannot delete the next use Deleting the protocol assigned next Reassign next, delete protocol.
entry was attempted.
You cannot deselect the next use Deselecting the protocol assigned Reassign next, deselect protocol.
entry next was attempted.
You may not make a deleted or Assigning a deleted or corrupted Reassign next.
errored entry as next protocol as next was attempted.

PN 4237029G 7.1-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
LEVEL SENSE INDICATORS AND ERROR MESSAGES

7.1-12 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
7.2 PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL
Purpose
Prefinal Service software can provide a valuable information for locating a problem. this
software must be installed and operated using the guidelines provided under Heading 4.2,
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION. In this section, the
various tests available within this software are listed in alphabetical order, with a short
description of the test, the areas of the instrument being checked, and suggestions on what to
check if a test should fail. Table A.4-1 provides a quick reference of available tests.

This software is not intended to be a Pass/Fail for system performance: the SVP must be run
after using the Prefinal Service software.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B COULTER® EPICS® XL/XL-MCL Prefinal Software diskette, PN 7231244

Preparation
Consult, as needed, the instructions for installing and operating the Prefinal Service Software
under Heading 4.2, PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION.

Note: This software is not intended to be a Pass/Fail for system performance. The SVP must
be run after using the Prefinal Service software.

ADC Zero Adjust

ATTENTION: To perform this adjustment, you must prepare the Trans Data Acquisition card by
removing the jumper from E1 to E2 and reinstalling it in position E2 to E3 and by placing the
circuit card on a card extender which allows access to the adjustment potentiometer.
Although the adjustment must be made using the card extender, the desired 0.3 to 0.9 mVdc
reading must be obtained while the circuit card is not on the extender. The ADC Zero Adjust
must be run anytime the Trans Data Acquisition card or an Amp/Signal Conditioner card is
replaced. After running the ADC Zero Adjust, the Grand Canyon Adjust must also be run.
Make sure the jumper is installed at E1 to E2 before performing the Grand Canyon Adjust.

Purpose
This test is used to adjust the ADC Zero on the Trans Data Acquisition card. The circuit card
is first put on a card extender and E2 is jumpered to E3 to ground the input to the
Sample/Hold and ADC circuitry. Potentiometer, R8, is then adjusted to obtain a 0.3 to
0.9 mVdc reading on the screen. The circuit card is then reinstalled without the extender. The
test is run again to verify a 0.3 to 0.9 mVdc reading on the screen. If this is not the case, then
the circuit card is extended again and adjusted again to get a 0.3 to 0.9 mVdc reading when
the card is not on the extender. After the reading is obtained, the jumper must be moved back
to the E1 to E2 position. After running the ADC Zero Adjust, the Grand Canyon Adjust must
also be run.

PN 4237029G 7.2-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

Circuit Card Checked in this Test

r Trans Data Acquisition card

Response if Test Fails

r Jumper E2 to E3 may not be properly installed.
r Trans Data Acquisition card may be defective.

Amp Gain Control

Purpose
This selection controls the Amp/Signal Conditioner gain for all the signals.

At the Workstation keyboard, select the desired parameter (PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4,
AUX, FS, or SS) using the æ or ç key. This selection does not provide a PASS or FAIL
message. Press ä to increase the gain or å to decrease the gain as needed. While
adjusting the amplifier gain, observe the response of the bar graph for the parameter being
adjusted.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card may be defective.

Amp Saturation Test

Purpose
This test verifies the R164 adjustment is not set too low. If set too low, the pulse before the
integrator will saturate before the INTEGRAL output saturates. This is hard to detect because
as the pulse before the integrator saturates more, the output of the integrator will increase
because the pulse width will increase. A gain of 2 should produce a 5 V pulse while a gain of
5 should produce a 10 V pulse.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r One of the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards may be defective. Do not adjust R164. This is
a factory adjustment. Replace the circuit card as instructed under Heading 4.15,
AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION.

7.2-2 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Attenuator Control

Purpose
This selection controls the Amp/Signal Conditioner card attenuator for all signals.

At the Workstation keyboard, select the desired parameter (PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4,
AUX, FS, or SS). This selection does not provide a PASS or FAIL message. Use the æ or ç
key to select the parameter. Using the following information as a reference, determine the
desired change then press the key designated to produce that change.

Desired Change Key to Activate Change

To increase attenuation by 10.0% Press ä
To decrease attenuation by 10.0% Press å
To increase attenuation by 1.0% Press â
To decrease attenuation by 1.0% Press ã
To increase attenuation by 0.1% Press à
To decrease attenuation by 0.1% Press á

While adjusting the attenuation, observe the response of the bar graph for the parameter
being adjusted.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card may be defective.

Beeper Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the beeper on the Cytometer is working properly.

Circuit Card Checked in this Test

r Cyto Transputer card

Response if Test Fails

r Cyto Transputer card may be defective.
r Beeper may be defective.
Note: This beeper is located on the Cytometer frame, not on the Cyto Transputer card.
r Interconnecting cable from the Analyzer backplane to the beeper is defective.
r Sound port, P67, may be defective.

PN 4237029G 7.2-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

Canyon Jumper Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the RAMP jumper (E4 to E5) is installed on each Amp/Signal
Conditioner card. If the jumper is properly installed on each card, PASS is displayed. If a
jumper is not properly installed on a Amp/Signal Conditioner card, the screen freezes with
the name of the parameter displayed in red.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r Install E4 to E5 jumper.

Count Rate Test

Purpose
This test checks the count rate register on the Trans Data Acquisition card. It should read
approximately 4.0 kHz. This test provides a PASS or FAIL response.

Circuit Card Checked in this Test

r Trans Data Acquisition card

Response if Test Fails

r Replace the Trans Data Acquisition card.

DMA Acquisition - Not Used

Front Panel Test

Purpose
This test ensures the indicators on the front panel display and the sample station switches
(RUN, AUTO, PRIME, and CLEANSE) are working properly. The bar graph signals for the
indicators on the front panel display come from the Trans Data Acquisition card. The signals
for the other indicators and the sample station switches come from the Cyto Transputer card.

Note: The AUTO switch is present only if the MCL option is installed.

To start, press æ and look at the front panel display to ensure the test is functioning. Use the
æ or ç key to move to the next indicator to be checked. A dash (—) indicates the switch is
inactive; an asterisk (*) indicates the switch is activated.

7.2-4 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test
r Top Panel Display 2 card
r Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 card (in the sample station of an XL-MCL
Cytometer)
r Front Panel LED and Switch Input card (in the sample station of an XL without the MCL
option)
r Interconnecting cable from the Analyzer backplane to the Front Panel LED and Switch
Input 2 card or Front Panel LED and Switch Input card, as applicable
r Cyto Transputer card (front panel display indicators and sample station switches)
r Trans Data Acquisition card (bar graphs)

Response if Test Fails

Note: If the malfunction involves the bar graphs, you may want to perform the Pulse RAMP
Test.

r Top Panel Display 2 card may be defective.

r Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 card (in the sample station of an XL-MCL
Cytometer) or Front Panel LED and Switch Input card (in the sample station of an XL
without the MCL option) may be defective.
r Interconnecting cable from the Analyzer backplane to the Front Panel LED and Switch
Input 2 card or Front Panel LED and Switch Input card may be defective.
r If only the front panel display indicators and/or sample station switches are
malfunctioning, the Cyto Transputer card may be defective.
r If only the bar graphs are malfunctioning, the Trans Data Acquisition card may be
defective.

General Information
This screen lists the operation assigned to the various function keys.

Function Key Operation

F1 Begin All Tests
F2 Loop All Tests
F3 Loop Single Test
F4 Help
F5 Quick Test
F6 Loop on Error Enable/Disable
F7 System Configuration
F8 Manual I/O
F9 No assigned operation
F10 Exit to DOS

PN 4237029G 7.2-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

Grand Canyon Adjust

ATTENTION: The Grand Canyon Adjust must be performed anytime the Trans Data Acquisition
card or an Amp/Signal Conditioner card is replaced. Always run the ADC Zero Adjust before
doing this adjustment. Before starting is adjustment, remove jumper E4 to E5 from any
Amp/Signal Conditioner card being tested.

Purpose
This test is used to adjust the Gap/Spike on the Amp/Signal Conditioner card for each
parameter (PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and/or SS). This is done by adjusting
potentiometer R34 on each Amp/Signal Conditioner card to obtain a reading as close to
00.000 mV as possible. The acceptable range is 00.000 to -05.000 mV. A slightly negative
reading within the green display range is better than positive due to a possible positive
thermal drift. Jumper E4 to E5 must be removed from any Amp/Signal Conditioner card
before making an adjustment. Select the parameter to be adjusted using æ or ç.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card may be defective.
r Trans Data Acquisition card may be defective.
r Make sure the ADC Zero Adjust was done on the Trans Data Acquisition card prior to
performing the Grand Canyon Adjust.

Grand Canyon Test

Purpose
This test quick checks the Gap/Spike adjustment on the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r Grand Canyon Adjust may need to be done.
r Trans Data Acquisition card may have been adjusted after the Grand Canyon Adjust
rather than before the Grand Canyon Adjust.
r One or more of the amplifiers on the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards have drifted.

7.2-6 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Histogram Test

Purpose
This test checks the histograms generated by the ADC on the Trans Data Acquisition card. It
checks for gaps between channels of a normal distribution.

r To select the parameter to test, press è or é, as applicable.

r To select the number of bits used to generate the histogram, press æ or ç, as
applicable.
r To start the histogram building process which culminates with displaying the histogram
on the Workstation screen, press Û.
t The histogram is normalized to the center of the screen.
t Each channel on the screen corresponds to an ADC channel at the resolution
selected.
r To return to the selection screen, press È.

Initialize System

Purpose
This selection is used to power up the system before any amplifier operation. This command
waits for the dc restorers on the amplifier cards to stabilize and then servos the pulse on each
card to 5.0 V. All cards are initialized to a known state.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Cyto Transputer card
r Trans Data Acquisition card
r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card may not be triggering conversion.
r Trans Data Acquisition card may not be converting.

PN 4237029G 7.2-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

Laser Control

Purpose
This selection controls the laser. The laser can be turned ON and OFF through this screen.
The power and current from the laser are monitored and displayed on the screen.

Options
At the Workstation keyboard, select the desired option using the æ or ç key then press the
designated key to produce the desired change.

Laser Current Option Key to Activate Change

To increase laser current by 10.0 Amps Press ä
To decrease laser current by 10.0 Amps Press å
To increase laser current by 1.0 Amp Press â
To decrease laser current by 1.0 Amp Press ã
To increase laser current by 0.1 Amp Press à
To decrease laser current by 0.1 Amp Press á
Laser Power Option
To increase laser power by 10.0 mW Press ä
To decrease laser power by 10.0 mW Press å
To increase laser power by 1.0 mW Press â
To decrease laser power by 1.0 mW Press ã
To increase laser power by 0.1 mW Press à
To decrease laser power by 0.1 mW Press á
Laser Control Option
Toggle the laser ON/OFF Press Û

Components Checked in this Test

r System Interface card
r Argon laser head
r Argon laser power supply

Response if Test Fails

r System Interface card may be defective.
r Argon laser head may be defective.
r Argon laser power supply may be defective.

7.2-8 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Laser Warm Up

Purpose
This selection shows the warm-up characteristics of the laser. It plots the laser current versus
time on the Workstation screen.

Lock Up Test - Not Used

MCL Bar Code Head Test

WARNING The laser beam can cause eye damage if viewed either directly or indirectly from reflective
surfaces (such as a mirror or shiny metal surface). Avoid direct exposure to beam. Do not view the beam
directly. Make sure the laser exit port is pointed away from your eyes.

Purpose
This test checks the bar-code head to ensure it is working. It is used to check a replacement
head before complete installation. The replacement head must be plugged in but does not
need to be mounted to perform this test. It simply enables the head to scan and reports the
scanner results on the Workstation screen.

MCL Bar Code Test

Purpose
This test allows the adjustment of the bar-code head to allow the reading of the carousel
number label and the carousel position labels. The scan is centered in both labels. The
spacebar on the Workstation keyboard is used to move the carousel to the two positions.

PN 4237029G 7.2-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

MCL Burn In

Purpose
This selection cycles the MCL through a carousel continuously. A carousel full of sample
tubes with bar-code labels is used to perform this test. All errors are reported on the
Workstation screen.

Error Index Numbers

Each error represents a specific error array element.

Error Message Error Index Numbers

ERROR_MCL_DISABLED 0X00000001
ERROR_DOOR OPEN 0X00000002
ERROR_LASER DISABLED 0X00000004
ERROR_OUT_OF_BOUNDARIES 0X00000008
ERROR_PROBE_MOVE 0X00000010
ERROR_RLV_MOVE 0X00000020
ERROR_CAROUSEL_HOME 0X00000100
ERROR_CAROUSEL_MOVE 0X00000200
ERROR_CAROUSEL_LABEL 0X00000400
ERROR_CAROUSEL_TURN 0X00000800
ERROR_TUBE_POSITION 0X00001000
ERROR_TUBE_FLUNG 0X00002000
ERROR_TUBE_JAMMED 0X00004000
ERROR_UPLOAD 0X00010000
ERROR_RAM 0X00020000
ERROR_ROM 0X00040000
ERROR_CPU 0X00080000
ERROR_SERIAL 1_SEND 0X00100000
ERROR_SERIAL 1_RCV 0X00200000
ERROR_SERIAL 2_SEND 0X00400000
ERROR_SERIAL 2_RCV 0X00800000
ERROR_PARALLEL_SEND 0X01000000
ERROR_PARALLEL_RCV 0X02000000
ERROR_REQUEST 0X80000000

MCL Carousel Label

Purpose
This test checks that the carousel labels are readable and in the proper positions.

7.2-10 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
MCL Carousel Status

Purpose
This selection ensures that the MCL Carousel Tube Position and Home sensors are working
properly.

Test Sequence
1. The carousel is stepped until the Home sensor goes inactive then active. If this does not
take place within a full revolution, an error is reported.
2. The carousel is stepped until the Tube Position sensor goes inactive then active. If this
does not take place within eight steps, an error is reported.

Response if Test Fails

r Home sensor may be defective.
r Tube Position sensor may be defective.

MCL Door Switch Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the MCL Door Status is working. It reports the current condition of the
MCL door.

Response if Test Fails

r MCL door switch may be defective.
r A cable associated with the MCL door may be defective.

MCL Finger Test

Purpose
This test allows the adjustment of the sample tube rotation finger. The spacebar on the
Workstation keyboard is used to cycle the carousel in and out to allow access to the finger for
adjustment.

MCL Home Align

Purpose
This test is used to adjust the MCL carousel Home position. The Home sensor is adjusted to
align the Home rotational position to its proper place. The carousel in/out adjustment screw
is used to adjust the home in/out position.

Summary of Test Sequence

The keyboard spacebar is used to step the MCL through a two step adjustment procedure.
The sequence is to place the carousel on the hub and to home the carousel. The position is
checked and the ß pressed to move the carousel out of the way to access the carousel
in/out position screw. The cycle is repeated until no further adjustments are necessary.

PN 4237029G 7.2-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

MCL Manual Control

Purpose
This selection allow manual control over the MCL movements. The MCL sensor status is also
reported.

Sensor Status
r A dash (—) indicates the sensor is inactive.
r An asterisk (*) indicates the sensor is activated.

Controls
r To select what moves, press the æ or ç key as needed.
r To toggle movement, press Û as needed.

MCL Mix Test

Purpose
This test ensures the mix motor is functioning properly. A carousel with a tube of water is
placed in position 1 for this test. The MCL will continuously mix this sample until stopped by
the user.

MCL Pneumatic Status

Purpose
This selection ensures that the pneumatic cylinder movement sensors are working properly.
Each cylinder is moved and the sensor status for that cylinder is monitored. Each of the
sensors are blocked as the cylinder is moving and becomes unblocked when the cylinder is
fully extended or fully contracted. The probe up/down cylinder is an exception. It is
unblocked in the fully extended position.

Sensor Status
r A dash (—) indicates the sensor is inactive (blocked).
r An asterisk (*) indicates the sensor is activated (unblocked).

Response if Test Fails

r Sensor may be defective.
r Air cylinder may be stuck.
r Valve may be defective.

7.2-12 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
MCL POWER UP Status

Purpose
This selection causes the MCL to do a system reset which causes it to go through its normal
power up reset diagnostics. This is the same command the Cytometer software uses to power
up the MCL. The result message is then displayed on the Workstation screen. If any errors are
encountered, they are reported.

Response if Test Fails

r MCL position sensors may be defective.
r Air cylinder may be stuck.
r One or more valves may be defective.

MCL Probe Align

Purpose
This selection allows the adjustment of the probe height inside the sample tube. The
keyboard spacebar is used to cycle the probe up and down.

MCL ROM Test

Purpose
This selection ensures that the ROM in the MCL CPU card is working properly and is the
correct version. The ROM is compared to a file on the test disk to ensure that it is the same.
The ROM version is also reported.

Response if Test Fails

r MCL ROM may be defective.
r MCL ROM may be an incorrect version.

MCL Scan Reliability

Purpose
This test ensures the reliability of the bar-code reader. A fully loaded carousel with bar-code
labels is used for this test. Bad reads are reported on the Workstation screen. The carousel is
run continuously until stopped by the user.

MCL Stepper Noise Test

Purpose
This test continuously homes the carousel until stopped by the user. The stepper noise is
monitored to ensure it is not excessive.

Response if Test Fails

r Stepper motor may be defective.
r Motor belt may be too tight.

PN 4237029G 7.2-13
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

MCL Terminal

Purpose
This selection allow <ESC> codes to be sent to the MCL through the Cytometer parallel port.
The MCL can then be controlled manually using its most primitive commands.

Commands
Perform a system reset before running any of these commands.

r MCL_RESET_CMD is activated by pressing ÈMR.

r MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD is activated by pressing ÈMV.
Any attempt to run a System Level, Carousel Movement, Door, TLV, Sampling Probe, Bar-code
Scanner, or High Level command without first resetting the system will be ignored; however,
Status and Diagnostic commands do not have this same safeguard and may be run without
first resetting the system. As a result, use the Status and Diagnostic commands with caution!

Commands Keystrokes to Initiate

System Level Commands MCL_DISABLE_CMD Èmd
Note: Perform a system reset before MCL_ENABLE_CMD ÈmE
running any of these commands.
MCL_FLUSH_CMD ÈmF
MCL_RESET_CMD (ÈMR)
MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD (ÈMV)
Any attempt to run a command
without first resetting the system will
be ignored.
Carousel Movement Commands CARO_MOVE_TUBE_CMD ÈcAnn
Note: Perform a system reset before CARO_DIR_CW_CMD ÈcC
running any of these commands.
CARO_DIRECTION_QUERY_CMD ÈcD
MCL_RESET_CMD (ÈMR)
CARO_HOME_POS_CMD ÈcH
MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD (ÈMV)
CARO_MOVE_IN_CMD ÈcI
Any attempt to run a command
without first resetting the system will CARO_LOAD_POS_CMD ÈcL
be ignored. CARO_MOVE_OUT_CMD ÈcO
CARO_PWR_QUERY_CMD ÈcP
CARO_VIBRATE_QUERY_CMD ÈcQ
CARO_STEP_TUBE_CMD ÈcR
CARO_VIBRATE_COUNT_CMD ÈcUnn
CARO_VIBRATE_CMD ÈcV
CARO_DIR_CCW_CMD ÈcW
CARO_LOPWR_CMD ÈcX
CARO_HIPWR_CMD ÈcY
CARO_RESET_CNTLR_CMD ÈcZ

7.2-14 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Commands Keystrokes to Initiate
Door Commands DOOR_LOCK_CMD ÈDL
Note: Perform a system reset before DOOR_WAS_OPENED_CMD ÈDO
running any of these commands.
DOOR_UNLOCK_CMD ÈDU
MCL_RESET_CMD (ÈMR)
MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD (ÈMV)
Any attempt to run a command
without first resetting the system will
be ignored.
TVL Commands RLV_DOWN_CMD ÈLD
Note: Perform a system reset before RLV_MIX_CMD ÈLM
running any of these commands.
RLV_MIX_TIME_QUERY_CMD ÈLQ
MCL_RESET_CMD (ÈMR)
RLV_TURN_CMD ÈLR
MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD (ÈMV)
RLV_MIX_TIME_CMD ÈLTnn
Any attempt to run a command
without first resetting the system will RLV_UP_CMD ÈLU
be ignored.
Sampling Probe Commands PROBE_DOWN_CMD ÈPD
Note: Perform a system reset before PROBE_UP_CMD ÈPU
running any of these commands.
MCL_RESET_CMD (ÈMR)
MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD (ÈMV)
Any attempt to run a command
without first resetting the system will
be ignored.
Bar-code Scanner Commands READ_CARO_NO_CMD ÈSC
Note: Perform a system reset before READ_BAR_CODE_CMD ÈSG
running any of these commands.
READ_TUBE_ID_CMD ÈSI
MCL_RESET_CMD (ÈMR)
SCAN_RESET_CMD ÈSR
MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD (ÈMV)
READ_TUBE_POS_CMD ÈST
Any attempt to run a command
without first resetting the system will
be ignored.
High Level Commands LOCATE_TUBE_CMD ÈTLnn
Note: Perform a system reset before UNLOAD_TUBE_CMD ÈTU
running any of these commands.
RAISE_TUBE_CMD ÈTR
MCL_RESET_CMD (ÈMR)
MCL_VER_LEVEL_CMD (ÈMV)
Any attempt to run a command
without first resetting the system will
be ignored.

PN 4237029G 7.2-15
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

Commands Keystrokes to Initiate

Status Commands MCL_STATUS_CMD ÈMS
Note: Any status command may be CARO_STATUS_CMD ÈCS
performed without first performing a
DOOR_STATUS_CMD ÈDS
system reset. Use these commands
with caution! HEAD_STATUS_CMD ÈHS
RLV_STATUS_CMD ÈLS
PROBE_STATUS_CMD ÈPS
Diagnostic Commands DIAG_CARO_STEP_CMD ÈXA
Note: Any status command may be DIAG_PROBE_RAISE_CMD ÈXB
performed without first performing a
DIAG_PROBE_LOWER_CMD ÈXC
system reset. Use these commands
with caution! DIAG_RLV_RAISE_CMD ÈXD
DIAG_RLV_LOWER_CMD ÈXE
DIAG_CARO_RESET_CMD ÈXF
DIAG_CARO_LOPWR_CMD ÈXG
DIAG_CARO_HIPWR_CMD ÈXH
DIAG_CARO_DIR_CW_CMD ÈXI
DIAG_CARO_DIR_CCW_CMD ÈXJ
DIAG_CARO_IN_CMD ÈXK
DIAG_CARO_OUT_CMD ÈXL
DIAG_CARO_HOME_POS_CMD ÈXM
DIAG_FINGER_OUT_CMD ÈXN
DIAG_FINGER_IN_CMD ÈXO
DIAG_READ_BAR_CODE_CMD ÈXP
DIAG_SCAN_RESET_CMD ÈXQ
DIAG_READ_SENSORS_CMD ÈYA
DIAG_MIX_ON_CMD ÈYB
DIAG_MIX_OFF_CMD ÈYC
DIAG_CARO_STEP_TUBE_CMD ÈYD
DIAG_ROM_DUMP1_CMD ÈZA
DIAG_ROM_DUMP2_CMD ÈZB

7.2-16 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Memory Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the external memory in all the transputers is working properly. An XL
or XL-MCL instrument may have either three or four transputers. These transputers are
located on the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II in the
Workstation computer and on the Cyto Transputer card in the Cytometer.

r The Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card

(whichever is applicable) has either one or two transputers.
t Each transputer has 4 MB of memory per processor.
t Circuit card is located in the Workstation computer. In the FlowCentre tower
computer, this circuit card is located in the bottom slot. In the original FlowCentre
computer, this circuit card is located in far left slot.
t The Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card (non-EMC version) is used in an XL or
XL-MCL instrument with a serial number Z09062 or below.
t The Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (EMC version) is used in an XL or
XL-MCL instrument with a serial number Z09063 or above.
r The Cyto Transputer card always has two transputers.
t Each transputer has 1 MB of memory per processor.
t Circuit card occupies the slot labeled CYTO TRANS PROC in the Data Acquisition card
cage in the Cytometer.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (whichever
is applicable) contains transputers T1 and/or T2.
t If the circuit card has only one transputer, it is designated T1.
t If the circuit card has two transputers, the second transputer is designated T2.
r Cyto Transputer card contains two transputers, designated T3 and T4.
t Transputer T3 is located in socket U52.
t Transputer T4 is located in socket U54.

Response if Test Fails

Replace the transputer that failed the test and its associated memory.

r Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (whichever

is applicable) contains transputers T1 and/or T2.
t If the circuit card has only one transputer, it is designated T1 and is located in
socket U16. Its memory is made up of four 1 MB SIMMs (U12, U13, U14, and U15).
t If the circuit card has two transputers, the second transputer is designated T2 and is
located in socket U27. Its memory is also made up of four 1 MB SIMMs (U17, U18,
U19, and U22).

PN 4237029G 7.2-17
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

r Cyto Transputer card contains two transputers, designated T3 and T4.

t Transputer T3 is located in socket U52. Its memory is made up of eight 1 MB x 1 Bit
DRAMs (U31, U37, U43, U47, U50, U55, U58, and U59).
t Transputer T4 is located in socket U54. Its memory is made up of eight 1 MB x 1 Bit
DRAMs (U18, U26, U30, U34, U40, U46, U48, and U53).

Mike’s Test -Not Used

New Board

Purpose
For future hardware development.

Noise Test and Offset

ATTENTION: This test is to be used only as a reference. Do not make adjustments.

Purpose
This test is designed to check the noise and offset of the system. This is accomplished by
causing a conversion and generating a histogram of the desired parameters. The input to this
parameter is grounded through the test switch. The resulting histogram shows both the offset
of the amplifier and the ADC on the Trans Data Acquisition card. It also shows the noise
distribution of that parameter.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Trans Data Acquisition card
r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r If all the parameters demonstrate noise, replace the Trans Data Acquisition card.
r If an individual parameter demonstrates noise, replace the corresponding Amp/Signal
Conditioner card (PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, or SS).

7.2-18 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
OPTO DMA Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card or Opto Transprocessor
EXMEM II card can perform a Direct Memory Access (DMA) operation to the Workstation
computer. The test transfers 256 bytes in each direction and verifies the data. it also ensures
that DMA channel 0 (jumpers X7 and X8) is selected.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card is the non-EMC version used in XL and XL-MCL
instruments with the serial number Z09062 and below.
r Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card is the EMC version used in all XL and XL-MCL
instruments with the serial number Z09063 and above.
The circuit card is located in the Workstation computer. In the FlowCentre tower computer,
this circuit card is located in the bottom slot. In the original FlowCentre computer, this
circuit card is located in far left slot.

Response if Test Fails

r Verify that jumpers X7 and X8 are properly installed on the circuit card.
r Possible DMA conflict on DMA 0 on the Workstation computer bus.

OPTO Interrupt Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the interrupt on the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card or Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card is working properly. It also ensures that the interrupt is on
IRQ11 (jumper X12).

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card is the non-EMC version used in XL and XL-MCL
instruments with the serial number Z09062 and below.
r Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card is the EMC version used in all XL and XL-MCL
instruments with the serial number Z09063 and above.
The circuit card is located in the Workstation computer. In the FlowCentre tower computer,
this circuit card is located in the bottom slot. In the original FlowCentre computer, this
circuit card is located in far left slot.

Response if Test Fails

r Verify that jumper X12 is properly installed on the circuit card.
r Possible IRQ conflict on IRQ11 on the Workstation computer bus.

PN 4237029G 7.2-19
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

OPTO Link Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the Transputer Link path from the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card
or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the Workstation computer through the optical
cable and into the last (third or fourth) transputer located on the Cyto Transputer card in the
Data Acquisition card cage in the Cytometer is working properly. It echoes 10 256-byte loops
from one end to the other.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card is the non-EMC version used in XL and XL-MCL
instruments with the serial number Z09062 and below.
or
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card is the EMC version used in all XL and XL-MCL
instruments with the serial number Z09063 and above.
r Cyto Transputer card that occupies the slot labeled CYTO TRANS PROC in the Data
Acquisition card cage in the Cytometer.
r Optical cable connecting the two circuit cards.

Response if Test Fails

r Verify the optical cable connection is correct:

Workstation Computer Cytometer

TX → RX
RX ← TX

r Check the jumpers on the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor

EXMEM II card, as applicable.
Note: This circuit card is located in the Workstation computer. In the FlowCentre tower
computer, this circuit card is located in the bottom slot. In the original FlowCentre
computer, this circuit card is located in far left slot.
t If the card is an Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card (the non-EMC version used in
XL and XL-MCL instruments with the serial number Z09062 and below), see
Figure A.2-15 and the jumper settings that follow.
t If the card is an Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (EMC version used in all XL
and XL-MCL instruments with the serial number Z09063 and above), see
Figure A.2-16 and the jumper settings that follow.
r Check the jumpers on the Cyto Transputer card. See Figure A.2-8 and the jumper
settings that follow the illustration.

7.2-20 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
PMT Voltage Control

Purpose
This selection controls the high voltage supplies for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, and PMT4. A
separate Bertan power supply drives each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.

Note: PMT4 and the Bertan power supply for PMT4 are on 4-color systems only.

At the Workstation keyboard, select the desired PMT using the æ or ç key then press the
designated key to produce the desired change.

Option Key to Activate Change

To increase PMT voltage by 100.0 Vdc Press ä
To decrease PMT voltage by 100.0 Vdc Press å
To increase PMT voltage by 10.0 Vdc Press â
To decrease PMT voltage by 10.0 Vdc Press ã
To increase PMT voltage by 1.0 Vdc Press à
To decrease PMT voltage by 1.0 Vdc Press á

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, and PMT4 (optional)

Response if Test Fails

r High voltage Bertan power supply may be defective.
r DAC on an Amp/Signal Conditioner card may be defective.

Pneumatic Sensor Test

Purpose
This test checks the condition of the bellow sensors. The system pressure and vacuum
sensors are expected to go on several seconds after the compressor is turned ON. The sample
pressure and vacuum sensors are activated by applying pressure and vacuum to the sample
station while a sample tube is in place. The sample station up/down sensor is activated by
moving the sample station up and down.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r System Interface card
r System pressure sensor
r System vacuum sensor
r Sample pressure sensor
r Sample vacuum sensor
r Manual sample station up/down sensor

PN 4237029G 7.2-21
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

Response if Test Fails

r System Interface card may be defective.
r Sensor may be defective.

Pulse RAMP Test

Purpose
This test ensures the bar graphs on the front panel display are working properly. These signals
originate from the Trans Data Acquisition card. Each signal is ramped from zero to full scale.
The bar graph should ramp up and down with the signal. The screen indicates how the bar
graph should look in real time.

Components Checked in this Test

r Top Panel Display 2 card
r Interconnecting cable from the Analyzer backplane to the Top Panel Display 2 card
r Trans Data Acquisition card (bar graphs)

Response if Test Fails

r Top Panel Display 2 card may be defective.
r Trans Data Acquisition card may be defective.
r Interconnecting cable from the Analyzer backplane to the Top Panel Display 2 card may
be defective.

ROM Test

Purpose
This test ensures the two ROM chips (U25 and U51) on the Cyto Transputer card are the
correct version and that they are working properly. To accomplish this check, the ROM on the
circuit card is compared to files on the test disk to ensure they are the same. The ROM version
is also reported.

Circuit Card Checked in this Test

r Cyto Transputer card

Response if Test Fails

r Verify the correct version is installed.
r Verify the ROM chips are installed correctly. To locate U25 and U51, refer to Figure A.2-8
as needed.
r One or both ROM chips may be defective. To locate U25 and U51, refer to Figure A.2-8
as needed.

Run Beads

Purpose
This test allows a sample to be run on the Cytometer. It allows the usage of a digital
oscilloscope to align the optical system of the Cytometer.

7.2-22 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Sample Leak Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the sample station seals on the manual sample station and the MCL
sample station are not leaking. To perform this test, a sample tube must be inserted in the
manual sample station and a fully loaded carousel must be loaded in the MCL. The manual
sample station is tested first by pressurizing a sample tube for a few seconds and then the
pressure is removed from the sample tube. The sample pressure switch is then monitored for
30 seconds. If the switch indicates pressure then the sample station is not leaking. The MCL
is tested in a similar manner.

Components Checked in this Test

r Manual sample station
r MCL sample station

Response if Test Fails

r If a leak is detected in the manual sample station only, check for leaks in associated
tubings.
r If a leak is detected in the MCL sample station only, check for leaks in associated tubings.
r If a leak is detected in both the manual and MCL sample stations, check for a leak in
tubing that is common to both sample stations.

Scope Test - Not Used

Segment Valve Test

Purpose
This test checks the segmenting valve to ensure proper rotation.

Response if Test Fails

r One or more of the segmenting valve cylinders may be defective.
r One or more tubings may be attached incorrectly to one or more segmenting valve
cylinders.
r Segmenting pads may be binding.

Set N Transputers

Purpose
Checks and sets the number of transputers in the system (Cytometer and Workstation
computer).

System Parameter Test

Purpose
This test shows the level variation (noise) on the system parameters of the system.

PN 4237029G 7.2-23
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

T805 Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the T805 chip is in the proper socket on the Opto Transprocessor
EXMEM card (non-EMC version used in XL and XL-MCL instruments with the serial number
Z09062 and below) or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (EMC version used in all XL and
XL-MCL instruments with the serial number Z09063 and above), as applicable.

This circuit card is located in the Workstation computer. In the FlowCentre tower computer,
this circuit card is located in the bottom slot. In the original FlowCentre computer, this
circuit card is located in far left slot.

The T805 has a floating point processor and must be the first transputer in the transputer
path in order for the system software to function properly. A floating point operation is
performed and tested to verify this.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r If an XL or XL-MCL instrument with the serial number Z09062 or below, the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM card (non-EMC version) is checked.
r If an XL or XL-MCL instrument with the serial number Z09063 or above, the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card (EMC version) is checked.

Response if Test Fails

Failure of this test may indicate the circuit card has an INS425/INS405 transputer (instead of
the INS805 transputer). If the test fails, inspect U16. If the T805 (INS805) is missing or has
been replaced by a 400 series device, then disregard the failure.

Temperature Test

Purpose
This test shows the warm-up characteristics of the Cytometer. It plots the temperature versus
time on the Workstation screen. It uses the temperature sensor on the System Interface card
to read the temperature.

Valve Burn In

Purpose
This selection continuously exercises the manual sample station up/down cylinder and the
segmenting valve.

7.2-24 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Valve Control

Purpose
This selection controls the pneumatic system. It allows manual control over each individual
valve in the system. The sheath and sample pressures are also monitored and displayed here.
The Sheath Sample Differential can also be adjusted here. If an emergency shutdown is
required, pressing the ß immediately turns off all the valves.

Options
At the Workstation keyboard, select valve to control using the æ, ç, è, or é key, as
needed, then press the key designated in the following table to produce the desired response.

Valve Control Option Key to Select or Activate Option

To select valve to control Press æ, ç, è, or é as needed.
To toggle selected valve condition Press Û.
To set continuous toggle of selected valve Press Ù.
Note: Pressing the Ù key a second time
stops the continuous toggle.
To turn off all valves including the compressor Press ß.
Differential Pressure Control* Key to Activate Change*
To increase differential pressure by 0.001 psi Press à.
To decrease differential pressure by 0.001 psi Press á.
To increase differential pressure by 0.010 psi Press â.
To decrease differential pressure by 0.010 psi Press ã.
To increase differential pressure by 0.100 psi Press ä.
To decrease differential pressure by 0.100 psi Press å.
* Differential pressure is adjusted by six keys (à, á, â, ã, ä, and/or å)
on the Workstation keyboard. On the keyboard, the upper keys (à, â, and ä)
increase pressure and the lower keys (á, ã, and å) decrease pressure. The left
keys (à and á) produce small increment changes and the right keys (ä and
å) produce larger increment changes.

Circuit Card Checked in this Test

r System Interface card

Response if Test Fails

r System Interface card may be defective.
r Associated pinch valve may be defective.
r Compressor may be defective.
r Associated pressure sensor and/or pressure switch may be defective.

PN 4237029G 7.2-25
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

Valve Sequence

Purpose
This selection allow the system to be drained and cleaned out for shipment.

DRAIN VACUUM CHAMBER

Drains the waste chamber if full.

SHUTDOWN AND CLEANUP

Performs the shutdown and cleanup procedure on the Cytometer to ready it for shipment.

VME Addr Bus Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the Cyto Transputer card can communicate with each card in the Data
Acquisition card cage through the VME bus on the P1 connector. Each card has a readback
register that can be written to and read from. Each circuit card has an individual address that
is written to that card’s readback register. After all the circuit cards have been written to, the
readback registers are then read. The values read from each card should match its address. If
these values do not match, the card was not addressed properly. The address may be
overlapping or missing.

Circuit Cards Checked in this Test

r Cyto Transputer card
r System Interface card
r Trans Data Acquisition card
r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for SS, FS, AUX, PMT4, PMT3, PMT2, and PMT1

Response if Test Fails

r VME Address Bus may be open or shorted.
r Cyto Transputer VME Bus Drivers may be defective.
r Address Decoder on one or more of the circuit cards being tested may be defective.

VME Data Bus Test

Purpose
This test ensures that the Cyto Transputer card can communicate with each card in the Data
Acquisition card cage through the VME bus on the P1 connector. Each card has a readback
register that can be written to and read from. A rotating bit is written to each of these registers
and then read back. The value that is read is checked to ensure it is the same value that was
written.

7.2-26 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL 7
Circuit Cards Checked in this Test
r Cyto Transputer card
r System Interface card
r Trans Data Acquisition card
r Amp/Signal Conditioner card for PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, PMT4, AUX, FS, and SS

Response if Test Fails

r VME Data Bus may be open or shorted.
r Cyto Transputer VME Bus Drivers may be defective.
r Readback register on one or more of the circuit cards being tested may be defective.

Waste Chamber Full Test

Note: Appears as Waste Cham. Full Test on the Workstation display.

Purpose
This test ensures the waste chamber sensor, often referred to as the eyeball sensor, is working
properly.

This check involves the following sequence of events:

1. The waste chamber is emptied and then filled. As it is filling, the eyeball sensor is
monitored. When the liquid level reaches the sensor, the fill operation should cease. If
this does not occur within a specified amount of time, the fill operation is stopped and
an error is reported.
2. The waste chamber is emptied for 5 seconds.
3. The waste chamber is then filled until the sensor detects the liquid again. The time for
this is reported and the Fill/Empty ratio is displayed. This is an indicator of the liquid
flow from the sheath container, through the flow cell to the waste chamber and out to the
waste container.
Note: Pinched tubing will affect these time. Currently, there is no specification for these
times. This specification is currently being developed.

Components Checked in this Test

r System Interface card
r Waste chamber liquid level sensor

Response if Test Fails

r System Interface card may be defective.
r Waste chamber liquid-level sensor may be defective.

XY Display - Not Used

PN 4237029G 7.2-27
TROUBLESHOOTING
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL

7.2-28 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA 7
7.3 ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA
Purpose
This is a general procedure for isolating a problem area. The troubleshooting charts and
methods in this section are examples of recommended troubleshooting approaches for use
with common problem areas. For additional information, refer to the Special Procedures and
Troubleshooting manual (blue binding), PN 4237296.

Initial Checks
1. Do startups, alignment check, or other symptom checks to obtain a clear symptom.
2. Use the symptom to isolate the problem area.
3. Check the problem area for the types of problems shown in Table 7.3-1.

Table 7.3-1 Isolating Problem Areas

Problem Area(s) Possible Causes

Biological sample Bad reagents
Poor preparation
Abnormal sample
Electronics Adjustment
Poor connection
Defective components
Filters Wrong filter
Dirty filter
Defective filter
Fluidics (sheath, sample, or waste) Pinch
Plug
Leak
Defective component
Laser No beam
No power
Drift
Optics Dirty optics
Alignment
Software Improper use
Power problem
Software bug

PN 4237029G 7.3-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA

General Troubleshooting
Most problems that occur with the system are fluidics-related, and some of the fluidic
problems result in the same symptoms noted in the Optics section of Table 7.3-5. Always
check fluidics before attempting an alignment procedure. See Heading 7.5,
TROUBLESHOOTING FLUIDIC PROBLEMS for details on fluidic troubleshooting.

Aside from fluidics, other troubleshooting may be required. See Tables 7.3-2 through 7.3-8:

r Table 7.3-2, General Troubleshooting Information

r Table 7.3-3, Electronics, General Troubleshooting Information
r Table 7.3-4, Lasers, General Troubleshooting Information
r Table 7.3-5, Optics*, General Troubleshooting Information
r Table 7.3-6, Pneumatics, General Troubleshooting Information
r Table 7.3-7, Power Supplies, General Troubleshooting Information
r Table 7.3-8, Software, General Troubleshooting Information

Table 7.3-2 General Troubleshooting Information

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

No sample flow. Clogged flow cell. 1. At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.
2. If still clogged, remove flow cell and force liquid or air through it.
Low data rate. Partially clogged flow 1. At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.
cell. 2. If still clogged, remove flow cell and force liquid or air through it.
Bubbles. At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.

Tube not properly Push cap into tube.

sealed.
Clogged sample Remove the sample probe and connect the tubing to a syringe and
probe. force water through the probe.
Low sample pressure. Slightly increase flow rate.

High data rate. Sheath container not Reseal sheath container.

properly sealed.
Sheath line pinched. Check tubing from sheath container to flow cell and remove
restriction, as needed.
Discriminator too low. Set to higher value.

Long pulse rise time. Bubbles or debris in At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.
flow cell.
Alignment check. Shifted Same as all probable At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button. Check the
mean channel or high causes listed above. flow cell waste tubing for a clog or air bubbles.
CVs.
Horizontal beam, flow Do alignment procedure.
cell, and/or vertical
beam not properly
aligned.

7.3-2 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA 7
Table 7.3-2 General Troubleshooting Information (Continued)

FS pulse: shifted mean, Dirty flow cell. Clean flow cell with lens cleaning paper, cotton swab, and optical
high CVs, fluorescence grade methanol.
okay.
FS detector mask not Reposition mask.
positioned properly.
All parameters shift up Flow cell waste line is Remove clog.
while running. clogged.

Table 7.3-3 Electronics, General Troubleshooting Information

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

System locks up. Power problems. Power down the system; wait 10 seconds, then power up.

Table 7.3-4 Lasers, General Troubleshooting Information

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

Argon laser fails to turn Laser interlock switch Close and properly secure the sensing area top cover.
ON. is tripped.
No ac power. Check cable and connections from the Argon laser power supply to
the ac power source.
HP CVs drift throughout Laser instability. Make sure the ambient room temperature does not fluctuate more
the day. than 2.8°C (5°F) per hour. If fluctuations exceed 2.8°C (5°F):
1. Plot the room temperature (each hour) throughout the day (or
routine hours of operation).
2. Determine the average room temperature and the corresponding
time of day.
3. Go to Heading 4.6 and perform the optical alignment at the time
of day when the ambient room temperature is in the middle of
the temperature range (determined in step 2).

PN 4237029G 7.3-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA

Table 7.3-5 Optics*, General Troubleshooting Information

Problem Probable Corrective Action

Poor CVs with Fluidic problem. Locate and correct any leak, pinch, or clog.
Flow-Check
fluorospheres.* Optics are not aligned. Do Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

Shifted mean channels.* Fluidic problem. Locate and correct any leak, pinch, or clog.

Optics are not aligned. Do Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

No data.* Fluidic problem. Locate and correct any leak, pinch, or clog.

Optics are not aligned. Do Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

No pulses appear, or Fluidic problem. Locate and correct any leak, pinch, or clog.
pulses do not appear
normal.* Flow cell is dirty. Clean the flow cell.

Forward scatter mask Verify that the forward scatter mask is properly seated.
is not properly in
place.
Scattered light from 1. Adjust the beam horizontal to the center of the mask until all
the beam may be noise, if any, disappears from the scope.
entering the sensor. 2. Adjust the flow cell Z-axis until good forward scatter pulses
appear.
3. Roughly maximize the forward scatter pulse with the flow cell
Z-axis.
Optics are not aligned. Do Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT.

PMT signals low and Flow cell is not aligned Adjust the flow cell vertical and or horizontal until the pulse
require increased HV to to the center of the increases.
be seen properly. fluorescence pickup
lens.
*Most problems that occur with the instrument are fluidic - related, and some of the fluidic problems result in
the same symptoms noted in this table. Always check fluidics before doing an alignment procedure.

7.3-4 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA 7
Table 7.3-6 Pneumatics, General Troubleshooting Information

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

All CVs are high. Unstable sheath 1. Check cap of the cleanse container for a leak.
pressure. 2. Check the sample head for cracked plastic on sample pressure
fitting.
Sheath Pressure Error A leaking fitting. 1. Run Prefinal Valve Control program. See Valve Control under
Heading 7.2, as needed.
2. Watch the system pressure gauge on the front of the Power
Supply module while turning on each valve one at a time. Note
which valve drops pressure.
3. Check the valve and associated components for leaks.
To locate a leak:
a. Fill a disposable plastic pipette with cleaning agent.
b. Dispense a small amount on the questionable fitting. If the
cleaning agent starts to bubble, a leak is present.
c. Wipe each component dry with a lint-free tissue.
4. Replace defective components as needed.

Table 7.3-7 Power Supplies, General Troubleshooting Information

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

PMT high voltages Problem with ±15 Vdc Measure power supply and replace if defective. See ±15 Vdc Power
cannot be adjusted. power supply. Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment under Heading 4.21,
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT.
No signals. Problem with ±15 Vdc Measure power supply and replace if defective. See ±15 Vdc Power
power supply. Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment under Heading 4.21,
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT.
Cytometer solenoids do Problem with +24 Vdc Measure power supply and replace if defective. See +24 Vdc Power
not fire and fans are power supply. Supply - Voltage Verification and Adjustment under Heading 4.21,
not operating. POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT.
MCL CPU problems. Problem with MCL Measure power supply and replace if defective. See MCL Voltage
+5 Vdc power supply. Verification and Adjustment, if applicable under Heading 4.21,
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT.
MCL bar-code scanner Problem with MCL Measure power supply and replace if defective. See MCL Voltage
(or bar-code reader ±12 Vdc power Verification and Adjustment, if applicable under Heading 4.21,
head) problems. supply. POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT.
MCL solenoids do not Problem with MCL Measure power supply and replace if defective. See MCL Voltage
fire. +24 Vdc power Verification and Adjustment, if applicable under Heading 4.21,
supply. POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT.

PN 4237029G 7.3-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
ISOLATING THE PROBLEM AREA

Table 7.3-8 Software, General Troubleshooting Information

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

Workstation locks up. Power problems. Press Ý+Þ+á to reboot the computer.
OR
Turn computer off; wait 30 seconds, then turn computer on.

7.3-6 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING THE ACQUISITION SYSTEM 7
7.4 TROUBLESHOOTING THE ACQUISITION SYSTEM
Purpose
Do this procedure to troubleshoot the Acquisition subsystem.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Flowchart
Use Figure 7.4-1, Acquisition Troubleshooting Flowchart as a guide when troubleshooting
the Acquisition subsystem.

Figure 7.4-1 Acquisition Troubleshooting Flowchart

Create Channel 500
protocol
Yes

Yes Can fluorespheres No

(beads) be acquired?

Does cleanse flow out of No Sample line, or flow cell

Sample Fluidics sample probe when cleanse insertion rod is clogged.
(Acquires beads is selected? Clean or replace.
problems with cells) Yes
Mix sample liquid vigorously to form bubbles.
Use CYTO-TROL control No Sample pressure is not present
Do the bubbles compress when you select
cells to test. If OK consider or incorrect. Go to Fluidics
Run? Does the sample tube level go down
what the instrument must Troubleshooting.
when in Run?
do to accommodate the
application. Yes
Light filters
Laser Fluidics OK
Beam shaper
Flow cell
Laser problem
Flow cell alignment
Beam shaper alignment
Optical
Refer to Optical Alignment
Procedures

Replace defective
Swap the signal cable
Amplifier/Signal
from a functional
Conditioner card.
Do all histograms Amplifier/Signal
No No
Electronics acquire on the Conditioner card then
If problem still
Workstation screen? verify histogram now
persists, replace the
acquires on the
Trans Data
Workstation screen?
Acquisition card.
Yes

Replace defective PMT 7029281G

PN 4237029G 7.4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING THE ACQUISITION SYSTEM

7.4-2 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING FLUIDIC PROBLEMS 7
7.5 TROUBLESHOOTING FLUIDIC PROBLEMS
Purpose
Do this procedure to detect and repair fluidic problems. Generally, fluidic problems are
categorized into three groups:

r Leaks - where fluid (air or liquid) escapes from the system.

r Blockages - where fluid (air or liquid) flow is restricted, such as with a pinch or a plug.
r Improper functions - where fluidic control components, such as valves and solenoids, do
not function properly.
See Table 7.5-1 for fluidic components.

Table 7.5-1 Fluidic Components

Component Function Illustration

Pilot actuator Air pressure moves a piston inside the
actuator, which then moves something else,
such as a pinch valve.

7003184A

Check valve Permits flow in one direction only.

7003183A

Pinch valve Controls the path of fluid flow.

7003182A

Solenoid Controls the pressurization of other

components.

7029283G

PN 4237029G 7.5-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING FLUIDIC PROBLEMS

Tools/Supplies Needed
B External digital pressure gauge, 0 to 30 psi range with 0.01 psi accuracy
B Digital Voltmeter (DVM)

No Sample Flow Problems

Troubleshooting this system can be difficult because of the feedback from the in-line liquid
pressure sensor. Figure 7.5-1 shows how to troubleshoot for when you are experiencing
sample flow problems.

Figure 7.5-1 Troubleshooting Fluidics for No Sample Flow

No sample flow.

Adjust pressure No Does the system pressure The flow cell is

regulator as needed. gauge register 30 psi? clogged.

Yes Does cleaning agent 1. Remove clog or

backflush out of replace flow cell.
Can the reagent drawer No No Is the sample No
the probe when 2. Run samples to
be opened? probe clogged? ensure all signals
you press
Yes the CLEANSE button? are present.
Yes
3. If problem
No Yes persists, call
Replace VL22. Is VL22 functioning? Clean or replace
clogged probe Technical Support.
Yes then recheck.
Does cleaning agent No
Locate leak before backflush now?
sheath container. Yes

Run samples.
Ensure all signals
are present.
Connect external
pressure gauge to
sample line. No Calibrate
Do you get a sample sample push.
burst when you
run sample?
Yes

Set flow rate to high. No Check optical

Does sample
alignment.
flow now?
Yes

Calibrate sample and

sheath pressures. 7029282G

7.5-2 PN 4237029G
 TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING FLUIDIC PROBLEMS 7
Pneumatic Tips
Table 7.5-2 Pneumatic Troubleshooting Tips

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

All mean channels are Air bubbles or clog in the 1. If a clog is detected:
drifting upward. flow cell waste tubing. a. Massage clog to break it down.
b. Replace tubing if clogs cannot be removed.
2. If bubbles are detected, run Isoflow to prime
out air bubbles.
All CVs are high. Unstable sheath 1. Check cap of the cleanse container for a leak.
pressure. 2. Check the sample head for cracked plastic on
sample pressure fitting.
Sheath Pressure Error A leaking fitting. 1. Run Prefinal Valve Control program. See Valve
Control under Heading 7.2, as needed.
2. Watch the system pressure gauge on the front
of the Power Supply module while turning on
each valve one at a time. Note which valve
drops pressure.
3. Check the valve and associated components
for leaks.
To locate a leak:
a. Fill a disposable plastic pipette with cleaning
agent.
b. Dispense a small amount on the
questionable fitting. If the cleaning agent
starts to bubble, a leak is present.
c. Wipe each component dry with a lint-free
tissue.
4. Replace defective components as needed.

PN 4237029G 7.5-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING FLUIDIC PROBLEMS

7.5-4 PN 4237029G
 8PARTS LISTS 8
8.1 PART LOCATOR TOOLS
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

Instructions for Use

This section provides three tools to help you locate the correct part number.
1 An Anchor Illustration. This is a top level illustration used to direct you to the correct
area in the illustrated parts lists. See Figure 8.1-1.
This anchor illustration is organized into functional groups from which you can quickly
access a specific illustration. No part numbers are associated with this anchor
illustration, only referrals that either access a specific illustration or another anchor
illustration for the selected area.
Letters are used on the anchor illustration to identify the main components; links to the
illustrations of these components are provided in the Figure Reference column.
2 A list of Illustrations Not Referenced from the Anchor Illustration. This list provides
links to illustrations within the illustrated parts lists that are not referenced from the
anchor illustration or any other illustration in the parts lists.
3 A list of Parts Not Illustrated.

On the illustrations within the illustrated parts lists:

r Letters are used to indicate a more detailed illustration of an assembly or component is
available. Links to these illustrations are provided in the Figure Reference column.
r Numbers are used to identify the part in the associated parts table.

If you have not used these tools before to locate a part number, you may want to begin by
reading, How to Locate a Part Number, at the end of this section.

PN 4237029G 8.1-1
PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS

Anchor Illustration for Locating Parts

Figure 8.1-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Anchor Illustration for Locating Parts Figure Reference
A Workstation
A D r FlowCentre II,
C Figure 8.6-1
E
r FlowCentre,Figure 8.6-2
B At the Cytometer . . .
F
B MCL option, Figure 8.4-1
Vertical plate
Coulter EPICS XL MCL
G components, Figure 8.4-2
C Front display panel,
Front view H Figure 8.2-1
D Data Acquisition card
L
cage, Figure 8.2-2
E Upper pneumatics drawer,
Figure 8.2-3
F Optical collection area
I (includes laser, optics,
filters, and PMTs),
K TRANS

REC.
Figure 8.2-9
G Reagent drawer,
FLOWCELL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE WASTE

Figure 8.2-15
J Rear view 7029104G H Manual sample station
r Unit with MCL option,
Figure 8.5-1
r Unit without MCL
option, Figure 8.5-3
r Mechanical assembly,
Figure 8.5-4
Segmenting valve,
Figure 8.2-20
I Lower pneumatics
drawer, Figure 8.2-23
J Rear panel components,
Figure 8.2-28
K Right side compartment,
Figure 8.2-30
L Exterior covers
r Unit with MCL option,
Figure 8.3-1
r Unit without MCL
option, Figure 8.3-2

8.1-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS 8
Figure 8.1-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Anchor Illustration for Locating Parts Figure Reference
At the Power Supply . . .
Voltage-Specific Power Supply
M Voltage-Specific
MCL
M Three-sided cover and
related hardware,
R Figure 8.7-14
N VAC
FILTER

N Left-side compartment,
VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER

AIR
FILTER

Q
30
PSI
SYSTEM

Figure 8.7-10
SYS SYS MCL POWER ON/OFF
VAC PRESS

ON

PRESS
ADJ OFF
!

P O Front panel components,

O Figure 8.7-1
Front door and related
Front view Rear view hardware, Figure 8.7-14
P Right-side compartment,
Figure 8.7-9
Universal Power Supply
S Q Waste container,
Figure 8.7-15

X
R Rear panel components,
T Figure 8.7-12
SYSTEM POPWER
W
MCL POPWER
Universal
S Exterior covers and
V
related hardware,
U Figure 8.8-19
Front view Rear view T Left-side compartment,
Figure 8.8-9
U Front panel components,
Figure 8.8-1
S
Front door and related
hardware, Figure 8.8-20
UPS pneumatics drawer
r Left-side view,
Figure 8.8-11
r Right-side view,
Figure 8.8-12

Back cover 7029264G V Right-side compartment,

Figure 8.8-13
W Waste container,
Figure 8.8-21
X Rear panel components,
Figure 8.8-14

PN 4237029G 8.1-3
PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS

Illustrations Not Referenced from the Anchor Illustration

Table 8.1-1 Illustrations Not Referenced from Figure 8.1-1

Title Figure Number

Cables, Cytometer: those attached to the PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card Figure 8.2-31
Cables, Cytometer: those attached to the Sensor card Figure 8.2-4
Cables, external: XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with Universal Power Supply Figure 8.3-4
Cables, external: Xl or XL-MCL flow cytometer with Voltage-Specific Power Supply Figure 8.3-3
Cables, MCL: those attached to the Bar-Code Decoder card Figure 8.4-6
Cables, MCL: those attached to the MCL CPU card Figure 8.4-5
Cables, UPS: harness for internal dc power supplies, includes hardware Figure 8.8-15
Cables, UPS: inside the top compartment (front area) Figure 8.8-16
Cables, UPS: those attached to the Power Control 3 card Figure 8.8-18
Cables, UPS: those attached to the Voltage Selector 2 card and Breaker card Figure 8.8-17
Check Valves and Chokes with Related Components Figure 8.9-1
Covers, MCL and Associated Hardware Figure 8.4-7
Covers, Universal Power Supply Exterior (includes Door, Filters, and Casters) Figure 8.8-19
Covers, Universal Power Supply Interior and Associated Components Figure 8.8-20
Covers, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (includes Door, Latches, and Casters) Figure 8.7-14
Covers, XL Cytometer Exterior (includes Doors and Latches) Figure 8.3-2
Covers, XL-MCL Cytometer Exterior (includes Doors and Latches) Figure 8.3-1
Fittings Figure 8.9-2
Flexible Duct Components and Assembly Instructions (for Argon laser system) Figure 8.2-32
Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware Figure 8.9-3

8.1-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS 8
Parts Not Illustrated
Each table in this section contains a category of components that are not illustrated. A table of
FRU part numbers is also included for your convenience. The following categories are
included in this section:

r Cables in Table 8.1-2

r Consumables in Table 8.1-3
r FRUs in Table 8.1-4
r Kits in Table 8.1-5
r Miscellaneous Parts in Table 8.1-6
r Software in Table 8.1-7
r Tools in Table 8.1-8
r Tubing in Table 8.1-9
r Workstation in Table 8.1-10 (includes network accessories and storage media)

Table 8.1-2 Cables

Description Part Number

Cable, bar-code communications (also referred to as the bar-code programming cable) 6028275
Cable, interface between the bar-code scanner to decoder on the bar-code reader 6003011
Cable, buzzer 6028318
Cable, control B, internal cable with 9-pin subminiature D plug (labeled J71) to 5-position 6028308
plug housing (labeled J106) and 5-position discrete wire receptacle with center latch
(labeled P150); used in both EMC and non-EMC instruments
Cable, Cyto CYT12, used only in non-EMC systems, 2-conductor MATE-N-LOK housing 6028314
(labeled P99) to 2-conductor panel mount receptacle (labeled J98)
Cable, fiber optic interface, internal with 9-pin subminiature D receptacle (labeled J1) to
plug (labeled P30) connectors, 55 inches long
r EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher) is a shielded 6028650
cable.
r Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower) is a flat 6028294
ribbon cable.
Cable, front panel power, with 4-position universal MATE-N-LOK plug on each end (labeled 6028430
J77 and J136); used in both EMC and non-EMC systems
Cable, laser supply control, internal 25-pin subminiature D receptacle (labeled J70) to plug
(labeled P10) connectors, 18 inches long (used in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
r EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher) is a shielded 6028652
cable.
r Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower) 6028299

PN 4237029G 8.1-5
PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS

Table 8.1-2 Cables (Continued)

Description Part Number

Cable, laser control, internal cable with 25-pin subminiature D plug connector on each end
(labeled P12 and P19), 55 inches long
r EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher) is a shielded 6028651
cable.
r Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower) is a flat 6028292
ribbon cable.
Cable, sensor, switch/LED control, flat ribbon with 20-position receptacle at each end 6028290
(labeled J95 and J76), 53 inches long
Cable, sheath pressure external harness, shielded cable with mini universal MATE-N-LOK 6028328
6-position plug (labeled P114) at one end and 5-position receptacle (labeled J114) at the
other end

Table 8.1-3 Consumables

Description Part Number

Bar-code labels for 12 x 75 test tubes, pre-printed with sequential numbering, kit contains 6913343
3 rolls of 1000 labels
Bar-code labels for 12 x 75 test tubes, blank labels for use on a laser printer, kit contains 6913149
100 sheets with 35 blank labels per sheet
COULTER CLENZ cleaning agent, 10 L box 8546931
COULTER CLENZ cleaning agent, 5 L box 8546930
COULTER CLENZ cleaning agent, 500 mL bottle 8546929
CYTO-TROL™ Control Cells, 50 tests kit 6604248
Flow-Check™ fluorospheres 6605359
Flow-Count™ fluorospheres 7547053
Flow-Set™ fluorospheres, 3 x 10 mL vials 6607007
Gloves, latex, large/extra large 5415175
Gloves, latex, medium/large 5415174
Gloves, latex, small/medium 5415179
Gloves, powder-free, ambidextrous, extra large 626775
Gloves, powder-free, ambidextrous, large 626772
Gloves, powder-free, ambidextrous, medium 626774
Gloves, powder-free, ambidextrous, small 626773
IsoFlow sheath fluid 8547008
Test tubes, 12 x 75 mm 2523749

8.1-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS 8
Table 8.1-4 FRUs

Description Part Number

Argon air-cooled laser head 7000358
Argon air-cooled laser power supply, switching, for 100 Vac system 7000431
Argon air-cooled laser power supply, switching, for 120 Vac system 7000721
Argon air-cooled laser power supply, switching, for 220 or 240 Vac system 7000432
Beamshaper 2 7000450
Bertan high voltage power supply 7000193
Cleanse tank with sensor assembly 7000379
Compressor assembly, dual-head, for 100/120 Vac system 7000371
(for Voltage-Specific Power Supply only)
Compressor assembly, dual-head, for 220/224 Vac system 7000372
(for Voltage-Specific Power Supply only)
Compressor assembly, dual-head, includes capacitor 7000701
(for Universal Power Supply only)
Focus knob III 7000451
Focus knob2 7000449
Forward scatter (FS) detector 7000359
Laser blower assembly 7000719
Lower pneumatics drawer assembly 7000374
Manual sample head 7000351
Manual sample station, for XL-MCL Cytometer with grey covers 7000678
MCL bar-code reader (visible laser diode scanner) 7000042
Note: Attach the scanner head to the MCL vertical plate using four machine screws
(#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, pan-head), PN 2806009.
MCL cable shorting plug 7000455
MCL cable CYT12 shorting plug, EMC, also referred to as MCL dummy plug 7000466
MCL carousel base assembly 7000189
MCL carousel in/out sensor cable assembly 7000434
MCL carousel tube-position sensor cable assembly 7000436
MCL carousel-home sensor cable assembly 7000435
MCL door (upper cover), black 7000376
MCL door (upper cover), grey 7000675
MCL head sensor cable assembly 7000438
MCL lift motor (up/down) sensor cable assembly 7000437
MCL lifter assembly 7000443
MCL lower base cover, black 7000199
MCL lower base cover, grey 7000676
MCL option assembly 7000433

PN 4237029G 8.1-7
PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS

Table 8.1-4 FRUs (Continued)

Description Part Number

MCL probe sensor cable assembly 7000439
MCL probe slide assembly (low friction precision ball slide assembly with two carriages) 7000446
MCL sample head 7000456
MCL sample station door assembly 7000444
MCL solenoids 7000555
MCL tube rotator assembly 7000430
Note: Attach the tube rotator assembly to the MCL vertical plate using two hex screws
(#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, HSC-head), PN 2851395.
MCL vortexer foot assembly 7000579
PMT, fluorescence, 300 nm to 800 nm spectral response, standard 7000197
Note: PMT 4 (in a 4-color system) and PMT 3 (in a 3-color system) require a right angle
SHV connector, PN 2121317 (male to female adapter).
PMT, red sensitive, 300 nm to 850 nm spectral response 176402
Note: PMT requires a right angle SHV connector, PN 2121317 (male to female adapter).
Power supply, linear, output +24 Vdc (for Voltage-Specific Power Supply only) 7000357
Power supply, linear, output +5 Vdc (for Voltage-Specific Power Supply only) 7000356
Power supply, linear, output ±15 Vdc (for Voltage-Specific Power Supply only) 7000355
Power supply, linear, MCL assembly consisting of two supplies - the upper supply outputs 7000362
+24 Vdc and the lower supply outputs +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc (for Voltage-Specific Power
Supply only)
Power supply, linear, output +24 Vdc, 7.2 A, input 90 to 264 Vac 627181
(for Universal Power Supply only)
Power supply, linear, output +5 Vdc, 18 A, input 90 to 264 Vac 627179
(for Universal Power Supply only)
Power supply, linear, output ±15 Vdc, 5 A, input 90 to 264 Vac 627180
(for Universal Power Supply only)
Power supply, linear, MCL assembly consisting of two supplies - the upper supply outputs 627182
+24 Vdc (2.4 A); the lower supply outputs +5 Vdc, 2 A and ±12 Vdc, 0.4 A; input for both
90 to 264 Vac (for Universal Power Supply only)
Reagent drawer with slides assembly 7000677
Note: Order front panel separately - for grey XL flow cytometer order PN 6807089; for
grey XL-MCL flow cytometer order PN 6807088; for black XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer
order PN 6855934.
Regulator, electronic pressure (electronic transducer), for regulating sample pressure 7000192
Note: Attach to posts using one #25 flat washer (0.265 i.d. x 0.484 o.d. x 0.027 in.
thickness), PN 2827064, one #25 split-lock washer (0.26 i.d. x 0.49 o.d. x 0.062 in.
thickness), PN 2826051, and one hex nut (#25-20 UNC x 0.437 AF x 0.164 in.thickness),
PN 2822072. Requires two sets.
Regulator, pressure, 0-10 psi, for regulating sheath pressure (4 psi flow) 7000720

8.1-8 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS 8
Table 8.1-4 FRUs (Continued)

Description Part Number

Sample station assembly, for XL Cytometer (without MCL option) with black covers 7000360
Note: Before attaching sample station to the Cytometer, make sure the flow cell cover
and filter shield are attached to the Cytometer.
Sample station, for XL flow cytometer with grey covers 7000679
Note: Before attaching sample station to the Cytometer, make sure the flow cell cover
and filter shield are attached to the Cytometer.
Sample station, manual, for XL-MCL Cytometer with black covers 7000354
Segmenting valve assembly 7000370
Segmenting valve front pad 7000196
Segmenting valve knob 7000198
Segmenting valve middle pad 7000191
Segmenting valve rear pad 7000195
Sheath tank with sensor assembly 7000378
Side scatter diode 7000352
Upper pneumatics drawer assembly 7000375
Vacuum chamber 7000373
Note: Attach using two self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head),
PN 2839039.
Waste coil assembly 7000353

Table 8.1-5 Kits

Description Part Number

4 color upgrade kit 6912932
Bar-code labels for 12 x 75 test tubes, pre-printed with sequential numbering, kit contains 6913343
3 rolls of 1000 labels
Bar-code labels for 12 x 75 test tubes, blank labels for use on a laser printer, kit contains 6913149
100 sheets with 35 blank labels per sheet
Bar-code scanner kit 6913337
Bar-code, MCL EPROM kit 6914990
Computer, FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation 6915113
Drive, CD-ROM, recordable, internal, 650 MB capacity, 16X read speed, 6X write speed, 2016879
and 4X rewrite speed; includes manuals
Insertion rod replacement kit 6913097
MCL upgrade kit in black 6912669
MCL upgrade kit in grey 6915506
Networking option, kit contains server upgrade with LANtastic® network software and 6914958
Sybase® SQL Anywhere™ PC database server software

PN 4237029G 8.1-9
PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS

Table 8.1-5 Kits (Continued)

Description Part Number

Optical alignment kit 6914939
PMI kit 6913241
Printer kit, cartridge for Hewlett Packard HP-1600C color printer 6914967
Printer kit, color (includes parallel port card, HP-1600C color Printer and color Printer 6913335
cartridges)
Re-image kit for the FlowCentre desktop computer, PN 2016753 6915175
Note: Kit includes 3.5 in. bootable disk, PN 6417654, CD-ROM for Caching Controller,
PN 7270409, and CD-ROM for Ultra 33 ATA Controller, PN 7270413.
Re-image kit for the FlowCentre II tower computer, PN 2016874 7270464
Sample/MCL Intro Line kit 6912941
Sheath filter replacement kit 6912942
Software replacement kit, COULTER EPICS XL/XL-MCL SYSTEM II Version 3.0 6915303

Table 8.1-6 Miscellaneous Parts

Description Part Number

Clip, red shipping, for pinch valves 1008315
Cover, rear duct, Argon laser vent 1022440
Cylinder, air, MCL 6232572
Jumpers, 2 position, single row, discrete wire 2121023
Keeper, upper base, MCL 1021763
Labels, XL with MCL, instrument name plate 1021770
Mount, rubber shock, axial mount, 4 lbs, 73 lbs/in., 84 Hz, for laser cooling fan module 2523659
(may also be referred to as a bushing)
PCB, Laser Start (located inside the Argon laser head, PN 7000358) 627906
Plate, compressor shock mount 6855960
Sample station, long screw, top 2806117
Setscrew, for rubber foot, PN 6858988 2810028
Slide rail, deep channel (6.0 in.), lower pneumatics drawer 1405017

8.1-10 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS 8
Table 8.1-7 Software

Description Part Number

COULTER EPICS XL/XL-MCL Prefinal, on 3.5 in. floppy diskette 7231244
COULTER EPICS XL/XL-MCL SYSTEM II, Version 3.0 6706441
EXPO32™ ADC Cytometer, on CD-ROM, also includes appropriate ROMLock (PN 2016892) 6418337
LANtastic network V8.0, 2 to 10 user license, on CD-ROM 6417325
LANtastic network V8.0, single-user license, on CD-ROM 6417324
stemONE™ IVD System Software, Version 2.0 6915452
Note: Use with SYSTEM II™ software (version 3.0 or higher).
Sybase® SQL Anywhere™ PC database server software, 4 user license, on CD-ROM 6417323

Table 8.1-8 Tools

Description Part Number

Beckman Coulter service tool kit 5415102
Calibration test box, pneumatic 2907103
Circuit analyzer, 3-wire 2906883
Static-dissipative field kit, also referred to as ESD kit 5415097
Extender for circuit card 6705582
Service Resource Kit CD-ROM kit 6417471
Trimmer pot adjustment tool 5402071

Table 8.1-9 Tubing

Description Part Number

PEEK, flow cell intro line, 3.75 in. 0.013 i.d. x 0.025 wall, tan 1022073
PEEK, manual sample intro line, 14 in. 0.010 i.d. x 0.026 wall, blue 1021636
PEEK, MCL sample intro line, 15 in. 0.010 i.d. x 0.026 wall, blue 1021654
Polyurethane, clear with black stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202203
Polyurethane, clear with blue stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202209
Polyurethane, clear with green stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202208
Polyurethane, clear with grey stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202211
Polyurethane, clear with orange stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202206
Polyurethane, clear with red stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202205
Polyurethane, clear with violet stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202210
Polyurethane, clear with white stripe, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202212
Polyurethane, clear, 0.076 i.d. x 0.144 o.d., referred to as sheath tubing 3213215

PN 4237029G 8.1-11
PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS

Table 8.1-9 Tubing (Continued)

Description Part Number

Polyurethane, clear, 0.082 i.d. x 0.144 o.d. 3202036
Polyurethane, clear, 0.113 i.d. x 0.237 o.d. 3202038
Polyurethane, clear, 0.145 i.d. x 0.251 o.d. 3202039
Silicone, pull-apart I-beam with black stripe, 0.062 i.d. 3213136

Table 8.1-10 Workstation

Description Part Number

Cartridge, hard drive, Bernoulli, 90 MB 2016551
Cartridge, removable drive, Bernoulli, 150 MB 2016646
Cartridge, toner, Hewlett Packard, for HP LaserJet 6P/SPSe 2016708
Computer, Pentium 133 MHz, 16 MB RAM, minimum 540 MB hard drive, 2 MB video, 2016669(R)
Atlas, also includes a Microsoft serial mouse
Computer, Pentium processor, 166 MHz minimum, 16 MB RAM, minimum 1.2 GB HDD, 2016802(R)
minimum 2 MB video, Atlas PCI III, replacement for PN 2016669, also includes a serial
compatible mouse, PN 2016161
Data entry, keyboard, long 2016392
Data entry, keyboard, short 2016592
Disk drive, 3.5 in. floppy 2016454
Disk drive, 5.25 in. floppy 2016298
Display, monitor, Sony® Trinitron®, 17 in., multiscan color 2016721
Drive, CD-ROM, recordable, internal, 650 MB capacity, 16X read speed, 6X write speed, 2016879
and 4X rewrite speed; includes manuals
Drive, hard, 20 GB minimum, 7200 RPM IDE HDD 2016963
Note: Drive may be used in FlowCentre II tower computer PN 2016874 or FlowCentre
computer PN 2016753.
Drive, removable, Bernoulli, SCSI 2016552
Fan, internal chassis, for FlowCentre computer PN 2016753 2016961
Labels, keyboard short 2430458
Labels, keyboard, long 2429044
Memory, 128 MB, PC 100 SDRAM, ECC correctable, DIMM module, for FlowCentre II 2016969
tower computer PN 2016874
Memory, 16 MB, 70 NS tin-plated SIMM, for FlowCentre computer PN 2016753 2016973
Mouse pointing device, for use with 166 MHz Pentium computer PN 2016802 and 2016161
133 MHz Pentium computer PN 2016669
Optical media, rewritable, 1 G 2016567
Optical media, rewritable, 650 MB 2016568

8.1-12 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS 8
Table 8.1-10 Workstation (Continued)

Description Part Number

Optical media, write once, 1 G 2016570
Optical media, write once, 650 MB 2016569
PCB, Adaptor SCSI Host 2016457
PCB, Opto Transprocessor EXMEM, non-EMC, 2 fiber connectors 6705355
Note: Card may be used in FlowCentre II tower computer PN 2016874 or FlowCentre
computer PN 2016753.
PCB, Parallel Port Adapter (computer card requires PCI bus) 2016883
PCB, Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface (computer card requires ISA bus) 2016678
Printer, Hewlett Packard, HP InkJet 2280, color printer, 14 PPM minimum in draft mode, 2016953
1200 x 600 DPI minimum, 100/240 Vac, includes bi-directional parallel port interface
cable
Printer, Hewlett Packard, HP LaserJet 2200D, black print only, 8 PPM minimum, 600 DPI 2016752
minimum, 110/120 Vac, includes parallel interface cable
Printer, Inkjet, 120 Vac 2016553
Promise, Ultra 66 IDE PCI Controller with cable, for FlowCentre tower computer 2016960
PN 2016753
Re-imaging CD-ROM for Caching Controller, for the FlowCentre desktop computer 7270409
PN 2016753
Re-imaging CD-ROM for Ultra 33 ATA Controller, for the FlowCentre desktop computer 7270413
PN 2016753
Re-imaging CD-ROM, bootable, FlowCentre Workstation Restoration Disk for FlowCentre II 7270464
tower computer PN 2016874
Re-imaging disk, Imagining Utility Boot, 3.5 in. floppy diskette, for the FlowCentre desktop 6417654
computer PN 2016753
Note: For larger hard drives that use the Ultra 66 controller, use the re-imaging bootable
CD-ROM, PN 7270626. The 3.5 in. diskette is not needed.
Re-imaging CD-ROM, FlowCentre Workstation Restoration Disk for all FlowCentre 7270626
computers, PN 2016753
ROMLock, special connector for use with EXPO32 Cytometer Acquisition software 2016892
Storage media, 3.5 in. floppy diskette, DSHD, 10 per box, unformatted 2016394

PN 4237029G 8.1-13
PARTS LISTS
PART LOCATOR TOOLS

How to Locate a Part Number

ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

ATTENTION: Do not assume you can simply order the part number printed on a component.
Some components are assigned a FRU part number because of special handling or packaging
requirements. If you use the component part number instead of the FRU part number when
you place your order, your order may be delayed.
1. To quickly locate a part number, always begin at the anchor illustration, Figure 8.1-1.
a. Locate the problem area on the anchor illustration and note the associated letter.
b. Locate the associated letter in the Figure Reference column and note the figure
number that best fits the area with the defective part.
c. Go to the referenced figure number.
Note: In the electronic manual, each figure reference is a hypertext link to the
illustration, so selecting the figure number quickly displays that illustration.
d. If the part you are looking for is part of an assembly further identified by a letter on
the new illustration, locate the letter in the Figure Reference column and go to the
appropriate figure number for that letter.
Note: Depending on the complexity of the main component and on the location of
the desired part within that component, you may have to look at several
illustrations to find the one with the level of detail you need.
2. If you do not find the part in the illustrations selected:
a. Review the Figure Reference column for the anchor illustration to determine if
another illustration is available.
b. Check the illustrations listed in this section under Illustrations Not Referenced from
the Anchor Illustration.
c. Check the parts tables included in this section under Parts Not Illustrated.

While using the hypertext links in the electronic manual is the fastest way to access an
illustration, at some point you may want to scroll through the entire illustrated parts lists to
familiarize yourself with the layout. If you do, be aware that in large sections you may
encounter stop points. These stop points, which are only apparent if you are scrolling
through a section, are deliberate breaks in the file to enhance loading speed. When you
encounter a stop point, simply use the navigation bar to continue to the next section.

8.1-14 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
8.2 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

List of Illustrations
This section contains parts and covers related to the internal operations of the Cytometer.
Illustrations include the following:
r Argon laser, power supply, and mounting hardware - Figure 8.2-14
t Flexible duct components and assembly instructions - Figure 8.2-32
r Cables
t Attached to PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card, Figure 8.2-31
t Attached to Sensor card - Figure 8.2-4
r Data Acquisition card cage components - Figure 8.2-2
r Front display panel components - Figure 8.2-1
r Lower pneumatics drawer components - Figure 8.2-23
t Pinch valves and associated components - Figure 8.2-24
t QD10 and QD11 (coupling and fittings) - Figure 8.2-26
t Quick disconnect fittings and brackets - Figure 8.2-27
t Solenoid manifold - Figure 8.2-25
r Lower rear panel components - Figure 8.2-28
t Fan assembly - Figure 8.2-29
r Optical collection area (rear view) - Figure 8.2-9
t Front view (includes filter shield and filters) - Figure 8.2-10
t Front view with filter shield removed - Figure 8.2-11
t Beamshaper assembly - Figure 8.2-12
t Flow cell and fluorescence pickup lens with related hardware - Figure 8.2-13
r Reagent drawer components - Figure 8.2-15
t Sheath container - Figure 8.2-18
t Sheath liquid filter - Figure 8.2-16
t Sheath liquid filter purge (vent) connections - Figure 8.2-17
t Cleaning agent container - Figure 8.2-19
r Right-side compartment components - Figure 8.2-30
r Segmenting valve assembly components - Figure 8.2-20
t Air cylinder and related hardware for front and rear pads - Figure 8.2-22
t Air cylinder and related hardware for middle pad - Figure 8.2-21
r Upper pneumatics drawer components - Figure 8.2-3
t Bracket and fittings - Figure 8.2-6
t Quick disconnect below upper pneumatics drawer - Figure 8.2-8
t Sensor card and associated cables - Figure 8.2-4
t VL22 (upper valve) - Figure 8.2-5
t VL21 (lower valve) - Figure 8.2-7

PN 4237029G 8.2-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-1 Front Display Panel (See Table 8.2-1)

2

1
2
3

5 (Rear view)

8 5 (Front view)

11
10 3

7029119F

8.2-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-1 Front Display Panel (See Figure 8.2-1)

Item Part Number Description

1 1021769 Bracket, front panel
2 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
3 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
4 2827081 Washer, flat, #8 (0.172 i.d. x 0.359 o.d. x 0.030 thickness)
5 6705206 Card, Top Panel Display 2
6 1021176 Hinge, #5 swag, 3-inch
Note: Attach each hinge using four sets of self-lock screws (#6-32 x
0.37-in. length, pan-head, PN 2839039) and #6 flat washers
(PN 2827147).
7 6807085 Door, front panel display, grey
6856490 Door, front panel display, black
8 2806084 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.75 in. long, FL82 flat-head)
Note: At the bottom of the display window, install the center screw in the
display window before placing the display window on the panel overlay
(PN 6855862). This screw must be hand tightened. Do not use a power
driven screwdriver.
9 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
10 6855862 Assembly, XL overlay panel
11 1016814 Display, window
Note: Remove the protective plastic sheet. Ensure the LED grooves are
lined up with the LEDs on the panel overlay (PN 6855862). Install the
lower center screw (PN 2806084) in the display window before placing
the display window on the panel overlay. Hand tighten this screw. Do not
use a power driven screwdriver.

PN 4237029G 8.2-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-2 Data Acquisition Card Cage (See Table 8.2-2)

1 2 3 4 5 6 5 7

H V H V
C Y T O M C L S Y S D A T A
T R A N S A U X T E S T P M T 4 P M T 3 P M T 2 P M T 1
P M T 4 P M T 3
IN T E R F A C E IN T F C A Q C S S F S
P R O C H V H V
P M T 1 P M T 2

14
9
8

10 10

E 2 7
11 11

7
10

11

12
13

7029005F

8.2-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-2 Data Acquisition Card Cage (See Figure 8.2-2)

Item Part Number Description

1 6705318 Card, Cyto Transputer (also referred to as Cytometer Transputer card)
Note: Use jumper, PN 2121023, on this circuit card.
2 6705700 Card, MCL Interface
3 6705340 Card, System Interface
4 6705314 Card, Trans Data Acquisition
5 6705321 Card, Amp/Signal Conditioner
6 N/A Spare slot (used as a test slot in manufacturing)
7 7000193 FRU, Bertan high voltage power supply
8 1017593 Screw, shoulder (#6-32 x 0.30 in. length, 0.117 in. shoulder)
9 2523667 Hinge (lid stay), right-hand, 4.875 CTRS, 0.56 in. wide, 0.095 in. thick,
brass-plated steel
10 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
11 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
12 6028152 Cable, ground braid, 6 inches long with two #8 rings
13 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
14 2523666 Hinge (lid stay), left-hand, 4.875 CTRS, 0.56 in. wide, 0.095 in. thick,
brass-plated steel
Not shown 6705220 Backplane, Analyzer

PN 4237029G 8.2-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-3 Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-3) Figure Reference
A Sensor card and
attached cables,
Figure 8.2-4
B VL22 (upper valve),
Figure 8.2-5
C Bracket and fittings,
3 Figure 8.2-6
D VL21 (lower valve),
2 2 Figure 8.2-7
E Quick Disconnects
1 A 4 B 5 6 (QD13 and QD14),
Figure 8.2-8

RANGE ZERO

9 12 11 10 9 D C
2
2

7029090G

8.2-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-3 Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-3)

Item Part Number Description

7000375 FRU, upper pneumatics drawer assembly
1 7000192 FRU, regulator, electronic pressure (electronic transducer), for regulating
sample pressure
Note: Attach to posts using one #25 flat washer (0.265 i.d. x 0.484 o.d. x
0.027 in. thickness), PN 2827064, one #25 split-lock washer (0.26 i.d. x
0.49 o.d. x 0.062 in. thickness), PN 2826051, and one hex nut
(#25-20 UNC x 0.437 AF x 0.164 in.thickness), PN 2822072. Requires two
sets.
2 2806104 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, UF82 flat-head)
3 6858802 Shield, EMC, removable side
4 7000720 FRU, regulator, pressure, 0-10 psi, for regulating sheath pressure (4 psi
flow)
5 5120232 Switch, normally-open vacuum/pressure, (single pole, double throw), used
to monitor 2-inches Hg (labeled SN6)
Note: Attach using two self-lock nuts (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in.
thickness), PN 2821009.
6 5120221 Switch, normally-open vacuum/pressure (single pole, single throw), used to
monitor 3 psi (labeled SN7)
Note: Attach using two self-lock nuts (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in.
thickness), PN 2821009.
7 5120178 Switch, vacuum/pressure (single pole, double throw), used to monitor
25 psi (labeled SN8)
Note: Attach using two self-lock nuts (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in.
thickness), PN 2821009.
8 5120224 Switch, vacuum/pressure (single pole, double throw), used to monitor
10-inches Hg (labeled SN9)
Note: Attach to post using a self-lock nut (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in.
thickness), PN 2821009. Secure lower opening to the panel using a #4 flat
washer (0.125 i.d. x 0.250 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness), PN 2827146, and
machine screw (#4-40 x 0.75 in. length, pan-head), PN 2804039.
9 6232322 Fitting, T-connector, hose-barb union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d.,
nylon, white
10 6232254 Regulator, vacuum
11 6214106 Valve, check, 0.156 i.d. to 0.156 i.d. tubing
12 6213012 Choke, gray, 0.016 orifice

PN 4237029G 8.2-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-4 Sensor Card and Attached Cables (See Table 8.2-4)

PWB 1712902E

4
7029288G

8.2-8 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-4 Sensor Card and Attached Cables (See Figure 8.2-4)

Item Part Number Description

1 6705217 Card, Sensor
Note: Place a hole spacer (0.140 i.d. x 0.250 o.d. x 0.250 in. length),
PN 2843032, on each post before installing the circuit card. Secure using
self-lock nuts (#6-32 x 0.312 AF x 0.140 in. thickness), PN 2821021.
2 6028320 Cable, pneumatic sensor harness
Connections:
r J103, the 30-position female connector on this cable, is attached to the
J103 male connector on this Sensor card.
r J112, the 12-position plug on this cable, is attached to the rear of the
reagent drawer. When installed, label on connector must be on the top.
r J105, the two-position MATE-N-LOK on this cable, is attached to P105
from the electronic pressure regulator (RG1), PN 7000192.
r J110 connects the cable to the solenoid that operates VL22, the upper
pinch valve in the upper pneumatics drawer.
r J113 connects the cable to the solenoid that operates VL21, the lower
pinch valve in the upper pneumatics drawer.
r The solderless quick-connect terminals with wire-markers 31 through
38 are attached to the SN6, SN7, SN8, and SN9 sensors as follows:
t SN6 (upper left) - 32 is attached to the left contact; 33, to the right.
t SN7 (upper right) - 34 is attached to the left contact; 35, to the right.
t SN8 (lower right) - 36 is attached to upper contact on the front; 37, to
the lower contact.
t SN9 (lower left) - 31 is attached to the left contact; 38, to the right.
3 Cable, sensor/regulator control, 26-position MOD IV receptacle on each end
(labeled P101 and J29), 3.3 ft. long
6028702 EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher) is a
shielded cable.
6028289 Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
is a flat ribbon cable.
Connections: P101 is attached to J101 on this circuit card; other end, J29 is
attached to P29 on the Analyzer backplane.
4 6028293 Cable, solenoid, 25 conductor flat ribbon with 3 subminiature D insulation
displacement connectors (labeled J102, J27, and J77), 81 in. length
Connections:
r J102 female connector on this cable is attached to the J102 male
connector on this circuit card using two special screws (#4-40 x 0.31 in.
length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852224.
r J27 female connector on this cable is attached to the P27 male
connector on the Analyzer backplane using two special screws (#4-40 x
0.25 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852223.
r J77 female connector on this cable is attached to the J1 male connector
on the Solenoid Power Distribution card (PN 6705761 in the lower
pneumatics drawer) using two special screws (#4-40 x 0.31 in. length,
pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852224.

PN 4237029G 8.2-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-5 VL22 - Exploded View of Upper Valve (See Table 8.2-5)

1
2

1 45

5
6
7

7029121F 8

Table 8.2-5 VL22 - Exploded View of Upper Valve (See Figure 8.2-5)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232086 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
2 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
3 6232359 Fitting, miniature tee branch with 10-32 ports
4 6232492 Valve, electro-pneumatic, solenoid and pilot actuator combination valve,
24 Vdc / 30 psi, 4.5 lb pinch force
5 2826030 Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0.020 thickness
6 6216012 Spacer, cylinder, 0.500 i.d. x 0.562 o.d. x 0.062 thickness
7 1017501 Mount, pull-apart pinch valve
8 6855763 Valve, pull-apart pinch, double-action, white, standard

8.2-10 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Figure 8.2-6 Bracket and Fittings - Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-6)

3 (4x)

2 (4x)

7029153F

Table 8.2-6 Bracket and Fittings - Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-6)

Item Part Number Description

1 6855212 Bracket, two pinch valve
2 1005697 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d.
3 6232104 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.115 i.d. to 0.180 i.d.

PN 4237029G 8.2-11
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-7 VL21 - Exploded View of Lower Valve (See Table 8.2-7)
1
2

4 45

6
7
8

7029120F 9

Table 8.2-7 VL21 - Exploded View of Lower Valve (See Figure 8.2-7)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232085 Fitting, hose barb union, 0125 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
2 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
3 6232359 Fitting, miniature tee branch with 10-32 ports
4 6232086 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
5 6232492 Valve, electro-pneumatic, solenoid and pilot actuator combination valve,
24 Vdc / 30 psi, 4.5 lb pinch force
6 2826030 Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0.020 thickness
7 6216012 Spacer, cylinder, 0.500 i.d. x 0.562 o.d. x 0.062 thickness
8 1017501 Mount, pull-apart pinch valve
9 6855763 Valve, pull-apart pinch, double-action, white, standard

8.2-12 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Figure 8.2-8 Quick Disconnects Below Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-8)

QD14

2 QD13

empty 3

empty

7 (Black, 6x)
6 (White, 1x)
4 (White, 1x)
5 (Black, 6x) 7029161F

Table 8.2-8 Quick Disconnects Below Upper Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-8)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232530 Coupling, quick-connect, panel-mount adapter and nut assembly for
attaching 10 tube quick-disconnect couplings to a panel, black
2 6232534 Coupling, quick-disconnect QD14, male body, 10 tube capacity body
(includes the 7 fittings shown in Figure 8.2-8)
3 6232533 Coupling, quick-disconnect QD13, female body, 10 tube capacity body
(includes the 7 fittings shown in Figure 8.2-8)
4 6232588 Fitting, insert, white female, internal connector to 0.082 i.d. hose barb
5 6232469 Fitting, insert, black female, internal connector to 0.125 i.d. hose barb
6 6232581 Fitting, insert, white male, internal connector to 0.082 i.d. hose barb
7 6232468 Fitting, insert, black male, internal connector to 0.125 i.d. hose barb

PN 4237029G 8.2-13
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-9 Optical Collection Area, Rear View (See Table 8.2-9) Figure Reference

2
A Front view (includes
3
A filter shield and filters),
4 Figure 8.2-10
B Front view with filter
shield removed
(includes flow cell and
FS detector),
1 Figure 8.2-11
B Argon Laser (includes
Power Supply and
mounting hardware),
Figure 8.2-14

7 6 5
Rear view 7029122G

8.2-14 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-9 Optical Collection Area, Rear View (See Figure 8.2-9)

Item Part Number Description

1 2815003 Screw, thumb, knurled nickel-plated brass (6-32 x 0.375 in. length)
2 7000352 FRU, side scatter diode
3 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
4 2827134 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.375 o.d. x 0.046 thickness)
5 6705199 Card, PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control
6 7000197 FRU, fluorescence PMT, 300 nm to 800 nm spectral response
7 7000197 FRU, fluorescence PMT, 300 nm to 800 nm spectral response
176402 FRU, red sensitive PMT option, 300 nm to 850 nm spectral response
Note: PMT in this position requires a right angle SHV connector,
PN 2121317 (male to female adapter).

PN 4237029G 8.2-15
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-10 Optical Collection Area, Front View (See Table 8.2-10)

LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM VISIBLE AND/OR INVISIBLE
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AVOID EYE OR SKIN
EXPOSURE TO DIRECT OR
SCATTERED RADIATION

1 2
Front view

3
4

9 8 7 6

13

10
12

11
7029127F

8.2-16 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-10 Optical Collection Area, Front View (See Figure 8.2-10)

Item Part Number Description

1 2430348 Label, Class 3B Laser Product
2 2427785 Label, laser danger
3 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
4 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
5 6859190 Shield, filter for 4-color system
6859189 Shield, filter for 3-color system (not shown)
6 6216345 Gasket, #10 black, ethylene propylene, used only in slot 9 between lens
holder and PMT housing
7 1018737 Plate, lens holder
8 2806104 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, UF82-head), used to secure lens
holders in slots 1 through 8 only
2806077 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.19 in. length, UF82-head), used to secure lens
holder in slot 9 only
9 3814134 Filter, light, used in slot 1, 525 band pass (525 BP)
3814135 Filter, light, used in slot 2, 575 band pass (575 BP)
3814289 Filter, light, used in slot 3, 620 band pass (620 BP)
3814136 Filter, light, used in slot 4, 488 dichroic long pass (488 DL)
3802072 Filter, light, used in slot 5, 488 laser blocker (488 BK)
3814067 Filter, light, used in slot 6, 550 dichroic long pass (550 DL)
3814138 Filter, light, used in slot 7, 600 dichroic long pass (600 DL)
3814274 Filter, light, used in slot 8, 645 dichroic long pass (645 DL)
3814139 Filter, light, used in slot 9, 675 band pass (675 BP)
10 2807052 Screw, setscrew (#4-40 x 0.156 in length, hex-head)
11 2429708 Label, 525 BP / Slot 1
2429709 Label, 575 BP / Slot 2
2429858 Label, 620 BP / Slot 3
2429704 Label, 488 DL / Slot 4
2429706 Label, 488 BK / Slot 5
2429703 Label, 550 DL / Slot 6
2430206 Label, 600 DL / Slot 7
2429857 Label, 645 DL / Slot 8
2430195 Label, 675 BP / Slot 9
12 1018542 Holder, filter
13 2516002 Plunger, ball (#6-40 x 0.312 long)

PN 4237029G 8.2-17
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-11 Optical Collection Area with Filter Shield Removed (See Table 8.2-11) Figure Reference
2 A Beamshaper assembly,
Figure 8.2-12
3
B Fluorescence pickup
lens and adjustment
hardware, Figure 8.2-13
C Flow cell and associated
hardware, Figure 8.2-13

Front view with filter

shield removed

C
4
6 5
7029007G

Table 8.2-11 Optical Collection Area with Filter Shield Removed (See Figure 8.2-11)

Item Part Number Description

1 7000352 FRU, side scatter diode
2 7000197 FRU, fluorescence PMT, 300 nm to 800 nm spectral response
3 7000197 FRU, fluorescence PMT, 300 nm to 800 nm spectral response
176402 FRU, red sensitive PMT option, 300 nm to 850 nm spectral response
Note: PMT in this position requires a right angle SHV connector,
PN 2121317 (male to female adapter). This applies to 3-color and 4-color
systems.
4 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
5 2839043 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.62 in. length, pan-head)
6 7000359 FRU, forward scatter (FS) detector

8.2-18 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Figure 8.2-12 Beam-Shaping Stage Components (See Table 8.2-12)

7029008D

Table 8.2-12 Beam-Shaping Stage Components (See Figure 8.2-12)

Item Part Number Description

1 7000450 FRU, beamshaper 2
2 6859219 Lens holder, 10 mm
3 6859220 Lens holder, 80 mm
4 7000451 FRU, focus knob III
7000449 FRU, focus knob2

PN 4237029G 8.2-19
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-13 Flow Cell and Fluorescence Pickup Lens with Related Hardware (See Table 8.2-13)
7

6
1
2
5
4
3

10
11
12
13

14

15

11
16 7029126F

8.2-20 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-13 Flow Cell and Fluorescence Pickup Lens with Associated Hardware (See Figure 8.2-13)

Item Part Number Description

1 2851975 Screw, machine, knurled (#4-40 x 0.75 in. length, hex socket head)
2 1021703 Stage, snout support
3 1021682 Knob, snout
4 2807026 Screw, setscrew (#4-40 x 0.125 in length, hex-head)
5 2851982 Screw, machine (#6-40 x 1.125 in. length, hex-head)
6 6859217 Stage, snout
7 2806102 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.38 in. length, hex-head)
8 6858921 Snout, pinhole
9 6859156 Flow cell
10 1022362 Plate, flow cell
11 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
12 2826035 Washer, split-lock, #6 (0.14 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. x 0.03 in. thickness)
13 2806096 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 1.25 in. length, pan-head)
14 1020965 Cover, flow cell shield
15 2427785 Label, laser danger
16 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)

PN 4237029G 8.2-21
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-14 Argon Laser, Power Supply, and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.2-14)

6 8
7
5
5
1 4
30

3
29 2
10
9

11
28 12
4

27
in Cytometer (rear view)

14

26 25 13

13

24

CK
15
RLO ER
INTE LAS
WER
PO
ER
LAS
ON
OFF

23
5 CE
RFA
TE
IN
R
USE

K
TL
IN

WER O
PO
1

LA
SE
R
16
R
SE
LA

19

22
21
17
20

18 18
in Voltage-Specific Power Supply
in Universal Power Supply
7029267G

8.2-22 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-14 Argon Laser, Power Supply, and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.2-14)

Item Part Number Description

1 6856941 Plenum, laser duct out
2 2840037 Fastener, ball stud
3 1022396 Screw, special laser mounting
4 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
5 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
6 6028152 Cable, ground braid, 6 in. length with two #8 rings
7 2826035 Washer, split-lock, #6 (0.14 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. x 0.03 in. thickness)
8 2806159 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 2.00 in. length, pan-head)
9 2806148 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 2.00 in. length, FL82 flat-head)
10 7000719 FRU, laser blower assembly
11 2603054 Fan, 64 CFM, 24 Vdc, 6.37 in. square, 1.6 in. deep
12 6011006 Tie wrap, screw mount, #6 sizer, 7.4 in. long, 0.19 in wide
13 2523660 Mount, shock, rubber, axial mount, 16 lb, 256 lb/in., 78 Hz
14 179438 Block, laser air (UPS only)
15 4004115 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 100 Vac to 240 Vac
systems, JDS2119U (UPS only)
16 2852095 Screw, self-lock machine (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with washer)
17 179434 Plate, Argon laser power supply mounting (UPS only)
18 2810045 Screw, machine (#10-32 x 0.25 in. length, UF82-head)
19 6856067 Plate, laser power supply mounting (Voltage-Specific Power Supply only)
20 2839051 Screw, self-lock (#10-32 x 0.75 in. length, pan-head)
21 2826045 Washer, split-lock, #10 (0.19 i.d. x 0.33 o.d. x 0.047 in. thickness)
22 2827021 Washer, flat, #10 (0.21 i.d. x 0.51 o.d. x 0.051 thickness)
23 2839073 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head)
24 7000431 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 100 Vac system
7000721 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 120 Vac system
7000432 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 220 or 240 Vac system
25 2851866 Spacer, internally and externally threaded (#6-32 x 0.250 DP to #6-32 x
0.375, aluminum alloy)
26 6705199 Card, PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control (fans for cooling Argon laser)
27 2827134 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.375 o.d. x 0.046 thickness)
28 2839009 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, pan-head)
29 7000358 FRU, Argon air-cooled laser head
30 Flexible duct must be assembled. Refer to Table 8.2-32 for part numbers
and Figure 8.2-32 for illustrated assembly instructions.
Not shown 2523659 Mount, rubber shock (or bushing) for laser cooling fan module
Not shown 627906 Card, Laser Start (located inside the Argon laser head, PN 7000358)

PN 4237029G 8.2-23
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-15 Reagent Drawer (See Table 8.2-15) Figure Reference

A Sheath liquid filter,
Figure 8.2-16
2
1 B Sheath liquid filter
A
purge (vent) connections,
Figure 8.2-17
B
C Sheath container,
Figure 8.2-18
D Cleaning agent container,
Figure 8.2-19

D
7

Epics XL
6

4
Epics XL MCL

5
Blank

7029222G

8.2-24 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-15 Reagent Drawer (See Figure 8.2-15)

Item Part Number Description

1 2523451 O-ring, silicone, used as rubber band, 2.300 i.d. x 0.103 width
2 7000677 FRU, reagent drawer with slides assembly
3 6807089 Panel, reagent drawer front, for XL flow cytometer, grey
4 6807088 Panel, reagent drawer front, for XL-MCL flow cytometer, grey
5 6855934 Panel, reagent drawer front, for XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, black
6 2826012 Washer, E-tooth, #6, 0.140 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.022 thickness
7 2806140 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.38 in. length, UF82-head)

PN 4237029G 8.2-25
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-16 Sheath Liquid Filter (See Table 8.2-16)

2
3

1
F
L
O
W

2
2
Top view Bottom view 7029109F

8.2-26 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-16 Sheath Liquid Filter (See Figure 8.2-16)

Item Part Number Description

1 6912942 Assembly, sheath filter
2 6232472 Quick-connect, male, external elbow, 0.250 o.d., white acetal delrin
3 6232522 Quick-connect, male, external elbow, 0.375 o.d., white acetal delrin

PN 4237029G 8.2-27
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-17 Sheath Liquid Filter Purge (Vent) Connections (See Table 8.2-17)
1

2
6
3

4 7
8

13

14
(Comes with item 7)

12 9

10 7029142F
11

8.2-28 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-17 Sheath Liquid Filter Purge (Vent) Connections (See Figure 8.2-17)

Item Part Number Description

1 2807026 Screw, setscrew (#4-40 x 0.125 in length, hex-head)
2 1018728 Knob, pinch valve
3 2822033 Nut, hex (47-32 UNS x 0.562 AF x 0.078 in. thickness)
4 2826030 Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0.020 thickness
5 6856718 Bracket, shut-off valve
6 6232472 Quick-connect, male, external elbow, 0.250 o.d., white acetal delrin
7 6232466 Quick-connect, internal, panel mount, 10-32, white, 0.125 flow (couples
with white insert, PN 6232266)
8 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
9 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
10 6232208 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.093 i.d. to 10-32 threaded, white, nylon
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Tighten until the O-ring is squeezed then continue to tighten
until the fitting is oriented as shown in Figure 8.2-17.
11 6855763 Valve, pull-apart pinch, double-action, white, standard
12 3213136 Tubing, pull-apart I-beam with black stripe, silicone, 0.062 i.d., approximate
8-inch length
13 1017501 Mount, pull-apart pinch valve
14 6214108 Valve, check, for 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d. tubing

PN 4237029G 8.2-29
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-18 Sheath Container (See Table 8.2-18)

9
2

4
3

8
7

6
7318036A

Table 8.2-18 Sheath Container (See Figure 8.2-18)

Item Part Number Description

7000378 FRU, sheath tank with sensor assembly
1 6232472 Quick-connect, male, external elbow, 0.250 o.d., white acetal delrin
2 6232470 Quick-connect, female, internal panel mount, 0.125 i.d., coupling pair latch,
barb, white acetal delrin
3 1020976 Tube, pickup
4 1018613 Cap, sheath tank (or bottle)
5 2523724 O-ring, silicone seal, 1.850 i.d. x 0.210 width
6 2523649 Tank, sheath without sensor (also referred to as sheath bottle)
7 6232478 Quick-connect, female, internal panel mount, 0.125 flow, coupling pair latch,
barb, white acetal delrin
8 6028526 Cable, level sensor, with undercut O-ring groove (O-ring is not needed)
9 1020981 Bracket, sheath tank (also referred to as sheath bottle bracket)

8.2-30 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Figure 8.2-19 Cleaning Agent Container (See Table 8.2-19)

10 2

9
4
3

7318035A
6

Table 8.2-19 Cleaning Agent Container (See Figure 8.2-19)

Item Part Number Description

7000379 FRU, cleanse tank with sensor assembly
1 6232472 Quick-connect, male, external elbow, 0.250 o.d., white acetal delrin
2 6232470 Quick-connect, female, internal panel mount, 0.125 i.d., coupling pair latch,
barb, white acetal delrin
3 1020976 Tube, pickup
4 1021818 Cap, cleanse
5 1021812 Gasket, cleanse cap
6 2523650 Tank, cleanse, without sensor (also referred to as cleanse bottle)
7 6232478 Quick-connect, female, internal panel mount, 0.125 flow, coupling pair latch,
barb, white acetal delrin
8 6028526 Cable, level sensor, with undercut O-ring groove
Note: Must use with O-ring seal, PN 2512031.
9 2512031 O-ring, silicone seal, 0.364 i.d. x 0.070 width
10 1020978 Bracket, cleanse tank (also referred to as detergent bottle bracket)

PN 4237029G 8.2-31
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-20 Segmenting Valve Assembly (See Table 8.2-20) Figure Reference
A A Air cylinder and related
hardware for segmenting
valve middle pad,
Figure 8.2-16
To manual B Air cylinder and related
1
sample probe hardware for segmenting
valve front and rear pads,
Figure 8.2-17
To MCL
B sample probe

2
8 3
To flow cell
4

6
7
5

To
segmenting
valve
7029157F

8.2-32 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-20 Segmenting Valve Assembly (See Figure 8.2-20)

Item Part Number Description

7000370 FRU, segmenting valve assembly
1 7000195 FRU, segmenting valve rear pad
2 7000191 FRU, segmenting valve middle pad
3 7000196 FRU, segmenting valve front pad
4 6912941 Kit, Sample/MCL Intro Line
5 1021636 Tubing, PEEK, manual sample intro line, 14 in. 0.010 i.d. x 0.026 wall, blue
1021654 Tubing, PEEK, MCL sample intro line, 15 in. 0.010 i.d. x 0.026 wall, blue
1022073 Tubing, PEEK, flow cell intro line, 3.75 in. 0.013 i.d. x 0.025 wall, tan
6 6232526 Fitting, ferrule nut, black, for 0.062 o.d. tubing
7 6232525 Fitting, ferrule, natural, for 0.062 o.d. tubing
8 7000198 FRU, segmenting valve knob

PN 4237029G 8.2-33
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-21 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Segmenting Valve Middle Pad (See Table 8.2-21)

2 3
1

4
6

5 5
2

7029158F

Table 8.2-21 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Segmenting Valve Middle Pad (See Figure 8.2-21)

Item Part Number Description

1 6216002 Fitting, miniature, 10-32 threaded, 10-32 tap, adjustable, brass
2 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
3 6232086 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
4 6232723 Cylinder, double-acting air, 0.75 bore, rotating rod with 1.50 stroke
5 6232683 Fitting, miniature adapter, 10-32 tap in 0.125 MPT plug, nickel-plated brass
6 2822040 Nut, hex (#25-28 UNF x 0.437 AF x 0.140 in. thickness)
7 2523798 Socket joint, quick-disconnect with spring loaded sleeve, for 0.253-inch
diameter ball stud, stainless steel

8.2-34 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Figure 8.2-22 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Front and Rear Segmenting Valve Pads
(See Table 8.2-22)
2
1

4
5

7029159F

Table 8.2-22 Air Cylinder and Related Hardware for Front and Rear Segmenting Valve Pads
(See Figure 8.2-22)

Item Part Number Description

1 6216002 Fitting, miniature, 10-32 threaded, 10-32 tap, adjustable, brass
2 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
3 6232086 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
4 6232574 Cylinder, air, double-acting, single-ended, front block mount, 0.63 bore,
1.50 stroke, 250 psi maximum pressure
5 2822016 Nut, hex (#10-32 UNF x 0.375 AF x 0.130 in. thickness)
6 2523743 Socket joint, quick-disconnect with spring loaded sleeve, for 0.253 in.
diameter ball stud, stainless steel

PN 4237029G 8.2-35
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-23 Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-23) Figure Reference
8 A Pinch valve and
associated components,
7 9
Figure 8.2-24
A
B
B Solenoid manifold,
Figure 8.2-25
C QD10 and QD11
6
(coupling and fittings),
Figure 8.2-26
5 D Quick-disconnect
C fittings and brackets,
Figure 8.2-27

1
D

3
7029102F
2

8.2-36 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-23 Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-23)

Item Part Number Description

7000374 FRU, lower pneumatics drawer assembly
1 6232492 Valve, electro-pneumatic, solenoid and pilot actuator combination valve,
24 Vdc / 30 psi, 4.5 lb pinch force, see Figure 8.2-24 for an exploded view
that includes related components
Note: Attach using two self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length,
pan-head), PN 2839039.
2 6028599 Sensor, waste chamber, with undercut O-ring groove
2512031 O-ring, silicone seal, 0.364 i.d. x 0.070 width (not shown)
Note: Replace the original rubber gasket with O-ring seal, PN 2512031.
Discard the original rubber gasket.
3 7000373 FRU, vacuum chamber
Note: Attach using two self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length,
pan-head), PN 2839039.
4 6214106 Valve, check, 0.156 i.d. to 0.156 i.d. tubing
5 6855763 Valve, pull-apart pinch, double-action, white, standard, see Figure 8.2-24 for
an exploded view that includes related components
6 2851363 Spacer, tapped, 6-32 x 1.625 in. length x 0.250 in. hex, aluminum
7 6705761 Card, Solenoid Power Distribution
Note: 25 conductor flat ribbon cable assembly with subminiature D
connector, PN 6028293, is connected to this circuit card.
8 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
9 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
Not shown 1005697 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d., metal feed-through fittings
for attaching tubings (FF3 through FF16 on the inside bracket and FF18
through FF38 on the upper panel)

PN 4237029G 8.2-37
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-24 Pinch Valve and Associated Components, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-24)
9

2
1 VL0 and VL7

VL13

4
8

7
6

7029201F

8.2-38 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-24 Pinch Valve and Associated Components, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-24)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232814 Fitting, T-connector, adjustable, 3/32 i.d. hose barb to 3/32 i.d. hose barb to
10-32 threaded, brass miniature
2 6232813 Fitting, elbow, adjustable, 3/32 i.d. hose barb to 10-32 threaded, brass
miniature
Note: Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
3 6232819 Fitting, Y-connector, adjustable, hose barb, 0.190 o.d. to 0.120 o.d. to 10-32
threaded, brass miniature with stainless steel stud
Note: Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
4 6855763 Valve, pull-apart pinch, double-action, white, standard
5 1017501 Mount, pull-apart pinch valve
6 6216012 Spacer, cylinder, 0.500 i.d. x 0.562 o.d. x 0.062 thickness
7 2826030 Washer, I-tooth, #47, 0.47 i.d. x 0.60 o.d. x 0.020 thickness
8 6232492 Valve, electro-pneumatic, solenoid and pilot actuator combination valve,
24 Vdc / 30 psi, 4.5 lb pinch force
Note: Attach using two self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length,
pan-head), PN 2839039. Check alignment to ensure it is straight and is
parallel to other assemblies before tightening the screws.
9 6028287 Cable, solenoid power, Clippard 3 position connector for solenoid with two
26 AWG (19/38) tinned copper conductor wires for circuit card connection

PN 4237029G 8.2-39
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-25 Solenoid Manifold, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-25)

3
8
9
4

6
7

3
7029203F 5

Table 8.2-25 Solenoid Manifold, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-25)

Item Part Number Description

6232587 Assembly, solenoid valve, pressure relief valves and manifold
1 6216129 Fitting, T-connector, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. to threaded, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
2 6232393 Valve, double solenoid, pilot-actuated latching two-position five-port spool
valve, 24 Vdc, operating pressure 14 to 100 psi
3 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
4 2839074 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 1.12 in. length, pan-head)
5 2806096 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 1.25 in. length, pan-head)
6 6232376 Valve, single solenoid, pilot-actuated two-position five-port spool valve,
24 Vdc, operating pressure 20 to 100 psi
7 6028130 Cable, solenoid power, 2 position connector for solenoid with two 60 in.
22 AWG conductor wires for circuit card connection
8 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
9 6232086 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded

8.2-40 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Figure 8.2-26 QD10 and QD11 (Coupling and Fittings), Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-26)

QD10

QD11

empty
2

7 empty

6 (White, 6x)
5 (Black, 2x) 3 (White, 3x)

7029202F 4 (Black, 5x)

Table 8.2-26 QD10 and QD11 (Coupling and Fittings), Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-26)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232532 Coupling, quick-disconnect QD10, male body, 10 tube capacity body
(includes the 8 fittings shown in Figure 8.2-26)
2 6232531 Coupling, quick-disconnect QD11, female body, 10 tube capacity body
(includes the 8 fittings shown in Figure 8.2-26)
3 6232588 Fitting, insert, white female quick-connect, internal connector to 0.082 i.d.
hose barb (inserted 3 places in QD11, PN 6232531)
4 6232469 Fitting, insert, black female quick-connect, internal connector to 0.125 i.d.
hose barb (inserted 5 places in QD11, PN 6232531)
5 6232468 Fitting, insert, black male quick-connect, internal connector to 0.125 i.d.
hose barb (inserted 2 places in QD10, PN 6232532)
6 6232581 Fitting, insert, white male quick-connect, internal connector to 0.082 i.d.
hose barb (inserted in 6 places in QD10, PN 6232532)
7 6232530 Coupling, quick-connect, panel-mount adapter and nut assembly for
attaching 10 tube quick-disconnect couplings to a panel, black

PN 4237029G 8.2-41
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-27 Quick Disconnect Fittings and Brackets, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Table 8.2-27)
2
1 1

3 4 (16x)

12

QD42 QD41 QD40 QD39 QD38

3
QD45 QD44 QD43

QD49 QD48 QD47 QD46

QD54 QD53 QD52 QD51 QD50

QD58 QD57 QD56 QD55

QD63 QD62 QD61 QD60 QD59

11

5 (3x)

5 (10x)
5 (4x)

5 7

10

7029204F

8.2-42 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-27 Quick Disconnect Fittings and Brackets, Lower Pneumatics Drawer (See Figure 8.2-27)

Item Part Number Description

1 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
2 6011019 Mount, wire tie, 0.51 in. length x 0.33 in. width, for use with #6 screw
3 6232799 Fitting, insert, white female quick-connect, internal connector to 0.094 i.d.
hose barb (inserted three places in the 45° angled bracket, PN 6805879)
4 6232588 Fitting, insert, white female quick-connect, internal connector to 0.093 i.d.
hose barb with shutoff valve (inserted 16 places in the 45° angled bracket,
PN 6805879)
5 6232581 Fitting, insert, white male quick-connect, internal connector to 0.082 i.d.
hose barb (couples with PN 6232588 or PN 6232799)
6 6858589 Plate, 12 insert fitting, with captive knurl knob
7 6858591 Plate, 6 insert fitting, with captive knurl knob, for QD64, QD65 and QD72
connections
8 6858592 Plate, 6 insert fitting, with captive knurl knob, for QD66, QD67, QD74, and
QD75 connections
9 6858590 Plate, 5 insert fitting, with captive knurl knob, used only on XL with MCL
option installed, for QD68, QD71, and QD89 connections
10 6232468 Fitting, insert, black male quick-connect, externally sealed tube fitting insert
(couples with PN 6232469)
11 6232469 Fitting, insert, black female quick-connect, internal connector to 0.125 i.d.
hose barb (inserted one place in the 45° angled bracket, PN 6805879)
12 6805879 Bracket, 45° angled, used to secure fitting inserts

PN 4237029G 8.2-43
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-28 Cytometer Rear Panel, Lower (See Table 8.2-28)

2
3

8
12
10
11

8
12
6
7

9 8

7 3 1 8 0 4 4 A

8.2-44 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-28 Cytometer Rear Panel, Lower (See Figure 8.2-28)

Item Part Number Description

1 2603025 Fan, box, 106 CFM, 24 Vdc (4.68 square x 1.5 thickness)
Note: To ensure proper cable length, verify fan orientation before attaching
the fan to the Cytometer frame.
r Cable for B1 (fan near the MCL side of the unit) must be oriented
center to top as seen in the “fan to shock mount” illustration in
Figure 8.2-29.
r Cable for B2 must be oriented left of center as seen in the “filter
assembly to fan” illustration in Figure 8.2-29.
2 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
3 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
4 6705324 Card, Fiber Optic Interface
Note: Uses fiber optic interface cable (9-position, D-receptacle to plug,
55-in. long). EMC version is a shielded cable, PN 6028650. Non-EMC
version is a flat ribbon cable, PN 6028294.
5 2851995 Nut, hex (0.25-36 UNS x 0.375 AF x 0.094 in. thickness)
6 6232304 Quick-connect, panel mount, orange body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with orange insert, PN 6232305, also
with automatic shut-off)
Note: Insert a #50 I-tooth washer, PN 2826042, between the panel and the
hex nut.
7 6232303 Quick-connect, panel mount, yellow body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with yellow insert, PN 6232307, also
with automatic shut-off)
Note: Insert a #50 I-tooth washer, PN 2826042, between the panel and the
hex nut.
8 2104261 Screwlock, female assembly kit for attaching a D-type connector
9 6232309 Quick-connect, panel mount, blue body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with blue insert, PN 6232306, also with
automatic shut-off)
Note: Insert a #50 I-tooth washer, PN 2826042, between the panel and the
hex nut.
10 2121644 Connector, BNC coaxial, panel mount, jack-to-jack adapter
11 Cable, CYTO dc power harness
6028700 EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
6028319 Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
Note: See Figure 8.2-31 and Table 8.2-31 for information concerning
connections.
12 2827146 Washer, flat, #4 (0.125 i.d. x 0.250 o.d. x 0.036 thickness)

PN 4237029G 8.2-45
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-29 Fan Assembly, Cytometer Rear Panel (See Table 8.2-29)
Air flow into unit

4
2 3
1
Fan to shock mount

8
7
2

2
1

Shock mount to Cytometer frame

11

10

9
1

7318048A
Filter assembly to fan

8.2-46 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-29 Fan Assembly, Cytometer Rear Panel (See Figure 8.2-29)

Item Part Number Description

1 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
2 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
3 2603053 Fan, shock mount, for 4-inch fan, black
4 2603025 Fan, box, 106 CFM, 24 Vdc (4.68 square x 1.5 thickness)
Note: To ensure proper cable length, verify fan orientation before
attaching the fan to the Cytometer frame.
r Cable for B1 (fan near the MCL side of the unit) must be oriented
center to top as seen in the “fan to shock mount” illustration in
Figure 8.2-29.
r Cable for B2 must be oriented left of center as seen in the “filter
assembly to fan” illustration in Figure 8.2-29.
5 2806075 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.62 in. length, pan-head)
6 6011006 Tie wrap, screw mount, #6 sizer, 7.4 in. long, 0.19 in wide
7 2826035 Washer, split-lock, #6 (0.14 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. x 0.03 in. thickness)
8 2806128 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.75 in. length, pan-head)
9 2603009 Finger guard, grille for fan air filter on 4-inch box fan
Note: Raised ribs should face out.
10 2603010 Filter, air, 4-inch pad, 45 PPI
11 2806073 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.62 in. length, FL82 flat-head)

PN 4237029G 8.2-47
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-30 Cytometer Right-Side Compartment (See Table 8.2-30)

2
1

2
3
2
1
2
3

4
2

14

11 J 6 9
12
5 6 7

8
13
9
2
1

10

7318051A

8.2-48 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-30 Cytometer Right-Side Compartment (See Figure 8.2-30)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232086 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
2 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
3 6232085 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.125 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
4 1018616 Manifold rear panel
5 2104365 Pin, universal mate-n-lock connector, 20-14 AWG, brass and gold
6 2427902 Label (J69)
7 2104356 Connector, universal mate-n-lock 2-pin plug, panel/cable mount
8 6214067 Solenoid, 2-way, normally-open (N.O.)
9 6216004 Fitting, hex-head adapter, 10-32 tap to 1/8 MPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion.
10 6214108 Valve, check, for 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d. tubing
11 6216127 Fitting, T-connector, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
12 6232725 Filter, water trap (air/water filter separator), 5 micron
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads before
inserting the threads in the solenoid.
13 6216128 Fitting, elbow, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
14 6856551 Coil, cooling

PN 4237029G 8.2-49
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-31 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card and Attached Cables (See Table 8.2-31)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PWB 1712892A

9 8 7029294G

Table 8.2-31 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card and Attached Cables (See Figure 8.2-31)

Item Part Number Description

1 2121415 Connector housing, 4-position single row 0.10 center polarized, with detent
locking - four fan terminals (2 from each fan on the lower rear panel) are
inserted in this housing then connected to P94
2 6214067 Cable, 2-way normally-open (N.O.) solenoid
Connections: Before use, two pins, a connector and label must be added.
See Figure 8.2-30 for the part numbers for these components and their
assembly. P69 on the solenoid cable is attached to J69 on this circuit card.
3 Cable, Cyto dc power, internal cable harness with 5 connectors (labeled
P80, P13, P97, J65, and J66) and 3 rings for making ground connections
6028700 EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
6028319 Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
Connections:
r P80 and P13 are male connectors on this cable that are attached to the
lower rear panel from the inside. See Figure 8.2-28 for attachment
hardware part numbers and the order for attaching
t P80, the ANALOG connector, is an 8-position power D subminiature
connector.
t P13, the POWER MODULE CONTROL connector, is a 7-position
power / 17-position signal power D subminiature connector with
associated #8 ring (wire marker 41) for a ground connection.
r P97, a 3 conductor MATE-N-LOK plug on this cable, is attached to J97
on this circuit card.
r J65 and J67, female connectors on this cable, are attached to the
Analyzer backplane.
t When the Data Acquisition card cage is inside the Cytometer cavity,
J65 is the large connector to the left and J66, the large connector to
the right (13-position power receptacle housings with contacts).
t #10 ring (wire marker 26) is attached with a screw to +5V PT1 on the
right corner of the Analyzer backplane (as viewed from the front).
t #10 ring (wire marker 27) is attached with a screw to PT2 DIG GND
near the right edge of Analyzer backplane (as viewed from the front).
r P99, a 3 conductor MATE-N-LOK plug, is on the non-EMC cable only.

8.2-50 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer 8
Table 8.2-31 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card and Attached Cables (See Figure 8.2-31)

Item Part Number Description

4 6028288 Cable, laser fan and relay, flat ribbon with two 14 conductor female
connectors (labeled J92 and J32), 56 in. length
Connections:
r J92, female connector on this cable, is attached to the P92 male
connector on this circuit card.
r J32, female connector on this cable, is attached to the P32 male
connector on the Analyzer backplane.
5 6705199 Card, PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control
6 Six connectors (MATE-N-LOK four conductor plugs) provide power to the
PMTs, the side scatter diode, and the FS detector. Connectors are
interchangeable and may be inserted in J86, J87, J88, J89, J90, or J91.
Connections:
7000352 FRU, side scatter diode. The P2 connector attached to the SS detector is
typically installed on the J86 connector on this circuit card.
6028331 Cable, forward scatter with two connectors. P90 (4-conductor male
connector) is typically installed on the J90 female connector on this circuit
card; P1 (3-position single row housing), on the other end of this cable, is
attached to J1 on the FS detector.
7000197 FRU, fluorescence PMT, 300 nm to 800 nm spectral response. In a 4-color
Cytometer there are four PMTs; in a 3-color Cytometer, there are only three
PMTs. The P119 connector attached to each PMT is typically installed in the
J86, J87, J88, or J89 connector on this circuit card.
Note: On a 4-color system, an optional red sensitive PMT with a 300 nm
to 850 nm spectral response, PN 176402, is also available.
7 6028313 Cable, sensor power extension, with a 4-conductor MATE-N-LOK plug
housing on each end and a ground ring (wire marker 28)
Connections:
r P85 is attached to J85 on this circuit card; the other end, labeled P63, is
attached to J63 on the Analyzer backplane.
r #6 ring (with wire marker 28) and a grounding strap are attached to the
optical bench using a self-lock screw (#6-32 x 0.38 length, pan-head
with cone washer), PN 2852093. The grounding strap is also attached to
E30 on the Cytometer frame.
8 6028316 Cable, laser fan power extension, with a 4-conductor MATE-N-LOK plug
housing on each end
Connections: P93 is attached to J93 on this circuit card; the other end,
labeled P104, is attached to a bracket below the laser blower assembly.
9 6028315 Cable, Cyto interlock
Connections:
r J111 (2-position discrete wire receptacle housing with center latch) is
attached to P111 on this circuit card.
r 88 and 89 (terminal quick-connects) are attached to the interlock switch,
PN 5110031. The interlock switch has six terminals that are not in
sequential order - 88 is attached to terminal #2 and 89 is attached to
terminal #6.

PN 4237029G 8.2-51
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer

Figure 8.2-32 Flexible Duct Components and Assembly Instructions (See Table 8.2-32)

Step 1 Step 2
1
1
Remove outer covering Roll insulation tightly
and trim the width of around flex duct
the insulation

8"

Step 3 Step 4
Trimmed
insulation
3

Place
first
Outer covering

1
2
7318077B

Table 8.2-32 Flexible Duct Components and Assembly Instructions (See Figure 8.2-32)

Item Part Number Description

1 1018547 Insulation
2 2603060 Duct, flexible, 3 1/8 i.d. x 10-in. length, rectangular flange at one end
3 6011003 Tie wrap, nylon, 15-in. long, 0.19 in. wide, nylon

8.2-52 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables 8
8.3 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

List of Illustrations
This section contains exterior covers and related hardware for all Cytometer configurations.
Illustrations include the following:

r Exterior covers for an XL-MCL flow cytometer - Figure 8.3-1

r Exterior covers for an XL flow cytometer - Figure 8.3-2
r External cables for an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with Voltage-Specific Power
Supply, Figure 8.3-3
r External cables for an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with Universal Power Supply,
Figure 8.3-4

PN 4237029G 8.3-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables

Figure 8.3-1 XL-MCL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Table 8.3-1)

16

WA

1
15 Rear view

14

2
13

12

Coulter Epics XL • MCL

4
11

10 9 5

7
8
6

7
8
6 7029010G

8.3-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables 8
Table 8.3-1 XL-MCL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Figure 8.3-1)

Item Part Number Description

1 6807080 Cover, top, grey
6858129 Cover, top, black
Note: Attach using four sets of self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37-in. length,
pan-head), PN 2839039, and #6 flat washers, PN 2827147.
2 6807079 Cover, right-side, grey
6856494 Cover, right-side, black
3 6807084 Cover, filter, grey
6856735 Cover, filter, black
4 7000677 FRU, reagent drawer with slides assembly
Note: Order front panel separately - for grey flow cytometer order
PN 6807088; for black flow cytometer order PN 6855934.
5 6858988 Foot, rubber
Note: Use setscrew, PN 2810028, to attach foot to the Cytometer frame.
6 2851859 Latch, concealed pull-up catch and keeper, 1.9 x 1.1 x 0.3 in., black nylon
Note: The latch catches are attached to the Cytometer frame and latch
keepers, to the center front cover (filter cover). Use Figure 8.3-1 to verify
proper orientation of each latch catch and keeper.
7 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
8 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
9 7000678 FRU, sample station, manual, for XL-MCL Cytometer with grey covers
7000354 FRU, sample station, manual, for XL-MCL Cytometer with black covers
Note: See Figure 8.3-1 for an exploded view of components.
10 6807075 Push-button, for opening MCL upper base door, grey
6858700 Push-button, for opening MCL upper base door, black
11 7000676 FRU, MCL lower base cover, grey
7000199 FRU, MCL lower base cover, black
12 7000675 FRU, MCL door (upper cover), grey
7000376 FRU, MCL door (upper cover), black
13 6858616 Housing, MCL probe
14 6807085 Door, front panel display, grey
6856490 Door, front panel display, black
Note: Attach door using two 3-in. #5 swag hinges, PN 1021176.
Attach each hinge using four sets of self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37-in.
length, pan-head), PN 2839039, and #6 flat washers, PN 2827147.
15 6807076 Cover, left-side, for XL-MCL Cytometer, grey
6858522 Cover, left-side, for XL-MCL Cytometer, black
16 1025310 Cover, upper rear, grey
1018854 Cover, upper rear, black

PN 4237029G 8.3-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables

Figure 8.3-2 XL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Table 8.3-2)

12

WA

Rear view 1

11
2

10 LEVEL
3
SENSE

SHEATH
LOW
WASTE
FILL
CLEANSE
LOW

RUN

PRIME

CLEANSE
Coulter
Epics XL 4
9

5
6

7
8
6

6 3

7
8
6 7029173G

8.3-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables 8
Table 8.3-2 XL Cytometer Covers, Doors, and Latches (See Figure 8.3-2)

Item Part Number Description

1 6807080 Cover, top, grey
6858129 Cover, top, black
Note: Attach using four sets of self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37-in. length,
pan-head), PN 2839039, and #6 flat washers, PN 2827147.
2 6807079 Cover, right-side, grey
6856494 Cover, right-side, black
3 6807084 Cover, filter, grey
6856735 Cover, filter, black
4 7000677 FRU, reagent drawer with slides assembly
Note: Order front panel separately - for grey flow cytometer order
PN 6807089; for black flow cytometer order PN 6855934.
5 6858988 Foot, rubber
Note: Use setscrew, PN 2810028, to attach foot to the Cytometer frame.
6 2851859 Latch, concealed pull-up catch and keeper, 1.9 x 1.1 x 0.3 in., black nylon
Note: The latch catches are attached to the Cytometer frame and latch
keepers, to the center front cover (filter cover). Use Figure 8.3-2 to verify
proper orientation of each latch catch and keeper.
7 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
8 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
9 7000679 FRU, sample station, for XL Cytometer, grey
7000360 FRU, sample station, for XL Cytometer, black
Note: See Figure 8.5-3 for an exploded view of components.
10 6807074 Cover, left-side, for XL Cytometer, grey
6856727 Cover, left-side, for XL Cytometer, black
11 6807085 Door, front panel display, grey
6856490 Door, front panel display, black
Note: Attach door using two 3-in. #5 swag hinges, PN 1021176.
Attach each hinge using four sets of self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.37-in.
length, pan-head), PN 2839039, and #6 flat washers, PN 2827147.
12 1025310 Cover, upper rear, grey
1018854 Cover, upper rear, black

PN 4237029G 8.3-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables

Figure 8.3-3 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.3-3)
ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.
Cytometer
1 Workstation

MCL Option
TRANS

REC.

FLOWCELL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE WASTE

3
7

8
2
6

5 Voltage-Specific
Power Supply
AUX POWER ON

SYSTEM
PRESSURE
ON/OFF

VACUUM WASTE LEVEL

ON

OFF
WASTE

WASTE VENT
LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER
MAX 1800 WATTS MAX 1500 WATTS 4

7029277G

Table 8.3-3 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.3-3)

Item Part Number Description

1 6028371 Cable, fiber optic, two 200/230 µm connectors on each end of the cable;
connects Cytometer and Workstation (via Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II
card in the tower computer); used only on EMC instruments
Connections: Refer to the Heading Fiber Optic Interface Cables under
Heading G.6 for attachment details.
2 Cable, CYT12
6028716 EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
fiber optic cable that connects Workstation (via Opto Transprocessor
EXMEM II card in the tower computer) and Voltage-Specific Power Supply
(via CYT12 connector)
Connections: Refer to the Heading CYT12 Cable under Heading G.6 for
attachment details.
6028304 Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)

8.3-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables 8
Table 8.3-3 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.3-3)

Item Part Number Description

3 Cable, MCL power, 25-position subminiature D plug (male) housing to
25-position subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, 8.5 ft. long,
connects MCL assembly and Voltage-Specific Power Supply on an
XL-MCL only
6028695 EMC version (for XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
6027108 Non-EMC version (for XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
7000466 Plug, MCL dummy, for XL system only, plug is attached to the MCL
connector on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (also referred
to as plug jumper terminator or MCL CYT12 shorting plug)
Connections: Refer to the Heading Make Appropriate MCL Connections
under Heading G.6 for attachment details.
4 6028530 Line cord, 125 Vac / 15 A, shielded, 14 AWG stranded, NEMA 5-15 plug to a
stripped end, 9-ft. 10-in. length including connector, provides connection
to ac source power for Voltage-Specific Power Supply
Connections: Refer to the Heading Power Cords under Heading G.6 for
attachment details.
5 6028302 Cable, power module control, 25-pin subminiature D plug (male) housing to
25-pin subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, RS232 serial cable
assembly, 10 ft. long, connects Cytometer and Voltage-Specific Power
Supply (via Power Module Control II card)
Connections: Refer to the Heading Power Module Control Cable under
Heading G.6 for attachment details.
6 Cable, analog power, 17 signal / 7 power subminiature D plug (male)
housing to 8-position subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, 8.5 ft.
long, connects Cytometer and Voltage-Specific Power Supply
6028696 EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
6027106 Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
Connections: Refer to the Heading Analog Cable under Heading G.6 for
attachment details.
7 Cable, logic power, 8-position subminiature D plug (male) housing to
8-position subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, 8.5 ft. long,
connects Cytometer and Voltage-Specific Power Supply
6028694 EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
6027105 Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
Connections: Refer to the Heading Logic Cable under Heading G.6 for
attachment details.
8 175579 Cable, laser umbilical; attached to the Argon air-cooled laser head (FRU) and
cannot be ordered as a separate part, connects the Argon laser head in the
Cytometer with the Argon laser power supply inside the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply
Connections: Refer to the Heading Laser Umbilical Cable under Heading G.6
for attachment detail

PN 4237029G 8.3-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables

Figure 8.3-4 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.3-4)
ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

Cytometer
1 Workstation

MulitSync LCD1700M+
CAUTION
AVIS
ACHTUNG FC

ADVARSEL
WARNING

MCL Option MODEL

SERIAL NO.
REV.
LCD1700M+

1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

TRANS

REC.

FLOWCELL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE WASTE

8
7
2

6 ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1

1 2
Universal
13 1
Power Supply
WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

5
4 7029276G

Table 8.3-4 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.3-4)

Item Part Number Description

1 6028371 Cable, fiber optic, two 200/230 µm connectors on each end of the cable;
connects Cytometer and Workstation (via Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II
card in tower computer)
Connections: Refer to the Heading Fiber Optic Interface Cables under
Heading 3.6 for attachment details.

8.3-8 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables 8
Table 8.3-4 External Cables - Flow Cytometer with Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.3-4)

Item Part Number Description

2 6028695 Cable, MCL power, 25-position subminiature D plug (male) housing to
25-position subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, 8.5 ft. long,
connects MCL assembly and Voltage-Specific Power Supply on an
XL-MCL system only
7000466 Plug, MCL dummy, for XL system only, plug is attached to the MCL
connector on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (also referred
to as plug jumper terminator or MCL CYT12 shorting plug)
Connections: Refer to the Heading Make Appropriate MCL Connections
under Heading 3.6 for attachment details.
3 6028716 Cable, fiber optic, 200/230 µm connector on each end of the cable, connects
Workstation (via Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the tower
computer) and Universal Power Supply (via CYT12 connector, U2, on the
Power Control 3 card)
Connections: Refer to the Heading CYT12 Cable under Heading 3.6 for
attachment details.
4 6028302 Cable, power module control, 25-pin subminiature D plug (male) housing to
25-pin subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, RS232 serial cable
assembly, 10 ft. long, connects Cytometer and Universal Power Supply
(via the Power Control 3 card)
Connections: Refer to the Heading Power Module Control Cable under
Heading 3.6 for attachment details.
5 629191 Line cord, 18 A / 100-120 Vac / 50 to 60 Hz with an IEC 60320 C-19
connector and Nema 5-20 plug, provides connection to ac source power
for UPS
626732 Line cord, 16 A / 220-240 Vac / 50 to 60 Hz with an IEC 320 C-19 connector
and Nema 6-20 plug, provides connection to ac source power for UPS
Connections: Refer to the Heading Power Cords under Heading 3.6 for
attachment details.
6 175579 Cable, laser umbilical; attached to the Argon air-cooled laser head (FRU) and
cannot be ordered as a separate part, connects the Argon laser head in the
Cytometer with the Argon laser power supply inside the Universal Power
Supply
Connections: Refer to the Heading Laser Umbilical Cable under Heading 3.6
for attachment detail
7 6028694 Cable, logic power, 8-position subminiature D plug (male) housing to
8-position subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, 8.5 ft. long,
connects Cytometer and Universal Power Supply
Connections: Refer to the Heading Logic Cable under Heading 3.6 for
attachment details.
8 6028696 Cable, analog power, 17 signal / 7 power subminiature D plug (male)
housing to 8-position subminiature D receptacle (female) housing, 8.5 ft.
long, connects Cytometer and Universal Power Supply
Connections: Refer to the Heading Analog Cable under Heading 3.6 for
attachment details.

PN 4237029G 8.3-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Cytometer Exterior Covers and Cables

8.3-10 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers 8
8.4 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

List of Illustrations
This section contains parts, including covers, related to the MCL sample handler. Illustrations
include the following:

r Anchor illustration for MCL components - Figure 8.4-1

t Vertical plate components - Figure 8.4-2
t Lifter air cylinder and attachments - Figure 8.4-3
t Probe up/down air cylinder and attachments - Figure 8.4-4
r Cables
t Attached to the MCL CPU card - Figure 8.4-5
t Attached to the Bar-Code Decoder card - Figure 8.4-6
r Carousel and related accessories - Figure 8.4-8
r MCL covers and related hardware - Figure 8.4-7

PN 4237029G 8.4-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers

Figure 8.4-1 MCL Option Assembly (See Table 8.4-1) Figure Reference
1 2 A Vertical plate components,
Figure 8.4-2

Behind MCL
Vertical Plate 3

4 6
7
5
21 20 19

18

8
9
10

12

11

13
15
14

17
7029163F
16

8.4-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers 8
Table 8.4-1 MCL Option Assembly (See Figure 8.4-1)

Item Part Number Description

7000433 FRU, MCL option assembly
1 2016561 Card, Bar-Code Decoder
2 7000042 FRU, visible laser diode scanner (bar-code reader)
Note: Attach the scanner head to the MCL vertical plate using four
machine screws (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, pan-head), PN 2806009.
3 6706409 Card, Motor Filter, EMC
4 7000443 FRU, MCL lifter assembly
5 7000579 FRU, MCL vortexer foot assembly
6 2806137 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.38 in. length, FL82 flat-head)
7 7701140 Hub, carousel (also referred to as indexing hub)
8 7000189 FRU, MCL carousel base assembly
9 1022128 Block, stop
10 2851989 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.38 in. length, hex-head), self-lock by nylon strip
lock installed on the screw thread
11 2804083 Screw, machine (#4-40 x 0.25 in. length, HSC-head)
12 2851975 Screw, machine, knurled (#4-40 x 0.75 in. length, hex socket head)
13 6232570 Cylinder, air, in/out
14 6232360 Fitting, elbow, adjustable, 10-32 ports, O-ring sealed brass miniature, for
bulkhead mounting
15 6232637 Choke, pneumatic, 0.0102 diameter, 0.062 barb and 10-32 threaded
connections, brass
Note: Choke must be oriented as shown when installation is complete.
16 2523700 Coupling joint, cylinder rod end, 8-32 fastening, black oxide
Note: Coupling has an internal hex for tightening.
17 2839057 Screw, self-lock (#8-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
18 2852321 Screw, stainless steel setscrew with locking element, (#6-32 x 0.25 in.
length, half dog point, hex head)
19 7000555 FRU, MCL solenoids
20 7000430 FRU, MCL tube rotator assembly
Note: Attach the tube rotator assembly to the MCL vertical plate using two
hex screws (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, HSC-head), PN 2851395.
21 6705712 Card, MCL CPU

PN 4237029G 8.4-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers

Figure 8.4-2 MCL Vertical Plate Components (See Table 8.4-2)

1
3 4
2
5

17
8
16

Front View

12 15 10

14

11
Rear View
13 12 7029164G

8.4-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers 8
Table 8.4-2 MCL Vertical Plate Components (See Figure 8.4-2)

Item Part Number Description

1 2515109 Spring, extension, 0.250 o.d. x 1.38 in. coiled length, 0.026 in. wire
diameter, rated at 1.42 lbs/in.
2 7000439 FRU, probe sensor cable assembly
3 1021708 Sensor flag, MCL probe
4 1021652 Holder, intro rod
Note: Attach the intro rod holder to the probe actuator bracket using two
machine screws (pan-head, #6-32 x 0.25 in. length), PN 2806009.
5 6858663 Probe, MCL sample
6 1021797 Gasket, ferrule
7 2837022 Clip, MCL sample probe retainer
8 2804044 Screw, machine (#4-40 x 0.38 in. length, FL82 flat-head)
9 7000456 FRU, MCL sample head
10 7000446 FRU, MCL probe slide assembly (low friction precision ball slide assembly
with two carriages)
11 2851978 Screw, shoulder (#6-32 x 0.188 length, 0.500 long shoulder, hex-head)
12 2851952 Screw, shoulder (#8-32 x 0.188 length, 0.750 long shoulder)
13 2851953 Spacer, hole, #10 (0.194 i.d. x 0.250 o.d. x 0.360 in. long), aluminum
14 6232591 Cylinder, lifter air, see Figure 8.4-3 for an exploded view that includes
attachments
15 6232595 Cylinder, probe up/down air, see Figure 8.4-4 for an exploded view that
includes attachments
16 7000438 FRU, head sensor cable assembly
17 1021706 Sensor flag, MCL guide cup

PN 4237029G 8.4-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers

Figure 8.4-3 Lifter Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Table 8.4-3)

2
7318083A

Table 8.4-3 Lifter Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Figure 8.4-3)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232591 Cylinder, lifter air, double acting, 250 psi, 0.56 bore, stud mount each end
Note: If present, remove and discard the large nut on each end before
installing.
2 6216002 Fitting, miniature, 10-32 threaded, 10-32 tap, adjustable, brass
3 6232637 Choke, pneumatic, 0.0102 diameter, 0.062 barb and 10-32 threaded
connections, brass
Note: Choke must be oriented as shown when installation is complete.
4 6232590 Cylinder, piston rod clevis for 0.56 bore, 250 psi cylinder, 10-32 threaded
with hex nut for mounting

8.4-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.4-4 Probe Up/Down Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Table 8.4-4)

1
2

7318084A

Table 8.4-4 Probe Up/Down Air Cylinder and Attachments (See Figure 8.4-4)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232637 Choke, pneumatic, 0.0102 diameter, 0.062 barb and 10-32 threaded
connections, brass
Note: Choke must be oriented as shown when installation is complete.
2 6216002 Fitting, miniature, 10-32 threaded, 10-32 tap, adjustable, brass
3 6232595 Cylinder, air, probe up/down, double acting, 150 psi, 0.375 bore, front stud
and rear clevis mount
Note: Remove the large nut from the cylinder. Make sure you replace the
small cylinder rod nut before installing.

PN 4237029G 8.4-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers

Figure 8.4-5 Cables Attached to the MCL CPU Card (See Table 8.4-5)
1

5 4 7318420B

8.4-8 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers 8
Table 8.4-5 Cables Attached to the MCL CPU Card (See Figure 8.4-5)

Item Part Number Description

6705712 Card, MCL CPU
Note: To attach circuit card to the MCL frame, use seven sets of self-lock
screws (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, pan-head), PN 2839009, and #6 flat
washers (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness), PN 2827147.
1 6004071 Cable, parallel interface, flat ribbon, 46 in. long with a 50-position connector
on each end
Connections: P7 is attached to J7 on this circuit card; other end (J68) is
attached to P68 on the MCL Interface card, PN 6705700, in the Data
Acquisition card cage.
2 6028432 Cable, serial scanner interface, flat ribbon, with 25-position subminiature D
plug connector (P9) on one end and a 26-position receptacle (J1) on the
other end
Connections: P9 is attached to J9 on this circuit card; other end (J1) is
attached to P6 on the Bar-Code Decoder card.
3 6028428 Cable, MCL CPU main, 50-position receptacle (P10) to two high density
26-position subminiature D connectors (J138 and P139)
Connections: P10 is attached to J10 on this circuit card; on the other end:
r J138 is attached to P138 (another high density cable, PN 6028423)
associated with three opto switches and the carousel stepper motor,
PN 6858707.
r P139 is attached to J139 (another high density cable, PN 6028422)
associated with the probe, head, and LV (lifter/vortex) sensors.
t J17 of this cable attaches to another cable, PN 6028424, for the MCL
door open detect switch (interlock).
t J16 of this cable attaches to the MCL lift motor, PN 6858538.
4 7000555 FRU, MCL solenoids
Connections: P14 is attached to J14 on this circuit card; other end is
attached to 4 solenoids. These solenoids are needed to operate the carousel,
sample probe, lifter/vortex mechanism, and rotator.
5 Cable, MCL dc Cyto, subminiature D connector (P137) on one end and
9-position mini universal MATE-N-LOK plug housing (P1) on the other
6028699 EMC version (for XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
6028431 Non-EMC version (for XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
Connections: P1 is attached to J1 on this circuit card; other end (P137) is
the external connector for the MCL assembly to which the external MCL
power cable (EMC version, PN 6028695; non-EMC version, PN 6027108) is
attached.

PN 4237029G 8.4-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers

Figure 8.4-6 Cables Attached to the Bar-Code Decoder Card (See Table 8.4-6)

7029279G

8.4-10 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers 8
Table 8.4-6 Cables Attached to the Bar-Code Decoder Card (See Figure 8.4-6)

Item Part Number Description

2016561 Card, Bar-Code Decoder
Note: To attach the circuit card to the MCL frame:
r At the top left corner, place a #6 flat white nylon washer (0.149 i.d. x
0.250 o.d. x 0.031 in. thickness), PN 2827131 behind the screw
opening on the circuit card and use a machine screw (#6-32 x 0.25 in.
length, BND-head, white nylon) to secure the circuit card to the MCL
frame.
r At the lower left corner, use a self-lock screw (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length,
pan-head), PN 2839009, and #6 flat washer (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x
0.036 in. thickness), PN 2827147 to secure the circuit card to the
MCL frame.
1 6003011 Cable, interface between the Bar-Code Decoder card and the bar-code
reader head (also referred to as the visible laser diode scanner)
Connection: P1 is attached to J1 on this circuit card; the other end (P2) is
attached to a connector on the bar-code reader head, PN 2016456.
2 6028432 Cable, serial scanner interface, flat ribbon, with 25-position subminiature D
plug connector (P9) on one end and a 26-position receptacle (J1) on the
other end
Connections: J1 is attached to this circuit card; other end (P9) is attached to
J9 on the MCL CPU card, PN 6705712.

PN 4237029G 8.4-11
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers

Figure 8.4-7 MCL Covers and Associated Hardware (See Table 8.4-7)
8
1
7
25
24

23

22
3
21

20

17

8 7
6

18
6 7 8 16

15
14
19

5
6 4
7
8
9

10

12
11
6
12 7
13
7029166F

8.4-12 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers 8
Table 8.4-7 MCL Covers and Associated Hardware (See Figure 8.4-7)

Item Part Number Description

1 1021735 Tray, MCL drip
2 6807078 MCL door (upper cover), grey
6858519 MCL door (upper cover), black
3 1021737 MCL upper window
Note: Before installing the window in the upper cover, remove the paper
covering from the bottom side only (leave the paper on the top side),
apply a thin line of epoxy, PN 1615132, to the rim of the upper cover,
install the window, allow the epoxy to set, then remove the paper covering
from the top of the window.
4 2808099 Screw, machine (#8-32 x 0.75 in. length, black FL82 flat-head)
5 6858657 Bracket, hinged machine, attaches MCL upper and lower bases
6 2827159 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
7 2826059 Washer, split-lock, #6 (0.14 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. x 0.031 in. thickness)
8 2806201 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.38 in. length, HSC button-head)
9 6011001 Tie wrap, nylon, 4 in. long, 0.1 in. wide, nylon
10 6011019 Mount, wire tie, 0.51 in. length x 0.33 in. width, for use with #6 screw
11 2806104 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, UF82 flat-head)
12 2851859 Latch, concealed pull-up catch and keeper, 1.9 x 1.1 x 0.3 in., black nylon
Note: Only latch catches are shown in Figure 8.4-7. Use Figure 8.4-7 to
verify proper orientation of each latch catch. The latch keeper that
connects with the front latch catch is located on the left side of the manual
sample station. The latch keeper that connects to the back latch catch is
located on the MCL frame.
13 2806182 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.31 in. length, pan-head)
14 6028424 Cable assembly, MCL door open detector
15 2802006 Screw, machine (#2-56 x 0.19 in. length, pan-head)
16 2851998 Nut, thumb, diamond knurl (#6-32 UNC x 0.500 o.d. x 0.625 in. length),
black dichromate
17 1021764 Bracket, gas cylinder upper
18 6858666 Cylinder, MCL gas (may also be referred to as MCL bay cylinder)
19 6858635 Bracket, MCL lower base
20 6858636 MCL drip pan flange
21 2430416 Label, caution, interlock defeat
22 2430417 Label, caution, laser radiation
23 2806137 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.38 in. length, FL82 flat-head)
24 6216345 Gasket, #10 black, ethylene propylene
25 2827056 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.375 o.d. x 0.031 in. thickness)

PN 4237029G 8.4-13
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - MCL Components and Covers

Figure 8.4-8 Carousel and Related Accessories (See Table 8.4-8)

4

2
CH (5%
H (5 %
EEAAC RTTSS
3 C LLE
E AAN ING
NIN OO
G:: H
UUSSHO OLLD
E )
D BBLLD
) A
ANN TT
PPAAR
D 99 IO
IO N
N ,,
U S
S EELL CPPAAR
R TT H
H O
L O R ITE SSO
RIT O LLUU
O
RO OU 11 PPO H L
CH LL W H
H RYY .
.
CCAAR N OFFM OC WITIT SSAAR
ION
UTTIO HYY O
H USSEE N ECCEESSEE WWITITHH
OLLU OD IUMC
DIU RROU IF NE
REE AA
SSO
OFF SS
O
INSSHEE CAA R U IF
UBB E LY RRININSSTEERR
AR IONNO RIN
R,, R LY R
HTTLY
LY
IATTLEEEAAR WAAT
REEPPSSAO
PPR UTTIO
OLLU AAT
T EER L
LIG
IG M E
E DD IA R W
W
W IMM
IM CL
C

7029280G
2

Table 8.4-8 Carousel and Related Accessories (See Figure 8.4-8)

Item Part Number Description

1 6806734 Carousel, MCL
2 2430186 Labels, bar-code, tube numbers designating position within the carousel,
sheet of 31 individual labels numbered 2 through 32
3 2430185 Labels, bar-code, carousel numbers, sheet of 99 individual die cut labels
numbered 1 through 99
4 6859297 Adaptor, cleanse

8.4-14 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL) 8
8.5 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL)
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

List of Illustrations
This section contains manual sample station components, including covers, for both the
XL-MCL and XL flow cytometers. Illustrations include the following:

r Manual sample station for XL-MCL flow cytometer

t External components - Figure 8.5-1
t Internal components - Figure 8.5-2
t Mechanical assembly - Figure 8.5-4
r Manual sample station for XL flow cytometer
t Components (external and internal) - Figure 8.5-3
t Mechanical assembly - Figure 8.5-4

PN 4237029G 8.5-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL)

Figure 8.5-1 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Front View (See Table 8.5-1)
1

2
3
12
4

11

10

8
7
6 7029170F

Note: See Figure 8.5-2 for the rear view of the manual sample station on an XL-MCL flow
cytometer.

8.5-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL) 8
Table 8.5-1 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Front View (See Figure 8.5-1)

Item Part Number Description

7000678 FRU, manual sample station, for XL-MCL Cytometer with grey covers
7000354 FRU, manual sample station, for XL-MCL Cytometer with black covers
1 6807081 Sample station, for an XL-MCL with grey covers
6858518 Sample station, for an XL-MCL with black covers
Note: Before attaching sample station to the Cytometer, make sure the
flow cell cover and filter shield are attached to the Cytometer.
2 2822050 Nut, hex (#2-56 UNC x 0.187 AF x 0.066 in. thickness)
3 2826001 Washer, split-lock, #2 (0.09 i.d. x 0.17 o.d. x 0.02 in. thickness)
4 2827095 Washer, flat, #2 (0.094 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. x 0.02 in. thickness)
5 1019621 Plate, magnet catcher
Note: Attach using instant adhesive, PN 1601082. Apply only one drop.
6 1021734 Data entry, membrane, overlay and switch, for XL-MCL
7 6858842 Door, XL-MCL sample station, with handle and magnet attached
8 6858841 MCL push cylinder, for sample station door
9 2523737 MCL compression spring, for XL-MCL sample station door, rated 8.1 lbs per
inch, (0.148 in. diameter x 0.75 in. length x 0.021 in. width)
10 7000444 FRU, MCL sample station door assembly
11 1021696 Display, sample cup membrane
12 6856945 Bracket, door angle
Note: Verify proper orientation before attaching.

PN 4237029G 8.5-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL)

Figure 8.5-2 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Rear View (See Table 8.5-2)

8
6
7
9
8

2
10

12
11

2 3
7029168F

Note: See Figure 8.5-1 for the front view of the manual sample station on an XL-MCL flow
cytometer.

8.5-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL) 8
Table 8.5-2 Manual Sample Station for XL-MCL Cytometer, Rear View (See Figure 8.5-2)

Item Part Number Description

7000678 FRU, manual sample station, for XL-MCL Cytometer with grey covers
7000354 FRU, manual sample station, for XL-MCL Cytometer with black covers
1 2851859 Latch, concealed pull-up catch and keeper, 1.9 x 1.1 x 0.3 in., black nylon
Note: Only the latch catch is shown in Figure 8.5-2, item 1. Use
Figure 8.5-2 to verify proper orientation of this latch catch.
2 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
3 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
4 6807075 MCL push-button
Note: MCL push-button must be properly positioned before inserting the
shoulder screw, PN 2852256
5 2852256 Screw, shoulder (#4-40 x 0.156 length, 0.560 long shoulder, hex socket
head)
Note: MCL push-button, PN 6807075, must be properly positioned before
inserting this shoulder screw.
6 1021765 Holder, MCL spring
7 2523733 Spring, extension, 0.180 o.d. x 0.50 in. coiled length, 0.026 in. wire
diameter, rated at 20.2 lbs/in.
Note: Hook spring first to the spring holder, PN 1021765, and then to the
post on the MCL push-button, PN 6807075. Make sure the push-button
does not bind on the plastic.
8 2839024 Screw, self-lock (#4-40 x 0.25 in. length, pan-head)
9 6705742 Card, Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2
10 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
11 2851859 Latch, concealed pull-up catch and keeper, 1.9 x 1.1 x 0.3 in., black nylon
Note: Only the latch keeper is shown in Figure 8.5-2, item 11. Use
Figure 8.5-2 to verify proper orientation of the latch keeper. This latch
keeper connects with the front latch catch on the MCL lower base cover.
See Figure 8.4-7.
12 6805649 Bracket, MCL sample station

PN 4237029G 8.5-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL)

Figure 8.5-3 Manual Sample Station for XL Cytometer (See Table 8.5-3)

3
2

Rear view

5
5

13
12 11 10 9

7029165F 8

8.5-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL) 8
Table 8.5-3 Manual Sample Station for XL Cytometer (See Figure 8.5-3)

Item Part Number Description

7000679 FRU, sample station assembly, for XL Cytometer with grey covers
7000360 FRU, sample station assembly, for XL Cytometer with black covers
Note: Before attaching sample station to the Cytometer, make sure the
flow cell cover and filter shield are attached to the Cytometer.
1 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
2 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
3 6705193 Card, Front Panel LED and Switch Input
4 6807083 Sample station, for an XL with grey covers
6856869 Sample station, for an XL with black covers
Note: Before attaching sample station to the Cytometer, make sure the
flow cell cover and filter shield are attached to the Cytometer.
5 2806162 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.44 in. length, FL82 flat-head)
6 1016815 Data entry, overlay and membrane switch sample cup XL
Note: Before installation, remove paper backing.
7 2523394 Magnet, disk, rare earth, 0.187 o.d. x 0.063 thickness
Note: Before installation, remove the sample station door and lay the door
near the edge of a table with the handle positioned over the edge. With the
door flat, apply one drop of instant adhesive, PN 1601082 inside the hole
behind the handle then immediately install the magnet in the hole. Be very
careful not to smear the adhesive.
8 6858840 Door, XL sample station, with attached handle
9 1019621 Plate, magnet catcher
Note: Attach using instant adhesive, PN 1601082. Apply only one drop.
10 2822050 Nut, hex (#2-56 UNC x 0.187 AF x 0.066 in. thickness)
11 2826001 Washer, split-lock, #2 (0.09 i.d. x 0.17 o.d. x 0.02 in. thickness)
12 2827095 Washer, flat, #2 (0.094 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. x 0.02 in. thickness)
13 6856945 Bracket, door angle

PN 4237029G 8.5-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL)

Figure 8.5-4 Mechanical Assembly for Manual Sample Station, XL-MCL or XL (See Table 8.5-4)
1 2
7

3 8
4
5
20 9
10
25 6

24

11
21

20

19
12

J115
9
10

18
13

14
17

22

15

23
16

7029162F

8.5-8 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL) 8
Table 8.5-4 Mechanical Assembly for Manual Sample Station, XL-MCL or XL (See Figure 8.5-4)

Item Part Number Description

1 1020914 Shaft, 0.375 square
2 1020873 Arm. probe
3 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
4 2826035 Washer, split-lock, #6 (0.14 i.d. x 0.25 o.d. x 0.03 in. thickness)
5 2806128 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.75 in. length, pan-head)
6 6858174 Probe, sample
7 1022369 Stud, ball (10-32 x 0.50 length)
Note: Apply one drop of adhesive sealant, PN 1601065, to screw threads
before insertion.
8 2821018 Nut, self-lock (10-32 x 0.375 AF x 0.156 in. thickness)
9 2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall
10 6232086 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
11 6028330 Cable assembly, mini-universal MATE-N-LOK 3-position plug to Hall Effect
sensor
12 6232575 Cylinder, air, double-acting with single-end spring-return, universal mount,
0.63 bore, 3.25 stroke, 150 psi maximum pressure
13 2822016 Nut, hex (#10-32 UNF x 0.375 AF x 0.130 in. thickness)
14 2523743 Socket joint, quick-disconnect with spring loaded sleeve, for 0.253-inch
diameter ball stud, stainless steel
15 1020897 Holder, finger
16 2806200 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 1.00 in length, HSC head)
17 1021679 Holder, sample tube
18 7000351 FRU, manual sample head
19 1020910 Plate, top
20 2827146 Washer, flat, #4 (0.125 i.d. x 0.250 o.d. x 0.036 thickness)
21 2839025 Screw, self-lock (#4-40 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
22 1005697 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d.
23 6858247 Cover, sample station
24 2804039 Screw, machine (#4-40 x 0.75 in. length, pan-head)
25 2826002 Washer, split-lock, #4 (0.12 i.d. x 0.20 o.d. x 0.25 in. thickness)

PN 4237029G 8.5-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Manual Sample Stations (XL-MCL and XL)

8.5-10 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation 8
8.6 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

List of Illustrations
ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary
from that shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the
functions performed by that circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may
not be required by that customer.

This section contains parts related to the Workstation. Illustrations include the following:

r FlowCentre II Workstation - Figure 8.6-1

r FlowCentre Workstation - Figure 8.6-2

For a list of available software, see Table 8.1-7.

PN 4237029G 8.6-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation

Figure 8.6-1 FlowCentre II Workstation (See Table 8.6-1)

ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

2 3 4

7 6 5

13
12

11

10
7029111F
Rear view

8.6-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation 8
Table 8.6-1 FlowCentre II Workstation (See Figure 8.6-1)

Item Part Number Description

1 2016972 Drive, diskette, 3.5 in., 1.44 MB, white
2 175742 Drive, CD-ROM, 8X minimum, internal IDE
2016879 Kit, CD-ROM recordable drive, internal, 650 MB capacity, 16X read speed,
6X write speed, and 4X rewrite speed
3 2016874 Computer, Pentium III processor, 550 MHz minimum, referred to as
FlowCentre II Tower Computer, also includes PN 2016876 (mouse) and
PN 2016881 (keyboard)
4 2016938 Monitor, 17-inch display, flat screen
5 2016725 Mouse pad
6 2016876 Mouse pointing device, PS/2 scroll point
7 2016881 Keyboard, 104-key minimum, AT®/PS Windows 95/98
8 2016919 Power Supply, ATX power supply with PFC (power factor correction) for self
adjustment and regulation, voltage range 90 to 264 Vac, manufactured by
3Y Power Technology Model YM-6042A
9 175741 Fan, chassis
10 6706394 Card, Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II, EMC, 3 fiber connectors
6705355 Card, Opto Transprocessor EXMEM, non-EMC, 2 fiber connectors
(not shown)
Note: Cards may be used in the FlowCentre II tower computer,
PN 2016874, or FlowCentre desktop computer, PN 2016753.
11 2016971 Card, PCI Sound
12 177846 Card, 3Com® Combo Network Interface, mode 1 3C905 combo that
includes 3 types of connectors
177847 Card, 3Com® 10/100 Managed Network Interface, model 3C906SCX-TX-M
with only one connector - RJ45 (not shown)
13 2016970 Card, PCI Video
Not shown 2016963 Drive, hard, 20 GB minimum, 7200 RPM IDE HDD
Note: Drive may be used in the FlowCentre II tower computer,
PN 2016874, or FlowCentre desktop computer, PN 2016753.
Not shown 2016969 Memory, 128 MB, PC 100 SDRAM, ECC correctable, DIMM module
Not shown 2016892 ROMLock, special connector for use with EXPO32 Cytometer Acquisition
software

PN 4237029G 8.6-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation

Figure 8.6-2 FlowCentre Workstation (See Table 8.6-2)

ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

1 2 3

F lo w C e n tr e

7 6 5

Rear view

7029221F

13 12 11 10 9 8

8.6-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation 8
Table 8.6-2 FlowCentre Workstation (See Figure 8.6-2)

Item Part Number Description

1 2016753 Computer, Atlas PCI III Pentium 200 processor, referred to as FlowCentre
Computer, also includes PN 2016665 (mouse) and PN 2016758
(keyboard)
2 2016962 Drive, diskette, 3.5 in., 1.44 MB, black
3 2016959 Drive, CD-ROM, 8X minimum, internal IDE
4 2016938 Monitor, 17-inch display, flat screen
5 2016725 Mouse pad
6 2016665 Mouse pointing device, PS/2 compatible
7 2016758 Keyboard, 104-key minimum, AT®/PS Windows 95, black
8 6706394 Card, Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II, EMC, 3 fiber connectors
6705355 Card, Opto Transprocessor EXMEM, non-EMC, 2 fiber connectors
(not shown)
Note: Cards may be used in the FlowCentre II tower computer,
PN 2016874, or FlowCentre desktop computer, PN 2016753.
9 N/A Card, PCI Sound, replacement card not available
10 N/A Card, Modem (may not be found in all FlowCentre computers)
11 N/A Card, 3 Com Ethernet, replacement card not available
12 2016974 Card, PCI Video
13 2016977 Power Supply, with EMI shielding assembly
Not shown 2016963 Drive, hard, 20 GB minimum, 7200 RPM IDE HDD
Note: Drive may be used in the FlowCentre II tower computer,
PN 2016874, or FlowCentre desktop computer, PN 2016753.
Not shown 2016961 Fan, internal chassis
Not shown 2016973 Memory, 16 MB, 70 NS tin-plated SIMM
Not shown 2016960 Promise, Ultra 66 IDE PCI Controller with cable
Not shown 2016892 ROMLock, special connector for use with EXPO32 Cytometer Acquisition
software

PN 4237029G 8.6-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Workstation

8.6-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
8.7 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

ATTENTION: In the field, two versions of each Power Supply module exist - an original
non-EMC version and a newer EMC version. The EMC version of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply contains circuit cards that protect the internal system from high voltage transients that
may occur on the ac voltage input provided by the laboratory’s power source.
r An XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a serial number Z09062 or lower has a non-EMC
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
r An XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a serial number Z09063 or higher has an EMC
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.

List of Illustrations
This section contains parts, including covers, related to the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
Illustrations include the following:

r Cover, door, latches, and casters - Figure 8.7-14

r Front panel components - Figure 8.7-1
t Filters (vacuum and air) with related components - Figure 8.7-7
t Front panel including Voltage Supply Monitor card and hardware - Figure 8.7-4
t System pressure adjustment knob and related components - Figure 8.7-6
t System pressure gauge and related components - Figure 8.7-5
t System vacuum gauge and related components - Figure 8.7-8
t Vacuum trap and related components - Figure 8.7-2
t Water trap (air/water filter separator) and related components - Figure 8.7-3
r Left-side compartment (view with cover removed) - Figure 8.7-10
t VL32, VL30, and VL31 - Figure 8.7-11
r Rear panel components - Figure 8.7-12
t Box fan with related hardware - Figure 8.7-13
r Right-side compartment (view with cover removed) - Figure 8.7-9
r Waste container - Figure 8.7-15

PN 4237029G 8.7-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-1 Front Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.7-1)
1 2 3

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
AIR
FILTER 30
PSI

SYS SYS
MCL POWER
VAC PRESS

PRESS
ADJ

8 7 6 5
4
7029134F

8.7-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.7-1 Front Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.7-1)

Item Part Number Description

1 2603058 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness
2 6232724 Trap, vacuum, with miniature polycarbonate bowl, see Figure 8.7-2 for an
exploded view that includes attachments
3 6232725 Filter, water trap (air/water filter separator), 5 micron, see Figure 8.7-3 for
an exploded view that includes attachments
4 6705720 Card, Voltage Supply Monitor, see Figure 8.7-4 for an exploded view that
includes attachments
5 6232189 Gauge, 0 to 60 psi, for monitoring system pressure, panel mount, see
Figure 8.7-5 for an exploded view that includes attachments
6 6208005 Valve, pressure relief, see Figure 8.7-6 for an exploded view that includes
attachments
7 6232561 Filter, gas, hydrophobic, 0.2 micon, disposable plastic, see Figure 8.7-7 for
an exploded view that includes attachments
8 6232183 Gauge, 0 to 30 in. Hg, for monitoring system vacuum, panel mount, see
Figure 8.7-8 for an exploded view that includes attachments

PN 4237029G 8.7-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Table 8.7-2)

7029135F

Table 8.7-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-2)

Item Part Number Description

1 6216128 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MNPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
2 6232724 Trap, vacuum, with miniature polycarbonate bowl

8.7-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.7-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See Table 8.7-3)
1

7029136F

Table 8.7-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-3)

Item Part Number Description

1 6216128 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MNPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
2 6232725 Filter, water trap (air/water filter separator), 5 micron
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across lower threads
before attaching the bottom fitting, PN 6232214.
3 6232214 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 FPT, nickel-plated brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across lower threads
of the water trap filter, PN 6232725, before attaching the fitting. Fitting
must be oriented as shown after tightening.

PN 4237029G 8.7-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-4 Front Panel including Voltage Supply Monitor Card and Hardware (See Table 8.7-4)

4
3
2
1

7029137F

Table 8.7-4 Front Panel including Voltage Supply Monitor Card and Hardware (See Figure 8.7-4)

Item Part Number Description

1 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
2 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
3 6705720 Card, Voltage Supply Monitor
4 2843032 Spacer, hole, 0.140 i.d. x 0.250 o.d. x 0.250 in. length
5 2851080 Grommet, 0.375 i.d. x 0.560 o.d., nylon

8.7-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.7-5 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.7-5)

7029138F

Table 8.7-5 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-5)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232214 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 FPT, nickel-plated brass
Note: Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
2 6232189 Gauge, 0 to 60 psi, for monitoring system pressure, 1.5-inch diameter,
panel mount (includes panel mounting hardware)
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across gauge threads
before attaching the fitting. Gauge must be oriented as shown after
tightening.

PN 4237029G 8.7-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-6 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See Table 8.7-6)

3 4

7029139F

Table 8.7-6 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-6)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232501 Muffler, noise reducing pneumatic, 0.125 MNPT, 0.812 diameter, 2.125
length
2 6216127 Fitting, T-connector, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MNPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
3 6216027 Fitting, poly-flow, poly-flow, elbow, 0.250 o.d. to 1/8 MNPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads that
will be screwed in the pressure relief valve. Fitting must be oriented as
shown after tightening.
4 6208005 Valve, pressure relief (with plugs), 30 psi

8.7-8 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.7-7 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Table 8.7-7)

7029140F
5

Table 8.7-7 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Figure 8.7-7)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232702 Quick-connect, male, elbow, 0.250 o.d., white acetal delrin
2 6232703 Quick-connect, female, 0.125 flow, 0.375 MNPT, white acetal delrin, single
connect
3 6232561 Filter, gas, hydrophobic, 0.2 micon, disposable plastic
4 6232700 Quick-connect, female, 0.250 flow, 0.375 MNPT, white acetal delrin, single
connect
5 6232522 Quick-connect, male, external elbow, 0.375 o.d., white acetal delrin
6 2523451 O-ring, silicone, used as rubber band, 2.300 i.d. x 0.103 width

PN 4237029G 8.7-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-8 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.7-8)

7029141F

Table 8.7-8 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.7-8)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232214 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 FPT, nickel-plated brass
Note: Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
2 6232183 Gauge, 0 to 30 in. Hg, for monitoring system vacuum, 1.5-inch diameter,
panel mount (includes panel mounting hardware)
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across gauge threads
before attaching the fitting. Gauge must be oriented as shown after
tightening.

8.7-10 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.7-9 Right Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.7-9)
1

6 5 4
7029167G

Table 8.7-9 Right Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.7-9)

Item Part Number Description

1 5110031 Interlock, high voltage (HV), snap action cheat switch
2 2603058 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness, see Figure 8.7-13
for an exploded view that includes related hardware
Note: Fan should be positioned so that its output wires are inside the
panel and near the other fan (upper fan’s wires are oriented towards the
bottom; lower fan’s wires, towards the top).
3 6856536 Coil, cooling
4 7000357 FRU, Power Supply, +24 Vdc
5 7000356 FRU, Power Supply, +5 Vdc
6 7000355 FRU, Power Supply, ±15 Vdc
7 6705720 Card, Voltage Supply Monitor
8 7000362 FRU, Power Supply, MCL, assembly consisting of a +5 Vdc and ±12 Vdc
supply and a +24 Vdc supply

PN 4237029G 8.7-11
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-10 Left Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.7-10)
9 1

4 3

E11
E12
E12
E10 E9
E13
E14
P-73 SN13 5
E15
CB-1 K1

8 K2

W1 W2 6

7
7029155F

8.7-12 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.7-10 Left Side with Cover Removed, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.7-10)

Item Part Number Description

1 7000431 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 100 Vac system
7000721 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 120 Vac system
7000432 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 220 or 240 Vac system
2 7000371 FRU, compressor assembly, dual-head, for 100/120 Vac system
7000372 FRU, compressor assembly, dual-head, for 220/224 Vac system
3 6232368 Valve, dump, system pressure, for 100/120 Vac system, see Figure 8.7-11
for an exploded view that includes attachments
6232367 Valve, dump, system pressure, for 220/240 Vac system, see Figure 8.7-11
for an exploded view that includes attachments
4 6706401 Card, Transient Absorber EMC (also referred to as Transient Voltage
Suppressor 2 card or Transient Absorber II card)
5 5120230 Switch, vacuum/pressure; waste pressure, normally open, single pole single
throw, 3-in. water
Note: Must be installed with contacts up so that wires can be connected
as shown in Figure 8.7-10. The blue wire from E14 on the Power Module
Control card is attached to SN13’s left contact and the white wire (from
E15) is attached to SN13’s right contact.
6 2821009 Nut, self-lock (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
7 6028530 Line cord, 125 Vac / 15 A, shielded, 14 AWG stranded, NEMA 5-15 plug to a
stripped end, 9-ft. 10-in. length including connector
Note: Strain relief set for one line cord, PN 6027766.
8 6705231 Card, Power Module Control, for non-EMC instruments with a serial number
Z09062 or lower
6706390 Card, Power Module Control II, EMC version, for instruments with a serial
number Z09063 or higher
9 6705442 Card, Voltage Selector, for 100 Vac system
6705237 Card, Voltage Selector, for 120 Vac system
6705470 Card, Voltage Selector, for 220 Vac system
6705472 Card, Voltage Selector, for 230/240 Vac system

PN 4237029G 8.7-13
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-11 VL32, VL30, and VL31 - Exploded View (See Table 8.7-11)
5 1

5
45

4
2

7318046A 2

8.7-14 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.7-11 VL32, VL30, and VL31 - Exploded View (See Figure 8.7-11)

Item Part Number Description

1 6216128 Fitting, elbow, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
2 6232368 Valve, dump, system pressure, for 100/120 Vac system
6232367 Valve, dump, system pressure, for 220/240 Vac system
3 2808080 Screw, machine (#8-32 x 0.25 in. length, UF82-head)
4 6216127 Fitting, T-connector, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across threads prior
to insertion. Fitting must be oriented as shown after tightening.
5 6232501 Muffler, noise reducing pneumatic, 0.125 MNPT, 0.812 diameter,
2.125 length
Note: Hand tighten only.

PN 4237029G 8.7-15
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-12 Rear Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.7-12)
1 2 3 4 5

AUX POWER ON

13 PRESSURE
SYSTEM
ON/OFF

VACUUM WASTE LEVEL

ON

OFF

WASTE
LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER
MAX 1800 WATTS MAX 1500 WATTS
WASTE VENT

12 11 10 9 8 7029011G

8.7-16 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.7-12 Rear Panel Components, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.7-12)

Item Part Number Description

1 6706391 Card, CYT12 Receiver, EMC
Note: Attach using hex nut, PN 2851995 (0.25-36 UNS x 0.375 AF x
0.094 in. thickness).
2 Cable, harness that includes Logic, MCL, and Analog power supply dc
internal cables (only Logic and Analog on non-EMC version)
6028693 EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09063 or higher)
Note: Attach using three female screw lock assembly kits for D-type
connectors, PN 2104261.
6028307 Non-EMC version (for XL or XL-MCL with a serial number Z09062 or lower)
3 5120229 Circuit breaker, 4 A, 250 Vac, for 100 Vac and 120 Vac systems
5120227 Circuit breaker, 2 A, 250 Vac, for 220 Vac and 240 Vac systems
4 5120228 Circuit breaker, 3 A, 250 Vac, for 100 Vac systems
5120227 Circuit breaker, 2 A, 250 Vac, for 120 Vac systems
5101025 Circuit breaker, 1 A, 250 Vac, for 220 Vac and 240 Vac systems
5 5120228 Circuit breaker, 3 A, 250 Vac, for 100 Vac and 120 Vac systems
5101026 Circuit breaker, 1.5 A, 250 Vac, for 220 Vac and 240 Vac systems
6 5101026 Circuit breaker, 1.5 A, 250 Vac, for 100 Vac and 120 Vac systems
5101027 Circuit breaker, 0.8 A, 250 Vac, for 220 Vac and 240 Vac systems
7 5101027 Circuit breaker, 0.8 A, 250 Vac, for 100 Vac and 120 Vac systems
5101028 Circuit breaker, 0.5 A, 250 Vac, for 220 Vac and 240 Vac systems
8 6028530 Line cord, 125 Vac / 15 A, shielded, 14 AWG stranded, NEMA 5-15 plug to a
stripped end, 9-ft. 10-in. length including connector
Note: Strain relief set for one line cord, PN 6027766.
9 624238 Quick-connect, panel mount, off-white polypropylene body with nut,
0.170 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with off-white polypropylene insert,
PN 624262)
10 6232304 Quick-connect, panel mount, orange body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with orange insert, PN 6232305, also
with automatic shut-off)
11 6232303 Quick-connect, panel mount, yellow body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with yellow insert, PN 6232307, also
with automatic shut-off)
12 6232309 Quick-connect, panel mount, blue body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with blue insert, PN 6232306, also with
automatic shut-off)
13 2603058 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness, see Figure 8.7-13
for an exploded view that includes related hardware
Note: Fan should be positioned so that its output wires are inside the
panel and near the other fan (upper fan’s wires are oriented towards the
bottom; lower fan’s wires, towards the top).

PN 4237029G 8.7-17
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-13 Box Fan with Related Hardware - Exploded View (See Table 8.7-13)

6 (4x)

2 (8x)

5 (8x) 4

7029156F
3

8.7-18 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.7-13 Box Fan with Related Hardware - Exploded View (See Figure 8.7-13)

Item Part Number Description

1 2603010 Filter, air, 4-inch pad, 45 PPI
2 2806073 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.62 in. length, FL82 flat-head)
3 2603009 Finger guard, grille for fan air filter on 4-inch box fan
Note: Raised ribs should face out.
4 2603058 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness
Note: Fan should be positioned so that its output wires are inside the
panel and near the other fan (upper fan’s wires are oriented towards the
bottom; lower fan’s wires, towards the top).
5 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
6 6011006 Tie wrap, screw mount, #6 sizer, 7.4 in. long, 0.19 in wide

PN 4237029G 8.7-19
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-14 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Cover, Door, Latches, and Casters (See Table 8.7-14)
3
4

6
3
10

8
14 3

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POPWER
AIR
FILTER 30
PSI

SYS
VAC
SYS
PRESS
MCL POPWER 11
PRESS
ADJ

13

3 9 7029131F
12

8.7-20 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.7-14 Voltage-Specific Power Supply Cover, Door, Latches, and Casters (See Figure 8.7-14)

Item Part Number Description

1 2806017 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.38 in. length, pan-head)
Note: Apply one drop of adhesive sealant, PN 1601065, to screw threads
before insertion.
2 1020939 Hinge, door
3 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 in. thickness)
4 2603009 Finger guard, grille for fan air filter on 4-inch box fan
Note: Raised ribs should face out.
5 2603010 Filter, air, 4-inch pad, 45 PPI
6 2840053 Latch, magnetic, 0.24 width x 0.82 length x 0.52 thickness
7 5704051 Shield, EMI/EMC, contact strip with adhesive mount, beryllium copper alloy
8 1025141 Panel, front window, smoked dark Lexan
9 6027875 Cable, ground strap
10 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 in. thickness)
11 6807047 Assembly, front door, grey
6856160 Assembly, front door, black
12 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
13 2523658 Caster, swivel with brake, 2 in. diameter wheel
14 6807082 Cover, three-surface (left-side, top, right-side), grey
6856369 Cover, three-surface (left-side, top, right-side), black

PN 4237029G 8.7-21
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Voltage-Specific Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.7-15 Waste Container, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table 8.7-15)

2
1

7318034A

Table 8.7-15 Waste Container, Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Figure 8.7-15)

Item Part Number Description

1 2523697 Tank, waste, I-gallon rectangular (also referred to as bottle)
2 6858159 Sensor assembly, waste level
3 2428039 Label, waste container

8.7-22 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
8.8 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

List of Illustrations
This section contains parts, including covers, related to the Universal Power Supply (UPS).
Illustrations include the following:

r Cables
t Attached to the Power Control 3 card - Figure 8.8-18
t Attached to the Voltage Selector 2 card and Breaker card - Figure 8.8-17
t Inside the top compartment (front area) - Figure 8.8-16
t Internal harness for dc power supplies - Figure 8.8-15
r Covers (exterior) and related components - Figure 8.8-19
r Covers (interior) and related components - Figure 8.8-20
r Front panel components - Figure 8.8-1
t Filters (vacuum and air) with related components - Figure 8.8-6
t System pressure adjustment knob and related components - Figure 8.8-5
t System pressure gauge and related components - Figure 8.8-4
t System vacuum gauge and related components - Figure 8.8-7
t Vacuum trap and related components - Figure 8.8-2
t Water trap (air/water filter separator) and related components - Figure 8.8-3
r Left-side compartment (view with covers removed) - Figure 8.8-9
r Rear panels (view with back cover removed) - Figure 8.8-14
r Right-side compartment (view with covers removed) - Figure 8.8-13
r Upper front panel (inside components) - Figure 8.8-8
r UPS pneumatics drawer removed
t Left-side view - Figure 8.8-11
t Right-side view - Figure 8.8-12
r Waste container - Figure 8.8-21

PN 4237029G 8.8-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-1 Front Panel Components, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-1) Figure Reference
1 2 3 A Upper front panel
r Inside components,
Figure 8.8-8
r Outside labels,
A Figure 8.8-20
B UPS pneumatics drawer
(removed from UPS)
VAC
r View from right side
FILTER
(without compressor
and Voltage Supply
VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER Monitor card),
B AIR
FILTER
+5V
+15V Figure 8.8-11
30 -15V
PSI
+24V
MCL POWER
r View from left side
SYS SYS
VAC PRESS +5V
+15V
(with compressor,
PRESS
ADJ
-15V
+24V
Voltage Supply Monitor
card, and applicable
mounting hardware),
Figure 8.8-12
8 7 6 5 4

7318244B

8.8-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-1 Front Panel Components, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-1)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232724 Trap, vacuum, with miniature polycarbonate bowl, see Figure 8.8-2 for an
exploded view that includes attachments
Note: The edges of the holding bracket for the vacuum trap are covered
with black PVC trim, PN 3202044, attached with #404 Loctite adhesive,
PN 1601032.
2 6232725 Filter, water trap (air/water filter separator), 5 micron, see Figure 8.8-3 for
an exploded view that includes attachments
Note: The edges of the holding bracket for the water trap filter are covered
with black PVC trim, PN 3202044, attached with #404 Loctite adhesive,
PN 1601032.
3 5120226 Circuit breaker, 15 A, 250 Vac, white rocker, non-illuminating
4 6705720 Card, Voltage Supply Monitor, see Figure 8.8-12 for an exploded view that
includes attachments
5 6208005 Valve, pressure relief, see Figure 8.8-5 for an exploded view that includes
attachments
6 6232189 Gauge, 0 to 60 psi, for monitoring system pressure, panel mount, see
Figure 8.8-4 for an exploded view that includes attachments
7 6232561 Filter, gas, hydrophobic, 0.2 micron, disposable plastic, see Figure 8.8-6 for
an exploded view that includes attachments
8 6232183 Gauge, 0 to 30 in. Hg, for monitoring system vacuum, panel mount, see
Figure 8.8-7 for an exploded view that includes attachments

PN 4237029G 8.8-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Table 8.8-2)
1

7318245B

Table 8.8-2 Vacuum Trap and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-2)

Item Part Number Description

1 6216128 Fitting, elbow, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MNPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, around the first two
or three threads prior to insertion. After tightening, this fitting must be
oriented as shown in Figure 8.8-2.
2 6232724 Trap, vacuum, with miniature polycarbonate bowl
Note: For correct air flow, orient as shown in Figure 8.8-2.

8.8-4 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.8-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See Table 8.8-3)
1

7318247B

Table 8.8-3 Water Trap (Air/Water Filter Separator) and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-3)

Item Part Number Description

1 6216128 Fitting, elbow, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MNPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, around the first two
or three threads prior to insertion. After tightening, this fitting must be
oriented as shown in Figure 8.8-3.
2 6232725 Filter, water trap (air/water filter separator), 5 micron
Note: For correct air flow, orient as shown in Figure 8.8-3. Apply a thin
line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, around the first two or three lower
threads before attaching the bottom fitting, PN 6232214.
3 6232214 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 FPT, nickel-plated brass
Note: After tightening, this fitting must be oriented as shown in
Figure 8.8-3.

PN 4237029G 8.8-5
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-4 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.8-4)
1

7029138F

Table 8.8-4 System Pressure Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-4)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232214 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 FPT, nickel-plated brass
Note: After tightening, this fitting must be oriented as shown in
Figure 8.8-4.
2 6232189 Gauge, 0 to 60 psi, for monitoring system pressure, 1.5-inch diameter,
panel mount (includes panel mounting hardware)
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across gauge threads
before attaching the fitting. Gauge must be oriented with the 30 psi mark
in the 12 o’clock position after tightening.

8.8-6 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.8-5 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See Table 8.8-5)
2

3 4

7318246D

Table 8.8-5 System Pressure Adjustment Knob and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-5)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232501 Muffler, noise reducing pneumatic, 0.125 MNPT, 0.812 diameter, 2.125
length
Note: Hand tighten only.
2 6216128 Fitting, elbow, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 MPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, around the first two
or three threads prior to insertion. After tightening, this fitting must be
oriented as shown in Figure 8.8-5.
3 6216027 Fitting, poly-flow, poly-flow, elbow, 0.250 o.d. to 1/8 MNPT, brass
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, around the first two
or three threads that will be screwed in the pressure relief valve. After
tightening, this fitting must be oriented as shown in Figure 8.8-5.
4 6208005 Valve, pressure relief (with plugs), 30 psi

PN 4237029G 8.8-7
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-6 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Table 8.8-6)

3
FLOW

7029140G
5

Table 8.8-6 Vacuum and Air Filters with Related Components (See Figure 8.8-6)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232702 Quick-connect, male, elbow, 0.250 o.d., white acetal delrin
2 6232703 Quick-connect, female, 0.125 flow, 0.375 MNPT, white acetal delrin, single
connect
3 6232561 Filter, gas, hydrophobic, 0.2 micron, disposable plastic
Note: For correct air flow, orient as shown in Figure 8.8-6.
4 6232700 Quick-connect, female, 0.250 flow, 0.375 MNPT, white acetal delrin, single
connect
5 6232522 Quick-connect, male, external elbow, 0.375 o.d., white acetal delrin
6 2523451 O-ring, used as rubber band, 2.300 i.d. x 0.103 width, silicone

8.8-8 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Figure 8.8-7 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Table 8.8-7)
1

7029141F

Table 8.8-7 System Vacuum Gauge and Related Components (See Figure 8.8-7)

Item Part Number Description

1 6232214 Fitting, hose barb, elbow, 0.187 i.d. to 1/8 FPT, nickel-plated brass
Note: After tightening, this fitting must be oriented as shown in
Figure 8.8-7.
2 6232183 Gauge, 0 to 30 in. Hg, for monitoring system vacuum, 1.5-inch diameter,
panel mount (includes panel mounting hardware)
Note: Apply a thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, around the first two
or three threads (of the gauge) before attaching the fitting. Gauge must be
oriented with the -15 mark in the 12 o’clock position after tightening.

PN 4237029G 8.8-9
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-8 Upper Front Panel, Inside Components, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-8)

11
12

13
5 4

3
7

7 9

8
10

7318173D

8.8-10 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-8 Upper Front Panel, Inside Components, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-8)

Item Part Number Description

1 2852093 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.38 length, pan-head with cone washer)
2 179436 Panel, upper front
3 2852095 Screw, self-lock machine (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square
cone washer)
Note: These screws secure the Breaker card (with attached Voltage
Selector 2 card) to the inside of the upper front panel.
4 177932 Cable, voltage select
5 626182 Card, Breaker
6 177820 Card, Voltage Selector 2
7 2852229 Screw, special (#6-32 x 0.25 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer)
8 2852076 Nut, special (#6-32 hex nut with a flat rim conical washer)
9 4510045 Relay, general purpose power, DPST-NO, 15 A, 250 Vac maximum (resistive
load), 12 Vdc coil (nominal design)
10 2842074 Spacer, tapped (#6-32 x 0.375 length. x 0.250 round), aluminum
11 5120226 Circuit breaker, 15 A, 250 Vac, white rocker, non-illuminating
12 2852230 Screw, special (#6-32 x 0.31 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer)
13 175324 Card, FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor

PN 4237029G 8.8-11
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-9 Left Side View with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply Figure Reference
(See Table 8.8-9)
A Argon laser power
A 2 3 supply and mounting
1
hardware, Figure 8.8-10
11 B Upper front panel
r Inside components,
B Figure 8.8-8
r Outside labels,
Figure 8.8-20
C UPS pneumatics drawer
(removed from UPS)
r View from right side
(without compressor
C and Voltage Supply
Monitor card),
Figure 8.8-11
r View from left side
(with compressor,
Voltage Supply
Monitor card, and
applicable mounting
hardware),
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 Figure 8.8-12
7318232D

8.8-12 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-9 Left Side with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-9)

Item Part Number Description

1 625224 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness
Note: Orient fan for air to flow from left to right (from area housing the
compressor to the area housing the power supplies). Install on threaded
studs using four self-locking nuts (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height),
PN 2821010.
2 626757 Filter, ac line, 20 A, 120/250 Vac - maximum current leakage (line to
ground) 0.21 mA at 120 Vac, 60 Hz; 0.36 mA at 250 Vac, 50 Hz
Note: Attach to platform using two self-lock screws (#6-32 x 0.38 length,
pan-head with cone washer), PN 2852093. Line filter is connected to the
main circuit breaker, PN 5120226, using a wiring harness, PN 177936.
3 6807638 Dryer assembly (includes 3 swivel hose-barb elbow fittings, PN 6233072)
Note: Before installing a fitting, wrap non-adhesive Teflon tape,
PN 8004007, around fitting threads.
4 4508005 Relay, solid-state, 250 Vac, 25 Amp, 3-32 Vdc
Note: Attach to panel using two self-locking nuts (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x
0.109 height), PN 2821010.
5 6232183 Gauge, 0 to 30 in. Hg, for monitoring system vacuum, panel mount, see
Figure 8.8-7 for an exploded view that includes attachments
6 623334 Valve, dump, one for system pressure and another for system vacuum,
includes attached fittings
Note: Install using two machine screws (#8-32 x 0.25 in. length,
UF82-head), PN 2808080.
7 7000701 FRU, dual-head compressor assembly, includes capacitor
Note: For an exploded view that includes mounting hardware, see
Figure 8.8-11, for capacitor related hardware, and Figure 8.8-12, for
compressor related hardware.
8 5120230 Switch, vacuum/pressure; pressure, normally open, single pole single
throw, 3-in. water
Note: Must be installed with contacts up so that wires can be connected
as shown in Figure 8.8-9. See Figure 8.8-11 for an exploded view of this
switch and related hardware.
9 626522 Cable, pneumatics control, connects the Power Control 3 card (via J77
COMPRESSOR) and the compressor drawer
10 623391 Fan duct with sound guard
Note: Secure to rear panel using two self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x
0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095. Screws
are located inside the Universal Power Supply - one to the left and the
other to the right of the two exhaust fans.
11 179359 Card, Power Control 3
Note: Install using four self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length,
pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.

PN 4237029G 8.8-13
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-10 Argon Laser Power Supply and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.8-10)
1

CE
RFA
TE
IN
R
USE

K
TL
IN

WER O
PO
1

R
SE
LA

R
SE
LA

5 5
7029286G

8.8-14 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-10 Argon Laser Power Supply and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.8-10)

Item Part Number Description

1 179438 Block, laser air (also referred to as air dam)
2 4004115 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 100 Vac to 240 Vac
systems, JDS2119U
3 2852095 Screw, self-lock machine (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square
cone washer)
4 179434 Plate, Argon laser power supply mounting
5 2810045 Screw, machine (#10-32 x 0.25 in. length, UF82-head)

PN 4237029G 8.8-15
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-11 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Left-Side View (See Table 8.8-11)

23

22 24
5

5
21
20
4 5

19 6

8
18
9
17

7
9
16
15 10
14

10 13
11

12
For clarity, some components are not shown. 7318292D

8.8-16 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-11 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Left-Side View (See Figure 8.8-11)

Item Part Number Description

1 2851080 Grommet, 0.375 i.d. x 0.560 o.d., nylon
2 2851244 Holder, component clamp, coated with white plastisol
3 6807638 Dryer assembly (For correct air flow, orient as shown in Figure 8.8-11.)
Note: Before installing the three swivel hose-barb elbow fittings,
PN 6233072, wrap threads with non-adhesive Teflon tape, PN 8004007.
4 6232183 Gauge, 0 to 30 in. Hg (rear view), for monitoring system vacuum, panel
mount, see Figure 8.8-7 for an exploded view that includes attachments
5 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height)
6 4508005 Relay, solid-state, 250 Vac, 25 Amp, 3-32 Vdc, also referred to as the
compressor start relay
7 623334 Valve, 24 Vdc solenoid (may also be referred to as a dump or relief valve)
8 737883 Plate, dump valve mounting
9 2808080 Screw, machine (#8-32 x 0.25 in. length, UF82-head)
10 623349 Cable, compressor drawer (includes connectors to the vacuum/pressure
switch, PN 5120230, the start compressor relay, PN 4508005, and two
2-pin MATE-N-LOK connectors)
11 2852228 Screw, special (#4-40 x 1.00 length, pan-head with #4 square cone washer)
12 5120230 Switch, vacuum/pressure; pressure, normally open, single pole single
throw, 3-in. water (Install with contacts up as shown in Figure 8.8-11.)
13 2821009 Nut, self-lock (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height)
14 624238 Quick-connect, panel mount, off-white polypropylene body with nut,
0.170 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with off-white insert, PN 624262)
15 6232303 Quick-connect, panel mount, yellow body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with yellow insert*, PN 6232307)
16 6232304 Quick-connect, panel mount, orange body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with orange insert*, PN 6232305)
17 6232309 Quick-connect, panel mount, blue body with nut, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with blue insert*, PN 6232306)
18 2826042 Washer, I-tooth, #50 (0.53 i.d. x 0.88 o.d. x 0.045 thickness)
19 2851691 Holder, clamp for oval capacitor, style A (2.6 in. width x 1.31 in. depth oval)
20 7000701 FRU, capacitor included with dual-head compressor assembly, see
Figure 8.8-12 for a view of the compressor and its mounting hardware
21 6232189 Gauge, 0 to 60 psi (rear view), for monitoring system pressure, panel
mount, see Figure 8.8-4 for an exploded view that includes attachments
22 2852076 Nut, special (#6-32 hex nut with a flat rim conical washer)
23 626689 Check valve, high pressure (For correct air flow, orient as shown in
Figure 8.8-11.)
24 6028733 Cable clamp, wire harness clip, 0.5 in. holding diameter, for 0.204 in.
diameter mounting hole
* Quick-connect insert also has an automatic shut-off.

PN 4237029G 8.8-17
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-12 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Right-Side View (See Table 8.8-12)

1 2
3

E
R
SU
ES
PR
5

M
U
U
C
VA
6

14
13
10 11
12
4
7 (4x)

10
For clarity, some components are not shown.
9
7318366D

8.8-18 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-12 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Removed, Right-Side View (See Figure 8.8-12)

Item Part Number Description

1 2851080 Grommet, 0.375 i.d. x 0.560 o.d., nylon
2 6216018 Fitting, elbow, poly-flo, 0.250 o.d. to 1/4 MPT, brass
Note: Apply one thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across the length
of the threads prior to insertion. After tightening, this fitting must be
oriented as shown in Figure 8.8-12.
3 2821004 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.314 AF x 0.178 height with nylon insert)
4 2852076 Nut, special (#6-32 hex nut with a flat rim conical washer)
Note: The flat rim conical washer on this special nut must be positioned
on top of the shock mount so that the flat rim conical washer makes
contact with the shock mount. Torque to 6 lbs per inch.
5 6216351 Fitting, elbow, hose barb, 0.187 i.d. to 1/4 MPT, brass
Note: Apply one thin line of pipe sealant, PN 1601056, across the length
of the threads prior to insertion. After tightening, this fitting must be
oriented as shown in Figure 8.8-12.
6 7000701 FRU, dual-head compressor assembly, includes capacitor
7 2821009 Nut, self-lock (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height)
8 2527719 Mount, shock, multi-plate, rubber, 4 lbs, 21 lbs/in., 7 Hz
9 2806113 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 1.75 in. length, pan-head)
10 2827147 Washer, flat, #6 (0.156 i.d. x 0.312 o.d. x 0.036 thickness)
11 2851244 Holder, component clamp, coated with white plastisol
12 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height)
13 6705720 Card, Voltage Supply Monitor
14 2843032 Spacer, hole, 0.140 i.d. x 0.250 o.d. x 0.250 in. length

PN 4237029G 8.8-19
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-13 Right Side with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-13)
1

12

11 2

10

9 5 8 7

6 4

7318234B

8.8-20 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-13 Right Side with Covers Removed, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-13)

Item Part Number Description

1 5110031 Interlock, high voltage (HV), snap action cheat switch
2 623391 Fan duct with sound guard
Note: Secure to rear panel using two self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x
0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095. Screws
are located inside the Power Supply module one to the left and the other to
the right of the two exhaust fans.
3 179180 Panel, lower rear
Note: Secure to UPS frame using six self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x
0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.
4 2821010 Nut, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height)
5 625224 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness
Note: For correct air flow, orient the fans as shown in Figure 8.8-13. Each
exhaust fan (at the rear of the Power Supply module) should be positioned
so that its output wires are inside the panel and near the other fan (upper
fan wires must be oriented towards the bottom; lower fan wires, towards
the top).
Orient the fan in the middle of the Universal Power Supply so that air flows
from left to right (from area housing the compressor to the area housing
the linear power supplies). Install on threaded studs using four
self-locking nuts (#6-32 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height), PN 2821010.
6 2852095 Screw, self-lock machine (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square
cone washer
7 627181 FRU, power supply, linear, output +24 Vdc, 7.2 A, input 90 to 264 Vac
8 627179 FRU, power supply, linear, output +5 Vdc, 18 A, input 90 to 264 Vac
9 627180 FRU, power supply, linear, output ±15 Vdc, 5 A, input 90 to 264 Vac
10 6705720 Card, Voltage Supply Monitor, see Figure 8.8-11 for an exploded view that
includes attachments
11 627182 FRU, power supply, linear, MCL/MPL, assembly consisting of two supplies -
the upper supply outputs +24 Vdc (2.4 A); the lower supply outputs +5
Vdc, 2 A and ±12 Vdc, 0.4 A; input for both 90 to 264 Vac
12 175324 Card, FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor

PN 4237029G 8.8-21
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-14 Rear Panels with Back Cover Removed, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-14)

1
ANALOG

2
15 LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1 5

1 2

13 1

6
WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

14

10 9 8 7

11

13
12
7318235B

8.8-22 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-14 Rear Panels with Back Cover Removed, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-14)

Item Part Number Description

1 626508 Cable, between the ARGON LASER connector [associated with the laser
contactor relay (K2)] on the Power Control 3 card and socket on the front
of Argon laser power supply
2 4004115 Power supply, Argon air-cooled laser, switching, for 100 Vac to 240 Vac
systems, JDS2119U
3 6028652 Cable, laser supply control (between P70 on Power Control 3 card and
USER INTERFACE connector on the front of Argon laser power supply)
4 179359 Card, Power Control 3
Note: Install using four self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x 0.38 length,
pan-head with cone washer), PN 2852093.
5 6028302 Cable, Power Module Control, with a 25 pin subminiature D connector on
each end (female connector J12 attaches to the rear panel of the
Cytometer and male connector P20 on the Power Control 3 card)
6 626522 Cable, Pneumatics Control, connects the Power Control 3 card (via J77
COMPRESSOR) and the compressor drawer
7 624238 Quick-connect, panel mount, off-white polypropylene body with nut*,
0.170 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with off-white polypropylene insert,
PN 624262)
8 6232303 Quick-connect, panel mount, yellow body with nut*, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with yellow insert, PN 6232307, also
with automatic shut-off)
9 6232304 Quick-connect, panel mount, orange body with nut*, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with orange insert, PN 6232305, also
with automatic shut-off)
10 6232309 Quick-connect, panel mount, blue body with nut*, automatic shut-off,
0.125 flow x 0.250 o.d. (couples with blue insert, PN 6232306, also with
automatic shut-off)
11 2821009 Nut, self-lock (#4-40 x 0.250 AF x 0.109 height)
12 2105084 Connector, power inlet receptacle, screw mount, 16 A / 250 Vac, IEC 320
type receptacle
Note: To connect the Universal Power Supply to its ac power source, use
PN 629191 for 100-120 Vac system or PN 626732 for 220-240 Vac
system. This 10 ft. power cord has an IEC 60320 C-19 (or IEC 320 C-19)
connector on one end and a Nema 5-20 (or 6-20) plug on the other.
13 2804044 Screw, machine (#4-40 x 0.38 in. length, flat-head)
14 623391 Fan duct with sound guard
Note: From the inside, secure duct to rear panel using two self-lock
machine screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone
washer), PN 2852095. One screw is located on each side of exhaust fans.
15 6028693 Cable, harness that includes Analog, Logic, and MCL/MPL power supply dc
internal cables, see Figure 8.8-15 for an exploded view that includes
attachment hardware
* Insert a #50 I-tooth washer, PN 2826042, between the panel and hex nut. See Figure 8.8-11.

PN 4237029G 8.8-23
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-15 Cable Harness for dc Power Supplies, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-15)

ANALOG

LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1

1 2

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

P134
P135
P7

P6

P8

Nut
Lock washer
Flat washer

Flat washer
3 2
Standoff (female)

7318412B

8.8-24 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-15 Cable Harness for dc Power Supplies, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-15)

Item Part Number Description

1 6028693 Cable, harness that includes Analog, Logic, and MCL/MPL power supply dc
internal cables
Connections:
r Three male subminiature D connectors are installed in the upper rear
panel for connecting the Analog, Logic, and MCL (or MPL) external
cables that connect the Universal Power Supply and the Cytometer.
r P8 is attached to J8 from the +24 Vdc linear power supply, PN 627181.
r P6 is attached to J6 from the +5 Vdc linear power supply, PN 627179.
r P7 is attached to J7 from the ±15 Vdc linear power supply, PN 627180.
r P134 is attached to J134 from the MCL/MPL linear power supply
assembly, PN 627182.
r P135 is attached to J135 on the Voltage Supply Monitor card,
PN 6705720.
2 179370 Panel, upper rear
Note: Secure to UPS frame using four self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x
0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.
3 2104261 Screwlock, female assembly kit for attaching a D-type connector
Note: For proper installation, use Figure 8.8-15 as a guide.

PN 4237029G 8.8-25
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-16 Cables in the Top Compartment Front Area, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-16)

2
3

7
5
from
compressor

8
7 7318403B

8.8-26 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-16 Cables in the Top Compartment Front Area, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-16)

Item Part Number Description

1 626521 Cable, MCL linears ac input
Connections: P129 (15-position MATE-N-LOK male connector) is attached
to J129 (female connector labeled MCL, 5&12V, +24V) on the Voltage
Selector 2 card; other ends are attached to the MCL/MPL linear power
supplies, PN 627182.
2 626520 Cable, 15 V linear ac input
Connections: P4 (12-position MATE-N-LOK male connector) is attached to
J4 (female connector labeled +/- 15V SPLY) on the Voltage Selector 2 card;
other end is attached to the ±15 V linear power supply, PN 627180.
3 626518 Cable, 5 V linear ac input
Connections: P3 (9-position MATE-N-LOK male connector) is attached to J3
(female connector labeled 5V SPLY) on the Voltage Selector 2 card; other
end is attached to the 5 V linear power supply, PN 627179.
4 626519 Cable, 24 V linear ac input
Connections: P5 (6-position MATE-N-LOK male connector) is attached to J5
(female connector labeled 24V SPLY) on the Voltage Selector 2 card; other
end is attached to the +24 V linear power supply, PN 627181.
5 178861 Cable, ac line to breaker
Connections:
r Two wires (white and black) are installed on the side of the ac line filter,
PN 626757, with only 2 faston terminals.
r MATE-N-LOK male connector is installed in the J3 female connector on
the back of the Breaker card, PN 626182.
6 626513 Cable, system power control
Connections: Attached to J5 on the Breaker card; other end is attached to
J82 SYSTEM PWR on the Power Control 3 card.
7 177936 Cable, ac filter wire
Connections:
r MATE-N-LOK male connector is installed in the J1 female connector on
the FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card, PN 175324.
r Three wires (white, black, and green with yellow strip) are installed on
the side of the ac line filter, PN 626757, with 3 faston terminals.
r Two wires (white and black) are installed on the upper quick connect
tabs of the main circuit breaker, PN 5120226.
r Two ground wires are attached to upper front panel frame at E18 and
E19 using a self-lock screw, PN 2852093, in each ring.
8 626509 Cable, ac receptacle to main breaker
Connections: Side with two faston connectors is attached to the two lower
faston terminals on the back of the main circuit breaker; other end with three
faston connectors (one is a ground wire) is attached to the back of the
SYSTEM POWER ac input receptacle.
9 2852093 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.38 length, pan-head with cone washer)

PN 4237029G 8.8-27
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-17 Cables Attached to the Voltage Selector 2 Card and Breaker Card (See Table 8.8-17)

7318392C

8.8-28 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-17 Cables Use to Connect the Voltage Selector 2 Card and Breaker Card (See Figure 8.8-17)

Item Part Number Description

626182 Card, Breaker
177820 Card, Voltage Selector 2
1 177932 Cable, voltage select
Connections:
r If the ac source voltage is 100 Vac, one end is attached to the connector
on the low voltage side of the Breaker card and the other end to the
connector labeled J151 100 VAC on the Voltage Selector 2 card. In
Figure 8.8-17, low voltage connectors are to the left.
r If the ac source voltage is 120 Vac, one end is attached to the connector
on the low voltage side of the Breaker card and the other end to the
connector labeled J152 120 VAC on the Voltage Selector 2 card. In
Figure 8.8-17, low voltage connectors are to the left.
r If the ac source voltage is 220 Vac, one end is attached to the connector
on the high voltage side of the Breaker card and the other end to the
connector labeled J153 220 VAC on the Voltage Selector 2 card. In
Figure 8.8-17, high voltage connectors are to the right.
r If the ac source voltage is 240 Vac, one end is attached to the connector
on the high voltage side of the Breaker card and the other end to the
connector labeled J154 240 VAC on the Voltage Selector 2 card. In
Figure 8.8-17, high voltage connectors are to the right.
2 626511 Cable, system relay control
Connections: cable connector (MATE-N-LOK male labeled J4) is attached to
the female MATE-N-LOK connector (labeled J4) on the Breaker card; faston
connectors on the other end are attached to the SYSTEM RELAY on the
Voltage Selector 2 card.

PN 4237029G 8.8-29
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-18 Cables Attached to the Power Control 3 Card, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-18)
1 2

11
3
10

8
7

7029299G
5

8.8-30 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-18 Cables Attached to the Power Control 3 Card, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-18)

Item Part Number Description

179359 Card, Power Control 3
1 6028716 Cable, fiber optic, 200/230 µm connector on each end of the cable
Connections: Attached to U2 (CYT12 connector) on this circuit card; other
end is attached to the CYT 12 connector on the Opto Transprocessor
EXMEM II card or the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card.
2 626508 Cable, Argon laser ac cord
Connections: 3-position MATE-N-LOK connector is attached to ARGON
LASER connector [associated with the laser contactor relay (K2)] on this
circuit card; plug on the other end is inserted into ac socket on the front of
Argon laser power supply.
3 626523 Cable, laser relay control
Connections: P78 is attached to J78 LASER on this circuit card; fastons on
the other end attach to connectors 0 and 1 on LASER CONTACTOR K2.
4 626522 Cable, pneumatics drawer
Connections: Attached to J77 COMPRESSOR on this circuit card; other end
is attached to PNEUMATICS CONTROL connector on the back of the UPS
pneumatics drawer.
5 6028652 Cable, laser supply control
Connections: Attached to P70 LASER P\S REMOTE INPUT on this circuit
card; other end is attached to the USER INTERFACE connector on the front
of the Argon laser power supply.
6 626506 Waste level sensor assembly
Connections: Refer to the Heading Connect Tubings under Heading 3.7 for
attachment details.
7 626513 Cable, system power control
Connections: Attached to J82 SYSTEM PWR on this circuit card; other end
is attached to J5 on the Breaker card.
8 6028302 Cable, power module control
Connections: Male connector is attached to P20 on this circuit card; female
connector on the other end is attached to connector labeled POWER
MODULE CONTROL on the rear panel of the Cytometer.
9 626525 Cable, interlock and 24 V
Connections: Attached at P71 CYT12V on this circuit card; other end is
attached to the interlock bypass switch on the Universal Power Supply
frame.
10 625224 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness
Connections: Attached to lower FAN connector on this circuit card; other
end is attached to box fan between the left and right compartments.
11 625224 Fan, box, 90 CFM, 24 Vdc, 4.69 square x 1.0 in. thickness
Connections: Each fan is attached to a separate FAN connector on this
circuit card; other end is attached to the individual exhaust fan.

PN 4237029G 8.8-31
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-19 Exterior Covers, Door, Filters, and Casters for Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-19)

3 (4x)

2
4
5

13

6
12 6

11

8
Rear view

9
10
7318241D

8.8-32 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-19 Exterior Covers, Door, Filters, and Casters for Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-19)

Item Part Number Description

1 2603009 Fingerguard, frame with removable snap-in retainer for air filter
Note: Install removable filter retainer with raised ribs facing out.
2 2603010 Filter, air, 4-inch pad, 45 PPI
3 2806073 Screw, machine (#6-32 x 0.62 in. length, FL82 flat-head)
4 623397 Cover, main three-sided, with sound guard
Note: Secure to rear panel using seven self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x
0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.
5 0108150 Label, 3 in. logo plate, dark grey
6 2523697 Bottle, rectangular, 1-gallon, see Figure 8.8-21 for an exploded view that
includes related components
7 6859001 Holder, waste container, for 4 L container (also referred to as bottle)
8 178345 Door, front
9 2839039 Screw, self-lock (#6-32 x 0.37 in. length, pan-head)
10 2523658 Caster, swivel with brake, 2-inch diameter wheel
11 178902 Cover, back, with sound guard and filter assemblies
Note: Order explanation symbol label, PN 2429738, also. Secure to
Universal Power Supply frame using four self-lock machine screws (#6-32
x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.
12 626752 Cover, cable, plastic with sound guard strips
Note: Secure using four self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in.
length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095. A large flat
washer, PN 2510005, on the two lower Phillips-head screw posts to
reduce stress on the cable cover.
13 2429738 Label, explanation symbol

PN 4237029G 8.8-33
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-20 Interior Covers and Related Components, Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-20)
1 2 3

17

16

VAC
FILTER
15

14
VAC
TRAP
WATER
TRAP
4
SYSTEM POWER
+5V
AIR +15V
FILTER
30 -15V
PSI
+24V

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS +5V
+15V
-15V
PRESS
ADJ +24V

7 6 5

Front view

ANALOG 8
13 LOGIC

MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

12
1 1

7
1 2
9

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

10

Back cover Rear view with external covers removed

11
7318281D

8.8-34 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers 8
Table 8.8-20 Interior Covers and Related Components, Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-20)

Item Part Number Description

1 2429738 Label, explanation symbol
2 625446 Label, name plate with patent notice, use only with UPS
3 178345 Door, front
4 176982 Catch, magnetic, snap-in for round hole
5 624152 Plate, back, metal insert strip for front door
Note: Screw holes are shewed to the right side of the strip.
6 1020939 Hinge, door
7 2852095 Screw, self-lock machine (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square
cone washer)
8 179370 Panel, upper rear
Note: Secure to UPS frame using four self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x
0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.
9 179180 Panel, lower rear
Note: Secure to the Universal Power Supply frame using six self-lock
machine screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone
washer), PN 2852095. Two of these secure the UPS pneumatics drawer.
Upper openings, where cables are routed in or out of the Universal Power
Supply, are covered with black PVC trim, PN 3202044, attached with #404
Loctite adhesive, PN 1601032.
10 623391 Fan duct with sound guard
Note: Secure to lower rear panel, PN 179180, using two self-lock machine
screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with square cone washer),
PN 2852095. Screws are located inside the Universal Power Supply. One
screw is to the left and the other to the right of the two exhaust fans.
11 623384 Cover, back, with sound guard and filter assemblies
Note: Order explanation symbol label, PN 2429738, also. Secure using
four self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length, pan-head with
square cone washer), PN 2852095.
12 2510005 Washer, special (0.17 i.d. x 0.88 o.d. x 0.032 thickness)
13 626752 Cover, cable, clear plastic with sound guard strips
Note: Secure using four self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in.
length, pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.
14 2430901 Label, EU conformance mark
15 2431229 Label, ETL/CETL approval
16 2430992 Label, ETL approval UL 3101-1
17 179436 Panel, front upper
Note: To install, first position the top of the panel inside the UPS frame
then push the bottom into placed. Secure the upper front panel to the UPS
frame using six self-lock machine screws (#6-32 x 0.50 in. length,
pan-head with square cone washer), PN 2852095.

PN 4237029G 8.8-35
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Universal Power Supply Components and Covers

Figure 8.8-21 Waste Container (4 L) for Universal Power Supply (See Table 8.8-21)

2
1

7318404B

Table 8.8-21 Waste Container (4 L) for Universal Power Supply (See Figure 8.8-21)

Item Part Number Description

1 2523697 Bottle, rectangular, 1-gallon
2 626506 Waste level sensor assembly; use only with the Universal Power Supply
3 2428039 Label, waste container
Not shown 6859001 Holder for 4 L waste container (attached to right side of Universal Power
Supply)

8.8-36 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Small Miscellaneous Hardware 8
8.9 ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Small Miscellaneous Hardware
ATTENTION: Part numbers issued by the Oracle system are six-digit numbers.

List of Illustrations
This section contains parts such as check valves and tie wraps that are used throughout the
instrument. Illustrations include the following:

r Check valves and chokes with related components, Figure 8.9-1

r Fittings, Figure 8.9-2
r Tie wraps and mounting hardware, Figure 8.9-3

PN 4237029G 8.9-1
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Small Miscellaneous Hardware

Figure 8.9-1 Check Valves and Chokes with Related Components (See Table 8.9-1)

1 2 3

5 6 7
4

7029218F

Table 8.9-1 Check Valves and Chokes with Related Components (See Figure 8.9-1)

Item Part Number Description

1 6214106 Valve, check, 0.156 i.d. to 0.156 i.d. tubing, designated as CV 1, 3, 6, 9, and 10 on
page 1 of the XL System Pneumatic / Hydraulic Layout, PN 6320886
2 6232605 Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. to 0.082 i.d. tubing
3 6214107 Valve, check, 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. tubing
6232080 Valve, black-striped check, 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. tubing
4 6214108 Valve, check, for 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d. tubing, designated as CV 2, 4, 5, 7, and 8 on
page 1 of the XL System Pneumatic / Hydraulic Layout, PN 6320886
5 1005693 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
6232085 Fitting, hose barb union, 0.125 i.d. to 10-32 threaded
6 6216345 Gasket, #10 black, ethylene propylene, 0.142 i.d. x 0.030 wall, used in the Cytometer
2523062 O-ring, ethylene propylene seal, 0.187 i.d. x 0.050 wall, for use with operating
temperatures up to 150°C (302°F), used in the Universal Power Supply
7 6213008 Choke, metal, gold, 0.004 orifice
6213009 Choke, metal, brown, 0.006 orifice
6213006 Choke, metal, red, 0.008 orifice, designated as CK 2 and 3 on page 1 of the XL System
Pneumatic / Hydraulic Layout, PN 6320886; also used in the Universal Power Supply
6213011 Choke, metal, black, 0.010 orifice
6213010 Choke, metal, blue, 0.012 orifice
6213007 Choke, metal, green, 0.016 orifice
8 6213015 Choke, plastic, brown, 0.025 orifice, designated as CK 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 on
page 1 of the XL System Pneumatic / Hydraulic Layout, PN 6320886
6213012 Choke, plastic, grey, 0.016 orifice, designated as CK 12 on page 1 of the XL System
Pneumatic / Hydraulic Layout, PN 6320886

8.9-2 PN 4237029G
 PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Small Miscellaneous Hardware 8
Figure 8.9-2 Fittings (See Table 8.9-2)

8
1 2
5, 6 9
10
11
12
13
4 14
15
7
3

7029219F

Table 8.9-2 Fittings (See Figure 8.9-2)

Item Part Number Description

1 1005699 Fitting, feed-thru, hose-barb union, metal, 0.093 i.d. to 0.093 i.d. with 10-32 threads
2 1016486 Fitting, feed-thru isolator, white, with 10-32 threads
3 6216353 Fitting, feed-thru, hose-barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d. with 10-22 threaded
4 6232352 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.093 i.d.
5 6232246 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. tubing, clear
6 6232109 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d., clear
7 9908083 Fitting, hose-barb union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.093 i.d.
8 6216081 Fitting, Y-connector, hose-barb union, 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d., clear
9 6232257 Fitting, Y-connector, hose-barb union, 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d., nylon, white
10 1018245 Fitting, Y-connector, hose-barb union, 0.085 i.d. x 0.172 o.d., white
11 6232263 Fitting, Y-connector, hose-barb union, 0.050 i.d. x 0.130 o.d., blue
12 6232259 Fitting, Y-connector, hose-barb union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.093 i.d. to 0.093 i.d., clear
13 6216181 Fitting, Y-connector, hose-barb union, 0.082 i.d. to 0.082 i.d. to 0.062 i.d., clear
14 9909059 Fitting, Y-connector, hose-barb union, 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d. to 0.062 i.d.
15 6232322 Fitting, T-connector, hose-barb union, 0.093 i.d. to 0.125 i.d. to 0.125 i.d., nylon, white

PN 4237029G 8.9-3
PARTS LISTS
ILLUSTRATED PARTS - Small Miscellaneous Hardware

Figure 8.9-3 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Table 8.9-3)

1 2 3
4

6
7

7029169F

Note: For laser mounting hardware, go to the illustration for the laser.

Table 8.9-3 Tie Wraps and Mounting Hardware (See Figure 8.9-3)

Item Part Number Description

1 6027284 Mount, wire tie, 0.75 x 0.75, with #6 hole, adhesive back
2 6011015 Mount, wire tie, 1 x 1, with #6 hole, adhesive back
3 6011019 Mount, wire tie, 0.51 in. length x 0.33 in. width, for use with #6 screw
4 6011006 Tie wrap, screw mount, #6 sizer, 7.4 in. long, 0.19 in wide
5 6011001 Tie wrap, nylon, 4 in. long, 0.1 in. wide, nylon
6 6011017 Tie wrap with flag marker, 4.4 in. long, 0.1 in. wide, marker size 0.31 in. x 0.75 in.
7 6011002 Tie wrap, nylon, 6.7 in. long, 0.14 in. wide, nylon
8 6011003 Tie wrap, nylon, 15 in. long, 0.19 in. wide, nylon

8.9-4 PN 4237029G
 AQUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION A
A.1 TOLERANCES AND LIMITS
Cytometer Voltages
ATTENTION: Voltages are measured at the Analyzer backplane but adjustments are made on the
corresponding power supply in the right-side compartment of the Power Supply module.
r For the test point and/or ground locations, refer to Figure A.2-2 (front view of the
Analyzer backplane) or Figure A.2-3 (rear view of the Analyzer backplane).
r For power supply locations:
t If you are working with a Universal Power Supply, refer to Figure A.7-5.
t If you are working with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, refer to Figure A.6-4.
The DVM voltage reading must match the voltage reading recorded on the sticker attached to
the side of the Data Acquisition card cage.

Table A.1-1 Voltage Verification Test Points and Corresponding Adjustment Potentiometers

Verify at the Analyzer Backplane Adjust at the Power Supply

Voltage Test Point Ground Adjustment Potentiometer

+5 Vdc TP1 (yellow) TP2 (DGND) R11 on the +5 Vdc power supply
-15 Vdc TP3 (green) TP5 (AGND) *V.ADJ. on the ±15 Vdc power supply
+15 Vdc TP4 (orange) TP5 (AGND) *V.ADJ. on the ±15 Vdc power supply
+24 Vdc 9 or 10 at J66 12 or 13 at J66 R10 on the +24 Vdc power supply
* Never adjust the potentiometer labeled I.LIM.
Two potentiometers are labeled V.ADJ. One increases the voltage and the other decreases the voltage. Since these
two potentiometers are labeled identically, locate one of the potentiometers, make a small adjustment, then check
the voltage to verify you are making the desired change. If not, locate the other potentiometer labeled V.ADJ. before
proceeding.

MCL CPU Card

ATTENTION: MCL voltages are measured at the MCL CPU card but adjustments are made on
the corresponding MCL power supply in the Power Supply module right-side compartment.
r For the test point and/or ground locations, refer to Figure A.2-13.
r For power supply locations:
t If you are working with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, refer to Figure A.6-4.
t If you are working with a Universal Power Supply, refer to Figure A.7-5.

Table A.1-2 MCL Power Supply Voltage Adjustments (Measured at the MCL CPU Card)

Verify at the MCL CPU Card Adjust at the Power Supply

Voltage Test Point Ground Adjustment Potentiometer

+5.2 Vdc ±0.05 TP1 TP2 (GND) +5V ADJ on the +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
-12 Vdc ±0.05 TP3 TP2 (GND) -12V ADJ on the +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
+12 Vdc ±0.05 TP4 TP2 (GND) +12V ADJ on the +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
+24 Vdc ±0.05 TP5 TP2 (GND) V ADJ on the +24 Vdc MCL power supply

PN 4237029G A.1-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
TOLERANCES AND LIMITS

A.1-2 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
A.2 CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS
This appendix contains key component and test point locations as well as applicable jumper
and switch settings for circuit cards. The names of the individual circuit cards are listed
alphabetically in this section. The circuit cards are also listed in alphabetical order under the
category heading that is most applicable.

The category headings in this section include:

r Circuit Cards Located in the Cytometer
r Circuit Cards Located in the Universal Power Supply
r Circuit Cards Located in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
r Circuit Cards Located in the Workstation Computer

Circuit Cards Located in the Cytometer

Card Name Figure Reference

Amp / Signal Conditioner Card Figure A.2-1
Analyzer Backplane - Front View Figure A.2-2
Analyzer Backplane - Rear View Figure A.2-3
Bar-Code Decoder Card Figure A.2-4
Cyto Transputer Card Figure A.2-8
Fiber Optic Interface Card Figure A.2-10
Front Panel LED and Switch Input Card (XL only) Figure A.2-11
Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 Card (XL-MCL only) Figure A.2-12
MCL CPU Card Figure A.2-13
MCL Interface Card Figure A.2-14
PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card Figure A.2-17
Sensor Card Figure A.2-21
Solenoid Power Distribution Card Figure A.2-22
System Interface Card Figure A.2-23
Top Panel Display 2 Card Figure A.2-24
Trans Data Acquisition Card Figure A.2-25

PN 4237029G A.2-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Circuit Cards Located in the Universal Power Supply

Card Name Figure Reference

Breaker Card Figures A.2-5 and A.2-6
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor Card Figure A.2-9
Power Control 3 Card Figure A.2-18
Voltage Selector 2 Card Figure A.2-27
Voltage Supply Monitor Card Figure A.2-28

Circuit Cards Located in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Card Name Figure Reference

CYT12 Receiver EMC Card Figure A.2-7
Power Module Control Card (Non-EMC Version) Figure A.2-19
Power Module Control II Card (EMC Version) Figure A.2-20
Voltage Selector Card Figure A.2-26
Voltage Supply Monitor Card Figure A.2-28

Circuit Cards Located in the Workstation Computer

Card Name Figure Reference

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card (Non-EMC Version) Figure A.2-15
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card (EMC Version) Figure A.2-16

A.2-2 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Amp / Signal Conditioner Card

Circuit Card Locations in the Cytometer

On a four-color system, Amp / Signal Conditioner cards occupy seven slots in the Data
Acquisition card cage. Only six slots are used if it is a three-color system. This circuit card is
used in the slots labeled (left to right) SS, FS, AUX, PMT4 (missing in a three-color system),
PMT3, PMT2, and PMT1. To locate these Amp/Signal Conditioner cards, see Figure A.5-3.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-1 Amp / Signal Conditioner Card - Component Locations

PWB 1712951E
TP18

E4-E5

E2-E3
TP19
R34
7029189F

Jumpers
E2 to E3 and E4 to E5

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-3
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Analyzer Backplane - Front View

Backplane Location in the Cytometer

The Analyzer backplane is attached to the rear of the Data Acquisition card cage. Most of this
backplane is behind the Data Acquisition card cage so that only those components on the
lower portion of this backplane are easily accessible.

To easily access the lower portion of the Analyzer backplane, remove the Cytometer front
door and lock the Data Acquisition card cage in its upright position outside the Cytometer.

Components near the lower edge of the backplane (such as J66) may be accessed while the
Data Acquisition card cage is inside the Cytometer by simply lifting the front door and
unlatching the display panel.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-2 Analyzer Backplane, Front View - Component Locations
PWB 1712904B

MCL
INTERFACE
connector

PT2
(Digital
Ground)

PT1
(+5V)
7029254G
P32 J63 J65 J66

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

A.2-4 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Analyzer Backplane - Rear View

Backplane Location in the Cytometer

The Analyzer backplane is attached to the rear of the Data Acquisition card cage. To access
the rear of the Analyzer backplane, remove the Cytometer front door and lock the Data
Acquisition card cage in its upright position outside the Cytometer.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-3 Analyzer Backplane, Rear View - Component Locations
TP5 TP4 TP3 TP2 TP1
AGND +15V -15V DGND +5V

ANALYZER BACKPLANE
ASSY NO. 6705220
SCHEM NO. 6320633

PWB 1712904B

7318082B

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-5
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Bar-Code Decoder Card

ATTENTION: This card is present only when the MCL option is installed.

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Bar-Code Decoder card is the smaller of the two circuit cards attached to the MCL main
frame on the left-side of the Cytometer. This circuit card is present only when the MCL
option is installed. To locate the Bar-Code Decoder card, see Figure A.5-14.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-4 Bar-Code Decoder Card - Component Locations

To
Bar-Code Power ON
Scanner Head
Interlock
To (MCL DOOR)
MCL CPU LED

Good Read
Indicator

AUX
port 7029177F

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

A.2-6 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Breaker Card
ATTENTION: This circuit card is used in the Universal Power Supply, not the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply.

Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply

The front of the Breaker card consists of two banks of 12 circuit breakers that can be reset at
the front of the Universal Power Supply. This circuit card is located in the top compartment of
the Power Supply module between the upper front panel and the Voltage Selector 2 card.

When the main cover is removed from the Universal Power Supply, the Breaker card can be
accessed from the right side. The Voltage Selector 2 card must be removed to access the
Breaker card. To locate the Breaker card inside the Universal Power Supply, see Figure A.7-4.

Component Locations on the Front of the Breaker Card

The front of this circuit card contains 26 circuit breakers (Figure A.2-5).

Figure A.2-5 Front of the Breaker Card - Component Locations

CB12 CB11 CB10 CB9 CB8 CB7 CB6 CB5 CB4 CB3 CB2 CB1

CB25

CB26
CB24 CB23 CB22 CB21 CB20 CB19 CB18 CB17 CB16 CB15 CB14 CB13

7318351B

PN 4237029G A.2-7
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Component Locations on the Back of the Breaker Card

The back of this circuit card contains the low ac voltage connector (J1) and high ac voltage
connector (J2) to input the ac source voltage and connectors J3, J4, and J5. (Figure A.2-6).

Figure A.2-6 Back of the Breaker Card - Component Locations

BREAKER BOARD PWB 626415A SCHEM 626259 ASSY 626182 S/N

CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 CB6 CB7 CB8 CB9 CB10 CB11 CB12
15

16
30

1
J5 J3 J4
3 4 CB25 4 6

1
J1

CB26

J2
1 2 1 3

CB13 CB14 CB15 CB16 CB17 CB18 CB19 CB20 CB21 CB22 CB23 CB24

30

15
16
1

7318350B

For additional information, see Heading Voltage Selector 2 Card in this section.

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

A.2-8 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
CYT12 Receiver EMC Card
ATTENTION: This circuit card is only used in XL and XL-MCL instruments with the serial
number Z09063 or higher. XL and XL-MCL instruments with the serial number Z09062 or
lower do not use this circuit card.

Circuit Card Location in the Power Supply Module

The CYT12 Receiver EMC card is attached to the CYT12 connector on the rear of the Power
Supply module. The circuit card is inside the Power Supply module. To locate the CYT12
connector, see Figure A.6-5.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-7 CYT12 Receiver EMC Card - Component Locations

PWB 1713414C

7029194F

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-9
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Cyto Transputer Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Cyto (Cytometer) Transputer card occupies the slot labeled CYTO TRANS PROC in the Data
Acquisition card cage. To locate the Cyto Transputer card, see Figure A.5-3.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-8 Cyto Transputer Card - Component Locations
U51 U25

PWB 1712950B
X47
X13
X12

X10
X23

X9

X43
X7
X44
X51 X6
X38

X21
X4
X36
X31
X39
X35 7029146F

Jumpers
X4, X6, X7, X9,
X10, X12, X13,
X21, X23,
X31, X35, X36, X38, X39,
X43, X44, X47,
X51

Switches
N/A

A.2-10 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor Card

Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply

The FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card is used in the Universal Power Supply. This
circuit card is labeled as the Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card and, as such, is used inside
the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. When a special adhesive is applied to this circuit card (for
use inside the original FC 500 Power Supply modules and the Universal Power Supply), this
circuit card (with the special adhesive) is referred to as FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor
card and has a unique part number.

When the main cover is removed from the Universal Power Supply, the FC 500 Transient
Voltage Suppressor card is easily accessed.

To locate the FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card in the Universal Power Supply, see
Figure A.7-5.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-9 FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor Card - Component Locations

J1
1

VOLTAGE
DANGER
HIGH
PWB 1713433A

TRANSIENT
VOLTAGE
SUPPRESSOR 2

7318347B

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-11
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Fiber Optic Interface Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Fiber Optic Interface card is attached to the lower rear panel inside the Cytometer. To
locate the Fiber Optic Interface card, see Figure A.5-9.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-10 Fiber Optic Interface Card - Component Locations
X1

PWB 1712953E
X2

7318066D

Jumpers
X1 and X2

Switches
N/A

A.2-12 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Front Panel LED and Switch Input Card
ATTENTION: This card is present only when the MCL option is not installed.

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Front Panel LED and Switch Input card accepts data entry information when the overlay
membrane at the manual sample station on an XL flow cytometer is pressed. To locate the
Front Panel LED and Switch Input card, see Figure A.5-11.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-11 Front Panel LED and Switch Input Card - Component Locations
PWB 1713032B

P95

7029184F

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-13
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 Card

ATTENTION: This card is present only when the MCL option is installed.

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 card accepts data entry information when the
overlay membrane at the manual sample station on an XL-MCL flow cytometer is pressed. To
locate the Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 card, see Figure A.5-10.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-12 Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 Card - Component Locations

PWB 1712893B

J95

7029192F

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

A.2-14 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
MCL CPU Card
ATTENTION: This card is present only when the MCL option is installed.

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The MCL CPU card is the larger of the two circuit cards attached to the MCL main frame on
the left-side of the Cytometer. This circuit card is present only when the MCL option is
installed. To locate the MCL CPU card, see Figure A.5-14.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-13 MCL CPU Card - Component Locations
PARALLEL CONTROL PORT
connector

X4

X2
X3

X1

S1

PWB 1713028B

TP1

TP2

TP3

TP4

7318219B
TP5

Jumpers
X1, X2, X3, X4

Switches
S1 requires the following settings:
Position 1 = ON
Position 2 = ON
Position 3 = ON
Position 4 = OFF

PN 4237029G A.2-15
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

MCL Interface Card

ATTENTION: This card is present only when the MCL option is installed.

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The MCL Interface card occupies the slot labeled MCL INFC in the Data Acquisition card cage.
This circuit card is present only when the MCL option is installed. To locate the MCL
Interface card, see Figure A.5-3.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-14 MCL Interface Card - Component Locations

X4
PWB 1713023B

X3
X2
X1

7318218B

Jumpers
X1, X2, X3, X4

Switches
N/A

A.2-16 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card (Non-EMC Version)
Note: Opto Transprocessor EXMEM is short for Optical Transprocessor Extended Memory
card. This circuit card is used in all XL and XL-MCL instruments serial number Z09062 and
below.

Circuit Card Location in the Workstation

The Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card is located in the Workstation computer. In the
FlowCentre II tower computer, this circuit card is located in the bottom slot. In the original
FlowCentre desktop computer, this circuit card is located in far left slot.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-15 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM Card (Non-EMC Version) - Component Locations

X34
X33
X39

U16 (IN)

X30 X54

X66

Jumpers
X36
Uses 2 Transputers (U16 and U27)
X7, X8,
X12,
X55 X30, X33, X34, X36, X39,
X45,
X7 X56 X54, X55, X56, X57,
X8 X61 X61, X63, X66, X67, X68,
X63 X70,
X68 J2 from 1 to 2
X12
X67

U27 (IN) Switches

PWB 1712970B

N/A
X57

X45

J2 from 1 to 2 X70
7029190F

PN 4237029G A.2-17
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card (EMC Version)

Note: Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II is short for Optical Transprocessor Extended
Memory II card. This circuit card is used in all XL and XL-MCL instruments serial number
Z09063 and above.

Circuit Card Location in the Workstation

The Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card is located in the Workstation computer. In the
FlowCentre II tower computer, this circuit card is located in the bottom slot. In the original
FlowCentre desktop computer, this circuit card is located in far left slot.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-16 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card (EMC Version) - Component Locations

X35

U16 (OUT)

X52
X53
X54
X66 Jumpers
Uses Only 1 Transputer (U27)
X7, X8,
X12,
X35,
X45,
X56
X7 X52, X53, X55, X57,
X55
X8 X61, X63, X66, X67, X68,
X61
X63 X70, X77, X78,
X12 X68 J2 from 1 to 2
PWB 1713415B

X67

U27 (IN)
Switches
X45 X57 N/A

X70
J2 from 1 to 2

X78
X77
7029195F

A.2-18 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card is attached to the optical bench inside the
Cytometer. To locate the PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card, see Figure A.5-4.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-17 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control Card - Component Locations
P94 J69 J97 P92 J85

PWB 1712892A

P111 J93 J91 J90 J89 J88 J87 J86

(Laser interlock
switch input)
Interchangeable connectors
for providing power to PMTs,
side scatter diode, and FS detector 7029183G

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-19
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Power Control 3 Card

ATTENTION: This circuit card is only used in the Universal Power Supply. If you are working on
a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, see the Power Module Control Card (Non-EMC Version)
heading or Power Module Control II Card (EMC Version) heading, whichever is applicable.

Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply

The Power Control 3 card is an EMC card used on the Universal Power Supply. When the
back cover is removed from the Power Supply module, the Power Control 3 card can be
accessed easily. Since it is now mounted on the rear of the Power Supply module, it is not
necessary to remove the main cover. To locate the Power Control 3 card, see Figure A.7-6.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-18 Power Control 3 Card - Component Locations
CYT12 connector AUX LASER ARGON LASER

Fan
J78
connectors
LASER

P20
POWER MODULE
CONTROL SIGNAL INPUT
J82
SYSTEM POWER

J74
WASTE LEVEL
PWB 179493F

J77
COMPRESSOR

P70 LASER P\S REMOTE INPUT connector

(also referred to as laser power supply interface) 7318238C

Jumpers and Switches

N/A

A.2-20 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Power Module Control Card (Non-EMC Version)
Note: The Power Module Control card is used in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply on XL
and XL-MCL instruments with a Cytometer serial number Z09062 or lower.

Circuit Card Location in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

The Power Module Control card is inside the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. When the
three-sided cover is removed from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, the Power Module
Control card can be accessed from the left side. The circuit card is attached to the inside rear
cover. To locate the Power Control Module card, see Figure A.6-3.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-19 Power Module Control Card (Non-EMC Version) - Component Locations
PWB 1712906B

J72
(Compressor P70 LASER P\S REMOTE
power connector) INPUT connector
(also referred to as laser
power supply interface)

E14
(Connector for S13)

E15
(Connector for S13)

7029187F

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-21
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Power Module Control II Card (EMC Version)

Note: The Power Module Control II card is used in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply on XL
and XL-MCL instruments with a Cytometer serial number Z09063 or higher.

Circuit Card Location in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

The Power Module Control II card is inside the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. When the
three-sided cover is removed from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, the Power Module
Control II card can be accessed from the left side. The circuit card is attached to the inside
rear cover. To locate the Power Control Module II card, see Figure A.6-3.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-20 Power Module Control II Card (EMC Version) - Component Locations

J72
(Compressor P70 LASER P\S REMOTE
power connector) INPUT connector
(also referred to as laser
power supply interface)

E14
(Connector for S13)

E15
(Connector for S13)

PWB 1713413C

7318229B

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

A.2-22 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Sensor Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Sensor card is located inside the upper pneumatics drawer. To locate the Sensor card, see
Figure A.5-5.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-21 Sensor Card - Component Locations

Sample pressure
sensor

PWB 1712902E

Sheath sensor

J103

J101

J102
7029186G

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-23
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Solenoid Power Distribution Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Solenoid Power Distribution card is located inside the lower pneumatics drawer. To
locate the Solenoid Power Distribution card, see Figure A.5-15.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-22 Solenoid Power Distribution Card - Component Locations
PWB 1713036C

7029193F

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

A.2-24 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
System Interface Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The System Interface card occupies the slot labeled SYS INFC in the Data Acquisition card
cage. To locate the System Interface card, see Figure A.5-3.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-23 System Interface Card - Component Locations

PWB 1712965D
X7
X4
S2 X1
X5
SHEATH
X6
ZERO
TP2
SHEATH
GAIN
SAMPLE
ZERO
TP3
SAMPLE 7318217B
GAIN S1

Jumpers
X1, X4, X5, X6, X7

Switches
S1 requires the following settings:
Position 1 = OFF
Position 2 = OFF
Position 3 = OFF
Position 4 = OFF
Position 5 = ON

PN 4237029G A.2-25
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Top Panel Display 2 Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Top Panel Display 2 card is attached to the back of the front display panel. To access this
circuit card the front display panel must be lifted. To locate the Top Panel Display 2 card, see
Figure A.5-16.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-24 Top Panel Display 2 Card - Component Locations
PWB 1712896D

7029185F

P77 P76 P75

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

A.2-26 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Trans Data Acquisition Card

Circuit Card Location in the Cytometer

The Trans Data Acquisition card occupies the slot labeled DATA AQC in the Data Acquisition
card cage. To locate the Trans Data Acquisition card, see Figure A.5-3.

Component Locations
Figure A.2-25 Trans Data Acquisition Card - Component Locations
PWB 1712946D

E6

E5

X2
E3
X3 E2
E1

7318216B

Jumpers
E1to E2, X2, X3, E5 to E6

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-27
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Voltage Selector Card

ATTENTION: This circuit card is only used in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. If you are
working on a Universal Power Supply, see the Heading Voltage Selector 2 Card that follows.

Circuit Card Location in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

The Voltage Selector card is only used in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. When the
three-sided cover is removed from the Power Supply module, the Voltage Selector card can be
accessed in the upper compartment. To locate the Voltage Selector card, see Figure A.6-3.

The Voltage Selector card selects the proper line voltage for the circuit breaker dedicated to
that voltage. The Voltage Selector card selects the proper line voltage for six circuit breakers:

r 24 VOLTS circuit breaker

r COMPRESSOR circuit breaker
r MCL 24 VOLTS circuit breaker
r 5 VOLTS circuit breaker
r 15 VOLTS circuit breaker
r MCL 5 VOLTS circuit breaker

For the location of these circuit breakers, see Figure A.6-5. For more information concerning
the selected voltages, see Table A.6-5.

The Voltage Selector card is supply voltage specific. To meet the power requirements for
various countries, four versions of this circuit card are available:

r Voltage Selector card for a 100 Vac system

r Voltage Selector card for a 120 Vac system
r Voltage Selector card for a 220 Vac system
r Voltage Selector card for a 230/240 Vac system

Each circuit card has a unique part number that can be located under Chapter 8, PARTS
LISTS.

Since the layout of these circuit cards is similar, only the Voltage Selector card for the 120 Vac
system is illustrated. Applicable jumper and switch information is supplied for all versions.

A.2-28 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Component Locations
Figure A.2-26 Voltage Selector Card for 120 Vac System - Component Locations
J4
±15 Vac supply

PWB 1712909C
J5
+24 Vac supply
J3
+5 Vac supply

J129 J130
MCL +5 Vac supply MCL +24 Vac supply
MCL ±12 Vac supply

J79 J78
Compressor ac ac input

7318226B

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-29
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Voltage Selector 2 Card

ATTENTION: This circuit card is only used in the Universal Power Supply. If you are working on
a Voltage-Specific Power Supply, see the previous Heading Voltage Selector Card.

Circuit Card Location in the Universal Power Supply

The Voltage Selector 2 card is only used in the Universal Power Supply. When the main cover
is removed from the Power Supply module, the Voltage Selector 2 card can be accessed in the
upper compartment attached inside the front panel. To locate the Voltage Selector 2 card, see
Figure A.7-4.

Voltage Selection
During Installation, the source voltage input to the system must be manually selected on the
Voltage Selector 2 card. The Voltage Selector 2 card works in conjunction with the Breaker
card to facilitate easy configuration of the system to any worldwide voltage and frequency.
When shipped, the voltage select cable is tethered inside the top compartment. This special
cable has two male connectors that are used to set up the appropriate voltage.

r If the ac source voltage is 100 Vac, one end of the voltage select cable is attached to the
connector on the low ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J1) and the loose end of the
voltage select cable is then attached to the connector labeled J151 100 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card (Figure A.2-27).
r If the ac source voltage is 120 Vac, one end of the voltage select cable is attached to the
connector on the low ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J1) and the loose end of the
voltage select cable is then attached to the connector labeled J152 120 VAC on the Voltage
Selector 2 card (Figure A.2-27).
r If the ac source voltage is 220 Vac, attach one end of the voltage select cable to the
connector on the high ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J2) and the loose end of the
voltage select cable to the connector labeled J153 220 VAC on the Voltage Selector 2 card
(Figure A.2-27).
r If the ac source voltage is 230/240 Vac, one end of the voltage select cable is attached to
the connector on the high ac voltage side of the Breaker card (J2) and the loose end of
the voltage select cable is then attached to the connector labeled J154 240 VAC on the
Voltage Selector 2 card (Figure A.2-27).

When powered up, the voltage select cable acts as a jumper strap to route the ac input
supplied from the Breaker card to the selected connector (100 Vac, 120 Vac, 220 Vac, or
240 Vac) on the Voltage Selector 2 card.

For additional information, see Heading Breaker Card in this section.

A.2-30 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Component Locations
Figure A.2-27 Voltage Selector 2 Card - Component Locations
J129
(MCL +5 and ±12 Vac supply; J4 J3 J5
MCL +24 Vac supply) (±15 Vac supply) (+5 Vac supply) (+24 Vac supply)

WARNING
*HIGH VOLTAGE*

PWB 177821B

J151 J152 SYSTEM J155 J15 J154

(100 Vac) (120 Vac) RELAY (Compressor) (220 Vac) (240 Vac)

7318237B

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-31
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

Voltage Supply Monitor Card

Circuit Card Location in the Power Supply Module

The Voltage Supply Monitor card is used in both the Universal Power Supply and the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply. When the main cover is removed from the Power Supply
module, the Voltage Supply Monitor card can be accessed from the right side and is attached
to the inside front panel.

To locate the Voltage Supply Monitor card:

r In the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, see Figure A.6-4.
r In the Universal Power Supply, see Figure A.7-5.

Front Panel Label

The dc supply voltages being monitored by the Voltage Supply Monitor card are grouped
according to voltages supplied to the SYSTEM or voltages supplied to the MCL assembly.

r SYSTEM POWER +5 Vdc supply

r SYSTEM POWER +15 Vdc supply
r SYSTEM POWER -15 Vdc supply
r SYSTEM POWER +24 Vdc supply
r MCL POWER +5 Vdc supply
r MCL POWER +12 Vdc supply
r MCL POWER -12 Vdc supply
r MCL POWER +24 Vdc supply

The voltage supply indicators can be monitored from the front of the Power Supply module:
r In the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, see Figure A.6-2. The front door must be opened.
r In the Universal Power Supply, see Figure A.7-2. The front door contains a window for
viewing the voltage supply indicators without opening the door.

A.2-32 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS A
Component Locations
Figure A.2-28 Voltage Supply Monitor Card - Component Locations
J135

CR1
SYSTEM POWER +5 Vdc supply indicator

CR2
SYSTEM POWER +15 Vdc supply indicator

CR3
SYSTEM POWER -15 Vdc supply indicator

CR4
SYSTEM POWER +24 Vdc supply indicator

CR5
MCL POWER +5 Vdc supply indicator

CR6
MCL POWER +12 Vdc supply indicator

CR7
MCL POWER -12 Vdc supply indicator
PWB 1713030A

CR8
MCL POWER +24 Vdc supply indicator

7029191G

Jumpers
N/A

Switches
N/A

PN 4237029G A.2-33
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CIRCUIT CARD LAYOUTS WITH KEY COMPONENTS

A.2-34 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
PROTOCOL PARAMETERS A
A.3 PROTOCOL PARAMETERS
CHANNEL_500 Protocol
Table A.3-1 CHANNEL_500 Protocol

Histogram Parameter Signals Gating Analysis Region

1 Dual FS vs. SS RECT GATE A
2 Single FS On region A B
3 Single FL1 On region A C
4 Single FL2 On region A D
5 Single FL3 On region A E
6 Single FL4 On region A F
7 Single SS On region A G

Settings: SAMPLE DELIVERY LOW

COMPENSATION All signals = 0%
DISCRIMINATOR FS = 100
STOP On Histogram 1 for 10,000 events

Switch Point 1 Test

Table A.3-2 LIN/LOG SWITCH POINT 1 TEST Protocol

Histogram Parameter Signals Gain Gating Analysis Region

1 Dual FS vs. SS N/A RECT GATE A
2 Single FSLOG 100.0 On region A B
3 Single SSLOG 1.0 On region A C
4 Single FL1LOG 1.0 On region A D
5 Single FL2LOG 1.0 On region A E
6 Single FL3LOG 1.0 On region A F
7 Single FL4LOG 1.0 On region A G

Settings: DISCRIMINATOR FS = 35
COMPENSATION All signals = 0%
STOP On Histogram 1 for 40,000 counts
FLOW RATE LOW

PN 4237029G A.3-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
PROTOCOL PARAMETERS

Acquiring Fluorospheres
Table A.3-3 Protocol to Acquire Fluorospheres

Histogram Parameter Signals Gating Analysis Region

1 Dual FS vs. SS RECT GATE A
2 Single FS On region A B
3 Single FL1 On region A C
4 Single FL2 On region A D
5 Single FL3 On region A E
6 Single FL4 On region A F
7 Single SS On region A G

Settings: FLOW RATE LOW

COMPENSATION All signals = 0%
DISCRIMINATOR FS = 100
Stop On Histogram 2 for 5,000 events
Autoprint ON

A.3-2 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE A
A.4 PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE
Table A.4-1 provides a quick reference of available tests that may be accessed when the
Prefinal Service software is installed and operated using the guidelines provided under
Heading 4.2, PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND OPERATION. The
Prefinal tests in Table A.4-1 are listed in alphabetical order.

If you desire more information concerning these tests, go to Heading 7.2, PREFINAL
SERVICE SOFTWARE - A TROUBLESHOOTING TOOL where the various tests available
within this software are listed with a more detailed description of the test, the areas of the
instrument being checked, and suggestions on what to check if a test should fail.

Available Tests
Table A.4-1 Tests on Prefinal Software Diskette

Test Function
ADC Zero Adjust Calibrates ADC zero on Trans Data Acquisition card. See Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA
ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION for replacement procedures
for the Trans Data Acquisition Card.
Amp Gain Control Allows control of gain for each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.
Amp Saturation Test Ensures proper calibration of Amp/Signal Conditioner cards for saturation point. Can not be
adjusted in field.
Attenuator Control Allows control of each Amp/Signal Conditioner card attenuator.
Beeper Test Tests for proper beeper operation.
Canyon Jumper Test Ensures ramp jumper installed on Amp/Signal Conditioner card.
Count Rate Test Tests count rate register on Trans Data Acquisition card.
DMA Acquisition Not used.
Front Panel Test Tests Front Panel Display card indicator LEDs.
General Information Describes operation of function keys.
Grand Canyon Adjust Adjusts Gap/Spike on Amp/Signal Conditioner cards. Perform test following replacement of
any Amp/Signal Conditioner card; refer to Heading 4.15, AMP/SIGNAL CONDITIONER
CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR CALIBRATION.
Grand Canyon Test Quick test for gap/spike adjustment.
Histogram Test Checks the histograms generated by the ADC on the Trans Data Acquisition card for gaps
between channels of a normal distribution.
Initialize System Sets a 5 V peak pulse on all Amp/Signal Conditioner cards.
Laser Control Turns laser on/off. Can be used to check laser current reading.
Laser Warm Up Provides a graph of the laser current during startup.
Lock Up Test Not used.
MCL Bar Code Head Test Perform this test before installing a replacement scanner head.
MCL Bar Code Test Allows proper adjustment of bar-code head position alignment.
MCL Burn In Developed for engineering purposes.
MCL Carousel Label Ensures carousel label is of readable quality.

PN 4237029G A.4-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE

Table A.4-1 Tests on Prefinal Software Diskette (Continued)

Test Function
MCL Carousel Status Checks quickly for carousel alignment.
MCL Door Switch Test Checks for proper operation of MCL option door switch.
MCL Finger Test Allows proper adjustment of finger rotator.
MCL Home Align Allows user to adjust carousel alignment.
MCL Manual Control Similar to MCL Terminal but does not require keyboard command codes.
MCL Mix Test Tests proper operation of mixer motor. Stop test to end mixing.
MCL Pneumatic Status Quick check of flag sensors.
MCL Power Up Status Resets MCL option to startup mode.
MCL Probe Align Allows proper adjustment of probe position in test tube.
MCL ROM Test Checks CPU for correct ROM revision.
MCL Scan Reliability Developed for engineering purposes.
MCL Stepper Noise Test Tests stepper motor for excessive noise.
MCL Terminal Allows manual control of MCL option through keyboard command codes; refer to
Table A.4-2.
Memory Test Tests external memory of all four transputers.
Mike’s Test Not used.
New Board For future hardware development.
Noise Test and Offset ATTENTION: Use this test only as a reference. Do not make adjustments.
Checks the noise and offset of the system.
OPTO DMA Test Tests DMA transfer of Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card.
OPTO Interrupt Test Tests Opto Transprocessor interrupt.
OPTO Link Test Tests fiber optics interface from Computer Workstation to Cytometer.
PMT Voltage Control Allows control of HV supplies for PMTs.
Pneumatic Sensor Test Checks for proper operation of System Interface card and pressure sensors.
Pulse RAMP Test Tests bar graphs on Front Panel Display card and ramp pulse on Trans Data Acquisition card.
ROM Test Checks ROM on Cyto Transputer card for correct version.
Run Beads Test allows a sample to be run on the Cytometer to align the optical system using a digital
oscilloscope.
Sample Leak Test Tests both manual and MCL option head for sample pressure leak.
Scope Test Not used.
Segment Valve Test Tests for proper rotation of segmenting valve pads.
Set N Transputers Checks and sets the number of transputers in the system (Cytometer and Workstation
computer).
System Parameter Test Test shows the level variation (noise) on the system parameters of the system.

A.4-2 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE A
Table A.4-1 Tests on Prefinal Software Diskette (Continued)

Test Function
T805 Test Tests to verify proper T805 chip installed on Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card.
Note: Failure of this test may indicate the circuit card has an INS425/INS405 transputer
(instead of the INS805 transputer). If the test fails, inspect U16. If the T805 (INS805) is
missing or has been replaced by a 400 series device, then disregard the failure.
Temperature Test Monitors and check the thermistor on the System Interface card.
Valve Burn In Continuously tests sample stage up/down and rotation of segmenting valve.
Valve Control Allows manual control of each valve. Used for pneumatic calibration and locating air leak.
Valve Sequence Allows system to be drained and cleaned for shipping.
VME Addr Bus Test Tests VME address bus by writing a digital word and reading it back to see if it matches.
VME Data Bus Test Tests VME data bus by writing a digital word and reading it back to see if it matches.
Waste Chamber Full Test Checks for proper operation of eyeball sensor by emptying/filling waste chamber. Currently
no specification on elapsed time to empty/fill chamber. Remove panels to perform test.
XY Display Not used.

PN 4237029G A.4-3
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
PREFINAL SERVICE SOFTWARE

MCL Option Commands

Table A.4-2 MCL Option Commands

Name Keystrokes Action

Master Reset Èmr Place carousel on turntable before executing this command. Always execute this
command before any other command.

Resets MCL option, brings carousel out, places it in home position.

Carousel Home Èch Places carousel number label in front of bar-code scanner.

Tests carousel home position sensor located under turntable stage.

Carousel In Èci Moves carousel from out position to in position.

Checks operation of carousel in/out sensor. If sensor does not see flag moved
through sensor, carousel is pushed back out.
Carousel Out Èco Moves carousel from in position to out position.

Carousel Load Ècl Places carousel in load-carousel position.

Probe Down Èpd Moves pickup probe to down position.

Checks probe up/down sensor to ensure change of state occurred.

Probe stays down after successful completion of command.
Probe Up Èpu Moves pickup probe to up position.

Lifter Up Èlu Lifts vortex motor up.

Checks lifter sensor for change of state as flag passes through sensor.
Lifter stays up after successful completion of command.
Lifter Down Èld Lowers vortex mixer.

Lifter Mix Èlm Activates vortex motor.

Only active when a tube is sensed.

Finger Out Èxn Moves tube rotate finger out.

Finger In Èxo Moves tube rotate finger in.

Scanner Enable Èg Activates scanner head.

A.4-4 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
A.5 CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Instructions for Use
Most Cytometer functions are accomplished by fluidic components that are interconnected
by tubing and controlled by timed solenoid signals. This section briefly describes the
functions of these fluidic components and shows their locations.

To expedite finding the name, location, or description of a component, the illustrations and
tables in this section are organized in functional groups. Figure A.5-1 is the anchor
illustration from which you can quickly access a specific illustration.

Figure A.5-1 is referred to as the anchor illustration because it serves as the reference point
for accessing other illustrations. This anchor illustration uses an alphabetic letter to indicate a
portion of the Cytometer that correlates with a location description provided in the Figure
Reference column. This figure reference points to the main areas in the Cytometer.

If you have never used an anchor illustration to locate a component and its functions, you
may want to begin by reading the following instructions:

1. To quickly locate a component, always begin at the anchor illustration, Figure A.5-1.
2. On the anchor illustration, locate the area of the Cytometer where the component in
question is located and note the associated letter.
3. Locate the associated letter in the Figure Reference column and note the figure number
that best fits the configuration of the instrument.
4. Go to the referenced figure number.
Note: In the electronic version, each figure reference is in hypertext so that when you
select the reference, the illustration quickly appears. Using the hypertext link is the
fastest way to access a component location or information.
5. Locate the component. The number associated with the component identifies its name
and also provides a figure reference for locating the component’s function on the
associated table. Each table also includes the reference designator for the component,
where applicable.

PN 4237029G A.5-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Cytometer Anchor Illustration

Figure A.5-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Anchor Illustration for Locating Figure Reference
Components
A Components accessed
A
with the top cover
removed, Figure A.5-2
I r Interlock switch,
Figure A.5-2
H r Data Acquisition card
cage, Figure A.5-3
B r Optical collection area,
rear view (includes laser
and PMTs), Figure A.5-4
C B Components accessed
G with the right side cover
removed, Figure A.5-5
C Components accessed
C o u lte r E p ic s X L • M C L
D with the center front cover
removed, A.5-6
Front view
F Components accessed
with the filter shield
removed, A.5-7
D Components inside the
reagent drawer,
Figure A.5-8
E Rear panel components,
Figure A.5-9
F Manual sample station
components,
r Unit with MCL option,
Figure A.5-10
r Unit without MCL
option, Figure A.5-11
Segmenting valve,
Figure A.5-12
G MCL option components,
Rear view r Carousel, Figure A.5-13
7029205F E r Components accessed
with covers removed,
Figure A.5-14
H Components accessed
with the left side cover
removed including the
lower pneumatics drawer,
Figure A.5-15
I Front panel display
components, Figure A.5-16

A.5-2 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Component and Assembly Accessibility

Figure
Reference Main Component or Assembly that is Accessible To Access Component or Assembly
A.5-1, A Data Acquisition card cage Must remove the top cover.
Optical collection area
r Argon laser head, plenum, duct
r Laser cooling fans
r PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card
r PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, and PMT4 (if a four-color system)
A.5-1, B Upper pneumatics drawer Must remove the top cover then the right
QD13 and QD14 side cover.

Water trap filter and associated components

Cooling coil
A.5-1, C Light filters in slots 1 through 9 Must remove the center front cover (filter
Neutral density spring-loaded knob cover).

Side scatter diode Must remove the center front cover (filter
Forward Scatter detector cover), manual sample station, and the filter
shield.
Beamshaper assembly
If the MCL option is installed, must remove
Flow cell and/or fluorescence pickup lens the center front cover (filter cover),
unlatched the MCL covers from the
Cytometer frame, remove the manual
sample station, then remove the filter
shield.
A.5-1, D Sheath liquid filter Must pull the reagent drawer open.
Sheath liquid filter purge (vent) connections
Sheath container
Cleaning agent container
A.5-1, E Fans If possible, stand behind the Cytometer.
Fiber Optics Interface card Note: To replace components, it may be
CYTO dc power EMI harness cable necessary to separate the rear panel from
the Cytometer frame.
Pressure, vacuum, and two waste quick-connects
r If it is necessary to remove the left or
right-side cover, the top cover must be
removed before the side cover can be
removed.
r If it is necessary to remove the left side
cover and the MCL option is installed,
you must remove the top cover, unlatch
the MCL from the Cytometer frame,
then remove the left side cover.

PN 4237029G A.5-3
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-1 XL Cytometer with MCL Option, Component and Assembly Accessibility (Continued)

Figure
Reference Main Component or Assembly that is Accessible To Access Component or Assembly
A.5-1, F Data entry membrane switches Exterior access.
Sample tube holder Pull open the manual sample station door.
Front Panel LED and Switch Input card Must remove the manual sample station.
Ribbon cables and latches If the MCL option is installed, must remove
Segmenting valve the center front cover (filter cover),
unlatched the MCL covers from the
Cytometer frame, then remove the manual
sample station.
A.5-1, G Carousel components Must open or remove MCL covers.
MCL main frame assembly Must remove the top cover, unlatch the
MCL from the Cytometer frame, and
remove the left side cover.
A.5-1, H Lower pneumatics drawer Must remove the top cover then the left side
Back of mounting plate for laser cooling fans cover.
If the MCL option is installed, must remove
the top cover, unlatch the MCL from the
Cytometer frame, then remove the left side
cover.
A.5-1, I Front panel display For observation only.
Top Panel Display 2 card Must lift the front panel display door.
Window display

A.5-4 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Components Accessed with the Cytometer Top Cover Removed
The Cytometer interlock switch and Data Acquisition Card Cage are accessible when the
Cytometer top cover is removed. The rear section of the Optical Collection Area is accessible
when the Cytometer top cover is removed and the Data Acquisition card cage is removed
from the center cavity.

Figure A.5-2 Components Accessed with the Cytometer Top Cover Removed (See Table A.5-2)
1

1. Data Acquisition card cage

2. Cytometer interlock switch

Optical collection area

(underneath the Data Acquisition card cage) 7029224F

PN 4237029G A.5-5
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-2 Components Accessed with the Cytometer Top Cover Removed and Their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-2, 1 Data Acquisition card cage Houses the electronic circuit cards inside the Cytometer
(Figure A.5-3). Most procedures require the card cage be
lifted out of the Cytometer and locked in its vertical
position. Under Heading 4.25, see Heading Removing the
Data Acquisition Card Cage from the Cytometer Center
Cavity for instructions.
A.5-2, 2 Cytometer interlock switch Safety interlock to ensure the Cytometer top cover is in
place when the Argon laser is on. If the laser is on and the
cover is removed, this interlock turns off the power to the
Argon laser head.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when

operating the instrument when the safety interlock switch
in the Cytometer is defeated, as you may be exposed to
the laser beam and/or electric shock. After servicing the
instrument, make sure covers are properly reinstalled to
reactivate any safety interlock switch that was bypassed
while servicing the instrument.

To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch

up and power is restored to the Argon laser head even
though the cover is removed.

Always be very careful if you bypass this safety interlock

and operate the instrument with the covers off. The
interlock switch is reset when the cover is reinstalled.
A.5-2 Optical collection area Houses the Argon laser head, flow cell, and the various
optical components needed to detect light and fluorescent
signals.
Rear section is located underneath the Data Acquisition
card cage (Figure A.5-4) and the front section is located
behind the filter shield (Figure A.5-7). The center front
cover (filter cover) must first be removed to access the
filter shield.
The front section consists of the beamshaping assembly,
flow cell, FS detector, SS diode, and various light filters.
The rear section consists of the Argon laser head, air
ducts, laser blower assembly, PMT Distribution and Laser
Fan Control card, and PMTs.

A.5-6 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Data Acquisition Card Cage
The Data Acquisition card cage is accessible when the Cytometer top cover is removed.
However, most procedures require the card cage be lifted out of the Cytometer and locked in
its vertical position.

Data Acquisition Card Cage, Component Locations

Figure A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage (See Table A.5-3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

H V H V
C Y T O S Y S
M C L D A T A P M T 4 P M T 3
T R A N S IN T E R F A C E IN T F C A Q C S S F S A U X T E S T P M T 4 P M T 3 P M T 2 P M T 1
P R O C H V H V
P M T 1 P M T 2

15
15

E 2 7

17 16

1. Cyto Transputer card 10. PMT3 Amp/Signal Conditioner card

2. MCL Interface card 11. PMT2 Amp/Signal Conditioner card
3. System Interface card 12. PMT1 Amp/Signal Conditioner card
4. Trans Data Acquisition card 13. PMT4 HV power supply
5. SS Amp/Signal Conditioner card 14. PMT3 HV power supply
6. FS Amp/Signal Conditioner card 15. Hinge, left and right
7. AUX Amp/Signal Conditioner card 16. PMT2 HV power supply
8. Empty slot 17. PMT1 HV power supply 7029206F
9. PMT4 Amp/Signal Conditioner card

PN 4237029G A.5-7
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage, Components and Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-3, 1 Cyto Transputer card Circuit card located in Slot 1 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320738
Master processor for the Cytometer that controls the
communication among all the circuit cards in the
Cytometer. Via the Fiber Optics Interface card attached to
the Cytometer lower rear panel, this circuit card serves as
the communication link to the Opto Transprocessor
EXMEM or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card located
inside the Workstation computer.
Receives digital data from the Trans Data Acquisition card
and sends this digital data to Fiber Optics Interface card
where the digital data is converted to optical data that is
sent to the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the Workstation
computer where the optical data is converted back to
digital data that is used to create the histograms displayed
on the Workstation screen.
A.5-3, 2 MCL Interface card If the MCL option is installed, this circuit card is located in Refer to
Slot 2 of the Data Acquisition card cage (left to right PN 6321034
orientation).
Communicates command instructions to the MCL CPU
card to operate the MCL option.
A.5-3, 3 System Interface card Circuit card located in Slot 3 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320782
Controls and monitors all system functions, laser ON/OFF,
valve activation. Also monitors internal system
temperatures.
A.5-3, 4 Trans Data Acquisition card Circuit card located in Slot 4 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320732
Receives analog signal data from all Amp/Signal
Conditioner cards (SS, FS, AUX, PMT4, PMT3, PMT2, and
PMT1). Circuit card contains an ADC that converts the
analog signal to digital data which is then sent to the Cyto
Transputer card.
A.5-3, 5 SS Amp/Signal Conditioner Circuit card located in Slot 5 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
card cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320739
Receives the analog signal from the side scatter diode and
and amplifies that signal before sending it to the Trans
Data Acquisition card.
Note: All the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards are
interchangeable. Addressing for the designated parameter
is determined by the location (slot) where the circuit card
is inserted into the Analyzer backplane (attached to the
rear of the Data Acquisition card cage).

A.5-8 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage, Components and Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-3, 6 FS Amp/Signal Conditioner Circuit card located in Slot 6 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
card cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320739
Receives the analog signal from the forward scatter
detector and amplifies that signal before sending it to the
Trans Data Acquisition card.
Note: All the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards are
interchangeable. Addressing for the designated parameter
is determined by the location (slot) where the circuit card
is inserted into the Analyzer backplane (attached to the
rear of the Data Acquisition card cage
A.5-3, 7 AUX Amp/Signal Conditioner Circuit card located in Slot 7 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
card cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320739
User defined fluorescent channel that receives analog peak
voltage pulse signals from either PMT1, PMT2, PMT3, or
PMT4. PMT selection is designated by the user via the
protocol.
When a PMT is selected as AUX on a protocol, peak analog
pulses from the designated PMT are simultaneously sent
to the AUX Amp/Signal Conditioner card and the
corresponding PMT Amp/Signal Conditioner card.
r At the AUX Amp/Signal Conditioner card, the peak
signal is amplified then sent to the Trans Data
Acquisition card.
r At the corresponding PMT Amp/Signal Conditioner
card, the peak signal is amplified and held in an active
integrating mode. The integral pulse is then sent to the
Trans Data Acquisition card.
Note: All the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards are
interchangeable. Addressing for the designated parameter
is determined by the location (slot) where the circuit card
is inserted into the Analyzer backplane (attached to the
rear of the Data Acquisition card cage
A.5-3, 8 Empty slot Slot 8 of the Data Acquisition card cage (left to right
orientation).

PN 4237029G A.5-9
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage, Components and Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-3, 9 PMT4 Amp/Signal Conditioner Circuit card is located in Slot 9 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
card (optional) cage (left to right orientation) only when the four-color PN 6320739
option is installed.
Receives Gaussian-shaped analog signals from PMT4.
Each analog signal is amplified and held in an active
integrating mode to produce an integral pulse that is sent
to the Trans Data Acquisition card.
Note: All the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards are
interchangeable. Addressing for the designated parameter
is determined by the location (slot) where the circuit card
is inserted into the Analyzer backplane (attached to the
rear of the Data Acquisition card cage
A.5-3, 10 PMT3 Amp/Signal Conditioner Circuit card located in Slot 10 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
card cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320739
Receives Gaussian-shaped analog signals from PMT3.
Each analog signal is amplified and held in an active
integrating mode to produce an integral pulse that is sent
to the Trans Data Acquisition card.
Note: All the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards are
interchangeable. Addressing for the designated parameter
is determined by the location (slot) where the circuit card
is inserted into the Analyzer backplane (attached to the
rear of the Data Acquisition card cage
A.5-3, 11 PMT2 Amp/Signal Conditioner Circuit card located in Slot 11 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
card cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320739
Receives Gaussian-shaped analog signals from PMT2.
Each analog signal is amplified and held in an active
integrating mode to produce an integral pulse that is sent
to the Trans Data Acquisition card.
Note: All the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards are
interchangeable. Addressing for the designated parameter
is determined by the location (slot) where the circuit card
is inserted into the Analyzer backplane (attached to the
rear of the Data Acquisition card cage
A.5-3, 12 PMT1 Amp/Signal Conditioner Circuit card located in Slot 12 of the Data Acquisition card Refer to
card cage (left to right orientation). PN 6320739
Receives Gaussian-shaped analog signals from PMT1.
Each analog signal is amplified and held in an active
integrating mode to produce an integral pulse that is sent
to the Trans Data Acquisition card.
Note: All the Amp/Signal Conditioner cards are
interchangeable. Addressing for the designated parameter
is determined by the location (slot) where the circuit card
is inserted into the Analyzer backplane (attached to the
rear of the Data Acquisition card cage

A.5-10 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage, Components and Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-3, 13 PMT4 HV power supply In the HV power supply section of the Data Acquisition
(optional) card cage, the PMT4 HV power supply is located in the
upper left quadrant when the four-color option is installed.
In response to the HV gain setting defined by the operator,
provides high voltage (HV) to the PMT4 assembly for
amplifying the Gaussian-shaped analog signal before it is
sent to the PMT4 Amp/Signal Conditioner card (and AUX
Amp/Signal Conditioner card, if applicable).
Note: All PMT HV power supplies are interchangeable.
Addressing for the designated parameter is determined by
the location where the power supply is connected to the
Analyzer backplane (attached to the rear of the Data
Acquisition card cage.
A.5-3, 14 PMT3 HV power supply In the HV power supply section of the Data Acquisition
card cage, the PMT3 HV power supply is located in the
upper right quadrant.
In response to the HV gain setting defined by the operator,
provides high voltage (HV) to the PMT3 assembly for
amplifying the Gaussian-shaped analog signal before it is
sent to the PMT3 Amp/Signal Conditioner card (and AUX
Amp/Signal Conditioner card, if applicable).
Note: All PMT HV power supplies are interchangeable.
Addressing for the designated parameter is determined by
the location where the power supply is connected to the
Analyzer backplane (attached to the rear of the Data
Acquisition card cage.
A.5-3, 15 Hinge, left and right These hinges are use to lock the Data Acquisition card
cage in a vertical position outside of the Cytometer. To
properly lock the card cage:
1. With one hand, pull the Data Acquisition card cage
forward and hold it in an upright position.
2. With your free hand, lock the hinge on each side of the
card cage to secure the card cage in this vertical
position.
3. Make sure both hinges are locked before releasing
your grip.
To lower the card cage back into the center cavity of the
Cytometer:
1. Stand in front of the Cytometer and grasp the top of
the Data Acquisition card cage.
2. With a secure hold on the card cage, unlock the card
cage hinges with your other hand.
3. Gently lower the card cage into the center cavity of the
Cytometer.

PN 4237029G A.5-11
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-3 Data Acquisition Card Cage, Components and Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-3, 16 PMT2 HV power supply In the HV power supply section of the Data Acquisition
card cage, the PMT2 HV power supply is located in the
lower right quadrant.
In response to the HV gain setting defined by the operator,
provides high voltage (HV) to the PMT2 assembly for
amplifying the Gaussian-shaped analog signal before it is
sent to the PMT2 Amp/Signal Conditioner card (and AUX
Amp/Signal Conditioner card, if applicable).
Note: All PMT HV power supplies are interchangeable.
Addressing for the designated parameter is determined by
the location where the power supply is connected to the
Analyzer backplane (attached to the rear of the Data
Acquisition card cage.
A.5-3, 17 PMT1 HV power supply In the HV power supply section of the Data Acquisition
card cage, the PMT1 HV power supply is located in the
lower left quadrant.
In response to the HV gain setting defined by the operator,
provides high voltage (HV) to the PMT1 assembly for
amplifying the Gaussian-shaped analog signal before it is
sent to the PMT1 Amp/Signal Conditioner card (and AUX
Amp/Signal Conditioner card, if applicable).
Note: All PMT HV power supplies are interchangeable.
Addressing for the designated parameter is determined by
the location where the power supply is connected to the
Analyzer backplane (attached to the rear of the Data
Acquisition card cage.

A.5-12 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Optical Collection Area
The rear section of the optical collection area is accessible when the Cytometer top cover is
removed and the Data Acquisition card cage is removed from the center cavity

Optical Collection Area, Component Locations (Rear View)

Figure A.5-4 Optical Collection Area, Rear View (See Table A.5-4)

6
Rear view
5 4

1. Laser blower assembly 6. PMT 4 (optional)

2. Laser duct out plenum 7. PMT3
3. Argon laser head 8. PMT2
4. Flexible duct 9. PMT1
5. PMT Distribution and
Laser Fan Control card 7029207F

PN 4237029G A.5-13
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-4 Optical Collection Area, Components and Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-4, 1 Laser blower assembly Assembly contains two fans that force cooling air across
the Argon laser head.
A.5-4, 2 Laser duct out plenum Facilitates cooling of the laser head by directing the forced
air from the laser blower assembly over the laser tube.
A.5-4, 3 Argon laser head Provides the 488 nm laser beam that passes through
cross-cylindrical lenses (a vertical and horizontal lens) that
shape and focus the laser beam on the sensing area of the
flow cell.
A.5-4, 4 Flexible duct Provides an exit pathway for the cooling air being forced
across the Argon laser by the laser blower assembly to be
exhausted out the rear of the Cytometer.
A.5-4, 5 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Provides ±15 Vdc to the PMTs, controls the laser blower
Control card assembly and the laser interlock switch that is activated
when the Cytometer top cover is removed.
A.5-4, 6 PMT4 (optional) Photomultiplier tube that detects the 675 nm wavelength
emitted by the PC5 dye. Light entering PMT4 is converted
to a Gaussian-shaped analog pulse that is amplified in
response to the PMT4 HV gain setting defined by the
operator.
Note: PMTs are interchangeable. PC5, a dye that excites at
488 nm and emits at the red end of the spectrum, is used
for cell surface marker applications.
A.5-4, 7 PMT3 Photomultiplier tube that detects the 620 nm wavelength
emitted by the ECD dye (energy coupled dye). Light
entering PMT3 is converted to a Gaussian-shaped analog
pulse that is amplified in response to the PMT3 HV gain
setting defined by the operator.
Note: PMTs are interchangeable. ECD, a tandem dye that
excites at 488 nm and emits at the orange end of the
spectrum, is used for cell surface marker applications. A
phycoerythrin and Texas red combination is an example.
A.5-4, 8 PMT2 Photomultiplier tube that detects the 575 nm wavelength
emitted by the PE dye (phycoerythrin dye). Light entering
PMT2 is converted to a Gaussian-shaped analog pulse that
is amplified in response to the PMT2 HV gain setting
defined by the operator.
Note: PMTs are interchangeable. PE, a dye that excites at
488 nm and emits at the yellow end of the spectrum, is
used for cell surface marker applications.

A.5-14 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-4 Optical Collection Area, Components and Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-4, 9 PMT1 Photomultiplier tube that detects the 525 nm wavelength
emitted by the FITC dye (fluorescein isothiocyanate dye).
Light entering PMT1 is converted to a Gaussian-shaped
analog pulse that is amplified in response to the PMT1 HV
gain setting defined by the operator.
Note: PMTs are interchangeable. FITC, a dye that excites at
488 nm and emits at the green end of the spectrum, is
used primarily for cell surface marker applications.

PN 4237029G A.5-15
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components Accessed with the Right Side Cover Removed

Figure A.5-5 Right Side View of the Cytometer with the Cover Removed (See Table A.5-5)

1
2

16 5
6

RANGE ZER O

15
9

10

11

12

14 13

1. Water trap filter 9. SN9

2. VL33 10. VL22
3. Manifold 11. VL21
4. Cooling coil 12. Vacuum regulator
5. Sheath pressure regulator 13. QD14
6. SN6 14. QD13
7. SN7 15. Sample pressure regulator
8. SN8 16. Sensor card 7029198G

A.5-16 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-5 Components in the Right Side of the Cytometer and their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-5, 1 Water trap filter Component may also be referred to as an air/water filter FL 5 inside
separator. Compressed air (pressure) generated by the the FAN /
compressor portion of the compressor/vacuum pump is CONNECTOR
hot. As the hot compressed air leaves the compressor REAR PANEL
portion or the compressor/vacuum pump, it passes block on
through a cooling coil inside the Power Supply module PN 6320886
where moisture in the air condenses. As the cooled air
moves out of the cooling coil it is sent through the
air/water filter separator to filter particles out of the air and
to allow the heavier moisture to drop from the air. There is
a second cooling coil inside the Cytometer and this water
trap filter inside the Cytometer is a second air/water filter
separator to further dry the air and prevent internal rusting
of components such as solenoids.
When power to the Cytometer is on, solenoid VL 33 is
energized, blocking the drain pathway into the waste tank.
As a result, once every 24 hours, the customer must power
off the Cytometer for 30 minutes to allow the moisture
collected inside the water trap to drain through the now
de-energized VL 33 into the waste tank.
A.5-5, 2 VL33 Type of Valve Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that VL 33 inside
serves as a dump valve to empty the water trap in the the FAN /
Cytometer. CONNECTOR
REAR PANEL
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, solenoid
block on
VL 33 is energized, blocking the drain pathway from the
PN 6320886
water trap to the waste tank.
De-energized - Once every 24 hours, the customer must
power off the Cytometer for 30 minutes to allow the
moisture collected inside the water trap to drain through
the now open VL 33 into the waste tank.
A.5-5, 3 Waste manifold Provides a single point for routing waste from various MF 1 inside
areas of the Cytometer to the external waste tank. the FAN /
CONNECTOR
r Port 1 - Output from the manifold to the external waste
REAR PANEL
tank.
block on
r Port 2 - Input via the normally-closed side of VL22 PN 6320886
(located inside the upper pneumatics drawer).
r Port 3 - Input via VL33 (when de-energized).
r Port 4 - Input from the waste chamber when
normally-closed VL7 is energized.
r Port 5 - Input from the sheath filter purge valve (VL20
located inside the reagent drawer) when the pinch valve
is manually pushed to activate a purge of the sheath
filter to remove bubbles.

PN 4237029G A.5-17
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-5 Components in the Right Side of the Cytometer and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-5, 4 Cooling coil Copper coil that provides a passageway for the once COOLING
cooled compressed air (pressure) from the Power Supply COIL inside
module to circulate and cool further as fans blow air across the FAN /
the coils to lower the temperature. As the once cooled CONNECTOR
compressed air passes through this cooling coil, more REAR PANEL
moisture in the air condenses. As the cooled air moves out block on
of the cooling coil it is sent through the air/water filter PN 6320886
separator to filter particles out of the air and to allow the
heavier moisture to drop from the air to prevent internal
rusting of components such as solenoids.
A.5-5, 5 Sheath pressure regulator Mechanical regulator used to regulate sheath pressure. RG 2 inside
When properly adjusted, provides 4 psi to the sheath and the UPPER
cleanse tanks. PNEUMATICS
PANEL block
The system pressure regulated by this mechanical
regulator is commonly referred to as sheath pressure. on
PN 6320886
A.5-5, 6 SN6 Normally-open vacuum/pressure switch detects when a SN 6 inside
test tube is placed in the manual sample station. At rest, the UPPER
the sample head has a constant supply of vacuum leaking PNEUMATICS
out to atmosphere. When an operator properly positions a PANEL block
sample tube inside the manual sample station, the tube on
makes contact with the sample head and seals the vacuum PN 6320886
leak. Sufficient vacuum (2 in. Hg) building up inside the
tube triggers SN6 to close which in turn triggers the
manual stage air cylinder (CL 1) to raise the sample tube
up for acquisition.
A.5-5, 7 SN7 Normally-open vacuum/pressure switch monitors the SN 7 inside
sample pressure inside a sample tube positioned in the the UPPER
manual sample station to make sure the sample pressure PNEUMATICS
inside the sample tube is sufficient to produce the LOW, PANEL block
MEDIUM, or HIGH sample flow rate selected by the on
operator. If the sample pressure inside the sample tube is PN 6320886
not sufficient, a Sample Pressure Error message appears
on the Workstation screen to alert the operator.

If the MCL option is installed, this switch is used to

determine if the sample pressure being supplied to the
sample tube via the MCL sample head is holding steady. If
it is holding steady, acquisition begins. If it is not holding
steady, the lifter assembly attempts making a better seal by
lowering and relifting the sample tube.

A.5-18 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-5 Components in the Right Side of the Cytometer and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-5, 8 SN8 Normally-closed vacuum/pressure switch monitors the SN 8 inside
system pressure available to the Cytometer. (This is the the UPPER
system pressure generated by the pressure portion of the PNEUMATICS
dual-head compressor/vacuum pump inside the Power PANEL block
Supply module.) if the system pressure falls below 25 psi, on
a System Pressure Error message appears on the PN 6320886
Workstation screen to alert the operator.
A.5-5, 9 SN9 Normally-closed vacuum/pressure switch monitors the SN 9 inside
system vacuum available to the Cytometer. (This is the the UPPER
system vacuum created by the vacuum portion of the PNEUMATICS
dual-head compressor/vacuum pump inside the Power PANEL block
Supply module.) if the system vacuum falls below 10 in. on
Hg, a System Vacuum Error message appears on the PN 6320886
Workstation screen to alert the operator.
A.5-5, 10 VL22 Type of Valve Pinch valve (double-action, VL 22 inside
solenoid-actuated) used to control flow of sheath pressure the UPPER
to the sheath and cleanse tanks. PNEUMATICS
PANEL block
Actuated - Sheath pressure (regulated by RG 2) flows to
on
the sheath and cleanse tanks. Valve is always actuated
PN 6320886
except when the Cytometer is placed in the IDLE mode or
when power to the Cytometer is turned off.
De-actuated - Flow of sheath pressure to the sheath and
cleanse tanks is blocked. This occurs only when the
Cytometer is placed in the IDLE mode or when power to
the Cytometer is turned off.
A.5-5, 11 VL21 Type of Valve Pinch valve (double-action, VL 21 inside
solenoid-actuated) used to control sample pressure flow. the UPPER
PNEUMATICS
De-actuated - Resting state. Sample pressure is blocked.
PANEL block
Actuated - When data acquisition begins, sample pressure on
(regulated by RG 1) is available via VL13 at the sample PN 6320886
head.
r If VL13 is de-actuated, sample pressure is available at
the manual sample head.
r If VL13 is actuated, sample pressure is available at the
MCL sample head.
A.5-5, 12 Vacuum regulator Regulates the constant vacuum being supplied to the RG 3 inside
manual sample head. the UPPER
PNEUMATICS
If the MCL option is installed, vacuum is supplied to the
PANEL block
waste port of the MCL sample head. Vacuum is adjusted
based on what is required at the manual sample head. on
PN 6320886

PN 4237029G A.5-19
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-5 Components in the Right Side of the Cytometer and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-5, 13 QD14 Quick-disconnect male coupling that provides one central QD 14 left of
connector for routing pneumatics to components inside the UPPER
the upper pneumatics drawer and then routing regulated PNEUMATICS
pneumatics to components inside the Cytometer PANEL block
on
PN 6320886
A.5-5, 14 QD13 Quick-disconnect female coupling that provides one QD 13
central connector for routing pneumatics to components inside the
inside the upper pneumatics drawer and then routing UPPER
regulated pneumatics to components inside the Cytometer. PNEUMATICS
PANEL block
on
PN 6320886
A.5-5, 15 Sample pressure regulator Electronic pressure regulator (electronic transducer) RG 1 inside
regulates the sample pressure to comply with the LOW, the UPPER
MEDIUM, or HIGH sample flow rate selected by the PNEUMATICS
operator. PANEL block
The system pressure regulated by this electronic pressure on
regulator is commonly referred to as sample pressure. PN 6320886

A.5-5, 16 Sensor card Circuit card that: Refer to

r Monitors the sheath and sample pressures. PN 6320630
r Reports sheath and sample pressure values to the
System Interface card.

A.5-20 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Components Accessed with the Center Front Cover Removed
The center front cover may also be referred to as the filter cover or center front panel.

Figure A.5-6 Inside View of the Cytometer with the Center Front Cover Removed (See Table A.5-6)
1 2 3 4

12 11 8 7 6

10

1. ND1 filter postioning knob 7. 600 DL light filter

2. 525 BP light filter 8. 550 DL light filter
3. 575 BP light filter 9. Filter holder
4. 620 BP light filter 10. Light filter
5. 675 BP light filter 11. 488 BK light filter
7029209F 6. 645 DL light filter 12. 488 DL light filter

PN 4237029G A.5-21
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-6 Components Behind the Center Front Cover and their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-6, 1 ND1 filter positioning knob ND1 is short for a neutral density 1 filter.
This filter is already located in the sensing area. The
operator positions the filter for use by sliding the
spring-loaded knob along a track. When the knob is at the
right end of its track, the filter is not used.
Note: Neutral density filters do not discriminate light by
wavelength; they block all wavelengths equally. The ND1
filter is used primarily in those laboratories that analyze
large particles such as plant cells. This filter blocks the
larger forward scatter particles that emit brighter scattered
light to prevent detector saturation.
A.5-6, 2 525 BP light filter Fluorescent band pass filter that transmits emissions in the
525 nm region (filter passes 515 nm to 535 nm
wavelengths).
Note: Band pass filters pass a narrow band of wavelengths
and block all others. These filters are used to pass
fluorescence light from a single dye, while blocking light
from other dyes.
A.5-6, 3 575 BP light filter Fluorescent band pass filter that transmits emissions in the
575 nm region (filter passes 567.5 nm to 582.5 nm
wavelengths).
Note: Band pass filters pass a narrow band of wavelengths
and block all others. These filters are used to pass
fluorescence light from a single dye, while blocking light
from other dyes.
A.5-6, 4 620 BP light filter Fluorescent band pass filter that transmits emissions in the
620 nm region (filter passes 610 nm to 630 nm
wavelengths).
Note: Band pass filters pass a narrow band of wavelengths
and block all others. These filters are used to pass
fluorescence light from a single dye, while blocking light
from other dyes.
A.5-6, 5 675 BP light filter Fluorescent band pass filter that transmits emissions in the
675 nm region (filter passes 660 nm to 690 nm
wavelengths).
Note: Band pass filters pass a narrow band of wavelengths
and block all others. These filters are used to pass
fluorescence light from a single dye, while blocking light
from other dyes.

A.5-22 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-6 Components Behind the Center Front Cover and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-6, 6 645 DL light filter Dichroic long pass filter used to pass 655 nm to 725 nm
fluorescent emissions while reflecting 607 nm to 630 nm
wavelengths.
Note: The filter occupying this slot is actually a 640 DL
filter labeled as 645 DL.
Dichroic long pass filters pass longer wavelengths and
reflect shorter ones. These filters are identified by their
50% transmittance wavelength and must be placed in a
diagonal position.
A.5-6, 7 600 DL light filter Dichroic long pass filter used to pass 612 nm to 725 nm
fluorescent emissions while reflecting 550 nm to 590 nm
wavelengths.
Note: Dichroic long pass filters pass longer wavelengths
and reflect shorter ones. These filters are identified by their
50% transmittance wavelength and must be placed in a
diagonal position.
A.5-6, 8 550 DL light filter Dichroic long pass filter used to pass 560 nm to 725 nm
fluorescent emissions while reflecting 500 nm to 540 nm
wavelengths.
Note: Dichroic long pass filters pass longer wavelengths
and reflect shorter ones. These filters are identified by their
50% transmittance wavelength and must be placed in a
diagonal position.
A.5-6, 9 Filter holder Plastic assembly that holds the round glass filter.
A.5-6, 10 Light filter Optical grade filter used for signal processing.
A.5-6, 11 488 BK light filter Long pass laser blocking filter that blocks scattered laser
light in the 488 nm region from entering the optical
collection area where the PMTs are housed (filter passes
fluorescent light 505 nm to 725 nm wavelengths).
Note: Blocking filters pass light at all wavelengths except
for a narrow band of blocked wavelengths. The filters are
identified by the laser line they most effectively block; they
typically pass about 0.01 to 1.0% of those wavelengths.
Blocking filters are used in the detector compartment to
block intense laser light scatter.
A.5-6, 12 488 DL light filter Dichroic long pass filter used to pass 510 nm to 725 nm
fluorescent emissions while reflecting the 488 nm
wavelength.
Note: Dichroic long pass filters pass longer wavelengths
and reflect shorter ones. These filters are identified by their
50% transmittance wavelength and must be placed in a
diagonal position.

PN 4237029G A.5-23
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components Accessed with the Filter Shield Removed

Figure A.5-7 Inside View of the Cytometer with the Filter Shield Removed (See Table A.5-7)

Front view with filter

shield removed

1. Side scatter diode 4. Fluorescense pickup lens

2. Lens holder plate 5. Flow cell
3. Fluorescense pickup lens 6. Forward scatter detector
adjustment hardware 7029212F
7. Beamshaper assembly

A.5-24 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-7 Components Behind the Filter Shield and their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-7, 1 Side scatter diode Also referred to as SS diode, SS sensor, or SS detector.
Collects the laser light that is scattered at about a 90° angle
to the axis of the laser beam as a particle passes through
the laser beam. The amount of laser light scattered is
referred to as side scatter (SS) and is proportional to the
granularity of the cell that scattered the laser light.
Note: SS is used to differentiate between lymphocytes,
monocytes, and granulocytes.
A.5-7, 2 Lens holder plate Blocks ambient light from entering the optical filter block.
Also secures filter holder when two screws are properly
installed.
A.5-7, 3 Fluorescence pickup lens Provides an easy way to move the pickup lens to maximize
adjustment hardware the fluorescent signals.
A.5-7, 4 Fluorescence pickup lens Collimates fluorescent light emitted by the sample as it is
excited by the laser.
A.5-7, 5 Flow cell Contains the sensing area where the individual cells are FC 1 on
intersected by the laser beam. PN 6320886
A process called hydrodynamic focusing ensures the cells
move through the laser beam one at a time, along the same
path.
The flow cell sensing area consists of a 250-µ square
quartz channel with an integral lens mounted with a vertical
(upward) flow path. A stream of sheath fluid, pressurized
at a constant 4 psi, enters the channel at the lower end and
flows upward. While the sheath stream is flowing through
the channel, sample pressure is applied to push a stream
of sample from the bottom of the flow cell upward,
injecting the sample into the middle of the sheath stream.

Because the pressure being applied to the sheath differs

from the pressure being applied to the sample stream, the
two streams are traveling at different rates so that the
sheath stream surrounds, but does not mix, with the
sample stream. The pressure of the sheath stream focuses
the sample stream so that cells flow through the sensing
area (the center of the 250-µ square quartz channel) single
file (one at a time).

PN 4237029G A.5-25
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-7 Components Behind the Filter Shield and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-7, 6 Forward scatter detector Also referred to as FS detector, FS sensor or forward
scatter sensor.
Collects the laser light that is scattered at narrow angles to
the axis of the laser beam as a particle passes through the
laser beam. The amount of forward scatter (FS) is
proportional to the size of the cell that scattered the laser
light.
When the light reaches the FS detector, the detector
generates voltage pulse signals that are proportional to the
intensity of light the detector received.
These signals are processed to measure the characteristics
of the cells that scattered the light.
A.5-7, 7 Beamshaper assembly Contains two cross-cylindrical lenses that shape and focus
the laser beam produced by the laser head. The first lens
controls the width of the beam; the second, the height.
The cross-cylindrical lenses shape the round laser beam
into an elliptical beam and focus the laser beam into the
flow cell chamber. Focusing keeps the beam perpendicular
to the sample stream flow while making the beam small
enough to illuminate only one cell at a time.

A.5-26 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Components Inside the Reagent Drawer
Figure A.5-8 View of an Open Reagent Drawer (See Table A.5-8)
1

MCL
XL
er ics
Coult Ep

1. VL20
4 2. Quick-connect
3. Sheath liquid filter
4. Sheath container
5 5. Cleaning agent container
7029208G

PN 4237029G A.5-27
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-8 Components Inside the Reagent Drawer and their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-8, 1 VL20 Commonly referred to as the sheath filter purge valve. PV 20 inside
Normally-closed pinch valve that is manually pushed to the BOTTLE
DRAWER
activate a purge of the sheath filter to remove bubbles.
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-8, 2 QD35 90° quick-connect (external male elbow) connects VL20 QD 35
with the vent port on the sheath liquid filter to facilitate inside the
replacement of sheath filter purge components. BOTTLE
DRAWER
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-8, 3 Sheath liquid filter Disposable 0.2 micron hydrophilic filter used to remove FL 6 inside
particles 0.2 µm or larger from the sheath fluid. the BOTTLE
DRAWER
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-8, 4 Sheath container May also be referred to as sheath tank or sheath bottle. SHEATH
BOTTLE or
Holds fluid used to create the hydrodynamic focus for
sample analysis referred to as sheath flow. RS 1 inside
the BOTTLE
IsoFlow™ sheath fluid, a non fluorescent, balanced DRAWER
electrolyte solution, or its equivalent is the recommended block on
reagent. PN 6320886
The sheath container has a working capacity of about 2 L.
The amount of sheath fluid the container holds beyond the
working capacity is for pressurization and level sensing.
A.5-8, 5 Cleaning agent container May also be referred to as the cleanse tank or cleanse DETERGENT
bottle. BOTTLE or
Holds cleaning agent for cleaning the sample lines and flow RS 2 inside
cell. the BOTTLE
DRAWER
COULTER CLENZ® cleaning agent or its equivalent is block on
recommended to flush the sample tubing and to help PN 6320886
reduce protein buildup and particle accumulation in the
instrument. Each cleanse cycle uses about 15 mL of
cleaning agent.
The cleaning agent container has a working capacity of
about 500 mL. That is enough cleaning agent to use the
Cleanse mode once a day for one month. The amount of
cleaning agent the container holds beyond the working
capacity is for pressurization and level sense.

A.5-28 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Rear Panel Components
Figure A.5-9 Rear Panel Components, Exterior View (See Table A.5-9)
1

10

1. Fans
9 2. FLOWCELL WASTE quick-connect
3. WASTE quick-connect
4. VACUUM quick-connect
5. PRESSURE quick-connect
8 6. P13
7. P80
8. SCOPE B connector
9. SCOPE A connector
10. Fiber Optics Interface card

5
6
7 7029210F

PN 4237029G A.5-29
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-9 Components Attached to the Rear Panel and their Functions, Exterior View

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-9, 1 Fans When power to the Cytometer is turned on, these fans
provide a constant flow of room air into the Cytometer to
keep the electronic components inside the Cytometer from
overheating.
A.5-9, 2 FLOWCELL WASTE Female panel mount quick-connect that when coupled with QD 18
quick-connect (orange) QD26 (orange male quick-connect) provides a pathway to inside the
the external waste container for the sample waste that exits FAN /
the flow cell during acquisition analysis. CONNECTOR
REAR PANEL
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-9, 3 WASTE quick-connect Female panel mount quick-connect that when coupled with QD 17
(orange) QD25 (orange male quick-connect) provides a pathway to inside the
the external waste container for emptying waste routed FAN /
through the waste manifold (MF1). CONNECTOR
REAR PANEL
Note: To locate the waste manifold, refer to Figure A.5-5,
block on
item 3.
PN 6320886
A.5-9, 4 VACUUM quick-connect Female panel mount quick-connect that when coupled with QD 16
(yellow) QD24 (yellow male quick-connect) provides an input to inside the
supply vacuum created in the Power Supply module to the FAN /
Cytometer. CONNECTOR
REAR PANEL
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-9, 5 PRESSURE quick-connect Female panel mount quick-connect that when coupled with QD 15
(blue) QD23 (blue male quick-connect) provides an input to inside the
supply 30 psi (generated and regulated in the Power FAN /
Supply module) to the cooling coils and water trap filter CONNECTOR
inside the Cytometer. REAR PANEL
block on
Note: To locate the cooling coils and water trap filter inside
PN 6320886
the Cytometer, refer to Figure A.5-5, items 4 and 1
respectively.
A.5-9, 6 P13 Connector for CYTO dc power EMI harness cable
A.5-9, 7 P80 Connector for CYTO dc power EMI harness cable
A.5-9, 8 SCOPE B connector May be used by the Service representative to connect an
oscilloscope to measure the FL3 signal.
A.5-9, 9 SCOPE A connector May be used by the Service representative to connect an
oscilloscope to measure the signal assigned to the
discriminator.

A.5-30 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-9 Components Attached to the Rear Panel and their Functions, Exterior View (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-9, 10 Fiber Optics Interface card Circuit card converts the digital data received from the Cyto
Transputer card to optical data then sends that optical data
to the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card inside the Workstation
computer.
Two fiber optic cables are connected to this circuit card.
This fiber optic cables are joined together as one cable with
two terminal posts (with a locking nut) at each end. One
cable is labeled RX and the other is labeled TX. The
terminal posts on one end of the cable are inserted into
jacks on the Cytometer and the terminal posts on the other
end of the cable are inserted into jacks on the Opto
Transprocessor EXEM or Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II
card in the Workstation computer.
r At the rear of the Cytometer:
t The terminal post labeled RX goes in the jack labeled
FIBER OPTIC REC.
t The terminal post labeled TX goes in the jack labeled
FIBER OPTIC TRANS.
r At the rear of the tower computer:
t The terminal post labeled TX goes in the outer left
jack labeled XMIT on the edge of the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card (in the bottom slot).
t The terminal post labeled RX goes in the inner
(middle) jack labeled REC on the edge of the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card.
If installed incorrectly, the Cytometer powers up but the
Workstation comes up in listmode.

PN 4237029G A.5-31
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Manual Sample Station Components, Cytometer with MCL Option

Figure A.5-10 XL-MCL Manual Sample Station Components (See Table A.5-10)
2
1
3

14
7

8
11

13

10

Rear view
12
9

1. SHEATH LOW level sense indicator 8. CLEANSE push button

2. WASTE FULL level sense indicator 9. Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 card
3. CLEANSE LOW level sense indicator 10. Manual sample head
4. FLOW indicator 11. Manual sample probe
5. RUN push button and indicator 12. Sample and waste connect panel
6. AUTO push button 13. Manual stage air cylinder
7. PRIME push button 14. Manual stage position sensor 7029213F

A.5-32 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-10 XL-MCL Manual Sample Station Components and their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-10, 1 SHEATH LOW level sense Red symbol when the sheath fluid is low.
indicator During sample analysis, the operator has 5 minutes to
finish analyzing the current sample after the indicator
starts flashing red.
When the indicator glows red, the operator must fill the
sheath container before the instrument can be cycled
again. To fill the sheath container, the Cytometer needs to
be in the Idle mode.
A.5-10, 2 WASTE FULL level sense Red symbol when the external waste container is full.
indicator During sample analysis, the operator has 5 minutes to
finish analyzing the current sample after the indicator
starts flashing red.
When the indicator glows red, the operator must empty the
external waste container before the instrument can be
cycled again.
A.5-10, 3 CLEANSE LOW level sense Red symbol when the cleaning agent is low.
indicator When the indicator glows red, the operator must fill the
cleanse container before starting the cleanse cycle. The fill
the cleaning agent container, the Cytometer needs to be in
the Idle mode.
A.5-10, 4 FLOW indicator Green symbol means the sample tube is pressurized and
sample is going through the flow cell.
A.5-10, 5 RUN push-button and indicator Micro contact switch used to place the Cytometer in the
Idle or Run mode.
Press once to use the Run mode.
Press again for Idle mode.
The indicator color shows the Cytometer operating mode.
r Glowing (solid) green indicates the Cytometer is in the
Run mode. Cytometer is waiting for the operator to
insert a sample tube.
r Flashing green indicates the Cytometer is in the Idle
mode.
r Glowing (solid) orange indicates the Run mode during
sample analysis.
A.5-10, 6 AUTO push-button Available only if the MCL option is installed.
Micro contact switch for MCL operation.
Press to use the optional Automatic mode.
Press again to use the Manual mode.
Glowing (solid) green indicator means the Cytometer is in
the Auto mode and a carousel is in the MCL.

PN 4237029G A.5-33
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-10 XL-MCL Manual Sample Station Components and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-10, 7 PRIME push-button Micro contact switch used to initiate the Prime cycle.
Press to flush the flow cell with sheath fluid. Data
acquisition pauses until the prime cycle is done. During the
10-second cycle, indicator is green.
A.5-10, 8 CLEANSE push-button Micro contact switch used to initiate the Cleanse cycle.
Press to flush the flow cell with cleaning agent. During the
60-second cycle, indicator is green. There must not be a
tube on the sample stage.
A.5-10, 9 Front Panel LED and Switch Used only on instruments with the MCL option, this circuit
Input 2 card card contains the microswitch membrane switches used to
initiate the RUN, AUTO, PRIME, or CLEANSE functions and
illuminate the corresponding indicators. It also contains
the circuitry for illuminating the FLOW indicator or the
SHEATH LOW, WASTE FULL, CLEANSE LOW level sense
indicators as directed by the Top Panel Display 2 card.
A.5-10, 10 Manual sample head At rest, the sample head has a constant supply of vacuum
leaking out to atmosphere. When an operator properly
positions a sample tube inside the manual sample station,
the tube makes contact with the sample head and seals the
vacuum leak. Sufficient vacuum (2 in. Hg) building up
inside the tube triggers SN6, a normally-open
vacuum/pressure switch, to close which in turn triggers
the manual stage air cylinder (CL1) to raise the sample
tube up. The vacuum supply is shut off and sample
pressure enters the tube.
SN7, a normally-open vacuum/pressure switch, monitors
the sample pressure inside the tube to make sure the
sample pressure inside the sample tube is sufficient to
produce the LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH sample flow rate
selected by the operator for data acquisition.
If the sample pressure inside the sample tube is not
sufficient, a Sample Pressure Error message appears on
the Workstation screen to alert the operator.
Note: To locate SN6 or SN7, refer to Figure A.5-5, items 6
and 7.
A.5-10, 11 Manual sample probe Provides a pathway for the pressurized sample (in the test
tube) to move out of the test tube towards the flow cell.
A.5-10, 12 Sample and waste connect Panel that contains two fittings - SAMPLE for connecting
panel the tubing that provides vacuum (from RG3) to the manual
sample head and WASTE for connecting the tubing that
provides a pathway from the manual sample head to the
waste chamber (VC1).

A.5-34 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-10 XL-MCL Manual Sample Station Components and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-10, 13 Manual stage air cylinder Solenoid-actuated / spring-return air cylinder used to raise CL 1 inside
or lower the manual sample stage. Operation controlled via the SAMPLE
a solenoid (VL14) in the lower pneumatics drawer. STATION
block on
Note: To locate VL14, refer to Figure A.5-15, item 11.
PN 6320886
A.5-10, 14 Manual stage position sensor Verifies the manual sample stage is in the proper position - SN 4 inside
raised or lowered. the SAMPLE
STATION
block on
PN 6320886

PN 4237029G A.5-35
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Manual Sample Station Components, Cytometer without MCL Option

Figure A.5-11 XL Manual Sample Station Components (See Table A.5-11)
1

Rear view 2

10

1. Front Panel LED and Switch Input card

2. SHEATH LOW / WASTE FULL /
CLEANSE LOW level sense indicator 6
3. RUN push button and indicator 9
4. PRIME push button
5. CLEANSE push button
6. Manual sample probe
7. Manual sample head
8. Sample and waste connect panel
9. Manual stage air cylinder
10. Manual stage position sensor
7

7029214F
8

A.5-36 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-11 XL Manual Sample Station Components and their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-11, 1 Front Panel LED and Switch Used only on instruments without the MCL option, this
Input card circuit card contains the microswitch membrane switches
used to initiate the RUN, PRIME, or CLEANSE functions. It
also contains the circuitry for illuminating the SHEATH
LOW / WASTE FULL / CLEANSE LOW level sense indicator
as directed by the Top Panel Display 2 card.
A.5-11, 2 SHEATH LOW / WASTE FULL / Red means the sheath fluid or cleaning agent is low or the
CLEANSE LOW level sense external waste container is full.
indicator r If the sheath fluid is low:
During sample analysis, the operator has 5 minutes to
finish analyzing the current sample after the indicator
starts flashing red.
When the indicator glows red, the operator must fill the
sheath container before the instrument can be cycled
again. The fill the sheath container, the Cytometer
needs to be in the Idle mode.
r If the external waste container is full:
During sample analysis, the operator has 5 minutes to
finish analyzing the current sample after the indicator
starts flashing red.
When the indicator glows red, the operator must empty
the external waste container before the instrument can
be cycled again.
r If cleaning agent is low:
When the indicator glows red, the operator must fill the
cleanse container before starting the cleanse cycle. The
fill the cleaning agent container, the Cytometer needs to
be in the Idle mode.
A.5-11, 2 FLOW indicator Green means the sample tube is pressurized and sample is
going through the flow cell.
A.5-11, 3 RUN push-button and indicator Micro contact switch used to place the Cytometer in the
Idle or Run mode.
Press once to use the Run mode.
Press again for Idle mode.
The indicator color shows the Cytometer operating mode.
r Glowing (solid) green indicates the Cytometer is in the
Run mode. Cytometer is waiting for the operator to
insert a sample tube.
r Flashing green indicates the Cytometer is in the Idle
mode.
r Glowing (solid) orange indicates the Run mode during
sample analysis.

PN 4237029G A.5-37
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-11 XL Manual Sample Station Components and their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-11, 4 PRIME push-button Micro contact switch used to initiate the Prime cycle.
Press to flush the flow cell with sheath fluid. Data
acquisition pauses until the prime cycle is done. During the
10-second cycle, indicator is green.
A.5-11, 5 CLEANSE push-button Micro contact switch used to initiate the Cleanse cycle.
Press to flush the flow cell with cleaning agent. During the
60-second cycle, indicator is green. There must not be a
tube on the sample stage.
A.5-11, 6 Manual sample probe Provides a pathway for the pressurized sample (in the test
tube) to move out of the test tube towards the flow cell.
A.5-11, 7 Manual sample head At rest, the sample head has a constant supply of vacuum
leaking out to atmosphere. When an operator properly
positions a sample tube inside the manual sample station,
the tube makes contact with the sample head and seals the
vacuum leak. Sufficient vacuum (2 in. Hg) building up
inside the tube triggers SN6, a normally-open
vacuum/pressure switch, to close which in turn triggers
the manual stage air cylinder (CL1) to raise the sample
tube up. The vacuum supply is shut off and sample
pressure enters the tube.
SN7, a normally-open vacuum/pressure switch, monitors
the sample pressure inside the tube to make sure the
sample pressure inside the sample tube is sufficient to
produce the LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH sample flow rate
selected by the operator for data acquisition.
If the sample pressure inside the sample tube is not
sufficient, a Sample Pressure Error message appears on
the Workstation screen to alert the operator.
Note: To locate SN6 or SN7, refer to Figure A.5-5, items 6
and 7.
A.5-11, 8 Sample and waste connect Panel that contains two fittings - SAMPLE for connecting
panel the tubing that provides vacuum (from RG3) to the manual
sample head and WASTE for connecting the tubing that
provides a pathway from the manual sample head to the
waste chamber (VC1).
A.5-11, 9 Manual stage air cylinder Solenoid-actuated / spring-return air cylinder used to raise CL 1 inside
or lower the manual sample stage. Operation controlled via the SAMPLE
a solenoid (VL14) in the lower pneumatics drawer. STATION
block on
Note: To locate VL14, refer to Figure A.5-15, item 11.
PN 6320886
A.5-11, 10 Manual stage position sensor Verifies the manual sample stage is in the proper position - SN 4 inside
raised or lowered. the SAMPLE
STATION
block on
PN 6320886

A.5-38 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Segmenting Valve Components
Figure A.5-12 Segmenting Valve Components (See Table A.5-12)
Front view

E p ic s X L / M C L

7029211F

10

8
2

3
7
4

5
6

1. PEEK tubing to manual sample probe 6. PEEK tubing to flow cell

2. PEEK tubing to MCL sample probe 7. Segmenting valve knob
3. Segmenting valve rear pad 8. Air Cylinder for front segmenting valve pad
4. Segmenting valve middle pad 9. Air Cylinder for rear segmenting valve pad
5. Segmenting valve front pad 10. Air Cylinder for middle segmenting valve pad

PN 4237029G A.5-39
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-12 Segmenting Valve Components and Their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-12, 1 Peek tubing to MCL Provides a pathway for sample flow from the MCL sample MCL inside
probe to the segmenting valve rear pad. the PROBE
NORMAL
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-12, 2 Peek tubing to manual sample Provides a pathway for sample flow from the manual PROBE
probe sample probe to the segmenting valve rear pad. inside the
PROBE
NORMAL
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-12, 3 Segmenting valve rear pad Switches between manual and MCL. Pad has cleaning
channel and rotates during the cleaning cycle.
A.5-12, 4 Segmenting valve middle pad Only used with SYSTEM II operating system to perform the
Stop On Volume function.
A.5-12, 5 Segmenting valve front pad Provides pathway to the flow cell. Pad has cleaning
channel and rotates during the cleaning cycle.
A.5-12, 6 Peek tubing to flow cell Provides a pathway for sample flow from the segmenting FLOWCELL
valve rear pad to the flow cell. inside the
PROBE
NORMAL
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-12, 7 Segmenting valve knob When properly tightened, this knob provides sufficient
tension to secure the segmenting pads so that they rotate
smoothly without leaking.
A.5-12, 8 Air Cylinder for front Double action air cylinder controlled by 30 psi provided by CYL 2 inside
segmenting valve pad either VL15 or VL18. the PROBE
NORMAL
VL18 is normally energized to hold the front pad in its
normal position. block on
PN 6320886
When VL15 is energized, the front pad rotates for cleaning.
Note: To locate VL15 or VL18, refer to Figure A.5-15, items
10 and 7 respectively.

A.5-40 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-12 Segmenting Valve Components and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-12, 9 Air Cylinder for rear Double action air cylinder controlled by 30 psi provided by CYL 4 inside
segmenting valve pad either VL17 or VL20. the PROBE
NORMAL
VL17 is normally energized to hold the rear pad in its
block on
normal position that allows sample flow through the
PN 6320886
PROBE port.
When VL20 is energized, the rear pad rotates to allow
sample flow through the MCL port.
Note: To locate VL17 or VL20, refer to Figure A.5-15, items
8 and 5 respectively.
A.5-12, 10 Air Cylinder for middle Double action air cylinder controlled by 30 psi provided by CYL 3 inside
segmenting valve pad either VL16 or VL19. the PROBE
NORMAL
VL16 is normally energized to hold the middle pad in its
normal position. block on
PN 6320886
When VL19 is energized, the middle pad rotates to perform
the Stop On Volume function.
Note: To locate VL16 or VL19, refer to Figure A.5-15, items
9 and 6 respectively.

PN 4237029G A.5-41
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components on the MCL Option

Carousel Components
Figure A.5-13 Carousel Components (See Table A.5-13)
1

1. MCL door 4
2. MCL probe housing
3. MCL carousel pushbutton
4. MCL base
5. Carousel hub
6. Interlock switch
7. MCL gas cylinder and bracket 7029223F

A.5-42 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-13 Carousel Components and Their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-13, 1 MCL door Exterior cover also referred to as the MCL lid or MCL upper
lid and may also be referred to as MCL cover or MCL upper
cover. When lifted, the tube carousel can be positioned on
or removed from the carousel hub. To open this door, the
push-button (A.5-13, item 3) must be pressed to release
the latch. When the latch is released, the MCL gas cylinder
(A.5-13, item 7) controls the door’s movement as it opens
automatically.
A.5-13, 2 MCL probe housing Protective covering for the MCL sample probe and sample
head attached to the vertical plate (Figure A.5-14).
A.5-13, 3 MCL carousel push-button Press this push-button to release the latch that opens the
MCL door (upper base cover).
A.5-13, 4 MCL base Houses carousel base assembly and lifter assembly. This
base must unlatched before removing the left-side cover.
A.5-13, 5 Carousel hub Hub for securing and indexing the carousel.
A.5-13, 6 Interlock switch Safety interlock to ensure the MCL door is closed during
operation. If the door is open, an MCL Door Open error or
MCL Door Open Warning message appears on the
Workstation screen. Operation is halted until the door is
closed.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when

operating the instrument when the MCL interlock switch
is defeated, as you may be exposed to moving
components. After servicing the instrument, make sure
the MCL door is properly closed to reactivate the safety
interlock switch if it was bypassed while servicing the
instrument.

To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch

up and operation resumes even though the door is open.

Always be very careful if you bypass this safety interlock

and operate the instrument with the door open. The
interlock switch is reset when the door is closed.
A.5-13, 7 MCL gas cylinder and bracket Controls the opening movement of the MCL door when the
push-button (A.5-13, item 3) is pressed and unlatches the
door.

PN 4237029G A.5-43
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

MCL Components Accessible with Covers Removed

Figure A.5-14 MCL Components Accessible with Covers Removed (See Table A.5-14)
1
2

6
4

Rear view
17 8

Behind MCL
Vertical Plate

10 9

16 15 14 12
13 11

1. Probe sensor and flag 9. Motor Filter card (EMC version)

2. MCL sample probe 10. MCL lifter assembly
3. MCL sample head 11. Carousel hub
4. Probe slide assembly 12. In/out air cylinder
5. Sample head sensor and flag 13. MCL carousel base assembly
6. Probe up/down air cylinder 14. MCL solenoid assembly
7. Lifter air cylinder 15. MCL tube rotator assembly
8. Bar-code reader 16. MCL CPU card
17. Bar-code Decoder card 7029200F

A.5-44 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-14 MCL Components Accessible with Covers Removed and Their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-14, 1 Probe sensor and flag Used to monitor the position of the MCL sample probe.
A.5-14, 2 MCL sample probe Provides a pathway for the pressurized sample (in the test
tube) to move out of the test tube towards the flow cell.
A.5-14, 3 MCL sample head When a sample tube makes contact with the MCL sample
head, sample pressure enters the tube.
SN7 is used to determine if the sample pressure being
supplied to the sample tube via the MCL sample head is
holding steady. If it is holding steady, acquisition begins. If
it is not holding steady, the lifter assembly attempts
making a better seal by lowering and relifting the sample
tube.
If the sample pressure inside the sample tube is not
sufficient, a Sample Pressure Error message appears on
the Workstation screen to alert the operator.
Note: To locate SN7, refer to Figure A.5-5, item 7.
A.5-14, 4 Probe slide assembly Provides smooth up/down travel for the MCL sample
probe.
A.5-14, 5 Sample head sensor and flag Used to detect if a sample tube is underneath the MCL
sample head for sample processing.
A.5-14, 6 Probe up/down air cylinder Double action air cylinder controlled by 30 psi and venting
used to lower the MCL sample probe into the sample tube
and raise the MCL sample probe out of the sample tube.
A.5-14, 7 Lifter air cylinder Double action air cylinder controlled by 30 psi and venting
used to raise and lower the lifter assembly.
A.5-14, 8 Bar-code reader Used to read the bar-code labels placed on the sample
tubes for specimen identification and to read the MCL
carousel to verify correct position during operational
rotations.
A.5-14, 9 Motor Filter card (EMC version) Circuit card that suppresses EMC interference for CE
certification.
A.5-14, 10 MCL lifter assembly Used to lift and vortex sample to the MCL sample head.
A.5-14, 11 Carousel hub Resting place for MCL carousel.
A.5-14, 12 In/out air cylinder Double action air cylinder controlled by 30 psi and venting
used to move the carousel base assembly in or out to
position the sample tube over the lifter and under the MCL
sample head.
A.5-14, 13 MCL carousel base assembly Contains the mechanical and electrical hardware to rotate
and locate the carousel position.
A.5-14, 14 MCL solenoid assembly Used to control the probe up/down, lifter, and in/out air
cylinders, as well as the air cylinder in the MCL tube rotator
assembly.

PN 4237029G A.5-45
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-14 MCL Components Accessible with Covers Removed and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-14, 15 MCL tube rotator assembly Double action air cylinder controlled by 30 psi and venting
used to move the finger in and out to rotate the sample
tube for reading the bar-code label and guides the tube as
it is being lifted to the MCL sample head.
A.5-14, 16 MCL CPU card Circuit card that controls all MCL functions.
A.5-14, 17 Bar-code Decoder card Circuit card that controls and decodes input from the
bar-code reader.

A.5-46 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Components in the Left Side of the Cytometer
The main assembly located in the left side of the Cytometer is the lower pneumatics drawer.
To access the lower pneumatics drawer, the left side cover must first be removed. If the MCL
option is installed, access is more time consuming because the entire MCL option must be
removed to access the lower pneumatics drawer. This removal not only involves removing the
MCL covers but also removing the manual sample station to facilitate removal of the MCL
main frame assembly from the Cytometer frame.

The left side cover must also be removed to replace a laser cooling fan. If the MCL option is
installed, the MCL covers must be unlatched, not removed, from the Cytometer frame to
remove the left side cover. It is not necessary to remove the MCL main frame assembly from
the Cytometer frame.

PN 4237029G A.5-47
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Figure A.5-15 Lower Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Table A.5-15)

1. Solenoid Power 19. VL7 Mounting plate

Distribution card 20. VL8 for laser
2. Solenoid manifold 21. VL9 cooling fans
3. QD10 22. VL10
4. QD11 23. VL11
5. VL20 24. VL12
6. VL19 25. VL13
7. VL18 26. 12 insert fitting plate
8. VL17 27. 5 insert fitting plate (MCL option only)
9. VL16 28. Upper 6 insert fitting plate
10. VL15 29. Lower 6 insert fitting plate
11. VL14 30. Waste chamber sensor
12. VL0 31. Waste chamber
2
13. VL1
14. VL2
1
15. VL3 3
16. VL4
17. VL5 4
18. VL6

5
6
8 7
31 9
29
24 25 10
23 11
28 30
22
27 21
20

19

12
13

14

15
26 16
17
7029199F
18

A.5-48 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-15 Components in the Lower Pneumatics Drawer and Their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-15, 1 Solenoid Power Distribution Circuit card that provides the 24 Vdc needed to operate the Refer to
card various solenoid valves. PN 6321192
A.5-15, 2 Solenoid manifold Provides 30 psi to the pilot actuators.
A.5-15, 3 QD10 Quick-disconnect female coupling that provides one QD 10 inside
central connector for routing pneumatics to components the LOWER
inside the lower pneumatics drawer and then routing PNEUMATICS
solenoid-controlled pneumatics to components inside the DRAWER
Cytometer. block on
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 4 QD11 Quick-disconnect male coupling that provides one central QD 11 is to
connector for routing pneumatics to components inside the right of
the lower pneumatics drawer and then routing the LOWER
solenoid-controlled pneumatics to components inside the PNEUMATICS
Cytometer. DRAWER
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 5 VL20 One of two solenoids that provide the 30 psi needed to VL 20 inside
operate the double action air cylinder (CYL 4) that controls the LOWER
movement of the segmenting valve rear pad. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
VL17 is normally energized to hold the rear pad in its
block on
normal position that allows sample flow through the
PN 6320886
PROBE port.
When VL20 is energized, the rear pad rotates to allow
sample flow through the MCL port.
Note: To locate the air cylinder (CYL 4), refer to
Figure A.5-12, item 9.
A.5-15, 6 VL19 One of two solenoids that provide the 30 psi needed to VL 19 inside
operate the double action air cylinder (CYL 3) that controls the LOWER
movement of the segmenting valve middle pad. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
VL16 is normally energized to hold the middle pad in its
block on
normal position.
PN 6320886
When VL19 is energized, the middle pad rotates to perform
the Stop On Volume function.
Note: To locate the air cylinder (CYL 3), refer to
Figure A.5-12, item 10.
A.5-15, 7 VL18 One of two solenoids that provide the 30 psi needed to VL 18 inside
operate the double action air cylinder (CYL 2) that controls the LOWER
movement of the segmenting valve front pad. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
VL18 is normally energized to hold the front pad in its
block on
normal position.
PN 6320886
When VL15 is energized, the front pad rotates for cleaning.
Note: To locate the air cylinder (CYL 2), refer to
Figure A.5-12, item 8.

PN 4237029G A.5-49
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-15 Components in the Lower Pneumatics Drawer and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-15, 8 VL17 One of two solenoids that provide the 30 psi needed to VL 17 inside
operate the double action air cylinder (CYL 4) that controls the LOWER
movement of the segmenting valve rear pad. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
VL17 is normally energized to hold the rear pad in its
block on
normal position that allows sample flow through the
PN 6320886
PROBE port.
When VL20 is energized, the rear pad rotates to allow
sample flow through the MCL port.
Note: To locate the air cylinder (CYL 4), refer to
Figure A.5-12, item 9.
A.5-15, 9 VL16 One of two solenoids that provide the 30 psi needed to VL 16 inside
operate the double action air cylinder (CYL 3) that controls the LOWER
movement of the segmenting valve middle pad. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
VL16 is normally energized to hold the middle pad in its
block on
normal position.
PN 6320886
When VL19 is energized, the middle pad rotates to perform
the Stop On Volume function.
Note: To locate the air cylinder (CYL 3), refer to
Figure A.5-12, item 10.
A.5-15, 10 VL15 One of two solenoids that provide the 30 psi needed to VL 15 inside
operate the double action air cylinder (CYL 2) that controls the LOWER
movement of the segmenting valve front pad. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
VL18 is normally energized to hold the front pad in its
block on
normal position.
PN 6320886
When VL15 is energized, the front pad rotates for cleaning.
Note: To locate the air cylinder (CYL 2), refer to
Figure A.5-12, item 8.
A.5-15, 11 VL14 Controls the up/down movement of the manual sample VL 14 inside
stage via a solenoid-actuated / spring-return air cylinder the LOWER
(CL 1) referred to as the manual stage air cylinder. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
Energized 30 psi is routed to the air cylinder to raise the
block on
sample stage.
PN 6320886
De-energized 30 psi is no longer available to the air
cylinder. The air cylinder vents as the spring returns the
internal piston to its resting position which lowers the
manual sample stage.
A.5-15, 12 VL0 Controls the flow of sheath to the flow cell. VL 0 inside
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
DRAWER
combination valve)
block on
PN 6320886

A.5-50 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-15 Components in the Lower Pneumatics Drawer and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-15, 13 VL1 Controls the flow of cleaning agent to the flow cell. VL 1 inside
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
DRAWER
combination valve)
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 14 VL2 Controls flow cell flush waste during the Prime cycle. VL 2 inside
Tubing from this pinch valve is attached to the waste port the LOWER
on the flow cell opposite the sheath port so that when VL2 PNEUMATICS
is energized during the Prime cycle, sheath fluid flows DRAWER
through the flow cell and out the waste port to quickly block on
remove (flush) air bubbles from the flow cell. PN 6320886
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
combination valve)
A.5-15, 15 VL3 Controls the flow of waste from the flow cell to the external VL 3 inside
waste container. the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an
DRAWER
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
block on
combination valve)
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 16 VL4 Controls the flow of waste from the flow cell to the waste VL 4 inside
chamber. the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an
DRAWER
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
block on
combination valve)
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 17 VL5 Controls the flow of waste from the sample head to the VL 5 inside
waste chamber. the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
Type of Valve Normally open pinch valve controlled by an
DRAWER
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
block on
combination valve)
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 18 VL6 Controls waste fill to the waste chamber. VL 6 inside
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
DRAWER
combination valve)
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 19 VL7 Controls the flow of waste from the waste chamber. VL 7 inside
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
DRAWER
combination valve)
block on
PN 6320886

PN 4237029G A.5-51
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-15 Components in the Lower Pneumatics Drawer and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-15, 20 VL8 Controls pushing sheath for Stop on Volume. VL 8 inside
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
DRAWER
combination valve)
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 21 VL9 Opens pathway from the segmenting valve waste loop to VL 9 inside
the waste chamber. the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
Type of Valve Normally closed pinch valve controlled by an
DRAWER
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
block on
combination valve)
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 22 VL10 Provides the pushing sheath to the segmenting valve input VL 10 inside
waste loop. the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
Type of Valve Normally open pinch valve controlled by an
DRAWER
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
block on
combination valve)
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 23 VL11 Supplies (via VL 7) vacuum or sheath pressure to control VL 11 inside
the filling and draining of the waste chamber. the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
Normally-open side provides a supply of vacuum to VL7.
DRAWER
When VL7 is energized, the vacuum pulls liquid into the
block on
waste chamber.
PN 6320886
Normally-closed side provides sheath pressure for
draining the waste chamber.
Type of Valve Double-action pinch valve controlled by an
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
combination valve)
A.5-15, 24 VL12 Controls vacuum on sample head waste. VL 12 inside
Type of Valve Double-action pinch valve controlled by an the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
DRAWER
combination valve)
block on
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 25 VL13 Controls sample pressure to heads. VL 13 inside
Type of Valve Double-action pinch valve controlled by an the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
electro-pneumatic valve (solenoid/pilot actuator
DRAWER
combination valve)
block on
PN 6320886

A.5-52 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-15 Components in the Lower Pneumatics Drawer and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-15, 26 12 insert fitting plate Plate contains a captive knurl knob with fitting inserts at QD 76,
QD76, QD77, QD78, QD79, QD81, QD82, QD83, QD85, QD 77,
QD86, and QD88. QD 78,
QD 79,
r QD76 couples with QD50 on the 45° angled bracket QD 81,
r QD77 couples with QD51 on the 45° angled bracket QD 82,
QD 83,
r QD78 couples with QD52 on the 45° angled bracket
QD 85,
r QD79 couples with QD53 on the 45° angled bracket QD 86, and
r QD81 couples with QD55 on the 45° angled bracket QD 88 are to
r QD82 couples with QD56 on the 45° angled bracket the right of
the LOWER
r QD83 couples with QD57 on the 45° angled bracket PNEUMATICS
r QD85 couples with QD59 on the 45° angled bracket DRAWER
r QD86 couples with QD60 on the 45° angled bracket block on
PN 6320886
r QD88 couples with QD62 on the 45° angled bracket
Note: The opening at QD87 is empty. The knurl knob
occupies QD83.
A.5-15, 27 5 insert fitting plate Only used if the MCL option is installed. QD 89,
QD 68, and
Plate contains a captive knurl knob with fitting inserts at
QD 71 are to
QD68, QD71, and QD89.
the right of
r QD68 couples with QD42 on the 45° angled bracket the LOWER
r QD71 couples with QD45 on the 45° angled bracket PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
r QD89 couples with QD63 on the 45° angled bracket
block on
Note: The openings at QD80 and QD84 are empty. PN 6320886
A.5-15, 28 Upper 6 insert fitting plate Plate contains a captive knurl knob with fitting inserts at QD 66,
QD66, QD67, QD74, and QD75. QD 67,
QD 74, and
r QD66 couples with QD40 on the 45° angled bracket
QD 75 are to
r QD67 couples with QD41 on the 45° angled bracket the right of
r QD74 couples with QD48 on the 45° angled bracket the LOWER
PNEUMATICS
r QD75 couples with QD49 on the 45° angled bracket
DRAWER
Note: The opening at QD70 is empty. The knurl knob block on
occupies the remaining opening. PN 6320886
A.5-15, 29 Lower 6 insert fitting plate Plate contains a captive knurl knob with fitting inserts at QD 64,
QD64, QD65, and QD72. QD 65, and
QD 72 are to
r QD64 couples with QD38 on the 45° angled bracket
the right of
r QD65 couples with QD39 on the 45° angled bracket the LOWER
r QD72 couples with QD46 on the 45° angled bracket PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
Note: The openings at QD69 and QD73 are empty. The
block on
knurl knob occupies the remaining opening
PN 6320886

PN 4237029G A.5-53
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-15 Components in the Lower Pneumatics Drawer and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-15, 30 Waste chamber sensor Often referred to as the eyeball sensor. SN 12
Optical sensor monitors the level of sample waste from the inside the
LOWER
sample head and flow cell. As the waste chamber is filling,
PNEUMATICS
the optical sensor is monitored. If the liquid level reaches
DRAWER
the sensor, the fill operation should cease to prevent
block on
overfilling of the waste chamber.
PN 6320886
A.5-15, 31 Waste chamber Collects and isolates waste from the waste line of the VC 1 inside
sample heads until it can be routed to the external waste the LOWER
container. PNEUMATICS
DRAWER
block on
PN 6320886

A.5-54 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Front Panel Display Components
Figure A.5-16 Front Panel Display Components (See Table A.5-16)
11 1

2
10
C Y T O M E T E R R E A D Y F S
S S 3
L A S E R O N
A U X

F L 1 4
S A M P L E F L O W
F L 2
F L 3
L O W M E D H IG H
F L 4 5

9 6

1. FS bar graph display

2. SS bar graph display
3. AUX bar graph display
4. FL1 bar graph display
5. FL2 bar graph display
6. FL3 bar graph display
7. FL4 bar graph display
8. Top Panel Display 2 card
9. SAMPLE FLOW selection
C o u lte r E p ic s X L • M C L
(LOW / MEDIUM / HIGH)
10. LASER status
11. CYTOMETER status

7029215F

PN 4237029G A.5-55
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-16 Front Panel Display Components and Their Functions

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-16, 1 FS bar graph display Forward scatter signal amplitude indicator. The bar graph
shows the intensity of the signal that particles generate
during sample analysis.
r Low, off-scale signals are yellow.
r On-scale signals are green.
r High, off-scale signals are red.
Note: If the indicator to the left of the FS label is green, the
FS signal is assigned to AUX.
A.5-16, 2 SS bar graph display Side scatter signal amplitude indicator. The bar graph
shows the intensity of the signal that particles generate
during sample analysis.
r Low, off-scale signals are yellow.
r On-scale signals are green.
r High, off-scale signals are red.
Note: If the indicator to the left of the SS label is green, the
SS signal is assigned to AUX.
A.5-16, 3 AUX bar graph display Auxiliary signal amplitude indicator. This is defined by the
operator. Once defined, the indicator to the left of the
parameter label glows green, indicating that signal is
assigned to AUX.

The bar graph shows the intensity of the signal that

particles generate during sample analysis.
r Low, off-scale signals are yellow.
r On-scale signals are green.
r High, off-scale signals are red.
A.5-16, 4 FL1 bar graph display Fluorescence 1 signal amplitude indicator. The bar graph
shows the intensity of the signal that particles generate
during sample analysis.
r Low, off-scale signals are yellow.
r On-scale signals are green.
r High, off-scale signals are red.
Note: If the indicator to the left of the FL1 label is green,
the FL1 signal is assigned to AUX.
A.5-16, 5 FL2 bar graph display Fluorescence 2 signal amplitude indicator. The bar graph
shows the intensity of the signal that particles generate
during sample analysis.
r Low, off-scale signals are yellow.
r On-scale signals are green.
r High, off-scale signals are red.
Note: If the indicator to the left of the FL2 label is green,
the FL2 signal is assigned to AUX.

A.5-56 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.5-16 Front Panel Display Components and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-16, 6 FL3 bar graph display Fluorescence 3 signal amplitude indicator. The bar graph
shows the intensity of the signal that particles generate
during sample analysis.
r Low, off-scale signals are yellow.
r On-scale signals are green.
r High, off-scale signals are red.
Note: If the indicator to the left of the FL3 label is green,
the FL3 signal is assigned to AUX.
A.5-16, 7 FL4 bar graph display Only appears when the 4-color option is installed.
Fluorescence 4 signal amplitude indicator. The bar graph
shows the intensity of the signal that particles generate
during sample analysis.
r Low, off-scale signals are yellow.
r On-scale signals are green.
r High, off-scale signals are red.
Note: If the indicator to the left of the FL4 label is green,
the FL4 signal is assigned to AUX.
A.5-16, 8 Top Panel Display 2 card This circuit card provides a visual display for each
parameter via LEDs mounted in a row format. As these
LEDs glow, they reflect the direct signal amplitude in an
image commonly referred to as a bar graph. The intensity
of the parameter signal correlates with the number of LEDs
glowing, which in turn, affects the length of the bar graph.
A weak signal produces a short bar graph (because few
LEDs are glowing); an intense signal produces a long bar
graph (because more LEDs are glowing).
This circuit card also provides visual indicators for
selecting the rate of SAMPLE FLOW (Figure A.5-16,
item 9), LASER status (Figure A.5-16, item 10), and
CYTOMETER status (Figure A.5-16, item 11).
A blue-ribbon cable connects the Top Panel Display 2 card
to the Analyzer backplane. A 24 Vdc and 5 Vdc power
connector are also attached to this circuit card.

PN 4237029G A.5-57
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
CYTOMETER COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.5-16 Front Panel Display Components and Their Functions (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.5-16, 9 SAMPLE FLOW selection Sample flow rate indicators.
(LOW / MED / HIGH) When, at the Workstation, the operator chooses a flow rate
to control the speed of the sample delivery to the flow cell,
the corresponding indicator (LOW / MED / HIGH) glows
green at the Cytometer.
When, at the Workstation, the user chooses a flow rate
they are actually choosing the sample tube pressurization
which in turn controls the speed of sample delivery to the
flow cell. Sample pressures when properly calibrated
(controlled electronically) are approximately:

LOW = 3.72 psi

MED = 3.92 psi
HIGH = 4.12 psi.
A.5-16, 10 LASER status When the ON indicator glows green, the laser is on.
A.5-16, 11 CYTOMETER status When the READY indicator glows green, the Cytometer can
be put in an operating mode.

A.5-58 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
A.6 VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND
FUNCTIONS
ATTENTION: Power may be supplied to an FC 500 via the original Voltage-Specific Power
Supply or the new Universal Power Supply. This section only identifies the main components
and/or assemblies in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. To identify the main components
and/or assemblies in the Universal Power Supply, go to Heading A.7.

Instructions for Use

The Voltage-Specific Power Supply provides and monitors the main electronic and pneumatic
power (vacuum and pressure) to the Cytometer. This section identifies the main components
and/or assemblies in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, briefly describing their functions and
showing their locations.

To expedite finding the name, location, or description of a component, the illustrations and
tables in this section are organized according to major areas of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply. Figure A.6-1 is the anchor illustration from which you can quickly access a specific
illustration.

Figure A.6-1 is referred to as the anchor illustration because it serves as the reference point
for accessing other illustrations. This anchor illustration uses an alphabetic letter to indicate a
portion of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply that correlates with a location description
provided in the Figure Reference column. This description includes the figure reference that
illustrates and provides the name of the main components located in this area of the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.

If you have never used an anchor illustration to locate a component and its function, you may
want to begin by reading the following instructions:

1. To quickly locate a component, always begin at the anchor illustration, Figure A.6-1.
2. On the anchor illustration, locate the area of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply where
the component in question is located and note the associated letter.
3. Locate the associated letter in the Figure Reference column and note the figure number.
4. Go to the referenced figure number.
Note: In the electronic version, each figure reference is in hypertext so that when you
select the reference, the illustration quickly appears. Using the hypertext link is the
fastest way to locate a component location or information.
5. Locate the component. The number associated with the component identifies its name
and also provides a figure reference for locating the component’s function on the
associated table. Each table also includes the reference designator for the component,
where applicable.

PN 4237029G A.6-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Voltage-Specific Power Supply Anchor Illustration

Figure A.6-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Anchor Illustration for Figure Reference
Locating Components
A Components behind the
B C front door, Figure A.6-2.
B Components in the
left-side compartment,
Figure A.6-3
C Components in the
right-side compartment,
Figure A.6-4
VAC
FILTER
D Components on the rear
A
panel, Figure A.6-5
VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
AIR
FILTER 30
PSI

SYS SYS
MCL POWER
VAC PRESS

PRESS
ADJ

A U X P O W E R O N

S Y S T E M
P R E S S U R E
O N /O F F

V A C U U M W A S T E L E V E L
ON

OFF

W A S T E
L A S E R P O W E R S Y S T E M P O W E R
M A X 1 8 0 0 W A T T S M A X 1 5 0 0 W A T T S
W A S T E V E N T

7029262F

A.6-2 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.6-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Component and Assembly Accessibility

Figure
Reference Main Component or Assembly that is Accessible To Access Component or Assembly
A.6-1, A Various pneumatic components including: Open the front door.
r Vacuum and water traps
r System pressure and system vacuum gauges
r System pressure adjust knob
r Air and vacuum filters
Voltage supply indicators for:
r System power (+5 V, +15 V, -15 V, +24 V)
r MCL power (+5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +24 V)
A.6-1, B Argon laser power supply Remove the three-sided cover.
Various pneumatic components including:
r Compressor
r VL31, VL30, VL32
Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card
Power Module Control or Power Module Control II card
Voltage Selector card
A.6-1, C Interlock bypass switch Remove the three-sided cover.
Cooling coil
Power supplies including:
r +24 Vdc system power supply
r +5 Vdc system power supply
r ±15 Vdc system power supply
r +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
r +24 Vdc MCL power supply
A.6-1, D Connectors for MCL, CYT12, LOGIC, ANALOG, POWER Exterior components that may require
MODULE CONTROL, and WASTE LEVEL interior access for replacement.
Circuit breakers for:
r +24 Vdc system power supply
r +5 Vdc system power supply
r ±15 Vdc system power supply
r +5 (and ±12 Vdc) MCL power supply
r +24 Vdc MCL power supply
r compressor
CYT12 ACTIVE, COMP ON, and AUX POWER ON indicators
SYSTEM POWER cables
PRESSURE, VACUUM, VENT, and WASTE quick-connects
Cooling fans
Laser umbilical cord

PN 4237029G A.6-3
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components Located Behind the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
Figure A.6-2 View of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply with the Front Door Open (See Table A.6-2)
1 2 3

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
AIR
FILTER 30
PSI

SYS SYS
16 VAC PRESS
MCL POWER

PRESS
ADJ

15 14 13 12

4
SYSTEM POWER
5
6
7
MCL POWER
8
9
10
11

1. Argon laser power supply 9. MCL POWER +12 V supply indicator

2. Vacuum trap 10. MCL POWER -12 V supply indicator
3. Water trap 11. MCL POWER +24 V supply indicator
4. SYSTEM POWER +5 V supply indicator 12. System pressure gauge
5. SYSTEM POWER +15 V supply indicator 13. System pressure adjust knob
6. SYSTEM POWER -15 V supply indicator 14. Air filter
7. SYSTEM POWER +24 V supply indicator 15. System vacuum gauge
8. MCL POWER +5 V supply indicator 16. Vacuum filter 7029178F

A.6-4 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.6-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-2, 1 Argon laser power supply Provides control and ac voltages to the Argon laser head.
A.6-2, 2 Vacuum trap Safety device to prevent liquid from entering the vacuum FL 3 inside
pump in the compressor/vacuum pump. As liquid (most the POWER
likely from the vacuum chamber, VC 1, in the lower MODULE
pneumatics drawer) fills the bowl, the float rises and block on
occludes the high vacuum line. With the high vacuum line PN 6320886
physically occluded, liquid cannot get pulled into the
vacuum pump. However, if the float should get stuck and
does not rise to occlude the opening, liquid can then enter
the vacuum pump causing irreparable damage. The
compressor/vacuum pump must be replaced.
A.6-2, 3 Water trap Component may also be referred to as an air/water filter FL 4 inside
separator. Compressed air (pressure) generated by the the POWER
compressor portion of the compressor/vacuum pump is MODULE
hot. As the hot compressed air passes through the cooling block on
coil, moisture in the air condenses. As the cooled air PN 6320886
moves out of the cooling coil it is sent through the
air/water filter separator to filter particles out of the air and
to allow the heavier moisture to drop from the air to
prevent internal rusting of components such as solenoids.
When power to the Cytometer is on, solenoid VL 31 is
energized, blocking the drain pathway into the waste tank.
As a result, once every 24 hours, the customer must power
off the Cytometer for 30 minutes to allow the moisture
collected inside the water trap to drain through the now
de-energized VL 31 into the waste tank.
A.6-2, 4 SYSTEM POWER +5 V voltage Indicates the presence or absence of +5 Vdc to the system.
supply indicator When +5 Vdc is available for use in the system, the
SYSTEM POWER +5 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on
and this LED is not lighted, either the +5 Vdc linear power
supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER +5 V LED on
the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
A.6-2, 5 SYSTEM POWER +15 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +15 Vdc to the
indicator system. When +15 Vdc is available for use in the system,
the SYSTEM POWER +15 V LED is lighted. If power is
turned on and this LED is not lighted, either the ±15 Vdc
linear power supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER
+15 V LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the SYSTEM POWER -15 V LED is also out, the
problem most likely involves the ±15 Vdc linear power
supply.

PN 4237029G A.6-5
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.6-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-2, 6 SYSTEM POWER -15 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of -15 Vdc to the
indicator system. When -15 Vdc is available for use in the system,
the SYSTEM POWER -15 V LED is lighted. If power is
turned on and this LED is not lighted, either the ±15 Vdc
linear power supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER
-15 V LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the SYSTEM POWER +15 V LED is also out, the
problem most likely involves the ±15 Vdc linear power
supply.
A.6-2, 7 SYSTEM POWER +24 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +24 Vdc to the
indicator system. When +24 Vdc is available for use in the system,
the SYSTEM POWER +24 V LED is lighted. If power is
turned on and this LED is not lighted, either the +24 Vdc
linear power supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER
+24 V LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
A.6-2, 8 MCL POWER +5 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +5 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When +5 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER +5 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and this
LED is not lighted, either the MCL +5 Vdc linear power
supply has a problem or the MCL POWER +5 V LED on the
Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the MCL POWER +12 V and -12 V LEDs are also
out, the problem most likely involves the MCL power
supply. However, be aware that the ±12 Vdc section of the
power supply may be operational even when the +5 Vdc
portion is defective. This linear power supply is only
present in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply for an XL-MCL
flow cytometer. The ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc power supply is
only present in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply for an
XL-MCL flow cytometer.
A.6-2, 9 MCL POWER +12 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +12 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When +12 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER +12 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and
this LED is not lighted, either the MCL +12 Vdc linear
power supply has a problem or the MCL POWER +12 V
LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the MCL POWER -12 V and/or +5 V LEDs are also
out, the problem most likely involves the MCL power
supply. However, be aware that the +12 Vdc and -5 Vdc
sections of the power supply may be operational even
when the +12 Vdc portion is defective. This linear power
supply is only present in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply
for an XL-MCL flow cytometer. The ±12 Vdc and +5 Vdc
power supply is only present in a Voltage-Specific Power
Supply for an XL-MCL flow cytometer.

A.6-6 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.6-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-2, 10 MCL POWER -12 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of -12 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When -12 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER -12 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and this
LED is not lighted, either the MCL -12 Vdc linear power
supply has a problem or the MCL POWER -12 V LED on
the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the MCL POWER +12 V and/or +5 V LEDs are also
out, the problem most likely involves the MCL power
supply. However, be aware that the +12 Vdc and +5 Vdc
sections of the power supply may be operational even
when the -12 Vdc portion is defective. The ±12 Vdc and
+5 Vdc power supply is only present in a Voltage-Specific
Power Supply for an XL-MCL flow cytometer.
A.6-2, 11 MCL POWER +24 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +24 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When +24 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER +24 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and
this LED is not lighted, either the MCL +24 Vdc linear
power supply has a problem or the MCL POWER +24 V
LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: The MCL +24 Vdc power supply is only present in a
Voltage-Specific Power Supply for an XL-MCL flow
cytometer.
A.6-2, 12 System pressure gauge External 0 to 60 psi gauge for monitoring the system GA 2 inside
pressure output from the compressor portion of the the POWER
compressor/vacuum pump. 30 psi is the recommended MODULE
pressure for normal operation. If the pressure falls below block on
28 psi, the System Pressure Error message appears on the PN 6320886
Workstation screen to alert the operator.
A.6-2, 13 System pressure adjust knob Knob used to manually adjust the pressure release valve VL 34 inside
(VL34). Adjusting VL34 produces a controlled air leak that the POWER
lowers the 60 psi output from the compressor portion of MODULE
the compressor/vacuum pump to the pressure registered block on
on the system pressure gauge. Acceptable pressure for PN 6320886
operation (that is, the pressure input needed to the
Cytometer for proper operation) is 28 to 32 psi.
A.6-2, 14 Air filter Hydrophobic gas filter removes contaminants in the air FL 1 inside
being displaced as waste from the Cytometer enters the the POWER
waste container (waste tank). MODULE
block on
PN 6320886

PN 4237029G A.6-7
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.6-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-2, 15 System vacuum gauge External 0 to 30 in. Hg gauge for monitoring the system GA 1 inside
vacuum created by the vacuum portion of the the POWER
compressor/vacuum pump. A minimum 17 in. Hg is MODULE
recommended for normal operation. If the vacuum is too block on
low for proper operation, the System Vacuum Error PN 6320886
message appears on the Workstation screen to alert the
operator.
A.6-2, 16 Vacuum filter Hydrophobic gas filter removes any particles or moisture FL 2 inside
in the vacuum line before it reaches the system vacuum the POWER
gauge and the vacuum head of the compressor/vacuum MODULE
pump. block on
PN 6320886

A.6-8 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Components in the Left Side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
Figure A.6-3 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Left Side View with Cover Removed (See Table A.6-3)
9 1

6 5 4 3

E11
E12
E12
E10 E9
E13
E14
P-73 SN13
7
E15
CB-1 K1
K2
8

W1 W2

1. Argon laser power supply 6. Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card

2. Compressor 7. SN13
3. VL31 8. Power Module Control card or
4. VL30 Power Module Control ll card
5. VL32 9. Voltage Selector card 7029179F

PN 4237029G A.6-9
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.6-3 Components in the Left Side Compartment of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-3, 1 Argon laser power supply Provides control and ac voltages to the Argon laser head.
A.6-3, 2 Compressor Dual-head compressor/vacuum pump. The compressor PM 1 inside
head supplies the 60 psi that is regulated to the 30 psi and the POWER
the vacuum head supplies the high vacuum (at least 17 in. MODULE
Hg) needed for proper operation of the Cytometer. block on
PN 6320886
A.6-3, 3 VL31 Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that serves as a VL 31 inside
dump valve to empty the water trap. the POWER
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, solenoid MODULE
VL 31 is energized, blocking the drain pathway from the block on
water trap to the waste tank. PN 6320886

De-energized - Once every 24 hours, the customer must

power off the Cytometer for 30 minutes to allow the
moisture collected inside the water trap to drain through
the now open VL 31 into the waste tank.
A.6-3, 4 VL30 Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that serves as a VL 30 inside
dump valve to quickly release pressure from the system to the POWER
the atmosphere when the power to the Cytometer is turned MODULE
off. block on
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, solenoid PN 6320886
VL 30 is energized to block the pressure release pathway
to atmosphere so that proper system pressure can be
maintained.
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off,
air pressure inside the system is allowed to quickly escape
to atmosphere through the now open VL 30.
A.6-3, 5 VL32 Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that serves as a VL 32 inside
dump valve that allows air to enter the system and equalize the POWER
residual vacuum to the current atmospheric pressure when MODULE
the power to the Cytometer is turned off. block on
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, solenoid PN 6320886
VL 32 is energized to block air from entering the system so
that proper system vacuum can be maintained.
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off,
atmospheric air is allowed to enter the system through the
now open VL 32. Residual vacuum is quickly equalized to
the current atmospheric pressure.

A.6-10 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.6-3 Components in the Left Side Compartment of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-3, 6 Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 Also referred to as the Transient Absorber EMC card, this
card small circuit card is mounted to the ac line filter bracket.
This card protects the internal system from high voltage
transients that may occur on the ac voltage input provided
by the laboratory’s power source.
Note: This circuit card is found in XL and XL-MCL
instruments with the serial number Z09063 or higher. If the
compressor assembly is replaced on XL and XL-MCL
instrument with the serial number Z09062 or lower, this
circuit card is part of the assembly but it is not connected.
A.6-3, 7 SN13 Normally-open vacuum/pressure switch is used to detect a SN 13
plug in the filtered waste tank (or container) vent line. inside the
Waste entering the waste tank displaces air inside the POWER
container through the air filter (labeled F1 on PN 6323706) MODULE
on the front of the Power Supply module. If this air filter block on
becomes clogged, the pressure building up inside the PN 6320886
waste tank triggers SN13 and the Waste Backpressure
Error message appears on the Workstation screen to alert
the operator.
A.6-3, 8 Power Module Control card or Circuit card that:
Power Module Control II card r Provides power to the Voltage Selector card.
r Interfaces the Cytometer to the Power Supply module.
r Provides a relay for supplying ac to the Argon laser
power supply.
A.6-3, 9 Voltage Selector card Selects the proper line voltage for the circuit breaker
dedicated to that voltage.

PN 4237029G A.6-11
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components in the Right Side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Figure A.6-4 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, Right Side View with Cover Removed (See Table A.6-4)
1

10

2
8

7 3

6 5 4

1. Interlock bypass switch 6. ±15 Vdc system power supply

2. Fans 7. +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
3. Cooling coil 8. Voltage Supply Monitor card
4. +24 Vdc system power supply 9. +24 Vdc MCL power supply
5. +5 Vdc system power supply 10. Argon laser power supply 7029180G

A.6-12 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.6-4 Components in the Right Side Compartment of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-4, 1 Interlock switch Safety interlock to ensure the three-sided cover is covering
the components inside the Power Supply module when the
power is on. If the power is on and the cover is removed,
this interlock turns off the power to the Power Supply
module and the Cytometer.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when

operating the instrument when the safety interlock switch
in the Power Supply module is defeated, as you may be
exposed to electric shock. After servicing the instrument,
make sure the three-sided cover is properly reinstalled to
reactivate the safety interlock switch if it was bypassed
while servicing the instrument.

To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch

up and power is restored to the Power Supply module and
the Cytometer even though the cover is removed.

Always be very careful if you bypass this safety interlock

and operate the instrument with the covers off. The
interlock switch is reset when the cover is reinstalled.
A.6-4, 2 Fans Provide air flow for cooling the inner compartments of the
Power Supply module.
A.6-4, 3 Cooling coil Copper coil that provides a passageway for the hot COOLING
compressed air (pressure) generated by the compressor COIL inside
portion of the compressor/vacuum pump to circulate while the POWER
fans blow air across the coils to lower the temperature. As MODULE
the hot compressed air passes through this cooling coil, block on
moisture in the air condenses. As the cooled air moves out PN 6320886
of the cooling coil it is sent through the air/water filter
separator to filter particles out of the air and to allow the
heavier moisture to drop from the air to prevent internal
rusting of components such as solenoids.
A.6-4, 4 +24 Vdc system power supply Receives ac supply voltage input and converts it to the
+24 Vdc needed to power the solenoids and fans.
A.6-4, 5 +5 Vdc system power supply Receives ac supply voltage input and converts it to the
+5 Vdc needed for the digital logic circuitry.
A.6-4, 6 ±15 Vdc system power supply Receives ac supply voltage input and converts it to the
+15 Vdc and -15 Vdc required to operate the analog
devices, such as PMTs, DACs, and op amps.

PN 4237029G A.6-13
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.6-4 Components in the Right Side Compartment of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-4, 7 +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power Receives ac supply voltage input and not only converts it to
supply the +5 Vdc needed for the MCL CPU digital logic circuitry
but also converts it to the +12 Vdc and -12 Vdc required to
operate the bar-code scanner (or bar-code reader head).
Note: This linear power supply is only present in a
Voltage-Specific Power Supply for an XL-MCL flow
cytometer.
A.6-4, 8 Voltage Supply Monitor card Circuit card attached to the back of the front panel that
consists of eight LEDs - one for each dc voltage supplied
by the five linear power supplies. These LEDs, called
voltage supply indicators, are easily seen on the front of
the Power Supply module (Figure A.6-2). When a voltage
is available for use, the LED designated for that voltage is
lighted. If power is turned on and an LED is not lighted,
either the corresponding power supply has a problem or
the LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: MCL power supplies are not present, and therefore
not monitored, in a Voltage-Specific Power Supply for an
XL flow cytometer.
A.6-4, 9 +24 Vdc MCL power supply Receives ac supply voltage input and converts it to the
+24 Vdc needed to power the MCL solenoids.
Note: This linear power supply is only present in a
Voltage-Specific Power Supply for an XL-MCL flow
cytometer.
A.6-4, 10 Argon laser power supply Provides control and ac voltages to the Argon laser head.
Key must be in and rotated for the laser power to come on.

A.6-14 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Components on the Rear Panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
Figure A.6-5 Rear View of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (See Table A.6-5)
2 3 4
5 8

1
6 9

23

7 10

11

12

AUX POWER ON
13
22 PRESSURE
SYSTEM
ON/OFF
14
VACUUM WASTE LEVEL
ON

OFF

WASTE
LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER
MAX 1800 WATTS MAX 1500 WATTS
15
WASTE VENT

16

21 20 19 18 17

1. MCL connector 13. COMP ON indicator lamp

2. CYT12 connector 14. AUX POWER ON indicator lamp
3. LOGIC connector 15. SYSTEM ON/OFF rocker switch
4. ANALOG connector 16. WASTE LEVEL connector
5. 24 VOLTS circuit breaker 17. SYSTEM POWER cables
6. COMPRESSOR circuit breaker 18. VENT quick-connect (off-white)
7. MCL 24 VOLTS circuit breaker 19. WASTE quick-connect (orange)
8. 5 VOLTS circuit breaker 20. VACUUM quick-connect (yellow)
9. 15 VOLTS circuit breaker 21. PRESSURE quick-connect (blue)
10. MCL 5 VOLTS circuit breaker 22, Fans
11. POWER MODULE CONTROL connector 23. Laser umbilical cord 7029181G
12. CYT12 ACTIVE indicator lamp

PN 4237029G A.6-15
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.6-5 Components on the Rear Panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-5, 1 MCL connector Provides the external interface from the Power Supply
module to the MCL assembly. The cable attached to this
connector passes +5 Vdc, ±15 Vdc, +24 Vdc, and ±12 Vdc.
The CYT12 signal, which is also looped in this connector,
enables a relay that provides power to the Cytometer.
A.6-5, 2 CYT12 connector Connector for the fiber optics cable that provides the
external CYT12 interface between the computer system
and the Power Supply module. When powering up the
Cytometer, a signal is sent to the computer and to the
Power Supply module enabling them to power up. If the
CYT12 cable connecting the Workstation computer and the
Power Supply module is loose or disconnected, the system
will not power up the Cytometer and the Workstation
comes up in listmode.
A.6-5, 3 LOGIC connector Provides the external connection from the Power Supply
module to the Cytometer. The cable attached to this
connector provides the +5 Vdc digital voltage and ground,
as well as the connection for the Power Supply module
safety interlock.
A.6-5, 4 ANALOG connector Provides the external connection from the Power Supply
module to the Cytometer. The cable attached to this
connector provides the analog system power, ±15 Vdc,
+24 Vdc, ground, and the power supply sense lines.
A.6-5, 5 24 VOLTS circuit breaker Protects the Cytometer if a short occurs in the +24 Vdc
supply circuitry. This is an electromagnetic breaker so it
must be switched off then back on again to reset the
circuit.
A.6-5, 6 COMPRESSOR circuit breaker Protects the compressor/vacuum pump if a short occurs in
the ac supply lines or on the Power Module Control card.
This is an electromagnetic breaker so it must be switched
off then back on again to reset the compressor/vacuum
pump.
A.6-5, 7 MCL 24 VOLTS circuit breaker Protects the MCL if a short occurs in the MCL +24 Vdc
supply circuitry. This is an electromagnetic breaker so it
must be switched off then back on again to reset the
circuit.
A.6-5, 8 5 VOLTS circuit breaker Protects the Cytometer if a short occurs in the +5 Vdc
supply logic circuitry. This is an electromagnetic breaker
so it must be switched off then back on again to reset the
circuit.
A.6-5, 9 15 VOLTS circuit breaker Protects the Cytometer if a short occurs in either the
+15 Vdc or -15 Vdc supply circuitry. This is an
electromagnetic breaker so it must be switched off then
back on again to reset the circuit.

A.6-16 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.6-5 Components on the Rear Panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-5, 10 MCL 5 VOLTS circuit breaker Protects the MCL if a short occurs in the MCL +5 Vdc,
+12 Vdc, or -12 Vdc supply circuitry. This is an
electromagnetic breaker so it must be switched off then
back on again to reset the circuit.
A.6-5, 11 POWER MODULE CONTROL Provides the external connection from the Power Supply
connector module to the Cytometer. At the Power Supply module, the
cable attached to this connector provides a in-line
connection with the Power Module Control II card (or
Power Module Control card) and the Argon laser power
supply. The cable interface provides the following signals:
r Interlock
r Laser Discharge
r Idle On/Off
r Light/Current
r Laser Power Out
r Laser Current Out
r Laser Power In
r Laser Current In
r Compressor On
r Laser Start
A.6-5, 12 CYT12 ACTIVE indicator lamp Indicates CYT12 is connected and active.
A.6-5, 13 COMP ON indicator lamp Indicates signal was sent to start the compressor.
A.6-5, 14 AUX POWER ON indicator lamp Indicates ac power to system.
A.6-5, 15 SYSTEM ON/OFF rocker switch Used to turn the Power Supply module on or off.
r To supply ac to the Power Supply module, press the
rocker switch to ON, position l.
r To stop the supply of ac to the Power Supply module,
press the rocker switch to OFF, position O.
A.6-5, 16 WASTE LEVEL connector Monitors level of system waste inside the external waste
container.
A.6-5, 17 SYSTEM POWER cables Provides ac input to the Power Supply module and Argon
laser power supply.
A.6-5, 18 VENT quick-connect Provides back pressure vent to the external waste QD 22
(off-white) container. inside the
POWER
MODULE
block on
PN 6320886

PN 4237029G A.6-17
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.6-5 Components on the Rear Panel of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.6-5, 19 WASTE quick-connect Provides a pathway to the waste container for emptying QD 20
(orange) waste that accumulates in the air/water separator (located inside the
on the front of the Power Supply module). POWER
MODULE
block on
PN 6320886
A.6-5, 20 VACUUM quick-connect Provides vacuum to the Cytometer. QD 21
(yellow) inside the
POWER
MODULE
block on
PN 6320886
A.6-5, 21 PRESSURE quick-connect Provides 30 psi to the Cytometer. QD 19
(blue) inside the
POWER
MODULE
block on
PN 6320886
A.6-5, 22 Fans Provide air flow for cooling the inner compartments of the
Power Supply module.
A.6-5, 23 Laser umbilical cord Connects the Argon laser head to the Argon power supply.

A.6-18 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
A.7 UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS
ATTENTION: Power may be supplied to an FC 500 via the original Voltage-Specific Power
Supply or the new Universal Power Supply. This section only identifies the main components
and/or assemblies in the Universal Power Supply. To identify the main components and/or
assemblies in the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, go to Heading A.6.

Instructions for Use

The Universal Power Supply provides and monitors the main electronic and pneumatic power
(vacuum and pressure) to the Cytometer. This section identifies the main components and/or
assemblies in the Universal Power Supply, briefly describing their functions and showing
their locations.

To expedite finding the name, location, or description of a component, the illustrations and
tables in this section are organized according to major areas of the Universal Power Supply.
Figure A.7-1 is the anchor illustration from which you can quickly access a specific
illustration.

Figure A.7-1 is referred to as the anchor illustration because it serves as the reference point
for accessing other illustrations. This anchor illustration uses an alphabetic letter to indicate a
portion of the Universal Power Supply that correlates with a location description provided in
the Figure Reference column. This description includes the figure reference that illustrates and
provides the name of the main components located in this area of the Universal Power Supply.

If you have not used an anchor illustration to locate a component and its function, you may
want to begin by reading the following instructions:
1. To quickly locate a component, always begin at the anchor illustration, Figure A.7-1.
2. On the anchor illustration, locate the area of the Universal Power Supply where the
component in question is located and note the associated letter.
3. Locate the associated letter in the Figure Reference column and note the figure number.
4. Go to the referenced figure number.
Note: In the electronic version, each figure reference is in hypertext so that when you
select the reference, the illustration quickly appears. Using the hypertext link is the
fastest way to locate a component location or information
5. Locate the component. The number associated with the component identifies its name
and also provides a figure reference for locating the component’s function on the
associated table. Each table also includes the reference designator for the component,
where applicable.

PN 4237029G A.7-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Anchor Illustration
Use Figure A.7-1, the anchor illustration, to quickly access the desired illustration. This
anchor illustration uses an alphabetic letter to indicate a portion of the Power Supply module
that correlates with a location description provided in the Figure Reference column. This
description includes the figure reference that illustrates and provides the name of the main
components located in this area of the Power Supply module.

Figure A.7-1 Universal Power Supply, Anchor Illustration for Locating Components Figure Reference

B A Components behind the front

C door, Figure A.7-2.
UPS pneumatics drawer
components, Figure A.7-3
B Components in the left-side
compartment, Figure A.7-4
C Components in the right-side
VAC
FILTER compartment, Figure A.7-5
A
VAC
TRAP
WATER
TRAP
D Components on the rear
SYSTEM POWER

AIR
+5V
+15V
panel (behind the back
FILTER

cover), Figure A.7-6

30 -15V
PSI
+24V

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS +5V
+15V
-15V
PRESS
ADJ +24V

ANALOG

LOGIC

D
MCL/MPL

SYSTEM POWER LASER POWER

1500 WATTS 1800 WATTS
MAX MAX

1 1

1 2

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

Back cover removed

7318236B

A.7-2 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-1 Universal Power Supply, Component and Assembly Accessibility

Figure
Reference Main Component or Assembly that is Accessible To Access Component or Assembly
A.7-1, A ON/OFF rocker switch for system power Open the front door.
Various pneumatic components including:
r Vacuum and water traps
r System pressure and system vacuum gauges
r System pressure adjust knob
r Air and vacuum filters
Voltage supply indicators for:
r System power (+5 V, +15 V, -15 V, +24 V)
r MCL power (+5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +24 V)
UPS pneumatics drawer
A.7-1, B Argon laser power supply Remove the rear cover then the main cover.
Voltage Selector 2card
Breaker card
Various pneumatic components including:
r Dual-head compressor
r Dryer assembly
r VL31 (compressor dump valve)
A.7-1, C Interlock bypass switch Remove the rear cover then the main cover.
Fans
Power supplies including:
r +24 Vdc system power supply
r +5 Vdc system power supply
r ±15 Vdc system power supply
r +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
r +24 Vdc MCL power supply*
Voltage Supply Monitor card
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card
A.7-1, D Connectors for MCL (or MPL*), LOGIC, and ANALOG cables Remove the back cover. Components may
Connectors for SYSTEM POWER and LASER POWER cables require interior access for replacement.

Laser umbilical cord Note: If interior access is necessary,

remove the main cover.
Power Control 3 card
PRESSURE, WASTE, VACUUM, and WASTE VENT
quick-connects
Cooling fans inside housing
* MPL is an option for the FC 500, not the XL and XL-MCL
flow cytometers.

PN 4237029G A.7-3
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components Located Behind the Front Door of the Universal Power Supply
Figure A.7-2 View of the Universal Power Supply with the Front Door Open (See Table A.7-2)
1 2 3

VAC
FILTER

VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER
+5V
16 AIR
FILTER
30
+15V
-15V
PSI
+24V

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS +5V
+15V
-15V
PRESS
ADJ +24V

15 14 13 12

4 SYSTEM POWER
+5V
5
+15V
6 -15V
+24V
7
MCL POWER
+5V
8
+12V
9 -12V
10 +24V
11

1. Vacuum trap 9. MCL POWER +12 V supply indicator

2. Water trap 10. MCL POWER -12 V supply indicator
3. ON/OFF rocker switch for system power 11. MCL POWER +24 supply indicator
4. SYSTEM POWER +5 V supply indicator 12. Pressure adjust knob
5. SYSTEM POWER +15 V supply indicator 13. System pressure gauge
6. SYSTEM POWER -15 V supply indicator 14. Air filter
7. SYSTEM POWER +24 V supply indicator 15. System vacuum gauge
8. MCL POWER +5 V supply indicator* 16. Vacuum filter
7029298G

A.7-4 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-2)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-2, 1 Vacuum trap Safety device to prevent liquid from entering the vacuum FL 3 on
pump in the compressor/vacuum pump. As liquid (most PN 623401
likely from the vacuum chamber, VC 1, in the lower
pneumatics drawer) fills the bowl, the float rises and
occludes the high vacuum line. With the high vacuum line
physically occluded, liquid cannot get pulled into the
vacuum pump. However, if the float should get stuck and
does not rise to occlude the opening, liquid can then enter
the vacuum pump causing irreparable damage. The
compressor/vacuum pump must be replaced.
A.7-2, 2 Water trap Component may also be referred to as an air/water filter FL 4 on
separator. Compressed air (pressure) generated by the PN 623401
compressor portion of the compressor/vacuum pump is
hot. As the hot compressed air passes through the cooling
coil, moisture in the air condenses. As the cooled air
moves out of the cooling coil it is sent through the
air/water filter separator to filter particles out of the air and
to allow the heavier moisture to drop from the air to
prevent internal rusting of components such as solenoids.
When power to the Cytometer is on, solenoid VL 31 is
energized, blocking the drain pathway into the waste tank.
As a result, once every 24 hours, the customer must power
off the Cytometer for 30 minutes to allow the moisture
collected inside the water trap to drain through the now
de-energized VL 31 into the waste tank.
A.7-6, 3 ON/OFF rocker switch Used to turn the Power Supply module on or off.
A.7-2, 4 SYSTEM POWER +5 V voltage Indicates the presence or absence of +5 Vdc to the system.
supply indicator When +5 Vdc is available for use in the system, the
SYSTEM POWER +5 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on
and this LED is not lighted, either the +5 Vdc linear power
supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER +5 V LED on
the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
A.7-2, 5 SYSTEM POWER +15 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +15 Vdc to the
indicator system. When +15 Vdc is available for use in the system,
the SYSTEM POWER +15 V LED is lighted. If power is
turned on and this LED is not lighted, either the ±15 Vdc
linear power supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER
+15 V LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the SYSTEM POWER -15 V LED is also out, the
problem most likely involves the ±15 Vdc linear power
supply.

PN 4237029G A.7-5
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.7-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-2)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-2, 6 SYSTEM POWER -15 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of -15 Vdc to the
indicator system. When -15 Vdc is available for use in the system,
the SYSTEM POWER -15 V LED is lighted. If power is
turned on and this LED is not lighted, either the ±15 Vdc
linear power supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER
-15 V LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the SYSTEM POWER +15 V LED is also out, the
problem most likely involves the ±15 Vdc linear power
supply.
A.7-2, 7 SYSTEM POWER +24 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +24 Vdc to the
indicator system. When +24 Vdc is available for use in the system,
the SYSTEM POWER +24 V LED is lighted. If power is
turned on and this LED is not lighted, either the +24 Vdc
linear power supply has a problem or the SYSTEM POWER
+24 V LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
A.7-2, 8 MCL POWER +5 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +5 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When +5 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER +5 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and this
LED is not lighted, either the MCL +5 Vdc linear power
supply has a problem or the MCL POWER +5 V LED on the
Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the MCL POWER +12 V and -12 V LEDs are also
out, the problem most likely involves the MCL power
supply. However, be aware that the ±12 Vdc section of the
power supply may be operational even when the +5 Vdc
portion is defective
A.7-2, 9 MCL POWER +12 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +12 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When +12 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER +12 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and
this LED is not lighted, either the MCL +12 Vdc linear
power supply has a problem or the MCL POWER +12 V
LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the MCL POWER -12 V and/or +5 V LEDs are also
out, the problem most likely involves the MCL power
supply. However, be aware that the +12 Vdc and -5 Vdc
sections of the power supply may be operational even
when the +12 Vdc portion is defective

A.7-6 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-2 Components behind the Front Door of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-2)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-2, 10 MCL POWER -12 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of -12 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When -12 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER -12 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and this
LED is not lighted, either the MCL -12 Vdc linear power
supply has a problem or the MCL POWER -12 V LED on
the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
Note: If the MCL POWER +12 V and/or +5 V LEDs are also
out, the problem most likely involves the MCL power
supply. However, be aware that the +12 Vdc and +5 Vdc
sections of the power supply may be operational even
when the -12 Vdc portion is defective
A.7-2, 11 MCL POWER +24 V supply Indicates the presence or absence of +24 Vdc to the MCL.
indicator When +24 Vdc is available for use by the MCL, the MCL
POWER +24 V LED is lighted. If power is turned on and
this LED is not lighted, either the MCL +24 Vdc linear
power supply has a problem or the MCL POWER +24 V
LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
A.7-2, 12 Pressure adjust knob Knob used to manually adjust the pressure release valve VL 34 on
(VL34). Adjusting VL34 produces a controlled air leak that PN 623401
lowers the 60 psi output from the compressor portion of
the compressor/vacuum pump to the pressure registered
on the system pressure gauge. Acceptable pressure for
operation (that is, the pressure input needed to the
Cytometer for proper operation) is 28 to 32 psi.
A.7-2, 13 System pressure gauge External 0 to 60 psi gauge for monitoring the system GA 2 on
pressure output from the compressor portion of the PN 623401
compressor/vacuum pump. 30 psi is the recommended
pressure for normal operation. If the pressure falls below
28 psi, the System Pressure Error message appears on the
Workstation screen to alert the operator.
A.7-2, 14 Air filter Hydrophobic gas filter removes contaminants in the air FL 1 on
being displaced as waste from the Cytometer enters the PN 623401
waste container (waste tank).
A.7-2, 15 System vacuum gauge External 0 to 30 in. Hg gauge for monitoring the system GA 1 on
vacuum created by the vacuum portion of the PN 623401
compressor/vacuum pump. A minimum 17 in. Hg is
recommended for normal operation. If the vacuum is too
low for proper operation, the System Vacuum Error
message appears on the Workstation screen to alert the
operator.
A.7-2, 16 Vacuum filter Hydrophobic gas filter removes any particles or moisture FL 2 on
in the vacuum line before it reaches the system vacuum PN 623401
gauge and the vacuum head of the compressor/vacuum
pump.

PN 4237029G A.7-7
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components in the UPS Pneumatics Drawer

Figure A.7-3 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Table A.7-3)

VAC
FILTER 1
VAC WATER
TRAP TRAP
SYSTEM POWER

AIR
FILTER
30
PSI

SYS MCL POWER

SYS
VAC PRESS

PRESS
ADJ

E
R
SU
ES
PR

M
U
U
C
VA
2

11 10
9
3
8 4
1. Dryer assembly Right side view 5
2. SN 13 6
3. PNEUMATICS CONTROL connector 7
4. WASTE VENT quick-connect (off-white)
5. VACUUM quick-connect (yellow)
6. WASTE quick-connect (orange) 1
7. PRESSURE quick-connect (blue)
8. Dual-head compressor
9. System pressure adjust knob assembly (back)
10. System pressure gauge (back)
11. Voltage Supply Monitor card (back)
12. Compressor start relay
13. Vacuum gauge (back)
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

14. Vacuum relief valve

VA
C

15. Pressure relief / water trap dump valve

U
U
M

12
16. Capacitor

13

14
15
7 16
8
6
5 2
4
7318282D 3 Left side view

A.7-8 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-3 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Figure A.7-3)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-3, 1 Dryer assembly Assembly functions similar to a cooling coil to allow DRYER on
compressed air from the compressor side of the dual-head PN 623401
air compressor/vacuum pump to dehumidify.
A.7-3, 2 SN13 Normally-open vacuum/pressure switch is used to detect a SN 13 on
plug in the filtered waste tank (or container) vent line. PN 623401
Waste entering the waste tank displaces air inside the
container through the air filter (labeled F1 on PN 623401)
on the front of the Power Supply module. If this air filter
becomes clogged, the pressure building up inside the
waste tank triggers SN13 and the Waste Backpressure
Error message appears on the Workstation screen to alert
the operator.
A.7-3, 3 PNEUMATICS CONTROL Cable attached to this connector provides ac voltage from
connector the Power Control 3 card to the compressor relay that
energizes the dual-head compressor.
A.7-3, 4 WASTE VENT quick-connect Provides back pressure vent to the external waste QD 22 on
(off-white) container. PN 623401
A.7-3, 5 VACUUM quick-connect Provides vacuum to the Cytometer. QD 21 on
(yellow) PN 623401
A.7-3, 6 WASTE quick-connect (orange) Provides a pathway to the waste container for emptying QD 20 on
waste that accumulates in the air/water separator (located PN 623401
on the front of the Power Supply module).
A.7-3, 7 PRESSURE quick-connect Provides 30 psi to the Cytometer. QD 19 on
(blue) PN 632401
A.7-3, 8 Dual-head compressor Combination compressor and vacuum pump packaged as PM 1 on
one assembly and powered by a single motor. Each section PN 623401
has a wobble-type piston that reciprocates “in-phase”. The
compressor intake and vacuum exhaust have a
filter/muffler. The motor is a single phase with an auto
reset thermal protector. The capacitor and boot are
supplied with the dual-head compressor. The compressor
head supplies the 60 psi that is regulated to the 30 psi and
the vacuum head supplies the high vacuum (at least 17 in.
Hg) needed for proper operation of the Cytometer.
A.7-3, 9 System pressure adjust knob Back of knob assembly used to manually adjust the VL 34 on
assembly (back) pressure release valve (VL34). Adjusting VL34 produces a PN 623401
controlled air leak that lowers the 60 psi output from the
compressor portion of the compressor/vacuum pump to
the pressure registered on the system pressure gauge.
Acceptable pressure for operation (that is, the pressure
input needed to the Cytometer for proper operation) is
28 to 32 psi.

PN 4237029G A.7-9
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.7-3 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Figure A.7-3) (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-3, 10 System pressure gauge (back) Back of the 0 to 60 psi gauge for monitoring the system GA 2 on
pressure output from the compressor portion of the PN 623401
compressor/vacuum pump. 30 psi is the recommended
pressure for normal operation. If the pressure falls below
28 psi, the System Pressure Error message appears on the
Workstation screen to alert the operator.
A.7-3, 11 Voltage Supply Monitor card Circuit card attached to the back of the front panel that
(back) consists of eight LEDs - one for each dc voltage supplied
by the five linear power supplies. These LEDs, called
voltage supply indicators, are easily seen on the front of
the Power Supply module (Figure A.7-2). When a voltage
is available for use, the LED designated for that voltage is
lighted. If power is turned on and an LED is not lighted,
either the corresponding power supply has a problem or
the LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.
A.7-3, 12 Compressor start relay When this relay receives a start compressor signal
(/Comp1 ON) from the Power Control 3 card, the relay
activates and provides the ac voltage needed to start the
dual-head compressor.
A.7-3, 13 Vacuum gauge (back) Back of 0 to 30 in. Hg gauge for monitoring the system GA 1 on
vacuum created by the vacuum portion of the PN 623401
compressor/vacuum pump. A minimum 17 in. Hg is
recommended for normal operation. If the vacuum is too
low for proper operation, the System Vacuum Error
message appears on the Workstation screen to alert the
operator.
A.7-3, 14 Vacuum relief valve Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that serves as a
dump valve that allows air to enter the system and equalize
residual vacuum to the current atmospheric pressure when
the power to the Cytometer is turned off.
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, +24 Vdc
energizes this solenoid to block air from entering the
system so that proper system vacuum can be maintained.
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off,
+24 Vdc being applied to the solenoid is removed and the
solenoid is opened. Atmospheric air can now enter the
system through the now open solenoid to quickly equalize
residual vacuum to the current atmospheric pressure.
Note: Functions the same as VL32 on the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply.

A.7-10 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-3 UPS Pneumatics Drawer Components (See Figure A.7-3) (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-3, 15 Pressure relief / waste trap Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that serves as a VL 31 on
dump valve dump valve to quickly release pressure from the system to PN 6323706
the atmosphere and to empty the water trap when the
power to the Cytometer is turned off.
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, +24 Vdc
energizes this solenoid to block pressure from escaping
from the system to the waste container so that proper
system pressure can be maintained. The drain pathway
from the water trap to the waste container is also blocked
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off,
the +24 Vdc being applied to the solenoid is removed and
the solenoid is opened. Air pressure inside the system is
allowed to quickly escape to the waste container through
the now open solenoid valve and the drain pathway from
the water trap to the waste container is also open to allow
the moisture collected inside the water trap to drain
through the open dump valve into the waste container. In a
high volume laboratory where the Cytometer operates
practically non-stop, the customer must power off the
Cytometer once every 24 hours for 1 minute. The 1 minute
time requirement is sufficient for the moisture collected
inside the water trap to drain through the open dump valve
into the waste container.
Note: Functions mirror those of VL30 and VL31 on the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
A.7-3, 16 Capacitor Both capacitor and boot come with the dual-head
compressor and cannot be ordered separately.

PN 4237029G A.7-11
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components in the Left Side of the Universal Power Supply

Figure A.7-4 Left Side View of the Universal Power Supply with Cover Removed (See Table A.7-4)
1 2

14 13 12 11 10

1. Argon laser power supply

2. Cooling fan
3. Breaker card
4. Voltage Selector 2 card
5. ac line filter
6. Dryer assembly
7. Compressor start relay
8. System vacuum gauge
9. Vacuum relief valve
10. Pressure relief / water trap dump valve
11. Dual-head compressor
12. Capacitor
13. SN 13
14. Pneumatics control cable 7318264D

A.7-12 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-4 Components in the Left Side of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-4)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-4, 1 Argon laser power supply Provides control and ac voltages to the Argon laser head.
A.7-4, 2 Cooling fan New fan location between the compressor and linear power
supplies. Boosts air circulation in the lower compartment,
especially over the compressor and into the right-side
compartment to cool the linear power supplies.
A.7-4, 3 Breaker card New circuit card contains a bank of 26 thermal circuit
breakers with reset tabs on the upper front panel. This
circuit card operates in conjunction with the Voltage
Selector 2 card, another new circuit card.
A.7-4, 4 Voltage Selector 2 card Selects the proper line voltage for the circuit breaker
dedicated to that voltage.
A.7-4, 5 ac line filter Input to the ac line filter comes through the main circuit
breaker. The ac line filter operates in conjunction with the
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card to protect the
internal system from high voltage transients from the input
power source. Output from the ac line filter is routed to the
ac input connector (J3) on the back of the Breaker card.
A.7-4, 6 Dryer assembly Assembly functions similar to a cooling coil to allow DRYER on
compressed air from the compressor side of the dual-head PN 632401
air compressor/vacuum pump to dehumidify.
A.7-4, 7 Compressor start relay When this relay receives a start compressor signal
(/Comp1 ON) from the Power Control 3 card, the relay
activates and provides the ac voltage needed to start the
dual-head compressor.
A.7-4, 8 System vacuum gauge External 0 to 30 in. Hg gauge for monitoring the system GA 1 on
vacuum created by the vacuum portion of the PN 623401
compressor/vacuum pump. A minimum 17 in. Hg is
recommended for normal operation. If the vacuum is too
low for proper operation, the System Vacuum Error
message appears on the Workstation screen to alert the
operator.
A.7-4, 9 Vacuum relief valve Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that serves as a
dump valve that allows air to enter the system and equalize
residual vacuum to the current atmospheric pressure when
the power to the Cytometer is turned off.
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, +24 Vdc
energizes this solenoid to block air from entering the
system so that proper system vacuum can be maintained.
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off,
+24 Vdc being applied to the solenoid is removed and the
solenoid is opened. Atmospheric air can now enter the
system through the now open solenoid to quickly equalize
residual vacuum to the current atmospheric pressure.
Note: Functions the same as VL32 on the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply.

PN 4237029G A.7-13
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.7-4 Components in the Left Side of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-4) (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-4, 10 Pressure relief / waste trap Two-way, normally-open solenoid valve that serves as a VL 31 on
dump valve dump valve to quickly release pressure from the system to PN 6323706
the atmosphere and to empty the water trap when the
power to the Cytometer is turned off.
Energized - When power to the Cytometer is on, +24 Vdc
energizes this solenoid to block pressure from escaping
from the system to the waste container so that proper
system pressure can be maintained. The drain pathway
from the water trap to the waste container is also blocked
De-energized - When power to the Cytometer is turned off,
the +24 Vdc being applied to the solenoid is removed and
the solenoid is opened. Air pressure inside the system is
allowed to quickly escape to the waste container through
the now open solenoid valve and the drain pathway from
the water trap to the waste container is also open to allow
the moisture collected inside the water trap to drain
through the open dump valve into the waste container. In a
high volume laboratory where the Cytometer operates
practically non-stop, the customer must power off the
Cytometer once every 24 hours for 1 minute. The 1 minute
time requirement is sufficient for the moisture collected
inside the water trap to drain through the open dump valve
into the waste container.
Note: Functions mirror those of VL30 and VL31 on the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
A.7-4, 11 Dual-head compressor Combination compressor and vacuum pump packaged as PM 1 on
one assembly and powered by a single motor. Each section PN 6323706
has a wobble-type piston that reciprocates “in-phase”. The
compressor intake and vacuum exhaust have a
filter/muffler. The motor is a single phase with an auto
reset thermal protector. The capacitor and boot are
supplied with the dual-head compressor. The compressor
head supplies the 60 psi that is regulated to the 30 psi and
the vacuum head supplies the high vacuum (at least 17 in.
Hg) needed for proper operation of the Cytometer.
A.7-4, 12 Capacitor Both capacitor and boot come with the dual-head
compressor and cannot be ordered separately.
A.7-4, 13 SN13 Normally-open vacuum/pressure switch is used to detect a SN 13 on
plug in the filtered waste tank (or container) vent line. PN 632401
Waste entering the waste tank displaces air inside the
container through the air filter (labeled F1 on PN 632401)
on the front of the Power Supply module. If this air filter
becomes clogged, the pressure building up inside the
waste tank triggers SN13 and the Waste Backpressure
Error message appears on the Workstation screen to alert
the operator.

A.7-14 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-4 Components in the Left Side of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-4) (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-4, 14 Pneumatics control cable Connects the Power Control 3 card to components inside
the UPS pneumatics drawer and provides a pathway to:
r Send a start compressor signal (/Comp1 ON) to the
new compressor start relay inside the UPS pneumatics
drawer, the relay activates and provides the ac voltage
needed to start the dual-head compressor.
r Activate the new compressor dump valve to empty the
water trap.
r Monitor the waste pressure switch attached to the left
side of the UPS pneumatics drawer.

PN 4237029G A.7-15
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Components in the Right Side of the Universal Power Supply

Figure A.7-5 Right Side View of the Universal Power Supply with Cover Removed (See Table A.7-5)
1

5 4 3

1. Interlock bypass switch

2. Fans
3. +24 Vdc system power supply
2
4. +5 Vdc system power supply
5. ±15 Vdc system power supply
6. +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power supply
7. Voltage Supply Monitor card
8. +24 Vdc MCL power supply
9. FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card

7318263B

A.7-16 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-5 Components in the Right Side of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-5)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-5, 1 Interlock interlock switch Safety interlock to ensure the main cover is in place during
operation. If the Power Supply module is ON (meaning the
two ac power cords are installed in a wall outlet and the
SYSTEM ON/OFF rocker switch is in the ON position) and
the main cover is removed, this interlock turns off the
power to the Power Supply module and the Cytometer.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Be very careful when

operating the instrument when the safety interlock switch
in the Power Supply module is defeated, as you may be
exposed to the laser beam and/or electric shock. After
servicing the instrument, make sure the main cover is
properly reinstalled to reactivate the safety interlock
switch.

To override (bypass) this safety interlock, pull the switch

up and power is restored to the Power Supply module and
the Cytometer even though the main cover is removed.

Always be very careful if you bypass this safety interlock

and operate the instrument with the main cover off. The
interlock switch is reset when the main cover is reinstalled.
A.7-5, 2 Fans Provide exhaust air flow for cooling the inner
compartments of the Power Supply module.
A.7-5, 3 +24 Vdc system power supply Receives ac supply voltage input and converts it to the
+24 Vdc needed to power the solenoids and fans.
A.7-5, 4 +5 Vdc system power supply Receives ac supply voltage input and converts it to the
+5 Vdc needed for the digital logic circuitry.
A.7-5, 5 ±15 Vdc system power supply Receives ac supply voltage input and converts it to the
+15 Vdc and -15 Vdc required to operate the analog
devices.
A.7-5, 6 +5 and ±12 Vdc MCL power MCL functions - Receives ac supply voltage input and not
supply only converts it to the +5 Vdc needed for the MCL CPU
digital logic circuitry and to operate the bar-code scanner
(or bar-code reader head) but also converts it to +12 Vdc
and -12 Vdc which are available but not used.
A.7-5, 7 Voltage Supply Monitor card Circuit card attached to the back of the front panel that
consists of eight LEDs - one for each dc voltage supplied
by the five linear power supplies. These LEDs, called
voltage supply indicators, are easily seen on the front of
the Power Supply module (Figure A.7-2). When a voltage
is available for use, the LED designated for that voltage is
lighted. If power is turned on and an LED is not lighted,
either the corresponding power supply has a problem or
the LED on the Voltage Supply Monitor card is defective.

PN 4237029G A.7-17
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.7-5 Components in the Right Side of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-5) (Continued)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-5, 8 +24 Vdc MCL power supply MCL functions - Receives ac supply voltage input and
converts it to the +24 Vdc needed to power the MCL
A.7-5, 9 FC 500 Transient Voltage May also be referred to as the Transient Absorber EMC
Suppressor card card or the Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card. This small
circuit card protects the internal system from high voltage
transients that may occur on the ac voltage input provided
by the laboratory’s power source.
Note: This circuit card is labeled as the Transient Voltage
Suppressor 2 card and, as such, is used inside the XL and
XL-MCL flow cytometers. When a special adhesive is
applied to the components on this circuit card, the circuit
card is referred to as the FC 500 Transient Voltage
Suppressor card and has a unique part number. The
FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card is used in both
the Universal Power Supply and the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply attached to an FC 500 cytometer.

A.7-18 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Components on the Rear Panel of the Universal Power Supply
Figure A.7-6 Rear View of the Universal Power Supply (See Table A.7-6)
1 2

ANALOG

LOGIC

24
MCL/MPL

23 SYSTEM POWER
1500 WATTS
MAX
LASER POWER
1800 WATTS
MAX

22 4
21
20
1 1

1 2

13 1

WASTE PNEUMATICS
PRESS WASTE VAC VENT CONTROL

19 18 17 16 15 7 14 2 5

1. ON/OFF key 13
E16
2. ac power cable or connector LASER

PWR RELAY
SYSTEM
CONTACTOR
3. Argon laser supply 12 U2
R4
K2
(FAR SIDE)
4. Laser logic cable or connector

K4
J79 CR6
FAN CYT 12 CR9
5. Power Control 3 card R3 CR10
J80 1
6. POWER MODULE CONTROL cable or connector CR7
11 FAN COMP ON
7. PNEUMATICS CONTROL cable or connector J81 R1
1 1 J78
8. WASTE LEVEL connector FAN CR8
AUX LASER ARGON LASER LASER 6
AUX PWR
9. AUX LASER connector 10 R12 SYSTEM
RELAY
10. AUX POWER indicator lamp CYT12V
13 P20 1 K5
11. Fan connectors +
C2

C1
P71
R2
12. CYT12 indicator lamp SYSTEM PWR
J82 25 Q2 Q1
3 4 PWR MOD CONT SIG INPUT
13. CYT12 connector U1 R7
14. COMPRESSOR ON indicator lamp 9 R5
VR1

CR12
X2

R9

1 2
15. WASTE VENT quick-connect (off-white) U3 Q3
CR11

J74 1
16. VACUUM quick-connect (yellow) C4
R6
17. WASTE quick-connect (orange)
8 R8
18. PRESSURE quick-connect (blue) WASTE LEVEL
R11
X3

19. Fan duct R10

20. LASER POWER connector

PWB 179493D

J77 7
C3

4 25 P70 14
Q4
21. SYSTEM POWER connector
22. MCL/MPL connector
13 1
23. LOGIC connector LASER P\S REMOTE INPUT COMPRESSOR

24. ANALOG connector

7318266B

PN 4237029G A.7-19
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.7-6 Components on the Rear Panel of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-6)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-6, 1 ON/OFF key Key for the Argon laser power supply must be rotated
clockwise to the I (ON) position for proper operation. Even
though the key is in the “on” position, the power supply
activates only when ac is applied.
A.7-6, 2 ac power cable or connector Provides ac voltage via the ARGON LASER connector on
the Power Control 3 card to the Argon laser power supply.
A.7-6, 3 Argon laser power supply Provides control and ac voltages to the Argon laser head.
A.7-6, 4 Laser logic cable or connector Provides path for supplying power output requirements
and interlock information from the system to the Argon
laser power supply. The Argon laser power supply, in turn,
provides current output power information. The laser logic
cable works in conjunction with the power module control
cable as an interface between the Argon laser head in the
Cytometer and the Argon laser power supply inside the
Power Supply module. Cable may also be referred to as the
laser supply control cable.
A.7-6, 5 Power Control 3 card Circuit card that:
r Provides ac voltage to the Breaker card.
r Interfaces Cytometer to the Universal Power Supply.
r Provides a relay for supplying ac to the Argon laser
power supply.
A.7-6, 6 POWER MODULE CONTROL Provides an external connection from the Universal Power
cable or connector Supply to the Cytometer. At the Power Supply module, the
cable attached to this connector provides an in-line
connection with the POWER MODULE CONTROL
connector on the rear of the Cytometer and the Argon laser
power supply. This cable interface provides the following
signals:
r INTERLOCK-1
r LASER DISCHARGE
r INTERLOCK-2
r IDLE ON/OFF
r LIGHT/CURRENT
r LASER CURRENT OUT
r LASER POWER OUT
r LASER POWER IN
r LASER CURRENT IN
r USER REMOTE
A.7-6, 7 PNEUMATICS CONTROL cable Cable attached to this connector provides ac voltage from
or connector the Power Control 3 card to the compressor relay that
energizes the dual-head compressor.

A.7-20 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS A
Table A.7-6 Components on the Rear Panel of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-6)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-6, 8 WASTE LEVEL connector Monitors level of system waste inside the external waste
container.
A.7-6, 9 AUX LASER connector Not used with an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer.
A.7-6, 10 AUX POWER indicator lamp Indicates ac power to system.
A.7-6, 11 Fans Provide air flow for cooling the inner compartments of the
Power Supply module.
A.7-6, 12 CYT12 indicator lamp Indicates CYT12 is connected and active.
A.7-6, 13 CYT12 connector Fiber optics cable that provides the external CYT12
interface between the computer system and the Power
Supply module. When powering up the Cytometer, a signal
is sent to the computer and to the Power Supply module
enabling them to power up.
A.7-6, 14 COMP ON indicator lamp Indicates signal was sent to start the compressor.
(COMPRESSOR ON)
A.7-6, 15 WASTE VENT quick-connect Provides back pressure vent to the external waste QD 22 on
(off-white) container. PN 6323706
A.7-6, 16 VACUUM quick-connect Provides vacuum to the Cytometer. QD 21 on
(yellow) PN 6323706
A.7-6, 17 WASTE quick-connect Provides a pathway to the waste container for emptying QD 20 on
(orange) waste that accumulates in the air/water separator (located PN 6323706
on the front of the Power Supply module).
A.7-6, 18 PRESSURE quick-connect Provides 30 psi to the Cytometer. QD 19 on
(blue) PN 6323706
A.7-6, 19 Fan duct Housing that surrounds the two exhaust fans. As the warm
exhaust exits the internal compartments of the Power
Supply module the fan duct directs it to the floor to
minimize recirculation.
A.7-6, 20 LASER POWER cables Provides ac input to the Argon laser power supply.
A.7-6, 21 SYSTEM POWER cables Provides ac input to the Universal Power Supply.
A.7-6, 22 MCL/MPL connector ATTENTION: MPL connector only if the MPL option is
installed. The MPL is an option for the FC 500, not the XL
and XL-MCL flow cytometers.
Provides the external interface from the Power Supply
module to the MCL assembly. The cable attached to this
connector passes +5 Vdc, ±15 Vdc, +24 Vdc, and ±12 Vdc.
The CYT12 signal, which is also looped in this connector,
enables a relay that provides power to the Cytometer.

PN 4237029G A.7-21
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY COMPONENT LOCATIONS AND FUNCTIONS

Table A.7-6 Components on the Rear Panel of the Universal Power Supply (See Figure A.7-6)

Figure Reference
Reference Component Function Designator
A.7-6, 23 LOGIC connector Provides the external connection from the Power Supply
module to the Cytometer. The cable attached to this
connector provides the +5 Vdc digital voltage and ground,
as well as the connection for the Power Supply module
cover interlock.
A.7-6, 24 ANALOG connector Provides the external connection from the Power Supply
module to the Cytometer. The cable attached to this
connector provides the analog system power, ±15 Vdc,
+24 Vdc, ground, and the power supply sense lines.

A.7-22 PN 4237029G
 QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
HOT KEYS AVAILABLE WITH SYSTEM II™ SOFTWARE A
A.8 HOT KEYS AVAILABLE WITH SYSTEM II™ SOFTWARE
ATTENTION: Hot Keys are not functional when the Acquisition screen is accessed using
EXPO32™ software.

Acquisition Screen
The following Hot Keys are available when the Acquisition screen is displayed using
SYSTEM II software.

Table A.8-1 Hot Keys Available When the Acquisition Screen is Displayed

Hot Keys Access

ÞC Cytosettings
ÞG Run regions
ÞN Panel
ÞP Protocol
ÞR Archive Status pop-up box
ÞT Protocol
ÞU Run
ÞV Displays the current version of SYSTEM II software, the operating system, and Cytometer
code for the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer
ÞW Worklist
ÞZ Displays system error messages

Listmode Screen
The following Hot Keys are available when the Listmode screen is displayed using SYSTEM II
software.

Table A.8-2 Hot Keys Available When the Listmode Screen is Displayed

Hot Keys Access

ÞG Analysis regions
ÞH Analysis
ÞI File information
ÞN Panel
ÞP Protocol
ÞR Archive Status pop-up box
ÞT Protocol
ÞU Analysis
ÞV Displays the current version of SYSTEM II software, the operating system, and Cytometer
code for the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer

PN 4237029G A.8-1
QUICK REFERENCE INFORMATION
HOT KEYS AVAILABLE WITH SYSTEM II™ SOFTWARE

A.8-2 PN 4237029G
 BHARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS B
B.1 FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION
The FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation is a dual-boot system that features both
Windows 98 and MS-DOS 6.22. The XL SYSTEM II software is loaded in MS-DOS 6.22 only
and is not supported in the Windows 98 operating system.

The FlowCentre II computer chassis is now in a tower, not a desktop case. The computer
consists of the following hardware as standard:

r AMI Megarum II Dual Pentium motherboard, utilizing the 440GX chipset, installed with
one Pentium® III, 550 or 600 MHz processor (processor contains 512K of internal
Cache)
r 100 MHz front side Bus
r 128 MB of PC100 System RAM, ECC correctable, registered
r 400 Watt power supply
r Two on–board IDE channels, supporting up to four hard drives
r Seven total expansion slots: one ISA slot, three PCI 32 bit slots, one PCI 64 bit slot, and
one shared PCI 64 bit slot / PCI 32 bit slot

Installed Peripherals
r On-board SCSI channel, providing up to 80 MB per second transfer and supporting up to
seven SCSI Devices (two SCSI Channels, only one will be utilized)
r 32 MB dual head display AGP video display adapter, providing support for up to two
monitors
r Network Interface card, providing either 10 or 100 MB per second connectivity
r PCI Sound card

Installed Drives
r 13 GB Ultra ATA hard drive (installed as Ultra DMA Mode 2, 33 MB per second data
transfer) minimum
r 1.44 MB 3.5-inch floppy drive
r 40x IDE CD-ROM drive minimum

Preloaded Software
r Windows 98 Operating System and MS-DOS 6.22 Operating System, with dual-boot
menu
r XL SYSTEM II version 3.0

BIOS SETUP Defaults

The BIOS setup default is preset at the factory for optimal operation. If the BIOS setup
information has been changed and is suspected of causing a problem, it can be restored to
original factory default by selecting the option AUTO CONFIGURATION WITH OPTIMAL SETTINGS in
the Main Menu of the system BIOS. To access the system BIOS, press á during boot up.

PN 4237029G B.1-1
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

DEFAULT Settings for the System BIOS

Standard CMOS Setup

Floppy Drive A: 1.44 MB 3½

Floppy Drive B: Not Installed
Pri Master (Primary Master Disk): Auto
Pri Slave (Primary Slave Disk): Not Installed
Sec Master (Secondary Master Disk): Auto
Sec Slave (Secondary Slave Disk): Not Installed
Boot Sector Virus Protection: Disabled

Advanced CMOS Setup

Primary Display: VGA / EGA

PS/2 Mouse Support: Enabled
Display BIOS P. O. S. T. Messages: Yes
Pause-On Configuration Screen: 2 sec
BootUp Num-Lock: On
Password Check: Setup
Boot to OS/2: No
S.M.A.R.T. for Hard Disks: Enabled
Quick Boot: Enabled
1st Boot Device: Floppy
2nd Boot Device: ATAPI CDROM
3rd Boot Device: 1st IDE-HDD
4th Boot Device: Disabled
Try other Boot Devices: Yes
C000, 16K Shadow: Cached
C400, 16K Shadow: Cached
C800, 16K Shadow: Cached
CC00, 16K Shadow: Disabled
D000, 16K Shadow: Cached
D400, 16K Shadow: Cached
D800, 16K Shadow: Cached
DC00, 16K Shadow: Cached

B.1-2 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
Advanced Chipset Setup

USB Function: Enabled

Onboard SCSI-1: Enabled
Onboard SCSI-2: Disabled
BX Master Latency Timer (Clks): 64
Multi-Trans Timer (Clks): 32
Graphics Aperture Size: 64MB
AGP Mlti-Trans Timer (AGP Clks): 32
AGP Low-Priority Timer (AGP Clks): 16

Power Management Setup

ACPI Aware O/S: No

Power Management / APM: Disabled
Power Button Function: On/Off
Green PC Monitor Power State: Off
Video Power Down Mode: Disabled
Hard Drive Power Down Mode: Disabled
Hard Drive Time Out (Minute): Disabled
Power Saving Type: POS
Standby/Suspend Timer Unit: 4 min
Standby Time Out: Disabled
Suspend Time Out: Disabled
Slow Clock Ratio: 50% - 62.5%
Display Activity: Ignore
Device 6 (Serial port 1): Ignore
Device 7 (Serial port 2): Ignore
Device 8 (Parallel port): Ignore
Device 5 (Floppy disk): Ignore
Device 0 (Primary master IDE): Ignore
Device 1 (Primary slave IDE): Ignore
Device 2 (Secondary master IDE): Ignore
Device 3 (Secondary slave IDE): Ignore

PN 4237029G B.1-3
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

PCI / Plug and Play Setup

AMI RAID Express Installed: No

Plug and Play Aware O/S: Yes
PCI VGA Palette Snoop: Disabled
Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA: No
Primary Bus Options
USB Device Latency: 64
PCI Slot-1 Latency: 64
PCI Slot-2 Latency: N/A
PCI Slot-3 Latency: N/A
PCI Slot-4 Latency Timer: 64
AGP Slot IRQ Priority: Auto
USB Device IRQ Priority: Auto
PCI Slot-1 IRQ Priority: Auto
PCI Slot-2 IRQ Priority: N/A
PCI Slot-3 IRQ Priority: N/A
PCI Slot-4 IRQ Priority: Auto
Secondary Bus Options
PCI SCSI-1 Latency: 64
PCI SCSI-2 Latency: N/A
PCI Slot-5 Latency: N/A
PCI Slot-6 Latency: N/A
PCI SCSI-1 IRQ Priority: IRQ 10
PCI SCSI-2 IRQ Priority: N/A
PCI Slot-5 IRQ Priority: N/A
PCI Slot-6 IRQ Priority: N/A
Bus IRQ Resource Owner
IRQ3: PnP
IRQ4: PnP
IRQ5: ISA
IRQ7: ISA
IRQ9: Primary PCI
IRQ10: Secondary PCI (greyed out)
IRQ11: ISA
IRQ12: PnP

B.1-4 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
IRQ14: PCI
IRQ15: PCI
DMA Resource Owner
DMA Channel 0: PnP
DMA Channel 1: PnP
DMA Channel 3: PnP
DMA Channel 5: PnP
DMA Channel 6: PnP
DMA Channel 7: PnP
ISA Memory Resource
Reserved ISA Card Memory Size: 16K
Reserved ISA Card Memory Address: CC000

Peripheral Setup

OnBoard Floppy Controller: Enabled

OnBoard Primary/Secondary IDE: Both
IDE Bus Mastering: Enabled
Primary Prefetch: Disabled
Secondary Prefetch: Disabled
OffBoard PCI/ISA IDE Card: N/A
Primary/Secondary: N/A
PCI IDE Card Primary IRQ: N/A
PCI IDE Card Secondary IRQ: N/A
OnBoard Serial Port1 IRQ: IRQ 4
Serial Port1 Address: 3F8h
Serial Port1 FIFO: Disabled
OnBoard Serial Port2 IRQ: IRQ 3
Serial Port2 Address: 2F8h
Serial Port2 FIFO: Enabled
Serial Port2 Mode: Normal
IR Duplex Mode N/A
IrDA Protocol: N/A

PN 4237029G B.1-5
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

OnBoard Parallel Port IRQ: Disabled

Parallel Port Address: N/A
Parallel Port Mode: N/A
Parallel Port DMA Channel: N/A
EPP Version: N/A

WINDOWS 98 Configuration from Device Manager

Note: To access, select the Windows Start button tt Settings tt Control Panel tt System tt Device
Manager.

Control Panel Setup, Device Manager, Computer

IRQ 00: System Timer

IRQ 01: Std 101/102 Key Keyboard
IRQ 02: Programmable Interrupt Controller
IRQ 03: Comm Port 2
IRQ 04: Comm Port 1
IRQ 05: Printer Port (LPT1)
IRQ 06: Std Floppy Disk Controller
IRQ 07: System Reserved
IRQ 08: System CMOS / RTC
IRQ 09: PCI Sound card
IRQ 09: PCI Network Interface card
IRQ 09: AGP Display Adapter
IRQ 10: On Board SYMBIOS SCSI 1 Channel
IRQ 11: System Reserved
IRQ 12: PS/2 Mouse
IRQ 13: Numeric Data Processor
IRQ 14: Dual PCI-IDE Controller
IRQ 14: Primary IDE Controller (DUAL FIFO)
IRQ 15: Dual PCI-IDE Controller
IRQ 15: Secondary IDE Controller (DUAL FIFO)

B.1-6 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
CONFIG.SYS Configuration
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS X=D100-DCFF
BUFFERS=63,0
FILES=60
DOS=UMB

FCBS=4,0
REM DEVICE=C:\OAKCDROM.SYS /D:MSCD000
DOS=HIGH

REM THE NEXT 2 LINES ARE FOR LANTASTIC NETWORKING

REM DEVICEHIGH=C:\LANTASTI\PROTMAN.DOS /I:C:LANTASTI
REM DEVICEHIGH=C:\LANTASTI\EL90X.DOS
REM DEVICEHIGH /L:2,12048 =C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
SHELL=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM /P /E:1024
REM DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\PROTMAN.DOS /I:C:\LANTASTI
REM DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\EL90X.DOS

LASTDRIVE=Z

PN 4237029G B.1-7
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ II MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

AUTOEXEC.BAT Configuration
@echo off
REM VERIFY ON
LH C:\APPS\MOUSE\MOUSE
REM THE NEXT LINE IS THE CD-ROM DRIVER
REM C:\DOS\MSCDEX.EXE /D:MSCD000
REM THE NEXT LINE ENABLES THE FONT FOR THE ELITE/ALTRA SOFTWARE
C:\MATROX\UTIL\VBEXT.EXE
PATH=C:\;C:\DOS;C:\XL;C:\APPS\MOUSE;C:\RTSQL
REM THE NEXT LINE IS FOR THE LANTASTIC NETWORK OPTION
REM call C:\LANTASTI\STARTNET.BAT

REM *** DATABASE ENVIRONMENT ***

SET SQLCONNECT=DBA,SQL,,
SET SQLPATH=C:\RTSQL
SET SQLSTART=C:\RTSQL\rtstart /q C:\XL\DBF\xl2.db
SET WSQL=C:\RTSQL
SET DOS16M=:3M

CD \XL
XL2

B.1-8 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
B.2 FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION
The FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation is a dual-boot system that features both
Windows 95 and MS-DOS 6.22. XL SYSTEM II software is loaded in MS-DOS 6.22 only and is
not supported in the Windows 95 operating system.

In the FlowCentre computer, an Ultra ATA controller replaces the Caching controller used in
the INTEL® Pentium® 166 processor. The Ultra ATA Controller features a 33 MB per second
data transfer rate, to and from the PCI Bus to the Hard Drive.

The FlowCentre computer chassis is in a desktop case that contains an AMI ATLAS PCI III
Motherboard with:

r 200 MHz INTEL Pentium processor

r 512 K pipeline burst cache
r 32 MB System Parity RAM (2 to 16 MB SIMMS@ 70 nS RAS), expandable up to 256 MB
memory
r Three PCI, three ISA slots and one shared PCI/ISA slot (PCI bus conforms to the PCI 2.1
Specification)
r Four 72-pin memory SIMM sockets supporting up to 256 MB of Fast Page, ECC or EDO
Ram
r Two on-board PCI-IDE connectors, supporting up to four large hard drives
r Two serial ports
r One bi-directional parallel port
r Two 4-pin connectors for a Universal Serial Bus
r PS/2 Mouse Support option
r One Keyboard Port
r AMI Plug and Play BIOS

Installed Peripherals
r PCI Ultra ATA Controller with 33 MB per second transfer rate
r PCI Video Display Adapter with 4 MB W-RAM
r PCI SCSI Host Adapter with support for optional Maxoptix Tahiti Optical Drives,
90/150 MB Bernoulli Drives or an optional Sony Spressa External Recordable CD-ROM
Drive
r PCI Network Interface card (combo card) providing a maximum transfer rate of 10 MB
per second
r Soundblaster Compatible Sound card with Wavetable Synthesis
r 33,600 BAUD FAX/Modem (requires an analog line at the Customer’s Account)
r Black Windows 95 full-size keyboard
r PS/2 mouse

PN 4237029G B.2-1
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

Installed Drives
r 32X Internal IDE CD-ROM drive
r 3.2 Gigabyte IDE hard drive, (mode 4)
r 1.44 MB floppy drive, 3.5-inch

Preloaded Software
r Windows 95 Operating System and MS-DOS 6.22 Operating System, with dual-boot
menu
r XL SYSTEM II version 3.0
r Adaptec EZ-SCSI version 4.x (SCSI Host Adapter software are loaded in C:\SCSI.)
r Matrox Millenium PowerDesk (Software for Video Display Adapter.)
r 16 Bit Sound card software (Files for sound card are loaded in C:\PROGRAM FILES.)
r CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files (Backup CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT
files for XL are loaded in C:\XLCONFIG directory.)
r CONFIG.DOS and AUTOEXEC.DOS files (MS-DOS configuration files used when
booting into MS-DOS 6.22.)
r FNT8X14 (Loads the 8X14 font for Video card.)
r MOUSE.SYS (Mouse driver for MS-DOS is loaded in C:\APPS\MOUSE.)
r ALTRA version 1.0

Circuit Card Locations

Slot Circuit Card

PCI Slot 1 PCI Video Display Adapter
(slot closest to the Power Supply)
PCI Slot 2 PCI Ultra ATA Controller
PCI Slot 3 PCI SCSI Host Adapter
PCI Slot 4 PCI Network Interface
ISA Slot 1 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or
(slot closest to the edge of the Motherboard) Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II
(slot is free in the stand-alone Workstation)
ISA Slot 2 16 Bit Sound
ISA Slot 3 Modem
ISA Slot 4 (shared slot with PCI Slot) Empty

BIOS Password
The BIOS is password protected. The password is AUER.

B.2-2 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
AMI WIN BIOS Configuration

Standard Setup

Pri Master (Primary Master Disk): Auto

Pri Slave (Primary Slave Disk): Not Installed
Sec Master (Secondary Master Disk): Not Installed
Sec Slave (Secondary Slave Disk): Not Installed
Floppy A: Drive: 1.44 MB 3½
Floppy B: Drive: Not Installed

Advanced Setup

System Keyboard: Present

Primary Display: VGA / EGA
PS/2 Mouse Support: Enabled
Setup Color Scheme: LCD
Display BIOS P. O. S. T. Messages: Yes
Display Add-On ROM Messages: Yes
Pause-On Configuration Screen: 2 sec
BootUp Num-Lock: On
Password Check: Setup
Boot to OS/2: No
Floppy Drive Seek: Enabled
Floppy Drive Swap Disabled
Floppy Access Control: Read-Write
Hard drive Access Control: Read-Write
S.M.A.R.T. for Hard Disks: Enabled
1st Boot Device: Floppy
2nd Boot Device: CDROM
3rd Boot Device: IDE-0
4th Boot Device: Disabled
Try Other Boot Devices: Yes
External Cache: WriteBack
System BIOS Cacheable: Enabled
Caching Controller: Absent
Video Shadow C000, 32K: Cached
Shadow C800, 16K: Disabled

PN 4237029G B.2-3
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

Shadow CC00, 16K: Disabled

Shadow D000, 16K: Disabled
Shadow D400, 16K: Disabled
Shadow D800, 16K: Disabled
Shadow DC00, 16K: Disabled

Chipset Setup

Memory Hole: Disabled

DRAM ECC Mode: Enabled
USB Function: Disabled
USB Keyboard / Mouse Legacy Support: Disabled

Power Mgmt (Power Management) Setup

Power Management / APM: Enabled

(by default from DRAM ECC mode)
Instant-On Timeout (Minute): N/A
Green PC Monitor Power State: Standby
Video Power Down Mode: Disabled
Hard Drive Power Down Mode: Disabled
Hard Drive Time Out (Minute): Disabled
Suspend Time Out: Disabled
Slow Clock Ratio: 1:8
IRQ3: Monitor
IRQ4: Monitor
IRQ5: Ignore
IRQ7: Ignore
IRQ9: Ignore
IRQ10: Ignore
IRQ11: Ignore
IRQ12: Monitor
IRQ13: Ignore
IRQ14: Monitor
IRQ15: Monitor

B.2-4 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
PCI / PnP Setup

PCI VGA Palette Snoop: Disabled

PCI Slot-1 Latency Timer: 64
PCI Slot-2 Latency Timer: 64
PCI Slot-3 Latency Timer: Empty Slot
PCI Slot-4 Latency Timer: 64
USB Device Latency Timer: Disabled
USB Device IRQ Preference: Disabled
PCI Slot-1 IRQ Preference: Auto
PCI Slot-2 IRQ Preference: Auto
PCI Slot-3 IRQ Preference: Empty Slot
PCI Slot-4 IRQ Preference: Auto
IRQ3: PnP
IRQ4: ISA
IRQ5: PnP
IRQ7: ISA
IRQ9: PCI / PnP
IRQ10: ISA
IRQ11: ISA
IRQ12: PnP
IRQ14: PCI
IRQ15: PCI / PnP
DMA CHANNEL 0: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 1: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 3: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 5: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 6: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 7: PnP
Reserved ISA Card Memory Size: 16K
Reserved ISA Card Memory Address: CC000

PN 4237029G B.2-5
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

Peripheral Setup

OnBoard Floppy Controller: Enabled

OnBoard Primary/Secondary IDE: Primary
OnBoard IDE BusMaster: Enabled
IDE Bus Mastering: Enabled
OnBoard Primary Prefetch: Disabled
OnBoard Secondary Prefetch: N/A
OffBoard PCI/ISA IDE Card: N/A
OffBoard Primary/Secondary: N/A
OffBoard PCI IDE Primary IRQ: N/A
OffBoard PCI IDE Secondary IRQ: N/A
Serial Port1 IRQ: Disabled
Serial Port1 Address: N/A
Serial Port1 FIFO: N/A
Serial Port2 IRQ: IRQ 3
Serial Port2 Address: 2F8h
Serial Port2 FIFO: Enabled
Parallel Port IRQ: IRQ 5
Parallel Port Address: 378h
Parallel Port Mode: EPP
Parallel Port DMA Channel: N/A
EPP Version: 1.7

Supervisor

Supervisor Password: AUER

B.2-6 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
WINDOWS 95 Configuration from Device Manager
Note: To access, select the Windows Start button tt Settings tt Control Panel tt System tt Device
Manager.

Control Panel Setup, Device Manager, Computer

IRQ 00: System Timer

IRQ 01: Std 101/102 Key Keyboard
IRQ 02: Programmable Interrupt Controller
IRQ 03: Comm Port 2
IRQ 04: Comm Port 1
IRQ 05: Printer Port (LPT1)
IRQ 06: Std Floppy Disk Controller
IRQ 07: Not to be allocated by Windows 95,
must remain available
IRQ 08: System CMOS / RTC
IRQ 09: PCI ULTRA ATA Controller
IRQ 09: PCI Network Interface card
IRQ 09: PCI VGA Display Adapter
IRQ 10: 16 Bit Sound card
IRQ 11: Not to be allocated by Windows 95,
must remain available
IRQ 12: PS/2 Mouse
IRQ 13: Numeric Data Processor
IRQ 14: Dual PCI-IDE Controller
IRQ 14: Primary IDE Controller (Single FIFO)
IRQ 15: PCI SCSI Host Adapter

PN 4237029G B.2-7
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

CONFIG.SYS Configuration
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS X=CA00-CAFF
BUFFERS=63,0
FILES=60
DOS=UMB
LASTDRIVE=Z
FCBS=4,0
REM DEVICE=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
DOS=HIGH
SHELL=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM /P /E:1024

REM THE NEXT LINE ACTIVATES THE INTERNAL CD-ROM DRIVE

REM DEVICE=C:\SONY_CD\ATAPI_CD.SYS /D:MSCD000 /Q /I:0
REM DEVICEHIGH /L:1,40800 =C:\OAKCDROM.SYS /D:MSCD000

REM THE NEXT 2 LINES ARE FOR THE LANTASTIC NETWORK

REM DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\PROTMAN.DOS /I:C\LANTASTI
REM DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\EL90X.DOS

DEVICEHIGH /L:1,12048 =C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE

REM DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\PROTMAN.DOS /I:C:\LANTASTI
REM DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\EL90X.DOS

B.2-8 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION B
AUTOEXEC.BAT Configuration
@ECHO OFF
REM C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X
PROMPT $P$G
SET TEMP=C:\DOS
PATH=C:\;C:\XL;C:\DOS;C:\RTSQL

REM THE NEXT LINE INSTALLS THE MOUSE DRIVER, V11.00

LH /L:0 C:\APPS\MOUSE\MOUSE
REM LH /L:1,27952 C:\DOS\MSCDEX.EXE /D:MSCD000
REM THE NEXT LINE IS FOR THE LANTASTIC NETWORK OPTION
REM call C:\LANTASTI\STARTNET.BAT
REM THE STARTNET.BAT FILE

REM C:\DOS\MSCDEX.EXE /D:MSCD000 /M:12 /V

REM *** DATABASE ENVIRONMENT ***

SET SQLCONNECT=DBA,SQL,,
SET SQLPATH=C:\RTSQL
SET SQLSTART=C:\RTSQL\rtstart /q C:\XL\DBF\xl2.db
SET WSQL=C:\RTSQL
SET DOS16M=:3M

CD \XL
XL2

PN 4237029G B.2-9
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
FlowCentre™ MULTIMEDIA WORKSTATION COMPUTER CONFIGURATION

B.2-10 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION B
B.3 INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION
The INTEL Pentium 166 processor contains an AMI ATLAS PCI III Motherboard with:

r 166 MHz INTEL Pentium processor

r 512 K pipeline burst cache
r 16 MB system parity RAM (2 to 8 MB SIMMS at 70 ns RAS), expandable to 256 MB
memory
r 3 PCI, 3 ISA slots and 1 shared PCI/ISA slot (PCI bus conforms to the PCI 2.1
Specification)
r 4, 72-pin memory SIMM sockets
r 2 on-board PCI-IDE controllers
r 2 serial ports
r 1 bi-directional parallel port
r Support for a Universal Serial Bus
r PS-2 Mouse Support Option (used only on the FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation)
r 1 keyboard port
r AMI Plug and Play BIOS.

Installed Peripherals
r PCI caching controller with 4 MB cache provides a sustained data transfer rate of
12 MB/sec
r PCI video display adapter with 2 MB W-RAM

Installed Drives
r 1.2 GB IDE hard drive (mode 4)
r 3.5 in. 1.44 MB floppy diskette drive card location.

Preloaded Software
r MS-DOS 6.22 Operating System
r MOUSE.SYS mouse driver

BIOS Password
The BIOS is password protected. The password is AUER.

PN 4237029G B.3-1
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION

AMI WIN BIOS Configuration

Standard Setup

Floppy A: Drive: 1.44 MB 3½

Floppy B: Drive: Not Installed
Pri Master (Primary Master Disk): Auto
LBA/LARGE Mode: On
Block Mode: Off
32-Bit Mode Off
PIO Mode: Mode 4
Pri Slave (Primary Slave Disk): Not Installed
Sec Master (Secondary Master Disk): Not Installed
Sec Slave (Secondary Slave Disk): Not Installed

Advanced Setup

System Keyboard: Present

Primary Display: VGA / EGA
Setup Color Scheme: LCD
Pause-On Configuration Screen: 2 sec
PS/2 Mouse Support Disabled
BootUp Num-Lock: On
Display BIOS P. O. S. T. Messages: Yes
Password Check: Setup
Boot to OS/2: No
Floppy Drive Seek at Boot: Enabled
Floppy Drive Swap Disabled
Floppy Access Control: Read-Write
Hard drive Access Control: Read-Write
S.M.A.R.T. for Hard Disks: Disabled
1st Boot Device: IDE-0
2nd Boot Device: Floppy
3rd Boot Device: Disabled
4th Boot Device: Disabled
Try Other Boot Devices: No
External Cache: WriteBack
System BIOS Cacheable: Enabled

B.3-2 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION B
Caching Controller: Present
Video Shadow C000, 32K: Cached
Shadow C800, 16K: Disabled
Shadow CC00, 16K: Disabled
Shadow D000, 16K: Disabled
Shadow D400, 16K: Disabled
Shadow D800, 16K: Disabled
Shadow DC00, 16K: Disabled

Chipset Setup

Memory Hole: Disabled

DRAM ECC Mode: Enabled
USB Function: Disabled
USB Keyboard / Mouse Legacy Support: No Selection

Power Mgmt (Power Management) Setup

Power Management / APM: Enabled

(by default from DRAM ECC mode)
Video Power Down Mode: Disabled
Hard Drive Power Down Mode: Disabled
Hard Drive Time Out (Minute): Disabled
Standby Time Out (Minute): Disabled
Suspend Time Out: Disabled

PN 4237029G B.3-3
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION

PCI / PnP Setup

PCI VGA Palette Snoop: Disabled

PCI Slot-1 Latency Timer: 64
PCI Slot-2 Latency Timer: 64
PCI Slot-3 Latency Timer: Empty Slot
PCI Slot-4 Latency Timer: Empty Slot
USB Device Latency Timer: No Selection
USB Device IRQ Preference: No Selection
PCI Slot-1 IRQ Preference: Auto
PCI Slot-2 IRQ Preference: Auto
PCI Slot-3 IRQ Preference: Empty Slot
PCI Slot-4 IRQ Preference: Empty Slot
IRQ3: No Selection
IRQ4: No Selection
IRQ5: No Selection
IRQ7: ISA
IRQ9: ISA
IRQ10: PCI / PnP
IRQ11: ISA
IRQ12: PCI / PnP
IRQ14: No Selection
IRQ15: No Selection
DMA CHANNEL 0: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 1: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 3: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 5: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 6: PnP
DMA CHANNEL 7: PnP
Reserved ISA Card Memory Size: 16K
Reserved ISA Card Memory Address: CC000

B.3-4 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION B
Peripheral Setup

OnBoard Floppy Controller: Enabled

OnBoard Primary/Secondary IDE: No Selection
OnBoard IDE BusMaster: No Selection
OffBoard PCI/ISA IDE Card: PCI Slot 1
OffBoard Primary/Secondary: Both
OffBoard PCI IDE Primary IRQ: Disabled
OffBoard PCI IDE Secondary IRQ: Hardwired
Serial Port1 IRQ: IRQ 4
Serial Port1 Address: 3F8h
Serial Port1 FIFO: Disabled
Serial Port2 IRQ: IRQ 3
Serial Port2 Address: 2F8h
Serial Port2 FIFO: Enabled
Parallel Port IRQ: IRQ 5
Parallel Port Address: 378h
Parallel Port Mode: Normal
Parallel Port DMA Channel: No Selection

Supervisor

Supervisor Password: AUER

PN 4237029G B.3-5
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
INTEL® PENTIUM® 166 PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION

B.3-6 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
LANtastic® NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS B
B.4 LANtastic® NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
The following are the minimum requirements for the LANtastic network operating system
(NOS) as provided by Artisoft, Inc. These are for a dedicated network server and do not
include support for SYSTEM II software installed on the server.

DOS Requirements
r IBM® PC or compatible - 8086 or higher
r 640K available RAM (DOS)
r MS-DOS - 5.0 and higher
r Artisoft LANtastic NOS - 8.0
r 9.5 MB free hard disk space.

Windows Requirements
r IBM PC or compatible - 486/66 processor or higher
r 8 MB available RAM - minimum (16 MB recommended)
r Windows 95 or 98
r Artisoft LANtastic NOS - 8.0
r 12.5 MB free hard disk space.

PN 4237029G B.4-1
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
LANtastic® NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

B.4-2 PN 4237029G
 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
Sybase® SQL ANYWHERE™ MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS B
B.5 Sybase® SQL ANYWHERE™ MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
The following are the minimum requirements for the Sybase SQL Anywhere PC database
server software as provided by Sybase, Inc. These are for a dedicated network server and do
not include support for SYSTEM II software installed on the server.

Client Requirements
r IBM® PC or compatible
r MS-DOS - 3.3 and higher
r Windows 95 or higher (Windows 3.x, Windows NT 3.x, or OS/2 version 2.x or higher
are also acceptable)
r 12 MB free hard disk space for DOS operating system
r 9 MB free hard disk space for Windows 95 or higher operating system.

Database Server Requirements

r IBM PC or compatible
r Intel 80386 or higher processor
r 8 MB available RAM
r MS-DOS - 3.3 and higher
r Windows 95 or higher (Windows 3.x, Windows NT 3.x, Novell NetWare version 3.11 or
higher, DOS version 3.3 or higher, or OS/2 version 2.x or higher are also acceptable)
r 14 MB free hard disk space.

Network Requirements
r NetBIOS, TCP/IP, or Novell NetWare IPX (DOS clients support NetBIOS and IPX only).

PN 4237029G B.5-1
HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
Sybase® SQL ANYWHERE™ MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

B.5-2 PN 4237029G
 CFIELD WORKSHEETS C
C.1 WORKSHEETS
Field Engineer Worksheet

FS FL1 FL2 FL3 FL4

Mean Mean Mean Mean Mean

Run # HP CV Channel HP CV Channel HP CV Channel HP CV Channel HP CV Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Add lines 0 through 9 to get TOTALS

Totals

PN 4237029G C.1-1
FIELD WORKSHEETS
WORKSHEETS

Network Configuration Worksheet

Serial Number _______________________________________________________________

Network Node Name _________________________________________________________

Server Attached To ___________________________________________________________

CPU Type _____________________________ RAM Size ____________________________

PRINTER TYPE _____________________________________________________________

LPT1 ___________________________________________________________________
LPT2 ___________________________________________________________________

DISK DRIVES

A: ____________________________
B: ____________________________
C: ____________________________
D: ____________________________
E: ____________________________

MS DOS Version _________________________________

Cytometer Software Version ________________________

Network Node ID ________________________________

NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

Manufacturer _____________________________________________________________
Address __________________________________________________________________
IRQ _____________________________________________________________________

I/O DEVICES
:

Device Name Base I/O IRQ

C.1-2 PN 4237029G
 DEXAMPLES OF SETUP FILES D
D.1 CLIENT FLOW CYTOMETER
Config.sys
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DOS=HIGH
DEVICE=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
FILES=60
BUFFERS=30
LASTDRIVE=Z
DEVICE=C:\APPS\MOUSE\MOUSE.SYS
DEVICE=C:\LAN\PROTMAN.DOS /I:C:\LAN
DEVICE=C:\LAN\ELNK3.DOS

Autoexec.bat
SET CGIPATH=C:\XL\GSS
@ECHO OFF
PROMPT $p$g
PATH C:\DOS
SET TEMP=C:\DOS
call C:\LAN\STARTNET.BAT
C:
kwcaf 500,100
cd \XL
XL2

Startnet.bat
@echo off
C:
cd C:\LAN

SET LAN_CFG=C:\LAN

rem If LANtastic is disabled, skip everything.

IF EXIST DISABLED GOTO :STARTNET_DONE

@echo ===== Begin LANtastic configuration =====

PATH C:\LAN;%PATH%

LOADHIGH AI-NDIS BIND_TO=ELNK3_NIF

AILANBIO @STARTNET.CFG

REDIR MYRA @STARTNET.CFG

NET USE S: \\JEEVES\E-DRIVE

NET USE T: \\Research_Lab\D-DRIVE
NET USE LPT2: \\Research_Lab\@PRINTER

rem If CONNECT.BAT exists, run it to set up connections.

IF EXIST CONNECT.BAT GOTO :CONNECT

PN 4237029G D.1-1
EXAMPLES OF SETUP FILES
CLIENT FLOW CYTOMETER

rem Otherwise set up connections specified during install.

NET LPT TIMEOUT 10
GOTO :CONNECT_DONE

:CONNECT
@echo Setting up LANtastic connections from CONNECT.BAT
rem Build CONNECT.BAT like this: "NET SHOW/BATCH > C:\LAN\CONNECT.BAT"
rem (or run the batch file SETNET.BAT)
call CONNECT.BAT

:CONNECT_DONE
NET POSTBOX

@echo ===== End LANtastic configuration =====

:STARTNET_DONE
cd \

Xl_graph.cng
V=TS41024
S=SYS16.FNT
M=SYS24.FNT
L=P7x9.FNT
K=ROMANTRI.FNT
N=NET SHOW

D.1-2 PN 4237029G
 EXAMPLES OF SETUP FILES
FILE SERVER D
D.2 FILE SERVER
Config.sys
DEVICE=C:\CORELDRV\ASPIDRV.SYS

DEVICE=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DOS=HIGH
FILES=100
BUFFERS=30
STACKS=9,256
LASTDRIVE=Z

DEVICEHIGH=C:\CORELDRV\UNI_ASP.SYS

DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\PROTMAN.DOS /I:C:\LANTASTI
DEVICE=C:\LANTASTI\ELNK3.DOS

rem DEVICE=C:\CORELDRV\CUNI_ASP.SYS

Autoexec.bat
C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X
@ECHO OFF
PROMPT $p$g
PATH c:\wsql40\win;C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOS
SET MSINPUT=C:\MSINPUT
C:\MSINPUT\MOUSE\MOUSE.EXE /Q
SET TEMP=C:\DOS
call C:\LANTASTI\STARTNET.BAT
cd c:
SET PATH=%PATH%;C:\CORELDRV
REM C:\CORELDRV\CORELCDX
c:\dos\doskey
SET WSQL=c:\wsql40
win c:\wsql40\win\dbservew -x netbios -n XL20_DBASE c:\wsql40\xl2.db

Startnet.bat
@echo off
C:
cd C:\LANTASTI

SET LAN_CFG=C:\LANTASTI

rem If LANtastic is disabled, skip everything.

IF EXIST DISABLED GOTO :STARTNET_DONE

PN 4237029G D.2-1
EXAMPLES OF SETUP FILES
FILE SERVER

@echo ===== Begin LANtastic configuration =====

PATH C:\LANTASTI;C:\LANTASTI\NW;%PATH%
SET LAN_DIR=C:\LANTASTI.NET
SET NWDBPATH=C:\LANTASTI\NW

LOADHIGH AI-NDIS BIND_TO=ELNK3_NIF

AILANBIO @STARTNET.CFG

REDIR RESEARCH_LAB @STARTNET.CFG

net use S: \\jeeves\e-drive

IF EXIST NOSHARE GOTO :NOSHARE

SERVER C:\LANTASTI.NET @STARTNET.CFG
NET LOGIN \\RESEARCH_LAB
GOTO :CONTINUE

:NOSHARE
@echo LANtastic server was installed but turned off.

:CONTINUE

rem If CONNECT.BAT exists, run it to set up connections.

IF EXIST CONNECT.BAT GOTO :CONNECT

rem Otherwise set up connections specified during install.

NET USE LPT1: \\RESEARCH_LAB\@PRINTER
NET LPT TIMEOUT 10
GOTO :CONNECT_DONE

:CONNECT
@echo Setting up LANtastic connections from CONNECT.BAT
rem Build CONNECT.BAT like this: "NET SHOW/BATCH > C:\LANTASTI\CONNECT.BAT"
rem (or run the batch file SETNET.BAT)
call CONNECT.BAT

:CONNECT_DONE
NET POSTBOX

@echo ===== End LANtastic configuration =====

:STARTNET_DONE
cd \

D.2-2 PN 4237029G
 ENETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS E
E.1 NETWORKING
Purpose
This section provides a basic understanding of networks and specifically, Beckman Coulter’s
implementation of the instrument’s networking hardware and software components.

Introduction
A network is an electronically connected group of computers and peripheral devices. When
connected together they form a local area network (LAN). A LAN covers a limited
geographical area allowing users to share resources or devices that do not reside locally on the
user’s computer. Each computer connected is given a network name called the “node name.”
The connection is made through media (cables and wiring) carrying the signal from the
sending computer to the receiving computer. These signals can be either analog or digital.
The distance the connection spans is dependent on the media used. Once connected,
computer workstations connected to the file server have access to the file server’s hard drives
and printers and they appear to be local at their computer workstation.

If the signal used is baseband then the data is transmitted digitally. If it is broadband, then the
signal transmission is analog. Baseband is the most common signal used and is the least
expensive of the two but broadband signaling networks are not uncommon.The XL network
supports baseband.

Encoding techniques are employed so that the computer can interpret the signal. Signal
encoding is a set of rules for representing values for an input signal in another form. There are
many different signal encoding schemes, each providing their own set of rules. In the
transmission of digital signals over a network, binary values (0s and 1s) are used as a change
in voltage or current levels to represent data. The XL network uses the Ethernet Manchester
Encoding Scheme.

Media can be bounded or unbounded. Bounded media are cables or wires conducting
electricity or light. Examples of bounded media are twisted pair (T.P.), coaxial (thick or thin),
and fiber optic cables. Unbounded media transmits and receives electromagnetic signals
without an electrical or optical conductor. Examples of bounded media are: microwave,
infrared, and laser links. In order to connect the media, the Network Interface card (NIC) that
is chosen must support the medium type. The Beckman Coulter network supports T.P.,
coaxial (thin), and AUI (thick).

Cabling consists of various kinds and designations. Some types of cabling medium are
10BASE-T, 10BASE2, 10BASE5, and 10BROAD 36. The designations are IEEE’s (Institute for
Electric and Electrical Engineering) 802.3 specifications for megabits-per-second signaling
rate, the type of signaling technique, and the maximum cable-segment distance in meters in
multiples of 100. The cable media types all have unique characteristics for distance, EMI and
RF susceptibility. 10BASE-T and 10BASE2 are the most common forms of cable used today.

PN 4237029G E.1-1
NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONSINSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
NETWORKING

Topologies
To connect the media, a layout of the connections must be planned. The layout is referred to
as the physical network topology. There are four commonly used topologies:

r Mesh
r Star
r Linear Bus, and
r Ring.

Mesh
A mesh topology has point-to-point connections (Figure E.1-1). This means that every node
on the network must be physically connected together requiring an interface connection for
every other device. The major drawback is that the cabling scheme is jumbled and
troubleshooting can be time consuming.

Figure E.1-1 Mesh Topology

7029057D

Star
In a star topology, each device is connected point-to-point via a central point or hub
(Figure E.1-2). This topology is easy to troubleshoot because all transferring information
must go through a central point. The drawback to a star connection is the extra cost of the
hub device. This topology is supported by the XL network. The customer must provide the
hub device.

E.1-2 PN 4237029G
 NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONSINSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
NETWORKING E
Figure E.1-2 Star Topology

HUB
DEVICE

7029058D

Linear Bus
In a bus topology, or linear bus, all the nodes on a network attach directly and the bus
terminates at both ends (Figure E.1-3). Data flows in both directions from the sending
computer. This topology is supported by the XL network.

Figure E.1-3 Linear Bus Topology

7029059D

PN 4237029G E.1-3
NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONSINSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
NETWORKING

Ring
A ring topology is as the name implies, a closed loop, point-to-point connection
(Figure E.1-4). Repeaters are used between network nodes to duplicate the signal and
minimize signal loss. Fiber optics use the ring topology as well as IBM’s Token Ring.

Figure E.1-4 Ring Topology

7029060D

Bridges, Repeaters, Routers

Bridges, repeaters and routers are used in LANs and WANs (wide area networks). Each device
has a unique function in the network environment and operates at different layers of the
network model.

Bridges are electrical devices used to divide busy areas of the network from not so busy areas
of the network. Bridges can be intelligent devices in that they can read the transmitted data’s
receiving node addresses and send them to that node. To connect from the instrument to the
laboratory information systems (LIS) network, the file server or a computer workstation
attached to the instrument’s network acts as a bridge to the LIS network. To achieve this, a
second NIC must be installed in the server and the NIC.

Repeaters are electrical devices that amplify the transmitted signal. These devices are usually
used to amplify the signal when the topology exceeds the segment-length specifications. In
the Token-Ring network, each NIC acts like a repeater, increasing the signal then passing it to
the next node if transmitted data is not for that node.

Routers are used to connect different networking topologies together. Routers are intelligent
devices that use software and hardware to determine the network address and different
network protocols used for sending the packets across the media. The router reassembles the
packet for the right protocol used by the destination node. Routers are used for LANs and
WANs.

E.1-4 PN 4237029G
 NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONSINSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
NETWORKING E
Specifications
To make interoperability compatible, standards have been developed to help the development
of networks. Xerox’s Ethernet is the basis of networking standards for interconnectivity. In
1980, the IEEE undertook the task of defining LAN standards. IEEE formed a subcommittee
to develop the 802.X specifications and determined that one standard would not satisfy all
networking parties. The result has been specifications for different requirements required by
users. Beckman Coulter follows the 802.3 network standard.

The 802.3 specification (Table E.2-1) uses the contention access method to transmit data
across the network. With contention access, the workstation goes out and checks the network
for any activity. If no activity is seen, the workstation begins to transmit to the receiving
computer, however, if activity is on the network, the workstation halts and waits to try again.
This technique is called carrier sense multiple access (CSMA). If no collisions occur, the
transmission is successful and the sending computer gives up control of the network. If a
collision occurs, the workstation is notified to retransmit the data. This technique is referred
to as collision detection (CD) and is often used with CSMA.

Collisions occur because two workstations try to send data at the same time. Since network
transmissions are sent in both directions from a workstation, a workstation farther down the
network may check the network activity and not see it and then try to transmit. The result is
two different data packets trying to move across the network and these packets colliding.
Collisions can be minimized with proper network setup and management.

Dedicated vs. Non-Dedicated Server

A dedicated server is a computer system set up as a device to handle network activities such
as file storage and printer requests. A non-dedicated server does everything a dedicated server
does but can also be used as a workstation. The problem encountered with a non-dedicated
server is that the user will be using a word processor application and a print request may be
asked of the server. The non-dedicated server must halt the word processing application to
perform the print request activity. This halting can give the user a feeling that the workstation
may have locked up and the operator may try to reboot the system to correct the problem.
Also, security is jeopardized when a non-dedicated server is used as a workstation.

LANtastic™ Network Operating System

Beckman Coulter has chosen LANtastic as its NOS and defined a complete networking
system for the purpose of system validation, data integrity, and ease of service support. The
complete networking system consists of a Network Node Interface, the NOS software, a file
server computer and the cables to connect the two. When installed, the instrument is
configured as a client to the Pentium file servers. This means that the instrument does not
share any of its devices, such as a hard drive or a printer. The client will share the printer
and/or drives supported on the file server.

The Beckman Coulter network, when assembled, provides the user with a complete network
to transfer data for archival purposes. Beckman Coulter recommends that the server be set up
as a dedicated file server.

PN 4237029G E.1-5
NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONSINSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION
NETWORKING

E.1-6 PN 4237029G
 NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS
802.3 E
E.2 802.3
Table E.2-1 802.3 Specifications

Item 10BASE5 10BASE2 10BASE-T

Data rate (MBPS) 10 10 10
Signaling type Baseband/Manchester Baseband/Manchester Baseband/Manchester
Maximum segment length (meters) 500 185 100
Media COAX (thick) COAX (thin) UTP
50 ohm 50 ohm
RG-8, RG-11 RG-58
Topology Bus Bus Star
Requires transceivers Requires terminators Requires a hub device
Number of nodes per segment/length 100 30 1
2.5 meters apart 0.5 meters apart 100 meters apart

PN 4237029G E.2-1
NETWORK INFORMATION AND PROTOCOL SPECIFICATIONS
802.3

E.2-2 PN 4237029G
 FBAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS F
F.1 BAR-CODE LABELS
A bar code consists of black lines (bars) and white lines (spaces), which are called elements.
There are narrow elements (NE) and wide elements (WE). The bar-code symbology
determines their arrangement.

IMPORTANT Possible incorrect sample identification. When sample tube bar-code labels do not follow the
specification in this section, incorrect sample identification can occur. To prevent incorrect sample
identification, your sample tube bar-code labels must follow the specifications listed in this section.

The XL-MCL flow cytometer supports preprinted labels. (See Table 8.1-3 under Heading 8.1
for part number.)

Acceptable Bar Codes

The XL-MCL flow cytometer and the optional hand-held bar-code scanner automatically
distinguish the bar-codes in Table F.1-1 with the specifications shown.

Table F.1-1 Acceptable Bar Codes

Bar Code Specification

Code 39® 7 characters - maximum

6 data characters + 1 check character
Codabar 10 characters - maximum
9 data characters + 1 check character
Interleaved 2 of 5 14 characters - fixed
13 data characters + 1 check character
Code 128B 8 characters - maximum
alphanumeric
Code 128C 16 characters - maximum
numeric

Optical Characteristics of Bar-Code Labels

r Print Contrast Signal (PCS) - 80% minimum
r Reflectivity of Media (RW) - 80% minimum
r Reflectivity of Ink (RB) - 16% maximum
r No spots or voids; no ink smearing
r Edge roughness is included in the bar and space tolerances.

PCS = (RW - RB)/RW x 100%

PN 4237029G F.1-1
BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
BAR-CODE LABELS

Table F.1-2 Code-Related Specifications

Code Interleaved 2-of-5* Codabar* Code 39* Code 128 *

Narrow element (NE) width 0.010 in. ±0.001 in. 0.010 in. ±0.001 in. 0.010 in. ±0.001 in. 0.010 in. ±0.001 in.
Wide element/narrow element 3:1 N/A 3:1 N/A
ratio (WE/NE)
Intercharacter gap No 0.010 in. minimum ≥NE No
Data digits 14† 1 to 10† 1 to 7† 2 to 16
* See AIM® USA uniform Symbology specification, Rev. 1993 for detailed specification.
† Includes check sum character.

NE (Narrow Elements) Width

0.01 in.

WE/NE (Wide Elements/Narrow Elements) Ratio

3:1

Printing Methods
Optional bar-code Printer. See Heading 3.14, BAR-CODE PRINTER OPTION for installation
information.

Check Sum Algorithm

Use of bar codes is an extremely accurate and effective method of positive patient
identification. Certain features, such as check sum digits, maximize accuracy in reading
Codabar, Code 39 and Interleaved 2-of-5 labels. In one study, the use of check sum digits
detected 97% of misread errors.

Beckman Coulter strongly recommends the use of bar-code check sums to provide automatic
checks for read accuracy. Use check sums to provide protection against occasional misread
errors caused by problems such as damaged or misapplied labels. If you must use bar codes
without check sums, Beckman Coulter recommends that you verify each bar-code reading to
assure correct patient identification.

F.1-2 PN 4237029G
 BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
MCL BAR-CODE SCANNER F
F.2 MCL BAR-CODE SCANNER
Types of Scanners
The XL-MCL flow cytometer uses a visible laser-type scanner containing a Class II laser,
operating at 670 nm, with a maximum power output of 1 mW. The MCL bar-code scanner is
used on the XL-MCL flow cytometer only.

A hand-held bar-code scanner is available for use with either the XL or XL-MCL flow
cytometer. The hand-held scanner uses a visible laser-type reader containing a Class II laser,
operating at 670 nm, with a maximum power output of 1 mW. For more information, refer to
Heading F.3, HAND-HELD BAR-CODE SCANNER OPTION.

Decoding
The XL-MCL flow cytometer sends a “GS” ASCII character (hexadecimal 1D) to the decoder
to begin operation.

The decoder:
r Turns the scanner on.
r Decodes information that comes from the scanner.
r Keeps the scanner on for up to four seconds.
r Turns the scanner off.
r Sends the decoded information (or no-read message) to the XL-MCL flow cytometer.

Communication Protocol
Communication protocol is determined by the EEPROM (labelled U13) installed on the
Bar-Code Decoder card. Two versions of this EEPROM are currently in use. The upgrade
version, referred to as the ALL CODES EEPROM, has the OEM part number 35-213064-11
printed on the chip. The part number for the original version ends with 10 (OEM part
number 35-213064-10).

For an Instrument with the ALL CODES EEPROM Installed

If the XL-MCL flow cytometer has the ALL CODES EEPROM (OEM part number
35-213064-11) installed on the Bar-Code Decoder card, use the following AUX port settings:

Bits per second: 9600

Parity: None
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Xon/Xoff

PN 4237029G F.2-1
BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
MCL BAR-CODE SCANNER

For an Instrument with an Original EEPROM Installed

If the XL-MCL flow cytometer has the original EEPROM (OEM part number 35-213064-10)
installed on the Bar-Code Decoder card, use the following AUX port settings:

Bits per second: 1200

Parity: Odd
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Xon/Xoff

MCL Bar-Code Scanner Setup

IMPORTANT Risk of sample misidentification if the parameters for Code 128 bar-code symbology are
changed to a setting other than default. Code 128 is used to identify sample tube positions in the MCL. If
the default parameter settings are altered, sample tube positions may be misread. Do not reprogram the
Code 128 bar-code symbology.

Default Configurations for the EEPROM

Table F.2-1 MCL Bar-Code Scanner - Default Configuration

Bar-Code Symbology

Item Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC Code 128*

Code type Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Fixed length Disabled Disabled N/A N/A Disabled
Code length #1 7 10 14 N/A 16
Code length #2 N/A N/A 0 N/A N/A
Check digit Enabled Enabled Enabled N/A N/A
C/D output Disabled Disabled Disabled N/A N/A
C/D aim N/A Enabled N/A N/A N/A
Intercharacter gap Disabled Disabled N/A N/A N/A
S/S match N/A Disabled N/A N/A N/A
S/S output N/A Disabled N/A N/A N/A
EAN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Narrow margins Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
* Do not reprogram this symbology.

F.2-2 PN 4237029G
 BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
MCL BAR-CODE SCANNER F
Symbologies

IMPORTANT Possible incorrect identification of sample tubes. If sample tube bar-code labels use FNC1,
FNC4, and FS (hexadecimal 1C) characters in the bar-code information, incorrect identification of sample
tubes can occur. To prevent incorrect identification of sample tubes, do not use FNC1, FNC4, and FS
(hexadecimal 1C) characters in your bar-code information.

The XL-MCL has the ability to read bar-code symbologies of Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5,
Codabar, and Code 128. These configurations were chosen to optimize the maximum read
rate and fit the maximum number of characters on a label so that the label does not interfere
with MCL operation.

Special Considerations
When using one of these bar-code symbologies, consider the following:

r CODE 39 - Make sure the label does not interfere with carousel operation.
r Interleaved 2 of 5 - Character length must be an even number of characters, with or
without the check digit.
r CODABAR - Make sure the label does not interfere with carousel operation.
r CODE 128 - Must always be enabled to read the carousel identification and tube position
bar-code labels.

PN 4237029G F.2-3
BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
MCL BAR-CODE SCANNER

F.2-4 PN 4237029G
 BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
HAND-HELD BAR-CODE SCANNER OPTION F
F.3 HAND-HELD BAR-CODE SCANNER OPTION
Types of Scanners
The hand-held bar-code scanner uses a visible laser-type reader containing a Class II laser,
operating at 670 nm, with a maximum power output of 1 mW. This optional scanner may be
attached to an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer.

The XL-MCL flow cytometer also uses a visible laser-type scanner containing a Class II laser,
operating at 670 nm, with a maximum power output of 1 mW. For more information, refer to
Heading F.2, MCL BAR-CODE SCANNER.

Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner Setup Parameters

Default Configurations
Table F.3-1 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - Default Configuration

Bar-Code Symbology

Item Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 OF 5 Code 93 Code 128

Code type Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Fixed length Disabled Disabled N/A N/A Disabled
Code length #1 7 10 14 12 16
Code length #2 N/A N/A 0 N/A N/A
Check digit Enabled Enabled Enabled N/A N/A
C/D output Disabled Disabled Disabled N/A N/A
C/D aim N/A Enabled N/A N/A N/A
Intercharacter gap Disabled Disabled N/A N/A N/A
S/S match N/A Disabled N/A N/A N/A
S/S output N/A Disabled N/A N/A N/A
EAN N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Narrow margins Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled

PN 4237029G F.3-1
BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
HAND-HELD BAR-CODE SCANNER OPTION

General Parameters

Table F.3-2 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - General Parameters

Item Code* Function

AUTOSENSE OPERATION NN Disabled
WEDGE MODE CE Enabled
BEEPER OPERATION AD Beeper ON; volume LOUD
INTERCHARACTER DELAY GA No intercharacter delay
PREFIX IA None
SUFFIX MC Suffix CR
TERMINAL ID JA Disabled
CODE IDENTIFIER FA Disabled
PREAMBLE KA None
POSTAMBLE LA None
POWER CONSUMPTION @A Enable full power
LASER REDUNDANCY BE Enable four times laser redundancy
SET LASER TIMEOUT BH Set scan beam timeout to six seconds
* Scan this code from the OEM User’s Manual.

Serial Communication Parameters

Not applicable.

Symbologies

IMPORTANT Possible incorrect identification of sample tubes. If sample tube bar-code labels use FNC1,
FNC4, and FS (hexadecimal 1C) characters in the bar-code information, incorrect identification of sample
tubes can occur. To prevent incorrect identification of sample tubes, do not use FNC1, FNC4, and FS
(hexadecimal 1C) characters in your bar-code information.

Table F.3-3 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - Symbologies

Item Code* Function

UPC (A & E) QA Disable UPC (both A & E)
EAN/JAN RA Disable EAN/JAN
CODE 39 0B Enable standard CODE 39
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER 0E Enable MODULO 43 check character
CODE 39 MINIMUM LENGTH 0H Minimum length = 01
CODE 39 MAXIMUM LENGTH 0I Maximum length = 06
CODE 39 START/STOP CHAR. 0F Do not XMIT START/STOP character
CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER 0K Disable transmit of check character
* Scan this code from the OEM User’s Manual.

F.3-2 PN 4237029G
 BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
HAND-HELD BAR-CODE SCANNER OPTION F
Table F.3-3 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - Symbologies (Continued)

Item Code* Function

CODE I-2 0F 5 PC Enable I-2 of 5 with check digit
CODE I-2 OF 5 MINIMUM LENGTH PD Minimum length = 14
CODE I-2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LENGTH PE Maximum length = 14
CODE I-2 OF 5 START/STOP CHAR. P0 Disable 1-2 of 5 check digit transmission
CODE 2 OF 5 STANDARD PF Disable standard CODE 2 of 5
CODE 128 TB Enable CODE 128
CODE 128 MINIMUM LENGTH TC Minimum length = 01
CODE 128 MAXIMUM LENGTH TD Maximum length = 10
CODABAR VB Enable CODABAR
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER VJ Do not transmit check character
CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER VI Enable CODABAR check character
CODABAR MINIMUM LENGTH VE Minimum length = 01
CODABAR MAXIMUM LENGTH VF Maximum length = 09
CODABAR START/STOP XMIT VC Disable START/STOP XMIT
SYMBOLOGY IDENTIFIERS FA Disable XMIT of symbology identifiers
* Scan this code from the OEM User’s Manual.

Wand Emulation Parameters

Not applicable.

Keyboard Wedge Parameters

Table F.3-4 Hand-Held Bar-Code Scanner - Keyboard Wedge Parameters

Item Code* Function

WEDGE MODE CE WEDGE MODE enable
TERMINAL TYPE CF Enable PC-AT, PS/2 and 50/60/80
ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS EP Normal alphabetic characters
* Scan this code from the OEM User’s Manual.

Memory Module Set Up

Not applicable.

Supplemental Programming Symbols

Not applicable.

PN 4237029G F.3-3
BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
HAND-HELD BAR-CODE SCANNER OPTION

F.3-4 PN 4237029G
 BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
BAR-CODE PRINTER F
F.4 BAR-CODE PRINTER
Table F.4-1 Bar-Code Printer - DIP Switch Settings

Switch Setting Position Function

1 OFF Right
2 OFF Right Sets BAUD rate to 9600
3 OFF Right
4 ON Left Sets Data Bit length to 8
5 ON Left Sets Parity to Disabled
6 ON Left
7 OFF Right Sets X ON/OFF Flow Control
8 OFF Right Sets no error detection

PN 4237029G F.4-1
BAR-CODE SPECIFICATIONS
BAR-CODE PRINTER

F.4-2 PN 4237029G
 GINSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) G
ATTENTION: This service manual contains two instrument installation procedures:
r Use the installation procedures in this appendix only if you are installing an XL or
XL-MCL flow cytometer with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
r If you are installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer with a Universal Power Supply, use
the installation procedures in Chapter 3, PART A.

G.1 PRE-SITE INSPECTION

Prior to installing an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, a pre-site inspection is required to verify
the following conditions:

r Space and Accessibility

r Power Requirements
r Environment
r Unloading and Moving the Instrument
r Installation Assistance
r Inspection Report

Space and Accessibility

A bench or table must be available for installation.

The XL and XL-MCL flow cytometers use a 15 mW Argon air-cooled laser system
manufactured by JDS Uniphase. Evaluate the installation site to ensure sufficient air flow for
cooling. All intake fans must be at least 30.5 cm (12 in.) from any wall or other obstruction
that could interfere with air flow. Additionally, the instrument must be positioned with
sufficient space for servicing.

Table G.1-1 contains specifications for determining the flow cytometer’s footprint and the
necessary operating clearances.

Table G.1-1 Required Operating Clearance

Specifications XL Flow Cytometer XL-MCL Flow Cytometer

Height 54.6 cm (21.5 in.) 54.6 cm (21.5 in.)
Additional clearance above for servicing 45.7 cm (18 in.) minimum 45.7 cm (18 in.) minimum
and lifting the Data Acquisition card cage
above the sensor
Total clearance needed 100.3 cm (39.5 in.) 100.3 cm (39.5 in.)
Width 61.0 cm (24 in.) 86.6 cm (34.1 in.)
Additional clearance on right for servicing 30.5 cm (12 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.)
Additional clearance on left for servicing 30.5 cm (12 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.)
Total clearance needed 122.0 cm (48 in.) 147.6 cm (58.1 in.)
Depth 61.0 cm (24 in.) 61.0 cm (24 in.)
Additional clearance behind instrument for 30.5 cm (12 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.)
sufficient cooling and room for servicing
Total clearance needed 91.5 cm (36 in.) 91.5 cm (36 in.)

PN 4237029G G.1-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
PRE-SITE INSPECTION

Power Requirements
ATTENTION: If the facility tends to experience power fluctuations, contact a local line
monitoring company and request a line monitor be installed one week before the instrument
is scheduled to be installed.
The XL or XL-MCL Cytometer and Power Supply module are contained in two separate
enclosures with two separate power cables - one for system power and the other for the laser.
Each power cord is intended to be plugged into a different 20 ampere supply from the other.

The electrical ratings of the XL or XL-MCL system are:

r 100 Vac system: 48 to 62 Hz, 16.00 amps, 1600 watts

r 120 Vac system: 48 to 62 Hz, 8.00 amps, 1840 watts
r 230/240 Vac system: 48 to 62 Hz, 8.00 amps, 1920 watts
Power requirements vary for each country. It is important that the correct electrical input is
available prior to installation.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Ensure that there is a main power disconnect switch in the same room
as the lasers to avoid personal injury.

1. Verify sufficient power outlets are available. See Table G.1-2.

r Two dedicated lines (with isolated grounds) are needed:
t One for the Power Supply module
t One for the air-cooled Argon laser
r Three non-dedicated lines are needed for the Workstation components:
t One for the tower computer
t One for the monitor
t One for the printer
2. Verify that there is an appropriate power outlet for any accessories, including printers.

Table G.1-2 Power Requirements

Country Dedicated Lines with Isolated Grounds Non-Dedicated Lines

USA Two dedicated lines at 115 Vac, 50/60 Hz Three non-dedicated lines at 115 Vac,
at 20 A 50/60 Hz at 20 A
Note: All 115 V receptacles must be tested
for electrical wiring faults using the
procedure under Heading 4.18,
THREE-WIRE CIRCUIT ANALYZER TEST.
Europe and Two dedicated lines at 220 Vac, 50/60 Hz Three non-dedicated lines at 220 Vac,
other applicable at 20 A 50/60 Hz at 20 A
countries or
Two dedicated lines at 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz
at 20 A
Japan Two dedicated lines at 100 Vac, 50/60 Hz Three non-dedicated lines at 100 Vac,
at 20 A 50/60 Hz at 20 A

G.1-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
PRE-SITE INSPECTION G
Optional Computer Peripherals
Additional power connections may be needed for any optional purchased computer
peripherals, such as monitors and printers. The type of connection is dependent on the local
power available. The user may need to use a separate printer stand to free up the work space.

Environment
The room where the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer is to be installed must meet the
specifications in Table G.1-3
.

Table G.1-3 Environmental Requirements

Description Specification

Humidity 30 - 85%, non-condensing

Heat dissipation into room 1,920 W (6,553 BTU per hour) generated by the Cytometer
300 W (1,024 BTU per hour) generated by the tower computer
60 W (205 BTU per hour) generated by the 17-inch flat screen monitor
Ambient temperature 18° - 29°C (64° - 85°F)
Stability/rate of change Temperature fluctuations within the ambient temperature range can affect
performance. For optimal performance, Beckman Coulter recommends
the room temperature not fluctuate more than 2.8°C (5°F) per hour.
Noise 65 dBa

Unloading and Moving the Instrument

The instrument arrives at the customer site with the Power Supply and Cytometer packed on
individual palletized cartons. The remainder of the instrument arrives in cartons that are not
palletized.
.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not attempt to unload the Voltage-Specific Power Supply or the
Cytometer without using a pallet jack. Failure to use a pallet jack can result in serious personal injury.

Make sure the shipping department is aware that a pallet jack is required to unload the XL or
XL-MCL flow cytometer and associated cartons from the delivery truck. Find out where these
cartons will be stored prior to installation.

If the cartons are to be stored somewhere other than the installation site,
r Inspect this area to make sure the conditions are acceptable.
r Establish who will be responsible for ensuring these cartons are at the installation site at
the appropriate time.
Locate the person who will most likely accept the shipment. Clearly explain what you need
done prior to your arrival. Ask this person to inspect all cartons for damage. Explain that a
claim must be filed with the carrier if damage is detected.

PN 4237029G G.1-3
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
PRE-SITE INSPECTION

Installation Assistance
Inform the customer that during the installation you will need an able-bodied assistant to
help you lift and position the Cytometer on the bench or table top. Ask them to make sure
someone is available to help as needed.

Inspection Report
Review the findings with your contact person. If deficiencies are present, make sure the
customer understands what actions are necessary to meet the specifications for the system
their laboratory has ordered. Establish a time frame for completion. Notify your manager if
the installation must be rescheduled.

G.1-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
PREINSTALLATION CHECKS G
G.2 PREINSTALLATION CHECKS
Before installing the instrument, verify the following conditions:
r Pre-Site Inspection Compliance
r Education Center Training
r Condition of Cartons Received
r Optional Computer Peripherals
r Supplies

Pre-Site Inspection Compliance

Prior to installing the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer, verify the site complies with the space,
accessibility, power, and environmental requirements detailed in the pre-site inspection.
Verify any deficiency noted during the pre-site inspection is resolved before starting the
installation.

Education Center Training

Verify that at least one person from the customer laboratory is already trained or is assigned
to a class date within two weeks of installation.

Condition of Cartons Received

If the instrument and its associated cartons were stored somewhere other than the installation
site, verify that all cartons are now at the installation site. If not, notify the appropriate person
(established during the pre-site inspection) and make arrangements for the cartons to be
moved to the installation site.
At the installation site:
1. Compare the cartons received against the customer’s order, and notify shipping if there is
a discrepancy.
2. Inspect the cartons for damage. If any damage exists, confirm that a claim was filed with
the carrier.

Supplies
Verify the necessary supplies are available, including:

r IsoFlow™ sheath fluid, PN 8547008

r Flow-Check™ fluorospheres, PN 6805359
r COULTER® CYTO-TROL™ control cells, PN 6604248
r COULTER CLENZ® cleaning agent, PN 8546929

Optional Computer Peripherals

If the customer orders the optional Printer or a second monitor, verify space is available. The
customer may wish to use a separate Printer stand to free up the work space.

PN 4237029G G.2-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
PREINSTALLATION CHECKS

G.2-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION G
G.3 CYTOMETER INSTALLATION
ATTENTION: If the instrument is being moved from one area to another within the same
institution, some steps within this procedure may not be applicable.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Installation of an XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer by anyone who has not
successfully completed a Beckman Coulter authorized training course is prohibited. Avoid personal injury
by obtaining the necessary training to complete these installation procedures.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit), PN 5415097
B Box suitable for storing shipping parts removed during installation

Unpacking
1. Locate the carton containing the Cytometer.
2. Position the carton close to the bench or table where the Cytometer is to be installed.

WARNING Risk of personal injury as the steel strapping is cut. To prevent injury, hold the cutter with one
hand and take hold of the steel strap with the other hand to ensure the steel strap does not spring back.

3. Stand to one side of the strapping surrounding the shipping carton.

4. Holding the steel strapping firmly with one hand, cut and remove each strap
surrounding cardboard carton. Discard the straps.
5. Remove the cardboard carton, foam blocks, and plastic covering.
6. Visually inspect the Cytometer for any physical damage caused in shipping and correct
as needed.
7. Record the serial number on the WW: Installation Database and report any loose or
damaged parts/assemblies.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not attempt to unload the Cytometer without assistance. Lifting
handles are not provided. The Cytometer weighs over 40 lbs and can be difficult to lift and maneuver into
position. Lifting the Cytometer should only be done by a minimum of two persons following the requisite
safety precautions. Failure to obtain assistance can result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION Risk of instrument damage. The MCL option on the XL-MCL flow cytometer may be damaged if
the left side of the Cytometer is grasped to move the Cytometer from the pallet to the bench or table top.
Position one person in the front and the other in the back of the Cytometer to move the instrument from the
pallet to the bench or table top.

8. Request assistance to place the Cytometer on the bench top or table.

a. Position one person in front and another in the back.
b. Do not lift the instrument from its sides, especially if the MCL option is attached.
9. Orient the Cytometer to the far right of the designated area to allow space for installing
the Workstation later.

PN 4237029G G.3-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

10. Carefully remove the protective film from the:

r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.

Installation
ATTENTION: Since it may be necessary to access an area of the Cytometer several times, do not
reinstall a cover or panel until you are specifically instructed to do so.

Remove Covers to Provide Needed Access

1. Remove the top cover and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 1 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions with illustrations.
2. Remove three small shipping screws at the top of each side cover (Figure G.3-1). Place
all six screws in the box designated for storing shipping parts.

Figure G.3-1 Location of Small Shipping Screws Used to Secure the Side Covers
Remove shipping
screws

7029103F Left side Right side

3. Remove the right-side cover. Refer to Procedure 2 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions with illustrations.
4. To remove the manual sample station assembly, use instrument specific instructions:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to step 5.
r If this is an XL-MCL cytometer, go to step 10.
5. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.
Refer to Procedure 14 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions with
illustrations.
6. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside. Refer to Procedure 3 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions with illustrations.
7. Pull open the reagent drawer.

G.3-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION G
8. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Remove the four flat-head Phillips screws securing the manual sample station to the
Cytometer frame.
Note: Two screws are located on the left side of the sample station and two more are
located on the front to the right.
b. Pull the cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the assembly on top of the
reagent containers inside the extended reagent drawer.
9. Go to step 15 to continue this installation.
10. Unlatch the MCL covers from the Cytometer:

CAUTION Risk of damage to the MCL option. The following steps are meant to unlatch, not remove, the
MCL covers. If you attempt to remove the MCL covers without completing all the steps detailed in the
Removing the MCL Covers procedure under Heading 4.25, COVER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION, you
may damage MCL components. The following steps are required to remove the manual sample station
assembly. To remove the left-side cover, it is not necessary to remove the MCL covers from the Cytometer.

a. Push the button to unlock the upper cover. The cover pops open as the air cylinder
attached to the cover extends.
b. Push the cover up to ensure it is fully open.
c. Remove the two screws securing the MCL probe housing (Figure G.3-2) then
carefully pull the probe housing cover off the Cytometer and set it aside.

Figure G.3-2 Removing the MCL Probe Housing Cover

Remove
screws

7029238F

PN 4237029G G.3-3
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

d. Close the MCL door (upper cover) and unlatch the MCL lower cover by grasping
the base and gently pulling the base away from the Cytometer (Figure G.3-3). Do
not attempt to remove the MCL option from the Cytometer.

Figure G.3-3 Unlatching the MCL Covers

7029092F

11. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside. See Figure G.3-4.

Figure G.3-4 Remove the Center Front Cover (Filter Cover)

7029230F

12. Pull open the reagent drawer.

G.3-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION G
13. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Carefully move the unlatched MCL cover away from the Cytometer frame.
b. Locate and remove the two pan-head screws that secure the manual sample station
to the left side of the Cytometer frame (Figure G.3-5).

Figure G.3-5 Manual Sample Station Screw Locations

7029123F Remove screws (4)

c. Remove the two flat-head Phillips screws securing the right side of the manual
sample station to the front of the Cytometer frame (Figure G.3-5).
d. Pull the cover assembly off the Cytometer frame and lay the assembly on top of the
reagent containers inside the extended reagent drawer.
14. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.

PN 4237029G G.3-5
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

CAUTION Risk of damage to electrical components on the front panel display circuit card. Do not use a
T-handled hex key to hold the upper cover open. If the metal in the T-handle comes in contact with the
electrical components on the circuit card, the components may short out and the card becomes defective.

15. Lift the upper cover and place a long screwdriver (with a plastic handle) in the channel
of the upper frame to it open (Figure G.3-6).

Figure G.3-6 Bracing the Upper Cover Open

Cytometer
upper cover (open)

Long screwdriver
(with plastic handle)

Channel
(upper right)
7029129G

16. Remove the four screws (two on each side) securing the filter shield to the Cytometer
frame (Figure G.3-7). Set the filter shield aside.

Figure G.3-7 Filter Shield Screw Locations

Remove screws (4)

C o u lte r E p ic s X L M C L

Filter shield 7029116F

G.3-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION G
Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front
Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw and hex nut) located at the front right
corner of the optical bench:

1. Slide the reagent drawer open as needed.

2. Use your Chapman’s ratchet set to remove the shipping tie-down (screw and hex nut)
located at the front right corner. Refer to Figure G.3-8 as needed.
a. Use the 3/8-inch ratchet to hold the hex nut in place (Figure G.3-8).
b. Use the 3/8-inch Phillips-head bit in the ratchet screwdriver to remove the shipping
screw (Figure G.3-8).

Figure G.3-8 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Front
Chapman ratchet

3/8 inch
Phillips-head bit

Spacer

3/8 inch
ratchet
7029107G

3. Remove the spacer (Figure G.3-8).

4. Place the shipping tie-down (screw, hex nut, and spacer) in the box designated for
storing shipping parts.

Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down in the Back (Behind the Laser)
1. If this is an XL with the MCL option, remove the MCL CPU card; if this is not an XL with
the MCL option, go to step 2.
Note: The MCL CPU card is the larger of the two circuit cards located on the left side of
the Cytometer. It is the card near the rear of the Cytometer. Refer to Figure G.3-9 or
Figure G.3-10 as needed.

PN 4237029G G.3-7
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

Figure G.3-9 MCL CPU Card Cable Locations Figure G.3-10 MCL CPU Card Screw Locations
MCL CPU card MCL CPU card

Disconnect Remove
cable screws
(5) (7)

7029093F 7029100F

a. Set up your static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit).

b. Disconnect the five cable connectors attached to the card (Figure G.3-9).
c. Remove the seven Phillips-head screws and washers that attach the card to the
Cytometer frame (Figure G.3-10).
d. Remove the card and set it aside on the static-dissipative work mat.
2. Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw and hex nut) located in the left rear
corner behind the laser head.
a. Locate the shipping tie-down on the rear of the optical bench (Figure G.3-11). It is
the larger of the two screws.

Figure G.3-11 Location of the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser (Top View)
Top view
looking inside
Rear view Cytometer rear of Cytometer

Shipping
tie-down
screwhead

7029143F

G.3-8 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION G
ATTENTION: Before beginning this task, make sure you have a long Phillips-head screwdriver
(or a Phillips-head screwdriver with an extension), a 3/8-inch wrench, and a piece of
electrical tape. If either the hex nut or spacer falls to the Cytometer floor, it must be retrieved.
b. Use a 3/8-inch wrench and a long Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the shipping
tie-down (screw and hex nut). Refer to Figure G.3-12 as needed.
1) Place a piece of electrical tape over the opening of the 3/8-inch wrench.
2) Route the 3/8-inch wrench through the opening on the left side of the
Cytometer and position the wrench to hold the hex nut in place
(Figure G.3-12).
3) Use a long Phillips-head screwdriver (or a Phillips-head screwdriver with an
extension) to remove the shipping screw (Figure G.3-12). The electrical tape
should capture the hex nut inside the wrench.

Figure G.3-12 Remove the Optical Bench Shipping Tie-Down Behind the Laser

Long Phillips-head
screwdriver

Screw
3/8 inch
hex nut Spacer

3/8 inch Electrical

wrench tape T R A N S

R E C .

F L O W C E L L
P R E S S U R E V A C U U M W A S T E W A S T E

Rear view 7029112F

c. Use large hemostats to carefully remove the spacer (Figure G.3-12).

d. Retrieve the hex nut or spacer if either falls to the Cytometer floor.
3. Place the shipping tie-down (screw, hex nut, and spacer) in the box designated for
storing shipping parts.

PN 4237029G G.3-9
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

Prepare Components inside the Lower Pneumatics Drawer for Operation

1. On the left side of the Cytometer, locate the two rows of pinch-valves inside the lower
pneumatics drawer.
2. Use a hemostat to remove the red shipping clip from each pinch valve. Make sure you
remove all 14 shipping clips!
3. Count the removed shipping clips to confirm that all 14 red clips were removed.
4. Place the red shipping clips in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
5. Visually inspect for any loose or damaged parts.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.

Reinstall the MCL CPU Card (if removed earlier)

1. Position the MCL CPU card back on the Cytometer frame.
2. Loosely install the seven Phillips-head screws and washers then tighten the screws to the
Cytometer frame.
3. Reconnect all five cable connectors to their respective plugs on the circuit card.

Prepare the Data Acquisition Card Cage for Operation

At the Data Acquisition card cage:
1. Remove the two shipping screws, one from each side of the card cage. Place these screws
in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
2. With one hand, pull the Data Acquisition card cage forward and hold it in an upright
position. With your free hand, lock the hinge on each side of the card cage to secure it in
a vertical position. Make sure both hinges are locked before releasing your grip.
3. Remove the four screws securing the shipping brace (Figure G.3-13).

Figure G.3-13 Data Acquisition Card Cage - Shipping Brace and Screw Locations

Card cage

Remove
screws (4)

7029113F

G.3-10 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION G
4. Remove the shipping brace (Figure G.3-13).
5. Inspect for any loose cards or cables. Correct as needed.
6. Reinstall the shipping brace (Figure G.3-13).
7. Disassemble the static-dissipative field kit.
8. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the center cavity of the Cytometer. Refer
to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.

Prepare the Segmenting Valve for Operation

1. Locate the segmenting valve (behind the manual sample station removed earlier).
2. Turn the knob counterclockwise until it can be removed from its shaft (Figure G.3-14).
Set the knob aside.

Figure G.3-14 Remove the Plastic Shipping Inserts from the Segmenting Valve

Shipping
inserts

HPLC locking nut

Rear segmenting pad

Middle segmenting pad

7029095G Front segmenting pad Knob

3. Gently separate the white, ceramic segmenting pads (Figure G.3-14).

4. Remove the two plastic shipping inserts from between the segmenting pads
(Figure G.3-14).
5. Carefully remove the segmenting pads from the shaft (Figure G.3-14):
a. At the front segmenting pad:
1) Unscrew the HPLC locking nut from the front segmenting pad. Make sure you
do not lose the ferrule at the end of the PEEK tubing.
2) Disconnect the air cylinder from the ball stud (on the segmenting pad).
Note: To separate the air cylinder from the segmenting pad, slide the ball-stud
clamp towards the air cylinder. While holding the clamp, lift the air cylinder
piston off the ball stud in the segmenting pad.
3) Slide the front segmenting pad off the shaft.

PN 4237029G G.3-11
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

b. Disconnect the air cylinder from the middle segmenting pad and carefully slide the
pad off the shaft.
c. Disconnect the air cylinder from the rear segmenting pad and carefully slide the pad
off the shaft.
6. Rinse each segmenting pad with distilled water then reinstall the pad on the shaft:
a. Rinse the rear segmenting pad with distilled water and reinstall the pad on the shaft.
b. Rinse the middle segmenting pad with distilled water and reinstall the pad on the
shaft.
c. Rinse the front segmenting pad with distilled water and reinstall the pad on the
shaft.
7. Reconnect the PEEK-tubing ferrule to the front segmenting valve.
a. Make sure the ferrule is still on the end of the PEEK tubing.
b. Screw the HPLC locking nut back into the front segmenting pad.
ATTENTION: Applying a light coat of Lubriplate grease to the air cylinder clamp before
attaching it to the ball stud on the segmenting pad helps prevent corrosion.
8. Reattach each air cylinder clamp back on its respective ball stud.
9. Reinstall the knob in the shaft then turn the knob clockwise until it is snug. Do not
overtighten the knob.
10. Wipe the outside of the segmenting valve with a lint-free tissue.
11. Ensure the work area is wiped dry.

Prepare Components inside the Upper Pneumatic Drawer for Operation

At the upper pneumatic drawer (upper right side of the Cytometer):
1. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the upper pneumatic drawer to the
Cytometer frame.
2. Pull the hinged drawer outside of the Cytometer by grasping and pulling the right side of
the drawer away from the Cytometer frame.
3. Remove the four Phillips-head screws securing the front panel (EMC shield) to the front
of the hinged drawer frame. Two screws are located at the top of the frame and two
screws are located at the bottom.
4. Remove the EMC shield and set it aside.
5. Remove the two red shipping clips (one from each pinch valve).
6. Place the shipping clips in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
7. Visually inspect the upper pneumatics assembly for loose connectors or tubing.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.

G.3-12 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION G
Fill the Reagent Containers

IMPORTANT Risk of misleading results if you contaminate either reagent. Be careful not to contaminate the
sheath fluid or cleaning reagent. Do not let your fingers, paper towels, or other objects touch the inside of
the container or the inside of the cap.

CAUTION Risk of damage to the instrument if you overfill either reagent, especially the cleaning reagent.
Avoid spills. Do not tilt the container or remove it from the drawer to fill it.

Fill the Sheath Container

1. Pull open the reagent drawer.
2. Unscrew the cap on the sheath container (larger container on your right).
3. Lay the cap upside down on the container to avoid contamination.
4. Insert the funnel to help avoid spills.
5. Carefully pour sheath fluid into the container.
Note: Fill the container just to the bottom of its neck.
6. Carefully wipe up any spills.
7. Screw the cap clockwise until the bottle is sealed.
8. Locate the sheath filter positioned to the right of the sheath container.
a. Make sure the vent port is above the connector and pointing toward you
(Figure G.3-15).
b. Make sure the tubing is not kinked or twisted.

Figure G.3-15 Sheath Filter Location and Associated Components

Connector Vent port

MCL
r s XL
Coulte Epic
MCL
lter pics XL
Cou E

7029084G

PN 4237029G G.3-13
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CYTOMETER INSTALLATION

Fill the Cleaning Agent Container

1. Unscrew the cap on the cleaning agent container (smaller container on your left).
2. Lay the cap upside down on the container to avoid contamination.
3. Insert a funnel to help avoid spills.
4. Carefully pour two 500 mL bottles of cleaning agent into the container. Do not overfill
this container.
Note: Fill the container just to the crease below the neck of the container.
5. Carefully wipe up any spills.
6. Screw the cap clockwise until the container is sealed.
7. Thoroughly rinse the funnel with water then dry it with paper towels before sitting it
aside.
8. Push the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer. Do not reinstall the center front
cover (filter cover).

G.3-14 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION G
G.4 VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION
ATTENTION: If the instrument is being moved from one area to another within the same
institution, some steps within this procedure may not be applicable.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Installation of a Voltage-Specific Power Supply by anyone who has not
successfully completed a Beckman Coulter authorized training course is prohibited. Avoid personal injury
by obtaining the necessary training to complete these installation procedures.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Box suitable for storing shipping parts removed during installation

Unpacking
1. Locate the carton containing the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.

WARNING Risk of personal injury as the steel strapping is cut. To prevent injury, hold the cutter with one
hand and take hold of the steel strap with the other hand to ensure the steel strap does not spring back.

2. Stand to one side of the strapping surrounding the shipping carton.

3. Holding the steel strapping firmly with one hand, cut and remove each strap
surrounding the cardboard carton. Discard the straps.
4. Lift the cardboard carton off the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
5. Remove the plastic covering.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not attempt to unload the Voltage-Specific Power Supply without
assistance. Lifting handles are not provided and the Voltage-Specific Power Supply weighs over 40 lbs.
Lifting the Voltage-Specific Power Supply should only be done by a minimum of two persons following the
requisite safety precautions. Failure to obtain assistance can result in serious personal injury.

6. Request assistance to lift the Voltage-Specific Power Supply off the shipping pallet.
7. Visually inspect the Power Supply module for any physical damage caused in shipping.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.
8. Carefully peel the protective film from the front door of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply.

Installation
Note: To remove the following covers, refer to Procedure 19 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you want detailed instructions with illustrations.

1. Remove the three-sided cover and set it aside.

a. Remove two Phillips-head screws on the left side of the cover (at the bottom) and
the two Phillips-head screws on the right side of the cover (at the bottom).
b. Lift the three-sided cover straight up and off of the Power Supply module frame.
c. Set the cover (and screws) aside in a safe place where the cover will not be damaged.

PN 4237029G G.4-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
VOLTAGE-SPECIFIC POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION

2. Remove the three foam blocks used to secure the compressor assembly during shipping
(Figure G.4-1). Don’t forget the block wedged under the rear of the compressor.

Figure G.4-1 Location of Foam Shipping Blocks Used to Protect the Compressor Assembly

R e m o v e
s h ip p in g b lo c k s

7 0 2 9 0 9 6 F

3. Place the foam blocks inside the box designated for storing shipping parts.
4. Visually inspect for any loose or damaged parts.
a. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
b. Correct as needed.

G.4-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION G
G.5 WORKSTATION INSTALLATION
“Workstation” or “Computer Workstation” is commonly used to refer to the FlowCentre
Multimedia Workstation. This system consists of a tower computer, monitor, keyboard,
mouse, and any optional equipment such as a Printer. The tower computer, monitor, and
Printer each have their own ac power cord and power on/off switch. When a procedure calls
for you to do something to the Workstation such as “turn on the Workstation,” it refers to all
the hardware items. When a procedure calls for you to do something to a specific part of the
Workstation, it refers to that item only, such as “remove the tower computer cover.”

Tools/Supplies Needed
B None

Unpacking
1. Unpack the FlowCentre II tower computer.
2. Consult with the customer to determine where they want to place the computer. If they
have no preference, position the computer on the bench or table (Figure G.5-1).

Figure G.5-1 Typical Workstation Setup

ATTENTION: Layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that shown.
Cytometer
Monitor
Computer

MCL Option

Mouse
Coulter
Epics XL MCL

Keyboard

Voltage-Specific
Power Supply

7029284G

3. Unpack the monitor and place it on the bench or table (Figure G.5-1).
Note: The Workstation computer can accept up to two monitors. If the system has two
monitors, find out where the customer wants the second monitor placed. If the monitors
are different, also find out which monitor will be the primary monitor.
4. Unpack the keyboard and mouse.
5. Place the keyboard in front of the monitor then place the mouse beside it (Figure G.5-1).

PN 4237029G G.5-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION

Mouse Connection
Connect the mouse cable to the mouse port on the rear of the tower computer (Figure G.5-2).

Figure G.5-2 Electronic Cable Connections - Mouse and Keyboard

ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

MulitSync LCD1700 M+
CAUTIO N
AV IS
ACHTUN G
FC

ADVARS EL
WA RNI NG

MODEL LC D170 0M+

SERIAL NO.
REV. 1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

TRAN

REC.

PRESSURE VACUUM WAST

FLOWCELL
WAST
Keyboard

7029114F
Mouse

Keyboard Connection
Connect the keyboard cable to the keyboard port on the rear of the computer tower
(Figure G.5-2).

Monitor Connections - Overview

ATTENTION: The dual-head video display adapter allows the FlowCentre Workstation to accept
up to two monitors. Since this card is already installed and enabled, do not enable the
acceleration option DEVICE BITMAPS CACHING under the display properties of Windows™ 98. If
this option is enabled and the system is rebooted, the video display appears garbled and is no
longer usable.
The FlowCentre Multimedia Tower Workstation being used with the XL or XL-MCL flow
cytometer is designed to accept up to two monitors. Follow the connection instructions for
the monitor(s) being installed in this laboratory.

Monitor Connections: 17-inch Flat Panel Thin Film Transistor (TFT) Monitor
This LCD monitor has two cables and an ac power cord. Inspect these cables and the power
cord to ensure the pins are straight and seated properly.

Connecting the Monitor Cables

1. Inspect the cables and the power cord to ensure the pins are straight and seated properly.
2. Locate the cable with the terminal post (may be color-coded green).
3. Insert the terminal post in the green jack on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure G.5-3).

G.5-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION G
4. Attach the monitor plug to the right jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of the
tower computer - Figure G.5-3).

Figure G.5-3 Connecting the 17-inch Flat Panel TFT Monitor Cables
ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

Monitor 1

MulitSync LCD1700 M+
CAUTIO N
AV IS
ACHTUN G
FC

ADVARS EL
WA RNI NG

MODEL LC D170 0M+

SERIAL NO.
REV. 1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E F G H

Monitor 2

7029182F
Green
ac to terminal jack
wall outlet

5. If a second monitor is being installed:

a. Follow the connection instructions supplied with the monitor.
b. Attach the monitor plug to the left jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of the
tower computer - Figure G.5-3).
6. Connect the ac power cord to an appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure G.5-3).

Connection to ac Power Source

1. Locate the ac power cord for the tower computer.
2. Plug the female end of the power cord into the socket on the rear of the tower computer.

Printer Option
Connect the Printer to the PRINTER port on back of the tower computer.

Note: For additional information, refer to the documentation supplied with the Printer.

PN 4237029G G.5-3
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
WORKSTATION INSTALLATION

G.5-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CABLE CONNECTIONS G
G.6 CABLE CONNECTIONS
Reference Illustration
While making these cable connections, refer to Figure G.6-1 as needed.

Figure G.6-1 Instrument Connections

ATTENTION: The layout of basic components on an individual Workstation computer may vary from that
shown. If the computer has a blanking plate where a card edge is shown, the functions performed by that
circuit card may be incorporated into the motherboard or may not be required by that customer.

Cytometer
Workstation

FIBER OPTIC REC

FIBER OPTIC TRANS

MCL Option
TRANS

REC.

FLOWCELL
PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE WASTE

MCL
CYT12
LOGIC

ANALOG
LASER
UMBILICAL

POWER MODULE CONTROL Voltage-Specific

Power Supply
AUX POWER ON

SYSTEM
PRESSURE
ON/OFF

VACUUM WASTE LEVEL

ON

OFF
WASTE
LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER

WASTE VENT
MAX 1800 WATTS MAX 1500 WATTS

ac power
line cords
7029094G

Laser Umbilical Cable

1. At the rear of the Power Supply:
a. Remove the three Phillips-head screws securing the upper rear cover to the Power
Supply module frame. One screw is located at the top in the middle and the other
two screws are at the bottom of the cover.
b. Remove the upper rear cover and set it aside.
c. Locate the small cover in the center (left of circuit breaker labeled MCL 24 VOLTS).
d. Remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the small cover to the rear cover. One
screw has a hex nut to ground the cable (when installed).
e. Remove the small cover and set it aside.
2. Cut the tie-wrap securing the laser umbilical cable to the rear of the Cytometer.

PN 4237029G G.6-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CABLE CONNECTIONS

3. Route the two large connectors on the end of the laser umbilical cable through the
opening in the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Figure G.6-1).
Note: Remove the ac power plug for easier access to the sockets.
4. Connect the laser umbilical cable to the Argon laser power supply inside the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
a. For easier and quicker connections, at the laser power supply:
1) Remove the laser power supply key and set it aside.
Note: If the key is in the ON position, it must be rotated counterclockwise to
the OFF position before it can be removed from the power supply.
2) Remove the ac power plug from the laser power supply (Figure G.6-2).
b. Insert the black connector into the circular socket (Figure G.6-2) and lock it in
place.
Note: The black connector is keyed to fit the circular socket. Make sure the
connector is properly inserted in the socket before attempting to lock it in place.

Figure G.6-2 Connect the Laser Umbilical Cable to the Laser Power Supply

CK
LO ER
ER LAS
INT
R
WE
PO
ER
LAS

7029091F

c. Insert the white connector into the rectangular socket (Figure G.6-2) then tighten
the two screws to lock it in place.
d. Reconnect the ac power plug.
e. Reinstall the laser power supply key then rotate the key clockwise to the —
position. (The power supply will not be activated until ac is applied later.)
5. Thread the locking nut through the opening.
6. Position the small cover (removed earlier) back in position.
7. Reinstall the two Phillips-head screws removed earlier.

G.6-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CABLE CONNECTIONS G
8. Route the strain relief collar over the cables and attach it to the locking nut. The laser
umbilical cable connectors inside the power supply should remain secure when the
Power Supply module is moved.
9. Use the hex nut to secure the ground wire from the laser umbilical cable to one of the
screws securing the small cover to the rear cover.
10. Reinstall the upper rear cover to the Voltage-Specific Power Supply frame using the three
Phillips-head screws removed earlier.

Logic Cable
1. Locate the logic cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the male connector to the plug labeled LOGIC and tighten the
two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame (Figure G.6-1).
3. At the Power Supply module, connect the female connector to the plug labeled LOGIC
and tighten the two screws to secure it (Figure G.6-1).

Analog Cable
1. Locate the analog cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other
female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the female connector to the plug labeled ANALOG and tighten
the two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame (Figure G.6-1).
3. At the Power Supply module, connect the male connector to the plug labeled ANALOG
and tighten the two screws to secure it (Figure G.6-1).

Power Module Control Cable

1. Locate the power module control cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and
the other female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the female D-connector to the plug labeled POWER MODULE
CONTROL and alternately tighten the two thumbscrews until the connector is secured to
the Cytometer frame (Figure G.6-1).
3. At the Power Supply module, connect the male D-connector to the plug labeled POWER
MODULE CONTROL and alternately tighten the two thumbscrews until the connector is
secure to the frame (Figure G.6-1).

PN 4237029G G.6-3
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CABLE CONNECTIONS

Make Appropriate MCL Connections

If this is an XL Flow Cytometer without the MCL Option

1. Locate the MCL dummy plug.
2. At the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, attach the dummy plug to the connector labeled
MCL (Figure G.6-1).
3. Go to the Fiber Optic Interface Cables heading that follows.

If this is an XL Flow Cytometer with the MCL Option

1. Locate the MCL cable. One connector attached to this cable is male and the other female.
2. At the Cytometer, attach the female connector to the plug labeled MCL and tighten the
two screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame (Figure G.6-1).
3. At the Voltage-Specific Power Supply, attach the male connector to the to the plug
labeled MCL and tighten the two screws to secure it (Figure G.6-1).

Fiber Optic Interface Cables

1. Locate the orange fiber optic interface cable.
r This cable is actually two cables joined together so it has two terminal posts (with a
locking nut) at each end.
r One cable is labeled RX and the other is labeled TX.
r The terminal posts on one end of the cable will be inserted into jacks on the
Cytometer and the terminal posts on the other end of the cable will be inserted into
jacks on the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the tower computer.
2. Remove the red plastic caps protecting the four terminal posts. Place these caps with the
other parts used for shipping.
3. At the rear of the Cytometer (Figure G.6-1):
a. Unscrew and remove the black caps protecting the FIBER OPTIC REC and FIBER
OPTICS TRANS jacks. Place these caps with the other parts used for shipping.
b. Insert the terminal post labeled RX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC REC and tighten
the locking nut.
c. Insert the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC TRANS and
tighten the locking nut.
4. At the rear of the tower computer (Figure G.6-1):
a. Locate the edge of the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card in the bottom slot.
b. Unscrew and remove the black caps protecting the three jacks. Place these caps with
the other parts used for shipping.
c. Insert the terminal post labeled TX into the outer left jack labeled XMIT
(Figure G.6-3) and tighten the locking nut.

G.6-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CABLE CONNECTIONS G
Figure G.6-3 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II Card Edge Locations

XMIT

CYT
REC

12

7029132F

d. Insert the terminal post labeled RX into the inner (middle) jack labeled REC
(Figure G.6-3) and tighten the locking nut.

CYT12 Cable
1. Locate the orange fiber optic interface cable with a single terminal post (with a locking
nut) at each end.
2. Remove the red plastic cap protecting each terminal post. Place these caps with the other
parts used for shipping.
3. At the rear of the Power Supply:
a. Locate the CYT12 jack in the upper left corner.
b. Unscrew and remove the black cap protecting the CYT12 jack. Place the cap with
the other parts used for shipping.
c. Insert the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled CYT12 and tighten the
locking nut. Refer to Figure G.6-1 as needed.
4. At the rear of the tower computer (Figure G.6-1):
a. Locate edge of the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card inside the bottom slot.
b. Insert the terminal post labeled RX into the right jack labeled CYT 12 (Figure G.6-3)
and tighten the locking nut.

Power Cords
1. Verify all six Power Supply circuit breakers in the upper corner are switched to the ON
position (– position).
2. Locate the two ac power cords.
3. If the installation is being done in a country other than the United States, replace the
plug on both power cords with plugs that are appropriate for that site.
4. Connect the ac power line cords from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply to an
appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure G.6-1).

PN 4237029G G.6-5
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
CABLE CONNECTIONS

G.6-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
TUBING CONNECTIONS G
G.7 TUBING CONNECTIONS
Connect the Waste Container

Preparation
1. Locate the 4 L waste container and the bracket that holds the waste container on the
right side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
2. Attach the bracket to the right side of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply’s main cover
using the four screws inserted in the bracket.
3. Pour about 400 mL of high-quality, fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of
sodium hypochlorite - available chlorine) into the waste container to cover the bottom of
the container.
4. Place the waste container in the bracket attached to the cover of the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply.

Connect Tubings
1. Locate the bundle of shielded pneumatic/hydraulic tubings referred to as the waste level
sensor assembly (Figure G.7-1).

Figure G.7-1 Waste Level Sensor Assembly

For waste container

Connect to
Connect to
Power Supply
Cytometer rear panel
module
rear panel

7029099F

r The waste level sensor assembly consists of three groups of tubings:

t The float liquid level sensor and cap are for connection at the waste container.
t The group with four quick-connects and sensor cable is for connection at the
rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
t The other group with only four quick-connects is for connection at the rear of
the Cytometer.
r Quick-connects are color-coded. Color of the male quick-connect on each tubing
matches and the color of the female quick-connect on the instrument.
r Each tubing is identified by a tie-wrapped label.

PN 4237029G G.7-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
TUBING CONNECTIONS

2. Insert the float liquid level sensor into the waste container and screw on the cap. Refer to
Figures G.7-1 and G.7-2 as needed.

Figure G.7-2 Tubing Connections

Cytometer

TRANS

FLOW CELL REC.

WASTE PRESSURE VACUUM WASTE

WASTE
PRESSURE
VACUUM

Voltage-Specific
Power Supply
AUX POWER ON

SYSTEM
PRESSURE
ON/OFF

VACUUM WASTE LEVEL ON

WASTE WASTE
LASER POWER SYSTEM POWER
OFF

MAX 1800 WATTS MAX 1500 WATTS

WASTE VENT

WASTE VENT
WASTE LEVEL 7029106G

3. Connect tubings to the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Refer to Figures G.7-1
and G.7-2 as needed.
a. Connect the blue female quick-connect to the blue male quick-connect (labeled
PRESSURE on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply).
b. Connect the yellow female quick-connect to the yellow male quick-connect (labeled
VACUUM on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply).
c. Connect the orange female quick-connect to the orange male quick-connect
(labeled WASTE on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply).
d. Connect the off-white female quick-connect to the off-white male quick-connect
(labeled WASTE VENT on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply).
4. Insert the waste level sense cable connector into the connector labeled WASTE LEVEL on
the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Refer to Figures G.7-1 and G.7-2 as
needed.

G.7-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
TUBING CONNECTIONS G
5. Connect tubings to the rear of the Cytometer. Refer to Figures G.7-1 and G.7-2 as
needed.
a. Connect the blue female quick-connect to the blue male quick-connect (labeled
PRESSURE on the rear of the Cytometer).
b. Connect the yellow female quick-connect to the yellow male quick-connect (labeled
VACUUM on the rear of the Cytometer).

ATTENTION: Because there are two orange connectors in this tubing bundle, you must use the
tubing labels to ensure proper connection.
c. Connect the orange female quick-connect on the tubing labeled WASTE to the
orange male quick-connect labeled WASTE on the rear of the Cytometer.
d. Connect the orange female quick-connect on the tubing labeled FLCell Waste to the
orange male quick-connect labeled FLOWCELL WASTE on the rear of the Cytometer.

PN 4237029G G.7-3
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
TUBING CONNECTIONS

G.7-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION G
G.8 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Tools/Supplies Needed
B COULTER EPICS XL / XL-MCL SYSTEM II software, Version 3.0, PN 6706441

Instrument Startup

CAUTION Risk of damage to the instrument. The process of installing the SYSTEM II software activates the
Cytometer. The flow cytometer will be damaged if it is operated without removing all 16 red shipping clips
(14 in the lower pneumatic drawer and 2 in the upper pneumatic drawer) and the two plastic shipping insert
from the segmenting valve. Two red tags are attached to the manual sample station door to remind you that
these items must be removed before operating the instrument:
r NOTICE! REMOVE RED CLIPS FROM PNEUMATIC DRAWER BEFORE OPERATING UNIT
r NOTICE! REMOVE PAD SEPARATORS FROM SEGMENTING VALVE BEFORE OPERATING UNIT.

1. Connect the two ac power line cords from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply into an
appropriate wall outlet (separate dedicated lines with isolated grounds).
2. If you have not already done so, plug Workstation components into non-dedicated lines
- one for the tower computer, another for the monitor, and a third for the printer, if
present.
3. Switch the main circuit breaker (SYSTEM ON/OFF rocker switch at the rear of the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply) to ON, position l.
4. At the tower computer, press the power ON/OFF switch until the computer turns on.
The operating system automatically boots.
5. Turn on the monitor.
6. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS.

SYSTEM II Software Installation

1. At the MS-DOS prompt (C:\>), type XL_INST then press Û to configure the
computer for an XL flow cytometer.
2. Reboot the computer system by simultaneously pressing the Ý, Þ, and á keys.
3. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS which should select SYSTEM II software as the operating system.
4. Verify the computer boots to the XL SYSTEM II software.
5. Approximately 10 seconds after the XL logo appears on the monitor, the following
messages are displayed:
a. Resetting cytometer
b. Loading Cyto. Hardware
Note: Once the software is loaded, it turns on the Cytometer. This process should
take less than 30 seconds.

PN 4237029G G.8-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

6. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green.

Note: If the Cytometer turns on and then turns off immediately, check the alarm. (At the
Menu bar, select Applications tt Utilities. At the Utilities Configuration screen, inside the
START UP box, make sure the Cytometer is set up for current operation.)
7. At the Acquisition Run screen, verify the message STARTUP IN PROCESS appears (lower
right display area).
Note: During system startup, a sequence of messages (STARTUP IN PROCESS →
SYSTEM VERIFICATION → RUN INITIALIZATION → PLEASE WAIT. . PROCESSING →
INSERT SAMPLE TUBE appear as the instrument goes through various checks. INSERT
SAMPLE TUBE only appears if a startup protocol or panel is either selected or previously
specified on the Utilities Configuration screen. Error messages appear in red below this
message line.
8. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
Note: The Cytometer can take up to 30 minutes to warm up before the READY indicator
turns green.

G.8-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
OPERATIONAL CHECKS G
G.9 OPERATIONAL CHECKS
Tools/Supplies Needed
B Three, empty, 12 x 75 mm test tube, PN 2523749
Note: If this is an XL flow cytometer, only one tube is needed.
B Flow-Check fluorospheres, PN 6605359

Preliminary Checks
1. Verify all cooling fans are operating. Refer to Heading A.5 for component locations in the
Cytometer and refer to Heading A.6 for component locations in the Voltage-Specific
Power Supply, as needed.
Exterior Fan Locations
r Two on the Cytometer (lower rear panel)
r Two on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (lower left side)
r One on the Workstation computer (back)
Interior Fan Locations
r Two in the laser blower assembly (mounted on the Cytometer frame, left side).
2. At the Voltage-Specific Power Supply:
a. Verify the system pressure gauge (SYS PRESS) reads 30 psi. Adjust the regulator if
necessary.
b. Verify the system vacuum gauge (SYS VAC) registers a minimum of 17 in. Hg.
3. At the Cytometer:
a. Verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
Note: The Cytometer may take up to 30 minutes to warm up before the READY
indicator turns green.
b. Verify vacuum is present at the manual sample station head.

Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter

1. Make sure the reagent drawer is closed.
2. At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.

PN 4237029G G.9-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
OPERATIONAL CHECKS

3. Press and hold the purge (vent) button (Figure G.9-1) until the bubbles in the vent
tubing are gone (Figure G.9-2).

Figure G.9-1 Purge (Vent) Button Location

Coulter
Epics XL MCL

Purge (vent)
7029117G button

Figure G.9-2 Purging Bubbles from the Sheath Filter

Bubbles in Air here

vent tubing? is okay.

CL
X LM
lter pics
Cou E

7029274G

4. Press the PRIME button three more times.

Power Supply Verification

Go to Heading 4.21, POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT to
verify all power supply voltages (including MCL, if applicable) and make needed
adjustments.

Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification

Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the offset of
each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.

G.9-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
OPERATIONAL CHECKS G
Functional Verification
1. Create a CHANNEL_500 protocol. For parameter and setting information, refer to
Table A.3-1 as needed.
2. Fill a test tube with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
3. Insert the test tube into the sample station and press Ñ.
4. At the Cytometer, wait until the indicator turns green and the bar graphs are illuminated.
5. Adjust all parameter HVs to place the acquisition population in channel 500.
Note: After approximately 10 seconds, confirm acquisition signals are present. If there
are no signals, check tubing for clogs or pinches and correct as needed. If no obstruction
is present, go to Heading 4.6 and perform an optical alignment as written.
6. After adjusting all parameter HVs, restart the acquisition.
7. After approximately 10 seconds, verify the events per second average between 135 events
per second (minimum rate) and 200 events per second (maximum rate).
r If the average is between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go to
step 8 to continue.
r If the average is not between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go
to Heading 4.7, SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION and complete the
procedure as written.
8. At the Workstation, verify the events per second as follows:
a. With the Flow Rate set to LOW:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Record the events per second.
b. Set the Flow Rate to MEDIUM then:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres again.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Verify the events per second is approximately three times higher than it was at
the Low flow rate setting.
c. Set the Flow Rate to HIGH then:
1) Run Flow-Check fluorospheres again.
2) After approximately 10 seconds, stop the run.
3) Verify the events per second is approximately six times higher than it was at the
Low flow rate setting.
9. How to proceed:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and
complete the procedure as written to obtain the best CVs.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 10 to verify the MCL is functioning
properly.

PN 4237029G G.9-3
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
OPERATIONAL CHECKS

10. Verify MCL operation as follows:

a. Fill two test tubes with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
b. Insert the test tubes in the MCL carousel.
c. At the Cytometer, press the AUTO button.
d. Confirm signals are present to ensure tubing is not clogged or pinched. If such an
obstruction is present, correct as needed.
11. Go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and complete the procedure as written to
obtain the best CVs.

Reinstall Covers and Panels

ATTENTION: Carefully reinstall these covers while the power is turned on.

1. If you have not already done so, lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the
center cavity of the Cytometer. Refer to Procedure 16 under Heading 4.25, COVER
REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION if you need detailed instructions.
2. At the upper pneumatic drawer (upper right side of the Cytometer), reinstall the EMC
shield over the pneumatic components then reinstall the upper pneumatic drawer back
inside the Cytometer frame. Refer to Procedure 18 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
3. Reinstall the black filter shield back on the Cytometer. Refer to Procedure 15 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
4. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly.
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back in place.
b. Loosely install the two pan-head, Phillips screws on the left.
Note: If this is an XL flow cytometer without the MCL option, these are flat-head,
Phillips screws.
c. Loosely install the two flat-head, Phillips screws on the right.
d. Tighten all four screws to secure the cover assembly to the Cytometer frame.
5. Close the reagent drawer.
6. Remove the tool bracing the upper cover open and gently lower the cover.
7. Reinstall the center front cover (covering the filters). Refer to Procedure 3 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
8. Reinstall the right-side cover. Refer to Procedure 2 under Heading 4.25 if you need
detailed instructions.
9. Reinstall the left-side cover (using applicable instructions).
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, position the left-side cover over the left side of the
Cytometer frame and push the cover into place. Refer to Procedure 14 under
Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 10.

G.9-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
OPERATIONAL CHECKS G
10. Reinstall the left-side cover before latching the MCL option back on the Cytometer
frame. Refer to Procedure 13 under Heading 4.25 if you need detailed instructions.
a. Position the side cover over the left side of the Cytometer and manually push the
side-cover down and in place.
b. Push the button to unlock the MCL covers then lift the top cover to fully open it.
c. Remove the MCL carousel from the indexing base, if present.
d. Position the MCL probe housing back on the Cytometer and reinstall the two
Phillips-head screws to secure it to the Cytometer frame.
e. Gently push the lower base back on the Cytometer until it latches into place.
f. Lower the top cover then open and close the cover several times to ensure proper
operation.
g. Place the MCL carousel back on the indexing base and close the top cover.
11. Carefully position the top cover back on the Cytometer. Do not reinstall the four
Phillips-head screws (and washers) that secure the top cover to the Cytometer frame.
The top cover must be removed later
Note: If the interlock is triggered, you must restart the system.
12. If you have not already done so, carefully position the three-sided cover back on the
Voltage-Specific Power Supply. Do not reinstall the four Phillips-head screws (and
washers) that secure the cover to the Power Supply module frame. The three-sided cover
must be removed later.
Note: If the interlock is triggered, you must restart the system.

Wrap Up
1. If you have not already done so, remove the two red tags attached to the manual sample
station door. Place the tags in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
2. If you have not already done so, carefully peel the protective films from the:
r Voltage-Specific Power Supply front door,
r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.
3. Ask the customer to store the box containing the various shipping parts removed from
the instrument.

System Verification
Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP). Begin at the Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis and Carryover Check heading and
complete the procedure as written.

PN 4237029G G.9-5
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
OPERATIONAL CHECKS

G.9-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) G
G.10 INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
ATTENTION: This service manual contains two instrument installation procedures, use this
summary only if you are installing an XL or XL-MCL with a Voltage-Specific Power Supply.

WARNING Risk of personal injury. Do not use this summary unless you are thoroughly familiar with the
installation procedure as detailed under headings G.1, G.2, G.3, G.4, G.5, G.6, G.7, G.8, and G.9.

Tools/Supplies Needed
B Static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit), PN 5415097
B IsoFlow™ sheath fluid, PN 8547008
B Flow-Check™ fluorospheres, PN 6605359
B COULTER® CYTO-TROL™ control cells, PN 6604248
B COULTER CLENZ® cleaning agent, PN 8546929
B Three (only one if XL flow cytometer), empty, 12 x 75 mm test tube, PN 2523749
B COULTER EPICS XL / XL-MCL SYSTEM II software, Version 3.0, PN 6706441
B Box suitable for storing shipping parts removed during installation

Cytometer

Unpacking
1. Cut and remove the strapping surrounding the shipping carton. Discard the straps.
2. Remove the cardboard carton, foam blocks, and plastic covering.
3. Record the Cytometer serial number on the WW: Installation Database and report any
loose or damaged parts/assemblies.
4. Request assistance to place the Cytometer on the bench top or table. Do not lift the
instrument from its sides, especially if the MCL option is attached.
5. Carefully remove the protective film from the:
r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.

Installation
ATTENTION: Since it may be necessary to access an area of the Cytometer several times, do not
reinstall a cover or panel until you are specifically instructed to do so.
1. Remove the Cytometer top cover and set it aside.
2. Remove three small shipping screws at the top of each side cover (Figure G.3-1) and
place screws in the box designated for storing shipping parts.
3. Remove the right-side cover.

PN 4237029G G.10-1
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

4. To remove the manual sample station assembly, use instrument specific instructions:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to step 5.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 10.
5. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.
6. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside.
7. Pull open the reagent drawer.
8. Remove the four flat-head Phillips screws securing the manual sample station to the
Cytometer frame. When removed, lay the sample station cover assembly on top of the
reagent containers.
9. Go to step 15 to continue this installation.
10. Unlatch, but do not remove, the MCL covers from the Cytometer. Don’t forget to remove
the cover for the MCL probe housing (Figures G.3-2 and G.3-3). Set the MCL probe
housing cover aside.
11. Remove the center front cover (filter cover) and set it aside (Figure G.3-4).
12. Pull open the reagent drawer.
13. Remove the manual sample station cover assembly:
a. Carefully move the unlatched MCL cover away from the Cytometer frame.
b. Locate and remove the two pan-head screws that secure the manual sample station
to the left side of the Cytometer frame (Figure G.3-5).
c. Remove the two flat-head Phillips screws securing the right side of the manual
sample station to the front of the Cytometer frame (Figure G.3-5).
d. When removed, lay the manual sample station cover assembly on top of the reagent
containers.
14. Manually pull the left-side cover up and off the Cytometer frame. Set the cover aside.
15. Lift the upper cover and place a long screwdriver (with a plastic handle) in the channel
of the upper frame to it open (Figure G.3-6).
16. Remove the four screws (two on each side) securing the filter shield to the Cytometer
frame (Figure G.3-7). Set the filter shield aside.
17. Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw, spacer, and hex nut) located at the
front right corner of the optical bench (Figure G.3-8) and place the hardware in the
storage box.
18. Remove the optical bench shipping tie-down (screw, spacer, and hex nut) located in the
left rear corner behind the laser head (Figure G.3-11) and place the hardware in the
storage box.
a. If this is an XL with the MCL option, remove the MCL CPU card; if this is not an XL
with the MCL option, go to step b.
1) Set up your static-dissipative field kit (ESD kit).
2) Remove the MCL CPU card to gain access to the area (Figures G.3-9 and
G.3-10) then set the card aside on the static-dissipative work mat.

G.10-2 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) G
b. Use a 3/8-inch wrench and a long Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the shipping
tie-down (screw and hex nut) (Figure G.3-12).
1) With a piece of electrical tape over the opening of the 3/8-inch wrench, route
the 3/8-inch wrench through the opening on the left side of the Cytometer and
position the wrench to hold the hex nut in place (Figure G.3-12).
2) Use a long Phillips-head screwdriver (or a Phillips-head screwdriver with an
extension) to remove the shipping screw (Figure G.3-12). The electrical tape
should capture the hex nut inside the wrench.
3) Use large hemostats to carefully remove the spacer (Figure G.3-12).
4) Retrieve the hex nut or spacer if either falls to the Cytometer floor.
c. Place the hardware (screw, hex nut, and spacer) in the storage box.
19. At the lower pneumatics drawer:
a. Use a hemostat to remove all 14 red shipping clips from the pinch valves. Count the
removed shipping clips to confirm that all 14 are removed then place the red
shipping clips in the storage box.
b. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
20. Reinstall the MCL CPU card, if removed earlier.
21. At the Data Acquisition card cage:
a. Remove the two shipping screws, one from each side of the card cage. Place these
screws in the storage box.
b. Lock the Data Acquisition card cage in its vertical position.
c. Remove the shipping brace (Figure G.3-13).
d. Inspect for any loose cards or cables. Correct as needed.
e. Reinstall the shipping brace (Figure G.3-13).
f. Disassemble the static-dissipative field kit.
g. Lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the center cavity of the Cytometer.
22. At the segmenting valve (Figure G.3-14):
a. Remove the knob and set it aside.
b. Gently separate the white, ceramic segmenting pads.
c. Remove the two plastic shipping inserts from between the segmenting pads.
d. Carefully remove the segmenting pads from the shaft:
1) At the front segmenting pad, unscrew the HPLC locking nut from the front
segmenting pad. (Don’t lose the ferrule at the end of the PEEK tubing.)
Disconnect the air cylinder from the ball stud and slide the front segmenting
pad off the shaft.
2) Disconnect the air cylinder from the middle segmenting pad and carefully slide
the pad off the shaft.
3) Disconnect the air cylinder from the rear segmenting pad and carefully slide
the pad off the shaft.
e. Rinse each segmenting pad with distilled water then reinstall the pad on the shaft.
f. Reconnect the PEEK-tubing ferrule to the front segmenting valve.

PN 4237029G G.10-3
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

ATTENTION: Applying a light coat of Lubriplate grease to the air cylinder clamp before
attaching it to the ball stud on the segmenting pad helps prevent corrosion.
g. Reattach each air cylinder clamp back on its respective ball stud.
h. Reinstall the knob in the shaft then turn the knob clockwise until it is snug. Do not
overtighten the knob.
i. Wipe the outside of the segmenting valve with a lint-free tissue.
j. Ensure the work area is wiped dry.
23. At the upper pneumatic drawer:
a. Remove the EMC shield and set it aside.
b. Remove the two red shipping clips and place the shipping clips in the storage box.
c. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
24. Fill the sheath container just to the bottom of its neck. Do not overfill this container!
25. Fill the cleaning agent container just to the crease below the neck of the container. Do
not overfill this container!
26. Carefully wipe up any spills.
27. Make sure the sheath filter vent port is above the connector and that it is pointing up and
towards you (Figure G.3-15). Make sure the tubing is not kinked or twisted.
28. Push the reagent drawer back inside the Cytometer.

Voltage-Specific Power Supply

Unpacking
1. Cut and remove the strapping surrounding the shipping carton. Discard the straps.
2. Lift the cardboard carton off the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
3. Remove the plastic covering.
4. Request assistance to lift the Voltage-Specific Power Supply off the shipping pallet.
5. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.
6. Carefully peel the protective film from the front door.

Installation
1. Remove the three-sided cover and set it aside.
2. Remove the three foam blocks used to secure the compressor assembly during shipping
(Figure G.4-1) and place them in the storage box.
3. Report any loose or damaged parts/assemblies on the WW: Installation Database.

G.10-4 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) G
Workstation

Unpacking
1. Unpack the FlowCentre II tower computer.
2. Consult with the customer to determine where they want to place the computer. If they
have no preference, position the computer on the bench or table (Figure G.5-1).
3. Unpack the monitor and place it on the bench or table (Figure G.5-1). If the system has
two monitors, find out where the customer wants the second monitor placed. If the
monitors are different, also find out which monitor will be the primary monitor.
4. Unpack the keyboard and mouse.
5. Place the keyboard in front of the monitor then place the mouse beside it (Figure G.5-1).

Installation
1. Connect the mouse cable to the mouse port on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure G.5-2).
2. Connect the keyboard cable to the keyboard port on the rear of the computer tower
(Figure G.5-2).
ATTENTION: The dual-head video display adapter is already installed and enabled. Do not
enable the acceleration option DEVICE BITMAPS CACHING under the display properties of
Windows™ 98.
3. Install the 17-inch NEC flat panel thin film transistor (TFT) monitor.
a. Make sure the cable and the power cord pins are straight and seated properly.
b. Locate the cable with the terminal post (may be color-coded green).
c. Insert the terminal post in the green jack on the rear of the tower computer
(Figure G.5-3).
d. Attach the monitor plug to the right jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of
the tower computer - Figure G.5-3).
e. Connect the ac power cord to an appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure G.5-3).
4. If a second monitor is being installed:
a. Follow the connection instructions supplied with the monitor.
b. Attach the monitor plug to the left jack on the Dual Monitor Video card (rear of the
tower computer - Figure G.5-3).
c. Connect the ac power cord to an appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure G.5-3).
5. At the rear of the tower computer:
a. Plug the female end of the power cord into the socket then connect the other end to
an appropriate ac wall outlet.
b. Connect the Printer to the PRINTER port and connect it to an appropriate ac wall
outlet. For additional information, refer to the documentation supplied with the
Printer.

PN 4237029G G.10-5
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

Cable Connections
1. Install the laser umbilical cable (Figure G.6-1).
a. At the rear of the Voltage-Power Supply:
1) Remove the upper rear cover and set it aside.
2) Remove the small cover in the center (left of circuit breaker labeled MCL 24
VOLTS) and set it aside.
b. Cut the tie-wrap securing the laser umbilical cable to the rear of the Cytometer.
c. Connect the two large connectors on the end of the laser umbilical cable to the
Argon laser power supply inside the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Figure G.6-2).
d. If removed earlier, reconnect the ac power plug and reinstall the laser power supply
key then rotate the key clockwise to the — position.
e. Thread the locking nut through the opening.
f. Reinstall the small cover (removed earlier).
g. Route the strain relief collar over the cables and attach it to the locking nut.
h. Use the hex nut to secure the ground wire from the laser umbilical cable to one of
the screws securing the small cover to the rear cover.
i. Reinstall the upper rear cover on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply frame.
2. Install the logic cable (Figure G.6-1).
3. Install the analog cable (Figure G.6-1).
4. Install the power module control cable (Figure G.6-1).
5. As applicable, do one of the following:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, install the MCL dummy plug on the MCL connector
on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, install the MCL cable (Figure G.6-1).
6. Install the fiber optic interface cable (two orange cables joined together).
a. Remove the red plastic caps and place them with the other parts used for shipping.
b. At the rear of the Cytometer (Figure G.6-1):
1) Remove the black caps protecting the FIBER OPTIC REC and FIBER OPTICS
TRANS jacks and place them with the other parts used for shipping.
2) Install the terminal post labeled RX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC REC.
3) Install the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled FIBER OPTIC TRANS.
c. At the rear of the tower computer (Figure G.6-3):
1) Unscrew and remove the black caps protecting the three jacks on the Opto
Transprocessor EXMEM II card (in the bottom slot) and place these caps with
the other parts used for shipping.
2) Install the terminal post labeled TX into the outer left jack labeled XMIT
(Figure G.6-3).
3) Install the terminal post labeled RX into the inner (middle) jack labeled REC
(Figure G.6-3).

G.10-6 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) G
7. Install the CYT12 cable (single orange cable, not joined).
a. Remove the red plastic caps and place them with the other parts used for shipping.
b. At the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply:
1) Remove the black cap protecting the CYT12 jack and place it with the other
parts used for shipping.
2) Install the terminal post labeled TX into the jack labeled CYT12 (Figure G.6-1).
c. At the Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card (bottom slot in the tower computer),
install the terminal post labeled RX into the right jack labeled CYT 12 (Figure G.6-3).
8. Verify all six Power Supply circuit breakers in the upper corner are switched to the ON
position (– position).
9. If the installation is being done in a country other than the United States, replace the
plug on both ac power cords with plugs that are appropriate for that site.
10. Connect the ac power line cords from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply to an
appropriate ac wall outlet (Figure G.6-1).

Tubing Connections
1. Attach the bracket for the waste container to the right side of the Voltage-Specific Power
Supply’s three-sided cover.
2. Pour about 400 mL of high-quality, fragrance-free, gel-free bleach (5 to 6% solution of
sodium hypochlorite - available chlorine) into the waste container.
3. Place the waste container in the bracket.
4. Install the float liquid level sensor in the waste container (Figures G.7-1 and G.7-2).
5. Connect the pneumatic tubings at the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply
(Figures G.7-1 and G.7-2).
a. Connect the blue quick-connects (labeled PRESSURE).
b. Connect the yellow quick-connects (labeled VACUUM).
c. Connect the orange quick-connects (labeled WASTE).
d. Connect the off-white quick-connects (labeled WASTE VENT).
6. Install the waste level sense cable connector into the connector labeled WASTE LEVEL on
the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (Figure G.7-2).
7. Connect tubings to the rear of the Cytometer (Figures G.7-1 and G.7-2).
a. Connect the blue quick-connects (labeled PRESSURE).
b. Connect the yellow quick-connects (labeled VACUUM).
ATTENTION: Because there are two orange connectors in this tubing bundle, you must use
the tubing labels to ensure proper connection.
c. Connect the orange quick-connects (labeled WASTE).
d. Connect the orange quick-connects (labeled FLCell Waste).

PN 4237029G G.10-7
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

Install SYSTEM II Software

1. Connect the two ac power line cords from the Voltage-Specific Power Supply into an
appropriate wall outlet (separate dedicated lines with isolated grounds).
2. If you have not already done so, plug Workstation components (tower computer,
monitor, and printer, if present) into non-dedicated lines.
3. Switch the main circuit breaker to ON, position l.
4. Turn on the tower computer and monitor.
5. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS.
6. At the MS-DOS prompt (C:\>), type XL_INST then press Û to configure the
computer for an XL flow cytometer.
7. Reboot the computer system by simultaneously pressing the Ý, Þ, and á keys.
8. When the Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu appears, select 8. Previous version of
MS-DOS which should select SYSTEM II software as the operating system.
9. Verify the computer boots to the XL SYSTEM II software.
10. Approximately 10 seconds after the XL logo appears on the monitor, the following
messages are displayed:
a. Resetting cytometer
b. Loading Cyto. Hardware
11. At the Cytometer, verify the LASER ON indicator lights green. (If the Cytometer turns
on and then turns off immediately, check the alarm.)
12. At the Acquisition Run screen, verify the STARTUP IN PROCESS → SYSTEM
VERIFICATION → RUN INITIALIZATION → PLEASE WAIT. . PROCESSING → INSERT
SAMPLE TUBE messages appear. (INSERT SAMPLE TUBE only appears if a startup
protocol or panel is either selected or previously specified on the Utilities Configuration
screen.)
13. At the Cytometer, verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green within
30 minutes.

Operational Checks
1. Verify all cooling fans are operating.
Exterior Fan Locations
r Two on the Cytometer (lower rear panel)
r Two on the rear of the Voltage-Specific Power Supply (lower left side)
r One on the Workstation computer (back)
Interior Fan Locations
r Two in the laser blower assembly (mounted on the Cytometer frame, left side).
2. At the Voltage-Specific Power Supply:
a. Verify the system pressure gauge (SYS PRESS) reads 30 psi.
b. Verify the system vacuum gauge (SYS VAC) registers a minimum of 17 in. Hg.

G.10-8 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) G
3. At the Cytometer:
a. Verify the CYTOMETER READY indicator lights green.
b. Verify vacuum is present at the manual sample station head.

Purge Air Bubbles from the Sheath Filter

1. Make sure the reagent drawer is closed.
2. At the Cytometer control panel, press the PRIME button.
3. Press and hold the purge (vent) button until the bubbles in the vent tubing are gone
(Figures G.9-1 and G.9-2).
4. Press the PRIME button three more times.

Power Supply Verification

Go to Heading 4.21, POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE VERIFICATION AND ADJUSTMENT to
verify all power supply voltages (including MCL, if applicable) and make needed
adjustments.

Trans Data Acquisition Card Offset Verification

Go to Heading 4.14, TRANS DATA ACQUISITION CARD REPLACEMENT AND/OR
CALIBRATION and complete the procedure as written. This procedure verifies the offset of
each Amp/Signal Conditioner card.

Functional Verification
1. Create a CHANNEL_500 protocol. Refer to Table A.3-1 as needed.
2. Fill a test tube with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
3. Insert the test tube into the sample station and press Ñ.
4. At the Cytometer, wait until the indicator turns green and the bar graphs are illuminated.
5. Adjust all parameter HVs to place the acquisition population in channel 500.
Note: After approximately 10 seconds, confirm acquisition signals are present. If there
are no signals, check tubing for clogs or pinches and correct as needed. If no obstruction
is present, go to Heading 4.6 and perform an optical alignment as written.
6. After adjusting all parameter HVs, restart the acquisition.
7. After approximately 10 seconds, verify the events per second average between 135 events
per second (minimum rate) and 200 events per second (maximum rate).
r If the average is between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go to
step 8 to continue.
r If the average is not between 135 events per second and 200 events per second, go
to Heading 4.7, SAMPLE AND SHEATH SENSOR CALIBRATION and complete the
procedure as written.

PN 4237029G G.10-9
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

8. At the Workstation, verify the events per second as follows:

a. With the Flow Rate set to LOW, run Flow-Check fluorospheres. After approximately
10 seconds, stop the run. Record the events per second.
b. Set the Flow Rate to MEDIUM and run Flow-Check fluorospheres again. After
approximately 10 seconds, stop the run. Verify the events per second is
approximately three times higher than it was at the Low flow rate setting.
c. Set the Flow Rate to HIGH and run Flow-Check fluorospheres again. After
approximately 10 seconds, stop the run. Verify the events per second is
approximately six times higher than it was at the Low flow rate setting.
9. How to proceed:
r If this is an XL flow cytometer, go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and
complete the procedure as written to obtain the best CVs.
r If this is an XL-MCL flow cytometer, go to step 10 to verify the MCL is functioning
properly.
10. Verify MCL operation as follows:
a. Fill two test tubes with approximately 1 mL fluorospheres.
b. Insert the test tubes in the MCL carousel.
c. At the Cytometer, press the AUTO button.
d. Confirm signals are present to ensure tubing is not clogged or pinched. If such an
obstruction is present, correct as needed.
11. Go to Heading 4.6, OPTICAL ALIGNMENT and complete the procedure as written to
obtain the best CVs.

Wrap Up
ATTENTION: Carefully reinstall these covers while the power is turned on. If the interlock is
triggered, you must restart the system.
1. If you have not already done so, lower the Data Acquisition card cage back into the
center cavity of the Cytometer.
2. Reinstall the black filter shield back on the Cytometer.
3. Reinstall the manual sample station cover assembly.
a. Position the manual sample station cover assembly back in place.
b. Loosely install the two pan-head, Phillips screws on the left.
Note: If this is an XL flow cytometer without the MCL option, these are flat-head,
Phillips screws.
c. Loosely install the two flat-head, Phillips screws on the right.
d. Tighten all four screws to secure the cover assembly to the Cytometer frame.
4. Close the reagent drawer.
5. Reinstall all covers (including Voltage-Specific Power Supply covers) removed during the
installation. If the interlock is triggered, you must restart the system.
6. If you have not already done so, remove the two red tags attached to the manual sample
station door. Place the tags in the box designated for storing shipping parts.

G.10-10 PN 4237029G
 INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply) G
7. If you have not already done so, carefully peel the protective films from the:
r Voltage-Specific Power Supply front door,
r Upper display on the front of the Cytometer,
r Manual sample station door, and
r Top of the MCL cover, if applicable.
8. Ask the customer to store the box containing the various shipping parts removed from
the instrument.
9. Perform an SVP as directed under Heading 5.1, SYSTEM VERIFICATION PROCEDURE
(SVP). Begin at the Acquisition Verification, CV Analysis and Carryover Check heading
and complete the procedure as written.

PN 4237029G G.10-11
INSTALLATION (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)
INSTALLATION SUMMARY (XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply)

G.10-12 PN 4237029G
 ABBREVIATIONS

The following list is a composite of the abbreviations, acronyms and reference designators used in this
manual. When the same abbreviation (or reference designator) is used for more than one word (or type of
component), all meanings relevant to this manual are included.

SYMBOLS C
> - greater than C - centigrade
CAR - carousel sensor
< - less than
CD - collision detection
≥ - greater than or equal to
CD-ROM - compact disc - read only memory
% - percent CDRH - National Center for Devices and
+ - plus Radiological Health
- - minus CHL - channel
± - plus or minus CLKS - clocks
°C - degrees Celsius cm - centimeter
°F - degrees Fahrenheit CMOS - complimentary metal oxide
® - registered trademark semiconductor
™ - trademark COM - communication
µ - micron CPU - central processing unit
µL - micro liter CR - carriage return
µs- microsecond CRBC - chicken red blood cells
CSMA - carrier sense multiple access
A CTRL - control
A - ampere CV - check valve; coefficient of variation
ac - alternating current CYT - cytometer connector
ADC - analog-to-digital conversion Cyto - cytometer
AMI - American Megatrends, Inc.
Amp - amplifier D
ANSI - American National Standards Institute DACs - digital-to-analog converters
ASA - American Standards Association dba - decibels a-weighted
ASCII - American Standard Code for Information DBUS - data bus
Interchange dc - direct current
AUI - thick coaxial cable DCN - document control number
AUX - auxiliary DEC - Digital Equipment Corporation
DET - detector
B DIN - Deutsche International Norm (German
baud - bits per second specification)
BIOS - basic input/output system DIP switch - dual in-line package switch
BNC connector - bayonet Neil-Concelman DISTR. - distributor
connector DMA - direct memory address
DNA - deoxyribonucleic acid

PN 4237029G ABBREVIATIONS-1
ABBREVIATIONS

DOS - disk operating system HV - high voltage

DPI - dots per inch Hz - hertz
DRAM - direct random access memory
DVM - digital volt meter I
i.d. - internal diameter
E I/O - input/output
E - receptacle connector ID - identification
ECC - electronic cycle check IDE - integrated drive electronics
EMI - electromagnetic interference IEEE - Institute of Electrical Engineers
EEPROM - electronically erasable programmable in. - inches
read-only memory in. Hg - inches/mercury
EPROM - electronically programmable read-only INTF - interface
memory
IRQ - interrupt request
Err - error
ISA - industry standard architecture
ESD - electrostatic discharge
ISO - IsoFlow
ETL - Electrical Testing Labs
EXMEM - extended memory
J
J - receptacle connector
F
F - fahrenheit
K
FF - fitting K - constant; thousand
FIFO - first in, first out KYBD - keyboard
FL - fluorescent light; fluorescent light sensor;
fluorescent light signal
L
FRU - field replacable unit
lb/in. - pounds per inch
FS - forward scatter; forward scatter sensors;
LAN - local area network
forward scatter signals
LBA - large block access
ft - feet
LCD - liquid crystal display
LED - light emitting diode; Artisoft line editor
G
gal. - gallon LIS - laboratory information systems
G.F.C.I. - ground fault circuit interrupt LPT - parallel communications port
GND - ground LPTINT - parallel communications port interrupt
LS - light scatter
H LV - sensor; solenoid
HM - home sensor
Hg - mercury M
HISTO - histogram M - Mega
HP - Hewlett Packard; half peak MB - megabyte
HP CV - half peak coefficient of variation MBPS - megabytes per second

ABBREVIATIONS-2 PN 4237029G
 ABBREVIATIONS

MCL - multi-tube carousel loader PPM - pages per minute

MHz - mega hertz PROM - programmable read-only memory
MIMD - multiple instruction multiple data psi - pounds per square inch
mL - milliLiter
mm - millimeter R
MS-DOS - Microsoft-disk operating system R - potentiometer; resistor
mV - milliVolts RAM - random access memory
mW - milliwatts RAS - remote access services
RB - reflectivity of ink
N REM - remark or comment
na - not applicable RG - pressure regulator
ND - neural density filter ROM - read only memory
NDIS - Network Driver Interface Specification RW - reflectivity of media
NE - narrow elements
NEMA - National ELectronics Manufacturing S
Association S - switch
NIC - Network Interface card SCSI - small computer system interface
nm - nanometer SER - serial
NOS - network operating system SIMMs - single inline memory module
ns - nanosecond SQL - structured query language
Num - number SS - side scatter; side scatter sensor; side scatter
signal
O SVP - system verification procedure
OEM - original equipment manufacturer SW - software; switch
Opto - optical
T
P TCP/IP - telecommunications protocol/Internet
P - receptacle connector; test point protocol
PC - personal computer TEMP - temperature
PCB - printed circuit board TB - tube-position sensor
PCMCIA - Personal Computer Memory Card TP - test point
International Association T.P. - twisted pair cable
PCS - print contrast signal Trans and Rec - transmit and receive
PIO - programmed input/output
PMI - preventative maintenance inspection U
PMT - photo-multiplier tube U - integrated circuit package
PN - part number UL - Underwriter’s Laboratory
PNP - plug and play UPC - universal product code
pot - potentiometer USB - universal serial bus

PN 4237029G ABBREVIATIONS-3
ABBREVIATIONS

V
V - volts
Vac - volts alternating current
Vdc - volts direct current
VDI - video display interface
VGA - video graphics array

W
WAN - wide area network
WE - wide elements

X
X - receptacle connector
XMITTER - transmitter

ABBREVIATIONS-4 PN 4237029G
 GLOSSARY

This glossary is a collection of specialized terms, with their meanings. If a term has more than
one meaning, all meanings relevant to this manual are included.

µL - Microliter, a unit of volumetric measurement equal to 10-6 liter.

µm - Micron or micrometer, a unit of linear measurement equal to 10-6 meter.

absorbance filter - A glass filter with a dye embedded in the glass. The dye converts the
energy of certain wavelengths to heat and, under higher intensity, fluorescence.

acridine orange - A dye that binds to DNA and fluoresces green, or RNA and fluoresces
orange. AO, the acronym for acridine orange, may be used interchangeably.

ADC - Advanced Digital Compensation is a feature of EXPO32™ ADC software, a software

option available for XL and XL-MCL flow cytometer systems. This ADC feature allows the
operator to set optimal voltages for the given application, monitor the voltages with Flow-Set
fluorospheres, and set appropriate color compensation based on those voltages. The EXPO32
ADC system holds these cytosettings (2 color, 3 color or 4 color) in an ADC Settings file that
can easily update other sample protocols when prompted.

ADC or A/D - The analog to digital conversion of a voltage level (0 to 10 volts) to a

representative channel height (on the XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer from 0 to 1024). Also
referred to as A to D.

allophycocyanin - An orange exciting, red fluorescing dye binding to protein. APC, the
acronym for allophycocyanin, may be used interchangeably.

ambient temperature - Temperature in the surrounding environment.

amorphous region - An irregular plot encircling a portion of a two parameter histogram used
to identify a population for gating or analysis.

analog-to-digital - The conversion of a voltage level (0 to 10 volts) to a representative channel

height. Also referred to as A to D, A/D, or ADC.

antibody - A molecule produced by a B lymphocyte which binds very specifically to a binding

site on an antigen that’s on the surface of a cell.

antigen - A cell or part of living tissue foreign to the body such as a cell, virus, or bacteria.

AO - Acridine orange, a dye that binds to DNA and fluoresces green, or RNA and fluoresces
orange.

APC - Allophycocyanin, an orange exciting, red fluorescing dye binding to protein.

aspheric lens - A lens whose shape departs slightly from a spherical form and is free from
defects which distort the image of an object seen through the lens. It is generally used to
collimate diverging light or focus collimated light. An example used is as a fluorescence
pickup lens.

assay values - Values for a control established by extensive repeat testing of that control.

A to D - The analog-to-digital conversion of a voltage level (0 to 10 volts) to a representative

channel height. Also referred to as A/D or ADC.

PN 4237029G GLOSSARY-1
GLOSSARY

attenuation - A variable gain adjustment used typically with photocells.

autoexec.bat - Tells the computer how to start up and typically is used to execute the most
commonly used program.

r Echo on displays the command currently executed.

r Verify on checks to see if data has been correctly written to disk and returns error
message if not.
r Set path tells the computer where to search for command instructions.
r Prompt $p$g tells the system to display default drive followed by a > as a prompt.
r Commands load a particular program.
Aux signal - Auxiliary acquisition pathway that allows either control of simultaneous Linear
and Log signals or acquisition of a Peak signal.

background count - Measure of the amount of electrical or particle interference.

band block filter - An optical filter that passes all colors except a narrow range of colors.

band pass filter - An optical filter that passes a narrow group of wavelengths and blocks the
rest. Also referred to as a BP filter.

BK filter - A laser-blocking optical filter that passes the fluorescence wavelengths but does
not pass the laser wavelength.

BP filter - A band-pass optical filter that passes a narrow group of wavelengths and blocks the
rest.

block - A section of a disk track between two sectors (see format).

button - A named area on the Workstation screen (for example, a rectangle labeled Yes) that
an operator selects to tell the instrument what to do.

channel - In an analog-to-digital converter, the number of equally spaced divisions of the

amplified input signal voltage. All XL or XL-MCL flow cytometer signals are resolved into
1024 channels. For dual-parameter histograms, the number of channels is reduced to 64 or
256.

cleaning agent - A detergent used to flush sample from tubing and eliminate protein buildup.

click - To press and release a mouse button.

cm - Centimeter, a unit of linear measurement.

confocal - Having the same focal point; two lenses placed together with the same focal point
would be referred to as confocal.

GLOSSARY-2 PN 4237029G
 GLOSSARY

coefficient of variation (CV)

r An expression, in percent (%), of the data spread (variation) as related to the mean
value. The standard formula for calculation:
SD
CV = -------------- × 100
Mean

r A measure of the variability in signal intensity that is generated as particles pass

repeatedly through the laser beam. This variability is expressed as a percentage of
the average signal intensity.
config.sys - Sets up search paths for devices and drivers.

r Buffers sets blocks for the computer to store data.

r Files sets the number of files the system may have open at the same time.
r Device drivers tell the operating system where to locate or search for the information
to drive some external devices such as a mouse or optical drive.
r Any statement beginning with REM will not be executed. These statements are
reminders to the programmer.
control - A substance with predetermined values used to monitor the performance of an
analytical process (for example, CYTO-TROL™ control cells).

controls and indicators - Instrument controls are the mechanisms an operator uses to
communicate with the instrument. Indicators are the mechanisms the instrument uses to
communicate with the operator. Controls and Indicators is the first chapter of the Operator’s
Guide.

cross-cylindrical lenses - Used in the Cytometer to focus the laser beam and form an
elliptical beam spot.

CV (coefficient of variation)

r Expressed as a percentage (%), is a measure of the data variation (data spread) as

related to the mean value. The standard formula for calculation:
SD
CV = -------------- × 100
Mean

r A measure of the variability in signal intensity that is generated as particles pass

repeatedly through the laser beam. This variability is expressed as a percentage of
the average signal intensity.
cylindrical lens - A lens which looks like half a cylinder generally used to focus a laser beam.

Cytometer - The system component that analyzes the sample, and contains the sheath fluid
and cleaning agent bottles.

CYTO-TROL™ control cells - Control cells with assayed values for certain antibodies which
can be used as part of a quality control program for the cell surface marker application.

PN 4237029G GLOSSARY-3
GLOSSARY

defaults - Original settings for the instrument. An operator may change these settings to
customize the instrument for their laboratory.

deionized water - Water freed of salt and some organisms by an ion-exchange process. This
water can be used interchangeably with distilled water in procedures. Also referred to as DI
H2O.

dichroic - A filter placed at a 45 degree angle to the incident light used to separate such light
into two color bands, one reflected off and the other passing through the filter.

directory - A list, usually referring to items stored on a disk.

discriminator - A voltage level for a parameter measurement at or above which an event will
be accepted and included in the data collected. Events below this level are discarded to
eliminate signals caused by debris.

DISC SAT EXT - A discriminator satisfied extension is an operator set extension of the peak
pulse discriminator window to ensure the integral signals will be properly captured.

distilled water - Water freed of solids and organisms by distillation. This water can be used
interchangeably with deionized water in procedures.

DL filter - A dichroic, long-pass optical filter that directs light in different spectral regions to
different detectors.

DOS - disk operating system, the basic computer software which allows the computer to
recognize commands from the mouse or keyboard.

dynodes - Metal plates within a photomultiplier tube which help to generate a current flow
proportional to the amount of light entering the tube.

ECD - Energy coupled dye, a tandem dye exciting at 488 nm and emitting at the orange end
of the spectrum used with cell surface markers. For example, a phycoerythrin and Texas red
combination.

electron - An elementary particle having a negative charge and found in the region around the
nucleus of the atom.

emission curve - A plot of the relative fluorescent light intensity from a dye versus the
wavelength of the light.

energy coupled dye - A tandem dye exciting at 488 nm and emitting at the orange end of the
spectrum used with cell surface markers. ECD, the acronym for energy coupled dye, may be
used interchangeably.

epitope - A binding site on the surface of a cell.

excitation curve - A plot of the amount of light energy absorbed by a dye versus the
wavelength of the light.

GLOSSARY-4 PN 4237029G
 GLOSSARY

EXPO32™ ADC software - A software option available for XL and XL-MCL flow cytometer
systems. This acquisition, analysis, and Cytometer control software product with an
Advanced Digital Compensation feature was developed by Applied Cytometry System (ACS)
exclusively for Beckman Coulter. The software may also be used for data analysis on a stand
alone PC that has Windows 95 or higher as its operating system.

FITC - Fluorescein isothiocyanate, a 488 nm excitable dye fluorescing in the green end of the
spectrum used primarily for cell surface marker applications.

FL - Fluorescent light, the emission of electromagnetic radiation that occurs when the
emitting body absorbs radiation from some other source. For example, when a fluorescent
dye is excited (absorbs radiation), it emits fluorescent light at a wavelength that is different
from the wavelength of the light that excited it.

flow cell - A device used to guide particles pass through a laser beam one at a time in a stream
of fluid called sheath. This sheath fluid aligns the sample with the center of the flow cell.

flow cell tip - A removable device attached to the end of a flow cell which varies the sensing
characteristics of a system.

Flow-Check™ fluorospheres - A 10 µm bead with a bright imbedded full-spectrum dye used

to check the alignment of a flow system. Also referred to as Flow-Check beads.

Flow-Count™ fluorospheres - A 10 µm bead of known concentration that can provide an

absolute count that is used to help an operator calculate the concentration of an unknown.

flow cytometry - A process for measuring the characteristics of cells or other biological
particles as they pass through a measuring apparatus in a fluid stream.

Flow-Set™ fluorospheres - A 3.6 µm bead product with an imbedded dye used as a standard
for cell surface marker type applications. Only 2% as bright as Flow-Check fluorospheres.
Forward scatter (FS) and side scatter (SS) simulate lymphocytes. May be used to verify PMT
operation. Also referred to as Flow-Set beads.

fluorescein isothiocyanate - A 488 nm excitable dye fluorescing in the green end of the
spectrum used primarily for cell surface marker applications. FITC, the acronym for
fluorescein isothiocyanate, may be used interchangeably.

fluorescence - The property of emitting electromagnetic radiation usually as visible light

resulting from and occurring only during the absorption of radiation from some other source.

fluorescent compensation - When multiple dyes are used, one dye may interfere with another
dye’s measurement. If filters are unable to remove the interference, the interference can be
removed electronically by subtracting a portion of one signal from another. Compensation
can only be performed after filters are installed and high voltage to the PMTs is set.

fluorescent light - The emission of electromagnetic radiation that occurs when the emitting
body absorbs radiation from some other source. For example, when a fluorescent dye is
excited (absorbs radiation), it emits fluorescent light at a wavelength that is different from the
wavelength of the light that excited it.

focal plane - A plane perpendicular to the axis of a lens or mirror and passing through the
focal point of the lens or mirror.

PN 4237029G GLOSSARY-5
GLOSSARY

focal point - A point at which the rays of light converge or from which they diverge; for
example. light rays as they pass through a lens may converge on a point referred to as the
focal point of the lens.

format - To lay out a disk in specific tracks, sectors, and blocks so that information can be
systematically stored and retrieved to and from the disk.

Tracks

Track 0

Track n

Sector Bloc ck Sector

k Blo

Sector 7512101A

forward scatter - Light primarily from the surface of a particle as it passes through a laser
beam deflected at low angles and traveling in the same direction as the beam. The amount of
scattered light is generally proportional to the size of the particle that scattered the laser light.
FS, the acronym for forward scatter, may be used interchangeably.

forward scatter sensor - Collects the forward scatter and generates voltage pulse signals. Also
referred to as the FS sensor.

FS - Forward scatter, laser light scattered at narrow angles to the axis of the laser beam
traveling in the same direction as the beam. The amount of scattered light is generally
proportional to the size of the particle that scattered the laser light.

ft - Foot or feet, a unit of linear measurement.

g - Gram, a unit of weight.

gain - The amount of amplification applied to a signal such as a pulse. In this case, a gain of
10 means the pulse height would be increase by a factor of 10. In linear amplification, all of a
sensor’s signals are increased by the same amount. Contrast with logarithmic amplification.

gating - The use of some criteria that must be met before an event is included in a specific
histogram.

Gaussian distribution - A normal or symmetrical distribution; for example. a bell-shaped

curve.

GLOSSARY-6 PN 4237029G
 GLOSSARY

ground state - The energy level having the least energy of all its possible states and greatest
stability. For example, the resting state of an atom is referred to as its ground state.

high voltage - Can be adjusted to change the sensitivity of a fluorescent light sensor.

histogram - The plot of the count of the number of pulses versus the corresponding channel
heights (single parameter) or the plot of count of the number of events versus two channel
height measurements simultaneously (two parameter).

histogram, light-scatter - A two dimensional graphic presentation of multidimensional

accumulated data. Usually the X-axis is set to Side Scatter and the Y-axis is set to Forward
Scatter.

hot keys - A shortcut for changing screens. Instead of using the menu bar to change screens,
you can press and hold down ALT while pressing a certain letter key. For example, pressing
ALT and F simultaneously displays the File menu.

hydrodynamic focusing - A process that focuses the sample stream through the flow cell. It
involves the alignment and narrowing of a sample stream using a second coaxial liquid called
sheath to ensure that cells move through the laser beam one at a time, along the same path.

HV - High voltage, a voltage (up to 2000 volts) applied to a PMT to adjust the sensitivity of
the PMT.

Hz - Hertz, a unit of frequency.

IMMUNO-BRITE™ standard kit - A five level bead fluorescence product used to check the
function of the log amplifiers.

immunofluorescence - Fluorescence as the result of, or identifying, an immune response.

immunophenotyping - Process of identifying/categorizing cells through the use of cell surface

antigen marking.

in. - Inch, a unit of measure.

integral signal - A voltage pulse of which height and area are proportional to the total amount
of fluorescent material in a cell.

integral pulse - The voltage level created as a particle passes through the beam representing
the total amount of light generated by the particle. This pulse is created from the peak pulse
and reaches its highest point as the particle exits the beam.

interference filter - A coated piece of glass in which certain wavelengths are reflected off the
surface while others pass through.

ion - A charged particle.

kg - Kilogram, a unit of weight equal to 1,000 grams.

laminar flow - The flow of two liquids side by side in which one does not mix with the other.

laser - Light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation.

PN 4237029G GLOSSARY-7
GLOSSARY

lb - Pound, a unit of weight.

linear amplification - See gain.

linear amplifier - A circuit which multiplies all pulses by the same amount (gain). Usually the
amount is selected by the operator.

linear region - A channel range identifying a portion of a single parameter histogram to be

used for analysis or gating purposes.

listmode - The digitized pulses for each parameter for each event; e.g. the raw data.

logarithmic amplification - A method of increasing the gain and dynamic range of a signal. A
larger gain is applied to a sensor’s smaller signals than to the sensor’s larger signals. Also see
gain.

long pass filter - A filter that reflects or absorbs short-wavelength light, but passes
long-wavelength light. The long pass filter blocks wavelengths of light shorter than a
designated reference wavelength and transmits wavelengths longer than the designated
reference wavelength. These filters are identified by their 50% transmittance wavelengths.
May also be referred to as an LP filter.

LP filter - A long-pass filter reflects or absorbs short-wavelength light, but passes

long-wavelength light. The long pass filter blocks wavelengths of light shorter than a
designated reference wavelength and transmits wavelengths longer than the designated
reference wavelength. These filters are identified by their 50% transmittance wavelengths.

macro - A list of stored keystrokes which are used to reduce the number of operator selections
when doing repetitive tasks.

mean - Arithmetic average of a group of data, such as the average channel value. Also see
standard deviation and coefficient of variation.

menu - On a Workstation screen, a list of items from which you can choose.

metafile - A stored graphic representation of a screen display.

microprocessor - The integrated circuitry for electronically controlled devices.

mg - Milligram, a unit of weight equal to 10-3 gram.

mL - Milliliter, a unit of volumetric measurement equal to 10-3 liter.

mm - Millimeter, a unit of linear measurement equal to 10-3 meter.

monoclonal antibodies - Antibodies produced by a single cell or its identical progeny, specific
for a given antigen.

mW - Milliwatt, a unit of power equal to 10-3 watt.

GLOSSARY-8 PN 4237029G
 GLOSSARY

neutral density filter - A filter which equally reduces the intensity of all wavelengths of light.
It is usually named by its power of ten reduction in the light intensity; for example, ND1
would reduce the light to 1/10 (10 to the -1 power) its original intensity. Also referred to as an
ND filter.

ND filter - A neutral density filter which equally reduces the intensity of all wavelengths of
light. It is usually named by its power of ten reduction in the light intensity; for example,
ND1 would reduce the light to 1/10 (10 to the -1 power) its original intensity.

nm - Nanometer, a unit of linear measurement equal to 10-9 meter.

normalization - Applied to linear statistics from different histogram resolutions to ensure

results are comparable. Scales to 1024.

optical filters - Mediums, such as glass, that separate fluorescent light by wavelength, which
is measured in nanometers (nm). Also see BK, BP, and DL filters.

panel - A set of protocols to be used in sequence.

PE - Phycoerythrin, a dye exciting at 488 nm and emitting in the yellow end of the spectrum
primarily used in cell surface marker applications.

peak channel - Channel on a histogram with the highest count.

peak pulse - The voltage generated by a sensor as a particle passes through a laser beam
which rises to its highest point when the particle is at the center of the beam and falls to zero
as the particle exits the beam. The pulse height indicates the maximum light produced by the
particle and the width indicates the time necessary to pass through the beam.

peak signal - A voltage pulse of which height is proportional to the amount of light the cell
scatters or fluoresces.

photocell - An optoelectrical device which generates an electrical voltage when light

strikes it.

photodiode - Same as a photocell.

photomultiplier tube - A light-sensitive device that converts light energy into electrical
current and generates a voltage pulse signal. Usually these devices are adjustable by setting a
high voltage to optimize for the available light. This optoelectrical device generates an electric
current proportional to the amount of light striking it and is connected to a circuit that
converts the current pulse to a voltage pulse. Also referred to as a PMT.

phycoerythrin - A dye exciting at 488 nm and emitting in the yellow end of the spectrum
primarily used in cell surface marker applications. Also referred to as PE.

PI - Propidium iodide, a DNA binding dye exciting at 488 nm and emitting in the orange end
of the spectrum.

pickup lens/spatial filter assembly - Collects side scatter and fluorescent light from only the
sensing area of the flow cell and collimates it.

PN 4237029G GLOSSARY-9
GLOSSARY

PMT - Photomultiplier tube, a light-sensitive device that converts light energy into electrical
current and generates a voltage pulse signal. Usually these devices are adjustable by setting a
high voltage to optimize for the available light. This optoelectrical device generates an electric
current proportional to the amount of light striking it and is connected to a circuit that
converts the current pulse to a voltage pulse.

precision - A measure of the ability of the instrument to reproduce similar results when a
sample is run repeatedly. May also be referred to as reproducibility.

prism - to separate out:

r Triangular glass used to separate multicolored light into the component colors or
redirect a single color light to a different location.
r A circuit which separates multiple cell surface marker measurements into the
possible marker phenotypes.
r Phenotype parameter for multicolor analysis.
propidium iodide - A DNA binding dye exciting at 488 nm and emitting in the orange end of
the spectrum. Also referred to as PI.

protocol - A set of instructions; for example, a set of instructions to a computer on how to

run a sample. A set of instructions that tells the Cytometer what and how to acquire data and
relay listmode data.

psi - Pounds per square inch, a unit of pressure measurement.

QC - Quality control is a comprehensive set of procedures a laboratory sets up to ensure that

an instrument is working accurately and precisely.

quad-stat - A set of two cursors dividing a two parameter histogram into four sections or
quadrants.

quality control - A comprehensive set of procedures a laboratory sets up to ensure that an

instrument is working accurately and precisely. QC, the acronym for quality control, may be
used interchangeably.

queue - A list of selected items in a specific order.

RD1 - Red dye 1, a PE derivative.

rectilinear region - A box with four sets of channel coordinates describing a portion of a two
parameter histogram to be used for analysis or gating.

reflection - Act of bending back; for example, the return of light from a surface.

refraction - Deflection from a straight path undergone by a light ray or energy wave in passing
obliquely from one medium to another.

reproducibility - A measure of the ability of the instrument to recover similar results when a
sample is run repeatedly. May also be referred to as precision.

GLOSSARY-10 PN 4237029G
 GLOSSARY

resolution - The process or capability of distinguishing the individual components making up

a data set. On a histogram, it refers to the ability to separate populations within the
histogram.

ratio - A new parameter created by dividing the pulse height of one parameter by another.
The resulting histogram scale is 0 to 1.

scattergram - A method of simultaneous pulse display of two parameters in which one

parameter is displayed along the X-axis and the other along the Y-axis yielding a plot within
the center of the screen.

scopegram - Same as scattergram.

scroll bar - The bar with an up and down arrow on the left of a window. The bar’s arrows let
you move (scroll) the window’s content up or down so that you can see other parts of it. For
example, the scroll bar in the Protocol Select window lets you scroll through the entire list of
protocol names.

SD - Standard deviation, a measure of deviation from the mean. For example, a measure of
the range of channel deviation within a measurement.

SD =
∑ (x – x) 2
---------------------------
N–1

sector - A specific radius of a disk (see format).

select - At the Workstation, select means to position the mouse cursor on an item, and then
press and release a mouse button to choose that item. At the Cytometer screen, select means
to touch the designated box.

sensitivity - The ability of the instrument to distinguish very low levels of light scatter and
fluorescence from background light or electronic noise.

sheath - A liquid which surrounds and aligns another liquid.

sheath fluid - A balanced electrolyte solution.

short pass filter - A filter that reflects long-wavelength light, but passes short-wavelength
light. The short pass filter blocks wavelengths of light longer than a designated reference
wavelength and transmits wavelengths shorter than the designated reference wavelength.
These filters are identified by their 50% transmittance wavelengths. May also be referred to as
an SP filter

side scatter - The amount of laser light measured at about a 90° angle to the axis of the laser
beam. The amount of side scatter is proportional to the granularity of the particle that
scattered the laser light. May also be referred to as SS.

side scatter sensor - Collects the side scatter and generates voltage pulse signals. May also be
referred to as the SS sensor.

PN 4237029G GLOSSARY-11
GLOSSARY

SP filter - A short-pass filter reflects long-wavelength light, but passes short-wavelength light.
The short pass filter blocks wavelengths of light longer than a designated reference
wavelength and transmits wavelengths shorter than the designated reference wavelength.
These filters are identified by their 50% transmittance wavelengths.

SS - Side scatter is the amount of laser light measured at about a 90° angle to the axis of the
laser beam. The amount of side scatter is proportional to the granularity of the particle that
scattered the laser light.

Standard Deviation - A measure of deviation from the mean. For example, a measure of the
range of channel deviation within a measurement. SD, the acronym for standard deviation,
may be used interchangeably.

SD =
∑ (x – x) 2
---------------------------
N–1

Texas red - A dye exciting at 595 nm and fluorescing in the orange end of the spectrum
usually used with the cell surface marker application. TR, the acronym for Texas red, may be
used interchangeably.

thiozole orange - An RNA binding dye exciting at 488 nm and fluorescing in the green end of
the spectrum. TO, the acronym for thiozole orange, may be used interchangeably.

TO - Thiozole orange, an RNA binding dye exciting at 488 nm and fluorescing in the green
end of the spectrum.

TR - Texas red, a dye exciting at 595 nm and fluorescing in the orange end of the spectrum
usually used with the cell surface marker application.

track - A circular location on a disk (see format) where information is stored.

V - Volt, a unit of electrical potential difference measurement.

Vac - Alternating current voltage.

Vdc - Direct current voltage.

vernier - An additional scale to the main scale that allows for accurate fractional reading of
the smallest division on the main scale. Allows for fine adjustments of the forward light
scatter.

voltage pulse signals - The signals that the forward scatter, side scatter, and fluorescence
sensors generate. They are proportional to the intensity of light the sensor received.

W - Watt, a unit of power.

Workstation - The system component that runs the software that lets an operator control the
instrument. It displays sample results and other information.

GLOSSARY-12 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

Numerics amplifier block diagram, 2.2-10

488 BK light filter AUX card function, A.5-9
function, A.5-23 calibration, procedure, 4.15-2
488 DL light filter calibration, unacceptable histograms,
function, A.5-23 illustration, 4.15-5
525 BP light filter calibration, verifying acceptable
function, A.5-22 histograms, 4.15-4
575 BP light filter component locations, A.2-3
function, A.5-22 controlling attenuators, A.4-1
600 DL light filter controlling gain, A.4-1
function, A.5-23 description, 2.2-9
620 BP light filter engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
function, A.5-22 FS card function, A.5-9
645 DL light filter in four-color PMT upgrade, 3.12-2
function, A.5-23 jumper settings, A.2-3
675 BP light filter jumpers, A.4-1
function, A.5-22 location of PMT HV power supplies, 2.2-10
802.3 network standard location, illustration, 8.2-4
Beckman Coulter supported, E.1-5 locations in the Cytometer, A.2-3
specifications, E.1-5 offset adjustment, 4.15-1
specifications, table, E.2-1 part number, 8.2-5
PMT1 card function, A.5-10
PMT2 card function, A.5-10
A PMT3 card function, A.5-10
ADC Zero Adjust, Prefinal software PMT4 card function, A.5-10
circuit card tested, 7.2-2 replacement, 4.15-1
description, 7.2-1 replacement and/or calibration, tools/supplies
response to failure, 7.2-2 needed, 4.15-1
air cylinder replacement and/or calibration,
in/out. See in/out air cylinder verification, 4.15-6
lifter. See lifter air cylinder replacement and/or calibration, when to
manual stage. See manual stage air cylinder perform, 4.15-1
probe up/down. See probe up/down air cylinder SS card function, A.5-8
segmenting valve. See segmenting valve testing with Prefinal Service software, A.4-1
ambient temperature troubleshooting, 2.2-11
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL Analyzer backplane
with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-3 adjust Cytometer voltages, A.1-1
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL cards connected to, 2.2-9
with Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.1-3 component locations, A.2-4, A.2-5
Amp Gain Control, Prefinal software description, 2.2-9
circuit cards tested, 7.2-2 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
description, 7.2-2 front view, A.2-4
response to failure, 7.2-2 function by plane, table, 2.2-9
Amp Saturation Test, Prefinal software function in Cytometer, 2.2-1
circuit cards tested, 7.2-2 location in the Cytometer, A.2-4
description, 7.2-2 rear view, A.2-5
response to failure, 7.2-2 anchor illustrations
Amp/Signal Conditioner card for component locations and functions, MCL
amplifier analog bus interface, block option, A.5-2
diagram, 2.2-10

PN 4237029G INDEX-1
INDEX

for component locations and functions, editing for LANtastic Client/Server software
Universal Power Supply, A.7-2 V8.0 installation, 3.18-2
for component locations and functions, file server setup file example, D.2-1
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, A.6-2
for component locations and functions, XL or
XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-2 B
for cover removal and reinstallation procedures, band pass (BP) filter, 2.2-7
Cytometer exterior, 4.25-3 bar-code
for cover removal and reinstallation procedures, acceptable, table, F.1-1
interior Cytometer access, 4.25-4 specifications, F.1-1
for cover removal and reinstallation procedures, Bar-Code Decoder card
Universal Power Supply, 4.25-6 component locations, A.2-6
for cover removal and reinstallation procedures, function, A.5-46
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.25-5 location in the Cytometer, A.2-6
for illustrated parts, Cytometer, 8.1-2 part number, 8.4-3, 8.4-11
for illustrated parts, Universal Power Supply or bar-code hand-held scanner
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 8.1-2 description, F.3-1
for illustrated parts, XL or XL-MCL general parameters, table, F.3-2
instrument, 8.1-2 installation, default configuration
for procedures needed to access Cytometer table, F.2-2, F.3-1
interior, 4.25-4 keyboard wedge parameters, table, F.3-3
Argon laser part number, 8.1-9
beam description, 2.2-4 setup parameters, F.3-1
function, laser head, A.5-14 symbology table, 3.15-1, F.3-2
function, laser power supply, A.6-10 See also installation - bar-code hand-held
head replacement in Cytometer with a Universal scanner
Power Supply, 4.4-1 Bar-Code Interface card
head replacement in Cytometer with a cables attached to, illustrated parts
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.3-1 listing, 8.4-10
power supply replacement in a Universal Power bar-code labels
Supply, 4.4-1 adjusting lightness/darkness, 3.14-5
power supply replacement in a Voltage-Specific adjusting tear-off position, 3.14-4
Power Supply, 4.3-1 adjusting top-of-label position, 3.14-5
when to perform a replacement, 4.3-1, 4.4-1 in bar-code hand-held scanner
ATTENTION installation, 3.15-2
definition, 1.1-4 part number, 3.14-1, 8.1-6, 8.1-9
bar-code Printer
Attenuator Control, Prefinal software part number, 3.14-1
circuit cards tested, 7.2-3 switch settings and functions, table, F.4-1
description, 7.2-3 See also installation - bar-code Printer
response to failure, 7.2-3 bar-code Printer media calibration
AUTO push-button when to perform, 3.14-3
function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-33 bar-code Printer ribbon
autoexec.bat file Beckman Coulter recommendation, 3.14-5
client flow cytometer setup file example, D.1-1 bar-code reader
editing for LANtastic Client/Server software function, A.5-45
V6.0 installation, 3.20-3 bar-code scanner
editing for LANtastic Client/Server software MCL setup parameters, F.2-2
V7.0 installation, MS-DOS, 3.19-2

INDEX-2 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

bar-code scanner EEPROM custom programming bus networking topology

component locations, illustration, 4.24-2 definition, E.1-3
computer setup, 4.24-2 illustration, E.1-3
custom programming sequence, 4.24-3
preparation, 4.24-1
tools/supplies needed, 4.24-1 C
verification, 4.24-5 cables. See cables on XL or XL-MCL with Universal
bar-code scanners Power Supply or cables on XL or XL-MCL
description, 2.2-17, F.2-1 with Voltage-Specific Power Supply, as
bar-code, MCL EPROM applicable
part number, 8.1-9 cables on XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power
baseband Supply
definition, E.1-1 analog connections, 3.6-4
beamshaper assembly CYT12 connections, 3.6-5
function, A.5-26 fiber optic interface connections, 3.6-4
illustrated parts listing, 8.2-19 instructions for connecting cables, 3.6-1
part number, 8.1-7, 8.2-19 instrument connections, illustration, 3.6-1
replacement/alignment, 4.5-1 laser umbilical cable connections to Argon laser
Beckman Coulter service tool kit power supply, illustration, 3.6-2
part number, 8.1-11 laser umbilical connections, 3.6-2
Beckman Coulter-supported networking logic connections, 3.6-3
802.3 network standard, E.1-5 MCL connections, 3.6-3
bus topology, E.1-3 power module control connections, 3.6-4
star topology, E.1-2 cables on XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific
Beeper Test, Prefinal software Power Supply
circuit card tested, 7.2-3 ac power connections, G.6-5
description, 7.2-3 analog connections, G.6-3
response to failure, 7.2-3 CYT12 connections, G.6-5
biological fiber optic interface connections, G.6-4
hazards, 1.2-2 instructions for connecting cables, G.6-1
BK (blocking) filter, 2.2-7 instrument connections, illustration, G.6-1
blocking (BK) filter, 2.2-7 laser umbilical cable connection to Argon laser
bounded media power supply, illustration, G.6-2
definition, E.1-1 laser umbilical connections, G.6-1
BP (band pass) filter, 2.2-7 logic connections, G.6-3
Breaker card MCL connections, G.6-4
circuit breaker usage, overview, 2.4-16 power module control connections, G.6-3
circuit breakers used with high voltage Caching Disk Controller card
configuration, 2.4-17 location on motherboard, B.2-2
circuit breakers used with low voltage Canyon Jumper Test, Prefinal software
configuration, 2.4-17 circuit cards tested, 7.2-4
component locations on back of circuit description, 7.2-4
card, 2.4-13, A.2-8 response to failure, 7.2-4
component locations on front of circuit cards
card, 2.4-12, A.2-7 Amp/Signal Conditioner. See Amp/Signal
location in the Universal Power Supply, A.2-7 Conditioner card
bridge Bar-code Decoder. See Bar-code Decoder card
definition, E.1-4 Breaker. See Breaker card
CYT12 Receiver EMC. See CYT12 Receiver EMC
card

PN 4237029G INDEX-3
INDEX

Cyto Transputer. See Cyto Transputer card check valves

Fiber Optics Interface. See Fiber Optics Interface illustrated parts listing, 8.9-2
card chokes
Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2. See Front illustrated parts listing, 8.9-2
Panel LED and Switch Input 2 card circuit breakers
Front Panel LED and Switch Input. See Front location, illustration, 8.7-2, 8.7-16
Panel LED and Switch Input card part numbers, 8.7-17
MCL CPU. See MCL CPU card circuit cards. See cards
MCL Interface. See MCL Interface card cleaning agent
Motor Filter. See Motor Filter card container, illustrated parts listing, 8.2-31
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II. See Opto fill container during installation of XL or
Transprocessor EXMEM II card XL-MCL with Universal Power
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM. See Opto Supply, 3.3-15
Transprocessor EXMEM card fill container during installation of XL or
PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control. See XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power
PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card Supply, G.3-14
Power Control 3. See Power Control 3 card part number, 3.2-1, G.2-1
Power Module Control II. See Power Module cleaning agent container
Control II card function, A.5-28
Power Module Control. See Power Module other names, A.5-28
Control card cleanse low indicator
Sensor. See Sensor card how to read, table, 7.1-1
Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface. See
Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card CLEANSE push-button
Solenoid Power Distribution. See Solenoid function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-38
Power Distribution card function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-34
System Interface. See System Interface card CMOS
Top Panel Display 2. See Top Panel Display 2 settings for Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card
card installation, 3.16-2
Trans Data Acquisition. See Trans Data components
Acquisition card accessed with the Cytometer center front cover
Voltage Selector 2. See Voltage Selector 2 card removed, illustration, A.5-21
Voltage Selector. See Voltage Selector card accessed with the Cytometer center front cover
Voltage Supply Monitor. See Voltage Supply removed, table, A.5-22
Monitor card accessed with the Cytometer top cover removed,
carousel hub illustration, A.5-5
function, A.5-43, A.5-45 accessed with the Cytometer top cover removed,
carousel tube-position sensor adjustment table, A.5-6
in MCL option field adjustment, 4.12-2, 4.12-4 anchor illustration for locating in an XL flow
in/out screw adjustment, illustration, 4.12-2 cytometer, A.5-2
tube-position screw adjustment, anchor illustration for locating in an XL-MCL
illustration, 4.12-3 flow cytometer, A.5-2
carryover test anchor illustration for locating Universal Power
acceptable results, 4.8-2, 4.8-3, 5.1-3, 5.1-5 Supply components, A.7-2
HIGH/LOW protocol, table, 4.8-1 anchor illustration for locating Voltage-Specific
procedure, 4.8-1 Power Supply components, A.6-2
tools/supplies needed, 4.8-1 attached to Cytometer rear panel,
CAUTION illustration, A.5-29
definition, 1.1-4 attached to Cytometer rear panel, table, A.5-30

INDEX-4 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

attached to rear panel of Voltage-Specific Power MCL option, components accessible with covers
Supply, illustration, A.6-15 removed, table, A.5-45
attached to rear panel of Voltage-Specific Power segmenting valve, illustration, A.5-39
Supply, table, A.6-16 segmenting valve, table, A.5-40
front panel display, illustration, A.5-55 upper pneumatics drawer, illustration, A.5-16
front panel display, table, A.5-56 upper pneumatics drawer, table, A.5-17
in the Data Acquisition card cage, Computer Workstation
illustration, A.5-7 components, 2.1-5
in the Data Acquisition card cage, table, A.5-8 in SVP, 5.1-6
in the optical collection area, illustration, A.5-13 options, 2.5-2
in the optical collection area, table, A.5-14 standard configuration, 2.5-1
located behind the filter shield, supported printers, 2.5-2
illustration, A.5-24 computers
located behind the filter shield, table, A.5-25 part numbers, FlowCentre Multimedia
located in left-side compartment of the Workstation, 8.1-9
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, config.sys file
illustration, A.6-9 client flow cytometer setup file example, D.1-1
located in left-side compartment of the editing for LANtastic Client/Server software
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, table, A.6-10 V6.0 installation, 3.20-2
located in right-side compartment of the editing for LANtastic Client/Server software
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, V7.0 installation, MS-DOS, 3.19-3
illustration, A.6-12 editing for LANtastic Client/Server software
located in right-side compartment of the V8.0 installation, 3.18-2
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, table, A.6-13 file server setup file example, D.2-1
located in the Cytometer right-side how to edit, 3.20-2
compartment, illustration, A.5-16 connections
located in the Cytometer right-side cables on an XL or XL-MCL with Universal
compartment, table, A.5-17 Power Supply, illustration, 3.6-1
located inside the reagent drawer, cables on an XL or XL-MCL with
illustration, A.5-27 Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
located inside the reagent drawer, table, A.5-28 illustration, G.6-1
located on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply tubing on an XL or XL-MCL with Universal
front panel, illustration, A.6-4 Power Supply, illustration, 3.7-2
located on the Voltage-Specific Power Supply tubing on an XL or XL-MCL with
front panel, table, A.6-5 Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
lower pneumatics drawer, illustration, A.5-48 illustration, G.7-2
lower pneumatics drawer, table, A.5-49 waste container (4 L) to Universal Power
manual sample station, XL flow cytometer, Supply, illustration, 3.7-2
illustration, A.5-36 waste container (4 L) to Voltage-Specific Power
manual sample station, XL flow cytometer, Supply, illustration, G.7-2
table, A.5-37 connections, cable
manual sample station, XL-MCL flow cytometer, tower computer to XL or XL-MCL Cytometer,
illustration, A.5-32 illustration, 3.6-1, G.6-1
manual sample station, XL-MCL flow cytometer, XL or XL-MCL Cytometer to Universal Power
table, A.5-33 Supply, illustration, 3.6-1
MCL option, carousel, illustration, A.5-42 XL or XL-MCL Cytometer to Voltage-Specific
MCL option, carousel, table, A.5-43 Power Supply, illustration, G.6-1
MCL option, components accessible with covers connections, tubing
removed, illustration, A.5-44 to rear of Universal Power Supply, 3.7-2
to rear of Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.7-2

PN 4237029G INDEX-5
INDEX

to rear of XL or XL-MCL covers

Cytometer, 3.7-3, G.7-3 illustrated parts listing, Universal Power
Universal Power Supply to XL or XL-MCL Supply, 8.8-34
Cytometer, illustration, 3.7-2 removal and reinstallation procedures, 4.25-1
Voltage-Specific Power Supply to XL or XL-MCL removing shipping screws from left and right
Cytometer, illustration, G.7-2 side, 3.3-2, G.3-2
waste container (4 L) connections to XL or customer manuals
XL-MCL Cytometer, part numbers, 1.1-1
illustration, 3.7-2, G.7-2 customer training
waste container (4 L) to XL or XL-MCL prior to installation of XL or XL-MCL with
Cytometer, illustration, 3.7-2, G.7-2 Universal Power Supply, 3.2-1
conventions prior to installation of XL or XL-MCL with
about HTML version of this manual, 1.1-7 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.2-1
Power Supply module terminology, 1.1-5 CYT12 Receiver EMC card
reagent terminology, 1.1-5 component locations, A.2-9
screen messages, 1.1-6 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
Workstation configurations, 1.1-5 location in EMC version of Voltage-Specific
cooling coil Power Supply, A.2-9
function in the Cytometer, A.5-18 Cyto Transputer card
COULTER CLENZ cleaning agent block diagram, 2.2-13
fill container during installation of XL or component locations, A.2-10
XL-MCL with Universal Power description, 2.2-13
Supply, 3.3-15 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
fill container during installation of XL or function, A.5-8
XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power jumper settings, A.2-10
Supply, G.3-14 location in the Cytometer, A.2-10
part number, 3.2-1, 3.10-1, 8.1-6, location, illustration, 8.2-4
G.2-1, G.10-1 part number, 8.2-5
COULTER CYTO-TROL control cells relationship to Opto Transprocessor EXMEM or
part number, 3.2-1, 3.10-1, G.2-1, G.10-1 Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card, 2.2-13
Count Rate Test, Prefinal software testing with Prefinal Service software, A.4-2
circuit cards tested, 7.2-4 Cytometer
description, 7.2-4 anchor illustration for component locations and
response to failure, 7.2-4 functions, A.5-2
cover removal and reinstallation procedures anchor illustration for illustrated parts, 8.1-2
exterior Cytometer covers, anchor arrival of XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power
illustration, 4.25-3 Supply at customer site, 3.1-3
interior Cytometer access, anchor arrival of XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific
illustration, 4.25-4 Power Supply at customer site, G.1-3
Universal Power Supply anchor block diagram, 2.2-8
illustration, 4.25-6 cables (exterior) on unit with Universal Power
Universal Power Supply main cover, 4.25-59 Supply, illustrated parts listing, 8.3-8
UPS back cover, 4.25-72 cables (exterior) on unit with Voltage-Specific
UPS cable cover only, 4.25-68 Power Supply, illustrated parts listing, 8.3-6
UPS pneumatics drawer, 4.25-75 component locations accessed with center front
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, anchor cover removed, illustration, A.5-21
illustration, 4.25-5 component locations with filter shield removed,
illustration, A.5-24

INDEX-6 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

components accessed with top cover removed, MCL components accessed with covers
illustration, A.5-5 removed, table, A.5-45
components accessed with top cover removed, optical collection area component locations,
table, A.5-6 illustration, A.5-13
components attached to rear panel, table, A.5-30 optical collection area components,
components behind center front cover, table, A.5-14
table, A.5-22 reagent drawer component locations,
components behind the filter shield, illustration, A.5-27
table, A.5-25 rear panel component locations,
components inside the reagent drawer, illustration, A.5-29
table, A.5-28 rear panel fan assembly, illustrated parts
Data Acquisition card cage component locations, listing, 8.2-46
illustration, A.5-7 rear panel, illustrated parts
Data Acquisition card cage components, listing, 8.2-44, 8.2-45
table, A.5-8 right side component locations,
description, 2.2-1 illustration, A.5-16
engineering documents, 6.1-1 right side components, table, A.5-17
exterior cables on unit with Universal Power right side, illustrated parts listing, 8.2-49
Supply, illustrated parts listing, 8.3-8 segmenting valve component locations,
exterior cables on unit with Voltage-Specific illustration, A.5-39
Power Supply, illustrated parts listing, 8.3-6 segmenting valve components, table, A.5-40
front display panel component locations, upper pneumatics drawer component locations,
illustration, A.5-55 illustration, A.5-16
front panel display components, table, A.5-56 upper pneumatics drawer component locations,
function, illustration, 2.2-1 table, A.5-17
installation of (as part of XL or XL-MCL with voltages, where to adjust, A.1-1
Universal Power Supply installation), 3.3-2 XL flow cytometer, illustrated parts listing, 8.3-4
installation of (as part of XL or XL-MCL with XL-MCL flow cytometer, illustrated parts
Voltage-Specific Power Supply listing, 8.3-2, 8.4-12, 8.7-20
installation), G.3-2 CYTO-TROL control cells
lower pneumatics drawer component locations, part number, 3.2-1, 3.10-1, 8.1-6,
illustration, A.5-48 G.2-1, G.10-1
lower pneumatics drawer components,
table, A.5-49
main components, 2.1-3 D
manual sample station component locations, Data Acquisition card cage
illustration of XL flow cytometer, A.5-36 component locations, illustration, A.5-7
manual sample station component locations, components, table, A.5-8
illustration of XL-MCL flow description, 2.2-8
cytometer, A.5-32 function, A.5-6
manual sample station components (XL flow illustrated parts listing, 8.2-4
cytometer), table, A.5-37 in Cytometer functioning, illustration, 2.2-1
manual sample station components (XL-MCL preparation for operation as part of XL or
flow cytometer), table, A.5-33 XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply
MCL carousel component locations, installation, 3.3-10
illustration, A.5-42 preparation for operation as part of XL or
MCL carousel components, table, A.5-43 XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply
MCL component locations accessed with covers installation, G.3-10
removed, illustration, A.5-44 removing shipping brace, 3.3-10, G.3-10

PN 4237029G INDEX-7
INDEX

dedicated server FC 500 Transient Voltage Suppressor card

definition, E.1-5 component location, A.2-11
diagnostic products location in Universal Power Supply, A.2-11
reference, 2.1-5 other names, 2.4-21
dichroic long pass (DL) filter, 2.2-7 Fiber Optic Interface card
DIP switches component locations, A.2-12
location on bar-code Printer, 3.14-1 description, 2.2-16
location on bar-code Printer, illustration, 3.14-2 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
DL (dichroic long pass) filter, 2.2-7 jumper settings, A.2-12
DMA Acquisition, Prefinal software location in the Cytometer, A.2-12
description, 7.2-4 Fiber Optics Interface card
function, A.5-31
field engineer worksheet, C.1-1
E filter assembly
electronics illustrated parts listing, 8.2-16
system troubleshooting, 7.3-3 filter locations, illustration, A.5-21
engineering documents filters
location of latest version, 6.1-1 part numbers, 8.2-16
part numbers, 6.1-1, 6.1-3 vacuum and air, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-8
part numbers included in this manual, 6.1-1 finger adjustment
recommended for troubleshooting, 6.1-1, 6.1-3 finger screw adjustment, illustration, 4.12-3
engineering schematics in MCL option field adjustment, 4.12-3
pneumatic/hydraulic layout, part flexible duct
number, 6.1-1, 6.1-2 function, A.5-14
error messages, 7.1-1 illustrated assembly instructions, 8.2-52
MCL Tube Load Error, 2.2-18 illustrated parts listing, 8.2-52
ESD kit (static-dissipative field kit) flow cell
part number, 3.3-1, G.3-1 description, 2.2-2
EXPO32 ADC software installation function, A.5-25
procedure, 3.22-1 illustration, 2.2-3
tool/supplies needed, 3.22-1 flow cell and beamshaper replacement/alignment
exterior covers alignment, illustration, 4.5-5
illustrated parts listing, Universal Power alignment, procedure, 4.5-4
Supply, 8.8-32 beamshaper components, illustration, 4.5-4
correct laser reflection positioning,
F illustration, 4.5-3
flow cell and beamshaper components,
fan assembly
illustration, 4.5-2
Cytometer, rear panel, illustrated parts
tools/supplies needed, 4.5-1
listing, 8.2-47
when to perform, 4.5-1
fan, power supply
flow cell replacement/alignment
illustrated parts listing, 8.7-18
removal, 4.5-1
fans
FLOW indicator
clearance required for installation of XL or
function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-37
XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-1
function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-33
clearance required for installation of XL or
FLOWCELL WASTE quick connect
XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power
function in the Cytometer, A.5-30
Supply, G.1-1
function in the Cytometer, A.5-30

INDEX-8 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation upgrade FS detector

keyboard connection, 3.13-2 description, 2.2-4
mouse connection, 3.13-2 function, A.5-26
SYSTEM II software installation, 3.13-5 location, illustration, 4.5-4
tools/supplies needed, 3.13-1 FS mask alignment
verification, 3.13-5 correct/incorrect positioning, illustration, 4.6-3
FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation. See procedure, 4.6-2
Workstation FS sensor. See FS detector
Flow-Check fluorospheres
part number, 3.2-1, 8.1-6, G.2-1
Flow-Set fluorospheres G
part number, 8.1-6 gas cylinder
fluidics. See pneumatics function in the MCL, A.5-43
fluorescence pickup lens General Information, Prefinal software
function, A.5-25 description, 7.2-5
fluorospheres Grand Canyon Adjust, Prefinal software
part number, 3.2-1, G.2-1 circuit cards tested, 7.2-6
forward scatter detector. See FS detector description, 7.2-6
forward scatter. See FS response to failure, 7.2-6
four-color PMT upgrade Grand Canyon Test, Prefinal software
Amp/Signal Conditioner card calibration, 3.12-3 circuit cards tested, 7.2-6
hardware installation, 3.12-1 description, 7.2-6
kit part number, 3.12-1 response to failure, 7.2-6
PMT filter locations, illustration, 3.12-2 guidelines for servicing the instrument, 4.1-1
PMT operational alignment, 3.12-3
preparation, 3.12-1 H
tools/supplies needed, 3.12-1
hazards
verification, 3.12-3
biological, 1.2-2
front panel display
headings, special
component locations, illustration, A.5-55
definitions, 1.1-4
components, table, A.5-56
heat dissipation
Front Panel Display card
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL
testing with Prefinal Service software, A.4-1
with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-3
Front Panel LED and Switch Input 2 card
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL
component locations, A.2-14
with Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.1-3
engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
Histogram Test, Prefinal software
function, A.5-34
description, 7.2-7
location in the Cytometer, A.2-14
Hot Keys, A.8-1
Front Panel LED and Switch Input card
available when Acquisition screen displayed,
component locations, A.2-13
table, A.8-1
engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
available when Listmode screen displayed,
function, A.5-37
table, A.8-1
location in the Cytometer, A.2-13
humidity
Front Panel Test, Prefinal software
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL
circuit cards tested, 7.2-5
with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-3
description, 7.2-4
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL
response to failure, 7.2-5
with Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.1-3
FS
definition, 2.2-7
signal description, 2.2-7

PN 4237029G INDEX-9
INDEX

I tie wraps, 8.9-4

illustrated parts listing Universal Power Supply parts, list of illustrations
air and vacuum filters, 8.8-8 within the section, 8.8-1
Bar-Code Interface card, cables attached upper pneumatics drawer, 8.2-6
to, 8.4-10 upper pneumatics drawer, brackets and
beamshaper, 8.2-19 fittings, 8.2-11
cables attached to Voltage Selector 2 card, 8.8-28 upper pneumatics drawer, quick
cables in top compartment front area, Universal disconnects, 8.2-13
Power Supply, 8.8-26 UPS pneumatics drawer, left-side view, 8.8-16
check valves, 8.9-2 UPS pneumatics drawer, right-side view, 8.8-18
chokes, 8.9-2 vacuum trap, 8.8-4
cleaning agent container, 8.2-31 VL21, 8.2-12
Cytometer, rear panel, 8.2-45 VL22, 8.2-8, 8.2-10, 8.2-50
Cytometer, rear panel fan assembly, 8.2-46 VL30, VL31, VL32, 8.7-14
Cytometer, right side, 8.2-48 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, front, 8.7-2
Data Acquisition card cage, 8.2-4 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, left-side
exterior covers, door, latches and casters on the compartment, 8.7-12
Universal Power Supply, 8.8-32 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, rear, 8.7-16
fan, power supply, 8.7-18 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, right-side
flexible duct components and assembly, 8.2-52 compartment, 8.7-11
front panel components, Universal Power waste container, 8.7-22
Supply, 8.8-2 waste container on Universal Power
inside upper front panel, Universal Power Supply, 8.8-36
Supply, 8.8-10 water trap, 8.8-5
interior covers and panels on the Universal Workstation, 8.6-2, 8.6-4
Power Supply, 8.8-34 Workstation parts, list of illustrations within the
left-side compartment, Universal Power section, 8.6-1
Supply, 8.8-12 IMPORTANT
lifter air cylinder, 8.4-6 definition, 1.1-4
lower pneumatics drawer, 8.2-36 in/out air cylinder
MCL CPU card, cables attached to, 8.4-8 function, A.5-45
MCL vertical plate components, 8.4-4 Initialize System, Prefinal software
mounting hardware, 8.9-4 circuit cards tested, 7.2-7
Power Control 3 card cabling, Universal Power description, 7.2-7
Supply, 8.8-30 response to failure, 7.2-7
probe air cylinder, 8.4-7 installation
rear panel components, Universal Power bar-code hand-held scanner option, 3.15-1
Supply, 8.8-22 bar-code printer option, 3.14-1
right-side compartment, Universal Power EXPO32 software options, 3.22-1
Supply, 8.8-20 four-color PMT upgrade, 3.12-1
segmenting valve assembly, 8.2-32 LANtastic Client/Server software option,
sheath filter, 8.2-26 V8.0, 3.18-1
sheath filter, vent connections, 8.2-28 optional EXPO32 ADC software, 3.22-1
sheath fluid container, 8.2-30 optional Sybase Client/Server SQL
small miscellaneous hardware, list of software, 3.21-1
illustrations within the section, 8.9-1 summary for XL or XL-MCL with Universal
system pressure adjustment knob, 8.8-7 Power Supply, 3.10-1
system pressure gauge, 8.8-6 summary for XL or XL-MCL with
system vacuum gauge, 8.8-9 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.10-1

INDEX-10 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

Universal Power Supply, 3.4-1 CYT12 cable connections, 3.6-5

Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.4-1 Cytometer installation procedure, 3.3-1
XL or XL-MCL instrument. See installation - XL fiber optic interface cable connections, 3.6-4
or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply or filling the reagent containers, 3.3-14
installation - XL or XL-MCL with functional verification, 3.9-3
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, as applicable how to tell the difference between 100-120 Vac
installation - bar-code hand-held scanner and 220-240 Vac power cords,
default configuration table, 3.15-1 illustration, 3.6-6
kit part number, 3.15-1 installation of Cytometer, 3.3-2
procedure, 3.15-1 installation summary, 3.10-1
symbology table, 3.15-1 instructions for voltage selection, 3.4-3
tools/supplies needed, 3.15-1 instrument startup, 3.8-1
verification, 3.15-2 keyboard connection, 3.5-2
installation - bar-code Printer laser umbilical cable connections, 3.6-2
ac power line location, illustration, 3.14-2 logic cable connections, 3.6-3
adjusting label tear-off position, MCL connections, 3.6-3
procedures, 3.14-4 monitor cable connections, illustration, 3.5-3
adjusting printer thermal head, monitor connections, 3.5-2
procedures, 3.14-5 monitors, 17-inch, 3.5-2
adjusting top-of-label, procedures, 3.14-5 mouse and keyboard connections,
calibration, procedures, 3.14-3 illustration, 3.5-2
connection, procedures, 3.14-4 mouse connection, 3.5-2
DIP switches location, illustration, 3.14-2 operational checks, 3.9-1
DIP switches settings and functions, power module control cable connections, 3.6-4
table, 3.14-2 power supply voltage verification, 3.9-2
DIP switches settings, illustration, 3.14-2 preinstallation checks, 3.2-1
how to tell when Printer is ready, 3.14-2 preparing Data Acquisition card cage for
power on/off switch location, illustration, 3.14-2 operation, 3.3-10
ribbon replacement procedures, 3.14-5 preparing lower pneumatics drawer for
serial interface cable location, operation, 3.3-10
illustration, 3.14-2 preparing the segmenting valve for
setup procedures, 3.14-1 operation, 3.3-12
testing procedures, 3.14-4 preparing upper pneumatics drawer for
threading and adjustment components, operation, 3.3-11
illustration, 3.14-3 pre-site inspection, 3.1-1
tools/supplies needed, 3.14-1 printer, optional, 3.5-3
when to adjust label tear-off position procedure for installing the Cytometer, 3.3-1
adjustment, 3.14-4 purge sheath filter, 3.9-1
when to adjust thermal head, 3.14-5 reinstallation of Cytometer covers, 3.9-4
installation - Prefinal Service software using reinstallation of UPS covers, 3.9-5
EXPO32 ADC, 4.2-2 removing Data Acquisition card cage shipping
installation - Prefinal Service software using brace, 3.3-10
SYSTEM II software, 4.2-1 removing optical bench spacer, back, 3.3-7
installation - XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power removing optical bench spacer, front, 3.3-7
Supply removing side cover shipping screws, 3.3-2
ac power connections, Workstation, 3.5-3 summary of procedures, 3.10-1
analog cable connections, 3.6-4 SVP, 3.9-6
cable connections, illustration, 3.6-1 SYSTEM II software installation, 3.8-1
connect laser umbilical cable to Argon laser tools/supplied needed for operational
power supply, illustration, 3.6-2 checks, 3.9-1

PN 4237029G INDEX-11
INDEX

tools/supplies needed for installing the preparing lower pneumatics drawer for
Cytometer, 3.3-1 operation, G.3-10
tools/supplies needed for installing Universal preparing the segmenting valve for
Power Supply, 3.4-1 operation, G.3-11
Trans Data Acquisition card offset preparing upper pneumatics drawer for
verification, 3.9-2 operation, G.3-12
tubing connections, 3.7-1 pre-site inspection, G.1-1
typical setup, illustration, 3.5-1 printer, optional, G.5-3
Universal Power Supply installation procedure for installing the Cytometer, G.3-1
procedure, 3.4-1 purge sheath filter, G.9-1
unpacking the Cytometer, 3.3-1 reinstall covers, G.9-4
unpacking the Universal Power Supply, 3.4-1 removing Data Acquisition card cage shipping
unpacking the Workstation, 3.5-1 brace, G.3-10
Workstation installation, 3.5-1 removing optical bench spacer, back, G.3-7
wrap up of installation, 3.9-6 removing optical bench spacer, front, G.3-7
See also requirements for installation of XL or removing side cover shipping screws, G.3-2
XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply summary of procedures, G.10-1
installation - XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific SVP, G.9-5
Power Supply SYSTEM II software installation, G.8-1
ac power cable connections, G.6-5 tools/supplied needed for operational
ac power connections, Workstation, G.5-3 checks, G.9-1
analog cable connections, G.6-3 tools/supplies needed for installing the
cable connections, illustration, G.6-1 Cytometer, G.3-1
connect laser umbilical cable to Argon laser tools/supplies needed for installing
power supply, illustration, G.6-2 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.4-1
CYT12 cable connections, G.6-5 Trans Data Acquisition card offset
Cytometer installation procedure, G.3-1 verification, G.9-2
fiber optic interface cable connections, G.6-4 tubing connections, G.7-1
filling the reagent containers, G.3-13 typical setup, illustration, G.5-1
functional verification, G.9-3 unpacking the Cytometer, G.3-1
installation of Cytometer, G.3-2 unpacking the Voltage-Specific Power
installation summary, G.10-1 Supply, G.4-1
instrument startup, G.8-1 unpacking the Workstation, G.5-1
keyboard connection, G.5-2 Voltage-Specific Power Supply installation
laser umbilical cable connections, G.6-1 procedure, G.4-1
logic cable connections, G.6-3 wrap up of installation, G.9-5
MCL connections, G.6-4 See also requirements for installing XL or
monitor cable connections, illustration, G.5-3 XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Supply
monitor connections, G.5-2 instrument
monitors, 17-inch, G.5-2 anchor illustration for illustrated parts, 8.1-2
mouse and keyboard connections, arrival of XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power
illustration, G.5-2 Supply at customer site, 3.1-3
mouse connection, G.5-2 arrival of XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific
operational checks, G.9-1 Power Supply at customer site, G.1-3
power module control cable connections, G.6-3 circuit cards. See cards
power supply voltage verification, G.9-2 components, 2.1-3
preinstallation checks, G.2-1 installation of XL or XL-MCL with Universal
preparing Data Acquisition card cage for Power Supply, 3.1-1
operation, G.3-10

INDEX-12 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

installation of XL or XL-MCL with L

Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.1-1 labels, bar-code
overview, 2.1-1 optical characteristics, F.1-1
power up/down using EXPO32 ADC part numbers, 8.1-6, 8.1-9
software, 4.1-7 specifications, F.1-1
power up/down using SYSTEM II software, 4.1-4 LAN
preparing for shipment, procedure, 4.16-1 definition, E.1-1
preparing for shipment, tools/supplies LANtastic Client/Server software V6.0 installation
needed, 4.16-1 LED line editor, 3.20-1
shutdown, procedures, 4.17-1 network interconnect cable (NIC), 3.20-3
shutdown, tools/supplies needed, 4.17-1 NIC relationship, 3.20-1
standard XL flow cytometer system, procedure, 3.20-1
description, 2.1-1 running LANCHECK, 3.20-3
XL-MCL flow cytometer system, tools/supplies needed, 3.20-1
description, 2.1-2 LANtastic Client/Server software V7.0 installation
interconnect diagrams MS-DOS, 3.19-2
MCL, part number, 6.1-2 MS-DOS, SQL database software, 3.19-3
safety interlock, part number, 6.1-1, 6.1-2 tools/supplies needed, 3.19-1
interface harness Windows 95, 3.19-1
distributes power from Voltage-Specific Power LANtastic Client/Server software V8.0 installation
Supply, 2.3-2 2- to 10-user license, part number, 3.18-1
interlock switch Client setup, 3.18-1
function in the Cytometer, A.5-6 preparation, 3.18-1
function in the MCL, A.5-43 procedure, 3.18-1
interlocks Server setup, 3.18-5
Power Supply module, 4.1-2 single-user license, part number, 3.18-1
safety precautions, 1.2-1 tools/supplies needed, 3.18-1
interlocks, safety LANtastic NOS
in the Power Supply module, 4.1-2 minimum requirements, B.4-1
laser interlock switch, 4.1-2 laser
MCL interlock switch, 4.1-2 Argon head, removal, 4.3-4, 4.4-4
Power Supply module interlock switch, 4.1-2 Argon power supply, location,
Universal Power Supply, 2.4-20 illustration, 8.7-12
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 2.3-4 Argon, beam, 2.2-4
IsoFlow sheath fluid Argon, installation, 4.3-4, 4.4-5
fill container during installation of XL or Argon, power supply, removal, 4.3-2, 4.4-2
XL-MCL with Universal Power description, 2.2-2
Supply, 3.3-14 in flow cell and beamshaper
fill container during installation of XL or replacement/alignment, 4.5-3
XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power part number for Argon laser head, 8.1-7
Supply, G.3-13 part number for Argon laser power
part number, 3.2-1, 3.10-1, 8.1-6, G.2-1, G.10-1 supply, 8.1-7, 8.2-23, 8.7-13, 8.8-15, 8.8-23
replacement, procedure on a Cytometer with a
J Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.3-1
Jumpers, A.2-11 replacement, procedure on system with a
jumpers Universal Power Supply, 4.4-1
Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card. See warning, 4.5-3
Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card when to perform a replacement, 4.3-1, 4.4-1

PN 4237029G INDEX-13
INDEX

laser beam steering in optical alignment leakage current

beam-shaping stage components, specifications, 2.1-6
illustration, 4.6-2 level sense indicators
oscilloscope settings, table, 4.6-1 CLEANSE LOW function in an XL-MCL flow
procedure, 4.6-1 cytometer, A.5-33
laser blower assembly interpreting, 7.1-1
function, A.5-14 SHEATH LOW function in an XL-MCL flow
laser certification label cytometer, A.5-33
location, illustration, 1.2-8 SHEATH LOW/WASTE FULL/CLEANSE LOW
Laser Control, Prefinal software function in XL flow cytometer, A.5-37
components tested, 7.2-8 WASTE FULL function in an XL-MCL flow
description, 7.2-8 cytometer, A.5-33
response to failure, 7.2-8 lifter air cylinder
laser duct out plenum function, A.5-45
function, A.5-14 illustrated parts listing, 8.4-6
laser head Lock Up Test, Prefinal software
Argon, installation in laser description, 7.2-9
replacement, 4.3-4, 4.4-5 lower pneumatics drawer
Argon, removal in laser 12 insert fitting plate connections, A.5-53
replacement, 4.3-4, 4.4-5 5 insert fitting plate connections, A.5-53
function, A.5-14 component locations, illustration, A.5-48
replacement, procedure on a Cytometer with a components, table, A.5-49
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.3-1 illustrated parts listing, 8.2-36
replacement, procedure on system with a lower 6 insert fitting plate connections, A.5-53
Universal Power Supply, 4.4-1 part number, 8.1-7, 8.2-37
when to perform a replacement, 4.3-1, 4.4-1 upper 6 insert fitting plate connections, A.5-53
laser interlock switch
description of operation, 4.1-2
laser power supply M
Argon, installation in laser manual
replacement, 4.3-2, 4.4-3 conventions, 1.1-5
Argon, removal, 4.3-2, 4.4-2 conventions, about HTML version, 1.1-7
Argon, removal in laser conventions, Power Supply module
replacement, 4.3-1, 4.3-2, 4.4-2, 4.4-4 terminology, 1.1-5
replacement procedure in a Universal Power conventions, reagent terminology, 1.1-5
Supply, 4.4-1 conventions, screen messages, 1.1-6
replacement procedure in a Voltage-Specific conventions, Workstation configurations, 1.1-5
Power Supply, 4.3-1 HTML vs. PDF, 1.1-2
when to perform a replacement, 4.3-1, 4.4-1 intended audience, 1.1-1
laser safety Notice of Information Update, function, 1.1-1
risk of personal injury, 1.2-2, 1.2-4 numbering format, 1.1-4
when working near an exposed laser, 1.2-2 scope, 1.1-1
Laser Warm Up, Prefinal software manual sample head
description, 7.2-9 function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-38
laser warning labels function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-34
location, manual sample probe
illustration, 1.2-5, 1.2-6, 1.2-7, 1.2-8, 1.2-9 function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-38
lasers function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-34
system troubleshooting, 7.3-3

INDEX-14 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

manual sample station part number, 8.4-3, 8.4-9

components, XL flow cytometer, table, A.5-37 switch settings, A.2-15
components, XL-MCL flow cytometer, switch settings, table, 3.11-2
table, A.5-33 test point adjustments, table, 4.21-7, A.1-1
manual sample station (XL flow cytometer) MCL Door Switch Test, Prefinal software
component locations, illustration, A.5-36 description, 7.2-11
manual sample station (XL-MCL flow cytometer) response to failure, 7.2-11
component locations, illustration, A.5-32 MCL Finger Test, Prefinal software
manual stage air cylinder description, 7.2-11
function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-38 MCL head sensor, part number, 8.1-7, 8.4-5
function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-35 MCL Home Align, Prefinal software
manual stage position sensor description, 7.2-11
function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-38 MCL interconnect
function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-35 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
manual, field service MCL Interface card
safety warnings, 1.2-1 block diagram, 2.2-14
manuals, customer component locations, A.2-16
part numbers, 1.1-1 description, 2.2-14
MCL engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
vertical plate components, illustrated parts function, 2.2-17, A.5-8
listing, 8.4-4 in optional MCL upgrade, 3.11-2
voltages, test point adjustments, table, 4.21-8 jumper settings, A.2-16
voltages, where to adjust, A.1-1 location in the Cytometer, A.2-16
MCL Bar Code Head Test, Prefinal software location, illustration, 8.2-4
description, 7.2-9 part number, 8.2-5
MCL Bar Code Test, Prefinal software MCL interlock switch
description, 7.2-9 description of operation, 4.1-2
MCL Burn In, Prefinal software MCL lifter assembly
description, 7.2-10 function, A.5-45
Error Index Numbers, 7.2-10 MCL Manual Control, Prefinal software
MCL carousel description, 7.2-12
component locations, illustration, A.5-42 sensor status, 7.2-12
MCL carousel base assembly MCL Mix Test, Prefinal software
function, A.5-45 description, 7.2-12
MCL Carousel Label, Prefinal software MCL option
description, 7.2-10 carousel components, table, A.5-43
MCL Carousel Status, Prefinal software commands, table, A.4-4
description, 7.2-11 component locations, illustration of components
response to failure, 7.2-11 accessed with covers removed, A.5-44
test sequence, 7.2-11 components accessed with covers removed,
MCL CPU card table, A.5-45
cables attached to, illustrated parts listing, 8.4-8 engineering documents, 6.1-2
component locations, A.2-15 field adjustment, MCL TERMINAL program
engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2 setup, 4.12-1
function, A.5-46 field adjustment, tools/supplies needed, 4.12-1
how to reinstall, 3.3-10, G.3-10 field adjustment, when to perform, 4.12-1
how to remove, 3.3-7, G.3-7 illustrated parts listing, 8.4-2
jumper settings, A.2-15 part number, 8.4-3
location in the Cytometer, A.2-15 sample probe adjustment, illustration, 4.12-4
location, illustration, 8.4-2 theory of operation, 2.2-17

PN 4237029G INDEX-15
INDEX

MCL Pneumatic Status, Prefinal software Memory Test, Prefinal software

description, 7.2-12 circuit cards tested, 7.2-17
response to failure, 7.2-12 description, 7.2-17
sensor status, 7.2-12 response to failure, 7.2-17
MCL POWER UP Status, Prefinal software mesh networking topology
description, 7.2-13 definition, E.1-2
response to failure, 7.2-13 illustration, E.1-2
MCL Probe Align, Prefinal software messages, error
description, 7.2-13 cause/symptom/action, table, 7.1-2
MCL probe housing Mike’s Test, Prefinal software
function, A.5-43 description, 7.2-18
MCL probe sensor and flag mixer motor
function, A.5-45 testing with Prefinal Service software, A.4-2
MCL probe slide assembly monitors
function, A.5-45 17-inch, 3.5-2, G.5-2
MCL ROM Test, Prefinal software connections on XL or XL-MCL
description, 7.2-13 Workstation, 3.5-2, G.5-2
response to failure, 7.2-13 part numbers, 8.6-3, 8.6-5
MCL sample head motherboard
function, A.5-45 AMI ATLAS PCI III description, table, B.2-2
MCL sample head sensor and flag Motor Filter card
function, A.5-45 function, A.5-45
MCL sample probe Motor Filter EMC card
function, A.5-45 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
MCL sample probe adjustment motors
illustration, 4.12-4 mixer. See mixer motor
MCL Scan Reliability, Prefinal software stepper. See stepper motor
description, 7.2-13 vortex. See vortex motor
MCL solenoid assembly mounting hardware
function, A.5-45 illustrated parts listing, 8.9-4
MCL Stepper Noise Test, Prefinal software
description, 7.2-13
response to failure, 7.2-13 N
MCL Terminal, Prefinal software ND (neutral density) filter, 2.2-7
description, 7.2-14 ND1 filter positioning knob
MCL Tube Load Error function, A.5-22
reasons for receiving, 2.2-18 Network Configuration Worksheet
MCL tube rotator assembly copy to use, C.1-2
function, A.5-46 network setup using Windows 95 or 98
MCL upgrade cable connections, 3.17-2
Cytometer upgrade, 3.11-1 defining the computer name and
installation procedures, 3.11-1 workgroup, 3.17-3
kit in black part number, 3.11-1 establishing control, 3.17-3
kit in grey part number, 3.11-1 mapping a network shared drive, 3.17-3
preparation, 3.11-1 part number for network interconnect cable
tools/supplies needed, 3.11-1 kit, 3.17-1
Universal Power Supply upgrade, 3.11-3 setting up hard drives and printers, 3.17-2
verification, 3.11-4 software installation, 3.17-1
Voltage-Specific Power Supply upgrade, 3.11-3 tools/supplies needed, 3.17-1

INDEX-16 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

networking optical alignment

802.3, E.1-1 tools/supplies needed, 4.6-1
Beckman Coulter’s implementation, E.1-1 when to perform, 4.6-1
bridges, E.1-4 optical collection area
carrier sense multiple access, E.1-5 component locations, illustration, A.5-13
collision detection, E.1-5 components, table, A.5-14
dedicated vs. non-dedicated server, E.1-5 function, A.5-6
description, E.1-1 optical filters
encoding techniques, E.1-1 BK (blocking), 2.2-7
LAN, E.1-1 BP (band pass), 2.2-7
media, E.1-1 DL (dichroic long pass), 2.2-7
repeaters, E.1-4 laser blocking (BK), 2.2-7
routers, E.1-4 ND (neutral density), 2.2-7
signals used, E.1-1 optics
topologies, bus, E.1-3 system troubleshooting, 7.3-4
topologies, description, E.1-2 optics system
topologies, mesh, E.1-2 beam shaping, description, 2.2-2
topologies, ring, E.1-4 beam shaping, illustration, 2.2-2
topologies, star, E.1-2 description, 2.2-2
WAN, E.1-4 options
neutral density (ND) filter, 2.2-7 printer, 3.5-3, G.5-3
New Board, Prefinal software OPTO DMA Test, Prefinal software
description, 7.2-18 circuit cards tested, 7.2-19
NIC description, 7.2-19
role in LANtastic Client/Server software V6.0 response to failure, 7.2-19
installation, 3.20-1 OPTO Interrupt Test, Prefinal software
noise level requirements for installation of XL or circuit cards tested, 7.2-19
XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-3 description, 7.2-19
noise level requirements for installation of XL or response to failure, 7.2-19
XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power OPTO Link Test, Prefinal software
Supply, G.1-3 circuit cards tested, 7.2-20
Noise Test and Offset, Prefinal software description, 7.2-20
circuit cards tested, 7.2-18 response to failure, 7.2-20
description, 7.2-18 Opto Transprocessor EXEM card
response to failure, 7.2-18 location on motherboard, B.2-2
non-dedicated server part number (non-EMC version), 8.1-13
definition, E.1-5 testing with Prefinal Service software, A.4-3
Note Opto Transprocessor EXEM II card
definition, 1.1-5 location on motherboard, B.2-2
testing with Prefinal Service software, A.4-3
Opto Transprocessor EXMEM card
O block diagram, 2.2-15
on-site close our component locations, A.2-17
in SVP, 5.1-6 description, 2.2-15
operating clearances engineering schematic, part
for installation of XL flow number, 6.1-1, 6.1-3
cytometer, 3.1-1, G.1-1 jumper settings, A.2-17
for installation of XL-MCL flow location in the Workstation, A.2-17
cytometer, 3.1-1, G.1-1

PN 4237029G INDEX-17
INDEX

Opto Transprocessor EXMEM II card Voltage Selector 2 card, 8.8-11, 8.8-29

component locations, A.2-18 Voltage Selector cards, 8.7-13
description, 2.2-15 PEEK tubing
engineering schematic, part function in manual sampling, A.5-40
number, 6.1-1, 6.1-3 function in MCL, A.5-40
jumper settings, A.2-18 PEEK tubing replacement
location in the Workstation, A.2-18 connections, illustration, 4.9-2
installation, 4.9-3
preparation, 4.9-1
P removal, 4.9-1
part numbers tools/supplies needed, 4.9-1
Amp/Signal Conditioner card, 8.2-5 verification, 4.9-5
Argon laser power when to perform, 4.9-1
supply, 8.1-7, 8.2-23, 8.7-13, 8.8-15, 8.8-23 with ferrule and ferrule nut, illustration, 4.9-2
Bar-Code Decoder card, 8.4-3, 8.4-11 with ferrules, illustration, 4.11-1
beamshaper, 8.1-7, 8.2-19 Pentium processor
cards, XL flow cytometer, 8.1-13 configuration, B.3-1
circuit breakers, 8.7-17 installed peripherals, B.3-1
COULTER CLENZ cleaning agent, 8.1-6 part number, 8.6-3, 8.6-5
Cyto Transputer card, 8.2-5 part numbers, 8.1-12
CYTO-TROL control cells, 8.1-6 performance specifications and characteristics
electronic manual on CD-ROM, 1.1-1 reference, 2.1-5
filters, 8.2-17 physical specifications
FlowCentre Multimedia Workstation, 8.1-9 reference, 2.1-5
Flow-Check fluorospheres, 8.1-6 pinhole assembly
Flow-Set fluorospheres, 8.1-6 description, 2.2-4
how to locate, instructions, 8.1-14 PMI
IsoFlow sheath fluid, 8.1-6 procedures, 5.2-1
issued by Oracle system, 8.1-14 tools/supplies needed, 5.2-1
lower pneumatics drawer, 8.2-36 PMT Distribution and Laser Fan Control card
MCL CPU card, 8.4-9 component locations, A.2-19
MCL CPU cards, 8.4-3 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
MCL Interface card, 8.2-5 function, A.5-14
MCL option, 8.1-7, 8.4-3 in four-color PMT upgrade, 3.12-2
not illustrated, 8.1-5 location in the Cytometer, A.2-19
online manual on CD-ROM, 8.1-11 PMT filters
optional items, supplies, tools, 8.1-9 locations in four-color PMT system,
Power Control 3 card, 8.8-13, 8.8-23, 8.8-30 illustration, 3.12-2
Power Module Control card, 8.7-13 PMT Voltage Control, Prefinal software
power supplies, XL flow cytometer, 8.1-8 circuit cards tested, 7.2-21
power supplies, XL-MCL flow cytometer, 8.1-8 description, 7.2-21
Printers, 8.1-13 response to failure, 7.2-21
schematics, engineering, 6.1-1, 6.1-2, 6.1-3 PMT1
Sensor card, 8.2-9 function, A.5-15
software, 8.1-11 PMT3
Solenoid Power Distribution card, 8.2-37 function, A.5-14
System Interface card, 8.2-5 PMT4
SYSTEMII system software, 3.8-1, G.8-1 function, A.5-14
Trans Data Acquisition card, 8.2-5
tubing, 8.1-11

INDEX-18 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

Pneumatic Sensor Test, Prefinal software location in EMC version of Voltage-Specific

circuit cards tested, 7.2-21 Power Supply, A.2-22
description, 7.2-21 location in Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
response to failure, 7.2-22 illustration, 2.3-6
pneumatic/hydraulic layout power on/off switches
engineering schematic, part on bar-code Printer, illustration, 3.14-2
number, 6.1-1, 6.1-2 power supplies
pneumatics +15 Vdc voltage verification and adjustment,
components, illustration of, 7.5-1 procedures, 4.21-5
fluidic components, illustration, 7.5-1 +24 Vdc voltage verification and adjustment,
system troubleshooting, 7.3-5 procedures, 4.21-1
power +5 Vdc voltage verification and adjustment,
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL procedures, 4.21-4
with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-2 -15 Vdc voltage verification and adjustment,
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL procedures, 4.21-5
with Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.1-2 linear, illustration in Universal Power
Power Control 3 card Supply, 2.4-20
cables attached to, illustrated parts linear, illustration in Voltage-Specific Power
listing, 8.8-30 Supply, 2.3-4
component locations, A.2-20 location, illustration, 8.7-11
description, 2.4-25 MCL voltage verification and adjustment,
functions, 2.4-25 procedures, 4.21-7
interface cable, 2.4-25 part numbers, 8.1-8, 8.7-11
interface cable, laser control signals, 2.4-26 part numbers in Universal Power Supply, 8.8-21
interface cable, pin functions, part numbers, MCL, 8.1-8, 8.7-11
illustration, 2.4-26 part numbers, MCL/MPL in Universal Power
location in Universal Power Supply, A.2-20 Supply, 8.8-21
location in Universal Power Supply, part numbers, XL flow cytometer, 8.1-8
illustration, 2.4-7 part numbers, XL-MCL flow cytometer, 8.1-8
part number, 8.8-13, 8.8-23 PMT1 HV function, A.5-12
power cords PMT2 HV function, A.5-12
how to tell the difference between 100-120 Vac PMT3 HV function, A.5-11
and 220-240 Vac, illustration, 3.6-6 PMT4 HV function, A.5-11
power down replacement, preparation, 4.19-1
instrument using EXPO32 ADC software, 4.1-7 replacement, procedures, 4.19-1
instrument using SYSTEM II software, 4.1-4 replacement, tools/supplies needed, 4.19-1
Power Module Control card replacement, when to perform, 4.19-1
component locations, A.2-21 replacement/adjustment in Universal Power
engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2 Supply, 4.20-1
location in non-EMC version of Voltage-Specific troubleshooting, 7.3-5
Power Supply, A.2-21 voltage verification and adjustment,
location, illustration, 8.7-2, 8.7-16 tools/supplies needed, 4.21-1
part number, 8.7-13 voltage verification and adjustment, when to
Power Module Control II card perform, 4.21-1
component locations, A.2-22 Power Supply module
description, 2.3-8 anchor illustration for illustrated parts, 8.1-2
engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2 functional overview, 2.1-3
interface cable, description, 2.3-8 interchangeability, 2.1-5
interface cable, laser control signals, 2.3-9 voltages, where to adjust, 4.21-1
interface cable, pin functions, illustration, 2.3-9

PN 4237029G INDEX-19
INDEX

See also Voltage-Specific Power Supply or +24 Vdc power supply voltage verification and
Universal Power Supply, as applicable adjustment, 4.21-1
power up +5 Vdc power supply voltage verification and
instrument using EXPO32 ADC software, 4.1-7 adjustment, 4.21-4
instrument using SYSTEM II software, 4.1-4 -15 Vdc power supply voltage verification and
powerup test adjustment, 4.21-5
in SVP, 5.1-2 acquisition, CV analysis and carryover
Prefinal Service software check, 5.1-3
diskette part number, 4.2-1, 4.16-1, 7.2-1 Amp/Signal Conditioner card calibration in
guidelines for using, 4.2-3 four-color PMT upgrade, 3.12-3
in preparing instrument for shipment, 4.16-1 Amp/Signal Conditioner card replacement
in Trans Data Acquisition card replacement and/or calibration, 4.15-1
and/or calibration, 4.14-2 Argon laser head replacement in Cytometer with
installation/operation, procedures using Universal Power Supply, 4.4-4
EXPO32 ADC software, 4.2-2 Argon laser head replacement in Cytometer with
installation/operation, procedures using Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.3-4
SYSTEM II software, 4.2-1 Argon laser power supply replacement in
tests available, table, A.4-2 Universal Power Supply, 4.4-2
tools/supplies needed, 4.2-1, 7.2-1 Argon laser power supply replacement in
pre-site inspection Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.3-2
inspection report for installation of XL or Argon laser, head and/or power supply
XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-4 replacement on instrument with Universal
inspection report for installation of XL or Power Supply, 4.4-1
XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power Argon laser, head and/or power supply
Supply, G.1-4 replacement on instrument with
list of requirements for installation of XL or Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 4.3-1
XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-1 bar-code hand-held scanner installation, 3.15-1
list of requirements for installation of XL or bar-code Printer installation testing, 3.14-4
XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power bar-code Printer label tear-off position
Supply, G.1-1 adjustment, 3.14-4
PRESSURE quick connect bar-code Printer media calibration, 3.14-3
function in the Cytometer, A.5-30 bar-code Printer ribbon replacement, 3.14-5
PRIME push-button bar-code Printer thermal head
function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-38 adjustment, 3.14-5
function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-34 bar-code Printer top-of-label position
printer adjustment, 3.14-5
on XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power bar-code scanner EEPROM custom
Supply, 3.5-3 programming, 4.24-1
on XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power beamshaper replacement and/or
Supply, G.5-3 alignment, 4.5-1
Printers carousel tube-position sensor
part numbers, 8.1-13 adjustment, 4.12-1
probe air cylinder carryover test, 4.8-1
illustrated parts listing, 8.4-7 connecting bar-code Printer, 3.14-4
probe up/down air cylinder connecting cables on XL or XL-MCL with
function, A.5-45 Universal Power Supply, 3.6-1
procedures connecting cables on XL or XL-MCL with
+15 Vdc power supply voltage verification and Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.6-1
adjustment, 4.21-5 connecting tubing, G.7-1

INDEX-20 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

connecting tubing on XL or XL-MCL with operational checks for XL or XL-MCL with

Universal Power Supply, 3.7-1 Universal Power Supply installation, 3.9-1
connecting tubing on XL or XL-MCL with operational checks for XL or XL-MCL with
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.7-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply
Cytometer installation as part of XL or XL-MCL installation, G.9-1
with Universal Power Supply PEEK tubing replacement, 4.9-1
installation, 3.3-1 PMI, 5.2-1
Cytometer installation as part of XL or XL-MCL PMT operational alignment in four-color PMT
with Voltage-Specific Power Supply upgrade, 3.12-3
installation, G.3-1 power supply replacement, 4.19-1, 4.20-1
editing config.sys and startnet.bat files for power up tests, 5.1-2
LANtastic Client/Server software V6.0 Prefinal Service software installation/operation
installation, 3.20-2 using EXPO32 ADC software, 4.2-2
flow cell and beamshaper replacement and/or Prefinal Service software installation/operation
alignment, 4.5-1 using SYSTEM II software, 4.2-1
flow cell replacement and/or alignment, 4.5-1 preparing instrument for shipment, 4.16-1
FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation re-imaging FlowCentre computers, 4.22-1
upgrade, 3.13-1 reverse/shorted ground/neutral test, 4.18-2
FS mask alignment, 4.6-2 sample and sheath sensor calibration, 4.7-1
general instructions, 4.1-3 segmenting valve cleaning, 4.11-1
guidelines for service and repair, 4.1-1 Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card
how to locate a cover removal and reinstallation installation, 3.16-1
procedure, 4.25-1 sheath pressure/sample station vacuum
initial setup of bar-code Printer, 3.14-1 calibration, 4.10-1
installation summary for XL or XL-MCL with static test, 5.1-1
Universal Power Supply, 3.10-1, G.10-1 SVP, 5.1-1
instructions for using cover removal and Sybase Client/Server SQL software
reinstallation procedures, 4.25-1 installation, 3.21-1
instrument performance verification, 4.1-3 SYSTEM II software installation, 3.8-1, G.8-1
instrument Power Down/Power Up using testing Computer Workstation, 5.1-6
EXPO32 ADC software, 4.1-7 three-wire circuit analyzer test, 4.18-1
instrument Power Down/Power Up using tool requirements for service and repair, 4.1-3
SYSTEM II software, 4.1-4 Trans Data Acquisition card replacement and/or
instrument shutdown, 4.17-1 calibration, 4.14-1
LANtastic Client/Server software V6.0 universal CD-ROM driver setup, 4.23-1
installation, 3.20-1 Universal Power Supply installation, 3.4-1
LANtastic Client/Server software V7.0 Voltage-Specific Power Supply
installation, MS-DOS, 3.19-2 installation, G.4-1
LANtastic Client/Server software V7.0 vortexer foot assembly replacement, 4.13-1
installation, Windows 95, 3.19-1 Workstation installation on XL or XL-MCL with
LANtastic Client/Server software V8.0 Universal Power Supply, 3.5-1
installation, 3.18-1 Workstation installation on XL or XL-MCL with
LANtastic V8.0 software, Client setup, 3.18-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.5-1
LANtastic V8.0 software, Server setup, 3.18-5 protocols
laser beam steering in optical alignment, 4.6-1 Acquire Fluorospheres, table, A.3-2
MCL power supply voltage verification and carryover test HIGH/LOW, table, 4.8-1
adjustment, 4.21-7 CHANNEL 500, 4.6-2
MCL sample probe adjustment, 4.12-4 Channel 500, table, A.3-1
MCL TERMINAL program setup, 4.12-1 LIN/LOG Switch Point 1 Test,
MCL upgrade, 3.11-1 table, 4.15-5, A.3-1

PN 4237029G INDEX-21
INDEX

Pulse RAMP Test, Prefinal software unloading and moving, 3.1-3

components tested, 7.2-22 requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL with
description, 7.2-22 Voltage-Specific Power Supply
response to failure, 7.2-22 ambient temperature, G.1-3
assistance by customer, G.1-4
compliance with pre-site inspection, G.2-1
Q condition of shipping cartons, G.2-1
QD10 customer training, G.2-1
function, A.5-49 environmental, table, G.1-3
QD11 fan clearance, G.1-1
function, A.5-49 heat dissipation into room, G.1-3
QD13 humidity, G.1-3
function, A.5-20 noise level, G.1-3
QD14 operating clearances, table, G.1-1
function, A.5-20 optional printer or second monitor, G.2-1
QD35 pallet jack, G.1-3
function, A.5-28 power, G.1-2
space, G.1-1
R supplies, G.2-1
system power, table, G.1-2
reagent drawer
temperature stability, G.1-3
component locations, illustration, A.5-27
unloading and moving, G.1-3
components, table, A.5-28
reverse/shorted ground/neutral test
rear panel
procedure, 4.18-2
component locations, illustration, A.5-29
tools/supplies needed, 4.18-2
components, table, A.5-30
right side
re-imaging FlowCentre computers
component locations, illustration, A.5-16
tools/supplies needed, 4.22-1
ring networking topology
repeater
definition, E.1-4
definition, E.1-4
illustration, E.1-4
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL with
ROM Test, Prefinal software
Universal Power Supply
circuit card tested, 7.2-22
ambient temperature, 3.1-3
description, 7.2-22
assistance by customer, 3.1-4
response to failure, 7.2-22
compliance with pre-site inspection, 3.2-1
router
condition of shipping cartons, 3.2-1
definition, E.1-4
customer training, 3.2-1
Run Beads, Prefinal software
environmental, table, 3.1-3
description, 7.2-22
fan clearance, 3.1-1
RUN push-button and indicator
heat dissipation into room, 3.1-3
function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-37
humidity, 3.1-3
function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-33
noise level, 3.1-3
operating clearances for Cytometer, table, 3.1-1
optional printer or second monitor, 3.2-1 S
pallet jack, 3.1-3 safety interlock interconnect
power, 3.1-2 engineering schematic, part
space, 3.1-1 number, 6.1-1, 6.1-2
supplies, 3.2-1 safety precautions
system power, table, 3.1-2 biological, 1.2-2
temperature stability, 3.1-3 during segmenting valve cleaning, 4.11-1

INDEX-22 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

during troubleshooting, 1.2-9, 4.9-1 Segment Valve Test, Prefinal software

electrical, 1.2-1 description, 7.2-23
hazardous radiation exposure warning, 1.2-2 response to failure, 7.2-23
instrument covers and interlocks, 1.2-1 segmenting pads
instrument doors, covers, and in initial installation of
panels, 1.2-1, 4.25-1 Cytometer, 3.3-12, G.3-11
interlocks, 1.2-1 in PEEK tubing replacement, 4.9-3
laser warning labels, segmenting valve
illustration, 1.2-5, 1.2-6, 1.2-7, 1.2-8, 1.2-9 assembly, illustrated parts listing, 8.2-32
risk of damage to electronic cleaning the shaft, 4.11-3
components, 4.25-60, 4.25-73, 4.25-75 cleaning, preparation, 4.11-1
risk of electric shock, 1.2-1 cleaning, segmenting pad installation, 4.11-3
risk of personal injury, 1.2-4 cleaning, segmenting pad removal, 4.11-1
when working near an exposed laser, 1.2-2 cleaning, tools/supplies needed, 4.11-1
sample and sheath sensor calibration cleaning, verification, 4.11-4
operational verification, 4.7-4 cleaning, when to perform, 4.11-1
procedure, 4.7-1 component locations, illustration, A.5-39
role of System Interface card, 4.7-2 components, table, A.5-40
tools/supplies needed, 4.7-1 front air cylinder function, A.5-40
when to perform, 4.7-1 front pad function, A.5-40
sample and waste connect panel front segmenting pad connections,
function in an XL flow cytometer, A.5-38 illustration, 4.11-2
function in an XL-MCL flow cytometer, A.5-34 illustration, pad connections, 4.11-2
sample flow knob function, A.5-40
psi selections, 2.2-12, 4.7-4, A.5-58 middle air cylinder function, A.5-41
Sample Leak Test, Prefinal software middle pad function, A.5-40
components tested, 7.2-23 part number, 8.2-32
description, 7.2-23 rear air cylinder function, A.5-41
response to failure, 7.2-23 rear pad function, A.5-40
sample pressure regulator rear segmenting pad connections,
function, A.5-20 illustration, 4.11-2
sample probe adjustment Sensor card
in MCL option field adjustment, 4.12-4 component locations, A.2-23
schematics, engineering description, 2.2-16
for Cytometer, 6.1-1 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
for MCL option, 6.1-2 function, A.5-20
for Universal Power Supply, 6.1-2 location in the Cytometer, A.2-23
for Voltage-Specific Power Supply, 6.1-2 location, illustration, 8.2-6
for Workstation, 6.1-3 part number, 8.2-9
location of latest version, 6.1-1 sensors
part numbers, 6.1-1, 6.1-3 MCL head sensor, part number, 8.1-7, 8.4-5
part numbers included in this manual, 6.1-1 XL-MCL flow cytometer, location,
recommended for troubleshooting, 6.1-1, 6.1-3 illustration, 8.1-7, 8.4-3
SCOPE A connector serial name plate
function, A.5-30 on UPS, 2.4-4
SCOPE B connector Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card
function, A.5-30 in bar-code Printer installation, 3.14-4
Scope Test, Prefinal software part number, 8.1-13
description, 7.2-23

PN 4237029G INDEX-23
INDEX

Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card installation sheath pressure regulator

CMOS settings, table, 3.16-2 function, A.5-18
jumper settings, illustration, 3.16-1 sheath pressure/sample station vacuum calibration
part number, 3.16-1 procedure, 4.10-1
preparation, 3.16-1 tools/supplies needed, 4.10-1
procedure, 3.16-1 verification, 4.10-1
tools/supplies needed, 3.16-1 when to perform, 4.10-1
verification, 3.16-2 side covers
servers removing shipping screws, 3.3-2, G.3-2
types, E.1-5 side scatter diode
service and repair procedures function, A.5-25
instrument Power Down/Power Up using side scatter. See SS
EXPO32 ADC software, 4.1-7 SN6
instrument Power Down/Power Up using function, A.5-18
SYSTEM II software, 4.1-4 SN7
Set N Transputers, Prefinal software function, A.5-18
description, 7.2-23 SN8
setup files examples function, A.5-19
client flow cytometer, autoexec.bat, D.1-1 SN9
client flow cytometer, config.sys, D.1-1 function, A.5-19
client flow cytometer, startnet.bat, D.1-1 software
client flow cytometer, XL_graph.cng, D.1-2 part numbers, 8.1-11
file server, autoexec.bat, D.2-1 SYSTEMII, 3.8-1, G.8-1
file server, config.sys, D.2-1 SYSTEMII installation, 3.8-1, G.8-1
file server, startnet.bat, D.2-1 Solenoid Control card
sheath container description, 2.2-16
function, A.5-28 solenoid manifold
how to fill during installation of XL or XL-MCL function, A.5-49
with Universal Power Supply, 3.3-14 Solenoid Power Distribution card
how to fill during installation of XL or XL-MCL component locations, A.2-24
with Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.3-13 description, 2.2-16
other names, A.5-28 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
sheath filter function, A.5-49
how to purge air bubbles, 3.9-1, G.9-1 location in the Cytometer, A.2-24
illustrated parts listing, 8.2-26 location, illustration, 8.2-36
location of connector and vent port, part number, 8.2-37
illustration, 3.3-14, G.3-13 sound reduction
vent connections, illustrated parts listing, 8.2-28 enhancements in the Universal Power
vent connections, illustrated parts listing, Supply, 2.4-27
table, 8.2-29 overview of enhancements, 2.4-27
sheath flow placement of sound guard foam in the Universal
setting, 2.2-12 Power Supply, illustration, 2.4-28
sheath fluid specifications
container, illustrated parts listing, 8.2-30 802.3 network standard, E.1-5
part number, 3.2-1, G.2-1 802.3 network standard, table, E.2-1
sheath liquid filter bar-code, F.1-1
function, A.5-28 leakage current, 2.1-6
sheath low indicator performance, 2.1-5
how to read, table, 7.1-1 physical, 2.1-5

INDEX-24 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

SS Sybase client
description, 2.2-7 minimum requirements, B.5-1
SS sensor Sybase Client/Server SQL software installation
function, A.5-25 client setup, 3.21-1
star networking topology minimum requirements, B.5-1
definition, E.1-2 part number for database server software, 3.21-1
illustration, E.1-3 procedure, 3.21-1
startnet.bat file server setup, 3.21-2
client flow cytometer setup file example, D.1-1 software and hardware validation, 3.21-3
editing for LANtastic Client/Server software tools/supplies needed, 3.21-1
V6.0 installation, 3.20-2 Sybase database server
editing for LANtastic Client/Server software minimum requirements, B.5-1
V7.0 installation, MS-DOS, 3.19-3 Sybase network
file server setup file example, D.2-1 minimum requirements, B.5-1
static test symbology table
in SVP, 5.1-1 for bar-code hand-held scanner, 3.15-1
stepper motor System Interface card
description, 2.2-17 block diagram, 2.2-12
summary component locations, A.2-25
installation of XL or XL-MCL with Universal description, 2.2-12
Power Supply, 3.10-1 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1
installation of XL or XL-MCL with function, A.5-8
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.10-1 in sample and sheath sensor calibration, 4.7-2
SVP jumper settings, A.2-25
in Amp/Signal Conditioner card replacement location in the Cytometer, A.2-25
and/or calibration, 4.15-6 location, illustration, 8.2-4
in FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation part number, 8.2-5
upgrade, 3.13-5 switch settings, A.2-25
in four-color PMT upgrade, 3.12-3 System Parameter Test, Prefinal software
in optical alignment, 4.6-4 description, 7.2-23
in optional MCL upgrade, 3.11-4 system pressure adjustment knob
in PEEK tubing replacement, 4.9-5 illustrated parts listing, 8.8-7
in PMI, 5.2-2 system pressure gauge
in Prefinal Service software installation and illustrated parts listing, 8.8-6
operation, 4.2-4 system vacuum gauge
in sample and sheath sensor calibration, 4.7-6 illustrated parts listing, 8.8-9
in sheath pressure/sample station vacuum SYSTEMII software
calibration, 4.10-1 installation, tools/supplies needed, 3.8-1, G.8-1
in Trans Data Acquisition card replacement
and/or calibration, 4.14-4
in XL or XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply T
installation, 3.9-6 T805 Test, Prefinal software
in XL or XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power circuit cards tested, 7.2-24
Supply installation, G.9-5 description, 7.2-24
procedures, 5.1-1 response to failure, 7.2-24
tools/supplies needed, 5.1-1 temperature
switches effect on XL or XL-MCL
bar-code Printer. See bar-code Printer performance, 3.1-3, G.1-3
DIP. See DIP switches recommendation when operating an XL or
power on/off. See power on/off switch XL-MCL with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-3

PN 4237029G INDEX-25
INDEX

recommendation when operating an XL or replacement and/or calibration, tools/supplies

XL-MCL with Voltage-Specific Power needed, 4.14-1
Supply, G.1-3 replacement and/or calibration,
temperature stability verification, 4.14-4
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL replacement and/or calibration, when to
with Universal Power Supply, 3.1-3 perform, 4.14-1
requirements for installation of XL or XL-MCL testing with Prefinal Service software, A.4-1
with Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.1-3 Transient Absorber EMC card
Temperature Test, Prefinal software engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
description, 7.2-24 Transient Absorber EMC card. See FC 500
test tube Transient Voltage Suppressor card
part number, 4.16-1 Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card. See FC 500
three-wire circuit analyzer Transient Voltage Suppressor card
part number, 4.18-1 transputers
test, limitations, 4.18-1 description, 2.2-15
test, procedure, 4.18-1 troubleshooting
test, tools/supplies needed, 4.18-1 acquisition system flowchart, 7.4-1
test, troubleshooting table, 4.18-1 for three-wire circuit analyzer test, 4.18-1
tie wraps general information, table, 7.3-2
illustrated parts listing, 8.9-4 initial checks, 7.3-1
tools isolating problem areas, table, 7.3-1
part numbers, 8.1-11 lasers, 7.3-3
Top Panel Display 2 card no sample flow problems, flowchart, 7.5-2
component locations, A.2-26 optics, 7.3-4
engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1 pneumatics, 7.3-5
function, A.5-57 power supplies, 7.3-5
location in the Cytometer, A.2-26 problems, how to isolate, 7.3-1
training. See customer training system electronics, 7.3-3
Trans Data Acquisition card tubing
block diagram, 2.2-11 part numbers, 8.1-11
calibration, 4.14-2 waste container (4 L) connections to Universal
component locations, A.2-27 Power Supply, illustration, 3.7-2
description, 2.2-11 waste container (4 L) connections to
engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-1 Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
function, A.5-8 illustration, G.7-2
jumper settings, A.2-27 waste container (4L) connections to XL or
location in the Cytometer, A.2-27 XL-MCL Cytometer,
location, illustration, 8.2-4 illustration, 3.7-2, G.7-2
offset adjustment, 4.14-1
part number, 8.2-5
relationship to Amp/Signal Conditioner U
card, 2.2-11 universal CD-ROM driver setup
relationship to Cyto Transputer card, 2.2-11 driver installation, 4.23-1
replacement, 4.14-1 preparation, 4.23-1
replacement and/or calibration, tools/supplies needed, 4.23-1
preparation, 4.14-1 Universal Power Supply
replacement and/or calibration, 30-psi pressure distribution, 2.4-30
procedures, 4.14-1 anchor illustration for component locations and
functions, A.7-2
back cover, removal and reinstallation, 4.25-72

INDEX-26 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

Breaker card. See Breaker card linear power supply locations,

cable cover, removal and reinstallation, 4.25-68 illustration, 2.4-20
cable harness for de power supplies, illustrated location of foam shipping blocks,
parts listing, 8.8-24 illustration, 3.4-2
cables in top compartment front area, illustrated low voltage configuration, example, 2.4-15
parts listing, 8.8-26 main circuit breaker location, illustration, 2.4-2
changes in air flow with sound guard main circuit breaker, description, 2.4-3
system, 2.4-29 main components, 2.4-1
changes in label placement, 2.4-4 monitoring supply voltages, 2.4-18
changes in the left-side compartment, 2.4-22 new back cover and cable cover, 2.4-8
changes to the back, 2.4-5 new features, 2.4-1
changes to the front door, 2.4-2 overview, 2.4-1
changes to the lower front panel, 2.4-4 placement of sound guard foam,
changes to the rear panel, 2.4-6 illustration, 2.4-28
changes to the upper front panel, 2.4-3 Power Control 3 card. See Power Control 3 card
circuit breaker usage, table, 2.4-19 power distribution, block diagram, 2.4-33
component locations on front panel, power distribution, description, 2.4-32
illustration, 2.4-2 power ON/OFF switch location,
components in the left-side compartment, illustration, 2.4-7
illustration, 2.4-22 rear panel components, illustrated parts
cooling fans, description, 2.4-21 listing, 8.8-22
description, A.7-1 rear panel, components, table, A.7-20
engineering documents, 6.1-2 rear panel, illustration, A.7-19
enhancements in ventilation, 2.4-9 rear view with back cover removed, 2.4-7
exterior covers, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-32 right side, components, table, A.7-17
front door open, components, table, A.7-5 right side, illustration, A.7-16
front door open, illustration, A.7-4 right-side compartment, illustrated parts
front door, open and close, 4.25-67 listing, 8.8-20
front panel, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-2 sample pressure distribution, 2.4-31
front view with door open, illustration, 2.4-2 sheath pressure distribution, 2.4-31
high voltage configuration, example, 2.4-16 sound reduction feature. See sound reduction
in initial instrument installation, 3.4-1 system power distribution, 2.4-32
inside upper front panel, illustrated parts system power usage, description, 2.4-36
listing, 8.8-10 system power, block diagram, 2.4-33
interior covers, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-34 Transient Voltage Suppressor 2 card. See FC 500
interlock bypass switch, 2.4-20 Transient Voltage Suppressor card
interlock switch, description of operation, 4.1-2 UPS pneumatics drawer, components,
internal changes, top compartment, 2.4-11 illustration, A.7-8
laser power distribution, 2.4-32 UPS pneumatics drawer, components,
laser power distribution, description, 2.4-37 table, A.7-9
laser start up sequence, description, 2.4-37 UPS pneumatics drawer. See UPS pneumatics
left side components, illustrated parts drawer
listing, 8.8-12 vacuum distribution, 2.4-32
left side, components, table, A.7-13 voltage selection. See UPS voltage selection
left side, illustration, A.7-12 Voltage Selector 2 card. See Voltage Selector 2
left-side compartment, illustrated parts card
listing, 8.8-13 See also Power Supply module
left-side view, 2.4-22 unpacking
linear power supply descriptions, 2.4-21 Cytometer during XL or XL-MCL with Universal
Power Supply installation, 3.3-1

PN 4237029G INDEX-27
INDEX

Cytometer during XL or XL-MCL with how to make the proper selection,

Voltage-Specific Power Supply detailed, 2.4-14
installation, G.3-1 low voltage configuration, description, 2.4-15
Universal Power Supply during XL or XL-MCL low voltage configuration, illustration, 2.4-15
installation, 3.4-1 manual selection during installation, 2.4-11
Voltage-Specific Power Supply during XL or risk of damage if selection is incorrect, 2.4-11
XL-MCL installation, G.4-1 role of Breaker card, 2.4-12
upgrades role of Voltage Selector 2 card, 2.4-12
bar-code hand-held scanner option. See bar-code Voltage Selector 2 card mounted to Breaker card,
hand-held scanner illustration, 2.4-13
bar-code printer option. See bar-code Printer
EXPO32 software option. See EXPO32 ADC
software installation V
FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation. See VACUUM quick connect
FlowCentre II Multimedia Workstation function in the Cytometer, A.5-30
upgrade vacuum regulator
four-color PMT. See four-color PMT upgrade function, A.5-19
LANtastic client/server software option. See vacuum trap
LANtastic client/server software V8.0 illustrated parts listing, 8.8-4
installation (V7.0 or V6.0, if applicable) Valve Burn In, Prefinal software
MCL option. See MCL upgrade description, 7.2-24
network setup using Microsoft Windows 95 or Valve Control, Prefinal software
98. See network setup using Windows 95 or circuit card tested, 7.2-25
98 description, 7.2-25
Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card option. See response to failure, 7.2-25
Serial/Parallel Adapter Interface card Valve Sequence, Prefinal software
installation description, 7.2-26
Sybase Client/Server SQL software option. See VL0
Sybase Client/Server SQL software function, A.5-50
installation VL1
upper pneumatics drawer function, A.5-51
brackets and fittings, illustrated parts VL10
listing, 8.2-11 function, A.5-52
illustrated parts listing, 8.2-6, 8.2-7 VL11
part number, 8.1-9, 8.2-7 function, A.5-52
quick disconnects, illustrated parts VL12
listing, 8.2-13 function, A.5-52
UPS pneumatics drawer VL13
components, illustration, A.7-8 function, A.5-52
components, table, A.7-9 VL14
description, 2.4-23 function, A.5-50
left-side view, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-16 VL15
new component descriptions, 2.4-23 function, A.5-50
removal and reinstallation, 4.25-75 VL16
right-side view, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-18 function, A.5-50
UPS voltage selection VL17
high voltage configuration, description, 2.4-16 function, A.5-50
high voltage configuration, illustration, 2.4-16 VL18
function, A.5-49

INDEX-28 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

VL19 230/240 Vac configuration in Universal Power

function, A.5-49 Supply, 3.4-4
VL2 during XL or XL-MCL installation with
function, A.5-51 Universal Power Supply, 3.4-3
VL20 shipping location of voltage select cable,
function, A.5-28, A.5-49 illustration, 3.4-3
VL21 Voltage Selector 2 and Breaker cards,
function, A.5-19 illustration, 3.4-4
illustrated parts listing, 8.2-12 Voltage Selector 2 card
VL22 cables attached, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-28
function, A.5-19 component locations, A.2-31
illustrated parts listing, 8.2-8, 8.2-10, 8.2-50 location in the Universal Power Supply,
VL3 illustration, 2.4-22
function, A.5-51 location in Universal Power Supply, A.2-30
VL30, VL31, VL32 part number, 8.8-11, 8.8-29
illustrated parts listing, 8.7-15 Voltage Selector card
VL33 component locations, A.2-29
function, A.5-17 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
VL4 location in Voltage-Specific Power
function, A.5-51 Supply, A.2-28
VL5 location in Voltage-Specific Power Supply,
function, A.5-51 illustration, 2.3-6
VL6 location, illustration, 8.7-12
function, A.5-51 part numbers, 8.7-13
VL7 Voltage Supply Monitor card
function, A.5-51 component locations, A.2-33
VL8 engineering schematic, part number, 6.1-2
function, A.5-52 location in Power Supply module, A.2-32
VL9 voltages
function, A.5-52 Cytometer, where to adjust, A.1-1
VME Addr Bus Test, Prefinal software MCL, where to adjust, A.1-1
circuit cards tested, 7.2-26 Power Supply module, where to adjust, 4.21-1
description, 7.2-26 Voltage-Specific Power Supply
response to failure, 7.2-26 anchor illustration for component locations and
VME Data Bus Test, Prefinal software functions, A.6-2
circuit cards tested, 7.2-27 block diagram, 2.3-7
description, 7.2-26 circuit breaker locations, illustration, 2.3-13
response to failure, 7.2-27 circuit breakers location, illustration, 2.3-3
voltage select cable circuit breakers, location, 2.3-5
description, 3.4-3 cooling fan, description, 2.3-5
role in voltage selection, 3.4-4 description, A.6-1
shipping location, 3.4-3 engineering documents, 6.1-2
voltage selection front door open, components, table, A.6-5
100 Vac configuration in Universal Power front door open, illustration, A.6-4
Supply, 3.4-4 front panel component locations,
120 Vac configuration in Universal Power illustration, 2.3-2
Supply, 3.4-4 front view, illustration, 2.3-2
220 Vac configuration in Universal Power in initial instrument installation, G.4-1
Supply, 3.4-4 interface harness, 2.3-2
interlock bypass switch, 2.3-4

PN 4237029G INDEX-29
INDEX

left side, components, table, A.6-10 warning

left side, illustrated parts listing, 8.7-12, 8.7-13 laser exposure, 1.2-2
left side, illustration, A.6-9 waste chamber
left-side compartment, description, 2.3-6 function, A.5-54
left-side view, illustration, 2.3-6 Waste Chamber Full Test, Prefinal software
linear power supply locations, illustration, 2.3-4 components tested, 7.2-27
linear power supply, descriptions, 2.3-5 description, 7.2-27
location of foam shipping blocks, response to failure, 7.2-27
illustration, G.4-2 waste chamber sensor
main components, 2.3-2 function, A.5-54
placement, 2.3-2 waste container
power distribution, description, 2.3-7 connections (4 L), 3.7-2, G.7-2
Power Module Control II card flow illustrated parts listing, 8.7-22
diagram, 2.3-8 tubing connections to XL or XL-MCL
power ON/OFF switch location, Cytometer, illustration, 3.7-2, G.7-2
illustration, 2.3-3, 2.3-13 waste container on Universal Power Supply
rear component locations, illustrated parts listing, 8.8-36
illustration, 2.3-3, 2.3-13 waste full indicator
rear panel, components, table, A.6-16 how to read, table, 7.1-1
rear panel, illustration, A.6-15 waste manifold
rear view, illustration, 2.3-3, 2.3-13 function, A.5-17
rear, illustrated parts listing, 8.7-2, 8.7-16 WASTE quick connect
right side view, illustration, 2.3-4 function, A.5-30
right side, components, table, A.6-13 water trap
right side, illustrated parts listing, 8.7-11 illustrated parts listing, 8.8-5
right side, illustration, A.6-12 water trap filter
Voltage Supply Monitor card. See Voltage Supply function, A.5-17
Monitor card worksheets
See also Power Supply module Field Engineer, copy to use, C.1-1
vortex motor network configuration, copy to use, C.1-2
operational commands, A.4-4 Workstation
vortexer foot assembly ac power connections on an XL or XL-MCL with
components, illustration, 4.13-2 Universal Power Supply, 3.5-3
location, illustration, 4.13-2 ac power connections on an XL or XL-MCL with
replacement, 4.13-2 Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.5-3
vortexer foot assembly replacement component layout may vary, 2.5-2
components, illustration, 4.13-2 configuration for FlowCentre II Multimedia
installation, 4.13-2 computer, B.1-1
preparation, 4.13-1 engineering documents, 6.1-3
removal, 4.13-1 FlowCentre II computer configuration, B.2-1
tools/supplies needed, 4.13-1 illustrated parts listing, 8.6-2, 8.6-4
verification, 4.13-3 installation on an XL or XL-MCL with Universal
when to replace, 4.13-1 Power Supply, 3.5-1
keyboard connection on an XL or XL-MCL with
Universal Power Supply, 3.5-2
W keyboard connection on an XL or XL-MCL with
WAN Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.5-2
definition, E.1-4 monitor connections on XL or XL-MCL with
WARNING Universal Power Supply, 3.5-2
definition, 1.1-4

INDEX-30 PN 4237029G
 INDEX

monitor connections on XL or XL-MCL with

Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.5-2
mouse connection on an XL or XL-MCL with
Universal Power Supply, 3.5-2
mouse connection on an XL or XL-MCL with
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.5-2
part number for FlowCentre II
Multimedia, 3.13-1
procedures for FlowCentre II Multimedia
upgrade, 3.13-1
unpacking during an XL or XL-MCL with
Universal Power Supply, 3.5-1
unpacking during an XL or XL-MCL with
Voltage-Specific Power Supply, G.5-1

X
XL flow cytometer
standard system, description, 2.1-1
XL_graph.cng file
client flow cytometer setup file example, D.1-2
XL-MCL flow cytometer
components, 2.2-17
system description, 2.1-2
XL-supported networking
AUI media, E.1-1
baseband, E.1-1
coaxial media, E.1-1
Ethernet Manchester Encoding Scheme, E.1-1
twisted pair media, E.1-1
XY Display, Prefinal software
description, 7.2-27

PN 4237029G INDEX-31
INDEX

INDEX-32 PN 4237029G
 TRADEMARKS

The BECKMAN COULTER logo, COULTER, COULTER CLENZ, CYTO-TROL, EPICS,

EXPO, Flow-Check, FlowCentre, IsoFlow, SYSTEM II, XL and XL-MCL are trademarks of
Beckman Coulter, Inc.

All other trademarks, service marks, products, or services are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

PN 4237029G